JP7461590B1 - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

[Problem] To improve maintainability [Solution] A door lock mechanism has a housing that can house a locking part, and when the locking part and the locked part engage, the locking part goes from an unlocked state to a locked state, and a certain metal piece can be inserted into a slit-like space formed by the locking part in the unlocked state and the inner wall of the housing, and in the certain state, even if the door body is tried to be closed, the certain metal piece comes into contact with the locked part before the locking part, and the door body is maintained in an open state without being locked, and in the certain state, the door sensor does not detect the closed state of the door body, and the slit-like space that can bring the door into the certain state is formed on one of the left and right faces of the locking part, and the part of the locked part that the locking part comes into contact with is different from the part of the locked part that the certain metal piece comes into contact with, and the certain metal piece is a setting key, a game medal, or a 500 yen coin. [Selected drawing] Fig. 264

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pinball gaming machines (pachinko machines), reel gaming machines (slot machines), enclosed gaming machines, or medal-less slot machines.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, for example, a slot machine has been known as one of gaming machines (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2005-296354 A

In this type of game machine, it is desired to improve maintainability.

The object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve maintainability.

The game machine according to the present invention includes:
The door body and
The main body and
a door locking mechanism that changes from an unlocked state to a locked state when a locking part and a locked part are locked;
a door sensor that detects the open/closed state of the door body;
A game machine comprising:
The door lock mechanism has a housing section that can accommodate the locking section,
A certain metal piece may be inserted into a slit-shaped space formed by the locking portion in the unlocked state and the inner wall of the housing portion to a predetermined state,
In the predetermined state, even if an attempt is made to close the door body, the certain metal piece comes into contact with the locked part before the locking part and the locked state is not achieved, so that the door body is not in the open state. is maintained,
In the predetermined state, the door sensor does not detect a closed state of the door body,
The slit-shaped space that can be brought into the predetermined state is formed on one of the left and right surfaces of the locking portion,
The part of the locked part that the locking part contacts is different from the part of the locked part that the certain metal piece comes into contact with,
The certain metal piece is a setting key, a game medal, or a 500 yen coin,
It is characterized by

The gaming machine of the present invention can improve maintainability.

1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. It is a diagram showing an example of a winning line. It is a circuit block diagram of a control part. It is a diagram showing the arrangement of symbols on each reel developed in a two-dimensional manner. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the types of winning roles (including activated roles), the symbol combinations corresponding to each winning role, and the payouts for each winning role. 3 is a transition diagram of the gaming state (RT) of the slot machine 100. FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating transitions of game states regarding advantageous sections and non-advantageous sections of the slot machine 100. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a flow of main processing of a main control unit. 13 is a flowchart showing the flow of a main control unit timer interrupt process. (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400, (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400, and (c) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. 5 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing by the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. (a) is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500, (b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500, (c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500, and (d) is a flowchart of image control processing of the second sub-control unit 500. It is a diagram chronologically showing an example of notification when the first operation instruction notification is performed in a certain game. It is a diagram showing in chronological order an example of notification when a second operation instruction notification is performed in a certain game. 1A is a front view of the slot machine 100 in a state where a setting key is turned from OFF to ON while the power is OFF, FIG. 1B is a front view showing an example where a first notification is executed in a first state, and FIG. 1C is a front view showing an example where a second notification is executed in a second state. (a) A diagram illustrating example 1 of a setting change operation in chronological order. (b) is a diagram showing example 2 of setting change operation in chronological order. (a) It is a figure showing example 3 of setting change operation in chronological order. (b) is a diagram showing example 4 of setting change operation in chronological order; 1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 seen from the front side (player side). FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a line. 1 is a diagram showing the internal configuration of a slot machine 100. FIG. 7 is a perspective view showing a configuration of a reel unit 700. FIG. 7A is a perspective view showing the structure of a backlight module 740 , and FIG. 7B is a front view of the backlight module 740 . FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a first selection switch 190 and the like shown in FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of selection of setting values using a first selection switch 190 and a second selection switch 194. FIG. FIG. 3 shows a circuit block diagram of a control section. 3A and 3B are diagrams illustrating examples of connections between each board and each unit. This is a diagram showing the state in which the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 in a power-off state is opened and the left reel 110 is being manually spun. (a) is a perspective view of the hopper unit 180 shown in FIG. 19 viewed diagonally from above, and (b) is a diagram showing how the hopper disk 182 is manually rotated. 26 is a diagram showing an example in which a relay board is provided between the main control board 300B shown in FIG. 25 and the hopper unit 180 and the reel unit 700 also shown in FIG. 25. (a) is a diagram showing the internal configuration of a slot machine according to a second embodiment, (b) is a side view schematically showing the field of view of a person H1 in a standing position, and (c) is a side view schematically showing the field of view of a person H1 in a sitting position. FIG. 3 is a side view schematically showing the visual field range of person H2. FIG. 11 is a plan view showing the inside of a slot machine according to a second embodiment. 26 is a diagram illustrating a modification of the connection example between each board and each unit shown in FIG. 25. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a specific example of a protection circuit provided between a reel motor driving IC 322i and a 24V power supply line. 1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 seen from the front side (player side). FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of a line. 1 is a diagram showing the internal configuration of a slot machine 100. FIG. A diagram for explaining the medal selector 170. (a) is a table showing the display order of setting values displayed on the setting value display 293, (b) is a table summarizing differences in performance for each setting value, and (c) to (f) are FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of setting-related notification (setting suggestion notification, setting confirmation notification). FIG. 2 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit. 13 is a flowchart showing a flow of main processing of a main control unit. 13 is a flowchart showing the flow of a main control unit timer interrupt process. 40 is a flowchart showing the flow of main control unit initial setting processing (step S101) in FIG. 39. 42 is a flowchart showing the process flow of setting change processing (step S1013) in FIG. 41. (a) is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400, (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400, and (c) is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. 5 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing by the control unit 400. FIG. (a) is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500, (b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500, (c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500, and (d) is a flowchart of image control processing of the second sub-control unit 500. 12 is a table summarizing the procedure for setting setting b by changing settings and the states of related components. 46 is a diagram schematically showing the state of the components at each stage from (a) to (b) in FIG. 45. FIG. (a) is a table summarizing the states of related components when the front door 102 is repeatedly opened and closed with the setting value set to setting b, and (b) is a table summarizing the states of related components when the setting value is set to setting b. This is a table summarizing the states of related components when the payment operation is performed immediately after the third stop in the state where the payment is made. FIG. 48 is a diagram showing the components in each stage of FIG. 47 . (a) is a table summarizing the states of related components when checking the settings with setting 1, which is the default setting value, and (b) shows the state when setting 1 is set. 3 is a table summarizing the states of related components when checking settings in power saving mode. 50 is a diagram schematically showing the state of the components at each stage in FIG. 49. FIG. (a) is a table summarizing the states of the relevant components when a setting check is performed when the device is set to setting b, and (b) is a table summarizing the states of the relevant components when a setting check is performed in power saving mode when the device is set to setting b. 52 is a diagram schematically showing the state of the components at each stage in FIG. 51. FIG. (a) is a diagram for explaining the transition of the game state in the slot machine in this modified example, (b) is a diagram for explaining some of the roles that are the subject of role drawing in RT1 and the high and low probability of winning, and (c) is a diagram for explaining some of the roles that are the subject of role drawing in RT2 and the high and low probability of winning. A diagram showing an example of payout rates for RT1 and RT2. This is a table summarizing the states of related components when the first sound is output when the front door 102 is closed after the settings have been changed. This is a table summarizing the states of the relevant components when the reels are spun before closing the front door 102 after changing the settings, and the first sound is output when the front door 102 is closed while the reels are spinning. This table summarizes the states of the relevant components when the reels are spun before closing the front door 102 after a setting change, a power outage occurs while the reels are spinning, and the front door 102 is closed while the reels are spinning after power is restored. This is a table summarizing the states of the relevant components when the front door 102 is closed while the inserted medals are being settled and paid out before the front door 102 is closed after the settings are changed. Before closing the front door 102 after changing the settings, check the state of the related components in the event that a power outage occurs and the front door 102 is closed during the payout after the power is restored. This is a summarized table. 11 is a table summarizing the states of the relevant components when the front door 102 is closed during setting confirmation after a setting change. This is a table summarizing the states of the relevant components when the front door 102 is closed after the setting is changed and the game is transitioned to the second game state. This is a table summarizing the states of related components when the setting key switch 281 is turned on with the front door 102 in a pseudo-closed state after the settings have been confirmed once, and the inserted medals are settled. be. This table summarizes the states of the relevant components when a single setting check is performed, the setting key switch 281 is turned on with the front door 102 in a pseudo-closed state, and one game is played. 13 is a table summarizing the states of the relevant components when the setting value display 293 displays a setting value even when the setting key switch 281 is in the OFF state. This table summarizes the states of the relevant components when a setting confirmation is performed once, a medal is inserted while the front door 102 is in a pseudo-closed state, the setting key switch 281 is turned on, and the inserted medal is settled. This is a table summarizing the states of the relevant components when a setting check is performed once, a medal is inserted while the front door 102 is in a pseudo-closed state, the setting key switch 281 is turned on, and play is performed. 1 is a rear view of a pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied; 1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 and the lending machine 700 as viewed from the front side (player side). It is a circuit block diagram of a control part. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of connection between each board and each unit. This figure shows an example in which a relay board is provided between the main control board 300B shown in Figure 70 and the reel unit 109 also shown in Figure 70. 69 is a configuration diagram of a gaming system including the slot machine 100 and lending machine 700 shown in FIG. 68. FIG. This is a table summarizing gaming machine status information, gaming machine performance information, and gaming machine installation information. It is a diagram showing a communication sequence when a game control state command is transmitted from the game control unit 302 to the medal number control unit 350. A diagram showing details of the communication between the medal count control unit 350 and the lending machine 700. (a) is a diagram showing details of hole control/fraud monitoring information, and (b) is a list of error codes. 13 is a table showing game control state commands. 13 is a table showing medal count control state commands. It is a diagram showing a communication sequence when a game control priority command is transmitted from the game control unit 302 to the medal number control unit 350. (a) is a diagram showing details of the game control priority command, and (b) is a diagram showing details of a response command returned from the medal number control unit 350 to the game control unit 302. It is a diagram showing a communication sequence when a game control priority command 2 is transmitted from the game control unit 302 to the medal number control unit 350. 13 is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of a game control unit. 83 is a flowchart of the medal insertion/start lever acceptance process (step S102) in FIG. 82. 84 is a flowchart of the medal insertion process (step S1011) in FIG. 83. 85 is a flowchart of the settlement button processing (step S1102) in FIG. 84. 89 is a flowchart of the process of transmitting variation information to the medal number control unit (step S1111, step S1205, step S1605) in FIG. 84, FIG. 85, and FIG. 89. 87 is a flowchart of triple command transmission processing (step S1307) in FIG. 86. A flowchart of the process of sending a priority command to the medal count control unit (steps S1014, S1403, S1406, and S1409) in Figures 83 and 87. 83 is a flowchart of the medal awarding process (step S109) in FIG. 82. 13 is a flowchart showing the flow of a game control unit timer interrupt process. 91 is a flowchart of a disconnection determination process, which is one of the error monitoring processes (step S203) in FIG. 90. 91 is a flowchart of the medal number control command reception process (step S206) in FIG. 90. It is a flowchart of the game control command transmission process (step S207) in FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the flow of a medal count control unit main process. 95 is a flowchart of the RAM abnormality determination process (step S302) in FIG. 94. It is a table showing the target range of RAM clear processing. 96 is a flowchart of the error request setting process (step S3022) in FIG. 95 etc. 95 is a flowchart of the preparation process (step S303) in FIG. 94. 95 is a flowchart of gaming machine information notification transmission processing (step S304) in FIG. 94. 100 is a flowchart of the gaming machine information type acquisition process (step S3305) in FIG. 99. 95 is a flowchart of the count notification transmission process (step S305) in FIG. 94. 95 is a flowchart of the rental notification reception confirmation process (step S306) in FIG. 94. 95 is a flowchart of the lending reception result response transmission process (step S308) in FIG. 94. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the flow of medal count control unit timer interrupt processing. 105 is a flowchart of the lending notification receiving process (step S404) in FIG. 104. 106 is a flowchart of the loan number determination process (step S4004) in FIG. 105. FIG. 105 is a flowchart of the scheduled count number update process (step S405) in FIG. 104. FIG. It is a flowchart of the game control unit command reception process (step S406) in FIG. 104. It is a flowchart of the game control state command reception process (step S4304) in FIG. 108. This is a flowchart (first half) of the game control priority command receiving processing (step S4305) in Figure 108. It is a flowchart (second half) of the game control priority command reception process (step S4305) in FIG. 108. 112 is a flowchart of the input command receiving process (step S4517) in FIG. 111. 112 is a flowchart of the payment command reception process (step S4519) in FIG. 111. 112 is a flowchart of the start lever acceptance command reception process (step S4521) in FIG. 111. This is a flowchart of the game information setting process (steps S4806, S4A19) in Figures 114 and 116. 112 is a flowchart of the payout command reception process (step S4523) in FIG. 111. 117 is a flowchart of the game medal number overflow confirmation process (step S4A11) in FIG. 116. 112 is a flowchart of the error occurrence command reception process (step S4524) in FIG. 111. 105 is a flowchart of the error monitoring process (step S407) in FIG. 104. FIG. It is a flowchart of the medal number control command transmission process (step S408) to the game control unit in FIG. 104. 105 is a flowchart of the display device display process (step S409) in FIG. 104. FIG. A flowchart showing a modified example of the processing during medal insertion in Figure 84. 88 is a flowchart showing a modification of the triple command transmission process of FIG. 87. 113 is a flowchart illustrating a modification of the input command reception process of FIG. 112. 108 is a flowchart showing a modification of the scheduled count number update process of FIG. 107. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing a modification of the scheduled count number update process of FIG. 107. FIG. (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400, (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400, and (c) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. 3 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400, and (d) is a flowchart of command processing (step S307) in (a). (a) is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500, (b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500, (c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500, and (d) is a flowchart of image control processing of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a first example in which the count button 171 is operated. It is a timing chart showing a first example of performance when counting is being performed. 13 is a timing chart showing an example in which a bet operation has been performed before the operation of the count button 171 and the bet amount is not 0. 13 is a timing chart showing an example of a counting end presentation. 11 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where the settlement button 134 is operated. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the number of sheets to be counted increases as the operation time of the counting button 171 becomes longer. (a) is a timing chart showing an example of a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 134(c), and (b) is a timing chart showing a state in which 30 sheets is set as the number of sheets to be counted in the example shown in FIG. 134(c). 2 is a timing chart illustrating an example of a case where a power outage occurs and then power is restored. 127 is a timing chart illustrating an example of the process of updating the scheduled number of sheets to be counted in FIG. 126. FIG. (a) is a timing chart showing an example in which automatic counting ends when the value of the “number of game medals” stored in RAM 358 reaches a certain value, and (b) is a timing chart showing an example in which power is interrupted during automatic counting and then restored. It is a figure which shows the example of a display showing that automatic counting is in progress. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a sound output indicating that automatic counting is in progress. 17 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where a power outage occurs before 0.5 seconds, which is the determination time for a long press operation, has elapsed after the start of the operation of the count button 171. 141 is a timing chart showing a modification of the example shown in FIG. 140. FIG. 141 is a timing chart showing another modified example of the example shown in FIG. 140. 1A is a diagram showing an example of a change display (subtraction) on the game medal count display device 170, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of a change display (addition) on the game medal count display device 170. FIG. 13A to 13C are diagrams showing other examples of change display in the game medal count display device 170. It is a diagram illustrating an example in which the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 is displayed on the effect image display device 157 in addition to the game medal number display device 170. FIG. 146 shows a modified example of the example shown in FIG. 145. 146 is a diagram showing another example completely different from the example shown in FIG. 145. FIG. (a) is a timing chart when a payout is attempted to be performed exceeding the payout threshold, and (b) is a diagram showing another example of upper limit exceedance error notification. 13A is a timing chart showing a case where a payout is about to be made when the second payout threshold value is exceeded, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing another example of a notification that the upper limit is approaching. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating an example in which a notification urging a count overlaps with a highly urgent error notification. 13A shows an example in which the notification prompting counting continues even after switching to a demonstration display, and FIG. 13B shows an example of the notification after the count button 171 is operated during the demonstration. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a notification when the "number of game medals" exceeds a certain specified number, such as a payout threshold or a second payout threshold, and then falls below that specified number, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a notification that prompts counting when the "number of game medals" exceeds the second payout threshold over multiple games. (a) is a diagram illustrating an example in which a notification is issued to prompt counting each time the "number of game medals" increases by a predetermined number, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a case where the counting button 171 is operated in a state advantageous to the player. FIG. 7(c) is a diagram illustrating an example in which the count button 171 is operated at a disadvantage to the player. FIG. 153(a) shows a modified example of the example shown in FIG. 153(b), FIG. 153(b) shows an example in which counting that was forcibly terminated is restarted, and FIG. 153(c) shows an example of the modified example described using (a) and (b) when the player is in a disadvantageous state (e.g., a normal state). This is a timing chart showing an example of when the VL signal from the rental machine 700 is turned off. It is a diagram showing a second modification example in which the operation differs depending on whether the "number of game medals" is less than a certain threshold value. A timing chart showing another example of when the VL signal from the rental machine 700 is turned off. A diagram showing the change in the number of game medals when the count button 171 is pressed and held. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of an effect executed according to the number of game medals. It is a figure which shows an example of the performance performed according to the number of acquired medals in an AT state. A figure showing an example of the operation when an overflow of the number of game medals occurs. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of an operation when a medal number control disconnection error (error code E0) occurs. This figure shows an example of the operation that occurs when an error in which the number of game medals exceeds the upper limit and an error in which the number of medals control is broken (error code E0) occur simultaneously. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of an operation when a medal number control unit disconnection error occurs. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of an operation when a period for allowing the output of the sound is provided when outputting the counting sound for the counting process. FIG. 165 is a diagram showing the state of the slot machine 100 in the operation of FIG. 165(a). 165(b) is a diagram showing the state of the slot machine 100 in the operation of FIG. 165(b). (a) is a diagram showing an example of an update condition of the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means). (b) is a diagram showing an example of the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means), and various processes that refer to these counting means. 13 is a time-series diagram showing an example of counting by a difference number counter (first counting means) and a virtual difference number counter (second counting means). FIG. 13 is a graph showing an example of the change in the difference in number of coins during a certain gaming period. A figure showing an example of various presentations during a certain gaming period shown in Figure 171. A figure showing an example of various presentations during a certain gaming period shown in Figure 171. 13 is a graph showing an example of the change in the difference in number of coins during a certain gaming period. A figure showing an example of various presentations during a certain gaming period shown in Figure 173. A figure showing an example of various presentations during a certain gaming period shown in Figure 173. (a) A diagram showing an example of complete function advance notification. (b) It is a figure showing an example of completion upper limit reach notification. (c) A diagram showing an example of advance notification of reaching the gaming value display upper limit. (d) It is a diagram showing an example of notification of reaching the gaming value display upper limit. 13 is a graph showing an example of the change in the difference in number of coins during a certain gaming period. 178 is a diagram showing an example of various performances and various notifications during a certain game period shown in FIG. 177. FIG. 178 is a diagram showing an example of various performances and various notifications during a certain game period shown in FIG. 177. FIG. 178 is a diagram showing an example of various performances and various notifications during a certain game period shown in FIG. 177. FIG. 178 is a diagram showing a modification of various performances and various notifications during a certain game period shown in FIG. 177. FIG. This figure shows modified examples of various presentations and notifications during a certain game period shown in Figure 177. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a presentation by the shutter 163. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of position correction by the shutter 163 during execution of complete function advance notification. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of position correction by the shutter 163 during execution of completion upper limit reaching notification. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a flow of main processing of a main control unit. 187 is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit initial setting process (step S101) in FIG. 186. 187 is a flowchart showing the flow of the complete function activation process (step S119) in FIG. 186. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a connection of circuit boards inside a gaming machine. 13A is a diagram showing the flow of operations when the harness is normally connected, and FIGS. 13B and 13C are diagrams showing an example of operations when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected. FIG. 11A and 11B are diagrams illustrating an example of an operation when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected. It is a figure showing an example of operation when harness HB1 which connects main control board 300B and relay board RB1 is disconnected. It is a figure which shows an example of operation|movement when lever unit harness HA1, stop button unit harness HA2, and bet button unit harness HA3 are each drawn out. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating an example of an operation when the menu button unit harness HC1 is disconnected and reconnected. A diagram showing an example of the operation when a harness connecting a main control board and a sub-control board is disconnected and reconnected. 1 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 open. FIG. 1 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the side. 1 is an enlarged schematic cross-sectional view of a sub-substrate case 500a and a main substrate case 300a. 3 is a diagram showing an example of air flow inside the slot machine 100. FIG. 1 is a diagram showing an example of air flow inside the slot machine 100. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the flow of air from a cooling fan 950 when the front door 102 is open. 1 is a perspective view showing the appearance of a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 13 is a diagram showing the relationship between the display area of the symbol display window and the winning line of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 1A is a diagram showing the arrangement of symbols on each reel of the slot machine of this embodiment, with a surface expansion, and a diagram showing the relationship between the symbol number counter and the symbol interval counter; and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the types of winning roles (including activated roles), the symbol combinations corresponding to each winning role, and the activation or payout of each winning role. 1 is an exploded perspective view showing the appearance of a reel rotation device of a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of a reel drive unit that constitutes the reel rotation device of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are a schematic side view and a schematic front view showing an assembled state of a reel drive unit of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. 2 is an exploded perspective view of a stepping motor used in a reel of the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. A diagram showing the magnetic pole arrangement of the stator of the stepping motor shown in Figure 209. 3 is a table showing the contents of an excitation table for exciting a stepping motor according to the present embodiment. 4 is a table showing the contents of a rotation control table according to the present embodiment. 3 is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. 214 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the winning combination internal lottery process in step S103 shown in FIG. 213. 214 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of reel rotation start processing in step S105 shown in FIG. 213. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of main control unit timer interrupt processing. 217 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the stop button display control processing of step S207 shown in FIG. 216. 217 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the reel rotation control process in step S208 shown in FIG. 216. FIG. 219 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the reel control determination process of step S208g shown in FIG. 218. 220 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of acceleration control processing in step S306 shown in FIG. 219. 220 is a flowchart showing in detail the first constant speed control process of step S308 shown in FIG. 219. 220 is a flowchart showing in detail the second constant speed control process of step S310 shown in FIG. 219. 219 is a flowchart showing in detail the stop button acceptance process of step S208d shown in FIG. 218. 224 is a flowchart showing in detail the pull-in counter setting process of step S208d5 shown in FIG. 223. 220 is a flowchart showing in detail the pull-in control process of step S313 shown in FIG. 219. 220 is a flowchart showing in detail the brake control process of step S312 shown in FIG. 219. (a) is the first sub-control unit main processing of the slot machine according to the present embodiment, (b) is the first sub-control unit command input processing, (c) is the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing, and ( d) is a flowchart showing the flow of each timer interrupt process of the first sub-control unit. Conventionally, changes in the state of the three reels, changes in the detection state of the light shielding piece provided on each reel in the index sensor, changes in the operation acceptance state of the stop button corresponding to each reel, and changes in the state of each stop button. 5 is a timing chart showing changes in the light emission mode of a built-in light emitter. In this embodiment, a change in the state of each reel 110 to 112, a change in the detection state of each light shielding piece, a change in the operation acceptance state of each stop button 137 to 139, and a light emission mode of each stop button LED 137a to 139a 3 is a timing chart showing changes in . 13 is a timing chart showing a case where a step-out occurs on the spinning right reel in the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a timing chart when a step-out occurs in the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment and the stop button is operated before re-acceleration. 13 is a timing chart showing a case where a power interruption and restoration occurs during execution of the second constant speed control in the slot machine 100 of this embodiment. 13 is a timing chart in the case where the operation of the stop button is accepted before the stop button LED changes to the second light emission mode in the slot machine 100 in this embodiment. 13 is a timing chart showing a case where the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment stops the reels in the shortest number of frames after detecting a light-blocking piece. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing the state of the left reel at each timing. It is a timing chart when the effect regarding the reels is performed by the effect device in the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the 1st performance in a performance device. This is a timing chart for a case where slide push operations are performed on the three stop buttons 137 to 139 in the slot machine 100 of this embodiment, but only some of the operations are accepted. This is a timing chart in the case where all slide push operations performed on the three stop buttons 137 to 139 are accepted in the slot machine 100 of this embodiment. This is a timing chart when a real game is played after a pseudo game is played in the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment. This is a timing chart when a main game is played after a reel action is performed in the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing the relative positional relationship of symbols constituting a specific symbol combination with reference to the symbol display window 113. This is a timing chart when, in the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment, three stop buttons 137 to 139 are simultaneously pressed, but only some of the operations are accepted. This is a timing chart in the case where the simultaneous pressing of the three stop buttons 137 to 139 is all accepted in the slot machine 100 of this embodiment. 13 is a timing chart showing a case where simultaneous presses are performed during a simulated game in the slot machine 100 of the present embodiment. This is a timing chart in which notification timing by the notification means and the like are added to the timing chart shown in FIG. 239. As in the case of the timing chart shown in FIG. 246, this is a timing chart showing an example of a case where retraction control is performed as a result of successive slide push operations on three stop buttons 137 to 139. 7 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where a reverse slide push operation is performed before the light shielding piece of the left reel 110 is detected. 13 is a timing chart showing an example in which only the right reel 112 of the three reels 110 to 112 automatically stops. This is a timing chart showing an example of a case where detection of the light-blocking piece on the right reel 112 is delayed and a sequential slide push operation is performed before the three stop button LEDs 137a to 139a change to the second light-emitting state, resulting in retraction control being performed. This is a timing chart showing an example of a case where detection of the light-blocking piece of the middle reel 111 is delayed and a sequential slide push operation is performed before the three stop button LEDs 137a to 139a change to the second light-emitting state, resulting in retraction control being performed. This is a timing chart showing an example of a case where detection of the light-blocking piece on the left reel 110 is delayed and a sequential slide push operation is performed before the three stop button LEDs 137a to 139a change to the second light-emitting state, resulting in retraction control being performed. It is a timing chart when sequential slide push operations are performed in each of a pseudo game and a main game that is started following the pseudo game. It is a timing chart showing an example of a case where pull-in control is performed as a result of performing a slide push operation of forward push in a pseudo game. This is a timing chart showing an example of a case where a reverse slide push operation is performed before the light shielding piece of the left reel 110 is detected in a pseudo game. 13 is a timing chart showing an example in which only the right reel 112 of the three reels 110 to 112 automatically comes to a pseudo stop. This is a timing chart showing an example of a case in which detection of the light-shielding piece on the right reel 112 in a simulated game is delayed, and a sequential slide push operation is performed before the three stop button LEDs 137a to 139a change to the second light-emitting state, resulting in retraction control being performed. This is a timing chart showing an example of a case in which detection of the light-shielding piece of the middle reel 111 in a simulated game is delayed, and a sequential slide push operation is performed before the three stop button LEDs 137a to 139a change to the second light-emitting state, resulting in retraction control being performed. This is a timing chart showing an example of a case in which detection of the light-shielding piece on the left reel 110 in a simulated game is delayed, and a sequential slide push operation is performed before the three stop button LEDs 137a to 139a change to the second light-emitting state, resulting in retraction control being performed. This is a timing chart showing an example in which the left stop button 137 and the middle stop button 138 are pressed simultaneously in a pseudo game just before a predetermined third period elapses. It is a side view showing the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 in a closed state. (a) is a diagram showing the lock body 1401A from the side of the slot machine 100 when the lock mechanism 1401 is in an unlocked state, and (b) is a diagram showing the lock body 1401A in (a) from the rear side of the slot machine 100. FIG. 3C is a diagram showing the lock body 1401A from the side of the slot machine 100 when the lock mechanism 1401 is in a locked state. (a) to (d) are diagrams showing the operation of the lock body 1401A and the locked shaft 1401B. (a) is a side view showing a state in which the setting key SK is inserted into the lock body 1401A, (b) is a side view showing the setting key SK in (a) with a solid line, and (c) is a side view showing the setting key SK in (a) with a solid line. It is a view of the lock main body 1401A in a) seen from the back side, (d) is a diagram showing a state in which the locked shaft 1401B cannot enter along the entry path 1404ER, and (e) is a view showing the locked shaft It is a diagram showing a state in which the shaft 1401B cannot enter along the approach path 1404ER. 1A to 1D are diagrams showing an example of the positional relationship between a wiring pattern on a substrate and a sticker attached to the substrate. (a) to (b) are diagrams showing an example of the positional relationship between a wiring pattern on a board and a sticker affixed to the board. (a) is a diagram showing an example in which silk printing SP indicating the attachment positions of the four corners of the sticker is applied to the configuration of FIG. 265(c), and (b) is a diagram of the configuration of FIG. 265(c). It is a figure showing an example in which silk printing SP indicating the pasting position of two corners of the upper right and lower left of the sticker has been applied to the structure. 1A is a diagram showing an example in which a sticker ST1 (facing upward) affixed to a substrate A and a sticker ST2 (facing right) affixed to a substrate B are different in relation to the reference direction, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example in which a sticker ST1 (facing upward) affixed to a substrate A and a sticker ST3 (facing downward) affixed to the case of the substrate A are different in relation to the reference direction. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating an example of a power supply module PM. 1A is a view of the lower surface BT from below, FIG. 1B is a view showing a cross section along line A-A in FIG. 1A, and FIG. 1C is a view showing a cross section along line B-B in FIG. 1A is a schematic diagram showing an example of the configuration of a board and a board case, and FIG. 1B is a schematic diagram showing a configuration in which a crimp CL is provided in an unmounted land area NA. It is a diagram showing the flow of operations in a normal game. 11A to 11C are diagrams illustrating an example of an operation according to a time lapse from a lever operation. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing an example of an operation when an abnormality occurs in the reel after a lever operation. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing an example of an operation when an abnormality occurs in the reel after a lever operation. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating an example of an operation when an abnormality occurs in the stop button unit after a lever operation. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating an example of an operation when an abnormality occurs in the stop button unit after a lever operation. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of an operation when a reel effect is executed. It is a diagram showing an example of an operation when a pseudo game is executed. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when a simulated game is executed. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when a power outage occurs and is restored during play. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of an operational flow when an abnormality occurs while a game is not being played. It is a diagram showing an example of the flow of operations when an abnormality occurs while a game is not being played. 5 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a control board 500B corresponding to a second sub-control unit 500 of the slot machine 100. FIG. A diagram showing a first substrate CB1.

Hereinafter, a slot machine according to an embodiment of the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

The slot machine of this embodiment, which will be described below, is a gaming machine in which a predetermined amount of gaming value (medals, electronic medals, etc.) is inserted, and multiple reels, each decorated with multiple types of symbols, begin to spin when a predetermined operation to start spin is received, and whether or not multiple types of internal winning combinations have been won is determined by lottery based on the reception of the operation to start spin, and each of the multiple reels stops spinning individually when a predetermined operation to stop spin is received, and if the conditions determined by the combination of symbols when the multiple reels stop based on the results of the lottery match the predetermined payout conditions, the gaming value is paid out and the game ends, but if they do not match, the game ends without paying out the gaming value.

<Basic configuration>
First, the basic configuration of the slot machine 100 will be explained using FIGS. 1 and 2. FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of a winning line.

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 corresponds to an example of a gaming machine of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 that is attached to the front side of the main body 101 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. and.

In this example, the front door 102, which is locked in a closed state, can be opened by inserting a key held by the manager of the gaming facility into the door key hole 140. Therefore, the manager can unlock the front door 102 (change it from a closed state to an open state), but anyone other than the manager (e.g., a player) cannot unlock the front door 102.

An optical sensor (detection means; hereafter also referred to as the "open/close sensor"; not shown) consisting of a light-emitting section and a light-receiving section is provided on the right side of the main body 101, and is configured so that a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the front door 102 passes between the light-emitting section and the light-receiving section of this open/close sensor.

The main control unit 300 monitors the state of the various sensors 318, including the open/close sensor, during the main control timer interrupt process described below. When the front door 102 is closed and the light blocking piece of the front door 102 moves to a position where it blocks the light from the light projector of the open/close sensor of the main body 101, the open/close sensor outputs a signal (e.g., a low-level signal) indicating that it is in a closed detection state to the main control unit 300.

On the other hand, when the front door 102 is opened and the light-shielding piece of the front door 102 moves to a position where it does not block the light from the light-emitting part of the opening/closing sensor of the main body 101, the opening/closing sensor outputs a signal (e.g., a high-level signal) indicating that it is in the open detection state to the main control unit 300.

That is, the open/close sensor is a detection means that can detect the open/close state of the front door (door) 102, and when the front door 102 is in the closed state, the detection state becomes the closed detection state, and when the front door 102 is in the open state. In this case, the detection state becomes the open detection state.

The "detection means" according to the present invention is not limited to optical sensors, but may be, for example, magnetic sensors, proximity switches, micro switches, Hall elements, etc. Also, it is not limited to sensors that always switch between an open detection state and a closed detection state when the door is opened or closed, but may be capable of changing the detection state to a closed detection state even when the door is open, or conversely, may be capable of changing the detection state to an open detection state even when the door is closed.

Here, the opening/closing sensor according to the present example is configured such that when a predetermined operation is performed, the detection state becomes the closed detection state even if the front door 102 is in the open state. Specifically, when the front door 102 is in the open state, a light shielding piece of a certain length is inserted between the light emitting part and the light receiving part of the opening/closing sensor of the main body 101 and fixed with tape etc. By blocking the light from the light emitting part of the opening/closing sensor 101, even if the front door 102 is open, the detection state of the opening/closing sensor is forcibly changed to a closed detection state (hereinafter, this state is referred to as a "door pseudo" state). (sometimes referred to as "closed").

Note that the "predetermined operation" according to the present invention is not limited to this example; for example, a DIP switch that turns the open/close sensor into a closed detection state may be provided and the DIP switch may be operated as the predetermined operation. . Further, when the detection means is constituted by a magnetic sensor, the detection state of the opening/closing sensor may be changed to the closed detection state by bringing a magnet close to the opening/closing sensor.

Three reels (left reel 110, center reel 111, right reel 112) with multiple types of symbols arranged on their outer periphery are housed inside the center of the main body 101 (not shown), and are configured to rotate inside the slot machine 100. These reels 110 to 112 are rotated by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, a suitable number of each pattern is printed on a band-like member at equal intervals, and this band-like member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to constitute each reel 110 to 112. When viewed from the player, approximately three symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed vertically from the display window 113, making a total of nine symbols visible. To explain specifically using FIG. 2, the symbol displayed in the upper row of the left reel 110 (position 1 shown in the figure) is displayed in the upper row of the left reel 110 and the symbol displayed in the middle row of the left reel 110 (position 2 shown in the figure). The symbol displayed on the left reel 110 is the middle symbol, the symbol displayed on the lower row of the left reel 110 (position 3 shown in the diagram) is the symbol displayed on the left reel lower row, and the symbol displayed on the upper row of the middle reel 111 (position 4 shown in the diagram) The symbol is the upper symbol of the middle reel, the symbol displayed in the middle row of the left reel 111 (position 5 shown in the figure) is the symbol displayed in the middle reel, and the symbol displayed in the lower row of the middle reel 111 (position 6 shown in the figure) is the symbol displayed in the middle reel. The symbols displayed on the lower row of the middle reel 112, the symbols displayed on the upper row of the right reel 112 (position 7 as shown in the figure) are the upper row symbols of the right reel, and the symbols displayed on the middle row of the right reel 112 (position 8 as shown in the diagram) on the right reel. The middle symbols and the symbols displayed at the bottom of the right reel 112 (position 9 in the figure) are called right reel lower symbols, and the symbols on each reel 110 to 112 are displayed on each reel 110 to 112 through the display window 113. Three of each are displayed vertically, nine in total. By rotating each of the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols visible to the player changes. In other words, each reel 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays combinations of a plurality of types of symbols. In addition to the reel, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can also be used as such a display device. Further, in this embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation positions of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight for illuminating the individual symbols displayed on the display window 113 is arranged on the back side of each reel 110 to 112. It is desirable that the backlight be shielded for each pattern so that each pattern can be illuminated evenly. Note that inside the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (not shown) consisting of a light emitting part and a light receiving part is provided near each of the reels 110 to 112. A light shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel is configured to pass between the two. The position of the symbol on the reel in the rotational direction is determined based on the detection result of this optical sensor, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbol is displayed on the winning line.

The winning line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates a valid winning line. The winning line is a line on which it is determined whether a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination, which will be explained later in FIG. Only one line, the middle winning line L1, is provided, which is made up of symbols in the middle of the reels. FIG. 2 shows this winning line L1. The valid winning line (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "valid line") is predetermined by the number of medals bet as gaming media. The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 requires three medals, and when the number of medals inserted is less than three, none of the winning lines become valid, and when three medals are bet, the winning line L1 validate. When the winning line becomes valid, the game can be started by operating the start lever 135. Note that the number of winning lines is not limited to one line. For example, in addition to the middle winning line L1, there is also a downward-sloping winning line consisting of left reel upper symbols, middle reel middle symbols, and right reel lower symbols, and a left reel lower symbol, middle reel middle symbols, and right reel upper symbols. A total of three winning lines, including the upward-to-the-right winning lines, may be set as valid winning lines, or a number of winning lines corresponding to the number of bets may be set as valid winning lines. Note that the area on the winning line L1 (the area consisting of numbers 2, 5, and 8 in FIG. 2) may be referred to as the active line area S1. Further, an area other than the effective line area S1 of the symbol display window 113 (area consisting of numbers 1, 3, 4, 6, 7, and 9 in FIG. 2) may be referred to as an ineffective line area S2.

The notification lamp 123 is a lamp that notifies the player that, for example, a specific winning role (specifically, special role 1 or special role 2) has been internally won in an internal lottery described below, or that the player is in a special role internally won state or a special game state described below. The medal insertion possible lamp 124 is a lamp that notifies the player that a game medal can be inserted. The replay lamp 122 is a lamp that notifies the player that the current game can be replayed (no medal insertion is required) if the player won a replay role (details will be described later), which is one of the winning roles, in the previous game. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for presentation purposes.

The bet buttons 130 and 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) that are electronically stored in the slot machine 100. In this embodiment, one medal is inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed, and three medals are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed (up to a maximum of three medals). Hereinafter, the bet button 132 is also referred to as the MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamps 129 light up a number of lamps according to the number of medals inserted, and when the specified number of medals have been inserted, the game start lamp 121 lights up to indicate that the game can be started.

The chance button 190 is a button for presentation, and is also referred to as the presentation button 190. The medal slot 141 is an slot for the player to insert medals at the time of starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 and 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal slot 141, and the term "insertion" includes both. be.

The stored medal number display 125 is a display device for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 is a display for numerically displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during the special game state). The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals paid out to the player as a result of winning some winning combination. Note that in the following, it may be expressed as being given to the player in the same sense as being paid out to the player. In the present embodiment, the stored token number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout token number display 127 are composed of seven segment (SEG) displays.

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 110 to 112. That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 and 132 are operated and the start lever 135 is operated, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. The operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons (stop operation means) 137-139 consisting of a left stop button 137, a middle stop button 138, and a right stop button 139. The stop buttons 137-139 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 110-112 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with each of the reels 110-112. More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right reel 112 can be stopped by operating the right stop button 139. Hereinafter, the operation of the stop buttons 137-139 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as the first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as the second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as the third stop operation. The reels that are stopped in response to these stop operations are referred to as the first stop reel, the second stop reel, and the third stop reel, respectively. Furthermore, the order in which the stop buttons 137-139 are operated to stop all of the reels 110-112 that are spinning is called the operation sequence or push sequence. Furthermore, the operation sequence in which the first stop operation is the stop operation of the left reel 110 is called the "forward push operation sequence" or simply "forward push", and the stop operation in which the first stop operation is the stop operation of the right reel 112 is called the "reverse push operation sequence" or simply "reverse push". Note that light-emitting elements may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137-139, and when the stop buttons 137-139 can be operated, the light-emitting elements can be lit to notify the player.

The medal return button 133 is a button that can be pressed to remove medals that have been inserted and become stuck. The settlement button 134 is a button that can be used to settle medals that have been electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and medals that have been bet, and to dispense them from the medal payout outlet 155. The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key can be inserted to unlock the front door 102 of the slot machine 100.

A title panel 162 is provided at the bottom of the stop button unit 136 for displaying the model name and pasting various certificate stamps. At the bottom of the title panel 162, a medal payout opening 155 and a medal receiving tray 161 are provided.

The sound hole 145 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker 277 (see FIG. 3) located at the bottom inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 located on the left and right sides of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for livening up the game. The performance device 160 is disposed at the top of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided at the top of the performance device 160 for outputting the sound of the speaker 272 (see FIG. 3) located at the top inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. This performance device 160 is equipped with a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two shutters, a right shutter 163a and a left shutter 163b, which can be opened and closed horizontally, and a performance image display device 157 (liquid crystal display device) disposed on the rear side of this shutter 163; when the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally outward in front of the performance image display device 157, the display screen of the performance image display device 157 appears in front of the slot machine 100 (the player's side, the front side).

Note that the display device does not have to be a liquid crystal display device, but may be any display device that can display various performance images and various game information, such as a multi-segment display (7 segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, etc. , a reel (drum), or a display device consisting of a projector and a screen. Further, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and the entire display screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. Furthermore, a decoration (not shown) may be provided around the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, making the display screen appear oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in this embodiment, it may be a curved surface.

Inside the main body 101, there is also provided a setting key (first operating means) that can be switched on and off by rotating it. This setting key is an operating means for starting to change or check the setting values (in this example, settings 1 to 6) described below. Inside the main body 101, there is also provided a reset switch (hereinafter also referred to as a "reset SW") that can be pressed to change the settings (setting value change operation). This reset SW is an operating means that also functions as an error release switch that can be used to resolve various errors (error resolution operation) described below.

These setting keys and reset SW are operation means provided at a position that can be operated only when the front door 102 (door) is in the open state, and cannot be operated when the front door 102 (door) is in the closed state. difficult or impossible. In other words, it is an operating means that can only be operated by the manager (clerk, etc.) of the game parlor, and cannot be operated by the player.

Further, inside the main body 101, a setting value display device 101a (see FIG. 14) capable of displaying setting values is provided. In this example, the set value display device 101a is configured with a 7-segment display. Details will be described later, but when a setting change operation is performed, the setting value (any of settings 1 to 6) is displayed on the setting value display device 101a, and the setting value is set by operating the start lever 135. Once the value is confirmed, the set value will be hidden. On the other hand, when the setting confirmation operation is performed, a numerical value indicating the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display device 101a.

Furthermore, an external centralized terminal board (not shown) is attached to the inner wall of the main body 101, which is connected to the main control board constituting the main control section 300 and outputs information about the slot machine 100 to an external device. This external centralized terminal board includes an external cable connection part for connecting an external cable (not shown) extending from an information input circuit 652 (see FIG. 3) provided in a hall computer (not shown), etc., and an external centralized terminal board LED. (not shown) is provided. The external cable is inserted into the main body 101 through a cable hole formed on the back surface of the main body 101, and is connected to the external cable connection part of the external common terminal board.

Further, a medal dispensing device (not shown; a device for dispensing medals accumulated in a bucket) is provided on the inner wall of the main body 101, and a medal auxiliary storage (not shown) is provided on the right side of the medal dispensing device. An overflow terminal is provided behind this (not shown).

A power supply box (not shown) with a power supply board is provided to the left of the medal payout device, and a power switch (not shown) is provided on the front of the power supply box. The power supply box converts AC power supplied from outside to the slot machine 100 into DC, converts it to a specified voltage, and supplies it to each control unit and device, such as the main control unit 300, sub control units 400, 500, etc., which will be described later. It also has a storage circuit (e.g. a capacitor) to supply power to specified components (e.g. the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, etc.) for a specified period (e.g. 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off.

<Circuit configuration of control section>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be described in detail using FIG. 3. Note that this figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control section.

The slot machine 100's control units are broadly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of the game, a first sub-control unit 400 that controls the main presentation in response to command signals (hereafter simply referred to as "commands") sent by the main control unit 300, and a second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the commands sent by the first sub-control unit 400. With regard to the main control unit 300, a large data capacity makes it difficult to verify the program and can also become a breeding ground for illegal tampering, which can lead to security issues, so there is a limit to the data capacity of the ROM 306 and RAM 308 of the main control unit 300.

<Main control section>
First, the main control section 300 of the slot machine 100 will be explained. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300, and this basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used in internal lottery for winning combinations, and reel symbols. A ROM 306 that stores arrays, stop positions, etc., a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc. It is equipped with a WDT (watch dog timer) 314. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and the same applies to the first sub-control unit 400 and second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of this basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits the frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 sets the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data. An interrupt request is sent to the CPU 304 at each interrupt time. The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as a trigger to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses. For example, if the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the frequency division data of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the reference time of the interrupt is 256 x 47 ÷ 8 MHz. =1.504ms.

The main control unit 300 includes a random number generation circuit 316 used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on a clock signal input from a crystal oscillator 315a, and a startup signal The CPU 304 starts the game control (starts the main control section main processing described later) when the start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338. Start).

The main control unit 300 also includes a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 detects various sensors 318 (a bet button 130 sensor, a bet button 132 sensor, a medal reception sensor for medals inserted from the medal slot 141) at each interrupt time. , a start lever 135 sensor, a left stop button 137 sensor, a middle stop button 138 sensor, a right stop button 139 sensor, a payment button 134 sensor, a medal payout sensor for medals paid out from the medal payout device 180, and an optical sensor for the reels 110 to 112. (index sensor 80, etc.) is monitored.

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random number generation circuit 316. The random number generation circuit 316 receives this signal, latches the value at that timing, and stores it in a register that stores random numbers to be used in the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal slot 141, and detect whether or not a medal has passed. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect a start operation by a player. A left stop button 137 sensor, a middle stop button 138 sensor, and a right stop button 139 sensor are installed on the corresponding stop buttons 137 to 139, respectively, and detect operations of the stop buttons by the player.

The bet button 130 sensor and the bet button 132 sensor are installed on the corresponding bet buttons 130, 132, respectively, and detect the insertion operation when medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are inserted as medals to be inserted into a game. The settlement button 134 sensor is provided on the settlement button 134. When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the medals electronically stored are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the medal payout device 180. Note that each of the above sensors may be a non-contact sensor or a contact sensor.

The optical sensors (index sensors 80) of the reels 110-112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting bases of the reels 110-112, and go low every time a light-shielding piece (detection piece 50) on the reel frame passes by. Rotational position information, which indicates how far the reel has rotated from the reference position from the time it goes low until it goes low again, is calculated based on the counted value of the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b. When the CPU 304 detects the low-level signal, it determines that the reel has made one rotation, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero. This rotational position information is stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300.

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 that drives the stepping motors provided on the reels 110 to 112, a drive circuit 324 that drives a solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 that sorts the inserted medals, and a drive circuit 324 that drives the solenoids provided in the medal payout device 180. A drive circuit 326 that drives the motor, various lamps 336 (winning line display lamp 120, notification lamp 123, game medal insertion possible lamp 124, replay lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121, storage number display) 125, a game information display 126, and a payout number display 127).

Further, an information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 connects a slot to an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 334. The game information of the machine 100 (for example, information indicating the game status) is output, and the external centralized terminal board LED is turned on when the game information is output.

The main control unit 300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 300 from a power management unit (not shown). If the value is less than a predetermined value (9V in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control section 300 is provided with an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400, and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400. Note that information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to send signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400. However, the configuration is such that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the main control unit 300.

<Sub-control section>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 receives the control command transmitted by the main control unit 300 via the input interface. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on the control command, and the basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input and output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output by a crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, and data for controlling the backlight lighting pattern and various displays.

The CPU 404 transmits frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a sound source IC 418, which is provided with speakers 272, 277 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls the sound output from the amplifier and speakers 272, 277 in response to commands from the CPU 404. An S-ROM (sound ROM) in which sound data is stored is connected to the sound source IC 418, and sound data acquired from this ROM is amplified by the amplifier and output from the speakers 272, 277.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 422, and various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel lamp, bet button lamp, Chance button lamp, reel backlight 94, etc.) are connected.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 424 that drives the motor of the shutter 163, and the drive circuit 424 is provided with the shutter 163 via an output interface. This drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 in response to a command from the CPU 404.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sensor circuit 426, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 at every interrupt time.

The CPU 404 also transmits and receives signals to the second sub-control unit 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control unit 500 performs various controls of the performance device 160, including display control of the performance image display device 157. The second sub-control unit 500 may be configured with multiple control units, such as a control unit that controls the display of the performance image display device 157 and a control unit that controls various performance drive devices (for example, a control unit that controls the motor drive of the shutter 163).

The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on this control command. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, etc. It is equipped with 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

The second sub-control unit 500 is also provided with a VDP 516 (video display processor), which is connected to a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads out image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the performance image display device 157.

<Pattern arrangement>
Next, the arrangement of symbols on each of the reels 110 to 112 will be described with reference to Figure 4. This figure shows the arrangement of symbols on each of the reels (left reel 110, center reel 111, right reel 112) in a two-dimensional layout.

Each of the reels 110-112 has a predetermined number of frames (20 frames numbered 0-19) of symbols of multiple types (10 types in this embodiment) as shown on the right side of the figure. The numbers 0-19 shown on the left side of the figure are numbers that indicate the arrangement position of the symbols on each of the reels 110-112. For example, in this embodiment, the "bell symbol" is arranged in the number 1 frame of the left reel 110, the "Seven 1 symbol" is arranged in the number 2 frame of the middle reel 111, and the "Seven 1B symbol" is arranged in the number 2 frame of the right reel 112.

In this embodiment, the slot machine 100 is configured to stop the corresponding reel 110-112 within the maximum retraction range (in this embodiment, less than 5 frames) from the position where the reel is stopped in order to increase the excitement of the game.

<Type of winning role>
Next, the types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be explained using FIG. 5. This figure is a diagram showing the types of winning combinations (including active winning combinations), the symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and the payout (number of awards) of each winning combination.

The winning combinations on the slot machine 100 include special combination 1, replay combination, and minor combinations 1 to 8. Note that the types of winning combinations are not limited to these combinations, and any combination can be used.

Among the winning roles in this embodiment, special role 1 is a role (operating role) that transitions to a special game state in which a player is given a predetermined benefit upon winning. Furthermore, the replay role is a role that allows replay without inserting new medals. These special role 1 and replay roles are sometimes called "operating roles." Furthermore, "winning" in this embodiment also includes cases in which a symbol combination of an operating role that does not involve a medal payout (does not involve the payment of medals) is displayed on an active line, and includes, for example, winning of special role 1 and replay role. Furthermore, special role 1 is a special role that is carried over to the next game if it is not determined to be a winning role, and other roles are general roles that are not carried over to the next game if it is not determined to be a winning role.

The special winning combination 1 is a winning combination (activation winning combination) that shifts to a special gaming state (RT2) upon winning. However, medals will not be paid out for winning these roles themselves. The corresponding symbol combination is ``Seven 3-Seven 1-Replay'' for special combination 1. In the following explanation, the special winning combination 1 may be referred to as "RB1" or "RB".

When special role 1 is internally won, the internal win flag corresponding to this internally won special role is set to ON (stored in a specified area of RAM 308 of the main control unit 300). When the flag corresponding to special role 1 is set to ON, the main control unit 300 transitions the game state to a special role internal win state (RT1). This flag remains ON until the corresponding actuating role is won, making it easier to win these actuating roles in subsequent games. Specifically, even if the role is not won in a game in which special role 1 is internally won, the next and subsequent games will be in the same state as when special role 1 was internally won, making it easier to win when the corresponding symbol combination is lined up.

The special role internal winning state will be described in detail later, but in the special role internal winning state, if a role other than the special role has been internally won, the symbols that make up this other role will be arranged preferentially. Then, reel stop control is executed.

A re-gaming combination is a winning combination (activation combination) that allows you to play the next game without inserting medals (gaming media) by winning a prize, and no medals are paid out. In other words, the game can be played again with the same number of bets as the number of coins inserted last time. The corresponding symbol combination is "Replay-Replay-Replay".

The above-mentioned replay combination may be any combination that allows the player to play the next game without inserting medals. Therefore, for example, if you win a prize in a replay, medals may be automatically inserted in the next game (the number of medals inserted is reset in a storage area for the number of inserted medals prepared in the RAM 308), or in a replay. The medals inserted in the winning game may be carried over to the next game and used as they are.

Minor prizes 1 to 8 are winning prizes that pay out a specified number of medals. The corresponding symbol combinations are: minor prize 1 is "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon", minor prize 2 is "replay-cherry-replay", minor prize 3 is "cherry-cherry-cherry", minor prize 4 is "bell B-bell-bell", minor prize 5 is "bell B-bell (or bell B)-bell", minor prize 6 is "seven 1-seven 1-seven 1", minor prize 7 is "seven 2-seven 2-seven 2", and minor prize 8 is "seven 3-seven 3-seven 3". The corresponding payout numbers are as shown in Figure 5.

Among the above minor roles, minor role 1 is "watermelon", minor role 2 is "weak cherry", minor role 3 is "strong cherry", minor role 4 is "common bell", minor role 5 is "push order bell" , Small winning combinations 6 to 8 are sometimes referred to as ``one-card winning hands''.

<Types of gaming status (RT)>
Next, the types of gaming states of the slot machine 100 and their transitions will be explained. FIG. 6 is a transition diagram of the gaming state (RT) of the slot machine 100.

The slot machine 100 is configured to be able to switch between three different states with different degrees of advantage: a low replay probability state, a special role internal winning state, and a special game state. The degree of advantage is changed by transitioning between these states, increasing the interest of the game. In the following explanation, this game state may be referred to as RT, and the above-mentioned low replay probability state, special role internal winning state, and special game state may be referred to as RT0, RT1, and RT2, respectively. When switching between these RTs, the corresponding lottery table is changed (described later). The RT is controlled by the main control unit 300.

Figure 6 shows each of the RTs described above, with the transition conditions listed on the arrows. When the transition condition corresponding to each arrow is met, the RT transitions in the direction of the arrow. These transition conditions include, for example, winning a specific combination, an internal win for a specific combination, a specific number of plays being played, and a specific number of coins being paid out.

Below, we will explain each RT, referring to the drawings as appropriate.

<Low replay probability state (RT0)>
RT0 has a lower internal probability of winning the replay combination than RT1, and is the most disadvantageous RT for the player.

The roles that can be internally won in RT0 include Special Role 1, Replay Role, and Minor Roles 1 to 8. If the role is not won, it is a miss, and the symbol combination corresponding to the role will not be displayed. When the symbol combination related to a winning combination does not stop on the winning line, it is sometimes referred to as a "miss." When the role is not won, it is sometimes referred to as a "miss."

FIG. 6 shows that if the special winning combination 1 is internally won in a state where RT0 is set, the state shifts to a special winning internal winning state which will be described later.

<Special role internal winning state (RT1)>
RT1 is a state in which the internal winning flag corresponding to the special role 1 is set to ON. In addition, the probability of winning the replay role is higher than in RT0, making it a more advantageous RT than RT0.

The roles that are internally won in RT1 include replay roles and small roles 1 to 8.

Figure 6 shows that if special role 1 is won in RT1 (if the corresponding symbol combination is displayed), the game will transition to RT2.

<Special game state (RT2)>
RT2 is an advantageous RT in which the internal probability of winning the common bell (minor prize 4) is higher than in other RTs, making it easier to win medals.

The only role that can be internally won in RT2 is the common bell (minor role 4). Figure 5 shows that in RT2, the game transitions to RT0 when a predetermined number of plays (six in this example) have been played or when a predetermined number of wins have been made (five in this example).

Note that the conditions for ending RT2 are not particularly limited, and may be, for example, to end when more than a specified number of coins are paid out, or to end when a predetermined winning combination is won.

<Unfavorable section and advantageous section>
In the slot machine 100 of this embodiment, apart from the RT described above, the gaming state is managed by dividing it into a non-advantageous period and a favorable period. Among these, in the advantageous section, notification of the stop operation order for the internally won winning combination (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "operation navigation" or "operation instruction notification") is allowed, and in the non-advantageous section, this operation navigation is displayed. Not done. In addition, in advantageous sections, the operation navigation is displayed according to the conditions, but even if the push order bell is internally selected, the operation navigation may not be displayed. These states will be explained below using FIG. 7. This figure is a diagram showing the transition of the game state regarding the advantageous section and the non-advantageous section of the slot machine 100.

In this embodiment, the initial state (e.g., the state at the time of shipment from the factory) is set to a non-advantageous zone. When the RAM is cleared (settings are changed), this non-advantageous zone is set. The state of the non-advantageous zone is called normal state A. In this embodiment, three types of advantageous zone states are provided: normal state B, chance state, and AT state (including super AT state). FIG. 7 shows that there are four transition states: normal state A, normal state B, chance state, and AT state. In this embodiment, the advantageous zone flag is set to off if it is a non-advantageous zone, and the advantageous zone flag is set to on if it is an advantageous zone, and the non-advantageous zone and the advantageous zone are distinguished using this advantageous zone flag. In addition, in order to prevent encouraging gambling, it is configured to become a non-advantageous zone when the advantageous zone continues for a predetermined number of games (e.g., 1500 games) or when it exceeds a predetermined net increase in number of coins (e.g., 2400 coins).

The state of the advantageous zone may be only the AT state, or, for example, a precursor state before transitioning to the AT state may also be provided, and is not limited to the configuration of this embodiment. Similarly, there may be multiple types of states for the non-advantageous zone.

Note that since the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section are set separately from RT, for example, there is a case where the transition to RT2 occurs during the advantageous section. However, in RT2, the push order bell is not internally selected and the operation navigation is not displayed, so it is possible to set a non-advantageous section for RT2 and return to the advantageous section after RT2 ends. . Furthermore, the configuration is not limited to the above configuration, and the configuration may be such that the pressing order bell is internally selected in RT2, and the operation navigation is displayed.

The following explains each state of the non-favorable zone and favorable zone.

<Normal state A>
In the non-advantageous section (normal state A), a lottery for transition to the advantageous section is executed based on the internally won combination. If you win this lottery, you will move to the normal state B of the advantageous sections.

<Normal state B>
In the normal state B, the game transitions to the chance state when a transition condition to the chance state is met. When the transition condition is met, the number of games in the chance state is set. Any condition can be adopted for this transition condition, such as a condition that is met by playing a predetermined number of games in the normal state B, a condition that is met when a lottery for transitioning to the chance state is played every time in the normal state B and the lottery is won, or a condition that is met when points (any of 1 to 3) added according to the result of one game in the normal state B are accumulated to a specified number (100 points).

<Chance state>
In the chance state, when a specific winning combination (in this example, a one-card winning combination (small winning combinations 6 to 8)) is internally won, an AT lottery may be performed. If the AT lottery has not been won before the set number of games has elapsed (the number of AT sets is 0), the state shifts to the normal state B, and if the number of AT sets is not 0, the state shifts to the AT state. Upon transition to the AT state, the number of AT sets is subtracted by 1, and a predetermined number of games (for example, 50) is set as the number of remaining AT games.

In the slot machine 100 of the present embodiment, an AT lottery is executed in a chance state, but for example, an AT lottery (addition of the number of AT sets) may be performed when transitioning from a non-advantageous section to an advantageous section. The timing and execution conditions of the AT lottery can be arbitrarily adopted.

In addition, when the AT lottery is won, a notification (operation instruction notification) may be executed that includes a suggestion of the symbol to be stopped (details will be described later). Note that the operation instruction notification is not limited to a notification that includes a suggestion of the symbol to be stopped, and may be, for example, a notification that includes the pressing order (for example, "middle → right → left", "press middle", etc.).

<AT state>
Next, the AT state will be described. Hereinafter, the AT state may be simply referred to as AT.

In the AT state, when a push order bell (minor combination 5) is internally won, an operation navigation showing the corresponding correct push order is displayed. Note that this operation navigation is not limited to the one that shows the push order, but may also show the timing of the stop operation, such as a display such as "Aim for...", or the push order and timing. It may also indicate both. In addition, on the payout number display 127, the 7 segments are lit in a manner corresponding to the order in which the correct answer is pressed (hereinafter sometimes referred to as navigation lighting). The display on the payout number display 127 may also be lit in a manner that corresponds to the timing of the stop operation, or may be lit in a manner that corresponds to both the pressing order and timing. .

In this embodiment, the number of remaining AT games is subtracted as play in the AT state progresses. Then, when the number of remaining AT games reaches 0, if the number of AT sets is greater than 0, a predetermined value (e.g., 50) is set again to the number of remaining AT games, and if the number of AT sets is 0, a lottery is executed to enter the chance state. If the lottery is won, the game moves to the chance state, and if not, the game moves from the advantageous zone to the non-advantageous zone (parameters related to the advantageous zone are initialized). If the game enters a special game state (RT2) during the AT state, the subtraction of the number of remaining AT games stops, and the subtraction resumes when RT0 is reached. The number of remaining AT games may be added by winning an additional lottery (executed during an internal lottery in this embodiment).

Note that the AT state is not limited to the configuration using the number of AT sets or the number of remaining AT games, but may be such that the AT state is started and ended according to a predetermined condition (for example, when a specific gaming state is reached).

<Processing Overview>
Below, the processing of the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500 will be explained using the drawings.

<Main processing of main control unit>
First, the main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to Fig. 8. Note that Fig. 8 is a flow chart showing the flow of the main control unit main process.

As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a startup signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs a startup signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input is reset-started by a reset interrupt and executes the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 8 in accordance with the control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

When the power is turned on, first, main control unit initialization processing is performed in step S101. In this main control unit initialization process, the stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, interrupts are disabled, the I/O 310 is initialized, various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the WDT 314 is set. Permit operation and set initial values.

In step S103, a game start process is executed. In this process, it is checked whether or not medals have been inserted (handled or operated by bet buttons 130 and 132), and the winning line display lamp 120 is turned on in response to the insertion of medals. Furthermore, when medals are inserted, preparations are made to send an insertion command to the first sub-control unit 400 indicating that medals have been inserted. Note that if the player wins a replay in the previous game, the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game are inserted, so there is no need for the player to insert medals. Also, it checks whether the start lever 135 has been operated while the specified number (3) of medals have been used, and if the start lever 135 has been operated, the number of inserted medals and the valid winning line are checked. Confirm and start playing.

In step S105, various lottery processes including an internal winning combination lottery process and the like are executed. In this process, the internal winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 306 is read out according to the current RT, and an internal lottery (winning combination) is performed using this and the random number value obtained from the random number generation circuit 316. Determine internally elected roles. As a result of the internal lottery, if any winning combination (including the activated winning combination) is internally won, the flag for that winning combination will be turned on. Further, in this step S105, preparations are made to transmit to the first sub-control unit 400 an internal lottery command including internal winning information indicating the result of the winning combination internal lottery. For example, when a re-gaming combination (replay) is internally won, preparations are made to send an internal lottery command indicating that the re-gaming combination (replay) has been internally won to the first sub-control unit 400, and the winning combination is If the result of the internal lottery is a loss (non-winning of the winning combination), preparations are made to transmit an internal lottery command indicating the loss to the first sub-control unit 400. In addition to the information on the internal winning combination, the internal winning command includes information on the current advantageous section (if the period is limited, it includes information on the number of remaining games such as the number of remaining AT games), and the AT lottery. and information that can identify the result of the AT additional lottery. Of the above information, the information regarding the number of AT remaining games may not be included in the internal winning command in the non-AT state, but may be included in the internal winning command only in the AT state. Furthermore, in the AT state, the internal winning command that includes the internal winning of the push order bell (small role 5) also includes operation instruction information that indicates the correct operating order of the stop buttons 137 to 139 (pressing order). included.

In step S111, reel stop data corresponding to the first stop operation is prepared based on the result of the internal winning combination lottery. This reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control section 300.

In step S113, on the condition that the game interval timer (which is subtracted in the timer update process described below) is 0, a reel rotation start process is executed, causing the reels 110 to 112 to start rotating. In addition, when the reels 110 to 112 start rotating, preparations are made to send a reel rotation start command to the first sub-control unit 400. After that, when the reels 110 to 112 reach a predetermined rotation speed and the optical sensors provided on each reel detect and grasp the pattern positions of each reel, the stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is enabled. Note that the game interval counter guarantees the minimum time required for one game (4.1 seconds in this embodiment), reducing the risk of gambling.

In step S115, reel stop control processing is executed. In this process, when any of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is pressed after the stop operation is enabled, the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to the pressed stop button 137 to 139 are stopped. Specifically, each time a stop operation is performed, a stop table of reel stop data is referred to, and the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to the stop operation are stopped according to the number of drawn frames set in the stop table. Further, for the first stop operation, reel stop data corresponding to the second stop operation is prepared, and for the second stop operation, reel stop data corresponding to the third stop operation is prepared. Note that for each stop operation, preparations are made to send the corresponding command (first to third press commands) to the first sub-control unit 400, and each time the reels 110 to 112 stop, the corresponding command (the first to third press commands) is prepared. Preparations are made for transmitting the first to third stop commands) to the first sub-control unit 400. When all the reels 110 to 112 have stopped, the process advances to step S117.

In step S117, winning determination processing is performed. Here, if a symbol combination corresponding to some winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. For example, if "Watermelon-Watermel-Watermelon" are aligned on the activated winning line, it is determined that the small winning combination 1 has been won. Note that after determining the winning combination, preparations are made for transmitting the winning command to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S119, if a winning combination with a payout has been won, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is awarded (paid out), and the number of medals awarded is displayed using the payout number display 127.

In step S121, RT update processing is performed. In this process, RT is transitioned based on the conditions shown in the state transition diagram shown in FIG.

In step S123, a game state update process is performed. Here, the status regarding the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section described in FIG. 7 is updated based on the result of the game. For example, when transitioning from normal state A to normal state B, the advantageous section flag is set to ON, and when transitioning from AT state to normal state A, the advantageous section flag is set to OFF. Also, preparations are made to send a gaming state update command. This command includes information regarding RT, information regarding non-advantageous sections and advantageous sections (for example, advantageous section flag, number of AT sets, and number of AT remaining games).

This completes one game. After this, the game will proceed by returning to step S103 and repeating the above-mentioned process.

<Main control unit 300 timer interrupt processing>
Next, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to Fig. 9. Note that Fig. 9 is a flow chart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined period (approximately once every 2 ms in this embodiment). Start processing at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start processing, processing for temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 in the stack area is performed.

In step S203, the WDT 314 is periodically (maintained) so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt occurs (so that an abnormality in processing is not detected). In the embodiment, the restart is performed (once every 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main control unit timer interrupt).

In step S205, an input port status update process is performed. In this input port status update process, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input ports of the I/O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and the presence or absence of the detection signals is stored in signal status storage areas partitioned for each of the various sensors 318 in the RAM 308. The status of the optical sensors is confirmed in this process.

In step S207, various game processes are executed, and processes are executed according to the interrupt status (various interrupt statuses are acquired based on signals from various sensors 318). For example, if the interrupt status is during medal insertion processing, medal insertion acceptance processing is executed, and if the interrupt status is during payout processing, medal payout processing is executed.

In step S209, a timer update process is performed. For example, a process is executed to update various timers according to their respective time units, such as subtracting from the game interval timer.

In step S211, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands that have been prepared for transmission in the main processing, timer interrupt processing, etc. of the main control section 300 are transmitted to the first sub-control section 400. Note that the output schedule information sent to the first sub-control unit 400 includes strobe information (when on, it indicates that data is being set), command type (in this embodiment, basic command, input command, and start lever). Reception command, internal winning command, performance command associated with performance lottery processing, reel rotation start command associated with the start of rotation of reels 110 to 112, first to third press commands associated with acceptance of operation of stop buttons 137 to 139, reel Consists of the first to third stop commands associated with the stop of 110 to 112, winning command, payout number command and payout end command associated with medal payout processing, status update command), and command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type) has been done.

In the first sub-control unit 400, depending on the command type included in the received output schedule information, it becomes possible to determine performance control according to changes in game control in the main control unit 300, and also to determine the performance control according to the change in game control in the main control unit 300. Based on the information of the command data, it becomes possible to determine the content of production control.

In step S213, external signal setting processing is performed. In this external signal setting process, the gaming information stored in the RAM 308 is outputted to the information input circuit 652, which is separate from the slot machine 100, via the information output circuit 334.

In step S215, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S205, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out, and the presence or absence of errors related to medal insertion abnormalities, medal dispensing abnormalities, etc. is monitored, and if an error is detected, (Illustration omitted) Executes error handling. Furthermore, settings are made for the medal selector 170 (a medal blocker operated by a solenoid provided in the medal selector 170), various lamps 339, and various 7-segment (SEG) indicators according to the current gaming state.

In step S217, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. If a low voltage signal is received (if a power interruption is detected), the process proceeds to step S221, and if a low voltage signal is not received (if a power interruption is not detected), the process proceeds to step S219.

In step S219, timer interrupt termination processing is performed. In this timer interrupt termination process, processes such as setting the values of each register temporarily saved in step S201 to each original register are performed. Thereafter, the process returns to the main control section main processing shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S221, information that needs to be saved such as specific variables and stack pointers for returning to the state at the time of power outage upon power restoration is saved to a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and a predetermined area including at least the used area of the RAM 308 is saved. A checksum value for the area is derived and stored in the RAM 308, and a power flag indicating that power-off processing has been performed is set on.

<Processing of first sub-control unit 400>
Next, the processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be explained using FIG. 10. Note that FIG. 10A is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 10(b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing by the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 10(c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing by the first sub-control unit 400.

First, in step S301, various initial settings are performed. This initial setting is executed when the power is turned on. In this process, initial settings of the input/output ports, initialization of the storage area in the RAM 408, etc. are performed. In this process, an area for storing internal winning information, which is information representing the result of internal winning, and an area for storing RT update information, which is information representing the gaming state, are provided in the RAM 408, respectively.

In step S303, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process moves to step S305.

In step S305, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S307, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the main control unit 300, is executed.

In step S309, production control processing is performed. Here, the processing includes processing to expand the effect data and setting device data in the effect execution area provided in the RAM 408, processing to set the effect data in the effect reservation area provided in the RAM 408, and furthermore, the received command Based on the information included in the command, processing such as setting performance data and executing control processing is performed. Note that the performance data set in the performance reservation area and the device data set in the performance execution area may be updated (overwritten) with other data. In this case, the presentation content is changed based on the overwritten data.

In step S311, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, control data is obtained from the device data set in the performance execution area corresponding to the speakers 272 and 277, and the obtained control data is output to the sound source IC 418 to execute a sound performance.

In step S313, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, control data is obtained from the device data set in the performance execution area corresponding to each of the lamps 420, and the obtained control data is output to the drive circuit 422 to cause the lamps to perform a performance.

In step S315, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, control data is obtained from the device data set in the performance execution area corresponding to the shutter 163, and the obtained control data is output to the drive circuit 424, thereby causing the shutter 163 to perform a performance.

In step S317, an information output process is performed to set up the transmission of a control command to the second sub-control unit 500 based on the processing result of step S309. For example, if there is device data set in the performance execution area corresponding to the performance image display device 157, preparations are made to transmit this device data to the second sub-control unit 500, and the process returns to step S303.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. 10(b). This command reception interrupt processing is processing that is executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main control unit 300. In step S321 of the command reception interrupt processing, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command memory area provided in the RAM 408.

Next, the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. 10(c). The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and uses this timer interrupt as a trigger to perform timer interrupt processing in a predetermined manner. Execute at the cycle of

In step S331, the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub-control unit main processing shown in FIG. 10(a) is incremented by 1 and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S303, the timer variable value is determined to be 10 or greater every 20 ms (2 ms x 10).

In step S333, the device data set in step S315 is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500, and the random value for effect is updated.

<Processing of second sub-control unit 500>
Next, the processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 11. Note that FIG. 11A is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 11(b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing by the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 11C is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing by the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 11(d) is a flowchart of image control processing by the second sub-control unit 500.

First, in step S401 of FIG. 11(a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S401. In this initialization process, initialization of input/output ports, initialization of the storage area in the RAM 508, etc. are performed.

In step S403, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process moves to step S405.

In step S405, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S407, command processing is performed. In the command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 .

In step S409, performance control processing is performed. Specifically, if a new command is received in step S407, processing corresponding to this command is performed. For example, processing is executed to read performance data for image control related to the background image from ROM 506. In addition, processing is executed to read other performance data from ROM 506, and if the performance data needs to be updated, processing to update the performance data is executed.

In step S411, image control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S409. For example, if there is an image control command in the effect data read in step S409, image control corresponding to this command is performed. For example, image control regarding display images (notification images, background images) is performed. This image control processing will be described later using FIG. 11(d). When this image control process ends, the process returns to step S403.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 11(b). This command reception interrupt processing is processing that is executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first sub-control unit 400. In step S415 of the command reception interrupt processing, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command memory area provided in RAM 508.

Next, the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 11(c). The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and uses this timer interrupt as a trigger to perform timer interrupt processing in a predetermined manner. Execute at the cycle of

In step S417, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S403 in the second sub-control unit main processing shown in FIG. 11A, and the value is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S403, it is determined that the value of the timer variable is 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S419, processing for updating the random number value for effect, etc. is performed.

Next, the image control processing of step S411 in the main processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 11(d). This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the image control processing.

In step S421, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the drawing area of display area A and display area B of the VRAM 518. As a result, one frame of image stored in a display area not designated as a drawing area is displayed on the performance image display device 157. Next, the CPU 504 sets the ROM coordinates (the source address of ROM 506), the VRAM coordinates (the destination address of VRAM 518), etc. in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then sets a command to start transferring image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the command set in the attribute register. The VDP 516 then outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S423, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 has been input. If the transfer end interrupt signal has been input, the process advances to step S425; otherwise, the transfer end interrupt signal is input. wait until

In step S425, parameters are set based on the performance scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S421, the CPU 504 displays information on image data constituting the display image (coordinate axes of the VRAM 518, image size , VRAM coordinates (placement coordinates), image overlay and transparency, etc.) to the VDP 516. The VDP 516 performs parameter settings according to attributes based on instructions stored in the attribute register.

In step S427, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to instructions from the CPU 504.

In step S429, it is determined whether a generation end interrupt signal has been input from VDP516 based on the end of image drawing. If a generation end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S431; if not, the process waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S431, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<<Embodiment C>>
Next, a gaming machine (slot machine) according to embodiment C will be described with reference to Figures 12 and 13. Note that for terms that overlap with other embodiments, the terms of this embodiment take precedence, and for descriptions that overlap with drawings other than Figures 12 and 13, the descriptions in Figures 12 and 13 take precedence.

<Notification Means>
Next, prior to the description of various notifications, a notification means provided in the slot machine 100 will be described.

<Notification means (display means)>
The slot machine 100 includes a display means that can display information as one of the notification means. Examples of the display means included in the slot machine 100 include the liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157, the payout number display 127, the stored number display 125, the game information display 126, etc. described using FIG. In this example, these display means are comprised of a liquid crystal display, an LED, a segment display, and the like.

<Notification Means (Sound Output Means)>
The slot machine 100 includes a sound output means capable of outputting sound as one of the notification means. Examples of the sound output means included in the slot machine 100 include the speakers 272 and 277 described with reference to FIG.

<Notification means (light emitting means)>
The slot machine 100 includes a light emitting means capable of emitting (outputting) light as one of the notification means. Examples of the light emitting means provided in the slot machine 100 include the side lamp 144, title panel (lamp) 162, production button 190, stop buttons 137 to 139, and start lever 135 described using FIG. 1, as well as the upper lamp 142 ( (see FIG. 14), reel backlights (not shown) for each reel 110 to 112, and in this example, all of these light emitting means are composed of LEDs.

The effect button 190, the stop buttons (stop operation means) 137 to 139, and the start lever 135 also function as operation means that can be operated by the player. The present invention can also be applied to pachinko machines, and examples of the light-emitting means that pachinko machines are equipped with include frame lamps, effect buttons, and gadgets.

<Stop instruction notification>
Next, the stop instruction notification will be described. Here, the stop instruction notification is a notification (for example, operation navigation) including a suggestion of a symbol to be stopped, and the notification means of the gaming machine according to this embodiment may execute a first operation instruction notification including a suggestion of a first symbol to be stopped, and a second operation instruction notification including a suggestion of a second symbol to be stopped.

<First stop instruction notification>
FIG. 12 is a chronological diagram showing an example of a notification when a first operation instruction notification is made in a certain game, and the state shown in FIG. 12(a) is the state when the first operation instruction notification is executed in a certain game.

In this example, when the start lever 135 is pressed down, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating, and when the AT lottery is won in the chance state, the first operation instruction is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. Notification ID 1 is being executed.

The first operation instruction notification is a notification that includes a suggestion of the first symbol that the goal is to stop. In this example, as the first operation instruction notification ID1, the Seven 1 symbol ( Target symbol notification ID1a (in this example, includes an image of the Seven 1 symbol and the character string "Aim!") that prompts the stop button 137 to 139 to be stopped so that the first symbol (first symbol) is stopped and displayed. display) and press order notification ID1b that suggests the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are pressed (in this example, a display that suggests that the stop operation is performed in the order of middle stop button 138 → right stop button 139 → left stop button 137) ) is running.

Note that the first operation instruction notification is not limited to this example, and may be any notification that includes a suggestion of the first symbol whose goal is to stop, for example, when the stop buttons 137 to 139 are pressed. The notification may not include the pressing order notification ID1b indicating the order, or may be a notification consisting only of a character string such as "Aim for blue 7", or in addition to the notification by the display means ( Alternatively, notification by sound output means such as the speakers 272 and 277 (for example, outputting a voice saying "Aim for Blue 7") may be applied.

Further, the execution conditions for the first operation instruction notification are not limited to this example. For example, if a predetermined internal winning combination is won (or won), if a specific gaming state is entered, the points are reduced to a specified number ( For example, it may be the case that up to 100 points have been accumulated.

<First stop instruction notification -> First stop mode -> Execution of first notification>
The state shown in FIG. 12(b-1) is a state in which the reels 110 to 112 are stopped in the first stopping pattern in a game in which the first operation instruction notification is executed.

The notification means of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is configured such that the reels are in a first stop state (in this example, "7 When the game stops at the symbol combination "1-Seven 1-Seven 1", at least the first notification is executed in the game.

In the state shown in FIG. 12(b-1), in a game in which the first operation instruction notification ID1 (first operation instruction notification) is executed, the player follows the first operation instruction notification ID1 and performs the stopping operation in the order of the center stop button 138, right stop button 139, and left stop button 137, aiming for the Seven 1 symbol, and the reels 110 to 112 stop with the symbol combination (first stopping mode) of "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1" (the symbol combination (first stopping mode) of "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1" is aligned on the winning line L1), so the first notification RD1 (first notification. In this example, a display including an image of the Seven 1 symbol, the character string "GET!", and an effect image) is executed.

In addition, in a game in which the first operation instruction notification is executed as a result of winning the AT lottery, the next game after the reels 110 to 112 stop in the first stopping pattern (in this example, the symbol combination "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1") will transition to the AT state and start the AT game, as shown in FIG. 12(d).

In addition, in this example, the first stopping mode is a mode in which the first symbol (in this example, the 7 1 symbol) is stopped on all reels, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first stopping mode is a mode in which the first symbol (in this example, the 7 1 symbol) is stopped. Other symbol combinations may be used, including the first symbol that targets.

The first notification is not limited to this example, and may be, for example, a notification consisting of only a character string such as "Congratulations on the blue 7." In addition to (or instead of) a notification by a display means, a notification by a sound output means such as speakers 272, 277 (for example, outputting a voice saying "Congratulations on the blue 7") or a notification by a light emitting means such as upper lamp 142 or side lamp 144 (for example, flashing red) may be applied.

The timing of the first notification may be when the first operation instruction notification ID1 (first operation instruction notification) is executed and only in a game in which the reels stop in the first stopping pattern, or in addition to that game, it may be executed in any game after that game.

<First stop instruction notification → second stop mode → non-execution of first notification>
The state shown in FIG. 12(b-4) is a state in which the reels 110 to 112 are stopped in the second stopping mode in a game in which the first operation instruction notification is executed.

The notification means of the game machine according to the present embodiment is configured such that the reels are in a second stop mode (in this example, "7 When the game stops at the symbol combination ``3-73-73'', at least the first notification is not executed in the game.

In the state shown in FIG. 12(b-4), in a game in which the first operation instruction notification ID1 (first operation instruction notification) is executed, the player does not follow the first operation instruction notification ID1, but instead performs the stopping operation in the order of the center stop button 138, right stop button 139, and left stop button 137, aiming for the Seven 3 symbol, and the reels 110 to 112 stop with the symbol combination of "Seven 3-Seven 3-Seven 3" (second stopping mode) (the symbol combination of "Seven 3-Seven 3-Seven 3" (second stopping mode) is aligned on the winning line L1), so the first notification RD1 (first notification; in this example, a display including an image of the Seven 1 symbol, the character string "GET!", and an effect image) shown in FIG. 12(b-1) is not executed.

According to this example, in a game in which the first operation instruction notification (in this example, the first operation instruction notification ID 1 shown in FIG. 12(a)) is executed, the reels are in the first stop mode (in this example, When it stops at the symbol combination "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1", at least the first notification in the game (in this example, the first notification RD1 shown in FIG. 12(b-1)) is executed. , when the reels stop in the second stop mode (in this example, the symbol combination "Seven 3-Seven 3-Seven 3") in a game where the first operation instruction notification is executed, at least the first operation instruction notification is executed in the game. Since this is not carried out, the notification can be made without misunderstanding the player, the player will not be misunderstood, and it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from decreasing.

In addition, the first stopping mode is a mode in which the first symbol (in this example, the seven 1 symbol) is stopped on all reels, and the second stopping mode is a mode in which the second symbol (main symbol in this example) is stopped on all reels. In the example, since the 73 symbol) is in a stopped state, the symbol suggested by the first operation instruction notification can be stopped and displayed, and the player will not be confused.

In addition, in this example, the second stopping mode is a mode in which the second symbol (in this example, 7 3 symbols) is stopped on all the reels, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the second stopping mode is a mode in which the second symbol (in this example, the 7 3 symbol) is stopped. Other symbol combinations that do not include the first symbol aiming at this may be used.

Further, the non-execution timing of the first notification may be only for a game in which the first operation instruction notification ID1 (first operation instruction notification) is executed and the reels are stopped in the second stop mode, In addition to the game, any game after the game may not be executed.

<First stop instruction notification→fourth stop mode→non-execution of first notification>
The state shown in FIG. 12(b-2) is a state in which the reels 110 to 112 are stopped in the fourth stopping pattern in a game in which the first operation instruction notification is executed.

The notification means of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is configured such that the reels are in a fourth stop state (in this example, the first If the game stops in a stopping mode other than the stopping mode, the second stopping mode, and the third stopping mode (so-called loose ends), at least the first notification is not executed in the game.

In the state shown in FIG. 12(b-2), in a game in which the first operation instruction notification ID1 (first operation instruction notification) is executed, the player performs the stop operation in the order of the center stop button 138, right stop button 139, and left stop button 137 in accordance with the first operation instruction notification ID1, aiming for the Seven 1 symbol (or the player performs the stop operation of the stop buttons 137-139 without following the first operation instruction notification ID1), but the reels 110-112 stop with the symbol combination of "Bell-Seven 1-Replay" (fourth stop mode) (the symbol combination of "Bell-Seven 1-Replay" (fourth stop mode) is aligned on the winning line L1), so the first notification RD1 (first notification. In this example, a display including an image of the Seven 1 symbol, the character string "GET!", and an effect image) shown in FIG. 12(b-1) is not executed.

According to this example, in a game in which the first operation instruction notification (in this example, the first operation instruction notification ID 1 shown in FIG. 12(a)) is executed, the reels do not have a specific symbol on all the reels. When stopping in the fourth stopping mode (in this example, stopping modes other than the first stopping mode, the second stopping mode, and the third stopping mode (so-called loose ends)), at least Since the first notification (in this example, the first notification RD1 shown in FIG. 12(b-1)) is not executed in the game, the notification can be made without misleading the player, and the player This prevents players from misunderstanding and prevents players from losing their desire to play.

In addition, in this example, the fourth stopping mode is a mode in which a specific symbol (in this example, any one of the 7 1 symbol, 7 2 symbol, and 7 3 symbol) is stopped on all the reels. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be an embodiment in which other specific symbols are not aligned and stopped.

Further, the non-execution timing of the first notification may be only for a game in which the first operation instruction notification ID1 (first operation instruction notification) is executed and the reels are stopped in the fourth stop mode, In addition to the game, any game after the game may not be executed.

<First stop instruction notification → Third stop mode → Execution of third notification>
The state shown in FIG. 12(b-3) is a state in which the reels 110 to 112 are stopped in the third stopping mode in the game in which the first operation instruction notification is executed.

The notification means of the gaming machine in this embodiment is configured to execute the third notification at least in a game when the reels stop in a third stopping pattern (in this example, the symbol combination "Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2") in a game in which a first operation instruction notification (in this example, first operation instruction notification ID 1) is executed.

In the state shown in FIG. 12(b-3), in a game in which the first operation instruction notification ID1 (first operation instruction notification) is executed, the player does not follow the first operation instruction notification ID1, and seven Aiming at the symbols, perform the stop operation in the order of middle stop button 138 → right stop button 139 → left stop button 137, and the reels 110 to 112 will appear in the symbol combination "Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2" (the third stop Since the symbol combination "Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2" (third stop pattern) has been completed on the winning line L1), the third notification RD3 (third notification. This example In this case, a display including an image of the Seven 2 symbol, a character string saying "Get!", and an effect image) is executed.

In addition, in a game in which the first operation instruction notification is executed as a result of winning the AT lottery, the next game after the reels 110 to 112 stop in the third stopping pattern (in this example, the symbol combination "Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2") will transition to the AT state and start the AT game, as shown in FIG. 12(d).

According to this example, in a game in which the first operation instruction notification (in this example, the first operation instruction notification ID 1 shown in FIG. In this example, when the 7 2 symbol) stops in the third stopping mode (in this example, the symbol combination ``7 2 - 7 2 - 7 2''), at least the third notification ( In this example, in order to execute the third notification RD3) shown in FIG. 12(b-3), it is possible to make it appear that the reels have stopped in the first stop mode in which the first notification is executed. It is possible to increase the player's interest.

In this example, the third stop pattern is a pattern in which the third symbol (in this example, the seven 2 symbols) stops on all reels, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be another symbol combination that does not include the first symbol that is the target to stop.

The third notification is not limited to this example, and may be, for example, a notification consisting of only a character string such as "Congratulations on the red 7." In addition to (or instead of) a notification by a display means, a notification by a sound output means such as speakers 272, 277 (for example, outputting a voice saying "Congratulations on the red 7") or a notification by a light emitting means such as upper lamp 142 or side lamp 144 (for example, flashing yellow light) may be applied.

Further, the execution timing of the third notification may be only for a game in which the first operation instruction notification ID1 (first operation instruction notification) is executed and the reels have stopped in the third stop mode, or In addition to the game, it may be executed in any game after the game.

<Temporary suspension of the first suspension mode>
The state shown in Figure 12 (c-2) is the state in which reel presentation is being executed in the next game after the reels 110 to 112 have stopped in the second stopping pattern in a game in which the first operation instruction notification has been executed, and Figure 12 (c-1) is the state in which reel presentation is being executed in the next game after the reels 110 to 112 have stopped in the fourth stopping pattern in a game in which the first operation instruction notification has been executed.

In the gaming machine according to this embodiment, after the reels stop in the second stop mode (or after the reels stop in the fourth stop mode), the first stop mode (in this example, " It is configured to stop at the symbol combination "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1".

In the state shown in FIG. 12(c-2), after executing the first operation instruction notification ID1 in a certain game as shown in FIG. 12(a), as shown in FIG. 12(b-4), The reels 110 to 112 are not in the first stop mode (in this example, the symbol combination "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1"), but in the symbol combination "Seven 3-Seven 3-Seven 3" (second pattern). Although the first notification RD1 shown in FIG. 12(b-1) is not executed since the stop mode has been stopped in the stop mode), in the next game of a certain game, the reel production will be performed in response to the pressing operation of the start lever 135. is started, and the reel is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the first stop mode (in this example, the symbol combination "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1") as the reel performance, and after executing the first notification RD1. , has started AT gaming.

According to this example, the reels can be stopped in the second stopping mode and then in the first stopping mode, which can increase the player's interest. Also, even if the reels stop in the second stopping mode in a certain game, the first notification can be executed in the next or subsequent games of the certain game, which can surprise the player.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 12(c-1), after executing the first operation instruction notification ID1 in a certain game as shown in FIG. 12(a), as shown in FIG. 12(b-2), In this case, the reels 110 to 112 are not in the first stopping pattern (in this example, the symbol combination "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1") but in the symbol combination "Bell-Seven 1-Replay" (the fourth symbol combination). Although the first notification RD1 shown in FIG. 12(b-1) is not executed since the stop mode has been stopped in the stop mode), in the next game of a certain game, the reel production will be performed in response to the pressing operation of the start lever 135. is started, and the reel is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the first stop mode (in this example, the symbol combination "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1") as the reel performance, and after executing the first notification RD1. , has started AT gaming.

According to this example, since the reels can be stopped in the first stopping mode after being stopped in the fourth stopping mode, it is possible to increase the player's interest. In addition, even if the reels stop in the fourth stop mode in a certain game, the first notification can be executed in the next game after the certain game, so there is no need to surprise the player. can.

<Second stop instruction notification>
FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of notification in chronological order when the second operation instruction is notified in a certain game, and the state shown in FIG. This is the state in which notification has been executed.

In this example, when the start lever 135 is pressed down, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating, and when the super AT lottery is won in the chance state, a second operation is performed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. Instruction notification ID2 is being executed.

The second operation instruction notification is a notification that includes a suggestion of a second symbol that the goal is to stop, and in this example, as the second operation instruction notification ID2, the seven 3 symbol ( Target symbol notification ID 2a (in this example, includes an image of the Seven 3 symbol and the character string “Aim!” display) and press order notification ID2b that suggests the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are pressed (in this example, a display that suggests that the stop operation is performed in the order of middle stop button 138 → right stop button 139 → left stop button 137) ) is running.

The second operation instruction notification is not limited to this example, and may be any notification that includes a notification that includes a suggestion of the second symbol that is the target to be stopped. For example, it may be a notification that does not include the push order notification ID 2b that suggests the order in which to press the stop buttons 137 to 139, or a notification that consists only of a character string such as "Aim for the gold 7". In addition to (or instead of) a notification by a display means, a notification by a sound output means such as speakers 272, 277 (for example, outputting a sound such as "Aim for the gold 7") may be applied.

Furthermore, the conditions for executing the second operation instruction notification are not limited to this example, and may be, for example, when a specific internal winning combination is won (or a prize is awarded), when a specific game state is reached, when a set number of points are accumulated (for example, 100 points), etc.

<Second stop instruction notification → second stop mode → execution of second notification>
The state shown in FIG. 13(b-4) is a state in which the reels 110 to 112 are stopped in the second stopping mode in a game in which the second operation instruction notification is executed.

The notification means of the gaming machine in this embodiment is configured to execute the second notification at least in a game when the reels stop in a second stopping pattern (in this example, the symbol combination "Seven 3-Seven 3-Seven 3") in a game in which a second operation instruction notification (in this example, second operation instruction notification ID2) is executed.

In the state shown in FIG. 13(b-4), in a game in which the second operation instruction notification ID2 (second operation instruction notification) is executed, the player performs the stopping operation in the order of the center stop button 138, right stop button 139, and left stop button 137 in accordance with the second operation instruction notification ID2, aiming for the Seven 3 symbol, and the reels 110 to 112 stop with the symbol combination (second stopping mode) of "Seven 3-Seven 3-Seven 3" (the symbol combination (second stopping mode) of "Seven 3-Seven 3-Seven 3" is aligned on the winning line L1), so the second notification RD2 (second notification. In this example, a display including an image of the Seven 3 symbol, the character string "GET!", and an effect image) is executed.

In addition, in a game in which the second operation instruction notification is executed as a result of winning the super AT lottery, the next game after the reels 110 to 112 stop in the second stopping pattern (in this example, the symbol combination "Seven 3-Seven 3-Seven 3") will transition to the super AT state, which is more advantageous to the player than the AT state, as shown in FIG. 13(d), and the super AT game will begin.

As mentioned above, in the next game after stopping in the first stopping mode (in this example, the symbol combination "Seven 1 - Seven 1 - Seven 1"), the second In the next game after stopping in the stopping mode (in this example, the symbol combination "Seven 3-Seven 3-Seven 3"), the game will shift to a super AT state that is more advantageous to the player than the AT state. The second stopping pattern (in this example, the symbol combination "Seven 3-Seven 3-Seven 3") is better than the first stopping pattern (in this example, the symbol combination "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1"). ) has higher value as a symbol combination.

In addition, in the next game after stopping in the third stopping mode (in this example, the symbol combination "Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2"), the first stopping mode ( In this example, the symbol combination "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1") and the third stop mode (in this example, the symbol combination "Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2") are the symbol combinations. have the same value.

In addition, in this example, the second stopping mode is a mode in which the second symbol (in this example, 7 3 symbols) is stopped on all the reels, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the second stopping mode is a mode in which the second symbol (in this example, the 7 3 symbol) is stopped. Other symbol combinations may be used, including a second symbol that targets.

Further, the second notification is not limited to this example, and may be, for example, a notification consisting only of a character string such as "Congratulations on Friday 7", or in addition to (or instead of) the notification by the display means. ), notifications by sound output means such as the speakers 272 and 277 (for example, outputting a voice saying "Congratulations on Friday 7") and notifications by light emission means such as the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 (for example, flashing red). May be applied.

The second notification may be executed only when the second operation instruction notification ID2 (second operation instruction notification) is executed and the reels stop in the second stopping pattern, or may be executed in addition to the game in question and in any game thereafter.

<Second stop instruction notification → first stop mode → non-execution of second notification>
The state shown in FIG. 13(b-1) is a state in which the reels 110 to 112 are stopped in the first stop mode in a game in which the second operation instruction notification is executed.

The notification means of the game machine according to the present embodiment is configured such that the reels are in the first stop state (in this example, "7 When the game stops at the symbol combination "1-Seven 1-Seven 1", the second notification is not executed at least in the game.

In the state shown in FIG. 12(b-1), in a game in which the second operation instruction notification ID2 (second operation instruction notification) is executed, the player does not follow the second operation instruction notification ID2, but instead performs the stopping operation in the order of the center stop button 138, right stop button 139, and left stop button 137, aiming for the Seven 1 symbol, and the reels 110 to 112 stop with the symbol combination of "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1" (first stopping mode) (the symbol combination (first stopping mode) of "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1" is aligned on the winning line L1), so the second notification RD2 (second notification; in this example, a display including an image of a Seven 3 symbol, the character string "GET!", and an effect image) shown in FIG. 13(b-4) is not executed.

According to this example, when the reels stop in the second stop mode (in this example, the symbol combination "Seven 3-Seven 3-Seven 3") in a game in which the second operation instruction notification (in this example, the second operation instruction notification ID2 shown in FIG. 13(a)) is executed, the second notification (in this example, the second notification RD2 shown in FIG. 12(b-4)) is executed at least in that game, whereas when the reels stop in the first stop mode (in this example, the symbol combination "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1") in a game in which the second operation instruction notification is executed, the second notification is not executed at least in that game. Therefore, the notification can be executed in a way that does not mislead the player, the player will not misunderstand, and a decline in the player's motivation to play can be prevented in advance.

In addition, the first stopping mode is a mode in which the first symbol (in this example, the seven 1 symbol) is stopped on all reels, and the second stopping mode is a mode in which the second symbol (main symbol in this example) is stopped on all reels. In the example, since the 73 symbol) is in a stopped state, the symbol suggested by the second operation instruction notification can be stopped and displayed, and the player will not be confused.

In addition, in this example, the first stopping mode is a mode in which the first symbol (in this example, the 7 1 symbol) is stopped on all reels, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first stopping mode is a mode in which the first symbol (in this example, the 7 1 symbol) is stopped. Other symbol combinations that do not include the first symbol aiming at this may be used.

Further, the non-execution timing of the second notification may be only for a game in which the second operation instruction notification ID2 (second operation instruction notification) is executed and the reels are stopped in the first stop mode, In addition to the game, any game after the game may not be executed.

<Second stop instruction notification -> Fourth stop mode -> Non-execution of second notification>
The state shown in FIG. 13(b-2) is a state in which the reels 110 to 112 are stopped in the fourth stopping pattern in a game in which the second operation instruction notification is executed.

The notification means of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is configured such that the reels are in a fourth stop state (in this example, the first If the game stops in a stopping mode other than the stopping mode, the second stopping mode, and the third stopping mode (so-called loose ends), the second notification is not executed at least in the game.

In the state shown in FIG. 13(b-2), in a game in which the second operation instruction notification ID2 (second operation instruction notification) is executed, the player performs the stop operation in the order of the center stop button 138, right stop button 139, and left stop button 137 in accordance with the second operation instruction notification ID2, aiming for the Seven 3 symbol (or the player performs the stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 without following the second operation instruction notification ID2), but the reels 110 to 112 stop with the symbol combination of "Bell-Seven 1-Replay" (fourth stop mode) (the symbol combination of "Bell-Seven 1-Replay" (fourth stop mode) is aligned on the winning line L1), so the second notification RD2 (second notification. In this example, a display including an image of the Seven 3 symbol, the character string "GET!", and an effect image) shown in FIG. 13(b-4) is not executed.

According to this example, when the reels stop in a fourth stop pattern (in this example, a stop pattern other than the first, second, and third stop patterns (so-called scattered patterns)) in which all reels stop without a specific pattern being lined up in a game in which the second operation instruction notification (in this example, the second operation instruction notification ID2 shown in FIG. 13(a)) is executed, at least in that game, the second notification (in this example, the second notification RD2 shown in FIG. 13(b-4)) is not executed, so that the notification can be given in a way that does not mislead the player, the player will not misunderstand, and a decline in the player's motivation to play can be prevented in advance.

In this example, the fourth stopping mode is a mode in which the reels stop without a specific pattern (in this example, any one of the seven-one, seven-two, and seven-three symbols) lining up on all the reels, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the reels may stop without a specific pattern lining up.

The timing for not executing the second notification may be only for the game in which the second operation instruction notification ID2 (second operation instruction notification) is executed and the reels stop in the fourth stopping pattern, or may be non-execution in any game after that game in addition to that game.

<Second stop instruction notification -> third stop mode -> non-execution of second notification>
The state shown in FIG. 13(b-3) is a state in which the reels 110 to 112 are stopped in the third stopping pattern in a game in which the second operation instruction notification is executed.

The notification means of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is configured such that the reels are in a third stop mode (in this example, "7 When the game stops at the symbol combination "2-Seven 2-Seven 2", the second notification is not executed at least in the game.

In the state shown in FIG. 13(b-3), in the game in which the second operation instruction notification ID2 (second operation instruction notification) is executed, the player does not follow the second operation instruction notification ID2, Aiming at the symbols, perform the stop operation in the order of middle stop button 138 → right stop button 139 → left stop button 137, and the reels 110 to 112 will appear in the symbol combination "Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2" (the third stop Since the symbol combination “Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2” (third stop pattern) has been completed on the winning line L1), the second notification shown in FIG. 13 (b-4) RD2 (second notification; in this example, a display including an image of a 73 symbol, a character string "Get!", and an effect image) is not executed.

According to this example, when the reels stop in a third stop mode (in this example, the symbol combination "Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2") in which all reels do not display a specific symbol in a game in which the second operation instruction notification (in this example, the second operation instruction notification ID2 shown in FIG. 13(a)) is executed, the second notification (in this example, the second notification RD2 shown in FIG. 13(b-4)) is not executed at least in that game, so that the notification can be given in a way that does not mislead the player, the player will not misunderstand, and a decline in the player's motivation to play can be prevented in advance.

In addition, in this example, the third stopping mode is a mode in which the third symbol (in this example, 7 2 symbols) is stopped on all reels, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the third stopping mode is a mode in which the third symbol (in this example, the 7 2 symbol) is stopped. Other symbol combinations that do not include the first symbol aiming at this may be used.

Further, the non-execution timing of the second notification may be only for a game in which the second operation instruction notification ID2 (second operation instruction notification) is executed and the reels are stopped in the third stop mode, In addition to the game, any game after the game may not be executed.

<Temporary suspension of the second suspension mode>
The state shown in Figure 13 (c) is a state in which reel presentation is being executed in the next game after reels 110 to 112 stop in a stopping pattern other than the second stopping pattern (in this example, any of the first, third, or fourth stopping patterns) in a game in which the second operation instruction notification is executed.

The gaming machine according to this embodiment is configured so that after the reels stop in a stopping mode other than the second stopping mode, they stop in the second stopping mode (in this example, the symbol combination "Seven 3-Seven 3-Seven 3") as a reel effect.

For example, as shown in FIG. 13(a), after executing the second operation instruction notification ID2 in a certain game, as shown in FIG. If it stops at the symbol combination "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1" (first stop mode) instead of the symbol combination "Seven 3-Seven 3-Seven 3" in this example, Although the second notification RD2 shown in FIG. 13(b-4) is not executed, as shown in FIG. After starting and stopping (temporary stop) at the second stop mode (in this example, the symbol combination “Seven 3-Seven 3-Seven 3”) as the reel production, and executing the second notification RD2, Start super AT game.

According to this example, the reels can be stopped in a stop pattern other than the second stop pattern and then stopped in the second stop pattern, which can increase the interest of the player. Also, even if the reels stop in a stop pattern other than the second stop pattern in a certain game, the second notification can be executed in the next or subsequent games of the certain game, which can surprise the player.

As described above, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine equipped with reels (e.g., reels 110-112 shown in FIG. 1), stop operation means (e.g., stop buttons 137-139 shown in FIG. 1), and notification means (e.g., the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1, speakers 272, 277 shown in FIG. 3, and various lamps), and the notification means is a means that may execute a first operation instruction notification (e.g., first operation instruction notification ID1 shown in FIG. 12(a)), and the first operation instruction notification suggests a first pattern (e.g., the seven-one pattern) to be stopped. The gaming machine is characterized in that it is equipped with an alarm including a first alarm (e.g., a first alarm RD1 shown in FIG. 12(b-1)) that is executed at least in a game when the reels stop in a first stopping pattern (e.g., a symbol combination of "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1") in a game in which the first operation instruction alarm is executed, and the alarm means is a means that is executed at least in a game when the reels stop in a second stopping pattern (e.g., a symbol combination of "Seven 3-Seven 3-Seven 3") in a game in which the first operation instruction alarm is executed, and does not execute the first alarm at least in the game.

According to the gaming machine of this embodiment, when the reels stop in a first stop mode in a game in which the first operation instruction notification is executed, the first notification is executed at least in that game, whereas when the reels stop in a second stop mode in a game in which the first operation instruction notification is executed, the first notification is not executed at least in that game. This makes it possible to issue notifications that do not mislead the player, prevents the player from misunderstanding, and prevents the player from losing motivation to play.

In addition, the first stopping mode is a mode in which the first symbol (for example, a 71 symbol) is stopped on all reels, and the second stopping mode is a mode in which a second symbol (for example, a 71 symbol) is stopped on all reels. For example, it may be a mode in which the seven 3 symbols) are stopped.

With this configuration, the symbol suggested by the first operation instruction notification can be displayed statically, preventing the player from misunderstanding.

Furthermore, when the reels stop in a third stop mode (for example, a symbol combination of "Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2") in a game in which the first operation instruction notification is executed, the notification means at least It is a means for executing a third notification (for example, the third notification RD3 shown in FIG. 12(b-3)) in a game, and the third stop mode is a means for executing a third notification (for example, a third notification RD3 shown in FIG. It may be a mode in which the seven (2) symbols are stopped.

With such a configuration, the player can be made to think that the reels have stopped in the first stop mode in which the first notification is executed, and the player's interest can be increased.

The notification means is a means for not executing the first notification at least in a game in which the first operation instruction notification is executed when the reels stop in a fourth stop pattern (e.g., a stop pattern other than the first stop pattern, the second stop pattern, and the third stop pattern (so-called a scattered pattern)), and the fourth stop pattern may be a pattern in which all reels stop without a specific pattern (e.g., any one of the seven-one pattern, seven-two pattern, and seven-three pattern) being lined up.

With such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player in a manner that does not mislead the player, prevent the player from misunderstanding the game, and prevent the player's desire to play from decreasing.

Furthermore, after the reels have stopped in the second stop mode, they may be stopped in the first stop mode as a reel effect.

With this configuration, the reels can be stopped in the second stopping mode and then in the first stopping mode, which can increase the player's interest.

Further, the notification means is a means that may execute a second operation instruction notification (for example, second operation instruction notification ID2 shown in FIG. 13(a)), and the second operation instruction notification includes: The notification includes a suggestion of the second symbol whose goal is to stop the reel, and the notification means is a notification that includes a suggestion of the second symbol that the goal is to stop, and the notification means is a notification that the reel is in the second stop mode (for example, " When it stops at the symbol combination “Seven 3-Seven 3-Seven 3”, it is a means for executing at least a second notification (for example, second notification RD2 shown in FIG. 13(b-4)) in the game, When the reels stop in the first stop mode (for example, a symbol combination of "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1") in a game in which the second operation instruction notification is executed, the notification means at least stops the game. It may also be a means for not executing the second notification.

With such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player in a manner that does not mislead the player, prevent the player from misunderstanding the game, and prevent the player's desire to play from decreasing.

Note that the first operation instruction notification and the second operation instruction notification are not limited to notifications that include a suggestion of a symbol to be stopped. The notification may include "right → left", "inside!!", "press inside", etc.).

The third or fourth stop mode may be a mode in which the first symbol (e.g., the Seven 1 symbol) and the second symbol (e.g., the Seven 3 symbol) do not stop on all of the reels.

In addition, all, a plurality, or one of the first stop mode, the second stop mode, the third stop mode, and the fourth stop mode may be configured to include a specific letter, number, or figure (e.g., the number 7).

With such a configuration, since the stopping manners are similar, it may be possible to improve the player's sense of expectation.

The reels may also be configured to be able to stop in the first stop pattern (for example, a symbol combination of "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1") when (or only when) the stop operation of the stop operation means is performed in accordance with the first operation instruction notification (for example, first operation instruction notification ID 1 shown in FIG. 12(a)) and a first combination (for example, a 1-coin combination (minor combination 6)) is won, including a selection means for selecting a first symbol.

In addition, in a game in which a second winning combination (for example, a one-card winning combination (small winning number 8)) is won, according to the second operation instruction notification (for example, the second operation instruction notification ID2 shown in FIG. 13(a)), When (or only when) the stop operation of the stop operation means is performed, the reels can be stopped in the second stop mode (for example, a symbol combination of "Seven 3-Seven 3-Seven 3") It may be configured as follows.

In addition, in a game in which a third winning combination (for example, a one-card winning combination (small winning combination 7)) is won, the first operation instruction notification (for example, the first operation instruction notification ID1 shown in FIG. 12(a)) If (or only if) the stop operation of the stop operation means is performed without following the instructions, the reels will stop in the third stop mode (for example, a symbol combination of "Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2") It may be configured such that it can be stopped by

<<Embodiment D>>
Next, a gaming machine (slot machine) according to Embodiment D will be described using FIGS. 14 to 16. Note that for words and phrases that overlap with other embodiments, the words and phrases of this embodiment are given priority, and for descriptions that overlap with drawings other than FIGS. 14 to 16, priority is given to the descriptions of FIGS. 14 to 16.

<Notification Means>
Prior to describing various notifications, a description will now be given of notification means provided in the slot machine 100. Fig. 14(a) is a front view of the slot machine 100 in a state in which the setting key is turned from OFF to ON while the power is OFF.

<Notification means (display means)>
The slot machine 100 includes a display means that can display information as one of the notification means. Examples of display means included in the slot machine 100 include the liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157 shown in FIG. , a stored coin count display 125, a game information display 126, and the like. In this example, these display means are comprised of a liquid crystal display, an LED, a segment display, and the like.

<Notification Means (Sound Output Means)>
The slot machine 100 includes a sound output means capable of outputting sound as one of the notification means. Examples of the sound output means included in the slot machine 100 include speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG.

<Notification means (light emitting means)>
The slot machine 100 includes a light emitting means capable of emitting (outputting) light as one of the notification means. Examples of the light emitting means included in the slot machine 100 include the upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, and title panel (lamp) 162 shown in FIG. 139, a start lever 135, a reel backlight (not shown) for each reel 110 to 112, and in this example, all of these light emitting means are constituted by LEDs.

The effect button 190, stop buttons (stop operation means) 137 to 139, and start lever 135 also function as operation means that can be operated by the player. The present invention can also be applied to pachinko machines, and examples of light-emitting means that pachinko machines are equipped with include frame lamps, effect buttons, and gadgets.

<Setting change/setting confirmation mode>
Next, prior to explaining various notifications, the setting change/setting confirmation mode will be explained.

In the game machine according to this embodiment, the front door 102 (door body) is opened and the power is turned on with a certain operation (operation from OFF to ON) performed using a setting key provided inside the main body 101. (or when the setting key is turned from OFF to ON before the predetermined time elapses after the power is turned on (before the control unit checks the on/off status of the setting key)). It is possible to shift to a state (setting change mode) in which changes (setting changes) are possible.

Here, setting change refers to changing the setting value of the game machine, and in this example, while displaying the setting value (any of settings 1 to 6) on the setting value display device 101a, the operation means ( Each time a press operation of the setting switch (setting switch) is detected, the currently set setting values 1 to 6 are incremented by 1 and updated, and when the setting value exceeds 6, the process returns to 1, which is repeated. It is possible to change the setting value.

Further, in the setting change mode, when a push operation by the operating means (in this example, the start lever 135) is accepted, the setting value is confirmed, and when a certain operation by the setting key is canceled (in this example, the on When the setting key is pulled out after the operation to turn it off), the state in which the setting values can be changed (setting change mode) ends, and the state shifts to the normal game state in which normal games can be played. Note that "cancellation of a certain operation" is not limited to "the operation of turning the setting key from on to off and then removing it", but also "the operation of turning the setting key from on to off". Good too.

Note that if the operation means (start lever 135) is operated without pressing the operation means (setting switch), or if the operation means (start lever 135) is operated after the setting value has gone through one cycle (for example, setting 5 → setting 6 → setting 1 → ... → setting 5) by repeatedly pressing the operation means (setting switch), the setting will be the same as the previous setting.

In the game machine according to this embodiment, after opening the front door 102 (door body) and turning on the power, a certain operation (operation from OFF to ON) is performed using a setting key provided inside the main body 101. It is possible to shift to a state (setting confirmation mode) in which setting values can be confirmed (setting confirmation).

Here, checking the settings refers to checking the setting values of the gaming machine. In this example, by pressing the operating means (setting switch), the initially set value (for example, setting 1) or the setting value set by changing the setting (any of settings 1 to 6) is displayed on the setting value display device 101a, making it possible to check the setting value.

Further, in the setting confirmation mode, when a certain operation using the setting key is canceled (in this example, the setting key is removed after the operation to turn from on to off is performed) and the front door 102 is closed, the set value is changed. The state in which confirmation is possible (setting confirmation mode) ends, and a transition is made to the normal game state in which normal games are possible. Note that "cancellation of a certain operation" is not limited to "the operation of turning the setting key from on to off and then removing it", but also "the operation of turning the setting key from on to off". Good too.

In this specification, the setting change mode in which settings can be changed and the setting confirmation mode in which settings can be confirmed are sometimes collectively referred to as the setting change/setting confirmation mode, and the setting change/setting confirmation mode includes a setting change mode in which only settings can be changed, a setting confirmation mode in which only settings can be confirmed, and a mode in which both settings can be changed and confirmed.

<Various Notifications>
Next, various notifications that can be performed by the gaming machine according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 14 to FIG.

<Various notifications/First state, first notification>
The notification means of the gaming machine in this embodiment is configured to execute a first notification in a first state in which operations related to setting changes (in this example, operation of the setting switch and operation of the start lever 135) can be accepted.

Here, the first state is a state in which the detection means (in this example, the opening/closing sensor) detects the open state of the door (in this example, the front door 102).

FIG. 14(b) is a front view showing an example in which the first notification is executed in the first state.

In this example, the power is turned from OFF to ON while a certain operation (from OFF to ON) is performed using the setting key, and the state changes to a state in which settings can be changed (setting change mode). The first state (in this example, the front door 102 is in the open state, and the opening/closing sensor is in the open state) in which operations related to the The open state is detected), and the first notification is executed in the first state.

Although the notification mode of the first notification is not particularly limited, in the first notification IF1 of this example, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 displays the character string "Settings changing". By executing the first display notification IF1a and outputting the voice "Settings are being changed" from the speakers 272 and 277, the first voice notification IF1b is executed and the upper lamp 142 and side lamp 144 are fully lit. The first light emission notification IF1c is executed by emitting white light and lighting the title panel (lamp) 162 in white.

Also, since the state has shifted to one in which the setting can be changed, the setting value display device 101a displays a number (in this example, 1) indicating the current setting value (in this example, setting 1).

Note that the notification mode of the first notification is not limited to this example, and may be one of notification by display means (liquid crystal display device), notification by sound output means (speaker), notification by light emission means (lamp), Notification may be made by multiple or all of them, or in addition to (or in place of) these, notification may be made by a movable body.

Additionally, the first notification is not limited to notifications suggesting that settings are being changed; for example, a display suggesting that operations related to setting changes are possible (for example, ``Settings can be changed.'' ” or a display including a character string such as “Setting switch operation is valid.”).

<Various notifications/second status, second notification>
The notification means of the game machine according to the present embodiment sends the second notification in a second state in which an operation related to a setting change (in this example, an operation of a setting switch or an operation of the start lever 135) can be accepted. configured to run.

Here, the second state is a state in which the detection means (in this example, the opening/closing sensor) detects the closed state of the door (in this example, the front door 102).

Figure 14 (c) is a front view showing an example of executing the second notification in the second state.

In this example, the power is turned from OFF to ON while a certain operation (from OFF to ON) is performed using the setting key, and after transitioning to a state in which settings can be changed (setting change mode), the front door 102 Since the front door 102 is closed, the state is in a second state (in this example, the front door 102 is closed) in which operations related to setting changes (in this example, operation of the setting switch and operation of the start lever 135) can be accepted. , the opening/closing sensor detects the closed state of the front door 102), and the second notification is executed in the second state.

The notification mode of the second notification is not particularly limited, but in the second notification IF2 of this example, the message "Please open the door with the door key when changing settings" is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. By displaying the character string, the second display notification IF 2a is executed, and the speakers 272 and 277 output a voice saying "Please open the door with the door key before changing settings." By executing the second audio notification IF 2b, turning on all the upper lamps 142 and side lamps 144 to emit white light, and lighting the title panel (lamp) 162 in white, the second sound notification IF 2c is running.

In addition, since the setting value has been changed from setting 1 to setting 2 after transitioning to a state where setting changes are possible, a numerical value indicating the current setting value (in this example, setting 2) is displayed on the setting value display device 101a. (2) is displayed in this example.

According to this example, the notification means executes a first notification in a first state in which an operation related to a setting change can be accepted (in this example, a state in which the front door 102 is open and the opening/closing sensor detects that the front door 102 is open), and executes a second notification different from the first notification in a second state in which an operation related to a setting change can be accepted (in this example, a state in which the front door 102 is closed and the opening/closing sensor detects that the front door 102 is closed). Therefore, based on the notification mode by the notification means, a staff member at the gaming establishment can understand the state of the gaming machine at the time of the setting change and can appropriately execute the setting change.

The first state is a state in which the detection means (in this example, an open/close sensor) detects that the door (in this example, the front door 102) is open, and the second state is a state in which the detection means detects that the door is closed. Since the notification differs depending on whether the door is open or closed, amusement store staff can appropriately change the settings. Also, since the notification differs depending on whether the door is open or closed while the amusement store is open, amusement store staff may be able to notice the fraudulent behavior of a fraudster.

Note that the second state is not limited to a state in which the front door 102 is in a closed state and the opening/closing sensor detects the closed state of the front door 102; the second state is not limited to a state in which the front door 102 is in an open state and the opening/closing sensor detects the closed state of the front door 102. It may also be a state in which the closed state of the door is detected.

According to this example, in the second state (in this example, a state in which the opening/closing sensor detects that the front door 102 is closed), the door (in this example, the front door 102) may be closed or open, and even if the door is artificially closed by a fraudster while the amusement establishment is open, the second notification is issued, so that a staff member at the amusement establishment may be able to notice the fraudulent behavior of the fraudster.

The notification mode of the second notification is not limited to this example, and may be one, more than one, or all of the following: notification by a display means (liquid crystal display device), notification by a sound output means (speaker), and notification by a light emitting means (lamp). Notification may also be made by a movable body in addition to (or instead of) these.

The second notification is not limited to a notification that warns about the setting change, but may be, for example, a display that suggests that operations related to the setting change are impossible (for example, a display including the string "Setting change operations are not possible" or "Operation of the setting switch is invalid"), or a notification that encourages an operation that allows the setting change (for example, a display including the string "Please close the door").

<Settings change operation>
Next, a specific example of the setting change operation will be described in detail with reference to FIGS.

To explain the terms used in the figure, "power switch" is the "power switch" described with reference to FIG. 2, "door state" indicates the state (closed or open) of the door (front door 102), and "door sensor" is the "open/close sensor (detection means)" described with reference to FIG. 1.

Further, the "setting key" is the "setting key" explained using FIG. 1, and the "setting value display means" is the "setting value display device 101a" explained using FIG. 1 and FIG. The external concentrated terminal board LED is the "external concentrated terminal board LED" described using FIG.

The "liquid crystal display device" is the "liquid crystal display device 157 (display means)" described with reference to FIG. 1, the title panel lamp is the title panel lamp 162 (light-emitting means) described with reference to FIG. 14, the upper and side lamps are the upper lamp 142 (light-emitting means) and the side lamp 144 (light-emitting means) described with reference to FIG. 14, and the speaker is the speakers 272 and 277 (sound output means) described with reference to FIGS. 3 and 14.

<Example 1 of setting change operation>
FIG. 15A is a diagram showing a first example of a setting change operation in time series.

<Example of setting change operation 1/Power OFF, Door Closed>
The state shown in FIG. 15( a ) ( 1 ) is one in which the power switch is OFF (power OFF), the front door 102 is closed, and the setting key is OFF.

In the same state, since power is not supplied to the slot machine 100, the set value display means is not displayed, and the external centralized terminal board LED, liquid crystal display device, title panel lamp, and upper and side lamps are all The lights are off and the speakers have stopped producing sound.

<Example of setting change operation 1/Power OFF, door closed → door open, setting key ON>
The state shown in FIG. 15(a)(2) is the state shown in FIG. 15(a)(1) with the power OFF, the door closed, and the setting key OFF, with the front door 102 open and the setting key inside the main body 101 pressed. This is a state where it was turned from OFF to ON.

In the same state, the front door 102 changes from the closed state to the open state and the setting key changes from OFF to ON, so the power switch is OFF (power OFF), the front door 102 is in the open state, and the setting key is However, since power is not being supplied to the slot machine 100, the set value display means is not displayed, and the external centralized terminal board LED, liquid crystal display, title panel lamp, upper/side lamp All lights are off and the speakers have stopped producing sound.

<Example of setting change operation 1/Power OFF → Power ON, first notification>
The state shown in FIG. 15(a)(3) is the state in which the power switch is turned on from OFF in the state shown in FIG. 15(a)(2) with the power OFF, the door open, and the setting key ON.

In the same state, the power switch changes from ON to OFF, and the power switch changes from OFF to ON, so the door sensor detects the opening of the door and changes to ON, and the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display means. (in this example, 1 indicating setting 1) is displayed, and the external centralized terminal board LED is outputting a control signal (in this example, information indicating that the setting is being changed) from the external centralized terminal board. Lights up to indicate that the

In addition, the first state (in this example, the front door 102 is in an open state and the open/close sensor is in an open state) in which an operation related to a setting change (in this example, an operation of a setting switch or an operation of the start lever 135) can be accepted. Since the open state of the front door 102 has been detected, the first notification is executed in the first state.

Specifically, similar to the first notification IF1 described with reference to FIG. By executing the first display notification IF1a and outputting the voice "Settings are being changed" from the speakers 272 and 277, the first voice notification IF1b is executed and the upper lamp 142 and side lamp 144 are fully lit. The first light emission notification IF1c is executed by emitting white light and lighting the title panel (lamp) 162 in white.

<Example 1 of setting change operation/door open, first notification → door closed, second notification>
The state shown in FIG. 15(a)(4) is the state in which the front door 102 is closed while the door is open, the setting key is turned on, and the first notification is being executed as shown in FIG. 15(a)(3). .

In the same state, since the front door 102 has changed from the open state to the closed state, the door sensor detects the door closing and changes from ON to OFF, but the set value display means continues to display and the external centralized terminal board The LED continues to light up.

In addition, the first state (in this example, the front door 102 is in an open state and the open/close sensor is in an open state) in which an operation related to a setting change (in this example, an operation of a setting switch or an operation of the start lever 135) can be accepted. The state changes from the state in which the open state of the front door 102 is detected) to the second state (in this example, the state in which the front door 102 is in the closed state and the opening/closing sensor detects the closed state of the front door 102). , executes the second notification in the second state.

Specifically, in this example, similar to the second notification IF2 described using FIG. By displaying the character string "Please change the settings", the second display notification IF 2a is executed, and the speakers 272 and 277 output a voice saying "Please use the door key to open the door before changing settings." By doing so, the second audio notification IF 2b is executed, and the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 are fully lit to emit white light, and the title panel (lamp) 162 is lit in white. The light emission notification IF2c is being executed.

<Example 1 of setting change operation/Door closed, second alarm → Door open, first alarm>
The state shown in FIG. 15(a)(5) is a state in which the front door 102 is open in the state shown in FIG. 15(a)(4) where the door is closed, the setting key is ON, and the second notification is being executed.

In the same state, the front door 102 changes from the closed state to the open state, and enters the second state (main state) in which operations related to setting changes (in this example, operation of the setting switch and operation of the start lever 135) can be accepted. In this example, the front door 102 is in the closed state and the opening/closing sensor detects the closed state of the front door 102), and then the front door 102 is in the open state and the opening/closing sensor detects the closed state of the front door 102). Since the open state of the door 102 has been detected, the first notification is executed in the first state.

Specifically, similar to the first notification IF1 described using FIG. 14(b), the first display notification IF1a is executed by displaying a message including the character string "Settings are being changed" in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, the first audio notification IF1b is executed by outputting the audio message "Settings are being changed" from the speakers 272, 277, and the first light emission notification IF1c is executed by turning on all the upper lamps 142 and side lamps 144 to emit white light and turning on the title panel (lamp) 162 in white.

<Example 1 of setting change operation/setting change operation during door opening and first alarm execution>
The state shown in FIG. 15(a)(6) is a state in which a setting change operation is performed in the state shown in FIG. 15(a)(5) where the door is open, the setting key is ON, and the first alarm is being executed.

In this state, the first state (in this example, the front door 102 is in an open state, and the front door 102 is in an open state) in which operations related to setting changes (in this example, operation of the setting switch and operation of the start lever 135) can be accepted. Since the first operating means (in this example, the setting switch) was operated (setting change operation) in the state in which the sensor detected the open state of the front door 102, the first notification is continued. , the setting value is changed from setting 1 to setting 2, and a numerical value indicating the changed setting value (in this example, 2 indicating setting 2) is displayed on the setting value display means.

<Example 1 of setting change operation/Door open, setting key ON, lever operation during first alarm>
The state shown in FIG. 15(a)(7) is the state in which the start lever 135 is pressed after the setting change operation shown in FIG. 15(a)(6).

In this state, since an operation of the first operating means (in this example, an operation to confirm the setting value using the start lever 135) has been performed in a first state (in this example, a state in which the front door 102 is open and the open/close sensor detects that the front door 102 is open) in which an operation related to a setting change (in this example, an operation of the setting switch or an operation of the start lever 135) can be accepted, the setting value is confirmed to Setting 2 while continuing the first notification, and the setting value display means displays a numerical value (in this example, 0) indicating that the setting value has been confirmed.

<Example 1 of setting change operation/Door open, setting key ON, setting key OFF during first alarm>
The state shown in FIG. 15(a)(8) is the state in which the setting key is turned from ON to OFF after the lever operation shown in FIG. 15(a)(7).

In this state, the setting key has changed from ON to OFF (a certain operation using the setting key has been released), so the first state (in this example, a state in which the front door 102 is open and the open/close sensor detects that the front door 102 is open) in which operations related to the setting change can be accepted (in this example, the operation of the setting switch or the operation of the start lever 135) ends, and the game transitions to a normal game state in which normal play is possible, the first notification ends, and a notification of the completion of the setting change and a demo performance begin.

Specifically, the speaker 272, 277 outputs a voice message saying "Settings have been changed" to notify the user that the setting change mode has ended, a demo animation is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 are lit in a demo pattern corresponding to the demo performance, and the title panel (lamp) 162 is lit in white.

<Example 1 of setting change operation/door open, setting key OFF → setting key ON>
The state shown in FIG. 15(a)(9) is a state in which the setting key is turned on in the state shown in FIG. 15(a)(8) in which the setting key is OFF.

In this state, since the setting key has changed from OFF to ON while the power is ON (a certain operation has been performed using the setting key), the device enters a third state (in this example, the front door 102 is open and the open/close sensor has detected that the front door 102 is open) in which operations related to setting confirmation (in this example, the operation of the setting switch or the operation of the start lever 135) can be accepted, and a setting confirmation notification is issued in the first state.

Specifically, a setting confirmation notification display is executed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 by displaying the character string "Checking settings" to indicate that the settings can be checked, a setting confirmation audio notification is executed by outputting a sound "Checking settings" from the speakers 272, 277 to indicate that the settings can be checked, and a setting confirmation light notification is executed by lighting up all the upper lamps 142 and side lamps 144 to emit blue light and lighting up the title panel (lamp) 162 in blue to indicate that the settings can be checked.

<Example 2 of setting change operation>
FIG. 15(b) is a diagram showing example 2 of the setting change operation in chronological order. Note that Figure 15(b)(1) to Figure 15(b)(3), Figure 15(b)(8), and Figure 15(b)(9) are the same as Figure 15(a)(1) to Figure 15(b)(9). Since this is the same state as (a) (3), (a) (8) in the same figure, and (a) (9) in the same figure, the explanation thereof will be omitted.

<Example 2 of setting change operation/Setting change operation during door opening, setting key ON, and first notification>
The state shown in FIG. 15(b)(4) is the state in which the setting change operation is performed in the state shown in FIG. 15(b)(3) with the door open, the setting key ON, and the first notification in progress.

In this state, since an operation (setting change operation) of the first operating means (in this example, the setting switch) is performed in a first state (in this example, a state in which the front door 102 is open and the open/close sensor detects that the front door 102 is open) in which an operation related to a setting change (in this example, the operation of the setting switch or the operation of the start lever 135) can be accepted, the setting value is changed from setting 1 to setting 2 while continuing the first notification, and the setting value display means displays a number indicating the changed setting value (in this example, 2 indicating setting 2).

<Example 2 of setting change operation/Door open, first alarm → Door close, second alarm>
The state shown in FIG. 15(b)(5) is a state in which the front door 102 is closed in the state shown in FIG. 15(b)(4) where the door is open and the setting key is ON.

In this state, the front door 102 changes from an open state to a closed state, so the door sensor detects the door closure and changes from ON to OFF, but the setting value display means continues to display and the external central terminal board LED continues to light up.

In addition, the first state (in this example, the front door 102 is in an open state and the open/close sensor is in an open state) in which an operation related to a setting change (in this example, an operation of a setting switch or an operation of the start lever 135) can be accepted. The state changes from the state in which the open state of the front door 102 is detected) to the second state (in this example, the state in which the front door 102 is in the closed state and the opening/closing sensor detects the closed state of the front door 102). , executes the second notification in the second state.

Specifically, in this example, similar to the second notification IF2 described using FIG. 14(c), the second display notification IF2a is executed by displaying a message including the character string "Please make settings changes with the door open using the door key" in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, the second audio notification IF2b is executed by outputting a voice message "Please make settings changes with the door open using the door key" from the speakers 272, 277, and the second light emission notification IF2c is executed by turning on all the upper lamps 142 and side lamps 144 to emit white light and turning on the title panel (lamp) 162 in white.

<Example 2 of setting change operation/Door closed, setting key ON, lever operation during second alarm>
The state shown in FIG. 15(b) (6) is the state in which the start lever 135 is pressed while the door is closed, the setting key is ON, and the second notification is being given as shown in FIG. 15(b) (5).

In this state, since the first operating means is operated (in this example, the start lever 135 is used to confirm the setting value) in a second state (in this example, the front door 102 is closed and the open/close sensor detects that the front door 102 is closed) in which an operation related to a setting change (in this example, the operation of the setting switch or the operation of the start lever 135) can be accepted, the second notification is continued, the setting value is confirmed to Setting 2, and the setting value display means displays a number (in this example, 0) indicating that the setting value has been confirmed.

In this example, in the first state (in this example, the state in which the opening/closing sensor detects the open state of the front door 102), the first operating means is operated (in this example, the setting value is determined by the start lever 135). is executed, the operation is accepted, and the first operation means is operated (in this example, the start lever is 135) is executed, the operation is accepted.

According to this example, operation using the first operating means is accepted in both the first and second states, thereby improving convenience for game center staff.

In addition, in this example, a first notification (in this example, first notification IF1 shown in FIG. 14(b)) is executed before and after the operation of the first operating means is executed in the first state (in this example, the state in which the opening/closing sensor detects that the front door 102 is open), and a second notification (in this example, second notification IF2 shown in FIG. 14(c)) is executed before and after the operation of the first operating means is executed in the first state.

According to this example, since the same notification is performed before and after the operation of the first operation means is performed, the game store clerk can grasp the state of the game machine and appropriately change the settings.

<Example 2 of setting change operation/door close, second notification → door open, first notification>
The state shown in FIG. 15B (7) is a state in which the front door 102 is opened after the lever operation shown in FIG. 15B (6).

In this state, the front door 102 changes from a closed state to an open state, and the state changes from a second state (in this example, a state in which the front door 102 is closed and the opening/closing sensor detects that the front door 102 is closed) in which operations related to setting changes (in this example, the operation of the setting switch or the operation of the start lever 135) can be accepted to a first state (in this example, a state in which the front door 102 is open and the opening/closing sensor detects that the front door 102 is open), and therefore a first notification is executed in the first state.

Specifically, similar to the first notification IF1 described using FIG. 14(b), the first display notification IF1a is executed by displaying a message including the character string "Settings are being changed" in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, the first audio notification IF1b is executed by outputting the audio message "Settings are being changed" from the speakers 272, 277, and the first light emission notification IF1c is executed by turning on all the upper lamps 142 and side lamps 144 to emit white light and turning on the title panel (lamp) 162 in white.

<Example 3 of setting change operation>
FIG. 16(a) is a diagram showing example 3 of the setting change operation in chronological order. Note that (a) (3), (a) (10) to (a) (11) in the same figure are the same as those in (b) (3), (8) to (8) in the same figure. (b) Since this is the same state as (9), its explanation will be omitted.

<Example 3 of setting change operation/door open, door sensor ON → door sensor OFF, second notification>
The state shown in FIG. 16(a)(4) is the state in which the front door 102 is left open and the door sensor is forcibly turned OFF in the state shown in FIG. 16(a)(3) with the door open and the setting key ON. It is.

In the same state, when the front door 102 is in the open state, a light shielding piece of a certain length is inserted between the light emitting part and the light receiving part of the door sensor of the main body 101 and fixed with tape etc. By blocking the light from the light emitting part of the door sensor, even if the front door 102 is in the open state, the detection state of the door sensor is forcibly set to the closed detection state (door pseudo-closed). Although the sensor detects the door closing and changes from ON to OFF, the set value display means continues to display and the external common terminal board LED continues to light up.

In addition, the first state (in this example, the front door 102 is in an open state and the open/close sensor is in an open state) in which an operation related to a setting change (in this example, an operation of a setting switch or an operation of the start lever 135) can be accepted. The state changes from the state in which the open state of the front door 102 is detected) to the second state (in this example, the state in which the front door 102 is in the open state and the opening/closing sensor detects the closed state of the front door 102). , executes the second notification in the second state.

Specifically, in this example, similar to the second notification IF2 described using FIG. By displaying the character string "Please change the settings", the second display notification IF 2a is executed, and the speakers 272 and 277 output a voice saying "Please use the door key to open the door before changing settings." By doing so, the second audio notification IF 2b is executed, and the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 are fully lit to emit white light, and the title panel (lamp) 162 is lit in white. The light emission notification IF2c is being executed.

<Example 3 of setting change operation/Door pseudo-closing, setting change operation during second notification>
The state shown in FIG. 16(a)(5) is a state in which the setting change operation is performed during the door pseudo-closing and second notification shown in FIG. 16(a)(4).

In this state, since an operation (setting change operation) of the first operating means (in this example, the setting switch) is performed in a second state (in this example, a state in which the front door 102 is open and the opening/closing sensor detects that the front door 102 is closed) in which an operation related to a setting change (in this example, the operation of the setting switch or the operation of the start lever 135) can be accepted, the second notification is continued while the setting value is changed from setting 1 to setting 2, and the setting value display means displays a number indicating the changed setting value (in this example, 2 indicating setting 2).

<Example 3 of setting change operation/Door pseudo-close, lever operation during second alarm>
The state shown in FIG. 16(a)(6) is a state in which the start lever 135 is pressed after the setting change operation shown in FIG. 16(a)(5).

In this state, since an operation (operation to confirm the setting change) of the first operating means (in this example, the start lever 135) is performed in a second state (in this example, a state in which the front door 102 is open and the opening/closing sensor detects that the front door 102 is closed) in which an operation related to a setting change (in this example, operation of the setting switch or operation of the start lever 135) can be accepted, the second notification is continued, the setting value is confirmed to Setting 2, and the setting value display means displays a numerical value (in this example, 0) indicating that the setting value has been confirmed.

<Example 3 of setting change operation/Setting key OFF during door pseudo-close and second alarm>
The state shown in FIG. 16(a)(7) is the state in which the setting key is turned from ON to OFF after the lever operation shown in FIG. 16(a)(6).

In the same state, in the second state (in this example, the front door 102 is in the open state and the opening/closing sensor detects the closed state of the front door 102), the first operation means is operated (in this example, Since the operation of the second operating means (in this example, the operation of turning the setting key from ON to OFF) was executed after the operation of the start lever 135 (operation to confirm the setting change), the The operation of the second operating means is not accepted, and the setting change mode is maintained while the second notification is continued (the setting change mode cannot be ended).

In this example, when the first operating means (in this example, a setting value confirmation operation using the start lever 135) is performed in the first state (in this example, a state in which the opening/closing sensor detects that the front door 102 is open) and then the second operating means (in this example, an operation to turn the setting key from ON to OFF) is performed, the operation of the second operating means is accepted, whereas when the first operating means (in this example, a setting value confirmation operation using the start lever 135) is performed in the second state (in this example, a state in which the opening/closing sensor detects that the front door 102 is closed) and then the second operating means (in this example, an operation to turn the setting key from ON to OFF) is performed, the operation of the second operating means is not accepted.

According to this example, since the operation of the second operation means is not accepted in the second state, the clerk at the game store understands that the operation of the second operation means is not accepted in the second state. In addition, the current state can be grasped based on whether or not the operation of the second operation means is accepted.

The notification means may continue to execute the second notification even if the second operating means is operated (the setting key is turned from ON to OFF) during execution of the second notification. According to this example, the second notification is executed even if a fraudster operates the setting key while the gaming establishment is open, so that a staff member of the gaming establishment may be able to notice the fraudster's fraudulent behavior.

Further, the notification means may continue to execute the second notification even if the second operation unit is operated (even if the setting key is pulled out) during the execution of the second notification. According to this example, even if the setting key is removed by an unauthorized person while the game parlor is open, the second notification is issued, so that the clerk at the gaming parlor may become aware of the fraudulent activity of the unauthorized person.

<Example 3 of setting change operation / Setting key OFF → Setting key ON during door pseudo-close and second alarm>
The state shown in FIG. 16(a)(8) is a state in which the setting key is turned ON, in the OFF state shown in FIG. 16(a)(7).

In this state, in the second state (in this example, the front door 102 is open and the opening/closing sensor detects that the front door 102 is closed), an operation of the first operating means (in this example, the start lever 135) (an operation to confirm the setting change) is performed, and then an operation of the second operating means (in this example, an operation to turn the setting key from OFF to ON) is performed. Therefore, the operation of the second operating means is not accepted, and the setting change mode is maintained while the second notification continues.

<Example 3 of setting change operation/Door pseudo-close, second notification in progress → Door open, first notification>
The state shown in FIG. 16(a)(9) is a state in which the front door 102 is opened during the door pseudo-closing and second notification shown in FIG. 16(a)(8).

In the same state, the front door 102 changes from the closed state to the open state, and enters the second state (main state) in which operations related to setting changes (in this example, operation of the setting switch and operation of the start lever 135) can be accepted. In the example, the front door 102 is in an open state and the opening/closing sensor detects the closed state of the front door 102), and the opening/closing sensor detects the closed state of the front door 102). Since the open state of the door 102 has been detected, the first notification is executed in the first state.

Specifically, similar to the first notification IF1 described using FIG. 14(b), the first display notification IF1a is executed by displaying a message including the character string "Settings are being changed" in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, the first audio notification IF1b is executed by outputting the audio message "Settings are being changed" from the speakers 272, 277, and the first light emission notification IF1c is executed by turning on all the upper lamps 142 and side lamps 144 to emit white light and turning on the title panel (lamp) 162 in white.

<Example 4 of setting change operation>
Fig. 16(b) is a time-series diagram showing Example 4 of the setting change operation. Note that Fig. 16(b)(1) to Fig. 16(b)(7) are in the same state as Fig. 15(a)(1) to Fig. 15(a)(7), so their explanation will be omitted.

<Example 4 of setting change operation/Error occurrence>
The state shown in FIG. 16(b)(0) is a state in which an error (first error) has occurred.

In this state, since an error has occurred while the power is on, the door is open, and the setting key is OFF, an error notification indicating that an error has occurred is executed.

Specifically, an error display (in this example, a display including the string "First error has occurred") is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, an error sound (in this example, a sound saying "First error has occurred") is output from the speakers 272, 277 indicating that a first error has occurred, the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 are lit in an error notification mode (in this example, they flash red) indicating that a first error has occurred, and an error code is displayed on the dispensed coin count display 127, thereby executing the error notification.

The errors (first errors) that may occur in the slot machine 100 include medal insertion anomalies 1 to 4, medal payout anomalies 1 to 3, overflow anomalies, RAM failures, winning anomalies, etc.

Medal insertion error 1 occurs when the inserted medals are stuck, and the corresponding error code is, for example, E1. Medal insertion error 1 is resolved when the error release switch (setting switch in this example) is operated after the cause of the error is removed. Medal insertion abnormality 2 occurs when the number of inserted medals is equal to or greater than the specified number, and the corresponding error code is, for example, E2. The medal insertion error 2 can be resolved by changing the set value or clearing the RAM.

Medal insertion error 3 occurs when either insertion sensor 1 or insertion sensor 2 turns on except when the medal insertion process is in progress, and the corresponding error code is, for example, E3. Medal insertion error 4 occurs when the inserted medal does not pass through insertion sensor 1 and insertion sensor 2 normally, and the corresponding error code is, for example, EA. Medal insertion error 3 and medal insertion error 4 are resolved when the cause of the error is removed and the error release switch (setting switch in this example) is operated.

Medal payout abnormality 1 occurs when no medals are paid out for a certain period of time when the medal payout device is driven, and the corresponding error code is, for example, E4. Medal payout abnormality 2 occurs when medals are accumulated when the medal payout device is driven, and the corresponding error code is, for example, E5. The medal payout abnormality 3 occurs when either the payout sensor 1 or the payout sensor 2 is turned on other than during the medal payout process, and the corresponding error code is, for example, E5. All of the medal payout abnormalities 1 to 3 are resolved when the cause of the error is removed and the error release switch (in this example, the setting switch) is operated.

The overflow abnormality occurs when the overflow terminal of the medal auxiliary storage is turned on, and the corresponding error code is, for example, E7. The overflow abnormality is resolved when the error release switch (setting switch in this example) is operated after the cause of the error is removed. A RAM failure occurs when an abnormality is detected by checking the RAM 308, and the corresponding error code is, for example, E8. A RAM failure is resolved when an operation of an error release switch (setting key in this example) is accepted. A winning abnormality occurs when, after the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, a winning symbol different from the winning symbol determined by the internal lottery is won, and the corresponding error code is, for example, E9. The winning abnormality is resolved when the operation of the error release switch (setting switch in this example) is accepted.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the slot machine 100, but can also be applied to pachinko machines. Examples of errors (first errors) that can occur in pachinko machines include a lower tray full error, a payout device error, an overpayout error, an illegal payout error, a main control unit communication error, a magnetic anomaly error, a magnetic field anomaly error, a frame open error, a RAM clear error, and an impact sensor error. These errors are also cleared when the error cause is removed and the error release switch is operated.

<Example 4 of setting change operation/Error occurred, setting key ON, setting key OFF during first notification>
The state shown in FIG. 16(b)(8) is the state in which the setting key is turned from ON to OFF after the lever operation shown in FIG. 16(b)(7).

In this state, the setting key has changed from ON to OFF (a certain operation using the setting key has been released), so the first state (in this example, a state in which the front door 102 is open and the open/close sensor detects that the front door 102 is open) in which operations related to changing the settings (in this example, the operation of the setting switch or the operation of the start lever 135) can be accepted is ended, and the game transitions to a normal game state in which normal play is possible, the first notification is ended, and the error notification that was suspended in the setting change mode is resumed.

Specifically, an error display (in this example, a display including the string "First error has occurred") is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, an error sound (in this example, a sound saying "First error has occurred") is output from the speakers 272, 277 indicating that a first error has occurred, the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 are lit in an error notification mode (in this example, they flash red) indicating that a first error has occurred, and an error code is displayed on the dispensed coin count display 127, thereby executing the error notification.

<Example 4 of setting change operation/Error occurred, setting key OFF → error resolved>
The state shown in FIG. 16B (9) is a state in which the error has been resolved and the reset SW has been turned ON in the state shown in FIG. 16B (8) where the error has occurred and the setting key is OFF.

In this state, the error is resolved and the reset SW has changed from OFF to ON, so the first state (in this example, a state in which the front door 102 is open and the open/close sensor detects that the front door 102 is open) in which operations related to the setting change can be accepted (in this example, the operation of the setting switch or the operation of the start lever 135) is terminated, and the game transitions to a normal game state in which normal gameplay is possible, the error notification is terminated, and a notification of the completion of the setting change and a demo performance are started.

Specifically, the speakers 272 and 277 output a voice saying "Settings have been changed" to notify that the settings change mode has ended, and a demo animation is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. , the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 are lit in a demonstration pattern, and the title panel (lamp) 162 is lit in white.

As explained above, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) has a notification means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1, the speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 3, and various lamps). ), the notification means is in a first state (for example, when the front door 102 is in an open state and the opening/closing sensor detects the open state of the front door 102). The notification means indicates a second state in which an operation related to a setting change can be accepted (for example, a state in which the front door 102 is in a closed state and the opening/closing sensor has detected the closed state of the front door 102, or a state in which the front door 102 is in a closed state). means for executing a second notification (for example, the second notification IF2 shown in FIG. The game machine may be characterized in that the second notification is different from the first notification.

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, the clerk at the game parlor can grasp the state of the game machine at the time of setting change based on the notification mode by the notification means, and can appropriately execute the setting change. can.

Further, a first operating means (for example, a start lever 135) is provided, and when an operation of the first operating means (for example, an operation for determining a set value using the start lever 135) is performed in the first state, The operation may be accepted when the operation is accepted and the operation of the first operation means is executed in the second state.

With such a configuration, the operation by the first operating means is accepted in either the first state or the second state, so it is possible to improve the convenience of the clerk at the game parlor.

Further, a second operation means (for example, a setting key) is provided, and after the operation of the first operation means (for example, an operation to confirm a set value using the start lever 135) is performed in the first state, the second operation means (for example, a setting key) is provided. When an operation of the second operating means (for example, an operation of turning a setting key from ON to OFF) is executed, the operation of the second operating means is accepted, and the operation of the first operating means is performed in the second state. If the operation of the second operation means is executed after the operation is executed, the operation of the second operation means may not be accepted.

With this configuration, since operation of the second operating means is not accepted in the second state, the arcade staff can understand that operation of the second operating means is not accepted in the second state, and can also understand the current state based on whether or not operation of the second operating means is accepted.

The notification means may be a means for executing the first notification before and after the operation of the first operating means (e.g., the operation of confirming a set value using the start lever 135) is performed in the first state, and the notification means may be a means for executing the second notification before and after the operation of the first operating means is performed in the first state.

With such a configuration, since the same notification is performed before and after the operation of the first operating means is performed, the game store clerk can grasp the state of the game machine and appropriately change the settings.

The device may also include a detection means (e.g., an open/close sensor) that detects the open/closed state of a door (e.g., the front door 102), and the first state may be a state in which the detection means detects that the door is open, and the second state may be a state in which the detection means detects that the door is closed.

With this configuration, the notification differs depending on whether the door is open or closed, allowing arcade staff to change the settings appropriately. Also, because the notification differs depending on whether the door is open or closed while the arcade is open, arcade staff may be able to notice the fraudulent behavior of a fraudster.

In addition, in the second state, the door may be closed, and in the second state, the door may be open.

With this configuration, even if the door is artificially closed by a fraudster while the gaming establishment is open, the second notification will be sent, so that the gaming establishment staff may be able to notice the fraudster's fraudulent actions.

The first notification is not limited to a notification that indicates that a setting change is being made, but may be, for example, a display that indicates that operations related to the setting change are possible (for example, a display including a character string such as "Setting change operations are possible" or a display including a character string such as "Setting switch operations are valid").

The first notification may be, in addition to (or instead of) a notification indicating that the settings are being changed, a notification indicating that the opening/closing sensor is detecting that the door is open (for example, a display including a string such as "Door is open", a voice output such as "Door is open", flashing of various lamps, etc.).

The second notification is not limited to a notification that warns about the setting change, but may be, for example, a display that suggests that operations related to the setting change are impossible (for example, a display including the string "Setting change operations are not possible" or "Operation of the setting switch is invalid"), or a notification that encourages an operation that allows the setting change (for example, a display including the string "Please close the door").

In addition to (or instead of) a warning about the setting change, the second notification may be a notification indicating that the opening/closing sensor is detecting the door being closed (for example, a display including the text "Door is closed" or "Door is pseudo-closed", a sound such as "Door is closed" or "Door is pseudo-closed", flashing of various lamps, etc.).

Further, the first operating means is not limited to the start lever 135 and the setting switch, but may be other operating means such as a production button, and the second operating means is not limited to the setting key. , reset SW, or other operating means may be used.

Further, even if a certain error (for example, medal insertion abnormality 1 to 4, medal payout abnormality 1 to 3, overflow abnormality, RAM failure, prize winning abnormality, etc.) occurs in the gaming machine, the notification means , a first state (e.g., the front door 102 is in an open state, and the opening/closing sensor indicates that the front door 102 is open The first notification (for example, the first notification IF1 shown in FIG. 14(b)) may be executed without executing the error notification in the state in which the error notification is detected.

With this configuration, the first notification can be given priority over the error notification, which increases convenience for game center staff.

In addition, even if an error (e.g., medal insertion abnormality 1-4, medal payout abnormality 1-3, overflow abnormality, RAM failure, winning abnormality, etc.) occurs in the gaming machine, the notification means may execute the second notification (e.g., second notification IF2 shown in FIG. 14(c)) in a second state in which an operation related to a setting change can be accepted (e.g., a state in which the front door 102 is closed and the opening/closing sensor detects that the front door 102 is closed, or a state in which the front door 102 is open and the opening/closing sensor detects that the front door 102 is closed).

With this configuration, the first notification can be given priority over the error notification, which increases convenience for game center staff.

Further, in the state where the certain error has occurred, the first state (for example, the state where the front door 102 is in the open state and the opening/closing sensor has detected the open state of the front door 102), or the state where the front door 102 is in the open state (For example, the front door 102 is closed and the opening/closing sensor detects the closed state of the front door 102, or the front door 102 is open and the opening/closing sensor detects the closed state of the front door 102.) If the certain error continues in the state where the first state or the second state has been completed, the notifying means may cause the first notifying or the second state to be detected. In place of the second notification, an error notification that suggests that a certain error has occurred (e.g., an error display that suggests that a certain error has occurred, an error message that suggests that a certain error has occurred) It is also possible to output an error sound or turn on a lamp in an error notification mode indicating that a certain error has occurred.

This configuration ensures that errors can be dealt with reliably after a setting change operation is performed.

<<Other embodiments>>
Hereinafter, a gaming machine to which the present invention can be applied (for example, a reel gaming machine such as a slot machine 100 or a pinball gaming machine such as a pachinko machine) will be described in detail with reference to Figures 17 to 32. Note that the reference numerals shown in Figures 17 to 32 are used in principle only in the description using Figures 17 to 32, and even if overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the reference numerals shown in Figures 17 to 32 take precedence in the description using Figures 17 to 32.

FIG. 17 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 starts rotating when a predetermined number of game media are inserted and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols receive a predetermined rotation start instruction operation. Based on the reception of the rotation start instruction operation, the success or failure of internal winning of multiple types of winning combinations is determined by lottery, and each of the plurality of reels stops rotating individually by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation. If the conditions determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels stop match the predetermined payout conditions, the game media will be paid out and the game will end; if not, the game media will be paid out. This is a game machine that plays a series of games that end without paying out a game. Note that this payout of game media may be referred to as profit. Furthermore, something that facilitates the acquisition of profits may be referred to as a benefit.

This slot machine 100 comprises a main body 101 and a front door 102 that is attached to the front of the main body 101 and can be opened and closed relative to the main body 101. The front door 102 is a door member that is rotatably attached to the main body 101. The front door 102 is provided with a locking function so that the front door 102 cannot be opened by anyone other than a member of staff at the gaming establishment.

Three reels (left reel 110, center reel 111, right reel 112) with multiple types of patterns arranged on the outer periphery are housed inside the center of the main body 101 (not shown), and are configured to rotate inside the slot machine 100. These reels 110 to 112 are rotated by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

A suitable number of each pattern is printed on a strip member at equal intervals, and the strip member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame material to form each reel 110 to 112. When viewed from the player, approximately three symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed vertically from the symbol display window 113, making a total of nine symbols visible.

Figure 18 shows an example of a line.

To explain this in more detail using FIG. 18, the symbol displayed on the top of the left reel 110 (position 1 in the figure) is the left reel top symbol, the symbol displayed on the middle of the left reel 110 (position 4 in the figure) is the left reel middle symbol, the symbol displayed on the bottom of the left reel 110 (position 7 in the figure) is the left reel bottom symbol, the symbol displayed on the top of the middle reel 111 (position 2 in the figure) is the middle reel top symbol, the symbol displayed on the middle of the left reel 111 (position 5 in the figure) is the middle reel middle symbol, The symbol displayed in the lower row (position 8 in the figure) is called the middle reel lower row symbol, the symbol displayed in the upper row of the right reel 112 (position 3 in the figure) is called the right reel upper row symbol, the symbol displayed in the middle row of the right reel 112 (position 6 in the figure) is called the right reel middle row symbol, and the symbol displayed in the lower row of the right reel 112 (position 9 in the figure) is called the right reel lower row symbol, and each symbol of the reels 110 to 112 is displayed three vertically on each of the reels 110 to 112 through the symbol display window 113, for a total of nine symbols. Then, by rotating each of the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. In other words, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of multiple types of symbols. In addition to reels, electronic image display devices such as liquid crystal display devices can also be used as such display devices. Additionally, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 has three reels located inside the center of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the location where the reels are installed are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) is provided on the back of each of the reels 110 to 112 to illuminate the individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 113. The backlight is configured so that each symbol is shielded so that each symbol can be evenly illuminated. Inside the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (not shown) consisting of a light-emitting section and a light-receiving section is provided near each of the reels 110 to 112, and a light-shielding piece (not shown) of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the light-emitting section and the light-receiving section of this optical sensor (index sensor 730 shown in FIG. 20). The position of the symbols on the reels is determined based on the detection results of this sensor, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbol is displayed on the pay line.

The valid line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates the line 114 that is valid. The active line is the line on which it is judged whether or not a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination has been displayed (described later in FIG. 17) (the line on which winning determination is made). When the symbol corresponding to stops, it is determined that the prize has been won. Here, the line is defined as an area corresponding to one symbol for each of the reels 110 to 112 within the area within the display window 113. Note that lines other than valid lines on which winning determination is not made are referred to as invalid lines.

FIG. 18 shows a middle line L1 consisting of a left reel middle symbol, a middle reel middle symbol, and a right reel middle symbol, a right-down line L2 consisting of a left reel upper symbol, a middle reel middle symbol, and a right reel lower symbol; A rising right line L3 consisting of a left reel lower symbol, a middle reel middle symbol, and a right reel upper symbol, an upper line L4 consisting of a left reel upper symbol, a middle reel upper symbol, and a right reel upper symbol, a left reel lower symbol, Five lines are shown, a lower line L5 consisting of middle reel lower symbols and right reel lower symbols. These lines are just examples, and for example, an area for one symbol is defined for each of the reels 110 to 112, such as a line consisting of a left reel upper symbol, a middle reel lower symbol, and a right reel upper symbol. It is fine as long as it is. Note that among the lines shown in FIG. 18, the upper line L4 is used as an effective line in this embodiment. The active line is predetermined by the number of medals bet as game media. The slot machine 100 of this embodiment is a three-copy bet-only machine, and when the number of medals inserted is less than three, none of the lines become valid, and when three medals are bet, line L4 becomes valid. (becomes used as a valid line). When the line becomes valid, the game can be started by operating the start lever 135. Note that the number of effective lines is not limited to one line. For example, three lines, the middle line L1, the downward-sloping line L2, and the upward-rightward line L3, may be used as active lines, or the number of active lines depending on the number of bets may be used.

The notification lamp 123 is a lamp that notifies the player that, for example, a specific winning combination (specifically, a special combination) has been internally won in an internal lottery described below, or that a special game state described below is in progress. The medal insertion possible lamp 124 is a lamp that notifies the player that a game medal can be inserted. The replay lamp 122 is a lamp that notifies the player that the current game can be replayed (no medal insertion is required) if a replay combination (details of which will be described later) was won in the previous game, which is one of the winning combinations. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for presentation purposes.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100. In this embodiment, one coin is inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed, two coins are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three coins are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. ing. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 will also be referred to as the MAX bet button. In addition, the game medal insertion lamp 129 lights up a number of lamps according to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, a game start signal indicating that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up.

The medal slot 141 is an slot for the player to insert medals at the time of starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal slot 141, and the term "insertion" includes both. be.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (e.g., the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) in numerical form. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals paid out to a player as a result of winning some kind of winning combination. The stored number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are seven-segment (SEG) displays.

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110 to 112. That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated and the start lever 135 is operated, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. The operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139 consisting of a left stop button 137, a middle stop button 138, and a right stop button 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with each of the reels 110 to 112. More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right reel 112 can be stopped by operating the right stop button 139. Hereinafter, the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as the first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as the second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as the third stop operation. The reels that are stopped in response to these stop operations are referred to as the first stop reel, the second stop reel, and the third stop reel, respectively. Furthermore, the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are operated to stop all of the reels 110 to 112 that are spinning is called the operation order or push order. Furthermore, the operation order in which the first stop operation is the stop operation of the left reel 110 is called the "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the stop operation in which the first stop operation is the stop operation of the right reel 112 is called the "reverse push operation order" or simply "reverse push". Note that light-emitting elements may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light-emitting elements can be lit to notify the player.

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove the inserted medals when the medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settling medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and bet medals, and discharging them from the medal payout port 155.

The front door 102 is also provided with a key hole 140, into which a key is inserted and turned to the right to unlock, and turned to the left to lock. The slot machine 100 is provided with an opening sensor 294 (see FIG. 19(a)) that detects when the front door 102 is open. This opening sensor 294 detects when the front door 102 is open by detecting an opening/closing piece that protrudes when the front door 102 is open.

In addition, a first chance button 165 and a second chance button 166 are provided between the bet button 132 and the medal insertion slot 141. A first effect lamp is built into the first chance button 165, and a second effect lamp is built into the second chance button 166. Both the first chance button 165 and the second chance button 166 are operation means operated by the player during the effect. In addition, a left button 167 is provided to the left of the second chance button 166, and a right button 168 is provided to the right. By operating the left button 167 and right button 168, it is sometimes possible to move the cursor displayed on the effect image display device 157, and in such cases, the second chance button 166 may function as a confirmation button.

A title panel 162 is provided at the bottom of the stop button unit 136 for displaying the model name and pasting various certificate stamps. This title panel 162 is illuminated from the back side by a title panel lamp 164. At the bottom of the title panel 162, a medal payout opening 155 and a medal receiving tray 161 are provided.

The sound hole 145 provided at the bottom is a hole for outputting the sound of the bass speaker 277 (see FIG. 19) to the outside. A left side lamp 144L provided on the left side of the front door 102 and a right side lamp 144R provided on the right side are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. A presentation device 160 is disposed at the top of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is also provided at the top of the presentation device 160. This sound hole 143 is a hole for outputting the sound of the upper speaker 272 (see FIG. 19) to the outside. The production device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right shutters 163a and a left shutter 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a production image display device 157 disposed on the back side of the shutter 163. The structure is such that when the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b open horizontally outward in front of the effect image display device 157, the display screen of the effect image display device 157 appears in front of the slot machine 100 (on the player's side). . Note that although the effect image display device 157 is a liquid crystal display device, it does not need to be a liquid crystal display device, and may be any display device that can display various effect images and various game information, such as a multi-segment display (7 segment display). Display), dot matrix display, organic EL display, plasma display, reel (drum), or a display device consisting of a projector and screen. Further, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and the entire display screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, the display screen is rectangular, but it may be square. Furthermore, a decoration (not shown) may be provided around the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, making the display screen appear oddly shaped. Furthermore, although the display screen is a flat surface, it may be a curved surface.

Note that what has been referred to as a lamp so far is an example of a light emitting means, and in this specification, a lamp whose light source is an LED is also referred to as a lamp, and any device that emits light such as a fluorescent lamp or a cold cathode tube is also referred to as a lamp. Sometimes referred to as a lamp, something that emits light corresponds to an example of a light emitting means.

FIG. 19 is a diagram showing the internal configuration of the slot machine 100. FIG. 19(a) is a front view of the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 open, and FIG. It is an enlarged view of the door relay board 290 that is provided.

The main body 101 is a box that is surrounded by a top plate 261, a left side plate 260, a right side plate 260, a bottom plate 264, and a back plate 242, and has an opening at the front. Inside the main body 101, a main control board storage case 210 that stores a main control board 300B (see FIG. 9) inside is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the ventilation hole 249 provided at the top of the back plate 242. A reel unit 700 including three reels 110 to 112 is arranged below the control board storage case 210. On the side of the main control board storage case 210 and the reel unit 700, that is, on the side plate 260 on the left side, a sub control board storage case 220 that stores the sub control board 400B (see FIG. 25) inside is arranged. be. The sub control board storage case 220 is provided with a first selection switch 190. Since this first selection switch 190 is provided inside the main body 101, a person who can unlock the front door 102 (for example, a clerk at a game parlor) cannot open the front door 102. However, the front door 102 is configured so that a person who cannot unlock the front door 102 (for example, a player) cannot operate the front door 102. That is, the first selection switch 190 is provided at a position that cannot be operated by the player. Details of the first selection switch 190 will be described later. Furthermore, an external centralized terminal board 248 is attached to the right side plate 260, which is connected to the main control board 300B (see FIG. 25) and outputs information about the slot machine 100 to an external device.

Also, to the right of the reel unit 700, there is provided a setting key switch 281 for changing the game mode (also called the setting value) of the slot machine 100 and for confirming the changed setting value. Here, the setting value is a value for adjusting the ratio of the total number of gaming media paid out by the gaming machine to the total number of gaming media used by the player as the number of bets on the gaming machine when playing for a specified period of time, and is known as the "payout rate." Multiple setting values, for example, from setting "1" to setting "6," can be set.

The setting key switch 281 is a key switch that is electrically turned on and off by inserting and rotating a predetermined setting key (not shown). Specifically, when a predetermined setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281 and turned clockwise, the setting key switch sensor provided in the setting key switch 281 detects the ON state, and when turned counterclockwise, the setting key switch sensor is turned on. Detects OFF state.

Then, the hopper unit 180 (a device that dispenses medals accumulated in a bucket) is disposed on the lower panel 264, and above this hopper unit 180, i.e., below the reel unit 700, a power supply device 252 having a power supply control board 252B (see FIG. 25) is disposed, and a power switch 244 is disposed on the front side of the power supply device 252. The power switch 244 is a toggle switch electrically connected to the power supply device 252. This power switch 244 can be used to turn the slot machine 100 on (power ON) or off (power OFF). The power supply device 252 converts AC power supplied from the outside to the slot machine 100 into DC, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and supplies it to each control unit and each device, such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400. Furthermore, it is provided with a storage circuit (e.g., a capacitor) for supplying power to a predetermined component (e.g., the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (e.g., 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off.

To the right of the hopper unit 180, there is disposed an auxiliary medal storage 240 for storing medals that overflow from the hopper unit 180, and behind this is disposed an overflow terminal (not shown). The power supply unit 252 is provided with a power cord connector for connecting a power cord 265, and the power cord 265 connected to this extends to the outside through a power cord hole 262 opened in the back panel 242 of the main body 101.

The front door 102 is hinged to the left side plate 260 of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276, and above the symbol display window 113 is provided with a presentation device 160 and a presentation control board for controlling this presentation device 160. (not shown), and an upper speaker 272 is provided. At the bottom of the symbol display window 113, there is provided a medal selector 170 for sorting the inserted medals, a passage 266 through which the medals pass when the medal selector 170 drops illegal medals, etc. into the medal tray 161. There is. Furthermore, a bass speaker 277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 145. Note that an open sensor 294 is provided on the back side of the front door 102. The open sensor 294 is configured to be L (OFF) when the front door 102 is closed, and H (ON) when the front door 102 is open.

On the back side of the front door 102, a door relay board 290 is arranged below the pattern display window 113. This door relay board 290 is provided with a reset switch 291, a setting change button 292, and a setting value display 293, as shown in FIG. 19(b).

The reset switch 291 is a push button type switch, and by pressing the reset switch 291 (pressing it for a short period of time), an error in the slot machine 100 can be reset.

The setting change button 292 is also a push button type switch similar to the reset switch 291. The operating procedure for changing the setting value using the setting change button 292 will be described later.

The setting value display 293 is a display such as a 7-segment LED. This setting value display 293 can display the game mode (setting value) 1 to 6 set by the setting change button 292 in numbers.

When the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281 in the power-on state (power ON) and turned clockwise (setting key OFF → ON), the setting value display 293 displays the currently set game mode (setting value) in numbers, so it can be used to check the currently set game mode. In other words, when the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281 in the power-on state (power ON) and turned clockwise (setting key OFF → ON), a setting value confirmation process that allows the setting value to be confirmed is started, and when the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281 and turned counterclockwise (setting key ON → OFF), the setting value confirmation process ends.

Here, the operating procedure for changing the set value will be explained. By inserting a setting key (not shown) into the setting key switch 281 and turning it clockwise (setting key OFF → ON), the power switch 244 is changed from the power cut-off state (power OFF) to the power-on state (power ON). The setting value change becomes effective (the setting value changing process is started), and each time the setting change button 292 is pressed, the gaming mode (setting value) changes in order from 1 to 6, and the desired gaming mode can be selected. can. Note that by operating the start lever 135, the game mode (set value) selected at that time is determined. Finally, by turning the setting key counterclockwise (setting key ON→OFF), the setting value changing process is completed.

In the following, the period during which the setting value is changed, i.e., the period from the first clockwise operation of the setting key to the last counterclockwise operation of the setting value change operation, is also referred to as the setting value change mode, and the period during which the setting value is confirmed, i.e., the period from the first clockwise operation of the setting key to the last counterclockwise operation of the setting value confirmation operation, is also referred to as the setting value confirmation mode.

Here, the start conditions and end conditions of the setting value change mode and the setting value confirmation mode will be explained in detail. In this embodiment, the conditions for starting the set value change mode are (1) that the power is turned on with the setting key switch 281 in the ON state, and (2) that the front door 102 is in the open state. , is not a condition. Further, the conditions for ending the set value change mode are (1) that the setting key switch 281 is changed from the ON state to the OFF state, and (2) that the front door 102 is in the open state. Similarly, in this embodiment, the starting condition for the set value confirmation mode is that the setting key switch 281 is turned on when the power is turned on, and (2) the front door 102 is left open. This is not a condition. Further, the conditions for ending the set value confirmation mode are (1) that the setting key switch 281 is changed from the ON state to the OFF state, and (2) that the front door 102 is in the open state. That is, in this embodiment, the start condition for the set value change mode (set value confirmation mode) does not require that the front door 102 be in an open state, while the end condition for the set value change mode (set value confirmation mode) requires that the front door 102 be in an open state. If an attempt is made to start the set value change process (set value confirmation process) while the front door 102 is in the closed state, the start condition is cleared, so the set value change process (set value confirmation process) is not started based on an illegal act. It is possible to start execution. However, since the termination condition cannot be cleared, the fraudster cannot terminate the setting value change process (setting value confirmation process). Therefore, it becomes easier to apprehend fraudsters on the spot.

In addition, in the setting value change mode, the effecting devices such as the effect image display device 157, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, the title panel lamp 164, and the speakers 272 and 277 are used to indicate that the setting value is being changed. In the setting value confirmation mode, the above production device is used to make a notification indicating that the setting value is being confirmed (hereinafter also referred to as setting value confirmation notification). )I do.

Next, the structure of the reel unit 700 will be explained using FIG. 20. FIG. 20 is a perspective view showing the configuration of the reel unit 700.

As shown in FIG. 20, the reel unit 700 includes a left reel unit 700L, a middle reel unit 700C, and a right reel unit 700R inside a reel case 702 made of a box-shaped metal plate. At the top of this reel case 702, connectors 7030, 7031, and 7032 are provided for connection to the main control board 300B (see FIG. 25) via harnesses MR1 to MR3 (see FIG. 25). A left reel 110 is arranged in the left reel unit 700L, a middle reel 111 is arranged in the middle reel unit 700C, and a right reel 112 is arranged in the right reel unit 700R. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by motors 110m, 111m, and 112m (see FIG. 25) provided for each reel. Each motor 110m to 112m is a stepping motor. The following will explain the left reel unit 700L as an example, but the same applies to the middle reel unit 700C and the right reel unit 700R. The left reel unit 700L includes a motor 110m, an index sensor 730 for detecting the rotational position of the reel 110, and a backlight module 740 for irradiating light from the back side to the front side of the strip member 710 of the reel 110. It is attached to a mounting base 732.

The replacement work can be performed separately for each of the reel units 700L, 700C, and 700R. For example, if the left reel unit 700L breaks down, only the left reel unit 700L can be replaced with a new reel unit.

FIG. 21A is a perspective view showing the structure of the backlight module 740, and FIG. 21B is a front view of the backlight module 740.

The backlight module 740 is composed of a reflector 742 and an illumination board 744 that is removably attached to the back of the reflector 742. The reflector 742 has three openings BK1 to BK3 that are aligned vertically and connect from the front side to the back side. The illumination board 744 also has two LEDs 745 arranged at positions corresponding to the openings BK1 to BK3.

The openings BK1 to BK3 and LEDs 745 are provided at positions corresponding to the symbol positions (positions No. 1 to 9 shown in FIG. 18) that are displayed in a stopped state in the display window 113 when the openings BK1 to BK3 are installed. As described above, by providing LEDs 745 at each of the openings BK1 to BK3, the light is configured not to interfere with the light that is irradiated at other positions. This allows light to be irradiated at each of positions No. 1 to 9 shown in FIG. 18. For example, by turning on all the LEDs 745, all the symbols visible to the player can be illuminated from behind. Also, by turning on some of them, some of the symbols visible to the player can be illuminated from behind. The number and positions of the openings and LEDs are not limited to this configuration.

Next, the first selection switch 190 and the like shown in FIG. 19 will be described in detail. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing the first selection switch 190 etc. shown in FIG. 3.

FIG. 22(a) is an enlarged view of the first selection switch 190. The first selection switch 190 shown in FIG. 22(a) includes a circular rotating part 190a that has 16 contacts and is configured to be rotatable, and a circular rotating part 190a that is formed to protrude outward from the rotating part 190a as a base end. and an instruction section 190b. Further, around the first selection switch 190, 16 numbers (hexadecimal numbers from 0 to F) are placed, corresponding to each of the 16 contacts of the rotating part 190a. The first selection switch 190 is an operation means for selecting one number from among 16 numbers.

These 16 numbers are treated as values (setting values) that represent the setting. That is, the first selection switch 190 is configured to be able to output the numerical value information indicated by the indicator 190b as a detection signal to the outside. For example, as shown in FIG. 2A, when the indicator 190b indicates "B", the hexadecimal value "B" is selected, and the numerical value information can be output as a 4-bit binary detection signal (0b1011). Therefore, the first sub-controller 400 (see FIG. 24), which will be described later, is configured to be able to detect the numerical value selected by the first selection switch 190 (any of the hexadecimal values 0 to F), by inputting this detection signal, and the first sub-controller 400 treats the numerical value indicated by the indicator 190b as the selected setting value.

Instead of the first selection switch 190 shown in FIG. 22(a), for example, a rotary switch 191 as shown in FIG. 22(b) may be used, or a slide switch 192 as shown in FIG. 22(c) may be used.

The rotary switch 191 shown in FIG. 22(b) has a ring-shaped rotating part 191a that has 16 contacts and is configured to be rotatable, and a notch window 191b formed in this rotating part 191a. . Further, on the bottom of the rotating part 191a of the rotary switch 191, 16 numbers (hexadecimal numbers from 0 to F) are provided, corresponding to each of the 16 contacts of the rotating part 191a.

In this rotary switch 191, a numerical value visible through the notched window 191b is selected, and the information on that numerical value can be output to the outside as a detection signal. As shown in FIG. 22(b), when the numerical value visible through the notched portion 191b is "F", the hexadecimal numerical value F is selected, and the information on that numerical value can be output as a 4-bit binary detection signal (0b1111). Therefore, the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 24), which will be described later, is configured to be able to detect the selected numerical value (in this example, any of the numerical values 0 to F in hexadecimal) visible through the notched portion 191b of the rotary switch 191 by inputting this detection signal.

The slide switch 192 shown in FIG. 22(c) has a rectangular guide groove 192a and a slide section 192b that has 16 contacts and can slide along the guide groove 192a. In addition, 16 numbers (in this example, 0 to F in hexadecimal) are printed on the top of the slide switch 192, one for each of the 16 contacts of the slide section 192b.

This slide switch 192 selects the numerical value at which the slide portion 192b is located, and is configured to be able to output information about the numerical value to the outside as a detection signal. As shown in FIG. 22(c), when the slide portion 192b is located at the location of the number "0", it means that the number 0 in hexadecimal notation is selected, and the information of that number is converted into binary number. It can be output as a 4-bit detection signal (0b0000). Therefore, by inputting this detection signal, the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 24), which will be described later, selects a selected value (a value from 0 to F in hexadecimal) at which the slide portion 192b of the slide switch 192 is located. The configuration is such that it is possible to detect any of the following.

The first selection switch 190 described above using Figures 22(a) to 22(c) is a mechanical switch, so it can operate even when not energized, and can retain the selected numerical value (set value) even if the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like. Therefore, once a selection is made, the selected numerical value can be retained even if the power is turned off, making it easy to set, for example, to the set value intended by the arcade. In addition, since it is equipped with numbers (display means) that allow the selected numerical value to be confirmed, it is easy to check the set value, making it highly convenient.

Figure 22 (d) is an enlarged view of the second selection switch 194. The second selection switch 194 shown in Figure 22 (d) is composed of the left button 167, the right button 168, and the second chance button 166 that functions as a confirmation button, as shown in Figure 17. While the first selection switch 190 shown in Figure 22 (a) is an operation means provided in a position where the player cannot operate it, this second selection switch 194 is an operation means provided in a position where the player can operate it. In other words, the second selection switch 194 is a switch that can be operated by the player, and for example, a numerical value (setting value) representing a setting can be selected by pressing the left button 167 and the right button 168, and the selected setting value is confirmed by pressing the second chance button 166. Alternatively, a setting value can be selected by pressing the left button 167 and the right button 168, and the selected setting value may be confirmed after a predetermined time has passed without pressing the second chance button 166.

This second selection switch 194 can output a detection signal corresponding to the second chance button 166, left button 167, or right button 168 when any one of the buttons is operated. Therefore, the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 24), which will be described later, detects which of the second chance button 166, left button 167, or right button 168 has been operated by inputting this detection signal. The configuration is such that this is possible.

Instead of the second selection switch 194 shown in FIG. 22(d), for example, as shown in FIG. 22(e), a cross key 195 having up, down, left, right and a confirmation button may be provided in addition to the second chance button 166, and this cross key 195 may be used as the second selection switch 194. Also, two types of operation means may be provided, one of which may double as the chance button, or only one of the operation means may be the second selection switch 194.

The second selection switch 194 is not a mechanical switch, and therefore cannot operate without electricity, and cannot retain the selected numerical value (set value) by itself. For this reason, it is necessary to provide a separate storage means for storing the set value. The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 is configured not to back up the numerical value selected by the second selection switch 194, but it may be configured to back it up.

Figure 22(f) is a diagram comparing the size of the second chance button 166 with the first chance button 165 shown in Figure 17. Figure 22(f) also shows a left button 167 and a right button 168. The first chance button 165 is about three times the size of the second chance button 166.

In addition, a cut-in display can be performed on the condition that the second chance button 166 or the first chance button 165 is operated, or one of the chance buttons can be used for a continuous hit effect, and the other chance button can be used as a hidden button. You can. Here, a hidden button is one that does not suggest or encourage operation of the operating means (for example, a button that does not suggest or encourage operation of the operating means (for example, an operation suggestion display or an operation promotion display is not displayed on the effect image display device 157, and a built-in effect lamp does not illuminate). (at least one or both), when the operating means is operated, some kind of effect is performed.

FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example of selection of setting values using the first selection switch 190 and the second selection switch 194.

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, the setting values that can be selected with the first selection switch 190 and the second selection switch 194 include the sounds output from the bass speaker 277 and the upper speaker 272 (for example, BGM, sound effects, error This is the volume value of the sound (sound, etc.). As described above, the first selection switch 190 is an operating means provided in a position that cannot be operated by a player, and is a switch used by a clerk at a game parlor when selecting a setting value. Further, only the first selection switch 190 of the first selection switch 190 and the second selection switch 194 selects whether to set the slot machine 100 to a power saving mode or a non-power saving mode (normal mode). can also be done. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, the power saving mode is set only when a demonstration performance is being performed. Hereinafter, the demonstration will be abbreviated as demo. The demonstration performance is a performance that is started when a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed without the game being restarted after one game ended. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, when a demonstration performance is started with the power saving mode selected, the slot machine 100 is set to the power saving mode.

When the slot machine 100 is set to the power saving mode, the animation (demonstration animation) displayed on the effect image display device 157 is played in a dark state, thereby reducing the power consumption of the effect image display device 157 and saving power. . In addition, the power consumption of these light emitting means can be reduced by turning off the first effect lamp built into the first chance button 165, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the backlight module 740 shown in FIG. Power is saved. Note that when these light emitting means are turned off, the power consumption becomes 0, and the power saving effect of these light emitting means is higher than the power saving effect of the effect image display device 157.

When the first selection switch 190 is operated, the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2 is displayed on the performance image display device 157. When selecting the volume using the first selection switch 190, one volume level is selected from seven volume levels. In addition, in non-power saving mode, mute can also be selected.

Figure 23 (A) shows the display screen of the performance image display device 157 when the indicator 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "0" as shown in Figure 22 (a).

The first volume selection icon SI1 is displayed on the performance image display device 157. This first volume selection icon SI1 displays the selected value of the seven volume levels and a seven-level horizontal level display (indicator display). The first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 23(A) displays that the selected value of the seven volume levels is 0 (0/7) and the word "Mute". Furthermore, none of the seven-level horizontal level display is lit. When mute is selected by the first selection switch 190, the output sound from the woofer 277 and upper speaker 272 cannot be heard at all.

Figure 23 (B) is a diagram showing the display screen of the performance image display device 157 when the indicator 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "1" as shown in Figure 22 (a).

The first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 23(B) displays the words "Volume 1/7" indicating that the selected value of the seven volume levels is 1. Further, in the seven-level horizontal level display, only the first level on the left is lit in the first color (for example, yellow).

Figure 23 (C) is a diagram showing the display screen of the performance image display device 157 when the indicator 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "7" as shown in Figure 22 (a).

The first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 23(C) displays the characters "Volume 7/7" indicating that the selected value of the seven volume levels is 7. Furthermore, in the seven-level horizontal level display, all levels from the first level to the seventh level are lit in the first color (for example, yellow). When the seventh volume level is selected by the first selection switch 190, the output sound from the bass speaker 277 and the upper speaker 272 becomes the maximum volume.

Figure 23 (D) is a diagram showing the display screen of the performance image display device 157 when the indicator 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "8" as shown in Figure 22 (a).

The first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 23(D) displays text indicating that the selected volume is the exhibition volume. This exhibition volume is a volume suitable for a presentation of the slot machine 100 at an exhibition or the like, and is, for example, a volume between the fourth volume level and the fifth volume level. In addition, in the seven-level horizontal level display, all levels from the first to the seventh level are lit in a second color (for example, red). Note that instead of the exhibition volume, it may be possible to select a special volume that cannot be selected with the second selection switch 194 and can only be selected with the first selection switch 190. For example, it may be possible to select a step tone in which the volume increases by one level every time a predetermined time has elapsed.

The first volume selection icon SI1 displayed on the effect image display device 157 disappears if the first selection switch 190 is not operated for a predetermined period of time.

Figure 23 (a) shows the display screen of the performance image display device 157 when the indicator 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "9" as shown in Figure 22 (a).

A second volume selection icon SI2 is displayed on the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 23(a). The background color of the second volume selection icon SI2 is different from the background color of the first volume selection icon SI1. Further, the second volume selection icon SI2 displays the words "power saving mode", seven volume level selection values, and seven horizontal level display (indicator display). The second volume selection icon SI2 shown in FIG. 23(a) displays the text "power saving mode" and the text "Volume 7/7" indicating that the selected value of the seven volume levels is 7. There is. Furthermore, in the seven-level horizontal level display, all of the first to seventh levels are lit in the third color (for example, blue).

Figure 23 (b) shows the display screen of the performance image display device 157 when the indicator 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "F" as shown in Figure 22 (a).

The second volume selection icon SI2 shown in FIG. 23(b) displays the text "Power saving mode" and the text "Volume 1/7" indicating that the selected value of the seven volume levels is 1. There is. Further, in the seven-level horizontal level display, only the first level at the left end is lit in the third color (for example, blue).

The second volume selection icon SI2 displayed on the effect image display device 157 also disappears if the first selection switch 190 is not operated for a predetermined period of time.

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, when the instruction section 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "9" or any of "A" to "F" shown in FIG. 22(a), the slot machine 100 is Setting to power saving mode is selected. Note that even if it is selected to set the power saving mode, the slot machine 100 is not set to the power saving mode, and as described above, in order to be set to the power saving mode, it is necessary to be in the demo state. becomes a condition. On the other hand, when the instruction section 190b is set to one of "0" to "8" shown in FIG. 22(a), setting the slot machine 100 to the non-power saving mode is selected. If setting to non-power saving mode is selected, the power saving mode will not be set even if the demo state is entered. Further, while a game is being played, the slot machine 100 is set to a non-power saving mode (normal mode).

The volume output from the upper speaker 272 and the bass speaker 277 is the same whether the slot machine 100 is set to the power saving mode or the non-power saving mode. Therefore, the volume output for the selection value selected in FIG. 23(B) is the same as the volume output for the selection value selected in FIG. 23(b), and the volume output for the selection value selected in FIG. 23(C) is also the same as the volume output for the selection value selected in FIG. 23(a).

Figure 23 (A) shows the display screen of the performance image display device 157 when the second selection switch 194 is operated.

When the second selection switch 194, which can be operated by the player, is operated while the first guide display icon GI1 described later is displayed on the effect image display device 157, the third volume selection icon SI3 is displayed on the effect image display device 157. The third volume selection icon SI3 displays the selected value of the five volume levels and the five vertical level display (indicator display). The third volume selection icon SI3 shown in FIG. 23(A) displays the characters "Volume 1/5", indicating that the selected value of the five volume levels is 1. In addition, in the five-level level display, only the lowest level, the first level, is lit in the fourth color (e.g., green). Pressing the right button 168 of the second selection switch 194 once increases the level by one level, and pressing the left button 167 once decreases the level by one level. However, even if the left button 167 is pressed once in the state shown in FIG. 23(A), the level does not decrease any further. In other words, mute cannot be selected by operating the second selection switch 194. It is also possible to select mute by operating the second selection switch 194.

Figure 23 (b) shows the display screen of the performance image display device 157 when the right button 168 is pressed four times from the state shown in the same figure (a).

The third volume selection icon SI3 shown in FIG. 23(a) displays the characters "Volume 5/5," indicating that the selected volume level of the five levels is 5. In addition, in the five-level vertical level display, all levels 1 to 5 are lit in the fourth color (e.g., green).

The third volume selection icon SI3 displayed on the effect image display device 157 disappears if the left button 167 and the right button 168 are not operated for a predetermined period of time.

The volume selected by operating the first selection switch 190 is in seven levels, while the volume selected by operating the second selection switch 194 is in five levels. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, the volume setting range is from 0 to 127, and the setting values for each of the seven stages are 18 for the first stage, 36 for the second stage, 54 for the third stage, and 4 stages. The number is 73, the fifth row is 91, the sixth row is 109, and the seventh row is 127. On the other hand, in the 5th stage, excluding the 1st and 7th stages of the 7th stage, the remaining stages are the 2nd to 6th stages. That is, the second stage (36) of seven stages is the first stage of five stages, and the sixth stage (109) of seven stages is the fifth stage of five stages. Therefore, only the clerk at the game parlor can select the setting value (18) for the first stage of the seven stages and the setting value (127) for the seventh stage. In addition, the first stage (18) of the 7th stage may be the first stage of the 5th stage, the 5th stage (91) of the 7th stage may be the 5th stage of the 5th stage, or the 3rd stage of the 7th stage (54) ) may be the first stage of five stages, and the seventh stage (127) of seven stages may be the fifth stage of five stages. Alternatively, each set value in the five stages may be set to 26 for the first stage, 51 for the second stage, 76 for the third stage, 102 for the fourth stage, and 127 for the fifth stage.

While the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2 and the first guidance display icon GI1, which will be described later, are displayed on the effect image display device 157, press the left button 167 of the second selection switch 194 once. When pressed, the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2 that had been displayed until then is replaced by the third volume selection icon SI3, and a display indicating that the selected value of the volume level is the second level is displayed. . On the other hand, in the same state, if you press the right button 167 instead of the left button 167 once, the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2 that was displayed until then will be replaced by the third volume selection icon SI3, A display appears indicating that the selected volume value is at the fourth level. These displays are displayed no matter what selection value is displayed by the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2. That is, whether the selected value is 1/7 or 7/7, if the left button 167 is pressed once, the selected value of 2/5 will be displayed. Further, whether the selected value is 1/7 or 7/7, if the right button 168 is pressed once, the selected value of 4/5 will be displayed. This is because when switching to the third volume selection icon SI3, the previous selection value is discarded, the initial value of the volume level of 3/5 of the third volume selection icon SI3 is reselected, and the left button 167 or the right button 168, the initial value (3/5) is changed. That is, when the operation of the second selection switch 194 is accepted, the initial value of the third volume selection icon SI3 is set, and when the second selection switch 194 is operated, the value changed from the initial value is set as the first value. 3 Displayed as volume selection icon SI3. The first selection switch 190 is designed to be operated by a store clerk, and the second selection switch 194 is designed to be operated by a player, so that the player's intentions can be prioritized. On the other hand, if the first selection switch 190 is operated while the third volume selection icon SI3 is displayed, the selection value displayed on the third volume selection icon SI3 is inherited and the first selection By operating the switch 190, a value that has been changed from the previously selected value is displayed as the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2. However, here too, the initial value (for example, 4/7) of the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2 may be set without inheriting the selected value.

Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the slot machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 24. Note that FIG. 24 shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of the game, and a main control unit 300 that controls the main performance according to command signals (hereinafter simply referred to as “commands”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The second sub-control unit 500 controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-control unit 400.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 that stores control program data, lottery data used during internal lottery of winning combinations, and reel pattern arrangements, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input and output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time and number of times, and a WDT (watchdog timer) 314. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and this also applies to the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal with a predetermined period output by a crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 304 for each interrupt time. The CPU 304 monitors the sensors and transmits drive pulses in response to the interrupt request.

The main control unit 300 is equipped with a random number generating circuit 316, which is used as a hardware random number counter that varies the value within the range of 0 to 65535 based on the clock signal input from the crystal oscillator 315a, and a start-up signal output circuit 338 that outputs a start-up signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When a start-up signal is input from this start-up signal output circuit 338, the CPU 304 starts game control (starts the main control unit main processing described below).

In addition, the main control unit 300 includes a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 detects various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal input from the medal slot 141) at each interrupt time. A medal reception sensor for medals, a start lever 135 sensor, a left stop button 137 sensor, a middle stop button 138 sensor, a right stop button 139 sensor, a payment button 134 sensor, a medal payout sensor for medals paid out from the hopper unit 180, and a medal payout sensor for the left reel 110. The status of the index sensor, the index sensor of the middle reel 111, the index sensor of the right reel 112, etc.) is monitored.

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random number generation circuit 316. The random number generation circuit 316 receives this signal, latches the value at that timing, and stores it in a register that stores random numbers to be used in the lottery.

Two medal acceptance sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion port 141, and detect whether a medal has passed through. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135, and detect the start operation by the player. The left stop button 137 sensor, middle stop button 138 sensor, and right stop button 139 sensor are installed on the corresponding stop buttons 137 to 139, respectively, and detect the operation of the stop buttons by the player.

A bet button 130 sensor, a bet button 131 sensor, and a bet button 132 sensor are installed in each of the corresponding bet buttons 130 to 132, and are used to input medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 into a game. Detects the input operation when inputting. The payment button 134 sensor is provided on the payment button 134. When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals dispensed by the hopper unit 180. Note that each of the above sensors may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The index sensor of the left reel 110, the index sensor of the center reel 111, and the index sensor of the right reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting base of each reel 110 to 112, and turn to L level every time a light-shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes by. Rotational position information indicating how far the reel has rotated from the reference position from the time it turns to L level until it turns to L level again is calculated based on the count value of the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b. When the CPU 304 detects the L level signal, it determines that the reel has made one rotation, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero. This rotational position information is stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300.

The main control unit 300 controls a drive circuit 322 that drives the motors 110m to 112m (see FIG. 25) provided for each reel 110 to 112 of the reel unit 700, and a solenoid provided to the medal selector 170 that selects the inserted medals. A drive circuit 324 that drives, a drive circuit 326 that drives a motor 180m (see FIG. 25) provided in the hopper unit 180, various lamps 339 (valid line display lamp 120, notification lamp 123, game medal input possible lamp 124, replay lamp 122, the game medal insertion lamp 129 includes a drive circuit 328 that drives the game start lamp 121, the stored number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127).

Further, an information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 connects a slot to an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 334. Outputs gaming information (for example, information indicating gaming status) of the machine 100.

The main control unit 300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 300 from the power supply device 252 (see FIG. 3). The voltage monitoring circuit 330 outputs a low voltage signal to the basic circuit 302 indicating that the voltage has dropped when the voltage value of the power supply is below a predetermined value (9V in this embodiment).

The main control unit 300 also has an output interface for sending commands to the first sub-control unit 400, enabling communication with the first sub-control unit 400. Note that information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to send signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400, but is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be sent from the first sub-control unit 400 to the main control unit 300.

The components of the main control unit 300 described above are mounted on the main control unit board 300B (see Figure 25).

<Sub-control unit>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be explained. The first sub-control unit 400 receives the control command sent by the main control unit 300 via the input interface. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on this control command, and this basic circuit 402 is connected to a CPU 404 for temporarily storing data. It is equipped with a RAM 408, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, lighting patterns of the backlight module 740, data for controlling various indicators, and the like.

The CPU 404 transmits frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a sound source IC 418, which is provided with an upper speaker 272 and a bass speaker 277 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls the amplifier and the sound output from the upper speaker 272 and the bass speaker 277 in response to commands from the CPU 404. An S-ROM (sound ROM) in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source IC 418, and audio data acquired from this ROM is amplified by the amplifier and output from the upper speaker 272 and the bass speaker 277.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 422, to which various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, left side lamp 144L, right side lamp 144R, title panel lamp 164, bet button lamp 200, backlight module 740, first performance lamp built into the first chance button 165, second performance lamp built into the second chance button 166, etc.) are connected via an input/output interface.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 424 that drives the motor 163m of the shutter 163 (see FIG. 25). The motor 163m of the shutter 163 is a stepping motor, and the drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to the motor 160m in response to a command from the CPU 404.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sensor circuit 426, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 at every interrupt time. Furthermore, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a switch sensor 427, and this switch sensor 427 detects the depression of the first chance button 165. Further, the switch sensor 427 also detects the depression of each button of the second selection switch 194 consisting of the second chance button 166, the left button 167, and the right button 168. Detection signals from the shutter sensor 428 and the switch sensor 427 are output to the basic circuit 402 by the sensor circuit 426.

Further, although the first selection switch sensor 190 is directly connected to the basic circuit 402, this first selection switch sensor 190 may also be connected to the basic circuit 402 via the switch sensor 427 and the sensor circuit 426. .

The CPU 404 also sends and receives signals to the second sub-control unit 500 via the output interface.

Each component of the first sub-control unit 400 described above is mounted on the first sub-control unit board 400B (see FIG. 25).

The second sub-control unit 500 performs various controls of the performance device 160, including display control of the performance image display device 157. Note that the second sub-control unit 500 may be configured with multiple control units, such as a control unit that controls the display of the performance image display device 157 and a control unit that controls various performance drive devices (for example, a control unit that controls the motor drive of the shutter 163).

The second sub-control unit 500 has a basic circuit 502 that receives control commands sent by the first sub-control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on these control commands. This basic circuit 502 is equipped with a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling the input and output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, etc. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output by a crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, etc.

The CPU 504 transmits the frequency division data stored in a specified area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a specified timing. The counter timer 512 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 for each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the second sub-control unit 500 is provided with a VDP 534 (video display processor), and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 536 are connected to the VDP 534 via a bus. The VDP 534 reads image data etc. stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 536, and displays the image on the effect image display device 157.

With the circuit configuration described above, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits a control signal instructing the setting of the power saving mode to the drive circuit 422 or to the second sub-control unit 500. As a result, the effect image display device 157 receives the control signal via the second sub-control unit 500, and controls the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165, the side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the backlight. The module 740 receives the control signal without going through the second sub-controller 500.

Next, an example of the connection between each board such as the power supply control board, the main control part board, and the first sub-control part board, and each unit such as the reel unit, hopper unit, and production movable body unit will be explained.

Figure 25 shows an example of connections between each board and each unit.

This Figure 25 shows the power supply control board 252B, the main control board 300B, the first sub-control board 400B, the reel unit 700, the hopper unit 180, and the performance movable body unit 160U. The performance movable body unit 160U is a unit that moves the shutter 163, which is incorporated into the performance device 160 shown in Figure 17. The shutter 163 is an example of a movable body.

The power supply control board 252B, the main control board 300B and the first sub-control board 400B each have multiple connectors PC1-PC4, MC1-MC6 and SC1-SC4. The reel unit 700, the hopper unit 180 and the performance movable body unit 160U each also have one or more connectors HC1, RC1-RC3 and DC1.

The island equipment installed in the gaming machine store steps down the 100V AC power supply to a voltage of 24V, and the 24V AC current is supplied to the pachinko machine 100 through the power cord 265 connected to the connector PC1. The 24V AC current is converted to a 24V DC voltage, a 12V DC voltage, and a 5V DC voltage in the power supply control board 252B. Note that it may be converted to other DC voltages, but the explanation here will be about a 24V DC voltage and a 5V DC voltage.

The power control board 252B shown in FIG. 25 shows a 24V power line and a 5V power line, and a power control 24V monitor LED 24PL and a power control 24V capacitor 24PC connected to the 24V power line are connected to the 5V power line. Also shown are a power control 5V monitor LED 5PL and a power control 5V capacitor 5PC. The power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL is a power supply monitoring LED lamp that lights up or blinks while a 24V DC current is flowing, and the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL lights up or blinks while a 5V DC current is flowing. This is an LED lamp for monitoring the power supply. Also shown is the power switch 244 also shown in FIG.

A 24V power line and a 5V power line are connected to the connector PC2 of the power control board 252B. This connector PC2 and the connector MC5 of the main control board 300B are connected by a harness PM, and the main control board 300B is supplied with a 24V DC current and also a 5V DC current through the harness PM. .

Further, a 24V power line is connected to the connector PC3 of the power control board 252B. This connector PC3 and the connector SC1 of the first sub-control board 400B are connected by a harness PS1, and a 24V DC current is supplied to the first sub-control board 400B through the harness PS1. Further, a 5V power line is connected to the connector PC4 of the power control board 252B. This connector PC4 and the connector SC2 of the first sub-control board 400B are connected by a harness PS2, and a 5V DC current is supplied to the first sub-control board 400B through the harness PS2.

The main control board 300B may be supplied with 24V and 5V through separate harnesses, just like the first sub-control board 400B. The first sub-control board 400B may be supplied with 24V and 5V through a common harness, just like the main control board 300B.

The main control unit board 300B shown in FIG. 25 also shows a 24V power supply line and a 5V power supply line. A 24V DC current supplied through the harness PM flows through the 24V power line of the main control board 300B, and a 5V DC current also supplied through the harness PM flows through the 5V power line of the main control board 300B. . Further, the main control unit board 300B shown in FIG. 25 also shows a main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and a main control 24V capacitor 24MC connected to the 24V power supply line, and a main control 5V monitor LED 5ML connected to the 5V power supply line. ing. The main control 24V monitor LED 24ML is a power supply monitoring LED lamp that lights up or blinks while a 24V DC current is flowing, and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML lights up or blinks while a 5V DC current is flowing. This is an LED lamp for monitoring the power supply. Note that no capacitor is provided on the 5V power supply line.

Furthermore, a hopper motor drive IC 326i and a reel motor drive IC 322i are mounted on the main control board 300B. The hopper motor drive IC 326i is an integrated circuit that constitutes the drive circuit 326 shown in FIG. The reel motor drive IC 322i is an integrated circuit that constitutes the drive circuit 322 shown in FIG. Both the hopper motor drive IC 326i and the reel motor drive IC 322i are supplied with a 24V DC current and a 5V DC current, respectively. Although not shown, the basic circuit 302 shown in FIG. 24 is configured on the main control board 300B, and integrated circuits constituting other drive circuits 324, 328, etc. are also mounted thereon.

The connector MC1 of the main control board 300B, to which the hopper motor drive IC 326i is connected, and the connector HC1 of the hopper unit 180 are connected by a harness MH. The 24V DC current and 5V DC current that had been supplied to the hopper motor drive IC 326i are each supplied to the hopper unit 180 through the harness MH, so that the motor 180m provided in the hopper unit 180 can be driven. Further, a control signal (command) for controlling the motor 180m is sent from the main control board 300B through the harness MH.

Furthermore, the connector MC2 of the main control board 300B, which is connected to the reel motor drive IC 322i, and the connector RC1 of the reel unit 700 are connected by a harness MR1, and the connector MC3, which is also connected to the reel motor drive IC 322i, and the reel unit. The connector RC2 of the reel unit 700 is connected by a harness MR2, and the connector MC4, which is also connected to the reel motor drive IC 322i, and the connector RC3 of the reel unit 700 are connected by a harness MR3. The 24V DC current and 5V DC current supplied to the reel motor drive IC 322i are respectively supplied to the reel unit 700 through these harnesses MR1 to MR3, and each motor 110m to 112m provided for each reel is connected to the reel unit 700. It becomes possible to drive. Further, control signals (commands) for controlling the motors 110m to 112m are sent from the main control board 300B through the harnesses MR1 to MR3, respectively. Although a harness is connected to each motor, connectors RC1 to RC3 on the reel unit 700 side are made into one connector, connectors MC2 to MC4 on the main control board 300B side are also made into one connector, and one common harness is used. You can also connect with However, although it is called one common harness, it is a collection of three harnesses MR1 to MR3.

Furthermore, the connector MC6 of the main control board 300B and the connector SC4 of the first sub-control board 400B are connected by a harness MS. This harness MS is a harness for control signals (for sending commands) and is not used for supplying current.

The first sub-control unit board 400B shown in FIG. 25 also shows a 24V power supply line and a 5V power supply line. A 24V DC current supplied through the harness PS1 flows through the 24V power line of the first sub-control unit board 400B, and a 5V DC current supplied through the harness PS2 flows through the 5V power line of the first sub-control unit board 400B. Current flows. The first sub-control unit board 400B shown in FIG. 25 also includes a sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and a sub-control 24V capacitor 24SC connected to the 24V power line, and a sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL connected to the 5V power line. It is shown. The sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL is a power monitoring LED lamp that lights up or blinks while a 24V DC current is flowing, and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL lights up or blinks while a 5V DC current is flowing. This is an LED lamp for monitoring the power supply. Note that, also in the first sub-control board 400B, no capacitor is provided in the 5V power supply line.

The first sub-control board 400B also has a movable body motor driving IC 424i mounted thereon. This movable body motor driving IC 424i is an integrated circuit that constitutes the driving circuit 424 shown in FIG. 24. A direct current of 24 V and a direct current of 5 V are both supplied to the movable body motor driving IC 424i. Although not shown here, the first sub-control board 400B also has the basic circuit 402 shown in FIG. 24 mounted thereon, and also has integrated circuits that constitute the other driving circuits 424, 426, etc. mounted thereon.

The connector SC3 of the first sub-control board 400B, to which the movable body motor drive IC 424i is connected, and the connector DC1 of the performance movable body unit 160U are connected by a harness SD. The 24V DC current and 5V DC current supplied to the movable body motor drive IC 424i are supplied to the performance movable body unit 160U through this harness SD, enabling the motor 163m provided in the performance movable body unit 160U to be driven. In addition, a control signal (command) that controls the motor 163m is sent from the first sub-control board 400B through this harness SD.

Note that the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 also includes a second sub-control unit 500 as shown in FIG. 24, and although not shown in FIG. 25, the second sub-control board is also separated from the power supply control board 252B. A 24V DC current and a 5V DC current are each supplied through the illustrated harness. Further, the second sub-control board is connected to the first sub-control board 400B by a harness for control signals (for command transmission). Furthermore, the second sub-control board is also connected to the effect device (effect image display device 157) in the same way as the first sub-control board 400B.

As explained above, the main control board 300B and the hopper unit 180 are electrically connected by a harness MH, and the main control board 300B and the reel unit 700 are also electrically connected by harnesses MR1-MR3. In addition, the first sub-control board 400B and the performance movable body unit 160U are also electrically connected by a harness SD.

FIG. 26 is a diagram showing how the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 in a power-off state is opened and the left reel 110 is manually rotated. The power-off state may be a state in which the power switch 244 is turned off, or a state in which the power switch 244 is turned on but the power cord 265 is not connected to the outlet. However, it may also be a state in which power is not being supplied from the island equipment (the same applies below). If power is not being supplied from the island equipment, even if the power cord 265 is connected to the outlet and the power switch 244 is on, the power is off. Even in such a power outage state, each reel 110 to 112 can be manually rotated in either the forward direction or the reverse direction.

Which of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 25 (power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL) lights up in the energized state shown in FIG. ) is also off when the power is off.

However, as shown in FIG. 26, when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, a current (induced current) due to the back electromotive force is generated in the motor 110m (see FIG. 25) that rotates the left reel 110. Continuing the explanation with reference to FIG. 25, the induced current generated in the motor 110m flows through the harness MR1 into the main control board 300B and is supplied to the 24V power line and the 5V power line from the reel drive IC 322i. A main control 24V adjustment resistor 24MR is provided between the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and ground, and a main control 5V adjustment resistor 5MR is provided between the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML and ground. The main control 24V monitor LED 24ML is lit by the induced current because its resistance value is adjusted by the main control 24V adjustment resistor 24MR, and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML is lit by the induced current because its resistance value is adjusted by the main control 5V adjustment resistor 5MR. Also, even if manual rotation is stopped, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML continues to light for a while because the 24V power line is provided with the main control 24V capacitor 24MC. On the other hand, the 5V power line does not have a capacitor, so the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML goes out immediately when manual rotation is stopped. In other words, when manual rotation is stopped, the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML goes out before the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML. Note that the 5V power line may also be provided with a capacitor with a lower capacity than the main control 24V capacitor 24MC.

The induced current that flowed into the main control board 300B then flows through the harness PM into the power supply control board 252B, and is supplied to the 24V power line and the 5V power line from the connector PC2. A power supply control 24V adjustment resistor 24PR is provided between the power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL and ground, and a power supply control 5V adjustment resistor 5PR is provided between the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL and ground. The power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL is lit by the induced current because its resistance value is adjusted by the power supply control 24V adjustment resistor 24PR, and the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL is lit by the induced current because its resistance value is adjusted by the power supply control 5V adjustment resistor 5PR. Here, the LEDs of multiple boards, such as the LEDs (24ML, 5ML) of the main control board 300B and the LEDs (24PL, 5PL) of the power supply control board 252B, are emitting light. Even if you stop rotating the motor manually, the 24V power supply line has a power supply control 24V capacitor 24PC, so the power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL will continue to light for a while. Also, the 5V power supply line has a power supply control 5V capacitor 5PC, so the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL will also continue to light for a while.

The induced current that has flowed into the power supply control board 252B further flows into the first sub-control board 400B through the harness PS1, and is supplied to the 24V power line from the connector SC1. A sub-control 24V adjustment resistor 24SR is provided between the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the ground. A sub-control 5V adjustment resistor 5SR is provided between the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL and the ground. The sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL has its resistance value adjusted by the sub-control 24V adjustment resistor 24SR, so that it is turned on by an induced current. Further, the induced current flowing into the power supply control board 252B flows into the first sub-control board 400B through the harness PS2, and is supplied to the 5V power supply line from the connector SC2. A sub-control 5V adjustment resistor 5SR is provided between the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL and the ground. The sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL is lit by an induced current because its resistance value is adjusted by the sub-control 5V adjustment resistor 5SR. Here, the LEDs of multiple boards such as the LEDs (24ML, 5ML) of the main control board 300B, the LEDs (24PL, 5PL) of the power supply control board 252B, and the LEDs (24SL, 5SL) of the first sub-control board 400B emit light. There will be. Note that even if the manual rotation is stopped, the sub-control 24-V monitor LED 24SL continues to be lit for a while because the sub-control 24-V capacitor 24SC is provided in the 24-V power supply line. On the other hand, since no capacitor is provided in the 5V power supply line, the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL immediately turns off when the manual rotation is stopped.

The above explanation is of the phenomenon that occurs when each harness MR1, PM, PS1, PS2 is properly connected to the connector and not broken. On the other hand, if the harness MR1 is broken or not properly connected to the connector RC1 and/or connector MC2 (disconnected or not fully inserted), none of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 25 will light up no matter how much you manually spin the left reel 110, and the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and main control 5V monitor LED 5ML will remain off. As a result, if none of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 25 or the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and main control 5V monitor LED 5ML do not light up even when you manually spin the left reel 110, you can suspect an abnormality in the harness MR1 or a poor connection with the connectors RC1 and MC2.

In addition, if the harness PM is broken or not properly connected to the connector MC5 and/or the connector PC2, when the left reel 110 is manually spun, the main control 24V monitor LED24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED5ML will light up, but the sub control 24V monitor LED24SL, the sub control 5V monitor LED5SL, the power control 24V monitor LED24PL and the power control 5V monitor LED5PL will not light up. As a result, if the main control 24V monitor LED24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED5ML are lit up when the left reel 110 is manually spun, but the sub control 24V monitor LED24SL, the sub control 5V monitor LED5SL, the power control 24V monitor LED24PL and the power control 5V monitor LED5PL are not lit up, an abnormality in the harness PM or a poor connection with the connectors MC5 and PC2 can be suspected.

Furthermore, even if the main control board 300B is not connected to the power supply control board 252B during cleaning, maintenance, or manufacturing, the LEDs (24ML, 5ML) on the main control board 300B are turned on by manually rotating the left reel 110. It is possible.

Furthermore, if the harness PS1 is disconnected or not properly connected to the connector PC3 and/or the connector SC1, when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, the sub control 24V of the monitor LED shown in FIG. Only monitor LED 24SL does not light up. As a result, if only the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 25 does not light up even when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, it is suspected that there is an abnormality in the harness PS1 or a poor connection with the connectors PC3 and SC1. I can do it. Furthermore, if the harness PS2 is disconnected or not properly connected to the connector PC4 and/or the connector SC2, when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, the sub control 5V of the monitor LED shown in FIG. Only monitor LED 5SL does not light up. As a result, if only the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 25 does not light up even when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, it is suspected that there is an abnormality in the harness PS2 or a poor connection with the connectors PC4 and SC2. I can do it.

Here, we have explained the case where the left reel 110 is manually spun in a power outage state, but the same applies when the middle reel 111 is manually spun in a power outage state, and when the right reel 112 is manually spun in a power outage state. Also, as the number of reels spun manually increases, the monitor LED will light up brighter. For example, when the left reel 110, middle reel 111, and right reel 112 are spun manually at the same time, the monitor LED will light up brighter than when only the left reel 110 is spun manually.

In addition, even if the LEDs used for purposes other than the monitor LEDs, such as the main control 24V monitor LED24ML, main control 5V monitor LED5ML, sub control 24V monitor LED24SL, sub control 5V monitor LED5SL, power supply control 24V monitor LED24PL, and power supply control 5V monitor LED5PL (for example, error monitoring LEDs that light up when an error occurs, or signal monitoring LEDs) are installed with an adjustment resistor on the 24V power line or 5V power line, they will light up if there is no electrical connection problem when the left reel 110 is manually spun in a power-off state. Therefore, even if the LEDs are used for purposes other than the monitor LEDs, it is possible to check for electrical connection problems.

FIG. 27(a) is a perspective view of the hopper unit 180 shown in FIG. 3 viewed diagonally from above.

The hopper unit 180 shown in FIG. 27(a) also shows the connector HC1 shown in FIG. 25. This hopper unit 180 has a storage tank 181 for storing medals, and a circular hopper disk 182 provided on the bottom surface of the storage tank 181. Part of this hopper disk 182 is visible in FIG. 27(a). The hopper disk 182 has six medal passing holes 1821 spaced apart in the circumferential direction. The medal passing holes 1821 are holes large enough for medals, which are game media, to pass through. The hopper disk 182 is rotated by a motor 180m (see FIG. 25), and medals stored in the storage tank 181 are paid out through the medal passing holes 1821.

Figure 27(b) shows the hopper disk 182 being rotated manually.

FIG. 27(b) shows the hopper disk 182 viewed from directly above, and six medal passing holes 1821 can be seen. Even in a power outage state, the hopper disk 182 can be manually rotated in either the forward or reverse direction by inserting a finger into the medal passing hole 1821.

When the hopper disk 182 is rotated manually, a current (induced current) due to the back electromotive force is generated in the motor 180m (see FIG. 25) that rotates the hopper disk 182. Continuing the explanation with reference to FIG. 25, the induced current generated in the motor 180m flows through the harness MH into the main control board 300B and is supplied to the 24V power line and the 5V power line from the hopper motor drive IC 326i. The main control 24V monitor LED 24ML is lit by the induced current because its resistance value is adjusted by the main control 24V adjustment resistor 24MR, and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML is lit by the induced current because its resistance value is adjusted by the main control 5V adjustment resistor 5MR. On the other hand, if the harness MH is broken or not properly connected to the connector HC1 and/or connector MC1, none of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 25 will light up no matter how much the hopper disk 182 is manually rotated, and the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and main control 5V monitor LED 5ML will remain off. As a result, if none of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 25 or the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and main control 5V monitor LED 5ML do not light up even when the hopper disk 182 is manually rotated, an abnormality in the harness MH or a poor connection with the connectors HC1 and MC1 can be suspected.

The induced current generated by the motor 180m of the hopper disk 182 then flows through the power supply control board 252B to the first sub-control board 400B, just like the induced current generated by the motor 110m of the left reel 110 described above, and if normal, the monitor LEDs (24PL, 5PL, 24SL, 5SL) provided on each board 252B, 400B will light up. Therefore, just like when the left reel 110 is manually spun, when the hopper disk 182 is manually spun, it is also possible to check for poor electrical connections downstream of the main control board 300B.

When the hopper disk 182 is manually rotated and the left reel 111 is also manually rotated in a power-off state, the monitor LED will light up brightly as the number of movable bodies being manually rotated increases.

Furthermore, even in a power outage state, the shutter 163 shown in FIG. 17 can be opened and closed manually.

When the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, a current (induced current) due to a back electromotive force is generated in the motor 163m (see FIG. 25) that opens and closes the shutter 163. Continuing the explanation with reference to FIG. 25, the induced current generated in the motor 163m flows into the first sub-control board 400B through the harness SD, and is supplied to the 24V power line and 5V power line from the movable motor drive IC 424i. be done. The sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL has its resistance value adjusted by the sub-control 24V adjustment resistor 24SR, so it lights up due to an induced current, and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL also has its resistance value adjusted by the sub-control 5V adjustment resistor 5SR. The lamp lights up due to the induced current.

The induced current that flowed into the first sub-control board 400B then flows through the harness PS1 into the power supply control board 252B and is supplied to the 24V power line from the connector PC3. The power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL is lit by the induced current because its resistance is adjusted by the power supply control 24V adjustment resistor 24PR. The induced current that flowed into the first sub-control board 400B also flows through the harness PS2 into the power supply control board 252B and is supplied to the 5V power line from the connector PC4. The power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL is also lit by the induced current because its resistance is adjusted by the power supply control 5V adjustment resistor 5PR. Here, the LEDs of multiple boards, such as the LEDs (24SL, 5SL) of the first sub-control board 400B and the LEDs (24PL, 5PL) of the power supply control board 252B, are emitting light.

The induced current that flows into the power supply control board 252B further flows through the harness PM into the main control board 300B and is supplied from the connector MC5 to the 24V power line and the 5V power line. The power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL is lit by the induced current because its resistance is adjusted by the power supply control 24V adjustment resistor 24PR, and the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL is lit by the induced current because its resistance is adjusted by the power supply control 5V adjustment resistor 5PR. Here, the LEDs of multiple boards, such as the LEDs (24PL, 5PL) of the power supply control board 252B, the LEDs (24SL, 5SL) of the first sub-control board 400B, and the LEDs (24ML, 5ML) of the main control board 300B, are emitting light.

The above explanation explains the phenomenon that occurs when each of the harnesses SD, PS1, PS2, and PM is normally connected to the connector and there is no disconnection. On the other hand, if the harness SD is disconnected or not properly connected to the connector DC1 and/or the connector SC3, no matter how much you manually open and close the shutter 163, none of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 25 will light up. , the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL remain off. As a result, if any of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 25 or the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL do not light up even if the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, it may be due to an abnormality in the harness SD or the connection between the connectors DC1 and SC3. I suspect a poor connection.

In addition, if harness PS1 is disconnected or not properly connected to connector SC1 and/or connector PC3, when shutter 163 is manually opened/closed, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL will be Although they light up, the power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL and the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML do not light up. As a result, when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL are lit, but the power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL and the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML are not lit. , an abnormality in the harness PS1 or a poor connection with the connectors SC1 and PC3 can be suspected. Furthermore, if the harness PS2 is disconnected or not properly connected to the connector SC2 and/or the connector PC4, when the shutter 163 is manually opened or closed, the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL will be Although they light up, the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML do not light up. As a result, when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, the sub control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the sub control 5V monitor LED 5SL are lit, but the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML are not lit. , an abnormality in the harness PS2 or a poor connection with the connectors SC2 and PC4 can be suspected.

Furthermore, even if the first sub-control board 400B is not connected to the power supply control board 252B during cleaning, maintenance, or manufacturing, by manually opening and closing the shutter 163, the LEDs (24SL, 5SL) of the first sub-control board 400B can be ) can be lit.

Furthermore, if the harness PM is disconnected or not properly connected to the connector PC2 and/or the connector MC5, when the shutter 163 is manually opened or closed, the main control 24V monitor of the monitor LED shown in FIG. Only LED 24ML and main control 5V monitor LED 5ML do not light up. As a result, even if the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, if only the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML do not light up among the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. I suspect a poor connection.

Figure 28 is a diagram showing an example in which a relay board is provided between the main control board 300B shown in Figure 25 and the hopper unit 180 and reel unit 700 also shown in Figure 25. The following explanation will focus on the differences from the connection example explained using Figure 25, and duplicate explanations may be omitted.

In this FIG. 28, the connectors MC5 and MC6 provided on the main control board 300B are omitted. A hopper relay board 901B is shown between the main control board 300B and the hopper unit 180 shown in FIG. 28, and a reel relay board 902B is shown between the main control board 300B and the reel unit 700.

The hopper relay board 901B is provided with a connector HRM to which the harness MH1 connected to the connector MC1 of the main control board 300B is connected, and a connector HRH to which the harness MH2 connected to the connector HC1 of the hopper unit 180 is connected.

The reel relay board 902B is provided with a connector RRM1 to which the harness MR11 connected to the connector MC2 of the main control board 300B is connected, and a connector RRR1 to which the harness MR12 connected to the connector RC1 of the reel unit 700 is connected. Also provided are a connector RRM2 to which the harness MR21 connected to the connector MC3 of the main control board 300B is connected, and a connector RRR2 to which the harness MR22 connected to the connector RC2 of the reel unit 700 is connected. Further, a connector RRM3 to which a harness MR31 connected to a connector MC4 of the main control board 300B is connected, and a connector RRR3 to which a harness MR32 connected to a connector RC3 of the reel unit 700 is connected are also provided. Even in the connection example shown in FIG. 28, when the reels 110 to 112 are manually rotated in a power-off state, monitor LEDs such as the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML light up if normal. However, if the plurality of harnesses MR11, MR12, MR21, MR22, MR21, and MR32 between the main control board 300B and the reel unit 700 are disconnected or not connected properly, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and Monitor LEDs such as main control 5V monitor LED 5ML do not light up.

Even if the hopper disk 182 is rotated manually in a power outage state, if it is normal, the monitor LEDs such as the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML will light up. However, if the multiple harnesses MH1, MH2 between the main control board 300B and the hopper unit 180 are disconnected or not connected properly, the monitor LEDs such as the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML will not light up.

In the connection example in FIG. 28, the provision of a hopper relay board 901B and a reel relay board 902B increases the number of harnesses and connectors compared to the connection example shown in FIG. 25, increasing the possibility of electrical connection failure. However, an induced current can be generated by manual operation in a power-off state, and electrical connection failures can be easily confirmed from the lit state of the monitor LED.

The hopper relay board 901B and the reel relay board 902B may also be provided with a 24V monitor LED and an adjustment resistor on the 24V power line, and a 5V monitor LED and an adjustment resistor on the 5V power line. By manually operating the board in a power outage state to generate an induced current, and turning on these monitor LEDs if normal, it is possible to check for poor electrical connections.

In the explanation here, the movable bodies are described as the left reel 110, the center reel 111, the right reel 112, the hopper disk 182, and the shutter 163, but they are not limited to these and can be any movable body that is driven by a motor.

Figure 29 (a) is a diagram showing the internal configuration of the slot machine of the second embodiment. Below, the differences from the internal configuration described using Figure 3 will be mainly described, and duplicated explanations may be omitted. In addition, components with the same names as components described so far may use the same symbols as those used so far.

Figure 29 (a) shows the state in which the front door 102 is opened 180 degrees relative to the main body 101. As a result, both the inside of the main body 101 and the inside of the front door 102 face forward (toward the front of the paper in Figure 29).

The reel unit 700 is attached to the vertical center of the main body 101 shown in FIG. 29(a). The main control board storage case 210 is disposed above the reel unit 700. The main control board storage case 210 is a transparent or semi-transparent resin case, and has translucency. The main control board 300B is stored in the main control board storage case 210. The main control board 300B shown in FIG. 29(a) has the same configuration as the main control board 300B shown in FIG. 25, and FIG. 29(a) shows the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML. In addition, the main control board 300B shown in FIG. 29(a) also has an error monitoring LED 3ML and operation means, that is, a setting key switch 281 and a setting change button 292. That is, the LEDs (24ML, 5ML, 3ML) which are light emitting means and the setting key switch 281 and the setting change button 292 which are operation means are provided on a common board (main control board 300B). In addition, the light from these LEDs (24ML, 5ML, 3ML) passes through the transparent or semi-transparent main control board storage case 210, and the light emitted by the LEDs can be confirmed through the main control board storage case 210. In addition, the main control board storage case 210 is provided with openings and cutouts so that these operation means (281, 292) can be operated. In addition, the main control board 300B shown in FIG. 29(a) has identification marks for each circuit component (board component) such as a connector, resistor, capacitor, LED, IC, LSI, CPU, ROM, RAM, and switch. Here, they are displayed by silk printing. As shown in FIG. 29(a), "LED1" is displayed under the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, "LED2" is displayed under the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, "LED3" is displayed under the error monitoring LED 3ML, "setting key SW" is displayed under the setting key switch 281, and "setting change button" is displayed under the setting change button 292. These displays are visible through the transparent or semi-transparent main control board storage case 210. Note that "24V monitor LED" may be displayed instead of "LED1", and "SW1" may be displayed instead of "setting key SW". That is, the names or abbreviations of each component may be displayed, or identification numbers or identification symbols may be displayed. In addition, a sticker 210S on which the management number of the stored board is printed is attached to the lower left corner of the main control board storage case 210. This sticker 210S is non-translucent, but it may be transparent or semi-translucent and translucent. It may also be a sticker with a stamped or handwritten mark. Alternatively, the markings may be printed directly on the main control board storage case 210 instead of on a sticker.

The power supply unit 252 and the hopper unit 180 are arranged below the reel unit 700. The power supply unit 252 is provided with a power supply control board 252B having the same configuration as the power supply control board 252B shown in FIG. 25. The power supply control board 252B shown in FIG. 29(a) is housed in a transparent or semi-transparent resin case. In FIG. 29(a), the power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, and the power switch 244 are shown. That is, these LEDs (24PL, 5PL) which are light-emitting means and the power switch 244 which is an operating means are provided on a common board (power supply control board 252B). In addition, the light from the LEDs (24PL, 5PL) mounted on the power supply control board 252B also passes through the transparent or semi-transparent case, and the light emission of the LEDs can be confirmed through the case. In addition, the case of the power supply unit 252 is also provided with an opening or cutout so that the power switch 244 can be touched. Furthermore, in the power supply control board 252B shown in FIG. 29(a), like the main control board 300B, identification marks are displayed for each circuit component (board component). Here, they are displayed by silk screen printing, and as shown in FIG. 29(a), "LED7" is displayed under the power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, "LED8" is displayed under the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, and "power SW" is displayed under the power switch 244. These marks are visible through a transparent or semi-transparent case. The case of the power supply device 252 may be an opaque metal case. In this case, the LEDs, which are the light-emitting means, and the switches, which are the operating means, are provided on the surface of the metal case, and are visible if they are light-emitting means, and are operable if they are operating means. The identification marks are also displayed on the surface of the metal case.

The main control board 300B, sub-control board 400B', and power supply device 252 may be located above or below movable units such as the reel unit 700 and the hopper unit 180. Alternatively, some or all of them may be at the same height.

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 3, the first sub-control board storage case 220 was arranged on the left side panel 260 of the main body 101, but in the slot machine 100 of the second embodiment, the sub-control unit storage case 220' is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102. That is, it is arranged on the back side of the performance device 160. The sub-control unit storage case 220' is also a transparent or semi-transparent resin case and has translucency. The sub-control board 400B' is stored in this sub-control board storage case 220'. The sub-control board 400B' is a performance control board that combines the first sub-control board 400B shown in FIG. 25 and the control board of the second sub-control unit 500 shown in FIG. 24, but it may be configured only with the first sub-control board 400B or only with the control board of the second sub-control unit 500. In FIG. 29(a), the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL are shown. Furthermore, the sub-control board 400B' shown in FIG. 29(a) is also equipped with a second sub-control voltage monitoring LED 6SL for monitoring the voltage of the control board of the second sub-control unit 500 and a first selection switch 190 as an operation means. That is, these LEDs (24SL', 5SL', 6SL) as light emitting means and the first selection switch 190 as an operation means are provided on a common board (sub-control board 400B'). Furthermore, the light from these LEDs (24SL', 5SL', 6SL) passes through the transparent or semi-transparent sub-control board storage case 220', and the light emission of the LEDs can be confirmed through the sub-control board storage case 220'. In addition, the sub-control board storage case 220' is also provided with an opening or a cutout so that the first selection switch 190 can be operated. Furthermore, the sub-control board 400B' shown in FIG. 29(a) also has an identification mark for each circuit component (board component) as in the main control board 300B. Here, they are displayed by silk screen printing, and as shown in Fig. 29(a), "LED4" is displayed under the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, "LED5" is displayed under the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, "LED6" is displayed under the second sub-control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, and "SELECTION SW" is displayed under the first selection switch 190. Also, the sub-control board 400B'
In the lower right corner of the board, there is displayed a display 4001 of "board control number 0002" printed in two lines on the resist layer of the board. The identification displays for each circuit component and the display 4001 of "board control number 0002" are visible through the transparent or semi-transparent sub-control board storage case 220'.

Figure 29(b) is a side view that shows a schematic view of the field of view of a person H1 in a standing position, and figure (c) is a side view that shows a schematic view of the field of view of a person H2 in a sitting position.

The slot machine 100 of the second embodiment shown in these side views has the front door 102 opened 90 degrees with respect to the main body 101; 102 shows the front side. In addition, the people H1 and H2 shown in these side views are factory inspectors and gaming parlors who need to manually operate the hopper disk 182 of the hopper unit 180 and the reels 110 to 112 of the reel unit 700. A person such as a store clerk is located directly in front of the main body 101.

As shown in FIG. 29(b), the field of vision V1 of a person H1 standing directly in front of the main body 101 with the front door 102 opened 90 degrees is from the reel unit 700 to the main control board storage case 210 located above it. The reels 110 to 112 that are operated by hand and the LEDs such as LED 3ML for error monitoring mounted on the main control board 300B that emit light as a result can be seen at the same time, or the line of sight can be moved slightly upwards. It is only visible.

As shown in FIG. 29(c), the visual field V2 of a person H2 sitting directly in front of the main body 101 with the front door 102 open 90 degrees extends from the reel unit 700 to the power supply unit 252 located below it, and the reels 110-112 operated by hand and the resulting light-emitting LEDs such as the power supply control 5V monitor LED5PL provided on the power supply unit 252 are visible at the same time, or can be seen by moving the line of sight slightly up or down. The power supply unit 252 and the hopper unit 180 (see FIG. 29(a)) located next to it are also within the visual field V2, and the hopper disk 182 (see FIG. 27) operated by hand and the resulting light-emitting LEDs such as the power supply control 5V monitor LED5PL provided on the power supply unit 252 are visible at the same time, or can be seen by moving the line of sight slightly left or right.

In addition, in Fig. 29(b) and Fig. 29(c), the main control board 300B is shown in an easy-to-understand schematic manner, so that the front surface 300f (the surface facing people H1 and H2) of the main control board 300B coincides with the front surface 700f of the reel unit 700. However, in reality, as shown in Fig. 14(a) described below, the front surface 300f of the main control board 300B is located behind (at the back) the front surface 700f of the reel unit 700. In other words, the movable body unit protrudes further toward the person who operates the movable body with his or her hand than the light-emitting means. For this reason, the reel unit 700 gets in the way from below the main control board 300B, making it difficult to get the main control board 300B in view.

Figure 30 is a plan view showing the inside of the slot machine of the second embodiment. That is, Figure 30 shows the slot machine of the second embodiment as seen from above, with the bottom of the figure being the front side and the top being the rear side.

Figure 30(a) shows the front door 102 in a completely closed state, and Figure 30(b) shows the front door 102 in a 90 degree open state relative to the main body 101, as in Figures 29(b) and 29(c).

The main control board storage case 210 housing the main control board 300B and the reel unit 700 are shown in the main body 101 in FIG. 30(a). Three LEDs (24ML, 5ML, 3ML) and a setting key switch 281 are shown on the main control board 300B. Also shown is a sticker 210S affixed to the front surface of the main control board storage case 210.

30(a) shows the sub-control board storage case 220' in which the sub-control board 400B' is stored in the front door 102. The sub-control board 400B' has three LEDs (24SL', 5SL', 6SL) and a first selection switch 190.

In the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 completely closed, there is no light-emitting means (main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, etc.) that emits light by manually operating movable bodies such as the reels 110 to 112 and the hopper disk 182. It is not visible from the exterior of 100.

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 30(b) with the front door 102 opened 90 degrees, the range where the light from the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML by the back electromotive force reaches is shown in gray. Note that the way in which the light reaches here is shown with emphasis on the directivity of the LED, and in reality, the closer to the LED, the more the surroundings of this range are illuminated. The light from the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML by the back electromotive force reaches a part of the front door 102 in the 90-degree open state. That is, the light from the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML reaches the first selection switch 190 mounted on the sub-control board 400B', and the first selection switch 190 can be operated even in a dark place. In addition, the light also reaches other circuit components mounted on the sub-control board 400B' (the second sub-control voltage monitoring LED 6SL in FIG. 30(b)), and the circuit components can be seen even in a dark place. Furthermore, the identification markings displayed for each circuit component can be visually recognized. Also, the light from the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML can be visually recognized by the display 400 of "PCB control number 0002" printed on the sub-control PCB 400B'.
1, so that the board management number can be confirmed even in a dark place. Also, the sticker 210S described using FIG. 292(a) is non-translucent, but in a dark place, the light from the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML illuminates the periphery of the sticker 210S, so that the contents displayed on the sticker 210S can be confirmed. If the sticker 210S is translucent, it is easier to confirm. Also, the light from the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML reaches a part of the sub-control board storage case 220', so that if a sticker is attached to that part, the contents displayed on the sticker can also be confirmed.

Note that in Figure 30(b), only the range reached by light from the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML due to back electromotive force is shown diagrammatically, but light due to back electromotive force also reaches from other LEDs, making most of the sub-control board storage case 220' and most of the sub-control board 400B' visible even in dark places.

As explained above, when the front door 102 is opened 90 degrees, light due to the back electromotive force from the LEDs (24ML, 5ML, 3ML) mounted on the main control board 300B is emitted from the LEDs (24ML, 5ML, 3ML). It reaches the sub-control board 400B', which is a board different from the board on which the 3ML) is mounted, and the sub-control board storage case 220' that accommodates the sub-control board 400B'. The opening angle of the front door 102 is not limited to 90 degrees, but may be 80 degrees or 100 degrees. However, the closer the angle is to 180 degrees, the more difficult it is for light to reach. On the other hand, light due to the back electromotive force from the LEDs (24SL', 5SL', 6SL) mounted on the sub-control board 400B' reaches the main control board storage case 210 and the main control board 300B.

Note that most of the sub-control board storage case 220' and most of the sub-control board 400B' are exposed to light due to back electromotive force from the LEDs (24SL', 5SL', 6SL) mounted on the sub-control board 400B'. , making it visible even in dark places. Furthermore, most of the main control board storage case 210 and most of the main control board 300B are illuminated by back electromotive force from the LEDs (24ML, 5ML, 3ML) mounted on the main control board 300B, making it dark. It can be seen anywhere.

FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a modification of the connection example between each board and each unit shown in FIG. 25. Hereinafter, differences from the connection example shown in FIG. 25 will be mainly explained, and redundant explanations may be omitted. Further, the same reference numerals used up to now are used for components having the same names as those described above.

In a modification of the connection example shown in FIG. 31, a protection circuit is provided to protect circuit components from surge current flowing in the opposite direction. The main control board 300B is provided with protection circuits PT1 and PT2 that protect the reel motor drive IC 322i as an example of a protection circuit that protects various ICs. The protection circuit PT1 is arranged between the reel motor drive IC 322i and the 24V power supply line, and the protection circuit PT2 is arranged between the reel motor drive IC 322i and the 5V power supply line. Further, the main control 24V capacitor 24MC shown in FIG. 25 is changed to a large capacity one to form a protection circuit PT3.

The first sub-control board 400B is also provided with protection circuits PT4 and PT5 that protect the movable body motor drive IC 424i as an example of a protection circuit that protects various ICs. The protection circuit PT4 is arranged between the movable body motor drive IC 424i and the 24V power supply line, and the protection circuit PT5 is arranged between the movable body motor drive IC 424i and the 5V power supply line. Further, the sub-control 24V capacitor 24SC shown in FIG. 25 is changed to a large-capacity one to form a protection circuit PT6.

In the power control board 252B, a protection circuit PT7 is arranged between the connector PC2 and the 24V power line, and a protection circuit PT8 is arranged between the connector PC2 and the 5V power line. Further, the power supply control 24V capacitor 24PC shown in FIG. 25 is changed to a large capacity one to form a protection circuit PT9, and the power supply control 5V capacitor 5PC is also changed to a large capacity one to form a protection circuit PT10. The protection circuits PT3, PT6, PT9, and PT10 using large-capacity capacitors can absorb the amount of charge of surge power, and can prevent circuit breakdown due to surge current. These protection circuits PT3, PT6, PT9, and PT10 also absorb the amount of charge of the back electromotive force, and no current due to the back electromotive force flows. As a result, even if the hopper disk 182 and the reels 110 to 112 are operated manually, if these protection circuits PT3, PT6, PT9, and PT10 are functioning, none of the LEDs will emit light. On the other hand, if some of these protection circuits PT3, PT6, PT9, and PT10 are damaged, the damaged protection circuit will not be able to absorb the charge of the back electromotive force, and the current due to the back electromotive force will flow. , a light-emitting LED will appear. Therefore, depending on which LED lights up when the disc 182 or reels 110 to 112 are operated by hand, it may be possible to locate the protection circuits PT3, PT6, PT9, and PT10 that are suspected of being damaged.

FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a specific example of a protection circuit provided between the reel motor drive IC 322i and the 24V power supply line.

In the specific example shown in FIG. 32(a), the protection circuit PT11 is a diode connected in series between the reel motor drive IC 322i and the 24V power supply line. Further, the protection circuit PT12 shown in FIG. 32(a) is a diode connected in series between the reel motor drive IC 322i and the 5V power supply line.

In the specific example shown in FIG. 32(b), the protection circuit PT21 has a diode connected in parallel with another element (a resistor in this figure, but it may be a coil, etc.) between the reel motor driving IC 322i and the 24V power line. The protection circuit PT22 shown in FIG. 32(b) has a diode connected in parallel with another element (a resistor in this figure, but it may be a coil, etc.) between the reel motor driving IC 322i and the 5V power line.

By using a diode in the protection circuit, surge current that would otherwise flow in the opposite direction can be prevented from flowing through the rectification action of the diode.

Current caused by the back electromotive force generated by manually operating a movable body such as reel 110 is also prevented from flowing by the rectifying action of the diodes used in protection circuits PT11, PT12, PT21, and PT22, and the main control 24V monitor LED24ML and main control 5V monitor LED5ML do not emit light. On the other hand, if the diodes of the protection circuits PT11, PT12, PT21, and PT22 are damaged or disconnected, the circuit will be insulated so that no current flows in either direction and no current due to back electromotive force flows, and so even if a movable body such as reel 110 is operated by hand, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and main control 5V monitor LED 5ML will not light up. However, if the diodes of the protection circuits PT21 and PT22 are damaged, the circuit will be insulated, but current will flow to other elements connected in parallel, and so current due to back electromotive force will also flow, and so the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and main control 5V monitor LED 5ML may light up when a movable body such as reel 110 is operated by hand. Therefore, unless it is used in conjunction with a protection circuit PT3 with a large-capacity capacitor (the main control board 300B shown in Figures 32(a) and 32(b) uses the same main control 24V capacitor 24MC as the main control 24V capacitor 24MC shown in Figure 25), if the main control 24V monitor LED24ML or main control 5V monitor LED5ML lights up when a movable body such as the reel 110 is operated by hand, it is suspected that the diodes of the protection circuits PT11, PT12, PT21, and PT22 are damaged or disconnected, or that an unauthorized person has installed an unauthorized circuit that bypasses the diodes of the protection circuits PT11 and PT12.

The above explanation is also applicable to the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22, and the movable body is the sprocket rotated by the payout motor in the payout device 152P shown in FIG. 22. The payout motor rotates and stops under the control of the payout control board 170P (see FIG. 22), and when the sprocket is rotated manually in a power-off state, an induced current is generated in the payout motor. The LEDs provided on the payout control board 170P and the LEDs provided on the main control board 156P (see FIG. 22) connected to the payout control board 170P by a harness are made to light up by this induced current if they are normal. Also, as in the above explanation, the induced current that flows into the main control board 156P flows through the power supply control board 182P (see FIG. 22) to the first sub-control board 160P (see FIG. 22), and if normal, the LEDs provided on each board 182P, 160P are made to light up. Furthermore, the movable body may be a performance movable body (e.g., a crane) driven by a motor whose rotation is controlled by the main control unit, or a performance movable body in which two movable parts are driven by two motors whose rotation is controlled by the first sub-control unit, etc.

Furthermore, instead of the LED lamp that is turned on by induced current in a power-off state, a light emitting means such as a 7 segment (SEG) display may be used. For example, it may be a 7-segment display that displays setting values (for example, settings 1 to 6) that give different degrees of advantage to the player. The light emitting means must be visible.

In the above explanation, the adjustable resistors (24MR, 5MR, 24PR, 5PR, 24SR, 5SR) were used to light up the monitor LEDs by the induced current in the power-off state, but any means capable of adjusting the impedance will do, and is not limited to adjustable resistors. However, since a large amount of induced current flows even in the power-on state, it is necessary to adjust the impedance while considering the power-on state, rather than adjusting the impedance only to facilitate the induced current flow in the power-off state. In other words, the light-emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 24ML ...
5SL, 5SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5
A game machine including a movable body unit [e.g., a hopper unit 180, a reel unit 700, a performance movable body unit 160U, a payout device 152P, etc.] having a motor [e.g., a motor 180m, 110m to 112m, a motor 163m, a payout motor, etc.] and a movable body that can be operated by driving the motor [e.g., a hopper disk 182, a left reel 110, a center reel 111, a right reel 112, a shutter 163, a sprocket, a crown, etc.], and a detachable harness [e.g., a harness MH, harnesses MR1 to MR3, a harness SD] that relays the board and the movable body unit, The stages are electrically connected via the harness, and the board has an impedance adjustment means [e.g., adjustment resistors (24MR, 5MR, 24PR, 5PR, 24SR, 5SR)] provided between the light-emitting means and ground, and the impedance adjustment means adjusts the impedance so that the light-emitting means emits light by induced current generated by back electromotive force when the movable body is manually operated to drive the motor in a power-off state, while adjusting the impedance so as to regulate the flow of induced current in a power-on state, and the light-emitting means may emit light when a current [e.g., induced current] due to the back electromotive force generated by the motor flows in when the movable body is manually operated to drive the motor in a power-off state.

According to the above description,
``Light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, set value display, etc.] and
Movable bodies [for example, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable body unit [e.g., hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, production movable body unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.],
A game machine comprising:
The motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a harness [for example, harness MH, harness MR1 to MR3, harness PM, harness PS1, PS2, harness SD],
The light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the movable body to drive the motor in a power-off state and receiving a current (e.g., induced current) due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor. can be,
The light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven;
A gaming machine characterized by this [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22]. ”
explained.

According to this game machine, it is possible to manually operate the movable body to check whether the harness is properly connected, and furthermore, the light emitting means is provided on the stationary side (the side that does not move). This makes the light emitting means easier to see.

Also,
"A certain substrate [e.g., a hopper relay substrate 901B] is provided,
The harness includes a motor side harness (e.g., harness MH2 or harness MR12, MR22, MR32) and a light emitting means side harness (e.g., harness MH1 or harness MR11, MR21, MR31),
the certain board is electrically connected to the motor (e.g., motor 180m or motors 110m, 111m, 112m) via the motor-side harness,
The certain board is electrically connected to the light emitting means (e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML) via the light emitting means side harness.
It is characterized by the following.
He also explained:

The increase in the number of certain boards increases the number of harnesses, which increases the possibility of electrical connection failures. However, this is not a problem because electrical connection failures can be easily checked by manual operation in a power-off state.

Also, according to the above description,
``Light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, set value display, etc.] and
Movable bodies [for example, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable body unit [e.g., hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, production movable body unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.],
A game machine comprising: the movable body unit is electrically connected to the light emitting means (for example, connected via a harness);
The light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the movable body and driving the motor in a power-off state;
A gaming machine characterized by this [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22]. ”
Also explained.

In other words, the light emitting means may emit light even when the power is cut off.

After attaching the movable body unit that was removed from the gaming machine for cleaning or maintenance, it is possible to check whether the movable body unit and the light-emitting means are electrically connected properly, even if the gaming machine is in a power-off state, by checking whether the light-emitting means emits light or not. In addition, by manually operating the movable body to cause the light-emitting means to emit light, the gaming machine can be visually checked even without a light-projecting means. In addition, when the movable body unit is attached to the gaming machine in the factory, it is possible to check whether the movable body unit and the light-emitting means are electrically connected properly, even if the gaming machine is in a power-off state. As explained above, this has the exceptional effect of making it easier to check whether the movable body unit is electrically connected properly.

The power cut state may be a state in which the power switch of the gaming machine is turned off, a state in which the power switch is turned on but the power cord is not connected to the outlet, or a state in which no power is being supplied from the island equipment.

Further, the movable body unit may be a rotating display unit [for example, the reel unit 700], a prize medium payout unit [for example, the hopper unit 180], or a performance operation unit [for example, the performance movable body unit 160U] (the same applies hereinafter).

Also,
"The light emitting means is provided on a board [for example, main control board 300B, 156P, first sub-control board 400B, 160P, power supply control board 252B, 182P, relay board (901B, 902B), payout control board 170P, etc.] It is something that
A game machine comprising a removable harness (for example, the various harnesses shown in FIG. 25 and the various harnesses shown in FIG. 27) that relay the board and the movable body unit. ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, after installing the movable unit that had been removed from the game machine for cleaning or maintenance, the game machine checks whether the harness is connected normally or whether the harness is disconnected. This can be confirmed even when the power is off.

The board may be a board having a main control unit [e.g., main control board 300B, 156P], a board having a sub-control unit [e.g., first sub-control board 400B, 160P or second sub-control board 164P], a board having a payout control unit [e.g., payout control board 170P], a board having a power supply control unit [e.g., power supply control board 252B, 182P], or a relay board [e.g., hopper relay board 901B, reel relay board 902B].

Further, the board and the movable body unit may be relayed by a plurality of harnesses [for example, a plurality of harnesses MR1 to MR3 in parallel, and a plurality of harnesses MR11 and harness MR12 in series]. Also,
``The light emitting means is capable of emitting light when energized [e.g., constantly emitting light, emitting light periodically, emitting light when conditions are met],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, the light emitting means can be used for different purposes depending on whether the light emitting means is energized or not. That is, in a power-on state, it can be used for its original purpose (for example, current monitor, voltage monitor, error monitor, signal monitor), and in a power-off state, it can be used for checking electrical connections.

Also,
"The light emitting means is capable of emitting light even when the movable body is stopped in a powered state [e.g., a current monitor LED, a voltage monitor LED, an error monitor LED, etc.].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, when powered, the light emitting means can be used for purposes unrelated to the operation of the movable body.

Also,
``The light emitting means is configured to emit light by a current [e.g., induced current] generated by a back electromotive force when the movable body is manually operated to drive the motor in a power-off state.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, it becomes easy to confirm whether or not the movable body unit is electrically connected normally by simply allowing the current to flow through the light emitting means.

According to the above description,
"Light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, LED for error monitoring, LED for signal monitoring, 7-segment display, set value display, etc.],
A movable body unit (e.g., hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, performance movable body unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.) having a movable body (e.g., hopper disk 182, left reel 110, center reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, crown, etc.) that can be operated by driving a motor (e.g., motors 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.),
A gaming machine equipped with
the motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a harness (e.g., harness MH, harnesses MR1 to MR3, harness PM, harness PS1, PS2, harness SD),
The light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is manually operated in a power-off state to drive the motor, and a current [e.g., induced current] due to the back electromotive force generated by the motor flows in (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"), and may continue to emit light even when the drive of the motor stops in the first case [e.g., the light emitting means may continue to emit light due to the charge stored in capacitors 24MC, 24SC, 24PC, and 5PC], and the light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven.
A gaming machine characterized by the above (for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22)
He explained:

According to this game machine, it is possible to manually operate the movable body to check whether the harness is properly connected, and furthermore, the light emitting means is provided on the stationary side (the side that does not move). This makes the light emitting means easier to see. In addition, the light-emitting means may continue to emit light even when the current due to the back electromotive force no longer flows in, and the light-emitting means may continue to emit light even if the current due to the back electromotive force ceases to flow in. Even if there is no time to confirm the light emission of the light emitting means, the light emission of the light emitting means can be confirmed after the operation.

Also,
"A certain substrate [e.g., a hopper relay substrate 901B] is provided,
The harness includes a motor side harness (e.g., harness MH2 or harness MR12, MR22, MR32) and a light emitting means side harness (e.g., harness MH1 or harness MR11, MR21, MR31),
the certain board is electrically connected to the motor (e.g., motor 180m or motors 110m, 111m, 112m) via the motor-side harness,
The certain board is electrically connected to the light emitting means (e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML) via the light emitting means side harness.
It is characterized by the following.
He also explained:

With the increase in the number of certain boards, the number of harnesses increases and the possibility of electrical connection defects increases; however, electrical connection defects can be easily confirmed by manual operation in a power-off state. There is no problem even if the above possibility becomes high.

Also, according to the above description,
``Light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, set value display, etc.] and
Movable bodies [for example, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable body unit [e.g., hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, production movable body unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.],
A game machine comprising:
The movable body unit is electrically connected to the light emitting means (for example, connected via a harness),
The light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the movable body and driving the motor in a power-off state (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"); There are cases where the light continues to emit even if the motor stops driving [for example, the light continues to emit due to the charge stored in the capacitor],
A gaming machine characterized by this [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22]. ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, in addition to the above-mentioned special effects, it is possible to confirm the light emission of the light emitting means even if you stop manually operating the movable body, and it becomes easier to confirm the light emission of the light emitting means. .

Also,
``A capacitor that can store the electric charge generated by manually operating the movable body and driving the motor in a power-off state [for example, main control 24V capacitor 24MC, power control 24V capacitor 24PC, power control 5V capacitor 5PC, A game machine characterized by being equipped with a sub-control 24V capacitor 24SC. ”
Also explained.

By using a common electronic component called a capacitor, it is possible to easily confirm the light emission of the light emitting means.

Also,
"The light emitting means is provided on a board [for example, main control board 300B, 156P, first sub-control board 400B, 160P, power supply control board 252B, 182P, relay board (901B, 902B), payout control board 170P, etc.] It is
A game machine comprising a removable harness (for example, the various harnesses shown in FIG. 25 and the various harnesses shown in FIG. 27) that relay the board and the movable body unit. ”
Also explained.

Also,
"The light emitting means is capable of emitting light when energized [for example, emitting light continuously or periodically, or emitting light when a certain condition is satisfied].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"The light emitting means is capable of emitting light even when the movable body is stopped in a powered state [e.g., a current monitor LED, a voltage monitor LED, an error monitor LED, etc.].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"The light emitting means is configured to emit light by a current [e.g., an induced current] generated by a back electromotive force generated by manually operating the movable body to drive the motor in a power-off state.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

According to the above description,
"A gaming machine including light-emitting means (e.g., a main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, a main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, a sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, a sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, a power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, a power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, an LED for error monitoring, an LED for signal monitoring, a 7-segment display, a setting value display, etc.) and a movable body unit (e.g., a reel unit 700) having a first movable body (e.g., a left reel 110) that can be operated by driving a first motor (e.g., a motor 110m),
The movable body unit has a third movable body (e.g., the right reel 112) that can be operated by driving a third motor (e.g., the motor 112m),
the first motor (e.g., motor 110m) is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness (e.g., harness MR1);
the third motor (e.g., motor 112m) is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness (e.g., harness MR3);
The light emitting means may emit light when the first movable body is manually operated in a power-off state to drive the first motor and a current (e.g., an induced current) flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor,
The light emitting means may also emit light when the third movable body is manually operated in the power interrupted state to drive the third motor and a current (e.g., an induced current) flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor.
the light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move even when the third motor is driven;
A gaming machine characterized by the above (for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22)
He explained:

With this gaming machine, by manually operating the first movable body, it is possible to check whether the first harness is connected properly, and by manually operating the third movable body, it is possible to check whether the third harness is connected properly, making it possible to check the connections of the two types of harnesses separately. Furthermore, since the light emitting means is provided on the stationary side (the side that does not move), the light emitting means is easily visible.

According to the above description,
"Light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, LED for error monitoring, LED for signal monitoring, 7-segment display, set value display, etc.],
A gaming machine including a movable body unit (e.g., a reel unit 700) having a first movable body (e.g., a left reel 110) that can be operated by driving a first motor (e.g., a motor 110m),
The movable body unit has a third movable body (e.g., the right reel 112) that can be operated by driving a third motor (e.g., the motor 112m),
the first motor (e.g., motor 110m) is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a harness (e.g., one common harness formed by gathering three harnesses MR1 to MR3);
the third motor (e.g., motor 112m) is electrically connected to the light emitting means via the harness;
The light emitting means may emit light when the first movable body is manually operated in a power-off state to drive the first motor and a current (e.g., an induced current) flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor,
The light emitting means may also emit light when the third movable body is manually operated in the power interrupted state to drive the third motor and a current (e.g., an induced current) flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor.
the light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move even when the third motor is driven;
A gaming machine characterized by the above (for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22)
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, whether the harness is connected properly can be confirmed by manually operating either the first movable body or the third movable body. Also, the connection of a common type of harness can be confirmed by operating either the first movable body or the third movable body, whichever is easier to manually operate. Furthermore, since the light emitting means is provided on the stationary side (the side that does not move), the light emitting means is easily visible.

Furthermore, according to the above description,
"Light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, LED for error monitoring, LED for signal monitoring, 7-segment display, set value display, etc.],
A gaming machine including a movable body unit (e.g., a reel unit 700) having a first movable body (e.g., a left reel 110) that can be operated by driving a first motor (e.g., a motor 110m),
The movable body unit has a third movable body (e.g., the right reel 112) that can be operated by driving a third motor (e.g., the motor 112m),
The movable unit is electrically connected to the light emitting means (for example, via harnesses MR1 to MR3),
The light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the first movable body in a power-off state to drive the first motor,
The light emitting means may also emit light when the third movable body is manually operated in a power-off state to drive the third motor.
A gaming machine characterized by the above (for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22)
He also explained:

After installing the movable body unit that had been removed from the game machine for cleaning or maintenance, it is determined whether or not each movable body and the light emitting means are electrically connected normally by checking whether or not the common light emitting means is emitting light. You can check even if the power is off. Further, by manually operating each movable body and causing the light emitting means to emit light, the game machine can be visually confirmed even without a light projecting means. Furthermore, even when the movable body unit is attached to the game machine at the factory, it is possible to check whether each movable body and the light emitting means are electrically connected properly even if the game machine is in a power-off state. . As explained above, it has a special effect of making it easier to confirm whether the movable body unit is electrically connected normally.

The movable body unit may also have a fourth movable body [e.g., middle reel 111] that can be operated by driving a fourth motor [e.g., motor 111m].

Also,
"The light emitting means is provided on a board [for example, main control board 300B, 156P, first sub-control board 400B, 160P, power supply control board 252B, 182P, relay board (901B, 902B), payout control board 170P, etc.] It is something that
The present invention is characterized in that it includes a removable harness [for example, harness MR1, harnesses MR1 to MR3, or harness MR11 and harness MR12, or harnesses MR11 to MR31 and harnesses MR12 to 32] that relays the board and the first motor. Game console. ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, after installing the movable unit that had been removed from the game machine for cleaning or maintenance, it is determined whether the first harness is connected normally or the second harness is also connected normally. Even if the game machine is in a power-off state, it can be confirmed whether the first harness is disconnected or whether the second harness is disconnected.

In addition, the configuration may include a removable first harness that relays the board and the first motor [e.g., harness MR1, harness MR11, and harness MR12], and a removable third harness that relays the board and the third motor [e.g., harness MR3, harness MR31, and harness MR32].

Also,
"The light emitting means is capable of emitting light when energized [for example, emitting light continuously or periodically, or emitting light when a certain condition is satisfied].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"The light emitting means is capable of emitting light even when the first movable body is stopped in a powered state [for example, a current monitor LED, a voltage monitor LED, an error monitor LED, etc.],
The light emitting means is capable of emitting light even when the third movable body is stopped in an energized state.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, when powered, the light emitting means can be used for purposes unrelated to the operation of the first movable body or the operation of the third movable body.

Also,
``Constructed so that the light emitting means emits light by a current [e.g., induced current] generated by a back electromotive force by manually operating the first movable body to drive the first motor in a power-off state. is,
The light-emitting means is configured to emit light even by a current [e.g., induced current] generated by a back electromotive force by manually operating the third movable body to drive the third motor in a power-off state. has been,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to the above description,
``Light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, set value display, etc.] and
a first movable body unit [for example, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [for example, left reel 110] that can be operated by driving a first motor [for example, motor 110m];
a second movable body unit [for example, hopper unit 180] having a second movable body [for example, hopper disk 182] operable by the drive of a second motor [for example, motor 180m];
A game machine comprising:
The first motor [for example, motor 110m] is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
The second motor [for example, motor 180m] is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a second harness [for example, harness MH],
The light emitting means manually operates the first movable body in a power-off state to drive the first motor, and a current [e.g., induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor flows into the light emitting means. This may cause it to emit light,
The light emitting means manually operates the second movable body in the power-off state to drive the second motor, and a current [for example, induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the second motor flows into the light emitting means. It may also emit light by
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and the light emitting means does not move even when the second motor is driven.
A gaming machine characterized by this [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22]. ”
explained.

According to this game machine, by manually operating the movable body of the first movable body unit (the first movable body), it is possible to check whether the first harness is connected normally. By operating the movable body of the second movable body unit (the second movable body), it is possible to check whether the second harness is properly connected. By operating the movable bodies of the two types of movable body units, the connection of each of the two types of harnesses can be confirmed separately. Furthermore, since the light emitting means is provided on the stationary side (the side that does not move), the light emitting means can be easily recognized visually.

Also,
``Equipped with a certain board [for example, hopper relay board 901B],
The first harness includes a first motor side harness [for example, harness MR12] and a first light emitting means side harness [for example, harness MR11],
The certain board is electrically connected to the first motor [for example, motor 110m] via the first motor-side harness [for example, harness MR12],
The certain board is electrically connected to the light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML] via the first light emitting means side harness [for example, harness MR11]. can be,
The second harness includes a second motor side harness [for example, harness MH2] and a second light emitting means side harness [for example, harness MH1],
The certain board is electrically connected to the second motor [e.g., motor 180m] via the second motor-side harness [e.g., harness MH2],
The certain board is electrically connected to the light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML] and the second light emitting means side harness [for example, harness MH1]. be,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

The increase in the number of certain boards increases the number of harnesses, which increases the possibility of electrical connection failures. However, this is not a problem because electrical connection failures can be easily checked by manual operation in a power-off state.

Furthermore, according to the above description,
"Light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, LED for error monitoring, LED for signal monitoring, 7-segment display, set value display, etc.],
A first movable body unit (e.g., a reel unit 700) having a first movable body (e.g., a left reel 110) that can be operated by driving a first motor (e.g., a motor 110m);
A second movable body unit (e.g., hopper unit 180) having a second movable body (e.g., hopper disk 182) operable by driving a second motor (e.g., motor 180m);
A gaming machine equipped with
The first movable unit is electrically connected to the light emitting means (for example, via harnesses MR1 to MR3),
The second movable unit is also electrically connected to the light emitting means (for example, via a harness MH),
The light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the first movable body in a power-off state to drive the first motor,
The light emitting means may also emit light when the second movable body is manually operated in a power-off state to drive the second motor.
A gaming machine characterized by the above (for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22)
He also explained:

According to this game machine, after each movable unit that has been removed from the game machine for cleaning or maintenance is installed, a common light emitting device is used to check whether each movable unit and the light emitting means are electrically connected normally. Even if the game machine is in a power-off state, it can be confirmed by the presence or absence of light emitted from the means. Further, by manually operating each movable body and causing the light emitting means to emit light, the game machine can be visually confirmed even without a light projecting means. Furthermore, when each movable body unit is attached to the game machine at the factory, it is possible to check whether each movable body unit and the light emitting means are electrically connected properly even if the game machine is in a power-off state. can. As explained above, it has the special effect of making it easier to confirm whether or not the plurality of movable units are electrically connected normally.

Also,
"The light emitting means is provided on a board [for example, the main control board 300B, 156P, the first sub-control board 400B, 160P, the power supply control board 252B, 182P, the relay board (901B, 902B), the dispensing control board 170P, etc.],
a detachable first harness (e.g., harness MR1) that connects the board and the first motor;
a detachable second harness [e.g., harness MH] that connects the board and the second motor;
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with the following.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, after installing each movable unit that was removed from the gaming machine for cleaning or maintenance, it is possible to check whether the first harness is connected properly, whether the second harness is also connected properly, and whether the first harness or the second harness is also disconnected, even if the gaming machine is in a power outage state.

Also,
"The light emitting means is capable of emitting light when energized [for example, emitting light continuously or periodically, or emitting light when a certain condition is satisfied].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"The light emitting means is one that can emit light even when the first movable body is stopped in the energized state [for example, a current monitoring LED, a voltage monitoring LED, an error monitoring LED, etc.],
The light emitting means is capable of emitting light even when the second movable body is stopped in the energized state;
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, in the energized state, the light emitting means can be used for purposes unrelated to the operation of the first movable body or the second movable body.

Also,
``Constructed so that the light emitting means emits light by a current [e.g., induced current] generated by a back electromotive force by manually operating the first movable body to drive the first motor in a power-off state. is,
The light emitting means is configured to emit light also by a current [e.g., induced current] generated by a back electromotive force when the second movable body is manually operated to drive the second motor in a power-off state. has been,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, it is possible to confirm whether or not the first movable unit is electrically connected normally by simply allowing the current to flow through the light emitting means, and to check whether or not the first movable unit is electrically connected normally. This makes it easier to check whether or not they are electrically connected properly.

According to the above description,
``First light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED , LED for signal monitoring, 7-segment display, set value display, etc.] and
Second light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED, A light-emitting means different from the first light-emitting means among a signal monitoring LED, a 7-segment display, a set value display, etc.];
It can be operated by driving a motor [for example, motor 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.] [for example, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, croon, etc.] A movable body unit having a movable body [for example, hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, production movable body unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.],
A game machine comprising:
The motor is electrically connected to the first light emitting means via a harness [for example, harness MH, harness MR1 to MR3, harness PM, harness PS1, PS2, harness SD],
The motor is electrically connected to the second light emitting means via the harness,
The first light-emitting means may emit light by manually operating the movable body in a power-off state to drive the motor and receiving a current (e.g., induced current) due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor. The second light emitting means also operates the movable body manually in the power-off state to drive the motor, and a current [e.g., induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the second light emitting means. It may emit light due to
The first light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven,
The second light emitting means also does not move even when the motor is driven;
A gaming machine characterized by this [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22]. ”
explained.

According to this game machine, it is possible to check whether the common harness is connected normally by manually operating the common movable body using both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means. Even if one of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means is damaged or malfunctioning, it can be confirmed by the other light emitting means. Furthermore, since both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means are provided on the stationary side (the side that does not move), these light emitting means can be easily recognized visually.

Also,
"A certain substrate [e.g., a hopper relay substrate 901B] is provided,
The harness includes a motor side harness (e.g., harness MH2 or harness MR12, MR22, MR32) and a light emitting means side harness (e.g., harness MH1 or harness MR11, MR21, MR31),
the certain board is electrically connected to the motor (e.g., motor 180m or motors 110m, 111m, 112m) via the motor-side harness (e.g., harness MH2 or harnesses MR12, MR22, MR32),
The certain board is electrically connected to the first light-emitting means (e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML) via the light-emitting means side harness (e.g., harness MH1 or harnesses MR11, MR21, MR31),
The certain board is electrically connected to the second light-emitting means (e.g., main control 5V monitor LED 5ML) via the light-emitting means side harness (e.g., harness MH1 or harnesses MR11, MR21, MR31).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

The increase in the number of certain boards increases the number of harnesses, which increases the possibility of electrical connection failures. However, this is not a problem because electrical connection failures can be easily checked by manual operation in a power-off state.

Furthermore, according to the above description,
"A first light-emitting means (e.g., a main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, a main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, a sub control 24V monitor LED 24SL, a sub control 5V monitor LED 5SL, a power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, a power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, an LED for error monitoring, an LED for signal monitoring, a 7-segment indicator, a setting value indicator, etc.)"
a second light-emitting means (e.g., a light-emitting means different from the first light-emitting means among a main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, a main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, a sub control 24V monitor LED 24SL, a sub control 5V monitor LED 5SL, a power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, a power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, an LED for error monitoring, an LED for signal monitoring, a 7-segment display, a setting value display, etc.);
A movable body unit (e.g., hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, performance movable body unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.) having a movable body (e.g., hopper disk 182, left reel 110, center reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, crown, etc.) that can be operated by driving a motor (e.g., motors 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.),
A gaming machine equipped with
the movable unit is electrically connected to the first light-emitting means (e.g., connected via a harness);
the movable unit is electrically connected to the second light-emitting means (e.g., connected via a harness);
The first light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the movable body to drive the motor in a power-off state,
The second light emitting means may also emit light by manually operating the movable body to drive the motor in a power-off state.
A gaming machine characterized by the above (for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22)
He also explained:

That is, the first light emitting means may emit light even when the power is off, and the second light emitting means may also emit light even when the power is off.

After installing the movable unit that had been removed from the game machine for cleaning or maintenance, check whether the movable unit and the plurality of light emitting means are electrically connected normally or not by checking whether or not the plurality of light emitting means emit light. You can check even if the game machine is out of power. Further, by manually operating the movable body and causing the plurality of light emitting means to emit light, it becomes easier to visually check the gaming machine even without a light projecting means. Furthermore, when the movable unit is installed on the game machine at the factory, it is necessary to check whether the movable unit and the plurality of light emitting means are electrically connected properly even if the game machine is in a power-off state. I can do it. As explained above, it has a special effect of making it easier to confirm whether the movable body unit is electrically connected normally.

Note that the first light emitting means is connected to a power line with a first voltage [e.g. 24V], and the second light emitting means is connected to a power line with a second voltage [e.g. 5V]. It may be connected to. Further, the first light emitting means is provided on a first board [for example, main control board 300B], and the second light emitting means is provided on a second board [for example, power control board 252B]. It may be provided in Alternatively, the first light emitting means may be an LED lamp, and the second light emitting means may be a 7 segment display.

Also,
"The first light emitting means is provided on a board [for example, main control board 300B, 156P, first sub-control board 400B, 160P, power supply control board 252B, 182P],
The second light emitting means is also provided on the substrate,
A game machine characterized by comprising a removable harness (for example, a harness to which both 24V and 5V power is supplied) that relays the board and the movable body unit. ”
Also explained.

In other words, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are provided on a common substrate.

According to this game machine, when the plurality of light emitting means emit light, the surroundings of the board can be easily visually confirmed without the use of a light projecting means.

Also,
“The first light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML] is provided on the first board [e.g., main control board 300B],
The second light emitting means [for example, power control 5V monitor LED5PL] is provided on a second board [for example, power control board 252B],
The second substrate is a different substrate from the first substrate,
a detachable harness [for example, harness MH, MR1 to MR3] that relays the first board and the movable body unit;
a detachable harness [e.g., harness PM] that relays the first board and the second board;
A game machine characterized by being equipped with. ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, it becomes easy to check whether the movable body unit and the first board, and the first board and the second board are electrically connected normally.

Also,
“The first light-emitting means is capable of emitting light when energized [e.g., constantly emitting light or periodically emitting light, or emitting light when a condition is met];
The second light emitting means is also capable of emitting light when energized [e.g., constantly emitting light, emitting light periodically, emitting light when a condition is met],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this gaming machine, both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be used for different purposes when the power is on and when the power is off. That is, when the power is on, they can be used for their intended purpose (e.g., current monitoring, voltage monitoring, error monitoring, signal monitoring), and when the power is off, they can be used to check the electrical connection.

Also,
"The first light emitting means is one that can emit light even when the movable body is stopped in the energized state [for example, a current monitoring LED, a voltage monitoring LED, an error monitoring LED, etc.],
The second light emitting means is also capable of emitting light even when the movable body is stopped in the energized state [for example, a current monitoring LED, a voltage monitoring LED, an error monitoring LED, etc.]. A game machine. ”
Also explained.

With this gaming machine, when powered, both the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means can be used for purposes unrelated to the operation of the movable body.

Also,
``The first light emitting means is configured to emit light by a current [e.g., induced current] generated by a back electromotive force by manually operating the movable body to drive the motor in a power-off state,
The second light emitting means is configured to emit light by a current (e.g., induced current) generated by a back electromotive force by manually operating the movable body and driving the motor in a power-off state;
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained. According to this game machine, it is possible to confirm whether or not the movable body unit is electrically connected normally by simply allowing the current to flow through each of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means. becomes easier to do.

Also,
"A first light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML] provided on the first board [for example, main control board 300B],
A second light emitting means [for example, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL] provided on the second board [for example, power control board 252B],
Motors [for example, motors 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.] and movable bodies that can be operated by driving the motors [for example, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163 , sprocket, croon, etc.] [e.g., hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, production movable unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.];
A game machine comprising:
a detachable first harness [for example, harness MH, harness MR1 to MR3] that relays the movable body unit and the first board;
a detachable second harness [e.g., harness PM] that relays the first board and the second board;
Equipped with
The motor and the first light emitting means are electrically connected via the first harness,
The motor and the second light emitting means are electrically connected via the first harness, the first board, and the second harness,
The first light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the movable body to drive the motor in a power-off state;
The second light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the movable body to drive the motor in a power-off state;
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
"A first light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML] provided on the first board [for example, main control board 300B],
a movable body unit [for example, hopper unit 180, reel unit 700] having a motor [for example, motor 180m, 110m to 112m];
A game machine comprising:
A relay board [for example, hopper relay board 901B],
a detachable first harness [for example, harness MH2, harness MR12, MR22, MR33] that relays the movable body unit [for example, hopper unit 180] and the relay board;
a detachable second harness that relays the relay board and the first board [for example, harness MH1, harness MR11, MR21, MR31];
Equipped with
The motor and the light emitting means are electrically connected via the first harness, the relay board, and the second harness,
The light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the movable body and driving the motor in a power-off state;
A game machine characterized by: ” was also explained.

According to the previous description,
"Light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL
, 5SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL,
an LED 3ML for error monitoring, an LED 6SL for monitoring the second sub-control voltage, an LED for signal monitoring, a 7-segment display, a setting value display 293, etc.];
a movable body unit having a movable body (e.g., a hopper disk 182, a left reel 110, a center reel 111, a right reel 112, a shutter 163, a sprocket, a crane, etc.) that can be operated by driving a motor (e.g., motors 180m, 110m to 112m, a motor 163m, a payout motor, etc.);
A door body (e.g., the front door 102) and
A gaming machine equipped with
the motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a harness (e.g., harness MH, harnesses MR1 to MR3, harness PM, harness PS1, PS2, harness SD),
The light emitting means may emit light when a current (e.g., an induced current) flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor when the movable body is manually operated in a power-off state to drive the motor,
The light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven,
When the door is closed, the light emitting means is not visible (for example, FIG. 30(a)).
When the door is open, the light emitting means and the movable body are visible (for example, FIG. 30(b) and FIG. 30(c)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

According to the description so far,
``Light-emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL
, 5SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL,
LED 3ML for error monitoring, LED 6SL for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED for signal monitoring, 7 segment display, set value display 293, etc.],
Movable bodies [for example, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable body unit [e.g., hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, production movable body unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.],
Operation means [for example, setting key switch 281, setting change button 292, reset switch 291, first selection switch 190, power switch 244],
A game machine comprising:
The motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a harness [for example, harness MH, harness MR1 to MR3, harness PM, harness PS1, PS2, harness SD],
The light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is operated by hand to drive the motor in a power-off state, and a current (for example, induced current) due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the light emitting means. can be,
The light emitting means does not move even when driven by the motor,
The light emitting means and the operation means are provided on a common board [for example, the main control board 300B shown in FIG. 29, the sub control board 400B shown in FIG. 29, the power control board 252B of the power supply device 252 shown in FIG. 29] is,
A gaming machine characterized by this [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22]. ”
Also explained.

The operating means may be provided at a position where light from the light emitting means can reach. In other words, the operating means may be illuminated by light from the light emitting means, or may be provided within the irradiation range of the light emitting means. Further, the operating means may be operable by relying on light from the light emitting means, or may be visible even in a dark place when the light emitting means emits light. good.

According to the previous description,
"Light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL
, 5SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL,
an LED 3ML for error monitoring, an LED 6SL for monitoring the second sub-control voltage, an LED for signal monitoring, a 7-segment display, a setting value display 293, etc.];
A movable body unit (e.g., hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, performance movable body unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.) having a movable body (e.g., hopper disk 182, left reel 110, center reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, crown, etc.) that can be operated by driving a motor (e.g., motors 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.),
A gaming machine equipped with
the motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a harness (e.g., harness MH, harnesses MR1 to MR3, harness PM, harness PS1, PS2, harness SD),
The light emitting means may emit light when a current (e.g., an induced current) flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor when the movable body is manually operated in a power-off state to drive the motor,
The light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven,
The light emitting means is not visible from the outside of the gaming machine (for example, FIG. 30(a)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above (for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22)
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, fraudsters cannot see the light-emitting means, so they can use the light-emitting means to confirm that power is not being supplied normally from the power source, preventing attempts to attach fraudulent devices to the gaming machine.

According to the description so far,
``Light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL
, 5SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL,
LED 3ML for error monitoring, LED 6SL for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED for signal monitoring, 7 segment display, set value display 293, etc.],
Movable bodies [for example, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable unit [e.g., hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, production movable unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.],
A game machine comprising:
The motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a harness [for example, harness MH, harness MR1 to MR3, harness PM, harness PS1, PS2, harness SD],
The light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is operated by hand to drive the motor in a power-off state, and a current (for example, induced current) due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the light emitting means. can be,
The light emitting means does not move even when driven by the motor,
A game characterized in that the light emitting means is provided above the movable body unit [for example, LEDs 24ML, 5ML, and 3ML provided on the main control board 300B shown in FIG. 29(b)]. machine [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22]. ”
Also explained.

The movable body unit may be a reel unit. The movable body unit may also protrude further toward the person who operates the movable body with his or her hand than the light emitting means.

The light emitting means may be provided in a position that is visible to a person operating the movable body by hand while standing.

According to the previous description,
"Light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL
, 5SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL,
an LED 3ML for error monitoring, an LED 6SL for monitoring the second sub-control voltage, an LED for signal monitoring, a 7-segment display, a setting value display 293, etc.];
A movable body unit (e.g., hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, performance movable body unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.) having a movable body (e.g., hopper disk 182, left reel 110, center reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, crown, etc.) that can be operated by driving a motor (e.g., motors 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.),
A gaming machine equipped with
the motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a harness (e.g., harness MH, harnesses MR1 to MR3, harness PM, harness PS1, PS2, harness SD),
The light emitting means may emit light when a current (e.g., an induced current) flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor when the movable body is manually operated in a power-off state to drive the motor,
The light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven,
The light emitting means is provided below the movable body unit (e.g., the reel unit 700) (e.g., the LEDs 24PL and 5PL provided in the power supply device 252 shown in FIG. 29(c)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above (for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22)
He also explained:

The movable body unit may be a reel unit. The light emitting means may be provided at a position visible to a person operating the movable body by hand in a seated position.

According to the previous description,
"Light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL
, 5SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL,
an LED 3ML for error monitoring, an LED 6SL for monitoring the second sub-control voltage, an LED for signal monitoring, a 7-segment display, a setting value display 293, etc.];
A movable body unit (e.g., hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, performance movable body unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.) having a movable body (e.g., hopper disk 182, left reel 110, center reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, crown, etc.) that can be operated by driving a motor (e.g., motors 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.),
A main control board (e.g., main control board 300B) that controls the progress of the game;
A gaming machine equipped with
the motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a harness (e.g., harness MH, harnesses MR1 to MR3, harness PM, harness PS1, PS2, harness SD),
The light emitting means may emit light when a current (e.g., an induced current) flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor when the movable body is manually operated in a power-off state to drive the motor,
The light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven,
The light emitting means is provided on the main control board [for example, a main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, a main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, and an LED 3ML for error monitoring],
A gaming machine characterized by the above (for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22)
He also explained:

According to the previous description,
"Light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL
, 5SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL,
an LED 3ML for error monitoring, an LED 6SL for monitoring the second sub-control voltage, an LED for signal monitoring, a 7-segment display, a setting value display 293, etc.];
A movable body unit (e.g., hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, performance movable body unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.) having a movable body (e.g., hopper disk 182, left reel 110, center reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, crown, etc.) that can be operated by driving a motor (e.g., motors 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.),
A main control board (e.g., main control board 300B) that controls the progress of the game;
A sub-control board that controls the presentation of the game (for example, a first sub-control board 400B, a sub-control board 400B', a second sub-control board, a presentation control board),
A gaming machine equipped with
the motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a harness (e.g., harness MH, harnesses MR1 to MR3, harness PM, harness PS1, PS2, harness SD),
The light emitting means may emit light when a current (e.g., an induced current) flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor when the movable body is manually operated in a power-off state to drive the motor,
The light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven,
The light emitting means is provided on the sub-control board [for example, sub-control 24V monitor LEDs 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LEDs 5SL, 5SL'],
A gaming machine characterized by the above (for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22)
He also explained:

The sub-control board may perform control based on commands transmitted from the main control board (the same applies hereinafter).

According to the description so far,
``Light-emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL
, 5SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL,
LED 3ML for error monitoring, LED 6SL for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED for signal monitoring, 7 segment display, set value display 293, etc.],
Movable bodies [for example, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable body unit [e.g., hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, production movable body unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.],
a power supply device [e.g., power supply device 252];
A game machine comprising:
The motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a harness [for example, harness MH, harness MR1 to MR3, harness PM, harness PS1, PS2, harness SD],
The light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is operated by hand to drive the motor in a power-off state, and a current (for example, induced current) due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the light emitting means. can be,
The light emitting means does not move even when driven by the motor,
The light emitting means is provided in the power supply device [for example, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL],
A gaming machine characterized by this [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22]. ”
Also explained.

The power supply device may supply power from outside the game machine (commercial power supply), or may convert current supplied from the outside of the game machine (commercial power supply) into a predetermined voltage. (same as below).

The power outage state may be a state in which the gaming machine is unable to receive power from outside (commercial power source) (same below).

According to the description so far,
``Light-emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL
, 5SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL,
LED3ML for error monitoring, LED6SL for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED for signal monitoring, 7-segment display, set value display 293, etc.], motor [for example, motor 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout A movable body unit (for example, hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, production movable body unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.],
A certain printed display [for example, "board number 0" printed on the sub-control board 400B' shown in FIG.
002” display 4001, a sticker 210S printed with “board number 0001” attached to the main control board storage case 210],
A game machine comprising:
The motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a harness [for example, harness MH, harness MR1 to MR3, harness PM, harness PS1, PS2, harness SD],
The light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is operated by hand to drive the motor in a power-off state, and a current (for example, induced current) due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the light emitting means. can be,
The light emitting means does not move even when driven by the motor,
The certain print display is provided at a position where the light from the light emitting means can reach [for example, in addition to the light from the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL' and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL', as shown in FIG. 30(b) When the front door 102 is opened 90 degrees with respect to the main body 101 as shown in , light from the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML also reaches].
A gaming machine characterized by this [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22]. ”
Also explained.

The position where the light from the light-emitting means reaches may be, in other words, a position that is illuminated by the light from the light-emitting means, a position within the illumination range of the light-emitting means, or a position that becomes visible even in a dark place due to the light emitted by the light-emitting means (the same applies below).

The certain printed marking may be, for example, a marking relating to any of the board components such as connectors, resistors, capacitors, LEDs, ICs, LSIs, CPUs, ROMs, RAMs, switches, etc. (for example, a marking by silk screen printing), or a marking relating to the board's control number (for example, a marking printed on the resist layer of the board) (same below).

In addition, instead of a printed marking, a marking (for example, a marking by stamp or a marking by handwriting) may be used.

According to the previous description,
"Light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL
, 5SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL,
an LED 3ML for error monitoring, an LED 6SL for monitoring the second sub-control voltage, an LED for signal monitoring, a 7-segment display, a setting value display 293, etc.];
A movable body unit (e.g., hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, performance movable body unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.) having a movable body (e.g., hopper disk 182, left reel 110, center reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, crown, etc.) that can be operated by driving a motor (e.g., motors 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.),
Certain circuit components (e.g., various connectors MR1, etc., various resistors 24MR, etc., capacitors 24MC, etc., LEDs 5ML, etc., various ICs 322i, etc., various switches 281, etc., LSI, CPU, ROM, RAM, etc.)
A gaming machine equipped with
the motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a harness (e.g., harness MH, harnesses MR1 to MR3, harness PM, harness PS1, PS2, harness SD),
The light emitting means may emit light when a current (e.g., an induced current) flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor when the movable body is manually operated in a power-off state to drive the motor,
The light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven,
The certain circuit component is provided at a position where light from the light emitting means (e.g., the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML) reaches (e.g., the first selection switch 190 shown in FIG. 30(b)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above (for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22)
He also explained:

The certain circuit component may be, for example, a connector, a resistor, a capacitor, an LED, an IC, an LSI, a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, a switch, etc. (the same applies hereinafter).

According to the description so far,
``Light-emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL
, 5SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL,
LED 3ML for error monitoring, LED 6SL for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED for signal monitoring, 7 segment display, set value display 293, etc.],
Movable bodies [for example, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable body unit [e.g., hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, production movable body unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.],
A certain board case [for example, main control board storage case 210, sub control board storage case 220, 220', case of power supply device 252],
A game machine comprising:
The motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a harness [for example, harness MH, harness MR1 to MR3, harness PM, harness PS1, PS2, harness SD],
The light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is operated by hand to drive the motor in a power-off state, and a current (for example, induced current) due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the light emitting means. can be,
The light emitting means does not move even when driven by the motor,
The certain board case [for example, the sub-control board storage case 220'] emits light from the light emitting means [for example, light from an LED provided on the board that it houses, as shown in FIG. 30(b). , when the front door 102 is opened 90 degrees with respect to the main body 101, light from the LED 24ML provided on the main control board 300B stored in the main control board storage case 210 located at a 90-degree positional relationship reaches the main control board 300B. A game machine characterized in that it is installed at a position [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22]. ”
Also explained.

The aforementioned certain board case may have management information such as the board's management number displayed on it. For example, the management information may be printed on it, or a sticker with the management information written on it or a stamped mark may be affixed (for example, sticker 210S showing "Board number 0001" affixed to main control board storage case 210 shown in FIG. 29) (same below).

The certain board case may be the main control board storage case 210, the sub-control board storage case 220, the first sub-board case 162P, the second sub-board case 165P, the delivery board case 172P, the launch board case 176P, or the power supply board case 184P (same below).

The certain board case may be a light-transmitting case (for example, a transparent resin case) or a non-light-transmitting case (for example, a metal case (case of a power supply device)). Good (hereinafter the same).

According to the previous description,
"Light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL
, 5SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL,
an LED 3ML for error monitoring, an LED 6SL for monitoring the second sub-control voltage, an LED for signal monitoring, a 7-segment display, a setting value display 293, etc.];
A movable body unit (e.g., hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, performance movable body unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.) having a movable body (e.g., hopper disk 182, left reel 110, center reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, crown, etc.) that can be operated by driving a motor (e.g., motors 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.),
a power supply unit (e.g., power supply unit 252);
A gaming machine equipped with
the motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a harness (e.g., harness MH, harnesses MR1 to MR3, harness PM, harness PS1, PS2, harness SD),
The light emitting means may emit light when a current (e.g., an induced current) flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor when the movable body is manually operated in a power-off state to drive the motor,
The light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven,
The light-emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML] is supplied with power from the power supply device without passing through the harness [e.g., harness MH, harness MR1 to MR3] [e.g., supplied through harness PM],
A gaming machine characterized by the above (for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22)
He also explained:

That is, it includes a power supply device [for example, the power supply device 252] that converts a current supplied from the outside [for example, commercial power] into a predetermined voltage, and the current converted to the predetermined voltage in the power supply device is supplied to the harness [for example, the harness MH, harnesses MR1 to MR3] may be supplied to the light emitting means [for example, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML]. According to this aspect, when the power is cut off, it is possible to manually drive the motor and check whether the harness is connected by checking whether or not the light emitting means emits light, and when the power is on, the power from the power supply can be checked by checking whether or not the light emitting means emits light. It is possible to check whether the harness is being supplied normally or not, separately from whether or not the harness is connected.
Further, the movable unit [for example, hopper unit 180, reel unit 700] is removable from the game machine with the connector of the harness [for example, harness MH, harnesses MR1 to MR3] unplugged. Good too. When inspecting or cleaning the movable body unit, the harness connector is unplugged before removal, so it is easy to have a bad harness connection or forget to connect it. You can easily check to see if you have forgotten to make a connection.

According to the previous description,
"Light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL
, 5SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL,
an LED 3ML for error monitoring, an LED 6SL for monitoring the second sub-control voltage, an LED for signal monitoring, a 7-segment display, a setting value display 293, etc.];
A movable body unit (e.g., hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, performance movable body unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.) having a movable body (e.g., hopper disk 182, left reel 110, center reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, crown, etc.) that can be operated by driving a motor (e.g., motors 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.),
a power supply unit (e.g., power supply unit 252);
A gaming machine equipped with
The motors [e.g., motors 180m, 110m to 112m] are electrically connected to the light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML] via a first harness [e.g., harness MH, harnesses MR1 to MR3],
the light emitting means (e.g., a main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, a main control 5V monitor LED 5ML) is electrically connected to the power supply device via a second harness (e.g., a harness PM);
The light-emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML] may emit light even if there is a poor connection in the second harness [e.g., harness PM], when the movable body [e.g., hopper disk 182, left reel 110, center reel 111, right reel 112] is manually operated to drive the motor, and a current [e.g., induced current] due to the back electromotive force generated by the motor flows in,
The light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven.
A gaming machine characterized by the above (for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22)
He also explained:

According to the description so far,
``Light-emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL
, 5SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL,
LED 3ML for error monitoring, LED 6SL for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED for signal monitoring, 7 segment display, set value display 293, etc.],
Movable bodies [for example, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable body unit [e.g., hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, production movable body unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.],
A game machine comprising:
The motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a harness [for example, harness MH, harness MR1 to MR3, harness PM, harness PS1, PS2, harness SD],
The light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is operated by hand to drive the motor in a power-off state, and a current (for example, induced current) due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the light emitting means. can be,
The light emitting means does not move even when driven by the motor,
The game machine is a slot machine [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17],
The movable body unit is a reel unit [for example, reel unit 700],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

That is, the movable body is a reel.

According to the description so far,
``A first light emitting means [for example, an LED provided on a certain board (main control 24V monitor LED 24ML)],
The second light emitting means [for example, a different LED provided on a certain board (main control 5V monitor LED 5ML) or an LED provided on a different board from a certain board (sub control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub control 5V monitor LED 5ML) monitor LEDs 5SL, 5SL', power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL)],
Movable bodies [for example, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable body unit [e.g., hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, production movable body unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.],
A game machine comprising:
The motor is electrically connected to the first light emitting means via a harness [for example, harness MH, harness MR1 to MR3],
The motor is electrically connected to the second light emitting means via the harness,
When the first light-emitting means emits light by manually operating the movable body in a power-off state to drive the motor, and a current [e.g., induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the first light-emitting means ( Hereinafter referred to as the "first case"),
The second light emitting means also emits light when the movable body is manually operated in the power-off state to drive the motor, and a current [for example, induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the second light emitting means. (hereinafter referred to as the "second case"),
The first light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven,
The second light emitting means also does not move even when the motor is driven,
Even if the drive of the motor is stopped in the first case and the second case, at least one of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means continues to emit light [e.g. 24MC, 24SC, 24PC, and 5PC may continue to emit light due to the charges stored in them.
A gaming machine characterized by this [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22]. ”
Also explained.

The harness may be, for example, harness MR1. In this case, the motor 110m is electrically connected to the main control 24V monitor LED24ML or the main control 5V monitor LED5ML via the harness MR1. Further, the motor 110m is electrically connected to the sub-control 24V monitor LED24SL or the sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL via at least the harness MR1. That is, the motor 110m is electrically connected to the sub-control 24V monitor LED24SL via the harness MR1, the harness PM, and the harness PS1, and the motor 110m is electrically connected to the sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL, the harness MR1, and the harness PM. and electrically connected via harness PS2. Therefore, the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be provided on the same substrate or may be provided on different substrates.

According to the previous description,
"A first light emitting means (e.g., a main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, a main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, an LED 3ML for error monitoring)"
Second light emitting means [e.g., sub-control 24V monitor LEDs 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5
V monitor LEDs 5SL, 5SL', second sub control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, signal monitoring LED
ED] and
A movable body unit (e.g., hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, performance movable body unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.) having a movable body (e.g., hopper disk 182, left reel 110, center reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, crown, etc.) that can be operated by driving a motor (e.g., motors 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.),
A gaming machine equipped with
the motor is electrically connected to the first light-emitting means via a harness (e.g., harness MH, harnesses MR1 to MR3);
the motor is electrically connected to the second light emitting means via the harness,
The first light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is manually operated in a power-off state to drive the motor, and a current flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor,
The second light emitting means may also emit light when the movable body is manually operated in the power-off state to drive the motor, and a current caused by a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows in the second light emitting means,
the first light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven,
The second light emitting means also does not move even when the motor is driven,
The first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are provided on different boards (for example, different boards such as a main control board 300B, a first sub-control board 400B, and a sub-control board 400B').
A gaming machine characterized by the above (for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22)
He also explained:

According to the previous description,
"A first light emitting means (e.g., a main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, a sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', a power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL)"
A second light emitting means (e.g., a main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, a sub control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', a power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL),
a power supply unit (e.g., power supply unit 252);
A movable body unit (e.g., hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, performance movable body unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.) having a movable body (e.g., hopper disk 182, left reel 110, center reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, crown, etc.) that can be operated by driving a motor (e.g., motors 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.),
The motor is electrically connected to the first light emitting means via a harness (e.g., harness MH, harnesses MR1 to MR3),
the motor is electrically connected to the second light emitting means via the harness,
The first light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is manually operated in a power-off state to drive the motor, and a current flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor,
The second light emitting means may also emit light when the movable body is manually operated in the power-off state to drive the motor, and a current caused by a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows in the second light emitting means,
the first light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven,
The second light emitting means also does not move even when the motor is driven,
The first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are supplied with different voltages from the power supply device (for example, 24 V and 5 V).
A gaming machine characterized by the above (for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22)
He also explained:

According to the previous description,
"A first light emitting means (for example, an LED (main control 24V monitor LED 24ML) provided on a certain board)"
a second light-emitting means (for example, a different LED (main control 5V monitor LED 5ML) provided on a certain board or an LED (sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL) provided on a board different from the certain board);
A gaming machine including a movable body unit (e.g., a reel unit 700) having a first movable body (e.g., a left reel 110) that can be operated by driving a first motor (e.g., a motor 110m),
The movable body unit has a third movable body (e.g., the right reel 112) that can be operated by driving a third motor (e.g., the motor 112m),
the first motor is electrically connected to the first light emitting means via a first harness [e.g., harness MR1];
the first motor is electrically connected to the second light emitting means via the first harness,
the third motor is electrically connected to the first light emitting means via a third harness [e.g., harness MR3];
the third motor is electrically connected to the second light emitting means via the third harness,
The first light-emitting means may emit light when the first movable body is manually operated in a power-off state to drive the first motor and a current (e.g., an induced current) flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor (hereinafter referred to as the "first case");
The second light-emitting means may also emit light when the first movable body is manually operated in the power-off state to drive the first motor, and a current (e.g., an induced current) due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor flows in (hereinafter referred to as the "second case");
The first light-emitting means may emit light when the third movable body is operated by hand in the power-off state to drive the third motor and a current [e.g., induced current] due to the back electromotive force generated by the third motor flows in (hereinafter referred to as the "third case"), and the second light-emitting means may emit light when the third movable body is operated by hand in the power-off state to drive the third motor and a current [e.g., induced current] due to the back electromotive force generated by the third motor flows in (hereinafter referred to as the "fourth case");
the first light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move even when the third motor is driven;
the second light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move even when the third motor is driven;
In the first and second cases, even if the driving of the first motor is stopped, at least one of the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means may continue to emit light (for example, the light may continue to be emitted by the electric charge stored in the capacitors 24MC, 24SC, 24PC, and 5PC),
In the third and fourth cases, even if the driving of the third motor is stopped, at least one of the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means may continue to emit light (for example, the light may continue to be emitted by the electric charge stored in the capacitors 24MC, 24SC, 24PC, and 5PC).
A gaming machine characterized by the above (for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22)
He also explained:

The first harness may be, for example, a harness MR1, and the first motor may be, for example, a motor 110m. In this case, the motor 110m is electrically connected to the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML or the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML via the harness MR1. The motor 110m is also electrically connected to the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL or the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL at least via the harness MR1. That is, the motor 110m is electrically connected to the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL via the harness MR1, the harness PM, and the harness PS1, and the motor 110m is electrically connected to the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL via the harness MR1, the harness PM, and the harness PS2. Therefore, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means may be provided on the same board or on different boards.

The third harness may be, for example, a harness MR3, and the third motor may be, for example, a motor 112m. In this case, the motor 112m is electrically connected to the main control 24V monitor LED24ML or the main control 5V monitor LED5ML via the harness MR3. Further, the motor 112m is electrically connected to the sub-control 24V monitor LED24SL or the sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL via at least the harness MR3. That is, the motor 112m is electrically connected to the sub-control 24V monitor LED24SL via the harness MR3, the harness PM, and the harness PS1, and the motor 112m is electrically connected to the sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL, the harness MR3, and the harness PM. and electrically connected via harness PS2. Therefore, here as well, the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be provided on the same substrate or may be provided on different substrates.

According to the description so far,
"First light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, error monitoring LED 3ML],
Second light emitting means [for example, sub control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub control 5
V monitor LED5SL, 5SL', second sub-control voltage monitoring LED6SL, signal monitoring L
ED]; and a movable body unit [for example, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [for example, left reel 110] that can be operated by driving a first motor [for example, motor 110m]. A stand,
The movable body unit has a third movable body [for example, right reel 112] that can be operated by driving a third motor [for example, motor 112m],
The first motor is electrically connected to the first light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
The first motor is electrically connected to the second light emitting means via the first harness,
The third motor is electrically connected to the first light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3],
The third motor is electrically connected to the second light emitting means via the third harness,
The first light emitting means operates the first movable body manually in a power-off state to drive the first motor, and generates a current [e.g., induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor. may emit light due to the inflow of
The second light emitting means also operates the first movable body manually in the power-off state to drive the first motor, and generates a current [for example, an induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor. ] may emit light due to the inflow of
The first light emitting means operates the third movable body manually in the power-off state to drive the third motor, and generates a current [for example, an induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor. ] may emit light due to the inflow of
The second light emitting means also operates the third movable body manually in the power-off state to drive the third motor, and generates a current [for example, an induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor. ] may emit light due to the inflow of
The first light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and the first light emitting means does not move even when the third motor is driven,
The second light emitting means also does not move even when the first motor is driven, and the second light emitting means does not move even when the third motor is driven,
The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means are provided on different boards [for example, different boards such as the main control board 300B, the first sub control board 400B, and the sub control board 400B'],
A gaming machine characterized by this [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22]. ”
Also explained.

According to the previous description,
"A first light emitting means (e.g., a main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, a sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', a power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL)"
A second light emitting means (e.g., a main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, a sub control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', a power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL),
a power supply unit (e.g., power supply unit 252);
A gaming machine including a movable body unit (e.g., a reel unit 700) having a first movable body (e.g., a left reel 110) that can be operated by driving a first motor (e.g., a motor 110m),
The movable body unit has a third movable body (e.g., the right reel 112) that can be operated by driving a third motor (e.g., the motor 112m),
the first motor is electrically connected to the first light emitting means via a first harness [e.g., harness MR1];
the first motor is electrically connected to the second light emitting means via the first harness,
the third motor is electrically connected to the first light emitting means via a third harness [e.g., harness MR3];
the third motor is electrically connected to the second light emitting means via the third harness,
The first light-emitting means may emit light when the first movable body is manually operated in a power-off state to drive the first motor and a current (e.g., an induced current) flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor,
The second light emitting means may also emit light when the first movable body is manually operated in the power interrupted state to drive the first motor, and a current (e.g., an induced current) flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor,
The first light emitting means may emit light when the third movable body is manually operated in the power interrupted state to drive the third motor and a current (e.g., an induced current) flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor,
The second light emitting means may also emit light when the third movable body is manually operated in the power interrupted state to drive the third motor and a current (e.g., an induced current) flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor,
the first light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move even when the third motor is driven;
the second light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move even when the third motor is driven;
The first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are supplied with different voltages from the power supply device (for example, 24 V and 5 V),
A gaming machine characterized by the above (for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22)
He also explained:

According to the previous description,
"Light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL
, 5SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL,
an LED 3ML for error monitoring, an LED 6SL for monitoring the second sub-control voltage, an LED for signal monitoring, a 7-segment display, a setting value display 293, etc.];
A movable body unit (e.g., a reel unit 700) having a first movable body (e.g., a left reel 110) that can be operated by driving a first motor (e.g., a motor 110m);
A door body (e.g., the front door 102) and
A gaming machine equipped with
The movable body unit has a third movable body (e.g., the right reel 112) that can be operated by driving a third motor (e.g., the motor 112m),
the first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [e.g., harness MR1];
the third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [e.g., harness MR3];
The light emitting means may emit light when a current (e.g., an induced current) flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor when the first movable body is manually operated in a power-off state to drive the first motor,
The light emitting means may emit light when a current (e.g., an induced current) flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor when the third movable body is manually operated in the power interrupted state to drive the third motor,
the light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move even when the third motor is driven;
When the door is closed, the light emitting means is not visible (for example, FIG. 30(a)).
When the door is open, the light emitting means, the first movable body, and the third movable body are visible (for example, FIG. 30(b)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above (for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22)
He also explained:

According to the previous description,
"Light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL
, 5SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL,
an LED 3ML for error monitoring, an LED 6SL for monitoring the second sub-control voltage, an LED for signal monitoring, a 7-segment display, a setting value display 293, etc.];
A movable body unit (e.g., a reel unit 700) having a first movable body (e.g., a left reel 110) that can be operated by driving a first motor (e.g., a motor 110m);
Operation means (e.g., a setting key switch 281, a setting change button 292, a reset switch 291, a first selection switch 190, a power switch 244, etc.)
A gaming machine equipped with
The movable body unit has a third movable body (e.g., the right reel 112) that can be operated by driving a third motor (e.g., the motor 112m),
the first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [e.g., harness MR1];
the third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [e.g., harness MR3];
The light emitting means may emit light when a current (e.g., an induced current) flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor when the first movable body is manually operated in a power-off state to drive the first motor,
The light emitting means may emit light when a current (e.g., an induced current) flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor when the third movable body is manually operated in the power interrupted state to drive the third motor,
the light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move even when the third motor is driven;
The light emitting means and the operating means are provided on a common board (for example, the main control board 300B shown in FIG. 29, the sub-control board 400B shown in FIG. 29, the power supply control board 252B of the power supply device 252 shown in FIG. 29).
A gaming machine characterized by the above (for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22)
He also explained:

The operating means may be provided at a position where light from the light emitting means can reach. In other words, the operating means may be illuminated by light from the light emitting means, or may be provided within the irradiation range of the light emitting means. Further, the operating means may be operable by relying on light from the light emitting means, or may be visible even in a dark place when the light emitting means emits light. good.

According to the description so far,
``Light-emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL
, 5SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL,
LED 3ML for error monitoring, LED 6SL for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED for signal monitoring, 7 segment display, set value display 293, etc.],
A game machine comprising: a movable body unit [for example, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [for example, left reel 110] that can be operated by driving a first motor [for example, motor 110m]; ,
The movable body unit has a third movable body [for example, right reel 112] that can be operated by driving a third motor [for example, motor 112m],
The first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
The third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3],
The light emitting means operates the first movable body manually in a power-off state to drive the first motor, and a current [for example, induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor flows into the light emitting means. It may emit light due to
The light emitting means operates the third movable body manually in the power-off state to drive the third motor, and a current [for example, induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor flows into the light emitting means. It may emit light when
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and the light emitting means does not move even when the third motor is driven,
The light emitting means is invisible from the exterior of the game machine [for example, FIG. 30(a)],
A gaming machine characterized by this [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22]. ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, since an unauthorized person cannot visually recognize the light emitting means, he or she may use the light emitting means to confirm that power is not being properly supplied from the power source and attempt to attach an unauthorized device to the game machine. It is possible to prevent the act of

According to the previous description,
"Light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL
, 5SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL,
an LED 3ML for error monitoring, an LED 6SL for monitoring the second sub-control voltage, an LED for signal monitoring, a 7-segment display, a setting value display 293, etc.];
A gaming machine including a movable body unit (e.g., a reel unit 700) having a first movable body (e.g., a left reel 110) that can be operated by driving a first motor (e.g., a motor 110m),
The movable body unit has a third movable body (e.g., the right reel 112) that can be operated by driving a third motor (e.g., the motor 112m),
the first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [e.g., harness MR1];
the third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [e.g., harness MR3];
The light emitting means may emit light when a current (e.g., an induced current) flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor when the first movable body is manually operated in a power-off state to drive the first motor,
The light emitting means may emit light when a current (e.g., an induced current) flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor when the third movable body is manually operated in the power interrupted state to drive the third motor,
the light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move even when the third motor is driven;
The light emitting means is provided above the movable body unit [for example, LEDs 24ML, 5ML, and 3ML provided on the main control board 300B shown in FIG. 29(b)], and the gaming machine is characterized by this [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22].
He also explained:

The movable body unit may be a reel unit. Furthermore, the movable body unit may protrude further toward a person who manually operates the movable body than the light emitting means.

The light emitting means may be provided at a position where it can be seen by a person who operates the movable body by hand in a standing position.

According to the previous description,
"Light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL
, 5SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL,
an LED 3ML for error monitoring, an LED 6SL for monitoring the second sub-control voltage, an LED for signal monitoring, a 7-segment display, a setting value display 293, etc.];
A gaming machine including a movable body unit (e.g., a reel unit 700) having a first movable body (e.g., a left reel 110) that can be operated by driving a first motor (e.g., a motor 110m),
The movable body unit has a third movable body (e.g., the right reel 112) that can be operated by driving a third motor (e.g., the motor 112m),
the first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [e.g., harness MR1];
the third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [e.g., harness MR3];
The light emitting means may emit light when a current (e.g., an induced current) flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor when the first movable body is manually operated in a power-off state to drive the first motor,
The light emitting means may emit light when a current (e.g., an induced current) flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor when the third movable body is manually operated in the power interrupted state to drive the third motor,
the light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move even when the third motor is driven;
The light emitting means is provided below the movable body unit (e.g., the reel unit 700) (e.g., the LEDs 24PL and 5PL provided in the power supply device 252 shown in FIG. 29(c)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above (for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22)
He also explained:

The movable unit may be a reel unit.

The light emitting means may be provided at a position that is visible to a person who operates the movable body by hand while sitting. According to the description so far,
``Light-emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL
, 5SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL,
LED 3ML for error monitoring, LED 6SL for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED for signal monitoring, 7 segment display, set value display 293, etc.],
a movable body unit [for example, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [for example, left reel 110] that can be operated by driving a first motor [for example, motor 110m];
A main control board [for example, main control board 300B] that controls the progress of the game,
A game machine comprising:
The movable body unit has a third movable body [for example, right reel 112] that can be operated by driving a third motor [for example, motor 112m],
The first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
The third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3],
The light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the first movable body in a power-off state to drive the first motor, and a current due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor flows into the light emitting means. It is something that is
The light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the third movable body in the power-off state to drive the third motor, and a current flowing therein due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor. There is a
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and the light emitting means does not move even when the third motor is driven,
The light emitting means is provided on the main control board [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, error monitoring LED 3ML],
A gaming machine characterized by this [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22]. ”
Also explained.

According to the description so far,
``Light-emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL
, 5SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL,
LED 3ML for error monitoring, LED 6SL for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED for signal monitoring, 7 segment display, set value display 293, etc.],
a movable body unit [for example, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [for example, left reel 110] that can be operated by driving a first motor [for example, motor 110m];
A main control board [for example, main control board 300B] that controls the progress of the game,
A sub-control board that controls the performance of the game [for example, a first sub-control board 400B, a sub-control board 400B', a second sub-control board, a performance control board],
A game machine comprising:
The movable body unit has a third movable body [for example, right reel 112] that can be operated by driving a third motor [for example, motor 112m],
The first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
The third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3],
The light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the first movable body in a power-off state to drive the first motor, and a current due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor flows into the light emitting means. It is something that is
The light emitting means emits light by manually operating the third movable body in the power-off state to drive the third motor, and a current flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor. There is a
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and the light emitting means does not move even when the third motor is driven,
The light emitting means is provided on the sub-control board [for example, sub-control 24V monitor LEDs 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LEDs 5SL, 5SL'],
A gaming machine characterized by this [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22]. ”
Also explained.

According to the description so far,
``Light-emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL
, 5SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL,
LED 3ML for error monitoring, LED 6SL for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED for signal monitoring, 7 segment display, set value display 293, etc.],
a movable body unit [for example, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [for example, left reel 110] that can be operated by driving a first motor [for example, motor 110m];
a power supply device [e.g., power supply device 252];
A game machine comprising:
The movable body unit has a third movable body [for example, right reel 112] that can be operated by driving a third motor [for example, motor 112m],
The first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
The third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3],
The light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the first movable body in a power-off state to drive the first motor, and a current due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor flows into the light emitting means. It is something that is
The light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the third movable body in the power-off state to drive the third motor, and a current flowing therein due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor. There is a
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and the light emitting means does not move even when the third motor is driven,
The light emitting means is provided in the power supply device [for example, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL],
A gaming machine characterized by this [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22]. ”
Also explained.

According to the description so far,
``Light-emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL
, 5SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL,
LED 3ML for error monitoring, LED 6SL for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED for signal monitoring, 7 segment display, set value display 293, etc.],
a movable body unit [for example, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [for example, left reel 110] that can be operated by driving a first motor [for example, motor 110m];
A certain printed display [for example, "board number 0" printed on the sub-control board 400B' shown in FIG.
002” display 4001, a sticker 210S printed with “board number 0001” attached to the main control board storage case 210],
A game machine comprising:
The movable body unit has a third movable body [for example, right reel 112] that can be operated by driving a third motor [for example, motor 112m],
The first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
The third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3],
The light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the first movable body in a power-off state to drive the first motor, and a current due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor flows into the light emitting means. It is something that is
The light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the third movable body in the power-off state to drive the third motor, and a current flowing therein due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor. There is a
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and the light emitting means does not move even when the third motor is driven,
The certain printed display is provided at a position where the light from the light emitting means can reach [for example, in addition to the light from the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL' and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL', as shown in FIG. When the front door 102 is opened 90 degrees with respect to the main body 101, light from the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML also reaches (Fig. 30(b)).
A gaming machine characterized by this [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22]. ”
Also explained.

In addition, instead of a printed marking, a marking (for example, a marking by stamp or a marking by handwriting) may be used.

According to the description so far,
``Light-emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL
, 5SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL,
LED 3ML for error monitoring, LED 6SL for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED for signal monitoring, 7 segment display, set value display 293, etc.],
a movable body unit [for example, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [for example, left reel 110] that can be operated by driving a first motor [for example, motor 110m];
Certain circuit components [for example, various connectors MR1, etc., various resistors 24MR, etc., capacitors 24MC, etc., LED5ML, etc., various IC322i, etc., various switches 281, etc., LSI, CPU, ROM, RAM, etc.],
A game machine comprising:
The movable body unit has a third movable body [for example, right reel 112] that can be operated by driving a third motor [for example, motor 112m],
The first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
The third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3],
The light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the first movable body in a power-off state to drive the first motor, and a current due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor flows into the light emitting means. It is something that is
The light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the third movable body in the power-off state to drive the third motor, and a current flowing therein due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor. There is a
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and the light emitting means does not move even when the third motor is driven,
The certain circuit component is provided at a position where the light from the light emitting means [for example, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML] can reach [for example, the first selection switch 190 shown in FIG. 30(b)],
A gaming machine characterized by this [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22]. ”
Also explained.

According to the previous description,
"Light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL
, 5SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL,
an LED 3ML for error monitoring, an LED 6SL for monitoring the second sub-control voltage, an LED for signal monitoring, a 7-segment display, a setting value display 293, etc.];
A movable body unit (e.g., a reel unit 700) having a first movable body (e.g., a left reel 110) that can be operated by driving a first motor (e.g., a motor 110m);
A certain board case (e.g., the main control board case 210, the sub-control board case 220, 220′, the case of the power supply device 252),
A gaming machine equipped with
The movable body unit has a third movable body (e.g., the right reel 112) that can be operated by driving a third motor (e.g., the motor 112m),
the first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [e.g., harness MR1];
the third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [e.g., harness MR3];
The light emitting means may emit light when the first movable body is manually operated in a power-off state to drive the first motor and a current flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor,
the light emitting means may emit light when a current flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor when the third movable body is manually operated in the power interrupted state to drive the third motor,
the light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move even when the third motor is driven;
The certain board case is provided at a position where light from the light emitting means (for example, light from an LED provided on a board contained in the certain board case, and light from an LED 24ML provided on a main control board 300B contained in a main control board storage case 210 that is in a 90-degree positional relationship when the front door 102 is opened 90 degrees to the main body 101 as shown in FIG. 30(b)) can reach the certain board case.
A gaming machine characterized by the above (for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22)
He also explained:

According to the previous description,
"Light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL
, 5SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL,
an LED 3ML for error monitoring, an LED 6SL for monitoring the second sub-control voltage, an LED for signal monitoring, a 7-segment display, a setting value display 293, etc.];
A movable body unit (e.g., a reel unit 700) having a first movable body (e.g., a left reel 110) that can be operated by driving a first motor (e.g., a motor 110m);
a power supply unit (e.g., power supply unit 252);
A gaming machine equipped with
The movable body unit has a third movable body (e.g., the right reel 112) that can be operated by driving a third motor (e.g., the motor 112m),
the first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [e.g., harness MR1];
the third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [e.g., harness MR3];
The light emitting means may emit light when a current (e.g., an induced current) flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor when the first movable body is manually operated in a power-off state to drive the first motor,
The light emitting means may emit light when a current (e.g., an induced current) flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor when the third movable body is manually operated in the power interrupted state to drive the third motor,
the light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move even when the third motor is driven;
The light-emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML] is supplied with power from the power supply device without passing through the first harness [e.g., harness MR1] [e.g., via harness PM],
The light-emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML] is supplied with power from the power supply device without passing through the third harness [e.g., harness MR3] [e.g., supplied with power via harness PM],
A gaming machine characterized by the above (for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22)
He also explained:

According to the previous description,
"Light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL
, 5SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL,
an LED 3ML for error monitoring, an LED 6SL for monitoring the second sub-control voltage, an LED for signal monitoring, a 7-segment display, a setting value display 293, etc.];
A movable body unit (e.g., a reel unit 700) having a first movable body (e.g., a left reel 110) that can be operated by driving a first motor (e.g., a motor 110m);
a power supply unit (e.g., power supply unit 252);
A gaming machine equipped with
The movable body unit has a third movable body (e.g., the right reel 112) that can be operated by driving a third motor (e.g., the motor 112m),
the first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [e.g., harness MR1];
the third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [e.g., harness MR3];
The light emitting means is electrically connected to the power supply device via a second harness [e.g., harness PM], and the light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML] may emit light even if a poor connection occurs in the second harness [e.g., harness PM] when the first movable body is manually operated to drive the first motor and a current [e.g., induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor flows in,
the light emitting means may emit light when the third movable body is manually operated to drive the third motor even if a connection failure occurs in the second harness (e.g., harness PM), and a current (e.g., induced current) flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor,
the light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move even when the third motor is driven;
A gaming machine characterized by the above (for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22)
He also explained:

According to the previous description,
"Light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL
, 5SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL,
an LED 3ML for error monitoring, an LED 6SL for monitoring the second sub-control voltage, an LED for signal monitoring, a 7-segment display, a setting value display 293, etc.];
A gaming machine including a movable body unit (e.g., a reel unit 700) having a first movable body (e.g., a left reel 110) that can be operated by driving a first motor (e.g., a motor 110m),
The movable body unit has a third movable body (e.g., the right reel 112) that can be operated by driving a third motor (e.g., the motor 112m),
the first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [e.g., harness MR1];
the third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [e.g., harness MR3];
The light emitting means may emit light when a current (e.g., an induced current) flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor when the first movable body is manually operated in a power-off state to drive the first motor,
The light emitting means may emit light when a current (e.g., an induced current) flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor when the third movable body is manually operated in the power interrupted state to drive the third motor,
the light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move even when the third motor is driven;
The gaming machine is a slot machine (e.g., a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 ),
The movable unit is a reel unit (e.g., reel unit 700).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

For example, the first movable body may be a first reel, and the third movable body may be a third reel.

Hereinafter, a gaming machine to which the present invention can be applied (for example, a reel gaming machine such as the slot machine 100 or a pinball gaming machine such as a pachinko machine) will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 33 to 67. Note that the symbols shown in FIGS. 33 to 67 are, in principle, used only for explanations using FIGS. 33 to 67, and even if the same symbols are shown in other drawings, In the explanation using FIG. 67, priority will be given to the symbols shown in FIGS. 33 to 67.

FIG. 33 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 33 starts rotating when a predetermined number of game media are inserted and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols receive a predetermined rotation start instruction operation. Based on the reception of the rotation start instruction operation, the success or failure of internal winning of multiple types of winning combinations is determined by lottery, and each of the plurality of reels stops rotating individually by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation. If the conditions determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels stop match the predetermined payout conditions, the game media will be paid out and the game will end; if not, the game media will be paid out. This is a game machine that plays a series of games that end without paying out a game. Note that this payout of game media may be referred to as profit. Furthermore, something that facilitates the acquisition of profits may be referred to as a benefit.

This slot machine 100 includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 that is attached to the front of the main body 101 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. The front door 102 is a door member rotatably attached to the main body 101. The front door 102 is provided with a locking function, so that only an employee of the game parlor can open the front door 102.

Three reels (left reel 110, center reel 111, right reel 112) with multiple types of symbols arranged on their outer periphery are housed inside the center of the main body 101 (not shown), and are configured to rotate inside the slot machine 100. These reels 110 to 112 are rotated by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

Each symbol is printed at equal intervals on a strip-shaped member in appropriate numbers, and this strip-shaped member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame material to form each reel 110-112. When viewed by the player, the symbols on the reels 110-112 are displayed vertically in roughly threes through the symbol display window 113, making a total of nine symbols visible.

Figure 34 shows an example of a line.

To explain specifically using FIG. 34, the symbols displayed on the upper row of the left reel 110 (position 1 shown in the figure) are changed to the upper row symbols of the left reel 110 and the symbols displayed on the middle row of the left reel 110 (position 4 shown in the figure). The displayed symbols are the middle symbols of the left reel, the symbols displayed in the lower row of the left reel 110 (position 7 shown in the figure) are the lower symbols of the left reel, and the symbols displayed in the upper row of the middle reel 111 (position 2 shown in the figure) are the symbols displayed in the lower row of the left reel. The symbol displayed in the middle reel 111 (position 5 in the diagram) is the middle reel symbol, and the symbol displayed in the bottom row of the middle reel 111 (position 8 in the diagram) is the symbol displayed in the middle reel 111. The symbol displayed in the lower row of the middle reel 112 (position 3 shown in the diagram) is the symbol displayed in the upper row of the right reel, and the symbol displayed in the middle row of the right reel 112 (position 6 shown in the diagram) is the symbol displayed in the right reel. The symbols displayed on the middle reel and the lower row of the right reel 112 (position 9 in the figure) are called right reel lower symbols, and the symbols on each reel 110 to 112 are displayed on each reel 110 through the symbol display window 113 112, three in the vertical direction, nine in total are displayed. By rotating each reel 110 to 112, the combination of symbols visible to the player changes. In other words, each reel 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays combinations of a plurality of types of symbols. In addition to the reel, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can also be used as such a display device. Furthermore, although the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 33 has three reels inside the center of the slot machine 100, the number of reels and the installation positions of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) is provided on the back of each of the reels 110 to 112 to illuminate the individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 113. The backlight is configured so that each symbol is shielded so that each symbol can be evenly illuminated. An optical sensor (not shown) consisting of a light-emitting section and a light-receiving section is provided near each of the reels 110 to 112 inside the slot machine 100, and a light-shielding piece (not shown) of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the light-emitting section and the light-receiving section of this optical sensor (index sensor 730 shown in FIG. 4). The position of the symbols on the reels is determined based on the detection results of this sensor, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbol is displayed on the pay line.

The active line indicator lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates the active line 114. An active line is a line (a line where a winning judgment is made) on which it is judged whether or not a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination has been displayed, and a winning is judged when a symbol corresponding to an internal winning combination stops on this active line. Here, a line is an area within the display window 113 that is defined as an area for one symbol on each of the reels 110 to 112. Note that lines other than the active lines on which a winning judgment is not made are called inactive lines.

In FIG. 34, five lines are shown: a middle line L1 consisting of the middle symbol on the left reel, the middle symbol on the middle reel, and the middle symbol on the right reel; a downward-sloping line L2 consisting of the upper symbol on the left reel, the middle symbol on the middle reel, and the lower symbol on the right reel; a right-sloping line L3 consisting of the lower symbol on the left reel, the middle symbol on the middle reel, and the upper symbol on the right reel; an upper line L4 consisting of the upper symbol on the left reel, the upper symbol on the middle reel, and the upper symbol on the right reel; and a lower line L5 consisting of the lower symbol on the left reel, the lower symbol on the middle reel, and the lower symbol on the right reel. These lines are merely examples, and any line that defines an area for one symbol on each of the reels 110 to 112 may be used, such as a line consisting of the upper symbol on the left reel, the lower symbol on the middle reel, and the upper symbol on the right reel.

The winning combinations of the slot machine 100 include special combination 1 (BB1), special combination 2 (BB2), replay combinations 1-3, and minor combinations 1-7 (e.g., watermelon, weak cherry, etc.). Note that the types of winning combinations are not limited to these combinations, and can be any combination.

The notification lamp 123 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that he or she has internally won a specific winning combination (specifically, a special prize) in an internal lottery, or that the player is in a special gaming state to be described later. The game medal insertion possible lamp 124 is a lamp for informing the player that game medals can be inserted. The replay lamp 122 indicates that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when a replay combination (details will be described later) is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. This is a lamp that informs the player of the The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for performance.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100. In this embodiment, one coin is inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed, two coins are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three coins are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. ing. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 will also be referred to as the MAX bet button. In addition, the game medal insertion lamp 129 lights up a number of lamps according to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, a game start signal indicating that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot through which the player inserts medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) through the medal insertion slot 141; the term "insertion" includes both.

The slot machine 100 of this embodiment is a gaming machine that is premised on playing a game with a bet of three coins. However, you can play the game even if you bet two coins. Therefore, it is designed so that it is more advantageous for the player to play a 3-card bet game when a 2-card bonus is internally won than to play a 2-card bet game when a 3-card bonus is internally won. The bonus internal winning state is made into a normal gaming state so that the player can play the game by betting on three coins as much as possible.

The stored medal number display 125 is a display device for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 is a display for numerically displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game). The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals paid out to the player as a result of winning some winning combination. The storage number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are 7-segment (SEG) displays.

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110 to 112. That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated and the start lever 135 is operated, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. The operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139 consisting of a left stop button 137, a middle stop button 138, and a right stop button 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with each of the reels 110 to 112. More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right reel 112 can be stopped by operating the right stop button 139. Hereinafter, the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as the first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as the second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as the third stop operation. The reels that are stopped in response to these stop operations are referred to as the first stop reel, the second stop reel, and the third stop reel, respectively. Furthermore, the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are operated to stop all of the reels 110 to 112 that are spinning is called the operation order or push order. Furthermore, the operation order in which the first stop operation is the stop operation of the left reel 110 is called the "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the stop operation in which the first stop operation is the stop operation of the right reel 112 is called the "reverse push operation order" or simply "reverse push". Note that light-emitting elements may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light-emitting elements can be lit to notify the player.

The medal return button 133 is a button that can be pressed to remove medals that have been inserted and become stuck. The settlement button 134 is a button that can be used to settle medals that have been electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and medals that have been bet, and to dispense them from the medal payout outlet 155.

The front door 102 is also provided with a key hole 140, into which a key is inserted and turned to the right to unlock, and turned to the left to lock. The slot machine 100 is provided with an opening sensor 294 (see FIG. 35(a)) that detects when the front door 102 is open. This opening sensor 294 detects when the front door 102 is open by detecting an opening/closing piece that protrudes when the front door 102 is open.

Further, a first chance button 165 and a second chance button 166 are provided between the bet button 132 and the medal slot 141. The first chance button 165 has a built-in first effect lamp, and the second chance button 166 has a built-in second effect lamp. Both the first chance button 165 and the second chance button 166 are operation means operated by the player during the performance. Further, a left button 167 is provided on the left side of the second chance button 166, and a right button 168 is provided on the right side. By operating the left button 167 and right button 168, it may be possible to move the cursor displayed on the effect image display device 157, and in such cases, the second chance button 166 functions as a confirmation button. Sometimes.

A title panel 162 is provided below the stop button unit 136, on which the model name is displayed and various certificate stamps are attached. This title panel 162 is illuminated from behind by a title panel lamp 164. A medal payout opening 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided below the title panel 162.

The sound hole 145 provided at the bottom is a hole for outputting the sound of the bass speaker 277 (see FIG. 35) to the outside. A top lamp 144T provided on the top of the front door 102, a left side lamp 144L provided on the left side of the front door 102, and a right side lamp 144R provided on the right side are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. A presentation device 160 is disposed at the top of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is also provided at the top of the presentation device 160. This sound hole 143 is a hole for outputting the sound of the upper speaker 272 (see FIG. 35) to the outside. The production device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right shutters 163a and a left shutter 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a production image display device 157 disposed on the back side of the shutter 163. The structure is such that when the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b open horizontally outward in front of the effect image display device 157, the display screen of the effect image display device 157 appears in front of the slot machine 100 (on the player's side). . Note that although the effect image display device 157 is a liquid crystal display device, it does not need to be a liquid crystal display device, and may be any display device that can display various effect images and various game information, such as a multi-segment display (7 segment display). Display), dot matrix display, organic EL display, plasma display, reel (drum), or a display device consisting of a projector and screen. Further, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and the entire display screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 33, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. Furthermore, a decoration (not shown) may be provided around the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, making the display screen appear oddly shaped. Furthermore, although the display screen is a flat surface, it may be a curved surface.

Note that what has been referred to as a lamp so far is an example of a light emitting means, and in this specification, a lamp whose light source is an LED is also referred to as a lamp, and any device that emits light such as a fluorescent lamp or a cold cathode tube is also referred to as a lamp. Sometimes referred to as a lamp, something that emits light corresponds to an example of a light emitting means.

FIG. 35 is a diagram showing the internal configuration of the slot machine 100. FIG. 35(a) is a front view of the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 open, and FIG. It is an enlarged view of the door relay board 290 that is provided.

The main body 101 is a box body surrounded by a top panel 261, a left side panel 260, a right side panel 260, a bottom panel 264, and a back panel 242, and is open to the front. Inside the main body 101, a main control board storage case 210 that stores a main control board is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the ventilation hole 249 provided at the top of the back panel 242, and a reel unit 700 equipped with three reels 110 to 112 is arranged below the main control board storage case 210. To the side of the main control board storage case 210 and the reel unit 700, i.e., on the left side panel 260 as viewed from the side, a sub-control board storage case 220 that stores a sub-control board is arranged. A first selection switch 190 is provided in the sub-control board storage case 220. Since the first selection switch 190 is provided inside the main body 101, a person who can unlock the front door 102 (e.g., a store clerk at a gaming establishment) can operate it by opening the front door 102, but a person who cannot unlock the front door 102 (e.g., a player) cannot operate it. That is, the first selection switch 190 is provided in a position where the player cannot operate it. By operating the first selection switch 190, the volume value of the sound (e.g., background music, sound effects, error sounds, etc.) output from the bass speaker 277 and the upper speaker 272 can be changed, or a power saving mode can be set. In addition, an external centralized terminal board 248 that is connected to the main control board and outputs information about the slot machine 100 to an external device is attached to the side panel 260 on the right side. The external centralized terminal board 248 is provided with an information output circuit 334 shown in FIG. 38.

Further, on the right side of the reel unit 700, a setting key switch 281 is provided for changing the gaming mode (also referred to as setting value) of the slot machine 100 and confirming the changed setting value. Here, the set value is a value related to the degree of advantage of the player, and will be described in detail later, but for example, the total number of gaming media used by the player as the number of bets when playing games for a predetermined period of time. , a value for adjusting the ratio of the total number of game media paid out by the gaming machine ("payout rate"), etc. is included. This setting value can be set in multiple stages, for example, in six stages.

The setting key switch 281 is a key switch that is electrically turned on and off by inserting and rotating a predetermined setting key (not shown). Specifically, when a predetermined setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281 and turned clockwise, the setting key switch sensor provided in the setting key switch 281 detects the on state, and when turned counterclockwise, the setting key switch sensor is turned on. Detect off state.

The setting key switch 281, like the first selection switch 190 described above, is provided inside the main body 101, so it can only be operated by someone who can unlock the front door 102.

Each of the main control board and the external centralized terminal board 248 is provided with a monitor LED that lights up when the setting key switch 281 is turned on. Further, when the setting key switch 281 is turned on, a setting key switch on signal indicating that the setting key switch 281 is turned on is output from the external centralized terminal board 248 to an external device (for example, a hall computer). be done.

Note that the setting key switch 281 may be mounted on the main control board 300B.

A hopper unit 180 (a device for dispensing medals accumulated in the bucket 181) is disposed on the bottom plate 264, and above the hopper unit 180, that is, below the reel unit 700, a power source having a power control board is provided. A device 252 is provided, and a power switch 244 is provided in front of the power supply device 252. Power switch 244 is a toggle switch electrically connected to power supply device 252 . This power switch 244 allows the slot machine 100 to be powered on (power ON) or powered off (power OFF). Note that the power switch 244 may be mounted on a power control board. The power supply device 252 converts the alternating current power supplied from the outside to the slot machine 100 into direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and supplies the voltage to each control section such as the main control section 300 and the first sub-control section 400, and to each device. Furthermore, it is equipped with a power storage circuit (e.g., a capacitor) for supplying power to predetermined components (e.g., RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, etc.) for a predetermined period (e.g., 10 days) even after external power is cut off. There is.

To the right of the hopper unit 180, there is disposed an auxiliary medal storage 240 for storing medals that overflow from the hopper unit 180, and behind this is disposed an overflow terminal (not shown). The power supply unit 252 is provided with a power cord connector for connecting a power cord 265, and the power cord 265 connected to this extends to the outside through a power cord hole 262 opened in the back panel 242 of the main body 101.

The front door 102 is hinged to the left side panel 260 of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276, and above the pattern display window 113, there are provided the performance device 160, a performance control board (not shown) that controls the performance device 160, and an upper speaker 272. Below the pattern display window 113, there are provided a medal selector 170 for selecting inserted medals, a return passage 266 through which medals pass when the medal selector 170 drops illegal medals and the like into the medal receiving tray 161, and the like. The medal selector 170 will be described in more detail later. A low-frequency speaker 277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 145. An open sensor 294 is provided on the back of the front door 102. The open sensor 294 is configured to be L (OFF) when the front door 102 is closed and H (ON) when the front door 102 is open.

On the back side of the front door 102, a door relay board 290 is arranged below the pattern display window 113. This door relay board 290 is provided with a reset switch 291, a setting change button 292, and a setting value display 293, as shown in FIG. 35(b). Like the setting key switch 281 and the like, the reset switch 291 and setting change button 292 can only be operated by a person who can unlock the front door 102.

The reset switch 291 is a push button type switch, and by pressing the reset switch 291 (pressing it for a short period of time), an error in the slot machine 100 can be reset. Furthermore, by pressing and holding down the reset switch 291 (long-term pressing), the RAM of the main control section can be cleared.

The setting change button 292 is a push button switch similar to the reset switch 291. The operating procedure for changing the setting value using this setting change button 292 will be described later.

The setting value display 293 is a display such as a 7-segment LED. This setting value display 293 can display a display showing the game mode (setting value) set by the setting change button 292.

The reset switch 291 and the setting change button 292 were provided on the door relay board 290, but they may be provided on the main control board 300B. The setting value display 293 may also be provided on the main control board 300B.

FIG. 36 is a diagram for explaining the medal selector 170.

Figure 36 shows a schematic diagram of the slot machine 100 shown in Figure 33. Also, in Figure 36, the medal selector 170 provided on the back side of the front door 102 and the hopper unit 180 provided inside the main body 101 shown in Figure 35 are shown by dotted lines. The medal selector 170 has a medal blocker 172 provided in the medal passage 171. The medal blocker 172 distributes medals inserted from the medal insertion port 141 and passing through the medal passage 171 to either the storage passage 173 or the return passage 266. The medal blocker 172 shown in Figure 36 is in a state of protruding into the medal passage 171, and the medals passing through the medal passage 171 are guided (guided) by the medal blocker 172 in a protruding state to pass through the return passage 266 and are discharged from the medal payout outlet 155. On the other hand, if the medal blocker 172 is retracted from the medal passage 171, medals passing through the medal passage 171 pass through the storage passage 173 and are stored in the bucket 181. The protrusion of the medal blocker 172 into the medal passage 171 and the retraction of the medal blocker 172 from the medal passage 171 are performed by a blocker solenoid (not shown). That is, when an actuation signal (control signal) is output to the blocker solenoid, the medal blocker 172 operates (displaces) to guide the inserted medal to the storage passage 173. On the other hand, when an actuation signal is not output to the blocker solenoid, the medal blocker 172 operates to guide the inserted medal to the discharge passage 19b. Figure 37 (a) is a table showing the display order of the setting values displayed on the setting value display 293.

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 33, six types of setting values are prepared: setting 1, setting 2, settings 4 to 6, and setting b. Setting 1 is the default setting value that is initially displayed on the setting value display 293. In other words, immediately after being shipped from the factory, after the RAM including the memory area that stores the setting values (RAM of the main control unit) is cleared, or when the backup power source that continues to store the setting values in the memory area is lost, setting 1 is displayed on the setting value display 293 as the default setting value, and setting 1 is set as the setting value.

The degree of advantage for the player in gaining profits is higher for setting 2 than for setting 1, higher for setting 4 than for setting 2, higher for setting 5 than for setting 4, and higher for setting 6 than for setting 5. In other words, setting 6 is the most advantageous setting in terms of the player gaining profits.

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 33, setting b is provided instead of setting 3. Setting b is less advantageous than setting 1 in terms of the player's gaining profits. In other words, setting b is the least advantageous setting in terms of the player's gaining profits. Setting b is displayed on the 7-segment LED with a difference of only one segment from setting 6, and is displayed next to the most advantageous setting 6. In other words, it is displayed last among the six types of setting values. If a cheater performs a cheating operation thinking that the setting displayed last is the most advantageous setting, and as a result setting b is displayed on the setting value display 293, the cheater may mistake it for setting 6 and change the setting to setting b. In this case, a disadvantage can be caused to the cheater.

When changing the settings, the display on the setting value display 293 is updated in the order of 1→2→4→5→6→b→1→2, etc. by operating the setting change button 292. Note that the display order other than "Setting 1" that is displayed first may be in any order. For example, the display on the setting value display 293 is 1 → 2 → b → 4 → 5 → 6 → 1 → 2... may be updated.

Figure 37(b) is a table summarizing the performance differences for each setting value.

Performance A is the payout rate (sometimes called the ball output rate), performance B is the probability of hitting the special role (BB) for the first time, performance C is the probability of hitting the AT (assist time) for the first time, performance D is the probability of the AT continuing, performance E is the expected number of coins won in the AT, performance F is the probability of hitting a small role A (for example, watermelon), performance G is the frequency and probability of a notification suggesting a setting value (setting suggestion notification), and performance H is the frequency and probability of a setting suggestion notification as a confirmed notification. Performances A to F correspond to performances that indicate the degree of advantage in terms of the player's profit acquisition, and as mentioned above, the relationship is setting b < setting 1 < setting 2 < setting 3 < setting 4 < setting 5 < setting 6.

In the performance G setting suggestion notification, the notification suggesting the currently set setting value is the effect image display device 157, title panel lamp 164, top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, right side lamp 144R, bass speaker 277, etc. This is performed using the upper speaker 272 or the like. The setting suggestion notification mentioned here includes notifications such as simply turning off a lamp or outputting a warning sound, as well as setting suggestion effects such as displaying a setting suggestion animation on the effect image display device 157. It will be done. Further, even if a setting value is suggested, it also includes a case where a false setting value is suggested (setting-related presentation, setting-related notification). Furthermore, although a setting value is suggested, it also includes a case where a notification that a certain setting value is 100% true (setting confirmation notification) is also included. When setting b is set, the title panel lamp 164 is always turned off at the start of the demonstration animation (demo animation) on the effect image display device 157, and when setting values other than setting b are set, the demo animation is turned off. The title panel lamp 164 continues to light up at the start of the process. The demo animation starts when a predetermined period of time has elapsed without any medal insertion (bet operation) after the game ends (after the third stop is performed). Also, if the power is restored (power is turned on) with no bet operations being performed at the time of a power outage, the demo animation will start, but if a setting change is started, the demo animation will start after the setting change is finished. is started. Further, when the chance zone ends, the battle performance ends, the BB ends, and the AT ends, setting suggestion notification is performed 100% in a state where setting b is set. On the other hand, in a state where a setting value other than setting b is set, setting suggestion notification is performed with a predetermined probability of less than 100%. Further, in a state where setting b is set, setting b confirmation notification may be performed once every predetermined number of games (for example, 10 games). Note that in a state where setting b is set, setting suggestion notification indicating that setting b may be not performed may be performed, and only setting b confirmation notification may be performed. Furthermore, when setting b is set, the notification mode may include content that suggests that the player is at a disadvantage (for example, text display or audio output such as "A tough battle continues"). . The execution probability (frequency of appearance) of the setting suggestion notification (performance G) explained above is when setting b is set, and when setting values other than setting b (settings 1, 2, 4 to 6) are set. The setting values other than setting b are almost the same.

Regarding performance H, when setting b is set, only setting b is suggested as setting suggestion notification (setting b confirmed notification that does not suggest settings 1, 2, 4 to 6), and settings other than setting b are In a state where the setting value is set, a setting suggestion notification may also be made that suggests a setting value other than the set value. For example, when setting 5 is set, an odd number confirmation notification is sent to notify that the odd setting value is confirmed, and when setting 2 is set, an even number setting value is set. An example of this is an even number confirmation notification that indicates that the current status is confirmed. In addition, when setting 6 is set, a high setting confirmation notification that indicates that a setting value of 4 or more is confirmed, or a setting 4 or more confirmation notification, or a setting value of 2 or more is set. There are also settings 2 or more confirmation notification that informs that it is certain that a setting value of 5 or more has been set, and setting 5 or more confirmation notification that notifies that it is certain that a setting value of 5 or more is set. Note that in a state where setting 6 is set, an effect of notifying only setting 6 as setting suggestion notification (setting 6 confirmation notification) may be performed with a lower probability than the execution probability of setting b confirmation notification. The execution probability (frequency of appearance) of the setting confirmation notification (performance H) explained above is highest when setting b is set (for example, 100% or almost 100%), and when setting 6 is set. the next highest (e.g., 50%), and the remaining settings (settings 1, 2, 4, and 5) have approximately the same probability of execution (e.g., 30%), which is lower than the state with setting 6. %).

Figures 37(c) to 37(f) are diagrams showing examples of setting-related notifications (setting suggestion notifications, setting confirmation notifications) using the effect image display device 157, which may be made when the chance zone ends, the battle effect ends, the BB ends, the AT ends, etc. The setting-related notifications here are a type of notification effect.

FIG. 37(c) is a diagram showing an example of even number setting suggestion notification. In the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 37(c), the words "may be set to even number" are displayed on the right side of the panda character PND. This character display "may be even number setting" suggests that the setting value is likely to be 2, 4, or 6 (even number setting). Note that this even number setting suggestion notification may be performed only when the setting value is an even number setting, or may be performed even when the setting value is a setting other than an even number setting (odd number setting). You can. In this case, the setting value may be notified more easily when the setting value is an even number setting than when the setting value is an odd number setting.

Figure 37(d) is a diagram showing an example of a setting 5 or higher indication. In the effect image display device 157 shown in Figure 37(d), the text "I want to eat 5 or more sugar canes" is displayed to the right of the panda character PND. This text display "I want to eat 5 or more sugar canes" suggests that the setting value is likely to be 5 or 6. Note that this setting 5 or higher indication may be made only when the setting value is 5 or 6, or may also be made when the setting value is 4 or lower. In this case, the setting value may be made more likely to be indicated when it is 5 or 6 than when it is 4 or lower. Note that when the setting value is 4 or lower, setting b may or may not be included.

FIG. 37(e) is a diagram showing an example of a setting 2 or more confirmation notification. In the performance image display device 157 shown in FIG. 37(e), first, the characters "Oh, it's business sorting" are displayed to the right of the panda character PND. The characters "Oh, it's business sorting" themselves correspond to a notification suggesting setting 2 or more. After that, the grandmother character BBA appears in the lower left part of the display screen, and the business sorting is performed. The grandmother character BBA displays the characters "Does it have to be 1? Is it not good enough to be 2 or more?" as a line for the business sorting. The notification by this line denies that the setting is 1 and confirms that the setting is 2 or more. The setting 2 or more confirmation notification may be performed only when the setting is 2 or more, or may be performed in the case of setting 1 as well. Alternatively, in the case of setting 1, the grandmother character BBA may not appear.

37(f) is a diagram showing an example of a notification that the setting is b. In the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 37(f), first, the words "Oh, it's a message from God" are displayed to the right of the panda character PND. The words "Oh, it's a message from God" themselves correspond to a notification that suggests the setting is b. After that, the god character KGG appears in the lower left part of the display screen and issues a message. The god character KGG displays the words "The tough battle will continue" as a message. This message is a notification that confirms that the setting is b. The notification that the setting is b is issued only when the setting is b, and is not issued when the setting is any other setting value. However, when the setting is any other setting value than the setting b, the words "Oh, it's a message from God" may be displayed together with the panda character PND, and the god character KGG may not appear.

In the above, various explanations have been given on the assumption that setting suggestion notifications include setting suggestion effects, and setting confirmation notifications include setting confirmation effects, but setting suggestion notifications may also be read as setting suggestion effects, and setting confirmation notifications include setting suggestion effects. It may also be read as a confirmed performance.

When the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281 in the power-on state (power ON) and turned clockwise (setting key OFF → ON), the setting value display 293 displays the currently set game mode (setting value) in numbers, so it can be used to check the currently set game mode. In other words, when the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281 in the power-on state (power ON) and turned clockwise (setting key OFF → ON), a setting confirmation process that allows the setting value to be confirmed is started by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300, and when the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281 and turned counterclockwise (setting key ON → OFF), the setting confirmation process ends.

Here, the operating procedure for changing the setting value will be explained. The setting key (not shown) is inserted into the setting key switch 281 and turned clockwise (setting key OFF → ON), and the power switch 244 is switched from a power-off state (power OFF) to a power-on state (power ON), thereby enabling the setting value change (starting the setting value change process). Each time the setting change button 292 is pressed, the game mode (setting value) changes in the following order: 1 → 2 → 4 → 5 → 6 → b → 1 → 2 → ..., allowing the desired game mode to be selected. The game mode (setting value) selected at that time is confirmed by operating the start lever 135. Finally, the setting key is turned counterclockwise (setting key ON → OFF) to end the setting value change process.

Note that the period of setting value change operation, that is, the period from the first turning of the setting key clockwise to the last turning of the setting key counterclockwise in the setting value changing operation is also called set value change mode, and is called setting value confirmation operation. The period , that is, the period from the first clockwise operation of the setting key to the last counterclockwise operation of the setting key in the setting value confirmation operation is also referred to as the set value confirmation mode. The start and end of the setting value change and setting value confirmation will be described in detail later, but the start and end conditions of the setting value change mode and the setting value confirmation mode, which were explained in detail using FIG. 3, may be applied.

Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be described in detail using FIG. 38. Note that this figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control section.

The control section of the slot machine 100 is broadly composed of a main control section 300 that controls the progress of the game, a first sub-control section 400 that controls the main presentation in response to command signals (hereafter simply referred to as "commands") sent by the main control section 300, and a second sub-control section 500 that controls various devices based on the commands sent by the first sub-control section 400. The main control section 300 controls the progress of the game, and the sub-control section consisting of the first sub-control section 400 and the second sub-control section 500 controls the presentation of the game.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 that stores control program data, lottery data used during internal lottery of winning combinations, and reel pattern arrangements, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input and output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time and number of times, and a WDT (watchdog timer) 314. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and this also applies to the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal with a predetermined period output by a crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 304 for each interrupt time. The CPU 304 monitors the sensors and transmits drive pulses in response to the interrupt request.

The main control unit 300 includes a random number generation circuit 316 used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on a clock signal input from a crystal oscillator 315a, and a startup signal The CPU 304 starts the game control (starts the main control section main processing described later) when the start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338. Start).

In addition, the main control unit 300 includes a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 detects various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal input from the medal slot 141) at each interrupt time. A medal reception sensor for medals, a start lever 135 sensor, a left stop button 137 sensor, a middle stop button 138 sensor, a right stop button 139 sensor, a payment button 134 sensor, a medal payout sensor for medals paid out from the hopper unit 180, and a medal payout sensor for the left reel 110. The status of the index sensor, the index sensor of the middle reel 111, the index sensor of the right reel 112, etc.) is monitored.

Note that when the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random number generation circuit 316. Upon receiving this signal, the random number generation circuit 316 latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number value used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal slot 141, and detect whether or not a medal has passed. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect a start operation by a player. A left stop button 137 sensor, a middle stop button 138 sensor, and a right stop button 139 sensor are installed on the corresponding stop buttons 137 to 139, respectively, and detect operations of the stop buttons by the player.

A bet button 130 sensor, a bet button 131 sensor, and a bet button 132 sensor are installed in each of the corresponding bet buttons 130 to 132, and are used to input medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 into a game. Detects the input operation when inputting. The payment button 134 sensor is provided on the payment button 134. When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals dispensed by the hopper unit 180. Note that each of the above sensors may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The index sensor of the left reel 110, the index sensor of the center reel 111, and the index sensor of the right reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting base of each reel 110 to 112, and turn to L level every time a light-shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes by. Rotational position information indicating how far the reel has rotated from the reference position from the time it turns to L level until it turns to L level again is calculated based on the count value of the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b. When the CPU 304 detects the L level signal, it determines that the reel has made one rotation, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero. This rotational position information is stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300.

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 that drives a motor provided for each reel 110 to 112 of the reel unit 700, a drive circuit 324 that drives a blocker solenoid provided in a medal selector 170 that sorts inserted medals, and a hopper. A drive circuit 326 that drives the motor provided in the unit 180, various lamps 339 (valid line display lamp 120, notification lamp 123, game medal insertion possible lamp 124, replay lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121 , a storage number display 125, a game information display 126, and a payout number display 127).

In addition, an information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 outputs game information (e.g., information indicating the game status) of the slot machine 100 to an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 334.

The main control unit 300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply device 252 (see FIG. 35) to the main control unit 300. When the voltage value is less than a predetermined value (9V in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302.

The main control unit 300 also has an output interface for sending commands to the first sub-control unit 400, enabling communication with the first sub-control unit 400. Note that information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to send signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400, but is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be sent from the first sub-control unit 400 to the main control unit 300.

<Sub-control unit>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be explained. The first sub-control unit 400 receives the control command sent by the main control unit 300 via the input interface. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on this control command, and this basic circuit 402 is connected to a CPU 404 for temporarily storing data. It is equipped with a RAM 408, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period outputted by the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, lighting patterns of the backlight module 740, data for controlling various indicators, and the like.

The CPU 404 transmits the frequency division data stored in a specified area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a specified timing. The counter timer 412 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 for each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a sound source IC 418. The upper speaker 272 and the bass speaker 277 are connected to this sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls the amplifier and the sound output from the upper speaker 272 and the bass speaker 277 in response to commands from the CPU 404. An S-ROM (sound ROM) in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source IC 418, and audio data acquired from this ROM is amplified by the amplifier and output from the upper speaker 272 and the bass speaker 277.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 422, to which various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, right side lamp 144R, title panel lamp 164, bet button lamp 200, backlight module 740, first performance lamp built into the first chance button 165, second performance lamp built into the second chance button 166, etc.) are connected via an input/output interface.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 424 that drives the motor of the shutter 163. The motor 163m of the shutter 163 is a stepping motor, and the drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to the motor 160m in response to a command from the CPU 404.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sensor circuit 426, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 at every interrupt time. Furthermore, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a switch sensor 427, and this switch sensor 427 detects the depression of the first chance button 165. Further, the switch sensor 427 also detects the depression of each button of the second selection switch 194 consisting of the second chance button 166, the left button 167, and the right button 168. Detection signals from the shutter sensor 428 and the switch sensor 427 are output to the basic circuit 402 by the sensor circuit 426.

Furthermore, although the first selection switch sensor 190 is directly connected to the basic circuit 402, this first selection switch sensor 190 may also be connected to the basic circuit 402 via the switch sensor 427 and the sensor circuit 426. .

Further, the CPU 404 transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-control unit 500 via the output interface.

The second sub-control unit 500 performs various controls of the performance device 160, including display control of the performance image display device 157. Note that the second sub-control unit 500 may be configured with multiple control units, such as a control unit that controls the display of the performance image display device 157 and a control unit that controls various performance drive devices (for example, a control unit that controls the motor drive of the shutter 163).

The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on this control command. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, etc. It is equipped with 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits the frequency division data stored in a specified area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a specified timing. The counter timer 512 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 for each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

The second sub-control unit 500 is also provided with a VDP 534 (video display processor), which is connected to a ROM 506 and a VRAM 536 via a bus. The VDP 534 reads image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 536, and displays the image on the performance image display device 157.

<Processing Overview>
Below, the processing of the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500 will be explained using the drawings.

<Main processing of main control unit>
First, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to Fig. 39. Note that Fig. 39 is a flow chart showing the flow of the main control unit main processing.

As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when power is applied. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 that receives this start signal is reset and started by a reset interrupt, and executes the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 39 according to the control program previously stored in the ROM 306.

When the power is turned on, first, in step S101, the main control unit initial setting process is performed. In this main control unit initial setting process, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, interrupt prohibition is set, the I/O 310 is initialized, various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and operation permission and initial values are set in the WDT 314. Details of this process will be described later using FIG. 41.

In step S103, a game start process is executed. In this process, a check is made to see if medals have been inserted (by hand or by operating the bet buttons 130 to 132), and if medals have been inserted, preparations are made to send an insertion command indicating this. If a replay was won in the previous game, a process is performed to insert the same number of medals as the number inserted in the previous game, eliminating the need for the player to insert medals. In addition, a check is made to see if the start lever 135 has been operated after the specified number of medals (2 or 3) have been used, and if the start lever 135 has been operated, the number of medals inserted and the valid winning lines are confirmed, and the game begins.

In step S105, various lottery processes are executed, including the internal winning lottery process.

In step S107, reel stop data corresponding to the first stop operation is prepared based on the result of the internal winning role lottery. This reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

In step S109, rotation of the reels 110 to 112 is started on the condition that the game interval timer (subtracted in a timer update process described later) is 0, and an initial value is set in the game interval timer. Furthermore, when the reels 110 to 112 start rotating, preparations are made to send a reel rotation start command to the first sub-control unit 400. After that, when the reels 110 to 112 reach a predetermined rotational speed and the optical sensor provided on each reel detects the symbol position of each reel, the stop operation for the stop buttons 137 to 139 is enabled. Note that the game interval counter ensures the minimum time required for one game (4.1 seconds in this embodiment) and suppresses the gambling nature.

In step S111, a reel stop control process is executed. In this process, when any of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is pressed after the stop operation is enabled, the reel 110 to 112 corresponding to the pressed stop button 137 to 139 is stopped. Specifically, each time a stop operation is performed, the stop table of the reel stop data is referenced, and the reel 110 to 112 corresponding to the stop operation is stopped according to the number of reel-in frames set in the stop table. In addition, for the first stop operation, reel stop data corresponding to the second stop operation is prepared, and for the second stop operation, reel stop data corresponding to the third stop operation is prepared. In addition, for each stop operation, preparations are made to send the corresponding command (first to third press commands) to the first sub-control unit 400, and each time the reels 110 to 112 stop, preparations are made to send the corresponding command (first to third stop commands) to the first sub-control unit 400. When all the reels 110 to 112 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S113.

In step S113, a winning determination process is performed. Here, if a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination is displayed on an activated winning line, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. After determining the winning combination, preparations are made to send a winning command to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S115, if a winning combination with a payout has been won, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is awarded (paid out), and the number of medals awarded is displayed using the payout number display 127.

In step S117, a state update process is executed to update various states in the slot machine 100.

This completes one game. After this, the game will proceed by returning to step S103 and repeating the above-mentioned process.

<Main control unit 300 timer interrupt processing>
Next, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to Fig. 40. Note that Fig. 40 is a flow chart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined period (approximately once every 2 ms in this embodiment). Start processing at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start processing, processing for temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 in the stack area is performed.

In step S203, WDT314 is periodically restarted (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt) so that the count value of WDT314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (so that a processing abnormality is not detected).

In step S205, input port status update processing is performed. In this input port status update process, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input through the input ports of the I/O 310, the presence or absence of the detection signals is monitored, and the RAM 308 is partitioned for each type of sensor 318. The signal state is stored in the provided signal state storage area. Note that the state of the optical sensor is confirmed through this process.

In step S207, various game processes are executed, and processes according to the interrupt status are executed.

In step S209, timer update processing is performed. For example, a process of updating various timers in respective time units, such as subtracting a game interval timer, is executed.

In step S211, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands that have been prepared for transmission in the main processing, timer interrupt processing, etc. of the main control section 300 are transmitted to the first sub-control section 400. Note that the output schedule information sent to the first sub-control unit 400 includes strobe information (when on, it indicates that data is being set), command type (in this embodiment, basic command, input command, and start lever). Reception command, internal winning command, performance command associated with performance lottery processing, reel rotation start command associated with the start of rotation of reels 110 to 112, first to third press commands associated with acceptance of operation of stop buttons 137 to 139, reel First to third stop commands associated with the stop of 110 to 112, prize winning command, payout number command and payout end command associated with medal payout processing, status update command, item addition command, earned point command, setting change command, power recovery command ), command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

In the first sub-control unit 400, depending on the command type included in the received output schedule information, it becomes possible to determine performance control according to changes in game control in the main control unit 300, and also to determine the performance control according to the change in game control in the main control unit 300. Based on the information of the command data, it becomes possible to determine the content of production control. In step S213, external signal setting processing is performed. In this external signal setting process, the gaming information stored in the RAM 308 is outputted to the information input circuit 652, which is separate from the slot machine 100, via the information output circuit 334.

In step S215, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S205, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out, and the presence or absence of errors related to medal insertion abnormalities, medal dispensing abnormalities, etc. is monitored, and if an error is detected, (Illustration omitted) Executes error handling. Furthermore, the medal blocker 171, various lamps 339, and various 7-segment (SEG) indicators are set according to the current gaming state.

In step S217, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. If a low voltage signal is received (if a power interruption is detected), the process proceeds to step S221, and if a low voltage signal is not received (if a power interruption is not detected), the process proceeds to step S219.

In step S219, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the values of each register temporarily saved in step S201 are set back to the original registers, and other processing is performed. After that, the processing returns to the main processing of the main control unit shown in FIG. 39.

On the other hand, in step S221, information that needs to be saved such as specific variables and stack pointers for returning to the state at the time of power outage upon power restoration is saved to a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and a predetermined area including at least the used area of the RAM 308 is saved. A checksum value for the area is derived and stored in the RAM 308, and a power flag indicating that power-off processing has been performed is set on.

Next, the details of the main control unit initial setting process (step S101) in the main control unit main process in FIG. 39 will be described with reference to FIG. 41. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit initial setting process (step S101) in FIG. 39.

First, in step S1001 that is executed first, initial settings at startup are performed. This initial setting includes processing such as setting the stack initial value to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304 (temporary setting), setting the interrupt mask, initial setting of the I/O 310, and initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308. conduct.

In step S1003, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is ON, that is, whether the voltage monitoring circuit 330 outputs a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped when the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 300 is less than a predetermined value (9V in this embodiment). If the low voltage signal is ON (if the CPU 304 detects a power interruption), this step S1003 is executed repeatedly, and if the low voltage signal is OFF (if the CPU 304 does not detect a power interruption), the process proceeds to step S1005. Note that even if the predetermined value (9V) has not yet been reached immediately after the power is turned on, step S1003 is executed repeatedly until the supply voltage reaches or exceeds the predetermined value.

In step S1005, it is determined whether the setting key switch 281 shown in FIG. 35 is on. If the setting key switch 281 is on (the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch and turned 90 degrees to the right), the process advances to step S1013; otherwise, the process advances to step S1007.

In step S1007, it is determined whether the reset switch 291 shown in FIG. 35 is on. If this switch is on, the process proceeds to step S1009; if not, the process proceeds to step S1011.

In step S1009, the RAM 308 is initialized, and this main control unit initialization process ends. Note that in this initialization, for example, the value of the setting value is initialized.

In step S1011, a RAM data write-back process is executed. In this process, it is first determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the data stored in RAM 308. The data determined here is data that was saved to RAM 308 when the power to the slot machine 100 was turned off or due to a momentary interruption (a voltage drop below the operating voltage) (see step S221 in FIG. 40). In other words, in this step S1011, it is determined whether or not the data has been reliably saved to RAM 308. Specifically, it is determined whether the power flag is normal (on) and whether the calculation result using the checksum is normal, and if both determinations are normal, it is determined that there is no abnormality in the restored data in RAM 308.

If it is determined that there is no abnormality in the restoration data in the RAM 308, processing is performed to restore the state of the register to the state immediately before the power-off processing was performed. In this RAM data write-back process, for example, the data stored in the RAM 308 is written back to the register of the CPU 304, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power outage is read, and the stack Reset to pointer (main setting). In addition, after reading out the values of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power outage and resetting them in each register, interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, the CPU 304 executes the control program based on the reset stack pointer and register, and as a result, the slot machine 100 returns to the state at power-off. That is, the process is restarted from the instruction following the instruction executed immediately before branching to timer interrupt processing immediately before the power is cut off. Furthermore, here, a power restoration command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This power recovery command is a command that indicates that the power has returned to the state at power-off. This power restoration command includes information such as RT at the time of power cut, gaming status, performance status, etc., and is transmitted by the main control unit timer interrupt processing (step S211 in FIG. 40).

On the other hand, if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the recovery data of RAM 308, preparations are made to clear all memory areas of RAM 308 except for the used stack area, and then the system transitions to an infinite loop state (RAM error processing). From this state, it is necessary to turn the power back on with the RAM clear switch or setting key switch turned on. In other words, this embodiment is configured so that the progress of the game is stopped if an error occurs in RAM 308.

In step S1005, if the setting key switch 281 is on, the process proceeds to step S1013, where setting change processing is performed according to the state of the setting key switch 281, and the main control unit initial setting processing is terminated. Details of this setting change processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 42.

Next, the details of the setting change process (step S1013) in the main control unit initial setting process in FIG. 41 will be described with reference to FIG. 42. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the setting change process (step S1013) in FIG. 41.

First, in step S1101, which is executed first, the data in RAM 308 is cleared, and the process proceeds to step S1103. Note that the data cleared here includes the setting values.

In step S1103, preparations are made to transmit a setting change command indicating that a setting change has started to the first sub-control unit 400 (sent in step S211 of FIG. 40), and the process advances to step S1105. As a result, a setting change in progress display is displayed on the effect image display device 157.

In step S1105, the interrupt status is set to "setting change in progress" and the process proceeds to step S1107.

In step S1107, the provisional setting value is set as the display setting value. This process displays the provisional setting value on the setting value display 293. Then, the process proceeds to step S1109.

In step S1109, it is determined whether the operation of the setting change button 292 has been accepted. If this condition is met, the process advances to step S1111; otherwise, the process advances to step S1113.

In step S1111, the provisional setting values are updated. In this embodiment, each time the setting change button 292 is pressed, the provisional setting values are updated one by one according to the display order described with reference to FIG. 37(a), and when the setting switch is operated while the provisional setting value is b, the provisional setting value is set to 1. After this, the process proceeds to step S1113.

In step S1113, it is determined whether the start lever 135 has been operated. If this condition is met, the process proceeds to step S1115; if not, the process proceeds to step S1107.

In step S1115, a process is executed to confirm the provisional setting value as the setting value, and the process proceeds to step S1117. That is, the setting value is confirmed by operating the start lever 135. When the setting value is confirmed, the setting value display 293 displays a display indicating that the setting value has been confirmed (here, the number 0). Note that when the setting value is confirmed, the setting value display 293 may continue to display the confirmed setting value, may switch to a flashing display, or may become invisible.

In step S1117, it is determined whether the setting key switch 281 is off (the setting key switch 281 is turned 90 degrees to the left and the setting key is removed). If this condition is satisfied, the process advances to step S1119, and if not, this step S1117 is repeatedly executed.

In step S1119, preparation for transmitting a setting change command indicating that the setting change has been completed to the first sub-control unit 400 (sent in step S211 in FIG. 40) is executed. As a result, the display of the setting change in progress display on the effect image display device 157 ends. Further, in this process, the interrupt status is returned to the status before being changed in step S1105. After this process, this setting change process ends.

In the end condition of the setting change process shown in FIG. 42, the open/closed state of the front door 102 is irrelevant, but the end condition may be that the setting key switch 281 is turned off and the front door 102 is closed. Also, the setting value is confirmed by operating the start lever 135, but the setting value may also be confirmed by turning off the setting key switch 281.

Next, the processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. 43. Note that FIG. 43(a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 43(b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing by the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 43(c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing by the first sub-control unit 400.

First, in step S301, various initial settings are made. This initial setting is executed when the power is turned on. In this process, the input/output ports are initialized, and various variables stored in RAM 408 are initialized. In this process, an area for storing internal win information, which is information that indicates the result of an internal win, and an area for storing RT update information, which is information that indicates the game status, are provided in RAM 408. The presentation state of the first sub-control unit 400 is set to the initial state. Also, if a backup was performed when the power was cut off, the information backed up in step S301 is returned.

In step S303, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or greater, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or greater, the process proceeds to step S305.

In step S305, the timer variable is assigned the value 0.

In step S307, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the main control unit 300, is executed.

In step S309, production control processing is performed. Here, the processing includes processing to expand the effect data and setting device data in the effect execution area provided in the RAM 408, processing to set the effect data in the effect reservation area provided in the RAM 408, and furthermore, the received command Based on the information contained in the command, processing such as setting performance data and executing control processing is performed. Note that the performance data set in the performance reservation area and the device data set in the performance execution area may be updated (overwritten) with other data. In this case, the content of the performance is changed based on the overwritten data.

In step S311, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, control data is acquired from device data set in the performance execution area corresponding to the speakers 272 and 277, and the acquired control data is output to the sound source IC 418, thereby causing a sound performance to be executed.

In step S313, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, by acquiring control data from device data set in the performance execution area corresponding to each type of lamp 420 and outputting the acquired control data to the drive circuit 422, the performance using the lamps is executed.

In step S315, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, by acquiring control data from device data set in the performance execution area corresponding to the shutter 163 and outputting the acquired control data to the drive circuit 424, the performance by the shutter 163 is executed.

In step S317, information output processing is performed to perform settings for transmitting a control command to the second sub-control unit 500 based on the processing result of step S309. For example, if there is device data set in the performance execution area corresponding to the performance image display device 157, preparations are made to transmit this device data to the second sub-control unit 500, and the process returns to step S303.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. 43(b). This command reception interrupt processing is processing that is executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main control unit 300. In step S321 of the command reception interrupt processing, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command memory area provided in RAM 408.

Next, the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. 43(c). The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and uses this timer interrupt as a trigger to perform timer interrupt processing in a predetermined manner. Execute at the cycle of

In step S331, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 43(a), and the value is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S303, it is determined that the value of the timer variable is 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S333, the device data set in step S315 is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500, and the random value for effect is updated.

<Processing of second sub-control unit 500>
Next, the processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 44. Note that FIG. 44(a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 44(b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing by the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 44(c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing by the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 44(d) is a flowchart of image control processing by the second sub-control unit 500.

First, in step S401 in FIG. 44(a), various initial settings are made. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization process, the input/output ports are initialized, and various variables stored in RAM 508 are initialized. If a backup was performed when the power was cut off, the information backed up in step S301 is returned.

In step S403, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or greater, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or greater, the process proceeds to step S405.

In step S405, the timer variable is assigned the value 0.

In step S407, command processing is performed. In command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S409, performance control processing is performed. Specifically, if a new command is received in step S407, processing corresponding to this command is performed. For example, processing is executed to read performance data for image control related to the background image from ROM 506. In addition, processing is executed to read other performance data from ROM 506, and if the performance data needs to be updated, processing to update the performance data is executed.

In step S411, image control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S409. For example, if there is an image control command in the effect data read in step S409, image control corresponding to this command is performed. For example, image control regarding display images (notification images, background images) is performed. This image control processing will be described later using FIG. 44(d). When this image control process ends, the process returns to step S403. Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be explained using FIG. 44(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process that is executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first sub-control unit 400. In step S415 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

Next, the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 44(c). The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and uses this timer interrupt as a trigger to perform timer interrupt processing in a predetermined manner. Execute at the cycle of

In step S417, the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 508 described in step S403 in the second sub-control unit main processing shown in FIG. 44(a) is incremented by 1 and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S403, the timer variable value is determined to be 10 or greater every 20 ms (2 ms x 10).

In step S419, the random number values for the effects are updated.

Next, the image control processing of step S411 in the main processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 44(d). This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the image control processing.

In step S421, an image data transfer instruction is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the drawing area designations of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 518. As a result, one frame of the image stored in the display area that is not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Next, the CPU 504 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of VRAM 518), etc. in the attribute register of VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then transfers the image from ROM 506 to VRAM 518. Set the command to start data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on instructions set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S423, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 has been input. If the transfer end interrupt signal has been input, the process advances to step S425; otherwise, the transfer end interrupt signal is input. wait until

In step S425, parameters are set based on the performance scenario configuration table and attribute data, etc. Here, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 on information about the image data that constitutes the display image (coordinate axes of the VRAM 518, image size, VRAM coordinates (layout coordinates), image overlay and transparency, etc.) in order to form a display image in display area A or B of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S421. The VDP 516 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the command stored in the attribute register.

In step S427, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing the image in the frame buffer in accordance with the instruction from the CPU 504.

In step S429, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 based on the end of image drawing has been input. If the generation end interrupt signal has been input, the process advances to step S431; otherwise, the generation end interrupt signal is input. Wait for input.

In step S431, the scene display counter, which is set in a specified area of RAM 508 and counts how many scene images have been generated, is incremented (+1) and the process ends.

Next, we will explain how to change the settings in the slot machine 100 shown in Figure 33. The setting change process is started by inserting the setting key into the setting key switch 281 shown in Figure 35 and rotating it to the right to turn it on, and then turning on the power switch 244.

Figure 45 is a table summarizing the steps to change the setting to setting b and the state of the related components. In Figure 45, each stage is numbered from (a) to (shi), and time passes in alphabetical order. Figure 46 is a diagram that shows the state of the components at each stage from (a) to (shi) in Figure 45.

In Fig. 45, the items of the components are shown as the power switch 244, the front door 102, the opening sensor 294, the setting key switch 281, the setting value display 293, the performance image display device 157, the title panel lamp 164, the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L and the right side lamp 144R (top and side lamps), the upper speaker 272 and the bass speaker 277 (speakers). In Fig. 46, the setting value display 293, the performance image display device 157, the title panel lamp 164, the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L and the right side lamp 144R, and the speakers (272, 277) are each shown in a schematic manner.

In Fig. 45(A), the power switch 244 is in the OFF state, and the front door 102 is closed. The open sensor 294 is not functioning. No setting key is inserted in the setting key switch 281, and it remains in the OFF state. The seven segments of the setting value display 293 remain off, and the setting value is not displayed. The various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) are also off, and nothing is being output from the speakers (272, 277).
In (a) and (b), the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) are shown in an unlit state in plain white (the same applies below).

In FIG. 45 (A), the front door 102 is opened, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281 and rotated to the right, turning the setting key switch 281 on. In other words, the setting key switch 281 is on before the power is turned on. Note that, since the power has not yet been turned on, no detection signal is output from the opening sensor 294 even if the front door 102 is opened.

In Fig. 45 (c), the setting key switch 281 is in the on state, and the power switch 244 is turned on (power on). As a result, the open sensor 294 starts to output a detection signal indicating open detection, and all the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) start to light up. In Fig. 46 (c), the title panel lamp 164 is shown to be lit in white by hatching downward to the left (the same applies below). As described above, the setting change process in the main control unit 300 is started by inserting the setting key into the setting key switch 281 and rotating it to the right to turn it on, and then turning on the power switch 244. When the setting change process is started, the RAM is cleared (step S1101 shown in Fig. 42), and "1" is displayed on the setting value display 293 as the default setting value. In addition, when the setting change process is started, a setting change in progress display is displayed on the performance image display device 157 to notify the user that the setting is being changed, and a sound ("Setting change in progress") is output from the speakers (272, 277) to notify the user that the setting is being changed.

In FIG. 45(d), the setting change button 292 is pressed once, and "2" is displayed on the setting value display 293 as a temporary setting value.

In FIG. 45(e), the setting change button 292 is pressed twice, and "4" is displayed on the setting value display 293 as a temporary setting value.

In FIG. 45 (f), the setting change button 292 is pressed once, and the setting value display 293 shows "5" as the provisional setting value.

In FIG. 45(g), the setting change button 292 is pressed once more, and the setting value display 293 displays a setting of 6 as a provisional setting value, and in FIG. 45(h), the setting change button 292 is pressed once more, and the setting value display 293 displays "b" as a provisional setting value. Comparing the setting value display 293 shown in FIG. 46(g) with the setting value display 293 shown in FIG. 46(h), the only difference is whether the A segment is lit or not, and an unauthorized person attempting to fraudulently change the setting value may mistake the "b" display for a "6" display.

In FIG. 45(e), the start lever 135 is operated, the set value is determined (step S1115 shown in FIG. 42), and the number 0 representing the determined value is displayed on the set value display 293. Here, setting b is determined. Note that when the start lever 135 is operated, the set value display 293 may be hidden as described above. Further, the setting value may not be determined by operating the start lever 135, but may be determined by turning the setting key switch 281 into the OFF state.

In FIG. 45(C), the setting key inserted into the setting key switch 281 is turned to the OFF state by turning it counterclockwise. As a result, the setting change process ends (step S1119 shown in FIG. 42), and seven segments of the setting value display 293 go out and become non-displayed. Furthermore, the effect image display device 157 starts displaying the demo animation. If the power is turned on with the setting key switch 281 in the off state, the display of the demo animation will start immediately after the power is turned on, but since the power is turned on with the setting key switch 281 in the on state, the setting change process will be delayed. will start after it has finished. In this case, the display of the demo animation is started from the beginning. Alternatively, the demo animation display was played immediately after the power was turned on, but the settings changing display overlapped and could not be seen, and even if it became visible from the scene at the time the settings changing display disappeared. good. Furthermore, the sound from the speakers (272, 277) switches to the sound "The door is open" warning that the front door 102 is being opened. Furthermore, among the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R are lit in a demonstration lighting pattern (demo pattern). In FIG. 46(C), the state in which the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R are turned on in a demo pattern is represented by square hatching (the same applies below). On the other hand, only the title panel lamp 164 is turned off. That is, the title panel lamp 164 is lit while the settings are being changed, but turns off when the settings are changed, and remains off until medals are inserted (until the number of bets of 1 or more is set). . Turning off the title panel lamp 164 corresponds to notification regarding the setting value, more specifically, notification that the setting value is set to a certain setting value (the setting value that is most disadvantageous to the player). Furthermore, since the title panel lamp 164 remains lit during normal times, the turning off of the title panel lamp 164 can also be interpreted as notification of an abnormality (notification regarding a set value abnormality).

In FIG. 45(sa), the front door 102 is closed, and the open sensor 294 no longer outputs a detection signal (H level signal) (switches to an L level closed detection signal). The speakers (272, 277) output a voice saying "The door is closed." On the effect image display device 157, the demonstration animation continues to be displayed, and the title panel lamp 164 continues to be turned off.

In FIG. 45 (c), a medal is inserted. That is, the medal is inserted or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated. As a result, the following message is output from the speakers (272, 277):
A coin insertion sound is output, and the effect image display device 157 switches from the display of the demo animation to the background display of the normal effect (normal background display). In addition, among the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 144R start to light up in the lighting pattern for normal effect (normal pattern). In FIG. 46 (C), the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 144R are shown by cross-hatching in the normal pattern (same below). Meanwhile, the title panel lamp 164, which has been turned off, also starts to light up. Note that the title panel lamp 164 may start to light up when the front door 102 is closed, or may continue to be turned off when a coin is inserted and start to light up when a game starts (operation of the start lever 135), or may start to light up at the third stop of the first game, or may start to light up when the payout of the first game is completed.

FIG. 47(a) is a table summarizing the states of related components when the front door 102 is repeatedly opened and closed with the setting value set to setting b. In FIG. 47(a), each stage is numbered from (ta) to (nu), and time elapses in alphabetical order. Further, FIG. 48 schematically shows the state of the components at each stage from (ta) to (nu) in FIG. 47(a).

Figure 47(a) also shows the same items as Figure 45 as component items, and Figure 48(a) shows each component diagrammatically in the same way as Figure 46.

Figure 47 (Ta) may be a continuation of Figure 45 (Si), where game play has already started with setting b set. In other words, this is the case when game play has started ignoring the notification by the title panel lamp 164 going off. In this Figure 47 (Ta), the third stop is performed, and the reel stop sound is output from the speakers (272, 277).

In FIG. 47(H), a predetermined period of time (30 seconds in this example) elapses after the third stop is performed without medals being inserted. Then, the effect image display device 157 switches from the normal background display to the demonstration animation display. Further, among the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R are switched from normal pattern lighting to demo pattern lighting. Here, if setting b remains set, when the demonstration animation starts to be displayed on the effect image display device 157, the title panel lamp 164 is turned off and the setting-related notification is restored. Note that the title panel lamp 164 may be turned off and setting-related notifications may be started not only when a demonstration animation is displayed on the effect image display device 157 but also when a demonstration effect is started or when a demonstration state is entered. .

In FIG. 47 (Tsu), the front door 102 is opened, and the open sensor 294 outputs a detection signal (a signal of H level). All the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) start to light in the door open pattern. That is, the title panel lamp 164, which was turned off, also ends the setting-related notification and starts to light in the door open pattern. In FIG. 48 (Tsu), the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 144R are shown by hatching downward to the right (the same applies below). Note that these lamps (144T, 144L, 144R) may be lit in the same pattern as the normal pattern shown by cross-hatching in FIG. 46 (S). Since the front door 102 is opened, there is a possibility that the settings will be changed, and therefore the setting-related notification by the title panel lamp 164 ends. A voice saying "The door is open" starts to be output from the speakers (272, 277). The demo animation continues to be displayed on the performance image display device 157, but the text "Door Open" may be displayed along with the demo animation.

In FIG. 47(TE), a predetermined time (30 seconds in this example) has elapsed without any setting change after the front door 102 was opened. To change settings, the setting key switch 281 must be turned on while the power switch 244 is off, so the power switch 244 must be turned off before a predetermined time (30 seconds in this example) elapses. If not, the title panel lamp 164 is turned off again, and setting-related notification is started. This setting-related notification prompts the user to change the settings. Also, among the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R are changed from the door opening pattern lighting to match the demonstration animation display on the effect image display device 157. Switches to demo pattern lighting. That is, the warning notification for a predetermined period of time (30 seconds in this example) by lighting the door opening pattern is ended, and the lighting pattern returns to the demo pattern.

In Fig. 47 (g), the front door 102 is closed. The open sensor 294 no longer outputs a detection signal (H level signal) (switches to a L level closed detection signal). The speakers (272, 277) output a voice message saying "The door is closed." The performance image display device 157 continues to display the demo animation, and the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R also continue to light up in the demo pattern. The title panel lamp 164 also continues to be turned off, and setting-related notifications continue to be issued.

In FIG. 47(N), the front door 102 is opened again, and each component is in the same state as in FIG. 47(T) described above.

In FIG. 47(2), the front door 102 is closed again one second after the front door 102 is opened in FIG. 47(na). The open sensor 294 no longer outputs a detection signal (H level signal). The speakers (272, 277) immediately switch from the voice saying "The door is open" to the voice saying "The door is closed." On the other hand, even if the front door 102 is closed, all the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) continue to illuminate in the door open pattern for the predetermined time period after the front door 102 is opened. As a result, the setting-related notification by turning off the title panel lamp 164 is not started until the predetermined time has elapsed after the front door 102 is opened. Note that the demonstration animation continues to be displayed on the effect image display device 157.

In FIG. 47(N), a predetermined time (30 seconds in this example) has elapsed since the front door 102 in FIG. 47(N) was opened. As a result, a predetermined period of time (30 seconds in this example) has passed since the front door 102 was opened without any settings being changed, the title panel lamp 164 turns off, and setting-related notifications are started. . Further, the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R are switched from door opening pattern lighting to demo pattern lighting in accordance with the display of the demonstration animation on the effect image display device 157. Note that the title panel lamp 164 is turned off in FIG. It can be considered that the setting-related notification is started by turning off the lamp 164, and if the medal is inserted before the predetermined time elapses, the setting-related notification by turning off the title panel lamp 164 is not started.

In the example shown in FIG. 47(a) described above, when the demo animation starts with the setting value set to setting b, the title panel lamp 164 goes out (FIG. 47(c)). However, the title panel lamp 164 may also be turned off under other conditions. For example, the title panel lamp may also be turned off when a non-recommended game state (so-called penalty bonus) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the normal game state is entered (for example, after the player releases the third stop button without following a specific push order navigation). In the non-recommended game state, no lotteries including AT lotteries are performed, and the number of medals of the player is maintained or slightly decreased, but since the non-recommended game state continues until the specified number of medals is paid out, it takes a considerable amount of time to return to a state where medals can be increased. When the non-recommended game state is entered, a suggestion display indicating that the game state is non-recommended may be displayed on the performance image display device 157, and this suggestion display may be continuously displayed during the non-recommended game state (from winning the penalty bonus to the end of the penalty bonus). In addition, in the non-recommended play state, the demo animation may not be displayed, and the title panel lamp 164 may remain off during play and non-play. Note that the game may enter the non-recommended play state regardless of the setting value (even if it is other than setting b), or the game may enter the non-recommended play state only when the setting value is set to setting b.

FIG. 47(b) is a table summarizing the state of the related components when the settlement operation is performed immediately after the third stop with the setting value set to setting b. In FIG. 47(b), the operation starts from the same state (ta) as (ta) shown in FIG. 47(a), and the settlement button 134 is operated at the timing (ne) one second after (ta). In other words, the settlement operation is performed before the predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed without inserting a coin after the third stop. When the settlement operation is performed, the display of the demo animation begins on the performance image display device 157. In addition, all of the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) begin to light up in the settlement pattern. Furthermore, the sound of game media being dispensed is output from the speakers (272, 277). In addition, in FIG. 207(
FIG. 48(F) shows a schematic diagram of the components in FIG. 47(F). In FIG. 48(F), the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 144R are shown with horizontal hatching to indicate that they are lit in a settlement pattern (the same applies below). Note that these lamps (144T, 144L, 144R) may be lit in the same pattern as the normal pattern shown with cross hatching in FIG. 46(F).

In FIG. 47(J), the payout of game media is completed. FIG. 48(J) schematically shows the components in FIG. 47(J). Even after the payout is completed, the demonstration animation continues to be displayed on the effect image display device 157, and the title panel lamp 164 is turned off. On the other hand, the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R are switched from lighting in the payment pattern to lighting in the demo pattern in accordance with the display of the demonstration animation on the effect image display device 157. Note that the output from the speakers (272, 277) is stopped.

To summarize the conditions for the title panel lamp 164 to turn off as explained above, if the setting key switch 281 is turned off while setting b is set (FIG. 45(c)), the setting b is set. If the demo animation is started in (Figure 47 (H), the result is the same in Figure 45 (C)), if the payout according to the payment operation is completed with setting b set ( Figure 47(F)) is an example.

Figure 49(a) is a table summarizing the state of the related components when checking the settings when the default setting value is set to setting 1. In this Figure 49(a), each stage is assigned a code from (ha) to (he), and time passes in alphabetical order. The upper part of Figure 50 also shows the state of the components at each stage from (ha) to (he) in Figure 49(a). (ha) in Figure 49(a) is the same as (te) shown in Figure 47(a), 30 seconds have passed since the front door 102 was opened, and the difference from (te) is that the title panel lamp 164 does not go out and continues to light in white because the setting value is not set to setting b. Note that the title panel lamp 164 does not light up in a demo pattern, but may do so, in which case the white light will be the demo pattern light. In Figure 50(ha), the title panel lamp 164 is shown lit in white by hatching downward to the left.

In FIG. 49(a), (H) indicates that the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281 and turned clockwise, turning the setting key switch 281 on. That is, when the power is on, the setting key switch 281 is turned on, and setting value confirmation begins. The setting value display 293 displays the current setting value, "1." Also, the performance image display device 157 displays a setting confirmation display to notify that the setting is being confirmed, and the speaker (272,
A voice ("Checking settings") notifying that the settings are being checked is also output from the display 277). The title panel lamp 164 continues to light in white, and the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L and right side lamp 144R also switch from the demo pattern lighting to white lighting. The setting value display 293 shown in Fig. 50(H) displays the current setting value of "1". Also, the title panel lamp 164, top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L and right side lamp 144R shown in Fig. 50(H) are all lit in white.

(F) in Fig. 49(a) is the same as (K) in Fig. 47(a), in which the setting key switch 281 is turned off. The difference from (K) is that the setting confirmation ends, not the setting change, and that the title panel lamp 164 does not go out and continues to light in white because the setting value is not set to setting b. In Fig. 50(F), the setting value display 293 is not displayed. Also, of the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), only the title panel lamp 164 continues to light in white, and the remaining lamps (144T, 144L, 144R) have switched to a demo pattern light indicated by grid-like hatching.

(F) in FIG. 49(a) is the same as (SA) shown in FIG. 47(A), with the front door 102 closed. It becomes a point that continues to be lit white.

Figure 49(b) is a table summarizing the state of the related components when checking the settings in power saving mode with setting 1 set. In this Figure 49(b), each stage is assigned a code from (ka) to (ke), and time passes in alphabetical order. The bottom part of Figure 50 is a diagram that shows the state of the components at each stage from (ka) to (ke) in Figure 49(b).

(K) in FIG. 49(b) is the same as (K) in FIG. 49(a), 30 seconds have passed since the front door 102 was opened, and it differs from (K) in the following ways. First, as explained with reference to FIG. 17(h), the demo animation displayed on the performance image display device 157 is displayed darker (dimmed) than in non-power saving mode. Also, the title panel lamp 164 is still lit in white, but its brightness is lower (dimmed). Meanwhile, the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R are turned off due to the power saving mode setting. FIG. 50(K) shows that the display screen of the performance image display device 157 is dark, and the title panel lamp 164 is also dark. Also shown is the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R being turned off.

At (ki) in FIG. 49(b), as in (hi) shown in FIG. 49(a), the setting key switch 281 is turned on while the power is turned on, and setting value confirmation is started. . Even if the power saving mode is set, the lights will not be dimmed or turned off while the settings are being checked, and will be the same as in non-power saving mode. The appearance of each component shown in FIG. 50(B) is the same as the appearance of each component shown in FIG.

At (hu) in Figure 49(b), like (hu) in Figure 49(a), the setting key switch 281 is in the OFF state and the setting check is complete. With the setting check complete, each component has returned to a state according to the power saving mode. That is, as also shown in Figure 50(hu), the display screen of the performance image display device 157 that has started displaying the demo animation goes dark, and the title panel lamp 164 also goes dark. Additionally, the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R are turned off.

In Figure 49(b), (K) is the same state as (F) in Figure 49(a), in which the front door 102 is closed. The performance image display device 157 and the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) have not been dimmed or turned off since the previous state (K) when the setting key switch 281 was turned off.

FIG. 51(a) is a table summarizing the states of related components when setting confirmation is performed with setting b set. In FIG. 51(a), time passes in the order of (T), (B), (C), and (S).

(TE) in FIG. 51(a) is the same state as (TE) shown in FIG. 47(a), 30 seconds have passed since the front door 102 was opened, and is exactly the same state as (TE). That is, the setting value display 293 is not displayed, and the demonstration animation is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Further, the title panel lamp 164 is off, and the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R are lit in a demo pattern.

In (B) of FIG. 51(a), the setting key switch 281 is turned on with the power turned on, and setting value confirmation is started. The only difference from (H) in FIG. 49A is the setting value displayed on the setting value display 293. That is, in (B) in FIG. 51(a), the current setting value "b" is displayed on the setting value display 293. The setting value display 293 shown in FIG. 52(B) displays "b" which is the current setting value. In addition, in the same way as in FIG. 50 (H), in FIG. 52 (B), a setting confirmation display is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and a voice saying "Settings confirmation is in progress" is output from the speakers (272, 277). has been done. Further, the title panel lamp 164 is lit in white, and the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R are also lit in white.

(C) in FIG. 51A is the same state as (C) shown in FIG. 45, in which the setting key switch 281 is turned off, and is exactly the same state as (C). That is, since the setting is set to b, the title panel lamp 164 is turned off and the setting-related notification is executed.

(Sa) in FIG. 51(a) is the same state as (sa) shown in FIG. 45, with the front door 102 closed, and is exactly the same as (sa). That is, the title panel lamp 164 continues to be turned off, and the setting-related notification continues to be executed.

FIG. 51(b) is a table summarizing the states of related components when setting confirmation is performed in the power saving mode with setting b set. In FIG. 51(b), each stage is labeled with a code from (ga) to (ge), and time elapses in alphabetical order. Further, the lower part of FIG. 52 is a diagram schematically showing the state of the constituent elements at each stage from (g) to (g) in FIG. 51(b).

(Ga) in FIG. 51(b) is the same as (TE) shown in FIG. 51(a), which is the state in which 30 seconds have passed since the front door 102 was opened, and the differences from (TE) are as follows. That's right. First, the demonstration animation displayed on the effect image display device 157 is displayed darker (reduced light) than in the non-power saving mode. Furthermore, the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R are turned off due to the power saving mode setting. FIG. 52(g) shows how the display screen of the effect image display device 157 has become dark. Note that the title panel lamp 164 is off, and setting-related notification is being executed. Furthermore, the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R are also turned off.

At (g) in FIG. 51(b), as in (b) shown in FIG. 51(a), the setting key switch 281 is turned on while the power is turned on, and setting value confirmation is started. , (B) is exactly the same state. That is, even if the power saving mode is set, the lights will not be dimmed or turned off during the setting confirmation, and will be the same as in the non-power saving mode. Note that the display of the setting value display 293 is different from (c) in FIG. 49(b). That is, "b" is displayed as in the setting value display 293 shown in FIG. 52(g).

At (g) in FIG. 51(b), the setting key switch 281 is turned off and the setting confirmation has been completed, as in (c) shown in FIG. 51(a). By completing the setting confirmation, each component has returned to the state according to the power saving mode. That is, as shown in FIG. 52(g), the display screen of the effect image display device 157 where the display of the demo animation has started is darkened, and the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R are turned off. are doing. Note that the state of the title panel lamp 164 is different from (x) in FIG. 49(b). That is, since the setting is set to b, the title panel lamp 164 is turned off and the setting-related notification is being executed, as shown in FIG. 52(g).

In Figure 51(b), (ge) is the same state as (sa) in Figure 51(a), in which the front door 102 is closed. The performance image display device 157 and the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) have not been dimmed or turned off since the previous state (gu) when the setting key switch 281 was turned off.

Next, we will explain a modified example of the slot machine 100 shown in Figure 33.

<About the size relationship of the payout rate>
First, we will show examples of the winning probability and state transition of winning role groups, as well as the size relationship between the total payout rate that takes into account all roles including replay, which is a replay role, and the actual payout rate that takes into account roles other than replay. A slot machine that can converge the payout rate to a suitable range by devising the following will be described. Specifically, in the slot machine in this modified example, the situations that can be controlled according to the progress of the game include the first situation (RT2, described later) in which the real payout rate is higher than the total payout rate, as described below. By creating a second situation (RT1 described later), which is the exact opposite of the first situation and in which the total payout rate is higher than the real payout rate, the payout rate can be converged to a suitable range. can be done. Note that the slot machine according to this modification also includes the technical matters described using FIGS. 33 to 52. Here, the payout rate is the rate calculated by dividing the total number of medals paid out when the symbols corresponding to the small role are stopped by the total number of medals set as the number of bets. . In addition, the total payout rate that takes all the winning combinations into account is, for example, when a player wins a replay prize in a game with a bet of 3 coins, 3 medals are paid out due to the replay win, and 3 medals are bet in the next game. This refers to the payout rate (first payout rate) that is calculated as follows. On the other hand, the real payout rate that takes into account winnings other than replay means that, for example, when a replay win is won in a game with 3 bets, 0 medals are paid out due to the replay win, and 0 medals are paid out in the next game. This refers to the payout rate (second payout rate) calculated assuming that a bet has been made.

Figure 53 (a) is a diagram for explaining the transition of the game state in the slot machine in this modified example. In the slot machine in this modified example, the game state transitions between a plurality of types of states including RT0, which is the base game state (for example, a state in which most of the game is consumed, or a state to which a transition is made due to a setting change), RT1, which is transitioned to by winning a predetermined transition role A in RT0, and RT2, which is transitioned to by winning a predetermined transition role B in RT0. In all of RT0 to RT2, one game can be started by setting three coins as the number of bets. After transitioning to RT1 or RT2, the game will transition back to RT0 by playing 100 games, which is set as the prescribed number of games. In RT0 in the slot machine in this modified example, in addition to transition roles A and B, a role lottery is held to determine whether or not a bonus role, a replay role, a small role, etc. will be won, and the payout rate is set to be less than 1. In addition, in the slot machine of this modification, if a bonus combination is won, regardless of whether it is RT0 to RT2, the game state transitions to a bonus state where the payout rate is 1 or more; however, for convenience of explanation, this is omitted from FIG. 53(a). Note that the slot machine of this modification may transition between game states including RT1 and RT2 without providing RT0.

FIG. 53(b) is a diagram for explaining some of the winning combinations to be drawn in RT1 and the winning probabilities. In RT1, bonus roles, replay roles including replay a and replay b, small roles including 3-card roles with a payout of 3 cards, and push order roles that can pay out 15 cards, etc. will be subject to the lottery. It is determined. The 3-card combination always wins a prize in a winning game regardless of the pressing order or operation timing (operation mode). On the other hand, with the push order combination, when the presses are operated in a predetermined order (corresponding to the advantageous operation mode described above), a prize is won and 15 pieces are paid out, but when the push order is not operated in the predetermined order, no prize is won (other It may be possible to win a winning hand (for example, a one-card hand).

The probability of winning the bonus role is set to 1/250 when the set value is "b", "1", or "2", and 1/200 when the set value is "4" to "6". Therefore, the probability of winning the bonus role in RT1 is set to two stages: when the set value is "b", "1", or "2", and when the set value is "4" to "6". In addition, the probability of winning the replay b among the replay roles is set to be low (for example, 5/200, etc.) regardless of the set value, while the probability of winning the push order role among the small roles is set to be high (for example, 60/200, etc.) regardless of the set value. Note that even if the push order role is won in RT1, the navigation performance that can identify the advantageous operation mode will not be executed (i.e., it will not be controlled by the AT). Therefore, even if the push order role is won, for example, there is a 1/6 probability of winning and a 5/6 probability of not winning.

In contrast, the winning probability of the replay a among the replay roles and the winning probability of the 3-coin role among the minor roles are set so that the combined winning probability is uniform (e.g., 50/200, etc.), but the ratio of the winning probability of the replay a and the 3-coin role differs for each setting value. Specifically, when the setting values are "b" and "6", the winning probability of the replay a is low (e.g., 15/200, etc.) while the winning probability of the 3-coin role is high (e.g., 35/200, etc.). When the setting values are "1" and "5", the winning probability of the replay a and the 3-coin role are both medium (e.g., 25/200, etc.). When the setting values are "2" and "4", the winning probability of the replay a is high (e.g., 35/200, etc.) while the winning probability of the 3-coin role is low (e.g., 15/200, etc.).

Figure 53 (c) is a diagram for explaining some of the roles that are the subject of the role lottery in RT2 and the high and low winning probabilities. In RT2, as in RT1, bonus roles, replay roles including replay a and replay b, 3-coin roles with 3 payouts, and minor roles including push order roles that can pay out 15 coins are set to be the subject of the role lottery. The winning probability of replay b in RT2 is set to be higher (for example, 45/200) than in RT1, but the winning probability of other roles is set to be the same as in RT1. In addition, when a push order role is won in RT2, unlike RT1, a navigation performance that allows the identification of an advantageous operation mode is executed. Therefore, when a push order role is won in RT2, 15 medals will be paid out by winning the push order role unless the operation mode is incorrect. Note that the roles that are the subject of the role lottery in RT2 are not limited to those that are set the same as those in RT1, and may be set differently.

In addition, in RT1 and RT2, the total winning probability for Replay a and the 3-card combination (which is also the total winning probability because the player always wins when winning) is the same regardless of the setting value. However, when comparing the total payout rate and the real payout rate, they differ depending on the set value. For example, when the setting values are "b" and "6", the probability of winning/winning Replay a is low, so the difference between the total payout rate and the real payout rate is relatively small, whereas the setting value is " When the set values are "1" and "5", the difference becomes relatively large, and when the set values are "2" and "4", the difference between the total payout rate and the real payout rate becomes maximum. In addition, for both setting values 1 to 3, which affect the winning probability of the bonus combination, and setting values 4 to 6, the setting values that make the difference between the total payout rate and the real payout rate relatively small, and the total payout rate and It is determined to include a set value where the difference from the real payout rate is relatively large, and a set value where the difference between the total payout rate and the real payout rate is maximum.

An example of such payout rates for RT1 and RT2 will be described with reference to FIG. 54. Note that the number of medals used to set the number of bets is three, and FIG. 54 illustrates a case where no bonus combination has been won in RT1 and RT2. The probability of winning a replay when either the setting value "b" or "6" is set during RT1 is 10/100 (= (15 + 5) / 200), so 100 games (G) During this period, you can expect to win an average of 10 times. Therefore, in FIG. 54(a), when the replay wins 10 times during 100 games (G) when either the setting value "b" or "6" is set during RT1, " Examples of the total number of IN coins, the actual number of IN coins, the total number of OUT coins, and the "actual number of OUT coins" are shown, and the actual payout rate and total payout rate based on these numbers are shown. In addition, the "total number of IN coins" and "actual number of IN coins" are both the number of medals used to set the number of bets, but the "total number of IN coins" is the number including the number of medals automatically set after replay winnings. On the other hand, the "actual number of IN coins" is different in that it is the number excluding the number of coins automatically set after a replay win (the number of coins with the bet number after a replay win as "0"). In addition, the "total number of OUT medals" and "real number of OUT medals" are both the number of medals paid out when winning a small role, but the "total number of OUT medals" is the number of medals paid out when winning a replay prize. The difference is that the "actual IN number" is the number of coins assumed to be paid out at the time of replay winning, whereas the "actual number of IN coins" is the number of coins assumed to be paid out at the time of replay winning.

As shown in FIG. 54(a), if Replay wins 10 times in RT1 over 100 games (G), the "total number of IN coins" will be "300" (=100 games (G) x 3 coins), and the "real The number of IN sheets is 270 (=300 sheets - 10 times x 3 sheets). Further, it is assumed that the "total number of OUT sheets" has become "150", and the "actual number of OUT sheets" in this case is "120" (=150-10 times x 3 sheets). Therefore, the real payout rate is 0.444 (≈120÷270), while the total payout rate is 0.500 (=150÷300).

Next, FIG. 54(b) will be explained. The probability of winning a replay when either the setting value "2" or "4" is set during RT1 is 20/100 (= (35 + 5) / 200), so 100 games (G) During this period, you can expect to win an average of 20 times. Therefore, in FIG. 54(b), when the replay wins 20 times during 100 games (G) when either the setting value "2" or "4" is set during RT1, " Examples of the total number of IN coins, the actual number of IN coins, the total number of OUT coins, and the "actual number of OUT coins" are shown, and the actual payout rate and total payout rate based on these numbers are shown. As shown in FIG. 54(b), if the replay wins 20 times in RT1 over 100 games (G), the "total number of IN coins" will be "300" (=100 games (G) x 3 coins), and the "real The number of IN sheets is 240 (=300 sheets - 20 times x 3 sheets). In addition, the "total number of OUT pieces" is assumed to be "150" as in Fig. 54(a) because the total probability of replay a and 3-card combination is uniform as shown in Fig. 53(b). In this case, the "actual number of OUT sheets" is "90" (=150-20 times x 3 sheets). Therefore, the real payout rate is 0.375 (=90÷240), while the total payout rate is 0.500 (=150÷300).

As described above, during RT1, the difference between the total payout rate and the real payout rate differs depending on the setting value, but as shown in FIG. It can be said that the total payout rate is higher than the real payout rate. Note that the period between 100 games (G) when either the setting value "1" or "5" is set during RT1 is not shown. However, the "total number of IN coins" and "total number of OUT coins" are the same as in FIG. 54(a) etc. because the number of played games and the total probability of replay a and 3-card combination are uniform. Furthermore, the number of replay winnings, the "actual number of IN coins" and the "actual number of OUT coins" may be probabilistically between the values shown in FIG. 54(a) and FIG. 54(b). From this, it can be seen that the total payout rate is higher than the real payout rate for 100 games (G) when either the setting value "1" or "5" is set during RT1. Become. In addition, during RT1, although the total payout rate is higher than the real payout rate regardless of the setting value, both the total payout rate and the real payout rate are less than 1, which is disadvantageous for the player. It can be a state.

On the other hand, during RT2, although the difference between the total payout rate and the real payout rate differs depending on the setting value, the real payout rate is higher than the total payout rate regardless of the setting value (no matter which setting value is used). The situation is higher. This will be explained below.

The probability of winning a replay when either the setting value "b" or "6" is set during RT2 is 30/100 (= (15 + 45) / 200), so 100 games (G) During this period, you can expect to win an average of 30 times. In FIG. 54(c), the "total number of IN coins" when replay wins 30 times during 100 games (G) when either the setting value "b" or "6" is set during RT2. ”, “Actual number of IN coins”, “Total number of OUT coins”, and “Actual number of OUT coins” are shown, and the actual payout rate and total payout rate based on these numbers are shown. As shown in Figure 54(c), if the replay wins 30 times in RT2 over 100 games (G), the "total number of IN coins" will be "300" (=100 games (G) x 3 coins), and the "real The number of IN sheets is 210 (=300 sheets - 30 times x 3 sheets). Further, it is assumed that the "total number of OUT sheets" is "600" as a result of the navigation performance, and in this case, the "actual number of OUT sheets" is "510" (=600-30 times x 3 sheets). Therefore, the real payout rate is 2.429 (≒510÷210), while the total payout rate is 2.000 (=600÷300).

Next, FIG. 54(d) will be explained. The probability of winning a replay when either the setting value "2" or "4" is set during RT2 is 40/100 (= (35 + 45) / 200), so 100 games (G) During this period, you can expect to win an average of 40 times. In FIG. 54(d), the "total number of IN coins" when replay wins 40 times during 100 games (G) when either the setting value "2" or "4" is set during RT2. ”, “Actual number of IN coins”, “Total number of OUT coins”, and “Actual number of OUT coins” are shown, and the actual payout rate and total payout rate based on these numbers are shown. As shown in Figure 54(d), if the replay wins 40 times in RT2 over 100 games (G), the "total number of IN coins" will be "300" (=100 games (G) x 3 coins), and the "real The number of IN sheets is 180 (=300 sheets - 40 times x 3 sheets). In addition, the "total number of OUT pieces" is assumed to be "600" as in Fig. 54(c) because the total probability of replay a and 3-card combination is uniform as shown in Fig. 53(c). In this case, the "actual number of OUT sheets" is "480" (=600-40 times x 3 sheets). Therefore, the real payout rate is 2.667 (≒480÷180), while the total payout rate is 2.000 (=600÷300).

As described above, during RT2, although the difference between the total payout rate and the real payout rate differs depending on the setting value as described above, as shown in FIG. It can be said that the real payout rate is higher than the total payout rate even if the set value is . Note that the period between 100 games (G) when either the setting value "1" or "5" is set during RT2 is not shown. However, the "total number of IN coins" and the "total number of OUT coins" are the same as in FIG. 54(c) etc. because the number of played games and the total probability of replay a and the 3-card combination are uniform. Furthermore, the number of replay winnings, the "actual number of IN coins" and the "actual number of OUT coins" may be probabilistically between the values shown in FIG. 54(c) and FIG. 54(d). From this, it can be seen that the real payout rate is higher than the total payout rate for 100 games (G) when either the setting value "1" or "5" is set during RT2. Become. In addition, during RT2, although the real payout rate is higher than the total payout rate regardless of the setting value, both the total payout rate and the real payout rate are 1 or more, which is advantageous for the player. It can be a state.

As mentioned above, in the slot machine of this modified example, as a situation that can be controlled, we focus on the magnitude relationship between the total payout rate that takes into account all winnings including replays and the real payout rate that takes into account winnings other than replays, As shown in FIGS. 53(a) and 54(e), by providing a situation where the total payout rate is higher than the real payout rate and a situation where the real payout rate is higher than the total payout rate, For example, compared to a gaming machine where only one of the payout rates can be high, the payout rate can be converged within an appropriate range.

Note that the trigger for transitioning from RT0 to RT1 is not limited to winning a predetermined role such as transition role A, but also when a specific losing symbol combination is stopped, playing the game a predetermined number of times, or winning a predetermined lottery. It may also be established due to the following. In addition, the trigger for transitioning from RT0 to RT2 is not limited to winning a predetermined role such as transition role B, but also the stopping of a specific losing symbol combination, playing the game a predetermined number of times, or winning in a predetermined lottery. It may also be established due to the following. In addition, the trigger for transition from RT1 to RT0 is not limited to the one achieved by playing the game a predetermined number of times, but also the winning of a predetermined combination, the suspension of a specific losing symbol combination, or winning in a predetermined lottery. It may also be established by doing the following. In addition, the trigger for transition from RT2 to RT0 is not limited to the one achieved by playing the game a predetermined number of times, but also the winning of a predetermined combination, the suspension of a specific losing symbol combination, or winning in a predetermined lottery. It may also be established by doing the following.

In addition, the transition role A may be determined so that it wins at the same time as other roles a, b, etc. in the role lottery, and the operation mode (e.g., the push order) for winning the transition role A is different depending on the type of other roles that the transition role A wins at the same time. In addition, the transition role B may be determined so that it wins at the same time as other roles a, b, etc. in the role lottery, and the operation mode (e.g., the push order) for winning the transition role B is different depending on the type of other roles that the transition role B wins at the same time. In addition, the transition role A, the transition role B, and the other roles a, b, etc. may be determined so that the operation mode for winning the transition role A and the operation mode for winning the transition role B are different depending on the type of other roles that the transition role A wins at the same time. In this case, when the transition role A or the transition role B is won in RT0, the interest of the game in RT0 can be increased by generating a push order guessing game.

For example, the transition winning combination A is the RT1 transition replay, which is won at the same time as other normal replays a and normal replay b in the winning lottery, and the RT1 transition replay is won according to the type of other normal replays in which the RT1 transition replay is simultaneously won. The manner of operation (for example, the order of pressing) for winning a prize may be determined differently. Specifically, the winning situations in RT0 include a winning situation a in which the RT1 transition replay is won at the same time as the normal replay a, and a winning situation b in which the RT1 transition replay is won at the same time as the normal replay b. At the time of a, when the left side is stopped first, the reel control is performed to make the RT1 transition replay win, whereas when the other side is stopped first, the reel control is performed to make the normal replay a win. , when the winning situation b occurs, the reel control that causes the RT1 transition replay to win is performed by first stopping other than the left, while the reel control that causes the normal replay b to win is performed by stopping the left first. You may also do so.

In addition, transition role B is an RT2 transition replay, which is won at the same time as other normal replays a and normal replay b in the lottery, and the RT2 transition replay is determined according to the type of other normal replays in which the RT2 transition replay is simultaneously won. The manner of operation (for example, the order of pressing) for winning a prize may be determined differently. Specifically, as winning situations in RT0, there are a winning situation c in which the RT2 transition replay wins at the same time as the normal replay a, and a winning situation d in which the RT2 transition replay wins at the same time as the normal replay b. At the time of c, when the left side is stopped first, the reel control is performed to win the RT2 transition replay, whereas when the other side is stopped first, the reel control is performed to win the normal replay a. , when winning situation d, the reel control that causes the RT2 transfer replay to win is performed by first stopping other than the left, while the reel control that causes the normal replay b to win is performed by stopping the left first. You may also do so.

In RT0 in this case, when one of the winning situations a to d occurs, it is announced that it is a press order guessing game. Messages such as ``This is your chance! Let them answer correctly on their own!'' are displayed when winning situations c and d are displayed, etc.) to provide fun that makes players think about the order in which they should press the stop button. , it is possible to improve the interest of the game in RT0.

In addition, Figure 53(a) illustrates an example of the game state transition between RT0 and RT2, but this is not limited to this, as long as there are situations in which the total payout rate taking into account all roles including replays and the actual payout rate taking into account roles other than replays, and situations in which the total payout rate is higher than the actual payout rate and situations in which the actual payout rate is higher than the total payout rate, as shown in Figure 54(e), can occur.

In addition, in FIGS. 53(b) and 53(c), when comparing the total payout rate and the real payout rate, it can be seen that the difference between the total payout rate and the real payout rate differs depending on the setting value. The difference between the total payout rate and the real payout rate for any of the setting values ``b'', ``1'', ``2'', and setting values ``4'' to ``6'' that affect the winning probability of the bonus role. It has been explained that the set value includes a relatively small set value, a set value where the difference between the total payout rate and the real payout rate is relatively large, and a set value where the difference between the total payout rate and the real payout rate is the maximum. However, as shown in Figure 54(e), the winning probability is such that there are situations where the total payout rate is higher than the real payout rate and situations where the real payout rate is higher than the total payout rate. If it is a game where a lottery is held (for example, the winning probability of replay is not set at 0% or 100%), the game state transition shown in FIG. 53(a) or the game state transition shown in FIG. 53(b) This is not limited to the winning combinations and winning probabilities as shown in FIG. 53(c) and the like.

To summarize the characteristics of the slot machine according to the modified example explained above,
``A gaming machine that can variably display multiple types of symbols by setting a predetermined number of gaming values as the number of bets for one game, and that can award gaming values according to the symbols when the variable display stops,
Determine whether or not you have won any of a plurality of roles, including the awarding role that involves the provision of the gaming value and the replaying role that allows you to start the next game without using new gaming value. a prize lottery means for performing a prize lottery;
A stop control means that performs stop control to stop the symbols according to the result of the winning combination lottery;
a setting value setting means for setting one of a plurality of types of setting values having different degrees of advantage to the player;
A payout rate obtained by dividing the total number of awards, which is the total number of gaming values awarded when the symbol corresponding to the awarding combination is stopped, by the total number of bets, which is the total number of gaming values set as the number of bets, In a game played with a predetermined number set as the number of bets, when the symbol corresponding to the replay combination is stopped, the predetermined number of gaming values are given as a result of the game, and the number of bets in the next game is A first payout rate that counts the gaming value set as the predetermined number, and a predetermined number as the number of bets in a game when the symbol corresponding to the replay combination is stopped. The relationship with the second payout rate, which counts the game value given as 0 in the next game and the game value set as the number of bets in the next game as 0, is higher than the first payout rate. a first situation in which the rate is higher; and a second situation in which the first payout rate is higher than the second payout rate;
In the notification state in which an advantageous operation mode corresponding to the winning combination in the winning combination lottery is notified, the second payout rate is higher than the first payout rate regardless of which of the plurality of setting values is set. In the non-notification state where the winning combination is high and the advantageous operation mode corresponding to the winning combination in the winning combination lottery is not notified, the first payout rate is higher than the second payout rate regardless of which of the plurality of setting values is set. The payout rate will be higher,
The plurality of types of setting values include at least a first setting value having the most advantageous degree and a second setting value having the most disadvantageous degree, and the setting value is higher than when the second setting value is set. The rate of the first situation is higher when the first setting value is set, and the second setting value is set more often than when the first setting value is set. The game machine is characterized in that the rate at which the second situation occurs is higher when the game machine is occupied. ”
become.

Also, according to the description from FIG. 33 onwards,
"A setting change means (e.g., the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the setting change process shown in FIG. 42) that changes a previously set setting value to a new setting value selected from a plurality of types of setting values (e.g., settings 1, 2, 4-6, b) that have different degrees of advantage for the player;
A notification means (e.g., a title panel lamp 164, a performance image display device 157, etc.) capable of executing a setting-related notification regarding the setting value (e.g., a light-off notification to notify that the setting is set to setting b, and the notification effects shown in Figures 37(c) to 37(f));
A gaming machine equipped with
The notification means is capable of executing the setting-related notification (for example, a light-off notification to notify that the setting is set to setting b) during a first period (for example, a period from the end of the setting change to the insertion of a medal),
The first period refers to a period following the execution of a certain operation (e.g., an operation of turning off the setting key switch 281).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He explained:

With this gaming machine, after performing the certain operation, it may be possible to obtain information regarding the setting value through the setting-related notification. This information can be obtained by both gaming establishment staff and customers. For gaming establishment staff, it allows them to confirm setting changes before the establishment opens, and for customers, it provides important information that can lead to their own profits (same below).

The notification means may continue to execute the setting-related notification during the first period (the same applies hereinafter).

The first period may be a period from when the setting change termination operation is executed until the number of bets of 1 or more is set (until medals are inserted) (the same applies hereinafter).

The setting-related notification may be a notification that ends when one or more bets are set (same below). The setting-related notification may also be a notification that suggests that a predetermined setting value has been set (selected) as the setting value (same below). The predetermined setting value may be the setting value that offers the lowest degree of advantage to the player among the multiple types of setting values (same below). In this case, a staff member at the gaming establishment will notice the low degree of advantage before opening due to the setting-related notification and can change the setting value to one with a higher degree of advantage, and a customer can avoid gaming machines where the setting-related notification is being issued.

The setting-related notification can be read as a setting-related performance, and the notification means can be read as a performance means (the same applies below).

Also, according to the above description,
``A setting change that changes the previously set setting value to a new setting value selected from multiple types of setting values [for example, settings 1, 2, 4 to 6, b] that have different degrees of advantage for the player. A setting change unit that performs the process [for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the setting change process shown in FIG. 42],
Notification means [for example, title panel lamp 164, effect image display device 157, etc.],
A game machine comprising:
The notification means provides the setting-related notification [for example, lights-out notification notifying that setting b is set] during a first period [for example, a period from the end of the setting change until the medal is inserted]. is executable, and
The notification means is capable of providing notification regarding a certain setting value [for example, setting b] among the plurality of types of setting values as the setting-related notification;
The first period is a certain period after a certain operation (for example, turning off the setting key switch 281) is performed,
The notification means does not perform the setting-related notification if a setting value [for example, setting 1, 2, 4 to 6] different from the one setting value is set.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, after the certain operation is executed, it may be possible to obtain information regarding the setting value through the setting-related notification. Further, it becomes easier to specify that the certain setting value is set by the setting-related notification.

The notification means may not execute the setting-related notification if a setting value different from the certain setting value [e.g., setting 1, 2, 4 to 6] is set during the first period.

Also, according to the above description,
``A setting change that changes the previously set setting value to a new setting value selected from multiple types of setting values [for example, settings 1, 2, 4 to 6, b] that have different degrees of advantage for the player. A setting change unit that performs the process [for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the setting change process shown in FIG. 42],
Notification means [for example, title panel lamp 164, effect image display device 157, etc.],
A game machine comprising:
The notification means provides the setting-related notification [for example, lights-out notification notifying that setting b is set] during a first period [for example, a period from the end of the setting change until the medal is inserted]. is executable,
The notification means is capable of providing notification regarding a certain setting value [for example, setting b] among the plurality of types of setting values as the setting-related notification;
The first period is a certain period after a certain operation (for example, turning off the setting key switch 281) is performed,
The notification means may be set to a certain setting value rather than a setting value different from the certain setting value [for example, settings 1, 2, 4 to 6]. is one in which the setting-related notification is executed more frequently [for example, performance G or performance H shown in FIG. 37(b)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, after the certain operation is executed, it may be possible to obtain information regarding the setting value through the setting-related notification. Further, it becomes easier to specify that the certain setting value is set by the setting-related notification.

The setting-related notification is a notification that is not executed when a setting value different from the one setting value is set, and is executed only when the one setting value is set. However, it may be executed when a setting value different from the one setting value is set, including a false notification. However, the execution frequency is as described above.

The notification means may be configured to execute the setting-related notification more frequently when a certain setting value is set during the first period than when a setting value different from the certain setting value is set, or may be configured to execute the setting-related notification more frequently when the certain setting value is set during a period different from the first period (for example, a period after the start of a game (at the end of a chance zone, at the end of a battle presentation, at the end of a BB, at the end of an AT, etc.) than when a setting value different from the certain setting value is set).

Also, according to the above description,
``A setting change that changes the previously set setting value to a new setting value selected from multiple types of setting values [for example, settings 1, 2, 4 to 6, b] that have different degrees of advantage for the player. A setting change unit that performs the process [for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the setting change process shown in FIG. 42],
Notification means [for example, title panel lamp 164, effect image display device 157, etc.],
a setting value display means [for example, a setting value display 293] capable of displaying the plurality of types of setting values one by one in a predetermined display order [for example, the display order shown in FIG. 37(a)];
A game machine comprising:
The notification means provides the setting-related notification [for example, lights-out notification notifying that setting b is set] during a first period [for example, a period from the end of the setting change until the medal is inserted]. is executable,
The first period is a certain period after a certain operation (for example, turning off the setting key switch 281) is performed,
The setting value display means is capable of displaying a first setting value that is one of the plurality of types of setting values,
The setting value display means is capable of displaying a second setting value that is one of the plurality of types of setting values,
The second set value is a set value that gives the player a lower degree of advantage than the first set value [e.g., setting 1] [e.g., setting b],
The predetermined display order is an order in which the first setting value [for example, setting 1] is displayed and then the second setting value [for example, setting b] is displayed.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, after the certain operation is executed, it may be possible to obtain information regarding the setting value through the setting-related notification. Furthermore, since a second setting value with a lower degree of advantage for the player is prepared after the first setting value, a cheater who illegally changes the setting value may be able to change the setting value without knowing it. There are cases where the setting value is changed to the second setting value, resulting in a disadvantageous game being played.

The second setting value may be the one setting value, and the notification means may be configured to provide a setting value related to one of the plurality of types of setting values as the setting-related notification. It may be one that can execute notification (the same applies hereinafter).

The setting value display means may display the currently set setting value (hereinafter the same).

The device may include a setting value display means for displaying the currently set setting value, and a setting value change operation means for changing the setting value, the setting value change operation means changing the multiple types of setting values in a predetermined order, and the second setting value may be a setting value that is changed after being changed to the first setting value.

Also, according to the above description,
``A setting change that changes the previously set setting value to a new setting value selected from multiple types of setting values [for example, settings 1, 2, 4 to 6, b] that have different degrees of advantage for the player. A setting change unit that performs the process [for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the setting change process shown in FIG. 42],
Notification means [for example, title panel lamp 164, effect image display device 157, etc.],
a setting value display means [for example, setting value display 293] capable of displaying the setting value;
A game machine comprising:
The notification means provides the setting-related notification [for example, lights-out notification notifying that setting b is set] during a first period [for example, a period from the end of the setting change until the medal is inserted]. is executable,
The first period is a certain period after a certain operation (for example, turning off the setting key switch 281) is performed,
The setting value display means is capable of displaying a first setting value that is one of the plurality of types of setting values,
The setting value display means is capable of displaying a second setting value that is one of the plurality of types of setting values,
The second setting value is a setting value (for example, setting b) that gives the player a lower degree of advantage than the first setting value [for example, setting 1],
The setting value display means is configured to display a default setting value that is displayed first [for example, a setting value that is displayed for the first time immediately after shipment from the factory, a RAM that includes a storage area (RAM of the main control unit) that stores the setting value, and Display the first setting value [for example, setting 1] as the setting value displayed on the screen or the setting value that will be displayed first when the backup power supply that continues to store the storage area that stores the setting value is lost. is a means,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, after the certain operation is executed, it may be possible to obtain information regarding the setting value through the setting-related notification. Further, even if the game clerk forgets to change the settings and leaves the default settings as they are, it is easy for the player to play the game.

The default setting value that is displayed first is the setting value that is displayed first when the game machine is initialized. That is, when the game machine is initialized, the first set value is set.

The device may include a setting value display means for displaying the currently set setting value, and a setting value change operation means for changing the setting value, the setting value change operation means changing the multiple types of setting values in a predetermined order, and the first setting value may be the setting value located at the top of the predetermined order.

Also,
"The first period refers to a period during which no game has been started even once since the power to the gaming machine was turned on [for example, from FIG. 45 (c)] [for example, no game has been started by operating the start lever 135].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

According to this game machine, the player will not suffer any disadvantages due to the setting-related notification being executed during a period when no game has been started.

The fact that the game has never been started may mean that the start lever has never been operated with the number of bets set to 1 or more.

Also,
"The certain operation is an operation related to the setting change [for example, an operation to end the setting change].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, when an operation related to the setting change is performed, it may be possible to obtain information regarding the setting value through the setting-related notification.

The certain operation may be an operation for terminating the setting change (the same applies hereinafter).

Also,
“The certain operation is an operation that is executed after the setting value is determined [for example, step S1115 in FIG. 42].
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.
According to this gaming machine, after the setting value is determined, information regarding the setting value may be obtained through the setting-related notification.

More specifically, the certain operation is an operation to end the setting change process (after turning on the start lever) after confirming the setting value in the setting change process (setting change key is turned on). (the same applies hereinafter).

Also,
"Equipped with an operating means [e.g., a setting key switch 281] that can be switched between an on state and an off state by operation,
The certain operation is an operation of switching the operating means from an ON state to an OFF state (e.g., FIG. 45 (J)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:
According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to obtain information regarding the setting value through the setting-related notification after the operating means is switched to the off state.

The certain operation may be an operation of switching an operating means (e.g., a setting change key) that is switched to an on state when starting the setting change to an off state, where the on state may be a start state and the off state may be an end state (same below). In other words, the operating means may be a means that switches between the start and end of the setting change when operated (same below).

Also,
``Equipped with a setting value display means [for example, a setting value display 293] capable of displaying the setting value,
The setting value display means does not display the setting value when the notification means executes the setting-related notification in the first period [for example, the setting value display 293 shown in FIG. ],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.
According to this game machine, the information regarding the setting value can be obtained by the notification means executing the setting-related notification, so that the setting value display means does not display redundantly and the control burden is reduced. Ru.

Also,
"Equipped with a door body [e.g., a front door 102],
The notification means may execute the setting-related notification in the first period with the door body open (for example, FIG. 45 (c)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:
With this gaming machine, it may be possible to obtain information regarding the setting value through the setting-related notification even when the door is open.

The operating means may be operable when the door is in an open state (same below).

Further, the set value display means (for example, a dedicated 7-segment display) may be invisible when the door body is closed (the same applies hereinafter). In other words, it may be a display means that is normally invisible to the player (the same applies hereinafter).

The notification means may be configured to issue a door-open notification when the door body is opened, and may be configured to initiate the setting-related notification when the door-open notification is completed (the same applies below).

Also,
"Equipped with a door body [e.g., a front door 102],
The notification means may execute the setting-related notification in the first period with the door body closed (for example, FIG. 45 (k)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:
With this gaming machine, it may be possible to obtain information regarding the setting value through the setting-related notification even when the door is closed.

Note that even if the door body is closed during execution of the door open notification, the notification means continues the door open notification until a predetermined period has elapsed from the start, and when the door open notification ends, the setting related notification is sent. (the same applies hereinafter).

The notification means may execute the setting-related notification even when the door body is open during the first period, and may execute the setting-related notification even when the door body is closed during the first period. may be executed (the same applies hereinafter).

The setting-related notification may be a notification that continues regardless of whether the door is open or closed, and may end when one or more bets are set (the same applies below).

Also,
“The notification means executes the setting-related notification only when a certain setting value [for example, setting b] is set as the setting value,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.
According to this gaming machine, by executing the setting-related notification, it is possible to notify that the certain setting value is set as the setting value.

The one setting value may be a setting value that gives the player the lowest degree of advantage among the plurality of types of setting values (the same applies hereinafter). In this case, the clerk at the gaming parlor can notice the low degree of advantage before opening the store by the setting-related notification, and can change the setting value to a higher degree of advantage. You can avoid gaming machines where games are being played.

Let's continue the explanation. As described above, the slot machine 100 of this embodiment is a gaming machine that is premised on playing a game with a bet of three coins. However, you can play the game even if you bet two coins. Therefore, it is designed so that it is more advantageous for the player to play a 3-card bet game when a 2-card bonus is internally won than to play a 2-card bet game when a 3-card bonus is internally won. The bonus internal winning state is made into a normal gaming state so that the player can play the game by betting on three coins as much as possible.

In this way, the normal gaming state of the slot machine 100 of this embodiment is when the two-coin bet bonus is in an internally won state, but if a player plays with two bets, wins a two-coin bet bonus, and finishes the two-coin bet bonus game, the gaming state changes to a non-internal win state for the two-coin bet bonus. Alternatively, the two-coin bet bonus also changes to a non-internal win state when the reset switch 291 is pressed. In addition, when the setting change process is started, a RAM clear process (step S1101 shown in FIG. 42) is performed, and the system is automatically initialized, changing to a non-internal win state for the two-coin bet bonus.

Note that when the setting change process is started, instead of being initialized automatically, it may be possible to select whether or not to initialize. For example, it may be possible to initialize setting values and gaming states using a setting change procedure. More specifically, like when changing settings, the setting key switch 281 is turned on with the power turned off. Next, when turning on the power switch 244, while pressing the setting change button 292, the setting value becomes setting 1 and the gaming state becomes a 2-bet bet bonus non-internal winning state. You can do it like this. Furthermore, it may also be set to a non-advantageous section state. Although the initialization process (step S1009 shown in FIG. 42) is executed even when the reset switch 291 is pressed, the initialization process may also be executed when the power is turned on while the setting change button 292 is pressed.

In the slot machine 100 of this embodiment, while the two-coin bet bonus game is being played, the performance image display device 157 displays a display (for example, a flower shape) indicating that the two-coin bet bonus game is being played. In addition, the remaining number of payout coins, which is the condition for ending the bonus, is also displayed (for example, "coins remaining during play"). Note that it is also possible to display only one of the two.

In addition, in the slot machine 100 of this embodiment, a setting that is extremely disadvantageous to the player, such as setting b, which is not normally set, is provided from the perspective of measures against fraudsters, and the state in which setting b is set can be avoided by performing a setting change process. However, even if the setting change process is performed to prevent the player from being significantly disadvantaged, if the two-coin bet bonus is not in an internally winning state, the player will ultimately remain at a disadvantage. Therefore, a notification is issued to suggest that the two-coin bet bonus is not in an internally winning state.

In the following explanation, the first gaming state refers to a 2-bet bet bonus non-internally winning state, and the second gaming state refers to a 2-bet betting bonus internally winning state. Note that the first gaming state includes a non-advantageous period state, a non-internal winning state not limited to betting on two coins, the above-mentioned non-recommended gaming state (penalty bonus state), a state in which no items or points have been acquired, or a setting b. The second gaming state can also be applied to a state that is more advantageous than those, for example, an advantageous section state, a bonus internal winning state, a normal gaming state, items and points. A state in which the setting is acquired or a state in which the setting is set to one of settings 1, 2, and 4 to 6 can be mentioned.

Further, the first voice is a warning alert of "Please check." The first display is a text display of "Please confirm", and this text display is also a warning alert.

On the other hand, the second voice is a voice notification of "Completed." The second display is a text display of "Completed".

Furthermore, when the game is started in the 2-bet bet bonus non-internal winning state, a display indicating that a transition to the 2-bet bet bonus internal winning state is being attempted is displayed on the effect image display device 157; A display suggesting that the player is in the non-internal winning state of the 2-piece bet bonus or a display prompting the player to shift to the 2-piece betting bonus internally winning state is displayed. Hereinafter, the notifications based on these displays will be collectively referred to as the "fourth notification." As this fourth notification, for example, "Returning game" is displayed, and the number of games played in a state where the 2-bet bet bonus has not been won internally is displayed. A player who knows about this fourth notification can understand that this slot machine 100 is a disadvantageous slot machine and can avoid it. Note that the fourth notification may be a display that is displayed only when a game is being played with two bets, or may be a display that is displayed regardless of the number of bets.

Figure 55 is a table summarizing the states of the related components when the first sound is output when the front door 102 is closed after the settings have been changed. In this Figure 55, each stage is numbered from (1) to (11), and time passes in ascending order of numbers.

FIG. 55 shows the power switch 244, front door 102, open sensor 294, setting key switch 281, setting value display 293, monitor LED provided on each of the main control board and external centralized terminal board 248 as component items. , effect image display device 157, title panel lamp 164, top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L and right side lamp 144R (top/side lamp), upper speaker 272, and bass speaker 277 (speaker). . Further, at the bottom, there is provided an item regarding the gaming status.

In Fig. 55 (1), the power switch 244 is off and the front door 102 is closed. The open sensor 294 is not functioning. No setting key is inserted in the setting key switch 281, so it remains off. The seven segments of the setting value display 293 remain off, and the setting value is not displayed. The various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) and monitor LED are also off, and nothing is being output from the speakers (272, 277).

In FIG. 55(2), the front door 102 is opened, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281 and rotated clockwise, so that the setting key switch 281 is turned on. That is, the setting key switch 281 is turned on before the power is turned on. Note that since the power has not yet been turned on, even if the front door 102 is opened, the open sensor 294 does not output a detection signal.

In FIG. 55 (3), the power switch 244 is turned on with the setting key switch 281 in the on state (power-on). As a result, the main control unit 300 starts processing to change the settings. The setting value display 293 displays "1" as the default setting value. If the user is allowed to select whether to initialize as described above, the setting value stored in the power-off processing of step S221 at the time of power-off is displayed if the user does not initialize. The performance image display device 157 displays a setting change display notifying that the setting is being changed, and the speakers (272, 277) also output a voice ("setting change in progress") notifying that the setting is being changed. In addition, since the power has been turned on, the open sensor 294 starts to output an open detection signal, and all the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) start to light up. Furthermore, since the setting key switch 281 is turned on, the monitor LED also starts to light up. When the setting key switch 281 is turned on, a setting key switch on signal is output from the external central terminal board 248 to the external device. Also, the game state is the first game state (two-coin bet bonus non-internal winning state) due to the RAM being cleared (step S1101 shown in FIG. 42). However, if it is possible to select whether or not to initialize, the game state at the time of power cut stored in the power cut processing of step S221 will be restored unless initialization is performed. Therefore, the game state may be the second game state (two-coin bet bonus internal winning state).

Once the setting change is started, the setting value is updated every time the setting change button 292 is pressed.

In FIG. 55(4), the start lever 135 is operated, the set value is determined (step S1115 shown in FIG. 42), and the number 0 indicating the set value is determined is displayed on the set value display 293. Even after the set value is determined, the setting key switch 281 remains on, so the monitor LED continues to light up. Note that although the speakers (272, 277) output a voice such as "Settings are being changed," a voice such as "Settings have been changed." may be output.

In FIG. 55(5), the setting key inserted into the setting key switch 281 is turned to the left to turn it off. As a result, the setting change process ends (step S1119 shown in FIG. 42), and the seven segments are turned off and not displayed on the setting value display 293. Further, the monitor LED is also turned off. The sound from the speakers (272, 277) switches to the sound "door is open" warning that the front door 102 is being opened. The audio output of "The door is open" that has been switched here corresponds to an example of the third notification. Note that instead of "the door is open", a voice output such as "setting change is complete" or "setting change is finished" may be used. Furthermore, the display of a demo animation is started on the effect image display device 157, and among the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R start lighting in a demo pattern. . The title panel lamp 164 lights up in white because the setting value is a setting value other than setting b. When the setting change process is completed, if the gaming state is the first gaming state, a first notification command is transmitted from the main control section 300 to the first sub-control section 400. The sub-control unit side (first sub-control unit 400 and second sub-control unit 500) executes notification control (presentation control) based on this first notification command. As a result, the effect image display device 157 displays a first display of characters such as "Please confirm" as a warning alert.

In FIG. 55 (6), the front door 102 is closed while the gaming state is in the first gaming state, and the open sensor 294 no longer outputs a detection signal (H level signal) (switches to an L level closed detection signal). ). The closing operation of the front door 102 in FIG. 55(6) corresponds to an example of a certain operation. When the detection signal from the open sensor 294 switches to a close detection signal at the L level, a door close command is transmitted from the main control section 300 to the first sub-control section 400. In the first sub-control unit 400, when the door close command is transmitted, based on the fact that the first notification command has been received first, the speaker (272, 277) outputs the warning notification " Please confirm.'' is output. Note that on the effect image display device 157, the demonstration animation continues to be displayed, and the first display also continues to be displayed.

In FIG. 55 (7), the front door 102 is opened, and all the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) start lighting the door open pattern. In addition, the demo animation continues to be displayed on the performance image display device 157, and the first display such as "Please check" continues to be displayed because the game state remains the first game state, but the voice from the speaker (272, 277) returns to the warning voice of "The door is open". In other words, the output of the first voice starts when the front door 102 is closed, and ends when it is opened. In many cases, the store clerk has already noticed that the game state remains the first game state due to the output of the first voice and the first display at the timing of FIG. 55 (6), and therefore the output of the first voice is ended to avoid redundant notification. It is also possible to end the output of the first voice when the front door 102 is opened a predetermined number of times or more. However, since it may be necessary to open the front door 102 during play due to hopper errors, clearing ball jams, etc., opening the front door 102 more than twice may be perceived as noisy by surrounding players.

In FIG. 55 (8), the front door 102 is closed again while the gaming state remains in the first gaming state, and the open sensor 294 no longer outputs the detection signal (H level signal) (the L level closed detection signal ). The speaker (272, 277) outputs a voice saying "The door is closed," and the repeated warning notification is not executed. However, on the effect image display device 157, the first display such as "Please confirm" is continuously displayed along with the display of the demo animation. Furthermore, among the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R start lighting the demo pattern again, and the title panel lamp 164 starts lighting white again. .

In FIG. 55 (9), medals are inserted by servicing medals or by operating the bet buttons 130 to 132. Here, two medals are inserted. Since a player usually bets three medals, two bets are often performed by a store clerk. Also, it is often a preparation operation before the store opens. The speaker (272, 277) outputs a medal insertion sound, and the effect image display device 157 switches from displaying the demo animation to displaying the background of the normal effect (normal background display). However, the first display, which is a notice to the player that the game is in the first gaming state, continues to be displayed. Also, among the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 144R start to light up in the lighting pattern for the normal effect (normal pattern).

In FIG. 55 (10), the start lever 135 is operated with two coins bet, and the game begins. That is, the reels 110 to 112 begin to spin. In the performance image display device 157, the first display continues to be displayed in the normal background display. Here, when the game begins, this first display may be switched to the fourth notification, such as "Returning, 1 game," as described above. Alternatively, from the stage in FIG. 55 (7), a fourth notification, such as "Returning, 0 games," may be displayed instead of or together with the first display, and when the game begins, "Returning, 1 game" may be displayed.

When the start lever 135 is operated in a two-bet bet state and the two-bet bet bonus is won internally, a notification indicating that the player has won internally is issued. For example, an exclamation mark is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Furthermore, a navigation effect is also performed to help you avoid winning the 2-bet bet bonus. In this navigation performance, a warning sound is output from the speakers (272, 277), and the performance image display device 157 displays information about the reel stop position where a bonus win can be avoided.

In FIG. 55 (11), up to the third stop operation is performed. Here, by operating the start lever 135 for the first time, a two-bet bet bonus internal winning state is obtained, and by a stop operation that avoids winning the bonus, the gaming state becomes the second gaming state. On the effect image display device 157, a second display of characters such as "Completed" is displayed on the normal background display as the gaming state has shifted to the second gaming state. In addition, a second voice saying "Completed" is also output from the speakers (272, 277).

Figure 56 is a table summarizing the states of the relevant components when the reels are spun before closing the front door 102 after changing the settings, and the first sound is output when the front door 102 is closed while the reels are spinning. In Figure 56, each stage is labeled (1)-(5), (21)-(23), and (11), and time progresses in the order of the labels.

In FIG. 56, the same items as in FIG. 55 are shown as component items, and the gaming status item is provided at the bottom (same up to FIG. 61).

Figures 56 (1) to (5) are the same as Figures 55 (1) to (5), so the explanations for Figures 55 (1) to (5) are used and detailed explanations are omitted here, but the setting change process starts and ends.

In FIG. 56 (21), after the setting change processing is completed, the front door 102 remains open and medals are inserted, such as cleaning the medals or operating the bet buttons 130 to 132. Inserting medals here is a bet of two coins. Since a player usually places a three-coin bet, a two-coin bet is often operated by a clerk at a gaming parlor. In addition, this is often a preparatory operation before the store opens. A medal insertion sound is output from the speakers (272, 277), and the effect image display device 157 switches from displaying the demo animation to the background display of the normal effect (normal background display), confirming that it is in the first gaming state. The first display, which is a warning notification, is continuously displayed. Further, all the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) start lighting in the door opening pattern.

In FIG. 56 (22), the start lever 135 is operated in a state where two coins are bet, and the game is started. That is, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. In the effect image display device 157, the first display continues to be displayed on the normal background display. Here, when the game is started, the first display may be switched to the fourth notification such as "1 game in progress" as described above. Alternatively, from the stage of FIG. 56 (21), instead of or together with the first display, a fourth notification such as "0 games returning" is displayed, and when the game starts, "1 game returning" is displayed. May be displayed. Note that since the front door 102 remains open, all the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) continue to light in the door open pattern.

In FIG. 56 (23), while the reels 110 to 112 are rotating, the front door 102 is closed while the game state is the first game state, and the detection signal (H level signal) is no longer output from the opening sensor 294 (switched to a L level closed detection signal). The closing operation of the front door 102 here also corresponds to an example of a certain operation. When the detection signal from the opening sensor 294 switches to a L level closed detection signal, a first sound such as "Please check" is output from the speakers (272, 277) as a warning notice. In the example in FIG. 56, the first sound is output while the reels are rotating. The store clerk performing maintenance to check whether the reels 110 to 112 are rotating can be warned by sound that the game state is the first game state. Among the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 144R start to light up in a normal pattern, and the title panel lamp 164 starts to light up in white. In addition, in the performance image display device 157, the normal background display continues, and the first display also continues to be displayed.

In FIG. 56 (11), the third stop operation is performed. This FIG. 56 (11) is the same as FIG. 55 (11), in which the two-coin bet bonus internal win state is obtained, and the gaming state becomes the second gaming state. On the performance image display device 157, a second display in the form of text such as "Completed" is displayed on the normal background display, as the gaming state has transitioned to the second gaming state. Also, a second audio message saying "Completed" is output from the speakers (272, 277).

FIG. 57 shows the relationship in the case where the reel is rotated before closing the front door 102 after the setting is changed, a power outage is restored while the reel is rotating, and the front door 102 is closed while the reel is rotating after the power is restored. This is a table summarizing the status of the constituent elements. In FIG. 57, each stage is labeled with the symbols (1) to (5), (21), (22), and (25) to (27), and time elapses in the order of the symbols. .

Figures 57 (1) to (5) are the same as Figures 55 (1) to (5), so the explanations for Figures 55 (1) to (5) will be used and detailed explanations will be omitted here. , the setting change process is started, and the setting change process ends.

Figures 57 (21) and (22) are the same as Figures 55 (21) and (22), so the explanation of Figures 55 (21) and (22) will be reused and will not be repeated here, but the game begins with a two-coin bet.

In FIG. 57 (25), the power is cut off while the game is being played with two bets (while the reels 110 to 112 are rotating), resulting in the same state as in FIG. 57 (1). However, necessary information is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 by the power cutoff process in step S221 shown in FIG.

In the next Figure 57 (26), power is restored and reels 110-112 return to the state they were in just before the power was cut, with the two-coin bet still in place. In other words, if there were any reels that had already stopped spinning just before the power was cut, those reels remain stopped, and any reels that were spinning just before the power was cut start spinning. The performance image display device 157 returns to a state where the first display is displayed on the normal background display. In addition, all of the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) return to lighting up the door open pattern. In addition, the game state returns to the first game state.

In FIG. 57 (27), the front door 102 is closed while the reels 110 to 112 are rotating, and the detection signal (H level signal) is no longer output from the opening sensor 294 (switched to L level closed detection signal). The closing operation of the front door 102 here corresponds to an example of a certain operation, and in the example in FIG. 57, a power outage occurs during the rotation of the reels before the closing operation of the front door 102 is performed. If a power outage occurs before the closing operation of the front door 102 is performed, the first voice such as "Please check" is not output from the speaker (272, 277). This is to allow the store staff to concentrate on the task of checking the reel rotation after the power is restored. In addition, since the first display is continuously displayed on the performance image display device 157, the store staff may notice that the first game state is in progress due to this first display.

FIG. 58 is a table summarizing the states of related components when the front door 102 is closed while the inserted medals are settled and the front door 102 is paid out before the front door 102 is closed after the settings are changed. In FIG. 58, each stage is labeled with symbols (1) to (5), (21), (31), and (32), and time elapses in the order in which the symbols are written.

Figures 58 (1) to (5) are the same as Figures 55 (1) to (5), so the explanation for Figures 55 (1) to (5) is reused and detailed explanations are omitted here, but the setting change process starts and ends.

Since FIG. 58 (21) is the same as FIG. 55 (21), the explanation of FIG. 55 (21) will be used and detailed explanation will be omitted here, but medals are inserted.

In FIG. 58 (31), the settlement button 134 is pressed when two medals have been bet, and the hopper unit 180 starts to pay out the two medals and the credit medals. On the performance image display device 157, the first display continues to be displayed on the normal background display even after payout has started. Meanwhile, all of the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) start to light up in the settlement pattern. Also, a "payout sound" is output from the speakers (272, 277).

In the next FIG. 58 (32), the front door 102 is closed while the game state is the first game state, and the open sensor 294 no longer outputs a detection signal (H level signal) (switches to a L level close detection signal). The closing operation of the front door 102 here also corresponds to an example of a certain operation, and in the example in FIG. 58, the front door 102 is closed during the payout process. Even during the payout process, if the front door 102 is closed while the game state is the first game state, a first sound such as "Please check" is output from the speaker (272, 277) instead of the payout sound. In the performance image display device 157, the first display continues to be displayed on the normal background display. The first sound may be output together with the payout sound.

Figure 59 is a table summarizing the state of the related components when a power outage occurs while inserting medals and paying them out before closing the front door 102 after changing the settings, and the front door 102 is closed while paying them out after the power is restored. In Figure 59, each stage is numbered (1) to (5), (21), (31), and (35) to (37), and time passes in the order of the numbers.

Figures 59 (1) to (5) are the same as Figures 55 (1) to (5), so the explanations for Figures 55 (1) to (5) will be used and detailed explanations will be omitted here. , the setting change process is started, and the setting change process ends.

Since FIG. 59 (21) is the same as FIG. 55 (21), the explanation of FIG. 55 (21) will be used and detailed explanation will be omitted here, but medals are inserted.

Since FIG. 59 (31) is the same as FIG. 58 (31), the explanation of FIG. 58 (31) will be used and the detailed explanation will be omitted here. is started.

In FIG. 59 (35), the power is cut off during payout, resulting in the same state as in FIG. 59 (1). However, necessary information is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 by the power cutoff process in step S221 shown in FIG.

In the next Fig. 59 (36), power is restored and the payout of the remaining medals that have not been paid out is started. The performance image display device 157 returns to the state where the first display is displayed on the normal background display. In addition, all the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) return to the settlement pattern lighting, and the output of the payout sound is resumed from the speakers (272, 277). In addition, the game state returns to the first game state.

In FIG. 59 (37), the front door 102 is closed while the game state is the first game state during payout, and the detection signal (H level signal) is no longer output from the opening sensor 294 (switched to L level close detection signal). The closing operation of the front door 102 here corresponds to an example of a certain operation, and in the example in FIG. 59, a power outage occurs during payout before the front door 102 is closed. If a power outage occurs before the front door 102 is closed, the speaker (272, 277) does not output the first sound such as "Please check," and the payout sound continues to be output. The first sound is not output so that the store staff can concentrate on checking the payout after the power is restored. In addition, since the first display continues to be displayed on the performance image display device 157, the staff may notice that the game state is the first game state by this first display. It is also possible that some or all of the payout sounds may not be output during the period in which the remaining medals are paid out after the return.

Figure 60 is a table summarizing the states of the relevant components when the front door 102 is closed while checking the settings after changing the settings. In this figure 60, each stage is labeled (1) through (5), (41), and (42), and time progresses in the order of the numbers.

Figures 60(1) to 60(5) are the same as Figures 55(1) to 55(5), so the explanations for Figures 55(1) to 55(5) are used and detailed explanations are omitted here, but the setting change process starts and ends.

In Fig. 60 (41), the setting key switch 281, which was turned off in Fig. 60 (5), is returned to the on state. The state shown in Fig. 60 (41) is a state in which the front door 102 is open and the power is on. In this state, by turning the setting key switch 281 from the off state to the on state, the setting confirmation process is started and the current setting value "1" is displayed on the setting value display 293. In addition, the monitor LEDs provided on the main control board and the external centralized terminal board 248 each start to light up. The performance image display device 157 displays a setting confirmation display to notify that the setting is being confirmed, and the first display also continues to be displayed. In addition, the speaker (272,
A voice ("Checking settings") notifying that the settings are being checked is also output from terminal 277. The title panel lamp 164 continues to light in white, and the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L and the right side lamp 144R also change from the demo pattern lighting to white lighting.

In FIG. 60 (42), the front door 102 is closed in the first gaming state during setting confirmation, and the open sensor 294 no longer outputs the detection signal (H level signal) (the L level closed detection signal ). The closing operation of the front door 102 in FIG. 60 (42) also corresponds to an example of a certain operation, and in the example in FIG. That means that. In this case, the speaker (272,
277), a first voice such as "Please confirm" is output instead of the voice such as "Settings are being confirmed." Note that on the effect image display device 157, the setting confirmation display continues, and the first display also continues to be displayed. In the explanation in FIG. 60, the text display such as "Please confirm", which is a warning alert, is referred to as the first display, but the setting confirmation display is referred to as the first display, and the first voice is referred to as the first display. In the example of FIG. 60, the first notification (first voice) is executed while the first display (setting confirmation display) is being displayed.

Figure 61 is a table summarizing the states of the related components when the front door 102 is closed after the setting has been changed and the game has transitioned to the second game state. In Figure 61, each stage is labeled (1) through (5), (21), (22), (45), and (46), and time progresses in the order of the labels.

Since Figures 61 (1) to (5) are the same as Figures 55 (1) to (5), the explanations for Figures 55 (1) to (5) will be used and detailed explanations will be omitted here. , the setting change process is started, and the setting change process ends.

Figures 61 (21) and (22) are the same as Figures 55 (21) and (22), so the explanations for Figures 55 (21) and (22) will be used and omitted here, but the game begins with a two-coin bet.

In FIG. 61 (45), the third stop operation is performed with the front door 102 open, the two-bet bonus internal winning state is obtained, and the gaming state becomes the second gaming state. In the effect image display device 157, a second display of characters such as "Completed" is displayed on the normal background display because the gaming state has shifted to the second gaming state. Also, speakers (272,
277) also outputs a second voice saying "Completed".

In FIG. 61 (46), the front door 102 is closed, and the open sensor 294 no longer outputs a detection signal (H level signal) (switches to an L level closed detection signal). The closing operation of the front door 102 in FIG. 61 (46) corresponds to an example of a certain operation, and corresponds to a certain operation in the second gaming state. As described above, when the detection signal from the open sensor 294 switches to the L-level close detection signal, a door close command is transmitted from the main control section 300 to the first sub-control section 400. In the first sub-control unit 400, when the door close command is transmitted, based on the fact that the first notification command has been received first, the speaker (272, 277) outputs the warning notification " Please confirm.'' is output, but there is no problem even if it is output, and the advantage is that the control processing does not become complicated. In other words, the clerk is playing a game with two bets knowing the circumstances, and at the third stop stage (stage (45) in FIG. 61), the second display is displayed and the second sound is also output. Furthermore, since the above-mentioned "fourth notification" is not performed in the game that starts after this, the clerk does not have to worry about whether or not the game has shifted to the second game state.

In the above-described examples from FIG. 55 to FIG. 61, the setting change process is performed, and then the front door 102 is closed as a certain operation. As described above, when the setting change process is started, the RAM clear process (step S1101 shown in FIG. 42) is performed, and the game state becomes the first game state. Therefore, when the setting change process is performed regardless of whether the setting value is actually changed or not, the first sound is output when the front door 102 is closed. This first sound is output even if the game state has transitioned to the second game state as shown in the last example of FIG. 61. In other words, the first sound is output regardless of whether the game state is the first game state or not, as long as the setting change process is performed. On the other hand, when the front door 102 is closed without the setting change process being performed, the first sound is not output, but the first sound may be output when the front door 102 is closed after the reset switch 291 is pressed and held. Alternatively, the first sound may be output when the front door 102 is closed while the game state is the first, regardless of whether the setting is changed or not.

Figure 62 is a table summarizing the states of the related components when the setting key switch 281 is turned on with the front door 102 in a pseudo-closed state after one setting check, and the inserted medals are settled. In this Figure 62, each stage is numbered from (50) to (59), and time passes in ascending order of numbers.

FIG. 62 shows the power switch 244, front door 102, open sensor 294, setting key switch 281, setting value display 293, monitor LED provided on each of the main control board and external centralized terminal board 248 as component items. , effect image display device 157, title panel lamp 164, top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L and right side lamp 144R (top/side lamp), upper speaker 272, and bass speaker 277 (speaker). At the bottom, there is an item for a medal blocker 172 shown in FIG. 36. Note that the gaming state is always the second gaming state (same up to FIG. 66).

In FIG. 62 (50), the power switch 244 is on and the front door 102 is closed. An L-level closure detection signal is output from the open sensor 294. The setting key switch 281 is off and the setting value display 293 is not displayed. The monitor LEDs provided on the main control board and the external centralized terminal board 248 are turned off. The performance image display device 157 displays a demo animation, the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L and the right side lamp 144R are lit with a demo pattern, and the title panel lamp 164 is lit in white. Nothing is output from the speakers (272, 277). The medal blocker 172 is retracted from the medal passage 171, and medals passing through the medal passage 171 are stored in the bucket 181. Hereinafter, the state in which the medal blocker 172 is retracted from the medal passage 171 or the retraction is referred to as inoperative.

In FIG. 62 (51), the front door 102 is opened, and the open sensor 294 outputs an open detection signal (H level signal). All the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) start lighting the door open pattern, and the speaker (272, 277) outputs a warning voice saying "The door is open." Note that the demonstration animation continues to be displayed on the effect image display device 157, and the medal blocker 172 remains inactive.

In FIG. 62 (52), the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281 and rotated clockwise, so that the setting key switch 281 is turned on. That is, with the front door 102 open and the power turned on, the setting key switch 281 is turned on, and the setting confirmation process is started. The current setting value "1" is displayed on the setting value display 293, and the monitor LED starts lighting. The effect image display device 157 displays a setting confirmation display to notify that the settings are being confirmed. In addition, the speakers (272, 277) also start outputting a sound (``Settings are being checked'') informing that settings are being checked. The title panel lamp 164 switches to white lighting, and the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R also switch to white lighting. Further, when the setting confirmation process is started, the medal blocker 172 protrudes into the medal passage 171, and the medals passing through the medal passage 171 are discharged from the medal payout port 155. Hereinafter, the state in which the medal blocker 172 protrudes into the medal passage 171 or the protrusion thereof will be referred to as operation. While the setting confirmation process is being performed, the medals from the medal slot 141 cannot be maintained. In other words, medals cannot be inserted even if three medals, four or more medals, one or two medals are inserted. Further, operations on the bet buttons 130 to 132 are not accepted, or even if accepted, the operations become invalid. Further, the operation of the start lever 135 and the payment operation are not accepted, or are invalid even if accepted.

In FIG. 62 (53), the setting key switch 281 is returned to the OFF state, and the setting confirmation process ends. The setting value display 293 is hidden, and the monitor LED is also turned off. The voice from the speakers (272, 277) switches to "The door is open." The performance image display device 157 starts displaying a demo animation, and of the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R start lighting up in a demo pattern. The title panel lamp 164 lights up in white. The medal blocker 172 is deactivated.

In Fig. 62 (54), when the front door 102 is opened, the protruding opening/closing tab is pushed down by hand, so that the opening sensor 294 cannot detect the opening/closing tab, thereby pseudo-closing the front door 102. As a result, the front door 102 is open, but the opening sensor 294 outputs an L-level close detection signal. The speakers (272, 277) no longer output a voice message such as "The door is open."

In FIG. 62 (55), the setting key switch 281 is turned on again. However, the ON operation of the setting key switch 281 here is an ON operation in a state where the open sensor 294 outputs the close detection signal. In the previous explanations such as in FIG. 62 (51), the setting confirmation process was explained to be started when the setting key switch 281 is turned on with the front door 102 opened and the power turned on. Strictly speaking, the process starts when the setting key switch 281 is turned on while the open detection signal is being output from the open sensor 294. Therefore, in this FIG. 62 (55), since the open detection signal is not output, the setting confirmation process is not started, the setting value display 293 remains hidden, and the effect image display device 157 The demo animation continues to be displayed, and nothing is output from the speakers (272, 277). Further, the medal blocker 172 remains inactive. However, since the setting key switch 281 has been turned on, the monitor LED has started lighting up.

In FIG. 62 (56), medal insertion such as maintenance of medals or operation of bet buttons 130 to 132 is performed. Since the setting confirmation process is not in progress, medals can be inserted, and the medal insertion sound is output from the speakers (272, 277). In this way, even if the setting key switch 281 is in the ON state, it may be possible to insert medals. Further, even if the setting key switch 281 is in the ON state, there are cases where it is possible to perform a bet operation, a start operation, and a settlement operation. The effect image display device 157 switches from displaying the demo animation to normal background display. Further, the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R start to light up in a normal pattern.

In Fig. 62 (57), the hand that had been pushing down the door leaf is released, the door leaf projects out, and the open sensor 294 detects the door leaf and outputs an open detection signal. All of the lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) start to light up in the door open pattern, and the speakers (272, 277) output a warning voice saying "The door is open."
In the state of 1 (57), the setting key switch 281 is already in the ON state. Also, in the state of Fig. 62 (57), a bet number of 1 or more is set. When the setting key switch 281 is already in the ON state and a bet number of 1 or more is set, even if an open detection signal is output from the open sensor 294, the setting confirmation process is not started and the normal background display continues on the performance image display device 157. Also, the medal blocker 172 remains inactive.

In FIG. 62 (58), the settlement button 134 is pressed and payout is started. All of the lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) start to light up in the settlement pattern. In addition, a "payout sound" is output from the speakers (272, 277). In addition, the medal blocker 172 is activated during payout.

In Fig. 62 (59), the payout is completed. In the state of Fig. 62 (59), the setting key switch 281 is already in the on state, the payout is completed (the number of bets is not set), and the open detection signal is output from the open sensor 294. When this state is reached, the setting confirmation process is started, and the current setting value "1" is displayed on the setting value display 293. The performance image display device 157 displays a setting confirmation display. Also, a sound such as "Setting confirmation in progress" is output from the speakers (272, 277).
The title panel lamp 164 switches to white lighting, and the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L and the right side lamp 144R also switch to white lighting. Also, the medal blocker 172 remains activated.

The example in FIG. 62 described above corresponds to an example in which, even when the setting key switch 281 is turned on (FIG. 62 (55)), the setting confirmation process is not started (the effect image display device 157 does not display a setting confirmation display), and when a bet number of 1 or more is set, the settlement operation is performed (FIG. 62 (58)), and when the payout process is completed, the setting confirmation process is started (the effect image display device 157 displays a setting confirmation display) (FIG. 62 (59)).

FIG. 63 summarizes the states of the related components when the setting key switch 281 is turned on with the front door 102 in the pseudo-closed state after the settings have been confirmed once, and a game is played once. It is a table. In FIG. 63, each stage is labeled with symbols (50) to (57), (61), and (62), and time elapses in the order in which the symbols are written.

The same items as in FIG. 64 are shown as component items in FIG. 63 as well (same up to FIG. 66).

Figures 63 (50) to (57) are the same as Figures 62 (50) to (57), so the explanations of Figures 62 (50) to (57) are used and detailed explanations are omitted here, but after the setting is confirmed, the setting key switch 281 is turned on with the front door 102 in a pseudo-closed state, a medal is inserted, and then an open detection signal is output.

In FIG. 63 (61), the start lever 135 is operated and the game is started. That is, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. The top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R start lighting in a normal pattern. The title panel lamp 164 lights up in white. The medal blocker 172 is activated.

In FIG. 63 (62), the third stop operation is performed. In the state of FIG. 63 (62), the setting key switch 281 is already on, the game is over (the bet amount is not set), and the open detection signal is output from the open sensor 294. In this state, the setting confirmation process is started, and the setting value display 293 displays the current setting value "1". The effect image display device 157 displays a setting confirmation display. Also, the speaker (272, 277) outputs a sound such as "The setting is being confirmed". The title panel lamp 164 switches to white lighting, and the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 144R also switch to white lighting. Also, the medal blocker 172 remains in operation.

In the example shown in FIG. 63 described above, even if the setting key switch 281 is turned on ((55) in the figure), the setting confirmation process is not started (the effect image display device 157 displays a setting confirmation message). is not displayed), the game is started ((61) in the same figure), and when the game ends, the setting confirmation process is started (a setting confirmation display is displayed on the effect image display device 157) (( 62)) Corresponds to example.

In addition, to summarize the example in FIG. 62 and the example in FIG. 63, when the setting key switch 281 is already in the on state and the open detection signal is output from the open sensor 294, the number of bets is set. When the state is reached, a setting confirmation process is started, and a setting confirmation in progress display is displayed on the effect image display device 157.

FIG. 64 is a table summarizing the states of related components when the setting value is displayed on the setting value display 293 even when the setting key switch 281 is in the OFF state. In FIG. 64, each stage is labeled with symbols (1) to (3) and (71) to (78), and time elapses in the order in which the symbols are written.

Figures 64 (1) to (3) are the same as Figures 55 (1) to (3), so the explanation for Figures 55 (1) to (3) is reused and a detailed explanation is omitted here, but the setting change process has begun.

In FIG. 64 (71), the power switch 244 is turned off during the setting change process. The state of each component is the same as that shown in FIG. 64(1). When the power switch 244 is turned off, necessary information is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 by the power-off process in step S221 shown in FIG.

In FIG. 64 (72), the setting key switch 281 is also returned to the OFF state while the power switch 244 is turned off, and in the subsequent FIG. 64 (73), the power switch 244 is turned on. When the power switch 244 is turned on, the main control unit initial setting process shown in FIG. 41 is started, and first, the initial setting at startup (step S1001) returns the state to the state immediately before the power was cut off. In other words, even if the setting key switch 281 is returned to the off state, it is remembered that the setting key switch 281 was in the on state immediately before the power cut, and the setting value display 293 shows the setting immediately before the power cut. The value "1" is displayed. In addition, the information backed up at the time of power outage is returned on the sub-control unit side (400, 500), a setting confirmation display is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and the speaker (272, 277) says ``Setting confirmation in progress. ” is output. Note that all the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) start lighting. Further, the medal blocker 172 is inactive.

In addition, in a gaming machine that does not store a backup in the event of a power outage, when the main control unit 300's startup initial setting (step S1001) determines that the state immediately before the power outage was that the setting was being changed, the main control unit 300 sends a setting change command to the first sub-control unit 400, and the sub-control unit (400, 500) displays a setting confirmation display and outputs a voice such as "Setting is being confirmed" based on this setting change command.

As shown in the main control unit main processing of FIG. 39, the main control unit initial setting processing (setting change processing (step S1013)) of FIG. 41 is not executed unless the power is turned on. In this example, since the setting key switch 281 was returned to the OFF state before the power was turned on, the judgment of step S1005 is No, and the setting change processing (step S1013) cannot be executed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 64 (74), the power switch 244 is once turned OFF, and then the setting key switch 281 is turned ON (FIG. 64 (75)), and the power switch 244 is turned ON again (FIG. 64 (76)). By doing so, the setting change processing (step S1013) is started. In FIG. 64 (76), the setting value display 293 displays the setting value "1", and the monitor LED starts to light up. Also, the performance image display device 157 displays a setting change display, and the speaker (272, 277) announces "setting change in progress."
The following sound is output. All of the lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) start to light up. The medal blocker 172 is not in operation.

In FIG. 64 (77), the start lever 135 is operated, the set value is determined (step S1115 shown in FIG. 42), and the number 0 representing the determined value is displayed on the set value display 293. Even after the set value is determined, the setting key switch 281 remains on, so the monitor LED continues to light up. Note that although the speakers (272, 277) output a voice such as "Settings are being changed," a voice such as "Settings have been changed." may be output. Note that the medal blocker 172 remains inactive.

In FIG. 64 (78), the setting key switch 281 is turned off. As a result, the setting change process ends (step S1119 shown in FIG. 42), and the setting value display 293 becomes hidden. Further, the monitor LED is also turned off. The sound from the speakers (272, 277) switches to the sound "door is open" warning that the front door 102 is being opened. Note that instead of "The door is open," it may be possible to output a voice saying "Setting change has been completed" or "Setting change is finished." Furthermore, the display of a demo animation is started on the effect image display device 157, and among the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R start lighting in a demo pattern. . The title panel lamp 164 lights up in white because the setting value is a setting value other than setting b. Note that the medal blocker 172 remains inactive.

Figure 65 is a table summarizing the states of the related components when a setting check is performed once, a medal is inserted with the front door 102 in a pseudo-closed state, the setting key switch 281 is turned on, and the inserted medal is settled. In Figure 65, each stage is given the numbers (50)-(54), (81), (82), (57)-(59), and time passes in the order of the numbers.

Figures 65 (50) to (54) are the same as Figures 62 (50) to (54), so the explanations of Figures 62 (50) to (54) are reused and detailed explanations are omitted here, but after a setting check is performed once, the front door 102 is pseudo-closed.

In FIG. 65 (81), with the front door 102 in a pseudo-closed state, medals are inserted by servicing the medals or by operating the bet buttons 130-132. Since the setting confirmation process is not in progress, medals can be inserted and the medal insertion sound is output from the speakers (272, 277). The performance image display device 157 switches from displaying the demo animation to displaying the normal background. Additionally, the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L and the right side lamp 144R begin to light up in the normal pattern. Additionally, the medal blocker 172 remains inactive.

After the medals are inserted, the setting key switch 281 is turned on again in FIG. 65 (82). However, the ON operation of the setting key switch 281 here is an ON operation while the close detection signal is being output from the open sensor 294, the setting confirmation process is not started, and the setting value display 293 is not displayed. The display remains as it is, the normal background continues to be displayed on the effect image display device 157, and nothing is output from the speakers (272, 277). Also,
Medal blocker 172 remains inactive. However, since the setting key switch 281 has been turned on, the monitor LED has started lighting up.

Figure 65 (57) to (59) are the same as Figure 62 (57) to (59), so the explanation of Figure 62 (57) to (59) will be reused and detailed explanation will be omitted here, but the pseudo-closing of the front door 102 ends and an open detection signal is output from the open sensor 294. After that, the settlement operation is performed, the dispensing is completed, and the setting confirmation process begins.

The example in FIG. 65 described above corresponds to an example in which, even when the setting key switch 281 is turned on (FIG. 65 (82)), if a bet of 1 or more is set, the setting confirmation process is not started (the display of the performance image display device 157 does not display the setting confirmation display), but when a bet of 1 or more is set, the settlement operation is performed (FIG. 65 (58)) and the payout process is completed, the setting confirmation process is started (the display of the performance image display device 157 displays the setting confirmation display) (FIG. 65 (59)).

Figure 66 is a table summarizing the states of the related components when a setting check is performed once, a coin is inserted with the front door 102 in a pseudo-closed state, the setting key switch 281 is turned on, and play is performed. In Figure 66, each stage is labeled (50)-(54), (81), (82), (57), (61), and (62), and time passes in the order of the numbers.

Since Figures 66 (50) to (54) are the same as Figures 62 (50) to (54), the explanations for Figures 62 (50) to (54) will be used and detailed explanations will be omitted here. After the settings have been confirmed once, the front door 102 is pseudo-closed.

Figures 66 (81) and (82) are the same as Figures 65 (81) and (82), so the explanations of Figures 65 (81) and (82) are used and detailed explanations are omitted here, but after a medal is inserted, the setting key switch 281 is turned on. In other words, the setting key switch 281 is turned on when a bet number of 1 or more is set.

Figure 66 (57) is the same as Figure 62 (57), so the explanation for Figure 62 (57) will be reused and a detailed explanation will be omitted here, but an open detection signal will be output from the open sensor 294.

Since Figure 66 (61) and Figure 66 (62) are the same as Figure 63 (61) and Figure 63 (62), the explanations of Figure 63 (61) and Figure 63 (62) will be used and detailed explanations will be given here. Although omitted here, the start lever 135 is operated to start the game, and when the third stop operation is performed and the game ends, a setting confirmation process is started.

The example in FIG. 66 described above corresponds to an example in which, when the setting key switch 281 is turned on when a bet number of 1 or more has been set, it is possible to continue playing with the set bet number. In other words, it corresponds to an example in which operation of the start lever 135 is accepted, and operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is also accepted. Setting the bet number is given priority, and playing with that bet number is continued. After the game is completed, processing in response to the setting key switch 281 being turned on (processing to confirm the setting) is started.

The example in FIG. 66 also corresponds to an example in which, even if the setting key switch 281 is turned on (FIG. 66 (82)), if a bet number of 1 or more is set, the setting confirmation process is not started (the effect image display device 157 does not display a setting confirmation display), and play is started with the set bet number (FIG. 66 (61)). Once the third stop operation is performed, the setting confirmation process is started and the effect image display device 157 displays a setting confirmation display (FIG. 66 (62)).

Furthermore, to summarize the examples in FIG. 65 and FIG. 66, even if the setting key switch 281 is turned on when one or more bets are set, the setting confirmation process is not started and the setting confirmation display is not displayed on the performance image display device 157, and when a state other than the state when one or more bets are set (a state when one or more bets are not set, more specifically, a state when the payout process is completed or the game is finished) is reached, the setting confirmation process is started and the setting confirmation display is displayed on the performance image display device 157. Also, even if the setting key switch 281 is turned on when one or more bets are set, the setting value is not displayed on the setting value display device 293, and when a state other than the state when one or more bets are set (a state when one or more bets are not set, more specifically, a state when the payout process is completed or the game is finished) is reached, the setting value display device 293 displays the setting value.

Furthermore, whether the timing shown in FIG. 65 (57) or the timing shown in FIG. (82), corresponds to the timing after (82) in FIG. In FIG. 65 (57) and FIG. 66 (57), the open sensor 294 indicates that the front door 102 has opened, such as by releasing the hand that was pressing down on the opening/closing piece while the bet number of 1 or more is still set. Although an operation for detection is performed, the setting confirmation process is not started and a setting confirmation in progress display is not displayed on the effect image display device 157.

The matters described above using FIGS. 45 to 66 can also be applied to the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 67. FIG. 67 is a rear view of a pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied, seen from the back side.

The upper back surface of the pachinko machine 100P shown in Figure 67 is provided with a ball tank 150P having an opening at the top and for temporarily storing game balls, and a tank rail 154P is located below the ball tank 150P and for guiding balls that fall through a communication hole formed in the bottom of the ball tank 150P to a payout device 152P located on the right side of the back surface.

The dispensing device 152P is made of a cylindrical member, and is equipped with a dispensing motor, a sprocket, and a dispensing sensor (not shown) inside. The dispensing device 152P is detachable, and when attached to a specified position, it connects to the downstream end of the tank rail 154P.

The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by the payout motor, and temporarily retains game balls that have passed through the tank rail 154P and flowed down into the payout device 152P, and by driving the payout motor to rotate it a predetermined angle, the temporarily retained game balls are sent out one by one below the payout device 152P. In other words, the payout device 152P is a type of ball feeding device that applies a driving force to the game balls to transport them.

The payout sensor is a sensor that detects the passing of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and it sends either a high or low signal when the game ball is passing, and when the game ball is not passing, it sends either a high or low signal. The other signal, either high or low, is output to a payout control section (not shown). The game balls that have passed through this payout sensor are configured so that they pass through the ball rail and reach the upper tray arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 100P, and the pachinko machine 100P is configured so that the game ball passes through the ball rail and reaches the upper tray provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 100P. Based on this configuration, an amount of gaming value (game balls) corresponding to the awarding conditions is awarded (paid out) to the player.

On the left side of the figure of the payout device 152P, there is a main board case 158P that houses a main board 156P that constitutes the main control unit that performs control processing for the entire game, a first sub-board case 162P that houses a first sub-board 160P that constitutes a first sub-control unit that performs control processing for presentation based on processing information generated by the main control unit, a second sub-board case 166P that houses a second sub-board 164P that constitutes a second sub-control unit that performs control processing for presentation based on processing information generated by the first sub-control unit, and a payout control unit that performs control processing for the payout of game balls and has an error release switch 168P that releases errors when operated by a gaming store clerk. It is equipped with a payout board case 172P that houses board 170P, a launch board case 176P that houses launch board 174P that constitutes the launch control unit that performs control processing related to the launch of game balls, a power board case 184P that houses a power board 182P that constitutes the power control unit that supplies power to various electrical gaming devices and is equipped with a power switch 178P that turns the power on and off when operated by a gaming store clerk and a RAM clear switch 180P that outputs a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 when operated when the power is turned on, and a CR interface unit 186P that sends and receives signals between the payout control unit and the card unit.

In this embodiment, a setting change key 192P, a setting change button 194P, and a bonus ratio/setting display 196P are provided on the main board 156P. In this pachinko machine 100P, the main body 104 is opened, the setting change key 192P is turned on, and then the power switch 178P is turned on to start a setting change process that allows the player to set one of a number of settings with different odds of winning. In the setting change process, the current setting value is displayed on the bonus ratio/setting display 196P, and the store clerk can change the setting value by pressing the setting change button 194P while checking this. In addition, the setting confirmation process is started by opening the main body 104, turning on the power switch 178P, and then turning on the setting change key 192P, and the current setting value is displayed on the bonus ratio/setting display 196P. The setting change process may be started when the setting change key 192P is operated on the condition that the RAM clear switch 180P is pressed when the power is turned on, or the setting may be changed when the setting change key 192P is operated when the power is turned on, even if the RAM clear switch 180P is not pressed when the power is turned on.

The pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 67 has settings 1, 2, 4-6, and b available, which are the same as the settings of the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 33, and are displayed on the bonus ratio/setting display 196P in the same display order as that explained using FIG. 37(a). Setting b is the setting value that is most disadvantageous to the player, and the larger the number, the more advantageous the setting value is to the player.

The accessory ratio/setting display 196P is a 7-segment LED board mounted on the main board 156P and placed inside the main board case 158P, and is attached in a manner that is visible to the store clerk. Note that the accessory ratio/setting display 196P may be provided on the game board 200, for example, so that it can be visually recognized by the player.

In the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 67, the power switch 178P corresponds to the power switch 244, the main body that can be opened and closed relative to the outer frame corresponds to the front door 102, the main body opening sensor (not shown) that detects when the main body is opened corresponds to the opening sensor 294, the setting change key 192P corresponds to the setting key switch 281, and the role ratio/setting display 196P corresponds to the setting value display 293. In addition, the main board 156P and the external centralized terminal board (not shown) of the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 67 are each provided with a monitor LED that lights up when the setting change key 192P is turned on. In addition, a liquid crystal display device and a speaker used for various effects are also provided, and this liquid crystal display device corresponds to the effect image display device 157, and the speaker corresponds to the upper speaker 272 and the bass speaker 277. Furthermore, the game board is provided with a game board lamp, and the game table frame is provided with a game table frame lamp, and these lamps correspond to the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R).

According to the above description,
“The first gaming state [for example, the 2-bet bonus non-internal winning state or the state in which setting b is set] and the second gaming state [for example, the 2-bet betting bonus internal winning state or the state in which setting 1 is set] a gaming state control means [for example, the CPU 304 of the main control means 300] capable of executing control to shift to one of a plurality of gaming states including
A notification means [for example, a speaker (272, 277) or a title panel lamp 164] that can execute the first notification [for example, the first voice saying "Please confirm" or turning off the title panel lamp 164]; ,
A game machine comprising:
The notification means may execute the first notification when a certain operation [for example, an operation to close the front door 102 or an operation to turn off the setting key switch 281] is performed in the first gaming state. It is a certain means,
The first gaming state is a gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second gaming state.
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

The person who performed the certain operation can be alerted and made aware that the state of the gaming machine is the first gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player.

The first gaming state may be a non-internal winning state in which a bonus is not won by betting a first number of coins, and the second gaming state may be an internal winning state in which a bonus is won by betting the first number of coins (the same applies below). Alternatively, the first gaming state may be an internal winning state in which a bonus is won by betting a first number of coins, and the second gaming state may be an internal winning state in which a bonus is won by betting a second number of coins that is greater than the first number (the same applies below).

The second game state may be a normal game state or an initial setting game state, and the first game state may be a state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second game state [for example, a penalty bonus state, a state in which setting b is set], or the first game state may be, for example, a non-advantageous zone state, a state in which a bonus has not been won, a state in which no points or items have been acquired, etc. (the same applies below).

The device is provided with a door body, and the certain operation may be an operation that can be performed when the door body is in an open state, or it may be an operation to close the door body (the same applies below).

The first notification may be a notification that suggests that the player is in the first gaming state or a notification that makes the player aware that the player is in the first gaming state (for example, a notification such as "You are in the first gaming state"), or a notification that does not specify a target for the notification (for example, a notification such as "Please check") (the same applies below).

In addition, the notification means may include a first notification means [e.g., a speaker (272, 277)], a second notification means [e.g., a title panel lamp 164], and a third notification means [e.g., a performance image display device 157] (the same applies below).

Also, the game state when setting b is set may be the first game state, in which case RT may be set to the game mode, and the game mode may change during the game state (the same applies below).

Furthermore, in place of the game state control means, a game control means that controls a game based on the setting of the first setting value and a game based on the setting of the second setting value. "The game executed based on the setting of the first setting value (first game) may be executed based on the setting of the second setting value. The game may be more disadvantageous to the player than the game played (second game) (the same applies below). Furthermore, the first gaming state can be read as a state in which the first set value is set, and the second gaming state can be read as a state in which the second setting value is set (hereinafter (The same applies to

In addition, instead of the game state control means, "a game in an internal winning state in which a certain combination is won internally as a result of a lottery with a predetermined number of coins bet, and a game in a non-internal winning state that is not the internal winning state" The non-internal winning state may be a state more disadvantageous to the player than the internal winning state (the same applies below). Further, the first gaming state can be read as the non-internal winning state, and the second gaming state can be read as the internal winning state (the same applies below).

Furthermore, according to the above description,
"A game state control means (e.g., the CPU 304 of the main control means 300) capable of executing control to transition to one of a plurality of game states including a first game state (e.g., a two-coin bet bonus non-internal winning state) and a second game state (e.g., a two-coin bet bonus internal winning state);
A notification means (e.g., a speaker (272, 277)) capable of executing a first notification (e.g., a first voice such as "Please check");
A reel [e.g., reels 110-112],
A gaming machine equipped with
The notification means may execute the first notification when a certain operation (e.g., an operation of closing the front door 102) is performed in the first gaming state,
the first gaming state is a gaming state that is more disadvantageous to a player than the second gaming state;
The notification means may execute the first notification during rotation of the reel (for example, FIG. 56 (23)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

The person who performed the certain operation can be alerted to the fact that the state of the game machine is the first game state that is disadvantageous to the player. Further, even while the clerk at the game parlor is performing maintenance work to check whether the reels are rotating, the clerk can be alerted.

The reel may be capable of starting to rotate before the certain operation is performed, and the notification means may be a means for executing the first notification when the certain operation is performed while the reel is rotating.

Furthermore, according to the above description,
"A game state control means (e.g., the CPU 304 of the main control means 300) capable of executing control to transition to one of a plurality of game states including a first game state (e.g., a two-coin bet bonus non-internal winning state) and a second game state (e.g., a two-coin bet bonus internal winning state);
A notification means (e.g., a speaker (272, 277)) capable of executing a first notification (e.g., a first voice such as "Please check");
A reel [e.g., reels 110-112],
A gaming machine equipped with
The notification means may execute the first notification when a certain operation (e.g., an operation of closing the front door 102) is performed in the first gaming state,
the first gaming state is a gaming state that is more disadvantageous to a player than the second gaming state;
The reels are capable of starting to spin before the certain operation is performed (e.g., FIG. 56 (22) and FIG. 57 (22)).
The notification means may execute the first notification when the certain operation is performed while the reel is rotating (for example, FIG. 56 (23)).
The notification means is a means for not executing the first notification when a power interruption occurs during rotation of the reel and before the certain operation is performed [e.g., Fig. 57 (25) to (26)], even if the certain operation is performed during the remaining rotation of the reel [e.g., Fig. 57 (27)],
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

The person who performed the certain operation can be alerted to the fact that the state of the gaming machine is the first gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player. In addition, the attention of the gaming facility staff can be alerted even while the staff is performing maintenance work to check whether the reels are spinning. On the other hand, after the power outage is restored, the first notification can be omitted and the staff can focus on the confirmation work after the power is restored.

Also, according to the above description,
``Transition to one of a plurality of gaming states including a first gaming state [e.g., 2-bet bonus non-internally winning state] and a second gaming state [e.g., 2-bet bonus internally winning state] A gaming state control means [for example, the CPU 304 of the main control means 300] that can execute control to
a notification means [for example, a speaker (272, 277)] capable of executing a first notification [for example, a first voice of "Please confirm"];
Dispensing means [for example, hopper unit 180],
A game machine comprising:
The notification means is a means that may execute the first notification when a certain operation [for example, an operation to close the front door 102] is performed in the first gaming state,
The first gaming state is a gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second gaming state,
The notification means is a means that may execute the first notification during the period of payout processing in the payout means [for example, FIG. 58 (32)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

The person who performed the certain operation can be alerted to the fact that the state of the gaming machine is the first gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player. In addition, the attention of the gaming facility staff can be alerted even while the staff is performing maintenance work to ensure that the payout process is performed normally.

The payout means may be a means capable of starting the payout process before the certain operation is performed, and the notification means may be a means that may execute the first notification when the certain operation is performed during the payout process in the payout means.

The payout process may be a process that is started by a settlement operation after inserting a medal, or a process that is performed based on the result of a reel stop operation after a start operation has been performed after inserting a medal.

Also, according to the above description,
``Transition to one of a plurality of gaming states including a first gaming state [for example, 2-bet bonus non-internally winning state] and a second gaming state [for example, 2-bet bonus internally winning state] A game state control means [for example, the CPU 304 of the main control means 300] that can execute control to
a notification means [for example, a speaker (272, 277)] capable of executing a first notification [for example, a first voice of "Please confirm"];
Dispensing means [for example, hopper unit 180],
A game machine comprising:
The notification means is a means that may execute the first notification when a certain operation [for example, an operation to close the front door 102] is performed in the first gaming state,
The first gaming state is a gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second gaming state,
The payout means is a means that can start the payout process before the certain operation is performed [for example, FIG. 58 (31) or FIG. 59 (31)],
The notification means is a means that may execute the first notification during the period of the payout process [for example, FIG. 58 (32)],
When the power is restored during the payout processing period and before the certain operation is performed [for example, FIG. 59 (35) to FIG. 59 (36)], the notification means Means for not executing the first notification even if the certain operation is performed during the remaining period of the process [for example, FIG. 59 (37)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained. The person who performed the certain operation can be alerted to the fact that the state of the game machine is the first game state that is disadvantageous to the player. Further, even while the clerk at the game parlor is performing maintenance work to check whether the payout process is being performed normally, the clerk can be alerted. On the other hand, after the power is restored after a power outage, the user can concentrate on the confirmation work after the power is restored without executing the first notification.

Also, according to the above description,
``Transition to one of a plurality of gaming states including a first gaming state [e.g., 2-bet bonus non-internally winning state] and a second gaming state [e.g., 2-bet bonus internally winning state] A gaming state control means [for example, the CPU 304 of the main control means 300] that can execute control to
a notification means [for example, a speaker (272, 277)] capable of executing a first notification [for example, a first voice of "Please confirm"];
Display means [for example, effect image display device 157],
A game machine comprising:
The notification means is a means that may execute the first notification when a certain operation [for example, an operation to close the front door 102] is performed in the first gaming state,
The first gaming state is a gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second gaming state,
The notification means may execute the first notification while the display means is displaying the first display [for example, the character display of "Please confirm"] [for example, as shown in FIG. 55 ( 6)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

The person who performed the certain operation can be alerted to the fact that the state of the game machine is the first game state that is disadvantageous to the player. Further, even while the clerk at the game parlor is performing maintenance work to check whether the display on the display means is being performed normally, the clerk can be alerted.

The display means may be a means capable of starting to display the first display before the certain operation is performed, and the notification means may be a means that may execute the first notification when the certain operation is performed while the first display is being displayed.

Also,
“The gaming state control means changes from the first gaming state to the second gaming state when a certain condition [for example, a condition such as winning a bonus winnings with a predetermined number of coins bet and not winning the bonus winnings]” is satisfied. A means for executing control for transitioning to a gaming state,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

The first notification serves as a warning to perform the initial settings.

Also,
"The certain condition is a condition including the execution of one or more games [for example, one or more games must be executed to win a bonus role],
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

When a gaming establishment employee executes the game before the establishment opens, the player can play from the second gaming state.

The certain condition is a condition that includes playing one or more games with a predetermined number of coins bet, and winning a certain role. In other words, the certain condition may be a condition that may be met by playing a game with a predetermined number of coins bet and winning a certain role, or more specifically, a condition that may be met by playing a game with a predetermined number of coins bet, winning a certain role, but not winning the certain role. The same applies hereinafter as explained here.

Also,
"The notification means is a means that does not perform the first notification when the certain operation is performed a predetermined time [for example, the second time] [for example, FIG. 55 (8)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

When the certain operation is performed after the predetermined time (for example, the second time), the store clerk is often already aware of the operation, and redundant notifications can be avoided.

Also,
"The notification means is a means for executing a second notification [e.g., a second voice of "Completed]] when the first gaming state shifts to the second gaming state.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

The second notification allows the player to confirm that the unfavorable gaming state has been resolved.

The second notification may be a notification indicating that the game has moved to the second gaming state or a notification indicating that the game is in the second gaming state [for example, a notification such as "It is the second gaming state"]. Alternatively, it may be a warning notification that does not specify the target of the warning [for example, a notification such as "Completed" or "Returning"] (the same applies below).

Also,
"A setting change means (e.g., the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the setting change process shown in FIG. 42) that changes a previously set setting value to a new setting value selected from a plurality of types of setting values (e.g., settings 1, 2, 4-6, b) that have different degrees of advantage to the player,
The certain operation is an operation that may be performed after the setting change process (for example, a process including the operation of the power switch 244 or the setting key switch 281, which cannot be operated unless the front door 102 is opened) is completed,
The notification means may execute the first notification when the certain operation is performed in the first gaming state after the setting change process is started (for example, FIG. 55 (6)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Even though the setting change process has started and the adjustment of the player's degree of advantage has started, the player remains at a disadvantage in the first gaming state, so the notification means executes the first notification. , it is possible to make the person making the setting change aware that the first gaming state is in effect.

The setting change process may be a process that cannot be started unless the door is open (the same applies below).

Also,
"The notification means is a means capable of executing a third notification during the period from when the setting change process is started (e.g., FIG. 55 (3)) until the certain operation is performed (e.g., FIG. 55 (5)),"
The third notification is a notification that is executed when the setting change process is completed (for example, a voice notification such as "The door is open" or "The setting has been changed").
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

The notification means may be a means for executing the first notification when the certain operation is performed after executing the second notification (the same applies below).

The third notification may be a notification that the setting change process has been completed or a notification indicating that the setting change process has been completed [for example, a notification such as "setting change has been completed"]. Alternatively, the notification may be a notification regarding the state of the game machine (for example, a notification such as "the door is open") (the same applies below).

Furthermore, according to the above description,
"A setting confirmation means (e.g., the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) that performs a setting confirmation process to confirm one setting value set from among multiple types of setting values (e.g., settings 1, 2, 4-6, b) that have different degrees of advantage for the player;
An operating means (e.g., a setting key switch 281) that is operated when the setting is confirmed;
A gaming machine equipped with
the operation means is a means which may be operated in a first state,
The first state is a state in which one or more bets have been set (for example, the state of FIG. 66 (81) in which medals have been inserted by retrieving medals or operating the bet buttons 130 to 132),
When the operation means is operated in the first state [e.g., FIG. 66 (82)], it is possible to continue playing with the bet amount set in the first state [e.g., the bet amount set in FIG. 66 (81)] [e.g., FIG. 66 (61) to FIG. 66 (62)],
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Because the operation of the operating means does not interrupt the game, it is possible to lull a cheater who has operated the operating means fraudulently into a false sense of security, which may allow the cheater to be exposed.

Even if the game is continued when the operation means is operated in the first state, and after the game ends, the next game is not started unless the setting confirmation process is completed. good.

If the operation means is operated when no coins have been inserted, the subsequent betting operation may not be accepted. In other words, if the operation means is operated when no betting operation has been performed and the setting confirmation process is being performed, it may be possible that play cannot be started.

The case where the operation means is operated means the case where the setting confirmation process is not executed. The operation means includes a setting change means for performing a setting change process of changing a previously set setting value to a new setting value selected from a plurality of types of setting values having different degrees of advantage to the player, and the operating means It may also be a means that is operated when changing settings (the same applies hereinafter).

Furthermore, according to the above description,
"A setting confirmation means (e.g., the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) that performs a setting confirmation process to confirm one setting value set from among multiple types of setting values (e.g., settings 1, 2, 4-6, b) that have different degrees of advantage for the player;
An operating means (e.g., a setting key switch 281) that is operated when the setting is confirmed;
A display means (e.g., a performance image display device 157),
A gaming machine equipped with
the operation means is a means which may be operated in a first state,
The first state is a state in which one or more bets have been set (for example, the state of FIG. 66 (81) in which medals have been inserted by retrieving medals or operating the bet buttons 130 to 132),
When the operation means is operated in the first state [e.g., FIG. 66 (82)], the game can be continued with the bet amount set in the first state [e.g., the bet amount set in FIG. 66 (81)] [e.g., FIG. 66 (61) to FIG. 66 (62)],
The display means may display a first display (e.g., a display of "setting confirmation in progress" [e.g., FIG. 66 (52)] when the operation means is operated,
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Because the operation of the operating means does not interrupt the game, it is possible to lull a cheater who has operated the operating means fraudulently into a false start, which may enable the cheater to be exposed. In other words, after operating the operating means, a staff member at the gaming establishment can check the first display by the display means, which may enable the cheater to be discovered through the first display and the cheater to be exposed.

The first display may be a display that is displayed when the setting confirmation process is started, or may be a display that is displayed while the setting confirmation process is being executed. The setting confirmation process is a process that may be started when the operating means (e.g., the setting key switch 281, which is the first switch) is turned on while the power is on. The setting confirmation refers to confirmation of the currently set setting value, and during the setting confirmation process, the setting value display means displays the setting value, and the display means displays the first display (e.g., a display indicating that setting confirmation is in progress).

The display means includes a door body [for example, the front door 102] and a sensor that detects that the door body is opened [for example, the open sensor 294], and the display means detects that the sensor detects that the door body is opened. means for displaying the first display [for example, FIG. 62 (52)] when the operating means is operated in a state where the sensor is not detected; The first display may not be displayed when the first display is performed [for example, FIG. 62 (55)].

Furthermore, according to the above description,
"A setting confirmation means (e.g., the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) that performs a setting confirmation process to confirm one setting value set from among multiple types of setting values (e.g., settings 1, 2, 4-6, b) that have different degrees of advantage for the player;
An operation means (e.g., a setting key switch 281) that is operated when the setting is confirmed, and a display means (e.g., a performance image display device 157),
A gaming machine equipped with
the operation means is a means which may be operated in a first state,
The first state is a state in which one or more bets have been set (for example, the state of FIG. 66 (81) in which medals have been inserted by retrieving medals or operating the bet buttons 130 to 132),
When the operation means is operated in the first state [e.g., FIG. 66 (82)], the game can be continued with the bet amount set in the first state [e.g., the bet amount set in FIG. 66 (81)] [e.g., FIG. 66 (61) to FIG. 66 (62)],
The display means may display a first display (e.g., a display of "setting confirmation in progress" (e.g., FIG. 66 (52)) when the operation means is operated,
The display means may not display the first display even when the operation means is operated [e.g., FIG. 65 (82)], and may display the first display when a settlement operation is performed in the first state [e.g., FIG. 65 (58)] and the payout process is completed [e.g., FIG. 65 (59)].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Because the operation of the operating means does not interrupt the game, it is possible to lull a cheater who has operated the operating means illegally into a false start, and it may be possible to expose the cheater. In other words, after the operating means is operated, a staff member at the gaming establishment can check the first display by the display means, and the first display may enable the cheater to be discovered and the cheater to be exposed. Also, there may be cases where the first display is not displayed even when the operating means is operated, and even in this case, the first display may be displayed when the player leaves the table after completing the settlement process, and the cheater may be discovered and the cheater may be exposed.

Note that the display means includes a door body [for example, the front door 102] and a sensor [for example, an open sensor 294] that detects that the door body is opened, and the display means detects that the door body is opened. means (for example, FIG. 62 (52)) for displaying a first display [for example, setting confirmation display] when the operation means is operated while the sensor is being detected; The first display may not be displayed when the operating means is operated in the detection state [for example, FIG. 62 (55)].

Also,
``A medal slot [for example, medal slot 141],
the first passage,
a second passageway [e.g., storage passageway 173];
a medal blocker [for example, medal blocker 172] that distributes medals inserted from the medal slot into either the first passage or the second passage;
Equipped with
The first passage is a medal return passage [for example, return passage 266],
The medal blocker may distribute medals inserted from the medal slot into the first passage when the operating means is operated [for example, FIG. 62 (52)] ,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

After operating the operating means, the store staff can check the state of the medals passing through. In addition, since play cannot be started after operating the operating means, the store staff can calmly change the settings without accidentally starting play. The medal return passage is a passage that leads to the medal discharge port [e.g., medal payout port 155].

The second passage is a medal storage passage (for example, the storage passage 173), and the medals that have passed through the medal storage passage are stored in a bucket (storage tank) (for example, the bucket 181).

Also,
"Equipped with a door body [e.g., a front door 102],
The operating means is a means that can be operated when the door body is in an open state (for example, the setting key switch 281 shown in FIG. 35(a)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

The player may be prohibited from operating the operating means.

Also,
``The operation means is operated also in the second state [for example, the pseudo-closed state of the front door 102 shown in FIG. It is a means in which there are cases,
The medal blocker is for distributing medals inserted from the medal slot into the second passage when the operating means is operated in the second state [for example, as shown in FIG. 55)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Maintenance of the game machine in the second state is not hindered.

The second state includes a sensor [e.g., open sensor 294] that detects that the door is open, and the operating means is a means that becomes operable by opening the door. It may also be a state in which the sensor is not detecting.

Further, the medal blocker may be configured to distribute medals inserted from the medal slot into the second passage when the operating means is operated in the first state. For example, FIG. 62 (55)].

Also,
"A setting value display means [e.g., a setting value display 293] capable of displaying the setting value is provided,
The set value display means may not display the set value even if the operation means is operated (for example, FIG. 62 (55)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Maintenance of the gaming machine in the second state is not impeded.

The set value display means may be a means that does not display the set value in the second state even if the operation means is operated.

Also,
``A game machine characterized by comprising a light emitting means (e.g., a monitor LED provided on each of the main control board and the external centralized terminal board 248) capable of emitting light when the operation means is operated. ”
Also explained.

The light emitting means emits light to confirm that the operation of the operating means is being performed normally. In particular, when the setting value display means does not display the setting value even when the operating means is operated, it is useful for the light emitting means to emit light.

Also,
"A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a transmitting means [e.g., an external centralized terminal board 248] capable of transmitting a signal [e.g., a setting key switch on signal] to an external device [e.g., a hall computer] when the operating means is operated."
He also explained:

It can be confirmed from the outside that the operation means is being operated normally. Particularly in the case where the set value display means does not display the set value even if the operation means is operated, it is useful to be able to confirm the set value from the outside.

Also, according to the above description,
A gaming machine equipped with a display means [for example, effect image display device 157] capable of displaying a first display [for example, "setting confirmation display"],
The display means performs a first operation in a first state [for example, the state shown in FIG. 65 (81) or FIG. This means does not display the first display when [for example, an operation to turn on the setting key switch 281] is performed (hereinafter referred to as the "first case") [for example, the method shown in FIG. 65 ( 82) or Figure 66 (82)],
After the first case, if a state different from the first state occurs [for example, the payout is completed due to a payment operation or the game with the number of bets set in the first state ends], the display means The first display is displayed [for example, FIG. 65 (59) or FIG. 66 (62)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

During maintenance work by a staff member of an amusement facility, the first operation prevents the first display from being displayed, allowing the maintenance work that was being performed before the first operation to be continued with priority. Note that, when maintenance is to be performed to check whether the first display is displayed on the display means, the state can be changed to a state different from the first state, allowing the maintenance to be carried out in stages.

The first operation is the operation of the operating means operated when confirming the settings. Further, the first state is a state in which the number of bets of 1 or more is set, and a state different from the first state means that the game with the number of bets set in the first state is completed. or a state in which the payment operation is performed and the payout process is completed in the first state.

The first display may be a display that is displayed when the setting confirmation process is started, or may be a display that is displayed while the setting confirmation process is being executed. The setting confirmation process is a process that may be started when the operating means (for example, the setting key switch 281, which is the first switch) is turned on while the power is turned on. The setting confirmation means confirmation of the currently set setting values, and during the setting confirmation process, the setting value display means displays the setting values, and the display means displays the first display ( For example, the setting confirmation display) is displayed.

Furthermore, according to the above description,
"A gaming machine equipped with a display means (e.g., a performance image display device 157) capable of displaying a first display (e.g., a "setting confirmation display"),
The display means is a means for not displaying the first display when a first operation (e.g., an operation to turn on the setting key switch 281) is performed in a first state (e.g., the state of FIG. 66 (81) in which medals are inserted by taking care of medals or operating the bet buttons 130 to 132) (hereinafter referred to as the "first case") [e.g., FIG. 65 (82) or FIG. 66 (82)],
When a state different from the first state occurs after the first case (for example, the payout is completed by the settlement operation or the game ends with the bet amount set in the first state), the first display is displayed by the display means (for example, FIG. 65 (59) or FIG. 66 (62)).
The display means is a means for not displaying the first display even when a second operation [for example, an operation for causing the opening sensor 294 to detect the opening/closing piece] is performed while the first state is in the first case after the first case [for example, FIG. 65 (57) or FIG. 66 (57)].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

By not displaying the first display due to the first operation during maintenance work by a clerk at the game parlor, the maintenance work that was being performed before the first operation can be continued with priority. Further, even if a second operation is subsequently performed while remaining in the first state, the first display is not displayed, and the maintenance work can continue to be performed with priority. In addition, if it is desired to perform maintenance to check whether the first display is displayed on the display means, it is sufficient to shift the state to a state different from the first state, and the maintenance can be carried out in stages. I can do it.

The first operation refers to the operation of the operating means operated when confirming the settings. The first state refers to a state in which one or more bets have been set, and a state different from the first state refers to a state in which play with the bets set in the first state has ended, or a state in which a settlement operation has been performed in the first state and the payout process has been completed.

The first display may be a display that is displayed when the setting confirmation process is started, or may be a display that is displayed while the setting confirmation process is being executed. The setting confirmation process is a process that may be started when the operating means (for example, the setting key switch 281, which is the first switch) is turned on while the power is turned on. The setting confirmation means confirmation of the currently set setting values, and during the setting confirmation process, the setting value display means displays the setting values, and the display means displays the first display ( For example, the setting confirmation display) is displayed.

The second operation includes a door body [for example, the front door 102] and a sensor [for example, an open sensor 294] that detects that the door body is opened, and the second operation is performed when the sensor detects that the door body is opened. It may also be an operation to detect this.

Also, according to the above description,
A display means [for example, effect image display device 157] capable of displaying a first display [for example, "setting confirmation display"];
a set value display means capable of displaying set values [for example, set value display 293];
66 (81) in which the medals are taken care of or the medals are inserted by operating the bet buttons 130 to 132]. means for not displaying the first display when an operation [for example, an operation to turn on the setting key switch 281] is performed (hereinafter referred to as the "first case") [for example, in the case shown in FIG. 65 (82) or Figure 66 (82)],
If, after the first case, a state different from the first state occurs [for example, payout is completed due to payment operation or the game with the number of bets set in the first state ends] (hereinafter referred to as "second state"). ), the first display is displayed by the display means [for example, FIG. 65 (59) or FIG. 66 (62)],
The set value display means is a means capable of displaying the set value in the second case,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

By not displaying the first display due to the first operation during maintenance work by a clerk at the game parlor, the maintenance work that was being performed before the first operation can be continued with priority. Further, even if a second operation is subsequently performed while remaining in the first state, the first display is not displayed, and the maintenance work can continue to be performed with priority. In addition, if it is desired to perform maintenance to check whether the first display is displayed on the display means, it is sufficient to shift the state to a state different from the first state, and the maintenance can be carried out in stages. I can do it.

The setting value may be selected from a plurality of types of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player.

The first operation is the operation of the operating means operated when confirming the settings. Further, the first state is a state in which the number of bets of 1 or more is set, and a state different from the first state means that the game with the number of bets set in the first state is completed. or a state in which the payment operation is performed and the payout process is completed in the first state.

The first display may be a display that is displayed when the setting confirmation process is started, or may be a display that is displayed while the setting confirmation process is being executed. The setting confirmation process is a process that may be started when the operating means (for example, the setting key switch 281, which is the first switch) is turned on while the power is turned on. The setting confirmation means confirmation of the currently set setting values, and during the setting confirmation process, the setting value display means displays the setting values, and the display means displays the first display ( For example, the setting confirmation display) is displayed.

In addition,
"The display means is a means for not displaying the setting value in the first case.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Since the set value is also not displayed, maintenance work that was being performed before the first operation can be continued with further priority.

Also,
“Equipped with a door body [for example, front door 102],
The first operation is an operation that can be performed when the door body is in the open state [for example, FIG. 65 (52), FIG. 65 (82), FIG. 66 (52), FIG. 66 (82)]. is,
A game machine characterized by: ” was also explained.

It is possible to prohibit the player from operating the operating means.

Also,
``The first state is a state in which a bet number of 1 or more is set.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

The first state can be easily set during maintenance work by a game clerk.

Also,
"A setting value display means (e.g., a setting value display 293) capable of displaying a setting value is provided,
The setting value display means is a means for not displaying the setting value even when the first operation is performed (for example, FIG. 62 (55)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

When maintenance work is being performed by a staff member of the gaming establishment, the first operation also hides the setting value, allowing the maintenance work that was being performed before the first operation was performed to be continued with priority.

The set value is a value related to the degree of advantage of the player, and for example, depending on the set value, the probability of winning a special winning combination or jackpot, the payout rate of game media, or the winning probability of various lotteries may vary depending on the set value. Different (same below).

Also,
``A gaming machine characterized by comprising a light emitting means (for example, a monitor LED provided on each of the main control board and the external centralized terminal board 248) capable of emitting light when the first operation is performed. ”
Also explained.

It can be confirmed that the first operation is performed normally by the light emitting means emitting light. In particular, when the display means does not display the first display in the first case, it is beneficial for the light emitting means to emit light.

Also,
"A gaming machine characterized by having a transmitting means [e.g., an external central terminal board 248] capable of transmitting a signal [e.g., a setting key switch on signal] to an external device [e.g., a hall computer] when the first operation is performed."
He also explained:

It is possible to confirm from the outside that the first operation is being performed normally. Particularly when the display means does not display the first display in the first case, it is useful to be able to confirm it from the outside.

Also, according to the above description,
``An operation means that can be switched between an on state and an off state by operation [for example, a setting key switch 281],
A game machine comprising a setting value display means [for example, a setting value display 293] capable of displaying a setting value,
The set value display means is a means that may display a set value when there is an on operation [for example, FIG. 65 (52) or FIG. 66 (52)],
The on operation is an operation to switch the operating means from the off state to the on state,
The set value display means is a means that may not display the set value even if the on operation is performed [for example, FIG. 65 (82) or FIG. 66 (82)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

In other words, the setting value display means is a means that, when an ON operation is performed, may or may not display the setting value.

Even if an unauthorized person performs the on operation during business hours, the unauthorized person cannot check the setting value.

The device includes a door body and a sensor that detects that the door body is opened, and the set value display means is configured such that the on-operation is performed while the sensor is detecting that the door body is opened. The set value may be displayed when the sensor is not detected, and the set value may not be displayed when the operating means is operated in a state where the sensor is not detected.

Also,
"Equipped with a door body [e.g., a front door 102],
The on operation is an operation that can be performed when the door body is in an open state.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

The player may be prohibited from operating the operating means.

Also,
"The set value display means is a means for displaying the set value when the operation means is in the off state [e.g., FIG. 64 (73)],
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Even when the operating means is in the OFF state, the set value can be confirmed, which may improve the workability of maintenance work by a clerk at the game parlor.

If the power is restored after the operating means is in the on state and the operating means is switched to the off state, the display means will display the set value even if the operating means is in the off state. Display.

Also,
``A game machine characterized by comprising a light emitting means (for example, a monitor LED provided on each of the main control board and the external centralized terminal board 248) capable of emitting light when the above-mentioned ON operation is performed. ”
Also explained.

The light emitting means can be illuminated to confirm that the on operation has been performed normally. In particular, when the display means does not display the setting value even when the on operation has been performed, it is useful for the light emitting means to emit light.

Also,
"A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a transmitting means [e.g., an external central terminal board 248] capable of transmitting a signal [e.g., a setting key switch on signal] to an external device [e.g., a hall computer] when the on operation is performed."
He also explained:

It can be confirmed from the outside that the above-mentioned on operation is being performed normally. Particularly in the case where the display means does not display the set value even after the on-operation is performed, it is useful to be able to confirm it from the outside.

The functions and effects described in the embodiments described above are merely a list of the most preferred functions and effects, and the functions and effects of the present invention are not limited to those described here. In addition, even if the constituent elements are included only in the embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, supplementary notes, etc. described above, those constituent elements may be included in other embodiments, examples, modifications, etc. It may be applied to modified examples, various examples, supplementary notes, etc. In other words, unless there is a factor that prevents the application, the constituent elements contained only in the embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, supplementary notes, etc. may not be applied to other embodiments, examples, modifications, etc. Even when applied to examples, various examples, supplementary notes, etc., it stands as a cohesive technical idea.

Below, using Figures 68 to 167, a gaming machine to which the present invention can be applied (for example, a reel gaming machine such as a slot machine 100, or a pinball gaming machine such as a pachinko machine) will be described in detail. Note that the reference numerals shown in Figures 68 to 167 will, in principle, be used only in the explanation using Figures 68 to 167, and even if duplicate reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the reference numerals shown in Figures 68 to 167 will take precedence in the explanation using Figures 68 to 167.

The slot machine described below uses a so-called medal-less configuration that uses information equivalent to the number of actual medals (virtual medal count), but in the following description, this information will be referred to as "medal count."

In the slot machine of the present embodiment, a predetermined number of game medals are inserted, and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols start rotating when a predetermined rotation start instruction operation is received. Based on the reception of the rotation start instruction operation, the success or failure of internal winning of multiple types of winning combinations is determined by lottery, and each of the plurality of reels stops rotating individually by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation. If the conditions determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels stop match the predetermined payout conditions, the process of paying out the number of game medals is executed and the game ends. This is a game machine that proceeds with a series of games that will end without executing the process of paying out the number of game medals if the number of game medals has not been paid out.

First, the basic configuration of the slot machine 100 and the basic configuration of the lending machine 700 will be explained using FIG. 68. FIG. 68 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 and lending machine 700 seen from the front side (player side).

A slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 68 corresponds to an example of a gaming machine of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 that is attached to the front side of the main body 101 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. Be prepared. Three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, and right reel 112) each having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer circumferential surface are stored in the center of the main body 101 (not shown), and are rotated inside the slot machine 100. It is configured so that it can be done. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, each symbol is printed in an appropriate number at equal intervals on a strip-shaped member, and this strip-shaped member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame material to form each reel 110 to 112. When viewed by a player, the symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed vertically in roughly three rows through the display window 113, making a total of nine symbols visible. The symbol displayed on the top row of the left reel 110 is called the left reel top symbol, the symbol displayed on the middle row of the left reel 110 is called the left reel middle symbol, the symbol displayed on the bottom row of the left reel 110 is called the left reel bottom symbol, the symbol displayed on the top row of the middle reel 111 is called the middle reel top symbol, the symbol displayed on the middle row of the left reel 111 is called the middle reel middle symbol, the symbol displayed on the bottom row of the middle reel 111 is called the middle reel bottom symbol, the symbol displayed on the top row of the right reel 112 is called the right reel top symbol, the symbol displayed on the middle row of the right reel 112 is called the right reel middle symbol, and the symbol displayed on the bottom row of the right reel 112 is called the right reel bottom symbol, and each of the symbols on each of the reels 110 to 112 is displayed vertically in three rows on each of the reels 110 to 112 through the display window 113, for a total of nine. By spinning each of the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. In other words, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of multiple types of symbols. Note that, in addition to reels, electronic image display devices such as liquid crystal display devices can also be used as such displays. Also, although the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 68 has three reels inside and at the center of the slot machine 100, the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) is provided on the back of each of the reels 110 to 112 to illuminate the individual symbols displayed in the display window 113. It is preferable that the backlight is shielded for each symbol so that each symbol can be illuminated evenly. Inside the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (not shown) consisting of a light-emitting section and a light-receiving section is provided near each of the reels 110 to 112, and a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the light-emitting section and the light-receiving section of this optical sensor. Based on the detection result of this optical sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

The winning line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates a valid winning line. The winning line is a line on which it is determined whether or not a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination has been displayed. The valid winning line is determined in advance by the number of medals bet as game media. There are 5 winning lines. For example, if one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line will be activated, and if two medals are bet, an upper horizontal winning line and a lower horizontal winning line will be added. When the book is valid and three medals are bet, five lines with the addition of the right-down winning line and the right-up winning line become valid as winning lines. Note that the number of winning lines is not limited to 5 lines, and for example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line, the upper horizontal winning line, the lower horizontal winning line, and the lower right horizontal winning line. Five lines, including the winning line and the upper right winning line, may be valid as winning lines. Hereinafter, the winning line that becomes valid may be referred to as the valid line.

The notification lamp 123 is a lamp that notifies the player that, for example, a specific winning combination (e.g., a bonus combination or a special combination) has been internally won in an internal lottery described below, or that this internal winning state has been carried over. The medal insertion possible lamp 124 is a lamp that notifies the player that a medal can be inserted. The replay lamp 122 is a lamp that notifies the player that the current game can be replayed (no medal insertion is necessary) if a replay combination, which is one of the winning combinations, was won in the previous game. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for presentation purposes.

The bet button 130 or 132 is a button for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 68, each time the bet button 130 is pressed, one medal is inserted. Pressing it once inserts one medal, pressing it once again inserts one additional medal (total of two medals), and pressing it once again inserts one additional medal (total of three medals). Pressing the bet button 132 inserts three medals. Hereinafter, the bet button 130 may be referred to as the one-coin bet button, and the bet button 132 may be referred to as the max bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 129 lights up a number of lamps corresponding to the number of medals inserted, and when the specified number of medals have been inserted, the game start lamp 121 lights up to indicate that the game can be started.

The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) as numerical values. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals paid out to a player as a result of winning some kind of winning combination. Note that in the following, the expression "granted to the player" may be used in the same sense as "paid out to the player." The game information display 126 and the payout number display 127 are configured as seven-segment (SEG) displays.

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110 to 112. That is, when the bet button 130 or 132 is operated and the start lever 135 is operated, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. The operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139, each of which includes a left stop button 137, a middle stop button 138, and a right stop button 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-shaped switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with each reel 110 to 112. More specifically, by operating the left stop button 137, the left reel 110 can be stopped, by operating the middle stop button 138, the middle reel 111 can be stopped, and by operating the right stop button 139, the middle reel 111 can be stopped. By operating the right reel 112, it is possible to stop the right reel 112. Hereinafter, the operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139 will be referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation will be referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation will be referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation will be referred to as a third stop operation. Further, the reels that are stopped in response to these stop operations are referred to as a first stop reel, a second stop reel, and a third stop reel in this order. Furthermore, the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are stopped in order to stop all of the rotating reels 110 to 112 is referred to as an operation order or a pressing order. Furthermore, the operation order in which the first stop operation is a stop operation for the left reel 110, the second stop operation is a stop operation for the middle reel 111, and the third stop operation is a stop operation for the right reel 112 is referred to as a "sequential push operation order" or simply The stop operation in which the first stop operation is a stop operation of the right reel 112, the second stop operation is a stop operation of the middle reel 111, and the third stop operation is a stop operation of the left reel 110 is called a "reverse push". This is called ``order of operations'' or simply ``reverse push''. Note that a light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

The instruction monitor 125 is a display for displaying information regarding the operation sequence (press order) of the stop buttons 137 to 139. This instruction monitor 125 is also composed of a seven-segment (SEG) display. For example, when instructing to operate the left stop button 137, the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 in that order, the instruction monitor 125 displays "1," and when instructing to operate the left stop button 137, the right stop button 139, and the middle stop button 138 in that order, the instruction monitor 125 displays "2."

The settlement button 134 is a button for returning the inserted gaming medals (number of bets) to the medal number control unit 350. The door key hole 140 is a hole for inserting a key to unlock the front door 102 of the slot machine 100.

The game medal count display device 170 is a five-digit seven-segment (SEG) display that displays the game medal count recorded in the medal count control unit 350 shown in FIG. 69.

The count button 171 is an operating means for transmitting information on the number of game medals recorded in the medal count control unit 350 shown in FIG. 69 to the lending machine 700.

Below the stop button unit 136 is a title panel 162 that displays the model name and allows various certificates to be affixed.

The sound hole 145 is a hole for outputting sound from a speaker 277 (see FIG. 69) provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. Side lamps 144 provided on the left and right sides of the front door 102 are decorative lamps to enliven the game. A presentation device 160 is disposed at the top of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided at the top of the presentation device 160 for outputting sound from a speaker 272 (see FIG. 69) to the outside. This effect device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right shutters 163a and a left shutter 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and an effect image display device 157 (liquid crystal display) disposed on the back side of this shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally outward in front of the effect image display device 157, the display screen of the effect image display device 157 is displayed in front of the slot machine 100 (player side, front side). ). Note that the display device does not have to be a liquid crystal display device, but may be any display device that can display various performance images and various game information, such as a multi-segment display (7 segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, etc. , a reel (drum), or a display device consisting of a projector and a screen. Further, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and the entire display screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. Furthermore, a decoration (not shown) may be provided around the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, making the display screen appear oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in this embodiment, it may be a curved surface. Note that this effect image display device 157 corresponds to an example of effect means.

The lending machine 700 shown in FIG. 68 is sometimes referred to as a card unit, and corresponds to an example of the game medium management device of the present invention. This rental machine 700 is installed in a one-to-one relationship with the slot machine 100.

The lending machine 700 accepts cards. There are two types of "cards" referred to here. One is a visitor card (also called a general card) with a prepaid function, which is a storage medium for gaming issued to general players who are not registered as members. The other is a member card, which is a storage medium for gaming issued to member players who are registered as members at the gaming center. An IC card is used as the card.

A value is stored in the card. The value stored on the card includes the "number of medals held" and the "monetary balance" which is the balance of prepaid money.

The lending machine 700 that accepts the card has the function of converting the "number of possessed medals" stored on the card into the "number of game medals (number of credits)". The "number of game medals (number of credits)" is data that can be used to set the bet amount and can be converted into the "number of possessed medals". The "number of game medals" is obtained by debiting the "money balance" or "number of possessed medals" on the card. The "number of game medals" also includes the number of medals acquired by winning. This "number of game medals" is managed by the medal count control unit 350 shown in FIG. 69, and is the number of electronic medals electromagnetically stored (amount of electronic game value). The "number of game medals" is decremented by inserting medals using the bet buttons 130, 132.

The "number of medals held" is a value obtained by converting the "number of game medals (number of credits)". This "number of medals held" is memorized so that it can be specified by the player's card. That is, by operating the counting button 171, the "number of game medals" is converted into the "number of medals held", which can be stored on the card. Note that the "number of medals held" may be managed by a management device for managing the number of medals installed in the gaming hall.

The front side of the lending machine 700 is provided with a bill insertion slot 701 for inserting bills upward and a card insertion slot 702 for inserting a card below. The member card or visitor card inserted into the card insertion slot 702 is accepted by the card reader/writer, and the information stored on the card is read. The authenticity and type of banknotes inserted into the banknote insertion slot 701 are identified, and the face value of the banknote is stored in the card inserted into the card insertion slot 702 as a "monetary balance."

An information display 703 is provided below the banknote insertion slot 701. This information display 703 is a display for providing operation guidance for the lending machine 700, the status of the slot machine 100, etc. in the form of text or images. Note that the surface may be configured as a touch panel, and various operations may be input by touching various displayed display items with a finger.

Below the information display 703, a money balance display 705 and a medal balance display 706 are arranged in two levels, upper and lower. The monetary balance display 705 displays the "monetary balance" stored in the card inserted into the card insertion slot 702 as an amount. On the other hand, the "number of medals held" stored in the card inserted into the card insertion slot 702 is displayed on the medal number balance display 706 as the number of medals.

A lending button 707 and a card return button 708 are provided in the vertical center of the lending machine 700. The lending button 707 is an operation means for performing an operation to obtain the "number of game medals" by withdrawing the "monetary balance" stored in the card inserted into the card insertion slot 702. Specifically, if the card inserted into the card insertion slot 702 has a "monetary balance", the LED lamp built into the lending button 707 lights up in a manner indicating that withdrawal is possible. By operating the lending button 707 in this state, the "number of game medals" is added according to the amount of money withdrawn. For example, the "number of game medals" equivalent to 1000 yen is added as the predetermined amount. Further, if the "monetary balance" of the card is less than a predetermined amount (for example, less than 1000 yen), only the "number of game medals" converted from the current balance at a predetermined rate is added. Furthermore, even if the "monetary balance" of the card is less than the predetermined amount, the "number of game medals" for the predetermined amount can be added by replenishing it from the "number of medals you have" stored on the card. good. The card return button 708 is operated by the player when the player ends the game, and is an operation means for storing the "number of medals held" determined at the end of the game on the card inserted in the card insertion slot 702 and ejecting the card. It is. The "number of medals you have" determined at the end of the game is calculated by subtracting the number of medals converted to "number of game medals" from the "number of medals you have" stored in the card inserted into the card insertion slot 702. The number of medals is the sum of the number of game medals counted by the operation. The data of "money balance", "number of medals held", and "number of game medals" explained above are arranged in the following order: "money balance" and "number of medals held" → "number of game medals" → "number of medals held" It will be converted. In this way, the "number of medals held" specified by the card is converted into the "number of game medals", and in the slot machine 100 of this embodiment, the number of bets can be set using the "number of game medals". This may confuse players who are accustomed to traditional slot machines, where you are lent real medals, insert the real medals to secure credits, and use those credits to set the number of bets. It is possible to provide a game using a new slot machine (managed gaming machine) that does not use real medals, without giving away any coins.

In this specification, the "number of medals saved" is not mentioned, but the "number of medals saved" is the number of medals deposited in the game center, not stored on the card. In the game center, the number of medals acquired by the player in the game may be managed as "points" during the day by the hall management terminal 800 shown in FIG. 72 or other management computer, and managed as "number of medals saved" from the day after the acquisition. When both the "number of medals saved" and the "number of medals saved" are stored, the "number of medals saved" is deducted first. In addition, both the "number of medals saved" and the "number of medals saved" may be stored in a higher-level server (the intermediate management terminal 810 or management server 820 shown in FIG. 72) in association with the card number. In the case of a visitor card, the "number of medals saved" is stored directly in the visitor card, but the "number of medals saved" may be stored in an upper-level server in association with the card number. When storing in this upper server in association with the card number, data that can identify the time when the data was stored in the upper server may be written onto the card (member card, visitor card) and then discharged. Also, the "money balance" is written directly onto the card (member card, visitor card) and then discharged. The "number of medals held" is stored on the card (member card, visitor card) or the upper server when, for example, the counting button 171 is operated and counting processing is performed. However, instead of this, the data may be stored all at once when the card is returned. Furthermore, when a player finishes playing and returns the card from the lending machine 700, the "number of medals held" stored in the lending machine 700 may be temporarily stored as saved medals in the hall management terminal 800, and when the player inserts the card into the same or a different lending machine 700 again on the same day that the card is returned, only the "number of medals held" for that day that was temporarily stored as saved medals may be stored again in the lending machine 700, and the "number of medals played" may be added within the range of the "number of medals held" so that the player may play.

Furthermore, the rental machine 700 may be provided with an IR photosensitive unit that receives an infrared signal from a remote control carried by an attendant at the game parlor, converts it into an electronic signal, and outputs the electronic signal.

Furthermore, in the lending machine 700 shown in FIG. 68, it was possible to lend out the "number of game medals" by operating the lending button 707 and withdrawing the "monetary balance" stored in the card. The "number of medals held" may be debited and converted into the "number of game medals". Specifically, the lending machine 700 is provided with a medal button, and when the card inserted into the card insertion slot 702 has a "number of medals", an LED lamp built into the medal button can be pulled out. It lights up in a manner that represents. By operating the held medal button in this state, if the number of held medals is greater than or equal to a predetermined number (for example, 50 pieces), a predetermined number (for example, 50 pieces) of the "number of game medals" is added. In addition, the number of medals that a player has acquired through playing, as described above, can be stored on the card as "scores" during the day, or can be managed by the hall management terminal 800 shown in FIG. 700 is provided with a replay button. If there is a "point", the LED lamp built into the replay button lights up in a manner indicating that withdrawal is possible. By operating the replay button in this state, a predetermined number (for example, 50) of "game medals" may be added.

Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be described in detail using FIG. 69. Note that this figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control section.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of the game, and a main control unit 300 that controls the main performance according to command signals (hereinafter simply referred to as “commands”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The second sub-control unit 500 controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-control unit 400. Here, regarding the main control unit 300, if the data capacity becomes large, it becomes difficult to check the program, and the security deteriorates, such as becoming a breeding ground for unauthorized modification. There are limits to the data capacity of the RAM 308.

Main Control Unit
First, the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 has a game control unit 302 that controls the progress of the game and a medal count control unit 350 that controls the number of game medals owned by the player. The game control unit 302 corresponds to an example of a game control means, and the medal count control unit 350 corresponds to an example of a game value number control means. The game control unit 302 is equipped with a CPU 304, a ROM 306 that stores control program data, lottery data used during internal lottery of winning roles, reel pattern arrangement and stop positions, etc., a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input and output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc., and a WDT (watchdog timer) not shown. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this also applies to the medal count control unit 350, the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500 described later. The CPU 304 of the game control unit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal with a predetermined period output by a crystal oscillator (not shown) as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 determines an interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 304 for each interrupt time. The CPU 304 monitors each sensor and transmits a drive pulse in response to the interrupt request. For example, if the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the frequency division data of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the reference time for interruption is 256 x 47 ÷ 8 MHz = 1.504 ms.

The main control unit 300 includes a random number generation circuit (not shown) used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on a clock signal input from a crystal oscillator (not shown), and when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the game control unit 302 controls the game when the start signal is input from the start signal output circuit. (Starts main control section main processing, which will be described later).

Further, the CPU 304 of the game control unit 302 monitors the states of each bet button 130, 132, start lever 135, each stop button 137 to 139, and settlement button 134 at each interrupt time. For example, when it is detected that the bet buttons 130 and 132 have been turned on, a process is executed in which the medals electronically stored in the medal number control unit 350 are electronically inserted into the game as medals. When it is detected that the start lever 135 has been turned on, a signal indicating this detection is output to the random number generation circuit. The random number generation circuit that receives this signal latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number value used in the lottery. When it is detected that the left stop button 137, middle stop button 138, or right stop button 139 is turned on, if the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to each stop button are in a stopable state, the reels 110 to 112 are stopped. Execute control. If it is detected that the settlement button 134 has been turned on, a process of returning the electronically inserted game medals to the medal number control unit 350 is executed.

In addition, the CPU 304 of the game control unit 302 also monitors the status of various sensors 318 (optical sensor for the left reel 110, optical sensor for the middle reel 111, optical sensor for the right reel 112, etc.) at each interrupt time. ing. The optical sensor of the left reel 110, the optical sensor of the middle reel 111, and the optical sensor of the right reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting base of each reel 110 to 112, and are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting base of each reel 110 to 112. Each time a piece passes, it becomes L level. The rotational position information indicating how far the reel is rotating from the reference position from once reaching the L level until the next time it becomes the L level is calculated based on the counted value of the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b. be done. When the CPU 304 detects the L level signal, it determines that the reel has rotated once, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero. This rotational position information is stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300.

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 that drives the motors 110m-112m (see FIG. 70) provided on the reels 110-112, a drive circuit 324 that drives display devices such as the indication monitor 125, game information display 126, and payout number display 127, and a drive circuit 326 that drives various lamps 336 (winning line display lamp 120, notification lamp 123, medal insertion possible lamp 124, replay lamp 122, medal insertion lamp 129, and game start lamp 121).

Further, in the slot machine 100, setting values are set that give different degrees of advantage to the player. Settings 1 to 6 are prepared as setting values. There is a tendency that the higher the set value, the higher the player's advantage. Specifically, an internal winning probability is determined for each set value. A setting change button 175 that is operated when changing this setting value is connected to the game control section 302.

Further, an information output circuit 328 is connected to the game control section 302, and the main control section 300 inputs information to an information input circuit provided in an external hall computer 600 (see FIG. 72), etc. via this information output circuit 328. 650, game information of the slot machine 100 (for example, information indicating the game status) is output.

The main control unit 300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit (not shown) that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 300 from a power management unit (not shown). When the voltage value is less than a predetermined value (for example, 9V), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to each of the game control section 302 and the medal number control section 350.

The main control unit 300 also has an output interface for sending commands to the first sub-control unit 400, enabling communication with the first sub-control unit 400. Note that information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to send signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400, but is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be sent from the first sub-control unit 400 to the main control unit 300.

Like the game control unit 302, the medal number control unit 350 also includes a CPU 354, a ROM 356, a RAM 358, an I/O 360 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter for measuring time, number of times, etc. Equipped with timer 362. The CPU 304 and the CPU 354 are provided on the same board and are connected via a buffer IC. This allows the CPU 304 to use the ROM 306 and RAM 308 but not the ROM 356 and RAM 358, and causes the CPU 354 to use the ROM 356 and RAM 358 but not the ROM 306 and RAM 308. Note that a WDT (watchdog timer), which is not shown, is also installed. Further, the CPU 354 of the medal number control unit 350 also operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period outputted from a crystal oscillator (not shown) as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 354 transmits the frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 356 to the counter timer 362, and the counter timer 362 sets the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data. The interrupt request is determined and an interrupt request is sent to the CPU 354 at each interrupt time. The CPU 354 operates in response to this interrupt request. The medal number control unit 350 executes an interrupt process (medal number control unit timer interrupt process to be described later) at 0.745 ms. Furthermore, communication with the rental machine 700 is repeated at a cycle of 300 ms.

The CPU 354 of the medal number control unit 350 also includes a start signal output circuit (not shown) that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input from the circuit, control of the number of medals is started (starting the main processing of the number of medals control unit, which will be described later).

The basic circuit of the medal count control unit 350 is connected to a game medal count display device 170 consisting of a 5-digit 7-segment (SEG) display, a count button 171, and a game medal count clear button 172.

Further, a lending machine 700 is also connected to the basic circuit of the medal number control section 350 via a lending machine connecting terminal board 790. The medal number control unit 350 performs bidirectional communication with the lending machine 700.

The medal number control section 350 transmits various commands to the game control section 302. Further, the game control section 302 also transmits various commands to the medal number control section 350. That is, the communication between the medal number control section 350 and the game control section 302 is also bidirectional communication.

Further, the medal number control unit 350 stores the “number of game medals” in a predetermined area of the RAM 358. Specifically, the "number of game medals" is stored in the credit counter. The medal number control unit 350 updates the "number of game medals" stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 358 by addition processing or subtraction processing. The addition process includes a process based on a payout command sent from the game control unit 302, a process based on a settlement command sent from the game control unit 302, and a process based on a lending notice sent from the lending machine 700. can be given. On the other hand, examples of the subtraction processing include counting processing based on the operation of the counting button 171 and processing based on the input command transmitted from the game control section 302.

Note that the game medal count clear button 172 shown in FIG. This is an operation means for clearing the "number of game medals" stored in the . For example, if a player leaves the game with ``2'' remaining in the number of game medals, it becomes difficult to judge whether the player who left ``2'' intends to continue playing or not, and another player Although the game cannot be started, if the number of game medals can be cleared by the operation of the clerk, another player can be welcomed early. Note that when the number of game medals clear button 172 is operated, the "number of game medals" is not necessarily cleared; for example, it is cleared when the number of game medals is 2 or less, and when it is 3 or more. , counting may be performed in the same way as when the counting button 171 is operated. If the counting button 171 is malfunctioning or the like and it cannot be recognized that the counting button 171 has been operated, it may not be possible to convert the "number of game medals" to the "number of medals held", which may put the player at a disadvantage. However, if counting can be performed by the store clerk's operation, the player will not be disadvantaged. Furthermore, since there is no need to newly provide a counting button for the clerk, there is no increase in costs. Note that clearing and counting may not be separated by determining the number of game medals, but may be separated into clearing and counting depending on the operating method of the number of game medals clear button 172. For example, if the button is pressed for a short time, it is cleared, and if the button is pressed for a long time, it is counted. Either clearing or counting can be easily selected regardless of the number of game medals. Further, when only the number of game medals clear button 172 is operated, the count is cleared, and when the number of game medals clear button 172 and other buttons are operated at the same time, it is counted. The possibility of making a mistake in operation is low, and it is easy to select between clearing and counting.

《Sub-control section》
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 receives the control command transmitted by the main control unit 300 (game control unit 302) via an input interface. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on the control command, and the basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input and output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output by a crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, data for controlling the backlight lighting pattern and various displays, etc.

The CPU 404 transmits frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sound source IC 418, and speakers 272 and 277 are provided with the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls the audio output from the amplifier and speakers 272 and 277 in accordance with commands from the CPU 404. The sound source IC 418 is connected to an S-ROM (sound ROM) in which audio data is stored, and the audio data acquired from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277. Note that these speakers 272 and 277 correspond to an example of presentation means.

The first sub-controller 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 422, to which various lamps 420 (upper lamps, lower lamps, side lamps 144, title panel lamps, bet button lamps, reel backlights, etc.) are connected via an input/output interface. The various lamps 420 correspond to an example of a presentation means.

The first sub-controller 400 also includes a drive circuit 424 that drives the motor of the shutter 163, and the drive circuit 424 is connected to the shutter 163 via an output interface. This drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 in response to a command from the CPU 404.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sensor circuit 426, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 at every interrupt time.

The CPU 404 also transmits and receives signals to the second sub-control unit 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control unit 500 performs various controls of the performance device 160, including display control of the performance image display device 157. The second sub-control unit 500 may be configured with multiple control units, such as a control unit that controls the display of the performance image display device 157 and a control unit that controls various performance drive devices (for example, a control unit that controls the motor drive of the shutter 163).

The second sub-control unit 500 has a basic circuit 502 that receives control commands sent by the first sub-control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on these control commands. This basic circuit 502 is equipped with a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling the input and output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, etc. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output by a crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, etc.

The CPU 504 transmits frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the second sub-control unit 500 is provided with a VDP 516 (video display processor), and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads image data etc. stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the effect image display device 157.

Next, we will explain examples of connections between each board, such as the power supply control board, main control board, and first sub-control board, and each unit, such as the reel unit and the performance movable body unit.

Figure 70 shows an example of connections between each board and each unit.

This Figure 70 shows the power supply control board 252B, the main control board 300B, the first sub-control board 400B, the reel unit 109, and the performance movable body unit 160U. The performance movable body unit 160U is a unit that moves the shutter 163, which is incorporated into the performance device 160 shown in Figure 68. The shutter 163 is an example of a movable body.

The power supply control board 252B, the main control board 300B and the first sub-control board 400B each have multiple connectors PC1-PC4, MC2-MC6 and SC1-SC4. The reel unit 109 and the performance movable body unit 160U each also have one or more connectors RC1-RC3 and DC1.

In the island equipment installed in the gaming machine installation business, the 100V AC power source is stepped down to 24V, and the 24V AC current is supplied to the pachinko machine 100 through the power cord 265 connected to the connector PC1. The 24V AC current is converted into a 24V DC voltage, a 12V DC voltage, and a 5V DC voltage in the power supply control board 252B. Although it may be converted to other DC voltages, in the description here, 24V DC voltage and 5V DC voltage will be explained.

The power supply control board 252B shown in FIG. 70 shows a 24V power line and a 5V power line, as well as a power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL and a power supply control 24V capacitor 24PC connected to the 24V power line, and a power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL and a power supply control 5V capacitor 5PC connected to the 5V power line. The power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL is an LED lamp for power supply monitoring that lights up or blinks while a 24V DC current is flowing, and the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL is an LED lamp for power supply monitoring that lights up or blinks while a 5V DC current is flowing. Also shown is a power switch 244.

A 24V power line and a 5V power line are connected to connector PC2 of the power supply control board 252B. This connector PC2 and connector MC5 of the main control board 300B are connected by a harness PM, and 24V DC current and 5V DC current are supplied to the main control board 300B through this harness PM.

A 24V power line is connected to connector PC3 of the power supply control board 252B. This connector PC3 and connector SC1 of the first sub-control board 400B are connected by a harness PS1, and 24V DC is supplied to the first sub-control board 400B through this harness PS1. A 5V power line is connected to connector PC4 of the power supply control board 252B. This connector PC4 and connector SC2 of the first sub-control board 400B are connected by a harness PS2, and 5V DC is supplied to the first sub-control board 400B through this harness PS2.

Note that 24V and 5V may be supplied to the main control board 300B using separate harnesses, similarly to the first sub-control board 400B. Furthermore, 24V and 5V may be supplied to the first sub-control board 400B through a common harness, similarly to the main control board 300B.

The main control unit board 300B shown in FIG. 70 also shows a 24V power supply line and a 5V power supply line. A 24V DC current supplied through the harness PM flows through the 24V power line of the main control board 300B, and a 5V DC current also supplied through the harness PM flows through the 5V power line of the main control board 300B. . Also shown in the main control unit board 300B shown in FIG. 70 are a main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and a main control 24V capacitor 24MC connected to the 24V power supply line, and a main control 5V monitor LED 5ML connected to the 5V power supply line. ing. The main control 24V monitor LED 24ML is a power supply monitoring LED lamp that lights up or blinks while a 24V DC current is flowing, and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML lights up or blinks while a 5V DC current is flowing. This is an LED lamp for monitoring the power supply. Note that no capacitor is provided on the 5V power supply line.

Further, a reel motor drive IC 322i is mounted on the main control board 300B. The reel motor drive IC 322i is an integrated circuit that constitutes the drive circuit 322 shown in FIG. 69. A 24V DC current and a 5V DC current are also supplied to the reel motor drive IC 322i. Although not shown, the main control board 300B includes a game control section 302 and a medal number control section 350 shown in FIG. 69, and also includes integrated circuits constituting other drive circuits 324, 326, etc. ing.

In addition, the connector MC2 to which the reel motor driving IC 322i of the main control board 300B is connected and the connector RC1 of the reel unit 109 are connected by a harness MR1, the connector MC3 to which the reel motor driving IC 322i is connected and the connector RC2 of the reel unit 109 are connected by a harness MR2, and the connector MC4 to which the reel motor driving IC 322i is connected and the connector RC3 of the reel unit 109 are connected by a harness MR3. The 24V DC current and the 5V DC current supplied to the reel motor driving IC 322i are supplied to the reel unit 109 through each of these harnesses MR1 to 3, respectively, and each of the motors 110m to 112m provided for each reel can be driven. In addition, the control signals (commands) that control each of the motors 110m to 112m are sent from the main control board 300B through each of these harnesses MR1 to 3. Although a harness is connected to each motor, the connectors RC1 to RC3 on the reel unit 109 side can be combined into one connector, and the connectors MC2 to MC4 on the main control board 300B side can also be combined into one connector, and connected with one common harness. However, even though it is called one common harness, it is actually a collection of three harnesses MR1 to MR3.

Furthermore, the connector MC6 of the main control board 300B and the connector SC4 of the first sub-control board 400B are connected by a harness MS. This harness MS is a harness for control signals (for command transmission), and is not used for current supply.

The first sub-control unit board 400B shown in FIG. 70 also shows a 24V power supply line and a 5V power supply line. A 24V DC current supplied through the harness PS1 flows through the 24V power line of the first sub-control unit board 400B, and a 5V DC current supplied through the harness PS2 flows through the 5V power line of the first sub-control unit board 400B. Current flows. The first sub-control unit board 400B shown in FIG. 70 also includes a sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and a sub-control 24V capacitor 24SC connected to the 24V power line, and a sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL connected to the 5V power line. It is shown. The sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL is a power monitoring LED lamp that lights up or blinks while a 24V DC current is flowing, and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL lights up or blinks while a 5V DC current is flowing. This is an LED lamp for monitoring the power supply. Note that, also in the first sub-control board 400B, no capacitor is provided in the 5V power supply line.

The first sub-control board 400B also has a movable body motor driving IC 424i mounted thereon. This movable body motor driving IC 424i is an integrated circuit that constitutes the driving circuit 424 shown in FIG. 69. A direct current of 24 V and a direct current of 5 V are both supplied to the movable body motor driving IC 424i. Although not shown here, the first sub-control board 400B also has the basic circuit 402 shown in FIG. 69 mounted thereon, and also has integrated circuits that constitute the other driving circuits 424, 426, etc. mounted thereon.

The connector SC3 of the first sub-control board 400B, to which the movable body motor drive IC 424i is connected, and the connector DC1 of the performance movable body unit 160U are connected by a harness SD. The 24V DC current and 5V DC current supplied to the movable body motor drive IC 424i are supplied to the performance movable body unit 160U through this harness SD, enabling the motor 163m provided in the performance movable body unit 160U to be driven. In addition, a control signal (command) that controls the motor 163m is sent from the first sub-control board 400B through this harness SD.

Note that the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 68 also includes a second sub-control unit 500 as shown in FIG. 69, and although not shown in FIG. 70, the second sub-control board is also separated from the power supply control board 252B. A 24V DC current and a 5V DC current are each supplied through the illustrated harness. Further, the second sub-control board is connected to the first sub-control board 400B by a harness for control signals (for command transmission). Furthermore, the second sub-control board is also connected to the effect device (effect image display device 157) in the same way as the first sub-control board 400B.

As explained above, the main control board 300B and the reel unit 109 are electrically connected by harnesses MR1 to MR3. In addition, the first sub-control board 400B and the performance movable body unit 160U are electrically connected by a harness SD.

Here, based on the above configuration, the operation when the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 in a power-off state is opened and the left reel 110 is manually rotated will be described. Note that the power-off state may be a state in which the power switch 244 is turned off, or a state in which the power switch 244 is turned on but the power cord 265 is not connected to the outlet. Alternatively, it may be a state in which power is not being supplied from the island equipment (the same applies below). If power is not being supplied from the island equipment, even if the power cord 265 is connected to the outlet and the power switch 244 is on, the power is off. Even in such a power outage state, each reel 110 to 112 can be manually rotated in either the forward direction or the reverse direction.

All of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 70 (power supply control 24V monitor LED24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED5PL, main control 24V monitor LED24ML, main control 5V monitor LED5ML, sub control 24V monitor LED24SL, and sub control 5V monitor LED5SL) that are lit when power is applied are turned off when power is cut off.

However, when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, a current (induced current) due to the back electromotive force is generated in the motor 110m (see FIG. 70) that rotates the left reel 110. Continuing the explanation with reference to FIG. 70, the induced current generated in the motor 110m flows through the harness MR1 into the main control board 300B, and is supplied from the reel drive IC 322i to the 24V power line and the 5V power line. A main control 24V adjustment resistor 24MR is provided between the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and ground, and a main control 5V adjustment resistor 5MR is provided between the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML and ground. The main control 24V monitor LED 24ML is lit by the induced current because its resistance value is adjusted by the main control 24V adjustment resistor 24MR, and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML is lit by the induced current because its resistance value is adjusted by the main control 5V adjustment resistor 5MR. Also, even if manual rotation is stopped, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML continues to light for a while because the 24V power line is provided with the main control 24V capacitor 24MC. On the other hand, the 5V power line does not have a capacitor, so the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML goes out immediately when manual rotation is stopped. In other words, when manual rotation is stopped, the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML goes out before the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML. Note that the 5V power line may also be provided with a capacitor with a lower capacity than the main control 24V capacitor 24MC.

The induced current that has flowed into the main control board 300B then flows into the power control board 252B through the harness PM, and is supplied to each of the 24V power line and the 5V power line from the connector PC2. A power control 24V adjustment resistor 24PR is provided between the power control 24V monitor LED 24PL and the ground, and a power control 5V adjustment resistor 5PR is provided between the power control 5V monitor LED 5PL and the ground. The power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL has its resistance value adjusted by the power supply control 24V adjustment resistor 24PR, so that it is lit by an induced current, and the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL has its resistance value adjusted by the power supply control 5V adjustment resistor 5PR. The lamp lights up due to the induced current. Here, the LEDs of a plurality of boards, such as the LEDs (24ML, 5ML) of the main control board 300B and the LEDs (24PL, 5PL) of the power supply control board 252B, are emitting light. Further, even if the manual rotation is stopped, the power control 24V monitor LED 24PL continues to be lit for a while because the power control 24V capacitor 24PC is provided in the 24V power supply line. Further, since the power supply control 5V capacitor 5PC is also provided on the 5V power supply line, the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL also continues to be lit for a while.

The induced current that flows into the power supply control board 252B further flows into the first sub-control board 400B through the harness PS1 and is supplied to the 24V power line from the connector SC1. A sub-control 24V adjustment resistor 24SR is provided between the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and ground. A sub-control 5V adjustment resistor 5SR is provided between the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL and ground. The sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL is lit by the induced current because its resistance value is adjusted by the sub-control 24V adjustment resistor 24SR. The induced current that flows into the power supply control board 252B also flows into the first sub-control board 400B through the harness PS2 and is supplied to the 5V power line from the connector SC2. A sub-control 5V adjustment resistor 5SR is provided between the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL and ground. The sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL is lit by the induced current because its resistance value is adjusted by the sub-control 5V adjustment resistor 5SR. Here, the LEDs of multiple boards, such as the LEDs (24ML, 5ML) of the main control board 300B, the LEDs (24PL, 5PL) of the power supply control board 252B, and the LEDs (24SL, 5SL) of the first sub-control board 400B, are lit. Even if manual rotation is stopped, the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL will continue to light for a while because the sub-control 24V capacitor 24SC is provided on the 24V power line. On the other hand, since there is no capacitor on the 5V power line, the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL will immediately go out when manual rotation is stopped.

The above description explains the phenomenon that occurs when each of the harnesses MR1, PM, PS1, and PS2 is normally connected to the connector and there is no disconnection. On the other hand, if harness MR1 is disconnected or not properly connected to connector RC1 and/or connector MC2 (disconnected or insufficiently inserted), no matter how much the left reel 110 is manually rotated, the None of the monitor LEDs shown at 70 are lit, and the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML remain off. As a result, if any of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 70 or the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML do not light up even if the left reel 110 is manually rotated, it is determined that there is an abnormality in the harness MR1 or that the connectors RC1 and MC2 are not lit. I suspect a poor connection.

In addition, if the harness PM is broken or not properly connected to the connector MC5 and/or the connector PC2, when the left reel 110 is manually spun, the main control 24V monitor LED24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED5ML will light up, but the sub control 24V monitor LED24SL, the sub control 5V monitor LED5SL, the power control 24V monitor LED24PL and the power control 5V monitor LED5PL will not light up. As a result, if the main control 24V monitor LED24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED5ML are lit up when the left reel 110 is manually spun, but the sub control 24V monitor LED24SL, the sub control 5V monitor LED5SL, the power control 24V monitor LED24PL and the power control 5V monitor LED5PL are not lit up, an abnormality in the harness PM or a poor connection with the connectors MC5 and PC2 can be suspected.

In addition, even if the main control board 300B is not connected to the power supply control board 252B during cleaning, maintenance, or manufacturing, the LEDs (24ML, 5ML) on the main control board 300B can be lit by manually spinning the left reel 110.

Furthermore, if the harness PS1 is disconnected or not properly connected to the connector PC3 and/or the connector SC1, when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, the sub control 24V of the monitor LED shown in FIG. Only monitor LED 24SL does not light up. As a result, even if the left reel 110 is manually rotated, if only the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 70 does not light up, suspect an abnormality in the harness PS1 or a poor connection with the connectors PC3 and SC1. I can do it. Further, if the harness PS2 is disconnected or not properly connected to the connector PC4 and/or the connector SC2, when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, the sub control 5V of the monitor LED shown in FIG. Only monitor LED 5SL does not light up. As a result, if only the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 70 does not light up even when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, suspect an abnormality in the harness PS2 or a poor connection with the connectors PC4 and SC2. I can do it.

Here, we have explained the case where the left reel 110 is manually spun in a power outage state, but the same applies when the middle reel 111 is manually spun in a power outage state, and when the right reel 112 is manually spun in a power outage state. Also, as the number of reels spun manually increases, the monitor LED will light up brighter. For example, when the left reel 110, middle reel 111, and right reel 112 are spun manually at the same time, the monitor LED will light up brighter than when only the left reel 110 is spun manually.

In addition, even if the LEDs used for purposes other than the monitor LEDs, such as the main control 24V monitor LED24ML, main control 5V monitor LED5ML, sub control 24V monitor LED24SL, sub control 5V monitor LED5SL, power supply control 24V monitor LED24PL, and power supply control 5V monitor LED5PL (for example, error monitoring LEDs that light up when an error occurs, or signal monitoring LEDs) are installed with an adjustment resistor on the 24V power line or 5V power line, they will light up if there is no electrical connection problem when the left reel 110 is manually spun in a power-off state. Therefore, even if the LEDs are used for purposes other than the monitor LEDs, it is possible to check for electrical connection problems.

Even if the power is cut off, the shutter 163 shown in FIG. 68 can be opened and closed manually.

When the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, a current (induced current) due to a back electromotive force is generated in the motor 163m (see FIG. 70) that opens and closes the shutter 163. Continuing the explanation with reference to FIG. 70, the induced current generated in the motor 163m flows into the first sub-control board 400B through the harness SD, and is supplied to the 24V power line and 5V power line from the movable motor drive IC 424i, respectively. be done. The sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL has its resistance value adjusted by the sub-control 24V adjustment resistor 24SR, so it lights up due to an induced current, and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL also has its resistance value adjusted by the sub-control 5V adjustment resistor 5SR. The lamp lights up due to the induced current.

The induced current that flowed into the first sub-control board 400B then flows through the harness PS1 into the power supply control board 252B and is supplied to the 24V power line from the connector PC3. The power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL is lit by the induced current because its resistance is adjusted by the power supply control 24V adjustment resistor 24PR. The induced current that flowed into the first sub-control board 400B also flows through the harness PS2 into the power supply control board 252B and is supplied to the 5V power line from the connector PC4. The power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL is also lit by the induced current because its resistance is adjusted by the power supply control 5V adjustment resistor 5PR. Here, the LEDs of multiple boards, such as the LEDs (24SL, 5SL) of the first sub-control board 400B and the LEDs (24PL, 5PL) of the power supply control board 252B, are emitting light.

The induced current that flows into the power supply control board 252B further flows through the harness PM into the main control board 300B and is supplied from the connector MC5 to the 24V power line and the 5V power line. The power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL is lit by the induced current because its resistance is adjusted by the power supply control 24V adjustment resistor 24PR, and the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL is lit by the induced current because its resistance is adjusted by the power supply control 5V adjustment resistor 5PR. Here, the LEDs of multiple boards, such as the LEDs (24PL, 5PL) of the power supply control board 252B, the LEDs (24SL, 5SL) of the first sub-control board 400B, and the LEDs (24ML, 5ML) of the main control board 300B, are emitting light.

The above explanation is of the phenomenon that occurs when each harness SD, PS1, PS2, PM is connected to the connector normally and is not broken. On the other hand, if the harness SD is broken or not connected normally to the connector DC1 and/or connector SC3, none of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 70 will light up, and the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL will remain off, no matter how much the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed. As a result, if none of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 70 or the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL do not light up even when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, an abnormality in the harness SD or a poor connection with the connectors DC1 and SC3 can be suspected.

Also, if the harness PS1 is broken or not properly connected to the connector SC1 and/or connector PC3, when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL light up, but the power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL and the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML do not light up. As a result, if the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL light up when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, but the power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL and the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML do not light up, an abnormality in the harness PS1 or a poor connection with the connectors SC1 and PC3 can be suspected. Furthermore, if the harness PS2 is broken or not properly connected to the connector SC2 and/or the connector PC4, when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, the sub-control 24V monitor LED24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL will light up, but the power supply control 5V monitor LED5PL and the main control 5V monitor LED5ML will not light up. As a result, if the sub-control 24V monitor LED24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL are lit up when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, but the power supply control 5V monitor LED5PL and the main control 5V monitor LED5ML are not lit up, an abnormality in the harness PS2 or a poor connection with the connectors SC2 and PC4 can be suspected.

Furthermore, even if the first sub-control board 400B is not connected to the power supply control board 252B during cleaning, maintenance, or manufacturing, by manually opening and closing the shutter 163, the LEDs (24SL, 5SL) of the first sub-control board 400B can be ) can be lit.

In addition, if the harness PM is broken or not properly connected to the connector PC2 and/or connector MC5, only the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML will not light up among the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 70 when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed. As a result, if only the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML will not light up among the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 70 even when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, an abnormality in the harness PM or a poor connection with the connectors PC2 and MC5 can be suspected.

Figure 71 shows an example in which a relay board is provided between the main control board 300B shown in Figure 70 and the reel unit 109 also shown in Figure 70. The following will focus on the differences from the connection example explained using Figure 70, and duplicate explanations may be omitted.

In this Figure 71, the connectors MC5 and MC6 provided on the main control unit board 300B are omitted. A reel relay board 902B is shown between the main control unit board 300B and the reel unit 109 shown in Figure 71.

The reel relay board 902B is provided with a connector RRM1 to which the harness MR11 connected to the connector MC2 of the main control board 300B is connected, and a connector RRR1 to which the harness MR12 connected to the connector RC1 of the reel unit 109 is connected. Also provided are a connector RRM2 to which the harness MR21 connected to the connector MC3 of the main control board 300B is connected, and a connector RRR2 to which the harness MR22 connected to the connector RC2 of the reel unit 109 is connected. Furthermore, a connector RRM3 to which a harness MR31 connected to a connector MC4 of the main control board 300B is connected, and a connector RRR3 to which a harness MR32 connected to a connector RC3 of the reel unit 109 is connected are also provided.

Even in the connection example in Figure 71, if the reels 110-112 are manually spun in a power outage state, monitor LEDs such as the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML will light up if everything is normal. However, if the multiple harnesses MR11, MR12, MR21, MR22, MR21, and MR32 between the main control board 300B and the reel unit 109 are broken or not connected properly, monitor LEDs such as the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML will not light up.

In the connection example in FIG. 71, the provision of the reel relay board 902B increases the number of harnesses and connectors compared to the connection example shown in FIG. 70, increasing the possibility of electrical connection failure. However, an induced current can be generated by manual operation in a power-off state, and electrical connection failures can be easily confirmed from the lit state of the monitor LED.

The reel relay board 902B may also be provided with a 24V monitor LED and an adjustment resistor on the 24V power line, and a 5V monitor LED and an adjustment resistor on the 5V power line. By manually operating the reel in a power outage state to generate an induced current, and turning on these monitor LEDs if normal, it is possible to check for poor electrical connections.

In the description here, the left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, and shutter 163 have been described as movable bodies, but the present invention is not limited to these, and any movable body driven by a motor may be used.

Furthermore, instead of the LED lamp that is turned on by induced current in a power-off state, a light emitting means such as a 7 segment (SEG) display may be used. For example, it may be a 7-segment display that displays setting values (for example, settings 1 to 6) that give different degrees of advantage to the player. The light emitting means must be visible. Note that these light emitting means do not move even when driven by the motor. This is because the light emitting means is not provided on the movable body that is driven by the motor, but is provided on the fixed substrate.

In the above explanation, adjustment resistors (24MR, 5MR, 24PR, 5PR, 24SR, 5SR) were used to cause the monitor LED to emit light using an induced current in a power-off state, but means that can adjust the impedance may also be used. That's fine, and it's not limited to adjustable resistance. However, if a large amount of induced current flows even when the power is on, it will cause problems, so instead of adjusting the impedance just to make it easier for the induced current to flow when the power is off, the impedance should also be adjusted in consideration of what happens when the current is on. need to be adjusted.

The above-described configuration is as follows:
A light emitting means;
A game machine including a movable body unit having a movable body that can be operated by driving a motor,
the motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a harness,
The light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is manually operated in a power interruption state to drive the motor and a current flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor,
This is an example of a gaming machine characterized in that the light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven.

FIG. 72 is a configuration diagram of a gaming system including the slot machine 100 and lending machine 700 shown in FIG. 68.

As shown in FIG. 72, the gaming system S has a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 68, a lending machine 700, a hall computer 600, a hall management terminal 800, an intermediate management terminal 810, and a management server 820, also shown in FIG. 68. The lending machine 700, the hall computer 600, and the hall management terminal 800 are collectively referred to as an external processing device. One of the features of this external processing device is that it is equipped with a memory means.

The hall management terminal 800 is a computer different from the hall computer 600, is installed in each gaming hall (hall) H1, H2, and is connected to the rental machine 700. Since the lending machine 700 is connected to the slot machine 100, the hall management terminal 800 is connected to the slot machine 100 via the lending machine 700. Information regarding the number of medals exchanged between the lending machine 700 and the slot machine 100 (count information, lending information), the operating state of the slot machine 100, and other information are input to the hall management terminal 800. The hall management terminal 800 records and manages the input information.

The management server 820 is provided to comprehensively manage the gaming system 1, and provides information regarding the slot machine 100 and lending machine 700, such as information identifying the slot machine 100 and information identifying the lending machine 700 (gaming machine installation information) and manages this information. Furthermore, the management server 820 is connected to the hall management terminals 800 of many stores via the intermediate management terminal 810, and receives information obtained by communicating with the hall management terminals 800, such as information regarding the number of medals and slot management terminals. Information such as the operating status of the machine 100 is also managed.

<Communication sequence and communication content>
Commands are transmitted and received between the game control unit 302 and the medal count control unit 350. The game control unit 302 transmits game control unit commands (game control status command, game control priority command) to the medal count control unit 350 every 2.98 ms. Meanwhile, the medal count control unit 350 transmits medal count control commands (medal count control status command, response command) to the game control unit 302 every 5.96 ms. Note that the game control unit 302 transmits the game control priority command in preference to the game control status command. Also, the medal count control unit 350 transmits the response command corresponding to the game control priority command in preference to the medal count control status command.

In the communication between the gaming control unit 302 and the medal count control unit 350, and in the communication between the medal count control unit 350 and the lending machine 700, gaming machine status information, gaming machine performance information, and gaming machine installation information are sent and received.

FIG. 73 is a table summarizing gaming machine status information, gaming machine performance information, and gaming machine installation information.

The gaming machine status information shown in FIG. 73(a) includes three types of status information: advantageous status information, setting status information, and front door status information. The advantageous state information includes information indicating whether or not the bonus operation state is equivalent to RB (RB information), information indicating whether the bonus operation state is equivalent to BB (BB information), and bonus operation state equivalent to AT (assist time). It is composed of information (AT information) indicating whether or not the AT information is present. The setting status information includes information indicating whether the setting is being changed by operating the setting button 175 shown in FIG. 69 (setting changing information), and information indicating whether the setting is being confirmed (setting confirmation information). The front door status information is information indicating whether the front door 102 is in an open state (door open information). The AT state is a gaming state in which auxiliary functions are activated to help the player obtain advantageous results, such as notifying the stop operation order of the stop buttons 137 to 139 and notifying the symbols to be aimed at and stopped.

The gaming machine performance information shown in FIG. 73(b) includes total number of coins inserted, total number of coins paid out, MY counter value information, total number of coins paid out for accessory objects, total number of consecutive prizes paid out, information on number of games played, and role ratio. Contains monitor information. The total number of inserted medals information is information representing the number of inserted medals accumulated since the power was turned on. Note that the number of medals for replays is not included. The total number of medals to be paid out information is information representing the number of medals to be paid out that has been accumulated since the power was turned on. Note that the number of medals for replays is not included. The MY counter value information is information representing the maximum value of the MY counter calculated after the power was turned on. The slot machine 100 has a state in which notification of the stop operation order for internally won winning combinations is executed, and the MY counter is a counter that counts the net increase in the number of medals after entering this state. The information on the total number of tokens paid out for accessory objects is information representing the number of medals accumulated by the operation of the accessory object accumulated since the power was turned on. The total number of medals to be paid out for consecutive accessory items is information representing the number of medals to be paid out due to the operation of the RB, which has been accumulated since the power was turned on. The number of games information is information representing the number of games accumulated since the power was turned on. The winning ratio monitor information is information representing various ratios (accessory object ratio, continuous role object ratio, advantageous section ratio, instructional object ratio, and object condition ratio) for evaluating the degree of gambling of a gaming machine. become.

The game machine installation information shown in FIG. 73(c) includes two pieces of information: game control section information and medal number control section information. The game control unit information is composed of ID number information of the IC chip of the game control unit 302, the manufacturer code of the IC chip, and the product code of the IC chip. The medal number control unit information includes ID number information of the IC chip of the medal number control unit 350, the manufacturer code of the IC chip, and the product code of the IC chip.

FIG. 74 is a diagram showing a communication sequence when a game control state command is sent from the game control unit 302 to the medal number control unit 350.

Figure 74 shows, from the left, the first sub-control unit 400, the game control unit 302, the medal count control unit 350, and the lending machine 700.

First, before explaining the game control state command, we will explain the communication between the slot machine 100 and the lending machine 700. A medal count control unit 350 is connected to the lending machine 700, and communication between the slot machine 100 and the lending machine 700 is carried out between the medal count control unit 350 and the lending machine 700. Communication between the medal count control unit 350 and the lending machine 700 is carried out at intervals of 300 ms.

As shown in FIG. 74, the medal count control unit 350 transmits a gaming machine information notification and a counting notification to the lending machine 700. In addition, the lending machine 700 transmits a lending notification to the medal count control unit 350, and upon receiving this lending notification, the medal count control unit 350 returns a lending reception result response notification to the lending machine 700.

Figure 75 shows details of the communication between the medal count control unit 350 and the lending machine 700.

FIG. 75(a) is a diagram showing a data structure of a message exchanged in communication between the medal number control unit 350 and the lending machine 700. This message consists of five types: message length, command, serial number, data part, and checker. The message length stores the length of the entire message. The command stores a command code for identifying the type of gaming machine information notification, counting notification, rental notification, and rental reception result response notification. The serial number stores the serial number in the gaming machine information notification, the counting serial number in the counting notification, and the lending serial number in the lending notification and lending reception result response notification. The range of various serial numbers is 0 to 255, and the serial number becomes 0 when the power is turned on, returns to 1 when it reaches 255, and then repeats from 1 to 255. The data section stores various types of data, and the checksum stores the lower 1 byte of the sum obtained by adding up the data from the message length to the data section.

Figure 75 (b) is a diagram showing the specific contents of the data section of the gaming machine information notification. The data section of the gaming machine information notification stores a code representing the type of gaming machine, such as a pachinko gaming machine, a reel gaming machine, or an arrange ball gaming machine. In the case of this embodiment, a code representing a reel gaming machine is stored. The gaming machine information type includes hall control and fraud monitoring information in addition to the gaming machine performance information and gaming machine installation information described using Figure 73. The gaming machine information type stores a code for identifying which of these three types of information the information is.

Figure 76 (a) shows details of hole control and fraud monitoring information.

The game medal count information is information that represents the current game medal count stored in the RAM 358 of the medal count control unit 350.

The medal count information is information on the change in the number of medals inserted (-3 to 3 medals) since the previous gaming machine information notification, depending on the number of medals inserted and the number of medals returned if there are any returned medals when the settlement button 134 (see FIG. 68) is operated. In other words, this information is based on the information on the number of medals inserted and the number of medals settled, which are included in the gaming control priority commands (insertion command, settlement command) sent from the gaming control unit 302 to the medal count control unit 350.

The medal payout number information indicates the number of medals paid out. This medal payout number information is based on the medal payout number information included in the game control priority command (payout command) sent from the game control unit 302 to the medal count control unit 350.

The advantageous state information is the advantageous state information shown in FIG. 73(a), which was explained using FIG. In addition to this, information representing the state of the gaming machine may be included.

The gaming machine error status information is information represented by an error code.

FIG. 76(b) is a list of error codes. Regarding the various errors shown in FIG. 76(b), the medal number control state command, various processing commands sent from the game control section 302 to the first sub-control section 400, and the game control priority command (error generated command).

Only errors that require special explanation will be explained below. A medal count control disconnection is an error that occurs when the game control unit 302 detects a disconnection of the medal count control unit 350, and a game control disconnection is an error that occurs when the medal count control unit 350 detects a disconnection of the game control unit 302. A game sequence abnormality is an error in which the game progress order in the game control unit 302 is abnormal. A game control command serial number abnormality is an error in which the serial number of the command from the game control unit 302 is a value other than the previous value plus 1. A payout number abnormality is an error in which the payout number included in the game control status command is a payout number outside the range of 0 to 15. In other words, in the slot machine 100 of this embodiment, the maximum number of payouts at one time is 15. A settlement number mismatch is an error in which the settlement number included in the game control priority command (settlement command) is a settlement number equal to or greater than the number of inserted coins. The chip ID number mismatch is an error that occurs when the IC chip number information in the game control unit information shown in FIG. 73(c) is different from the previous information. The medal count control RAM error is an error that indicates a defect in the RAM 358 of the medal count control unit 350. The loaner machine communication abnormality is an error that occurs when the VL signal from the loaner machine 700 is on but a loan notification is not received, as will be described in detail later. When any of the various errors shown in FIG. 76(b) occur, all seven segments of the instruction monitor 125 shown in FIG. 68 are lit, and an error notification sound is output from the speaker 272. In addition, an error code for display is displayed on the performance image display device 157.

The gaming machine fraud information includes the setting status information and front door information shown in FIG. 73 (a) as explained using the same figure, as well as information when fraud is detected, information indicating that the number of gaming medals has been cleared, and a security signal indicating that fraud is being detected.

The information on the number of game information includes information on the current number of bets and information on the number of payouts. These two types of information are distinguished by type information. The current number of bets is included in the start lever acceptance command (gaming control status command) when the operation of the start lever 135 is accepted and the start lever acceptance command (gaming control status command) is sent from the game control unit 302 to the medal number control unit 350. Becomes the current bet value. Further, when a payout command (game control state command) is transmitted from the game control unit 302 to the medal number control unit 350, the payout number becomes the value of the payout number included in the payout command.

Returning to the explanation using FIG. 75(b), the gaming machine information notification sent from the medal count control unit 350 to the lending machine 700 at 300 ms intervals stores gaming machine information of the code specified by the gaming machine information type. That is, when the gaming machine information type value is 0, gaming machine performance information is stored, when the gaming machine information type value is 1, gaming machine installation information is stored, and when the gaming machine information type value is 2, hall control and fraud monitoring information is stored. The gaming machine performance information, gaming machine installation information, and hall control and fraud monitoring information have different notification intervals, and the gaming machine performance information is notified once in the longest first time (e.g., 180 seconds), the gaming machine installation information is notified once in the second time (e.g., 60 seconds), and the hall control and fraud monitoring information is notified every shortest third time (e.g., 300 ms of the notification cycle). When the notification timing of these three pieces of information overlaps, the notification of the gaming machine installation information is given the highest priority, followed by the notification of the gaming machine performance information. The lowest priority is hole control and fraud monitoring information, which are notified the most frequently.

Figure 75 (c) is a diagram showing the specific contents of the data part of the counting notification transmitted from the medal count control unit 350 to the lending machine 700 at 300 ms intervals. As shown in Figure 74, the counting notification is notified within a range of 90 ms to 100 ms from the start of the notification of the gaming machine information notification. This is managed by a counting notification interval timer that is set to 90 ms in step S3303 shown in Figure 99, which will be described later. Also, as will be described in detail later, when the counting button 171 shown in Figure 68 is pressed once, the counting number increases by one medal, and when the counting button 171 is pressed multiple times until the 300 ms cycle arrives, the number of medals for the number of times it is pressed becomes the counting number. On the other hand, when the counting button 171 is pressed for 500 ms or more and the 300 ms cycle arrives, the counting number becomes 50 medals. In other words, the counting number can be set in units of one medal, or 50 medals can be set at once. However, if the counted number exceeds the value of the number of game medals stored in the RAM 358, the value of the number of game medals is set as the counted number. The counted medal number information is information representing the counted number determined by the operation of the count button 171 until the 300 ms cycle arrives. The counted cumulative medal number is information representing the number of counted medals accumulated since the power was turned on. FIG. 75(d) is a diagram showing the specific contents of the data part of the lending notice transmitted from the lending machine 700 to the medal count control unit 350 at 300 ms cycles. As shown in FIG. 74, the lending machine 700 notifies the medal count control unit 350 of the lending notice within 170 ms from the start of reception of the counting notice. The medal count control unit 350 monitors whether the lending notice has been notified within 170 ms by a lending notice interval timer set to 170 ms in step S3502 shown in FIG. 101 described later. When the loan button 707 of the loaner machine 700 shown in FIG. 68 is operated, if the "money balance" of the card is a predetermined amount (e.g., 1,000 yen) or more, the number of medals equivalent to the predetermined amount (e.g., 50 medals) becomes the number of medals loaned. On the other hand, if the "money balance" of the card is less than the predetermined amount, the number of medals converted from the current balance at a predetermined rate becomes the number of medals loaned. The loaner medal number information thus becomes information that indicates the number of medals loaned in response to the operation of the loaner button 707. The predetermined amount and the number of medals equivalent to the predetermined amount can be set in advance in the loaner machine 700.

FIG. 75(e) is a diagram showing the specific contents of the data section of the lending reception result response returned from the medal number control unit 350 to the lending machine 700. As will be described in detail later, the medal number control unit 350 determines whether the number of lending medals notified by the lending notification is 50 or less, or the number of gaming medals stored in the RAM 358 is less than a lending threshold (for example, 15,000). It is determined whether the number of loaned medals received is normal or abnormal. In the lending receipt result response, this receipt result is transmitted to the lending machine 700.

Next, we will explain the game control status command that the game control unit 302 shown in Figure 74 sends to the medal count control unit 350 every 2.98 ms.

Figure 77 is a table showing game control state commands.

The game control state command is a 16-bit command, the most significant bit of the upper byte is used as a strobe signal, the remaining upper 7 bits represent the command type, and the lower byte represents the content. Note that FIG. 77 also shows the command offset used during transmission.

The game control unit 302 transmits a command representing advantageous state information (RB information, BB information, AT information), and after 2.98 ms has elapsed, transmits a command representing setting state information (setting changing information, setting checking information). After 2.98 ms has elapsed, a command representing front door status information (door open information) is sent. This completes the transmission of gaming machine status information.

After 2.98 ms, information showing the total number of inserted coins in 3 bytes (total number of inserted coins information) is sent in three byte-by-byte intervals of 2.98 ms. That is, the first byte is sent with a command type of 13H in the upper byte, and after 2.98 ms, the second byte is sent with a command type of 14H in the upper byte, and after 2.98 ms, the third byte is sent with a command type of 15H in the upper byte.

Subsequently, after 2.98 ms has elapsed, information representing the total number of coins to be paid out in 3 bytes (total number of coins to be paid out information) is divided into three 1-byte portions and transmitted at an interval of 2.98 ms. In other words, the first byte is sent with a command type in which the upper byte is 16H, and after 2.98ms, the second byte is sent with a command type in which the upper byte is 17H, and after 2.98ms, the upper byte is 18H. Send the third byte with the command type.

Next, after 2.98 ms has elapsed, information (MY counter value information) expressing the MY counter value in three bytes is sent in three batches of one byte each at 2.98 ms intervals. That is, the first byte is sent with a command type in the upper byte of 19H, and after 2.98 ms the second byte is sent with a command type in the upper byte of 1AH, and after 2.98 ms the third byte is sent with a command type in the upper byte of 1BH.

Furthermore, after 2.98ms have elapsed, the information representing the total number of paid out tokens in 3 bytes (total number of paid out tokens information) is divided into 3 times of 1 byte each at an interval of 2.98ms. Send by. In other words, the first byte is sent with a command type in which the upper byte is 1CH, and after 2.98ms, the second byte is sent with a command type in which the upper byte is 1DH, and after 2.98ms, the upper byte is 1EH. Send the third byte with the command type.

Then, after 2.98 ms has elapsed, information representing the total number of paid out continuous accessory objects in 3 bytes (information on the total number of paid out continuous accessory objects) is divided into three times of 1 byte each and transmitted at an interval of 2.98 ms. In other words, the first byte is sent with a command type in which the upper byte is 1FH, and after 2.98ms, the second byte is sent with a command type in which the upper byte is 20H, and after 2.98ms, the upper byte is 21H. Send the third byte with the command type.

Next, after 2.98 ms, information expressing the number of plays in two bytes (number of plays information) is sent in two byte-by-byte intervals of 2.98 ms. That is, the first byte is sent with a command type of 22H in the upper byte, and after 2.98 ms, the second byte is sent with a command type of 23H in the upper byte.

Next, after 2.98 ms has elapsed, role ratio monitor information is transmitted over five commands at intervals of 2.98 ms. In other words, the command type with the upper byte of 24H transmits information representing the ratio of accessories, the command type with the upper byte of 25H transmits the information representing the continuous accessory ratio, and the command type with the upper byte of 26H transmits the information representing the ratio of useful objects. The command type with the upper byte of 27H is used to send information representing the instruction-inclusive accessory ratio, and the upper byte of the command type is 28H to send information representing the state ratio of accessories. This completes the transmission of gaming machine performance information.

Furthermore, after 2.98 ms has passed, game control unit information is transmitted over 15 commands at intervals of 2.98 ms. That is, information representing the IC chip ID number of the game control unit 302 in 4 bytes is divided into 4 times of 1 byte and transmitted at intervals of 2.98 ms. Next, information representing the IC chip maker code of the game control unit 302 in 3 bytes is divided into 3 times of 1 byte and transmitted at an interval of 2.98 ms. Subsequently, information representing the IC chip product code of the game control unit 302 in 8 bytes is divided into 8 times of 1 byte and transmitted at an interval of 2.98 ms. This completes the transmission of gaming machine installation information.

Finally, send the checksum value. When the transmission of the checksum value is completed, the process returns to the transmission of the advantageous state information, and thereafter, the game control state commands shown in FIG. 77 are repeatedly transmitted one by one every 2.98 ms. In addition, if there is a game control priority command, the transmission of the game control state command will be interrupted until this command is transmitted.

Next, the medal number control state command that the medal number control unit 350 shown in FIG. 74 transmits to the game control unit 302 every 5.96 ms will be explained.

FIG. 78 is a table showing medal number control state commands.

The medal number control status command is also a 16-bit command, the most significant bit of the upper byte is used as a strobe signal, the remaining upper 7 bits represent the command type, and the lower byte represents the content. Note that FIG. 78 also shows the command offset used during transmission. The medal number control unit 350 transmits VL signal information indicating whether the VL signal from the lending machine 700 is in an on state. This VL signal information corresponds to basic information and may include other information.

Next, after 5.96 ms has elapsed, the information stored in RAM 358, which is represented by 2 bytes as the "number of game medals played," is divided into one upper byte and one lower byte, and transmitted at intervals of 5.96 ms. In other words, the lower byte is transmitted with a command type of 02H in the upper byte, and after 5.96 ms has elapsed, the upper byte is transmitted with a command type of 03H in the upper byte.

Then, when 5.96 ms has elapsed, information representing the number of sheets to be counted (counted sheet number information) is transmitted, and when 5.96 ms has elapsed, information representing the number of sheets to be lent (lending sheet number information) is transmitted.

Finally, the error code described with reference to Figure 76 (b) is transmitted. Once transmission of the error code is complete, the system returns to transmitting the VL signal information, and thereafter repeats transmitting the medal count control status commands shown in Figure 78 in sequence every 5.96 ms. Note that if there is a response command to the game control priority command, transmission of the medal count control status commands is suspended until this command is transmitted.

Next, we will explain the security commands sent from the game control unit 302 to the first sub-control unit 400 at 100 ms intervals, as shown in Figure 74.

The security command includes VL signal information indicating whether the VL signal is on, door opening information indicating whether the front door 102 is open, and the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358. information representing the number of sheets to be lent, information representing the number of sheets to be lent, and information representing the number of sheets lent out. Note that the information representing the "number of game medals", the information representing the counted number, and the information representing the number of lending medals are information transmitted from the medal number control unit 350 by the medal number control state command.

In addition, various processing commands are also sent from the game control unit 302 to the first sub-control unit 400. Examples of the various processing commands include a normal return command when power is restored, a setting change start command related to a setting value change, a setting change end command including the changed setting value, an error occurrence command and an error release command, a bet command including the number of coins inserted, a settlement button command indicating that the settlement button has been pressed, a performance information command including performance information, a start lever acceptance command indicating that the operation of the start button 135 has been accepted, first to third press commands accompanying the acceptance of the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139, a game information command including game information, and a payout start command indicating the start of payout. In addition to the errors represented by the error codes described using FIG. 76(b), errors in the error occurrence command and error release command include an error indicating that the number of game medals displayed is close to the upper limit, a door open error in which the front door 102 is opened, and a lending machine abnormality error in which the VL signal has been turned off.

FIG. 79 is a diagram showing a communication sequence when a game control priority command is sent from the game control unit 302 to the medal number control unit 350.

The game control priority command is a command that is sent with priority over the game control status command. If the medal control unit 350 requests retransmission after sending the game control priority command, the game control unit 302 sends the game control priority command to the medal control unit 350 again. Figure 80 (a) is a diagram showing the details of the game control priority command.

There are two types of game control priority commands: those which, when sent to the medal count control unit 350, result in the medal count control unit 350 returning a response command, and those which do not return a response command and continue to send the medal count control status command. The former game control priority command is called game control priority command 1, and the latter game control priority command is called game control priority command 2. Figure 79 shows the communication sequence when game control priority command 1 is sent.

Game control priority command 1 includes a payout command, an insert command, and a settlement command. The payout command transmits the number of coins to be paid out (0-15 coins) with a command type in the upper byte of 04H, then transmits a command sequence number with a command type in the upper byte of 05H, and finally transmits a checksum with a command type in the upper byte of 06H. In other words, when sending a payout command, three commands are sent in succession.

The input command transmits the number of sheets to be inserted (0 to 3 sheets) with a command type of 07H in the upper byte, then transmits the command sequence number with a command type of 08H in the upper byte, and finally transmits a checksum with a command type of 09H in the upper byte. In other words, even when sending an input command, three commands are sent in succession.

The settlement command sends the number of coins to be settled (0-3 coins) with a command type whose high-order byte is 0AH, then sends the command sequence number with a command type whose high-order byte is 0BH, and finally sends a checksum with a command type whose high-order byte is 0CH. In other words, when sending a settlement command, three commands are sent in succession.

When the medal count control unit 350 shown in FIG. 79 receives game control priority command 1, it sends a response command.

Figure 80 (b) shows details of the response command sent back from the medal count control unit 350 to the game control unit 302.

The response command is sent in response to a payout command (payout response), sent in response to an input command (input response), and sent in response to a settlement command (payment response). There is. In the response command, the value of the upper byte, which is the value of the command type, is 00H. The dispensing response is a response command that includes any one of normal, abnormal, and re-requesting the dispensing command. Note that normality here corresponds to completion of payout, and abnormality corresponds to a case where the number of game medals exceeds a payout threshold (for example, 16,383 pieces) due to payout.

The submission response is a response command that includes any one of normal, abnormal, and re-requesting the submission command. Note that normality here corresponds to completion of input, and abnormality corresponds to failure of input or invalid input.

The settlement response is a response command that includes one of the following: normal, abnormal, or a request to re-request the settlement command. Note that normal here corresponds to settlement completion, and abnormal corresponds to the number of game medals that have been played exceeding the settlement threshold (e.g., 16,383 medals) as a result of settlement. Note that the settlement threshold is the same threshold value as the payout threshold described above.

FIG. 81 is a diagram showing a communication sequence when the game control priority command 2 is sent from the game control unit 302 to the medal number control unit 350.

As shown in FIG. 80(a), the game control priority command 2 includes an error occurrence command, a RAM clear command, and a start lever operation command. The error occurrence command is a command type whose upper byte is 01H, and includes various errors shown in FIG. 76(b).

The RAM clear command is a command type with the upper byte set to 02H, and is a command that includes information indicating whether the RAM 308 is normal as determined by the game control unit 302, or whether the RAM 308 is defective as determined by the game control unit 302.

The start lever acceptance command is a command type with the upper byte being 03H. The bet amount is confirmed when the operation of the start lever 135 is accepted, and so this command contains information indicating the confirmed bet amount (current bet amount: 1 to 3).

"Pattern Arrangement"
A predetermined number of different symbols are arranged on each of the reels 110 to 112. In order to enhance the entertainment value of the game, the slot machine 100 in this embodiment is configured to stop the corresponding reel 110 to 112 within the maximum reel-in range from the position where the reel is stopped.

《Type of winning role》
The winning combinations of the slot machine 100 include a special winning combination, a replay winning combination, and a small winning combination. Note that the types of winning combinations are not limited to these winning combinations, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

《Types of internally elected roles》
In a game, an internal winning combination is determined by a lottery at the start of the game, and in the game, it is possible to win a winning combination corresponding to this internal winning combination. Note that depending on the winning combination, the internal winning results may be carried over to the next game.

《Types of gaming conditions》
The slot machine 100 is provided with various states with different degrees of advantage, and the degree of advantage changes by changing between these states, thereby improving the interest of the game.

《Processing overview》
Hereinafter, the processing of the game control section 302, the number of medals control section 350, the first sub-control section 400, and the second sub-control section 500 will be explained using the drawings. Note that this embodiment employs a so-called medal-less configuration in which information corresponding to the number of real medals (the number of virtual medals) is used without using actual medals. ``Number'' shall be used.

<<Game control unit main processing>>
First, the game control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the game control unit 302 will be described with reference to Fig. 82. Note that Fig. 82 is a flow chart showing the flow of the game control unit main processing.

As described above, the game control unit 302 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when power is applied. The CPU 304 of the game control unit 302 that receives this start signal is reset and started by a reset interrupt, and executes the game control unit main processing shown in FIG. 82 according to a control program previously stored in the ROM 306.

When the power is turned on, first, various initial settings are made in step S101. These initial settings include setting the stack initial value to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting interrupt prohibition, initial settings of the I/O 310, initial settings of various variables stored in the RAM 308 (including the MY counter described below), and setting operation permission and initial values for the WDT 314. Note that if any settings are changed, the contents of the RAM 308 are initialized. The contents of the RAM 308 are also initialized if it is determined during the recovery process that there is an abnormality in the backup data of the RAM 308. When this initialization is made, a RAM clear command including information on whether the initialization was completed normally is sent to the medal count control unit 350.

In step S102, a medal insertion/start lever reception process is executed. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 84.

In step S103, valid winning lines are determined.

In step S104, the winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 306 is read out according to the current gaming state, and an internal lottery (winning combination) is performed using this and the random numbers obtained from the random value generation circuit 316. , determine the internally elected role. As a result of the internal lottery, if any winning combination (including the activation combination) is internally won, the flag for that winning combination is turned on.

In step S105, reel stop data corresponding to the stop operation is prepared based on the result of the internal lottery. This reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the game control unit 302.

In step S106, on the condition that the play interval timer (which is subtracted in the timer update process described below) is 0, the reels 110 to 112 start to rotate, and an initial value is set to the play interval timer. When the reels 110 to 112 start to rotate, preparations are made to send a reel rotation start command to the first sub-control unit 400. After that, when the reels 110 to 112 reach a predetermined rotation speed and the optical sensors provided on each reel detect and grasp the pattern positions of each reel, the stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is enabled. The play interval counter ensures the minimum time required for one play (4.1 seconds in this embodiment), reducing the risk of gambling.

In step S107, a reel stop control process is executed. In this process, when any of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is pressed after the stop operation is enabled, the reel 110 to 112 corresponding to the pressed stop button 137 to 139 is stopped. Specifically, each time a stop operation is performed, the stop table of the reel stop data is referenced, and the reel 110 to 112 corresponding to the stop operation is stopped according to the number of reel-in frames set in the stop table. In addition, for the first stop operation, reel stop data corresponding to the second stop operation is prepared, and for the second stop operation, reel stop data corresponding to the third stop operation is prepared. In addition, for each stop operation, preparations are made to send the corresponding command (first to third press commands) to the first sub-control unit 400, and each time the reels 110 to 112 stop, preparations are made to send the corresponding command (first to third stop commands) to the first sub-control unit 400. When all the reels 110 to 112 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S108.

In step S108, winning determination processing is performed. Here, when a symbol combination corresponding to some winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. Note that after determining the winning combination, preparations are made for transmitting the winning command to the first sub-control unit 400. In step S109, medal award processing is executed. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 89.

In step S110, game state control processing is performed. Here, the status regarding the game state is updated based on the results of the game.

This completes one game. After this, the game will proceed by returning to step S102 and repeating the above-mentioned process.

Next, the medal insertion/start lever acceptance process (step S102) in the game control unit main process of FIG. 82 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 83. This figure is a flowchart of the medal insertion/start lever acceptance process (step S102) in FIG. 82.

First, in step S1001 that is executed first, it is determined whether there is any error status. If there is no error status, the process advances to step S1003, and if there is any error status, the process advances to step S1002.

In step S1002, error notification processing corresponding to the error status is executed, and the process returns to step S1001.

In step S1003, one interrupt time waiting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1004.

In step S1004, interrupt processing is prohibited and the process proceeds to step S1005.

In step S1005, it is determined whether or not a setting key operation is accepted. If the setting key operation is accepted, the process advances to step S1006, and if the setting key operation is not accepted, the process advances to step S1007.

In step S1006, a process for confirming acceptance of the setting key operation is executed, and the process returns to step S1001.

In step S1007, it is determined whether the VL signal is on. This VL signal is a signal that is always sent in an on state from the lending machine 700 to the medal count control unit 350. The game control unit 302 knows the state of the VL signal based on the information sent from the medal count control unit 350. If this VL signal is on, the process proceeds to step S1008, and if the VL signal is off, the process proceeds again to step S1001.

In step S1008, it is determined whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated. If the operation of the start lever 135 has been accepted, the process advances to step S1009, and if the operation of the start lever 135 has not been accepted, the process advances to step S1011.

In step S1009, it is determined whether the replay flag is on. This replay flag is a flag that is set to ON when a replay combination is won and a replay is granted. If the replay flag is off, the process advances to step S1010, and if the replay flag is on, this medal insertion/start lever reception process is ended.

In step S1010, the current number of bets (current number of bets) is compared with the number required to start the game (startable number of coins). If the current number of bets is smaller than the startable number of coins, the process advances to step S1011, and if the current bet number is greater than or equal to the startable number of coins, the process advances to step S1012.

In step S1011, a process during medal insertion is executed, and the process returns to step S1001. Note that details of the process during medal insertion will be described later using FIG. 84.

In step S1012, 03H is set in the upper byte of the content (2 bytes) transmitted to the medal number control unit 350, and the process advances to step S1013. Note that the value set here is used to indicate that the transmitted command is a start lever acceptance command.

In step S1013, the current number of bets is set in the lower byte of the content (2 bytes) transmitted to the medal number control unit 350, and the process advances to step S1014.

In step S1014, priority command transmission processing to the medal number control unit is executed. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 88.

In step S1015, a start lever acceptance command is sent to the first sub-control unit 400, and this medal insertion/start lever acceptance process is terminated.

Next, the details of the medal insertion process (step S1011) in the medal insertion/start lever reception process in FIG. 83 will be described with reference to FIG. 84. This figure is a flowchart of the medal insertion process (step S1011) in FIG. 83.

First, in step S1101 that is executed first, it is determined whether or not the operation of the payment button 134 has been accepted. If the operation of the settlement button 134 has been accepted, the process advances to step S1102, and if the operation of the settlement button 134 has not been accepted, the process advances to step S1103.

In step S1102, the settlement button process is executed, and the medal insertion process is terminated. Details of the settlement button process will be described later using FIG. 85.

In step S1103, it is determined whether the operation of any of the bet buttons 130, 132 has been accepted. If the operation of the bet buttons 130, 132 has been accepted, the process advances to step S1104, and if the operation of the bet buttons 130, 132 has not been accepted, the medal insertion process is ended.

In step S1104, it is determined whether the replay flag is on. This replay flag is a flag that is set on when a replay role is won and a replay is awarded. If the replay flag is off, the process proceeds to step S1105, and if the replay flag is on, the process proceeds to step S1114.

In step S1105, the requested number is set to 0, and the process proceeds to step S1106. Note that this requested number is a value used to set the number of medals exchanged with the medal count control unit 350.

In step S1106, the current bet number is compared with the maximum bet number (3 in this embodiment). If the current bet number is not the same as the maximum bet number, the process proceeds to step S1107, and if the current bet number is equal to the maximum bet number, the process proceeds to step S1110.
In step S1107, the value obtained by subtracting the current bet amount from the maximum bet amount is set as the requested amount, and the process proceeds to step S1108.

In step S1108, it is determined whether the bet button 130, 132 determined to have been operated is the one-coin bet button 130. If the bet button 130, 132 determined to have been operated is the one-coin bet button 130, the process proceeds to step S1109; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1110.

In step S1109, the requested number is set to 1, and the process proceeds to step S1110.

In steps S1105 to S1109 described above, if the current number of bets is the maximum number of bets, the requested number of coins becomes 0. Also, if the MAX bet button 132 is operated while the current number of bets is less than the maximum number of bets, if the current number of bets is 0 against the maximum number of bets of 3, the requested number is 3, and if the current number of bets is 1 The required number of coins is 2, and if the current number of bets is 2, the required number of coins is 1. Further, if the one bet button 130 is operated while the current bet number is less than the maximum bet number, the requested number becomes one.

In step S1110, 07H is set in the upper byte of the content (2 bytes) sent to the medal count control unit 350, and the process proceeds to step S1111. Note that the value set here is used to indicate that the command being sent is an input command.

In step S1111, a process for sending change information to the medal count control unit is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1112. Details of the process for sending change information to the medal count control unit will be described later with reference to FIG. 86.

In step S1112, a response result to the command transmitted in step S1111 is awaited, and it is determined whether or not this result is "normal". If the response result is "normal", the process advances to step S1113; if the response result is not "normal", the process advances to step S1114.

In step S1113, the requested number of coins is added to the current number of bets, and the process advances to step S1114.

In step S1114, a bet button acceptance command is sent to the first sub-control unit, and this medal insertion process is ended.

Next, details of the payment button process (step S1102) in the medal insertion process of FIG. 84 will be described using FIG. 85. This figure is a flowchart of the payment button process (step S1102) in FIG. 84.

First, in step S1201, which is executed first, a settlement button acceptance command is sent to the first sub-control unit, and then the process proceeds to step S1202.

In step S1202, it is determined whether the replay flag is on. This replay flag is a flag that is set to ON when a replay combination is won and a replay is awarded. If the replay flag is off, the process advances to step S1203, and if the replay flag is on, the settlement button process is ended.

In step S1203, the requested number of coins and the current bet amount are set, and the process advances to step S1204.

In step S1204, 0AH is set in the upper byte of the content (2 bytes) sent to the medal count control unit 350, and the process proceeds to step S1205. Note that the value set here is used to indicate that the command being sent is a settlement command.

In step S1205, a process for sending change information to the medal count control unit is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1206. Details of the process for sending change information to the medal count control unit will be described later with reference to FIG. 86.

In step S1206, it is determined whether the response to the command sent in step S1205 was "normal." If the response is "normal," the process proceeds to step S1207; if the response is not "normal," the settlement button process ends.

In step S1207, the current number of bets is set to 0, and this settlement button process is ended.

Next, using FIG. 86, the process of transmitting fluctuation information to the medal number control unit in the process of inserting medals in FIG. ), details of the process of transmitting variation information to the medal number control unit (step S1605) in the medal awarding process of FIG. 89 will be described. This figure is a flowchart of the variation information transmission process to the medal number control unit (step S1111, step S1205, step S1605) in FIGS. 84, 85, and 89.

First, in step S1301, which is executed first, the remaining number of transmissions is set to an initial value (4 in this embodiment), and the process proceeds to step S1302.

In step S1302, information indicating that the response result is "abnormal" is set, and the process advances to step S1303. Note that this response result is overwritten by the response result from the medal number control unit 350, but if it is not overwritten (there is no response), it indicates an "abnormality".

In step S1303, it is determined whether there is any error status. If there is any error status, this variation information transmission process to the medal number control unit is ended, and if there is no error status, the process advances to step S1304.

In step S1304, an initial value (in this embodiment, a value corresponding to 100 ms) is set to the value of the response standby timer, and the process advances to step S1305.

In step S1305, the value of the remaining number of transmissions is subtracted by 1, and the process advances to step S1306.

In step S1306, if the remaining number of transmissions is not 0, the process proceeds to step S1307, and if the remaining number of transmissions is 0, the process of sending variable information to the medal count control unit is terminated.

In step S1307, triple command transmission processing is executed, and the process advances to step S1308. Note that details of this three-command transmission process will be described later using FIG. 87.

In step S1308, if the value of the response wait timer is not 0, the process proceeds to step S1309, and if the value of the response wait timer is 0, the process proceeds to step S1303 again.

In step S1309, if a response has been received from the medal count control unit 350, the process proceeds to step S1310; if not, the process proceeds to step S1308 again.

In step S1310, if the response received from the medal count control unit 350 is "request again," proceed again to step S1303; if the response received is anything other than this, proceed to step S1311.

In step S1311, the response received from the medal count control unit 350 is stored as the response result, and the process proceeds to step S1312.

In step S1312, the command serial number is incremented by one, and the process of sending variable information to the medal count control unit is terminated.

Next, using FIG. 87, details of the triple command transmission process (step S1307) in the variation information transmission process to the medal number control unit in FIG. 86 will be described. This figure is a flowchart of the triple command transmission process (step S1307) in FIG. Here, the triple command is a command consisting of a group of commands that are transmitted three times in a row, and in this embodiment, each of the input command, settlement command, and payout command shown in FIG. It is a series of commands.

First, in step S1401 that is executed first, the checksum value is set to 0 (initialized), and the process advances to step S1402.

In step S1402, the requested number of medals is set in the lower byte of the content (2 bytes) transmitted to the medal number control unit 350, and the process advances to step S1403.

In step S1403, a process for sending a priority command to the medal count control unit is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 88.

In step S1404, the checksum value is updated using the transmission content (lower byte).

In step S1405, the value of the most significant byte of the content (2 bytes) sent to the medal count control unit 350 is incremented by 1, and the process proceeds to step S1406.

In step S1406, a command serial number is set in the lower byte of the content (2 bytes) transmitted to the medal number control unit 350, and the process advances to step S1407.

In step S1407, a process for sending a priority command to the medal count control unit is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 88.

In step S1408, the checksum value is updated using the transmission content (lower byte).

In step S1409, the value of the most significant byte of the content (2 bytes) sent to the medal count control unit 350 is incremented by 1, and the process proceeds to step S1410.

In step S1410, a checksum is set in the lower byte of the content (2 bytes) transmitted to the medal number control unit 350, and the process advances to step S1411.

In step S1411, a process for sending a priority command to the medal count control unit is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 88.

Next, using FIG. 88, the priority command transmission process to the medal number control unit in the medal insertion/start lever reception process of FIG. 83 (step S1014) and the priority command transmission process to the medal number control unit in the triple command transmission process of FIG. Details of the command transmission process (steps S1403, S1406, and S1409) will be explained. This figure is a flowchart of the priority command transmission process to the medal number control unit (steps S1014, S1403, S1406, and step S1409) in FIGS. 83 and 87.

First, in step S1501, which is executed first, it is determined whether the transmission buffer for the medal count control unit is empty. If this transmission buffer is empty, the process proceeds to step S1502, and if the transmission buffer is not empty, step S1501 is repeated.

In step S1502, the transmission content (2 bytes) is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the medal number control unit, and the priority command transmission processing to the medal number control unit is ended.

Next, details of the medal granting process (step S109) in the game control section main process of FIG. 82 will be explained using FIG. 89. This figure is a flowchart of the medal awarding process (step S109) in FIG. 82.

First, in step S1601 that is executed first, it is determined whether there is any error status. If there is no error status, the process advances to step S1602, and if there is any error status, the process advances to step S1603.

In step S1602, the value of the number of coins to be dispensed is set as the requested number, and the process proceeds to step S1604.

In step S1603, error notification processing corresponding to the error status is executed, and the process returns to step S1601.

In step S1604, 04H is set in the upper byte of the content (2 bytes) sent to the medal count control unit 350, and the process proceeds to step S1605. The value set here is used to indicate that the command being sent is a payout command.

In step S1605, a process for transmitting variation information to the medal number control unit (FIG. 86) is executed, and the process advances to step S1606.

In step S1606, it is determined whether the response result to the command sent in step S1605 is "normal." If the response result is "normal," the process proceeds to step S1607; if the response result is not "normal," the process proceeds to step S1608.

In step S1607, a payout command is sent to the first sub-control unit, and this medal awarding process is ended.

In step S1608, if there is no error request, a command indicating that the number of game medals is in an overflow state (cannot be added by payout) is sent to the first sub-control unit, and the process proceeds to step S1601.

《Game control unit timer interrupt processing》
Next, the game control section timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the game control section 302 will be explained using FIG. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the game control section timer interrupt processing.

The game control unit 302 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined period (once every 1.49ms in this embodiment), and uses this timer interrupt signal as a trigger to trigger the game control unit timer interrupt. start the loading process at a predetermined period.

In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. This timer interrupt start process includes processes such as temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 to a stack area.

In step S202, the WDT 314 is periodically (maintained) so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt occurs (so that an abnormality in processing is not detected). In the embodiment, restart is performed once every 1.49 ms, which is the cycle of the game control unit timer interrupt.

In step S203, an error monitoring process is executed. Here, processes are performed to respond to various errors, such as abnormalities in communication with the medal count control unit 350 and abnormalities in the open/close state of the door. If there is any error status, an error occurrence command including information on this error status is sent to the medal count control unit 350.

In step S204, input port status update processing is performed. In this input port status update process, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input through the input ports of the I/O 310, the presence or absence of the detection signals is monitored, and the RAM 308 is partitioned for each type of sensor 318. The signal state is stored in the provided signal state storage area. Note that the state of the optical sensor is confirmed through this process.

In step S205, various game processes are executed, and processes according to the interrupt status are executed.

In step S206, the medal count control command reception process is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 92.

In step S207, a game control command transmission process is executed. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 93.

In step S208, a performance command transmission process is performed, and various commands that have been prepared for transmission in the main process, timer interrupt process, etc. of the game control unit 302 are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. Note that the output schedule information sent to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits in this embodiment, where bit 15 is strobe information (when turned on, it indicates that data is being set), and bit 11 is strobe information. -14 are command types (for example, basic commands, bet commands, start lever acceptance commands, internal winning commands, reel rotation start commands associated with the start of rotation of the reels 110 to 112, and commands associated with acceptance of operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139. 1st to 3rd press commands, 1st to 3rd stop commands when the reels 110 to 112 stop, winning commands, payout number commands and payout completion commands associated with medal payout processing, game status update commands, etc.), bits 0 to 3 10 is composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

In the first sub-control unit 400, depending on the command type included in the received output schedule information, it is possible to determine performance control according to changes in game control in the game control unit 302, and also to determine the performance control according to the change in game control in the game control unit 302. Based on the information of the command data, it becomes possible to determine the content of production control.

In step S209, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S204, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out, and the presence or absence of errors related to medal insertion abnormalities, medal payout abnormalities, etc. is monitored, and if an error is detected, (Illustration omitted) Executes error handling. Further, various lamps 336 and various seven segment (SEG) indicators are set according to the current gaming state.

In step S210, security command transmission processing is executed. Specifically, a security command is sent to the first sub-control unit 400 every 100 ms. This security command includes VL signal information indicating whether the VL signal is on, door opening information indicating whether the front door 102 is open, and the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 308. information representing the number of sheets to be lent, information representing the number of sheets to be lent, and the like.

In step S211, timer update processing is performed. For example, a process of updating various timers in respective time units, such as subtracting a game interval timer, is executed.

In step S212, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. When a low voltage signal is received (when a power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S214, and when a low voltage signal is not received (when a power cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S213. move on.

In step S213, timer interrupt termination processing is performed. In this timer interrupt termination process, processes such as setting the values of each register temporarily saved in step S201 to each original register are performed. Thereafter, the process returns to the main processing of the game control section shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S214, information that needs to be saved (return data), such as specific variables and stack pointers to restore the state at the time of power outage when power is restored, is saved in a specified area of RAM 308, a checksum value for the specified area that includes at least the used area of RAM 308 is derived and stored in RAM 308, and the power status is set to "normal."

Next, using FIG. 91, we will explain the details of the disconnection determination process, which is one of the error monitoring processes (step S203) in the game control unit timer interrupt process in FIG. 90. This figure is a flowchart of the disconnection determination process, which is one of the error monitoring processes (step S203) in FIG. 90.

First, in step S2001 that is executed first, if the value of the timer for disconnection determination is not 0, the process advances to step S2002, and if the value of the timer for disconnection determination is 0, the process advances to step S2003.

In step S2002, if the strobe signal transmitted from the medal number control unit 350 is on, the process advances to step S2004, and if the strobe signal is off, the process advances to step S2005.

In step S2003, the timer for determining disconnection is set to an initial value (a value equivalent to 20 ms in this embodiment), and the process proceeds to step S2005.

In step S2004, the timer for determining disconnection is set to an initial value (a value equivalent to 20 ms in this embodiment), and the process proceeds to step S2005.

In step S2005, if the value of the timer for determining disconnection is 1, the process proceeds to step S2006, and if the value of the timer for determining disconnection is not 1, the process ends. In step S2006, it is determined whether or not there is any error status. If there is no error status, the process proceeds to step S2007, and if there is any error status, the process ends.

In step S2007, information indicating a disconnection error with the medal number control unit 350 is set as the error status, and this disconnection determination process is ended.

Next, details of the medal number control command reception process (step S206) in the game control unit timer interrupt process of FIG. 90 will be explained using FIG. 92. This figure is a flowchart of the medal number control command reception process (step S206) in FIG. 90.

First, in step S2101, which is executed first, if the strobe signal sent from the medal count control unit 350 is on, the process proceeds to step S2102, and if the strobe signal is off, the medal count control command reception process ends.

In step S2102, the information in RAM 308 is updated based on the command received from the medal count control unit 350. These commands include six types of medal count control status commands (Figure 78) and a response command (Figure 80 (b)), and the type of command can be identified by the upper byte. In other words, the type of command is identified by referring to the upper byte of the received command, and the contents of RAM 308 are updated based on the contents.

In step S2103, it is determined whether there is any error status. If there is no error status, the process advances to step S2104, and if there is any error status, this medal number control command reception process is ended.

In step S2104, if the received command is a command that includes an error code (an error code in the medal number control unit 350), the error code is set to the error status. Note that if there is no error in the medal number control unit 350, an error code indicating normality will be set in the error status, but in this case, there will be no error status.

Next, details of the game control command transmission process (step S207) in the game control unit timer interrupt process of FIG. 90 will be explained using FIG. 93. This figure is a flowchart of the game control command transmission process (step S207) in FIG. 90.

First, in step S2201 that is executed first, it is determined whether the transmission buffer addressed to the medal number control unit 350 is empty. If this transmission buffer is empty, the process advances to step S2202, and if this transmission buffer is not empty, the process advances to step S2207.

In step S2202, the command offset (see FIG. 77) is repeatedly incremented by 1 within the range of 1 to 41 (41 is followed by 1). As described with reference to FIG. 77, this embodiment employs a configuration in which 41 types of commands are repeatedly sent in sequence from the game control unit 302 to the medal count control unit 350. The command offset is used to sequentially switch the type of command to be sent.

In step S2203, the command corresponding to the command offset and the information targeted by this command are read out to generate transmission content, and the transmission content is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the medal number control unit 350.

In step S2204, it is determined whether the command offset is 41 or not. Of the 41 types of commands sent from the game control means to the medal count control unit 350, the last command (the 41st command sent) is a checksum generated based on the contents of the commands sent up to that point. That is, for command offsets 1 to 40, the checksum is updated (step S2205), and when the command offset becomes 41, the checksum updated up to that point is sent to the medal count control unit 350 (steps S2203, S2207), and the checksum value is initialized to generate a new checksum (step S2206). After the above processing, proceed to step S2207.

In step S2207, the contents of the transmission buffer addressed to the medal count control unit 350 are output to the medal count control unit 350 (the I/O output port is updated). The information output here is received by the medal count control unit 350 when the strobe signal is set to ON in step S2209, which will be described later.

In step S2208, it is determined whether the strobe signal for the medal count control unit 350 is off. If the strobe signal for the medal count control unit 350 is off, the process proceeds to step S2209, and if the strobe signal for the medal count control unit 350 is on, the process proceeds to step S2210.

In step S2209, the strobe signal for the medal number control unit 350 is set to ON, and this game control state command transmission process is ended.

In step S2210, the contents of the transmission buffer addressed to the medal number control unit 350 are cleared, and the process advances to step S2211.

In step S2211, the strobe signal for the medal count control unit 350 is set to off, and the game control state command transmission process is terminated.

《Medal number control section main processing》
Next, the medal number control section main processing executed by the CPU 354 of the medal number control section 350 will be explained using FIG. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the medal number control section.

As described above, the medal number control section 350 is provided with a startup signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) that outputs a startup signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 354 of the medal number control unit 350 that has received this activation signal performs a reset start by the reset interrupt and executes the medal number control unit main processing shown in FIG. 94 according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 356.

When the power is turned on, first, a power-on process is performed in step S301. Here, the WDT is initialized and restarted until the power supply voltage reaches a predetermined voltage (9V) or higher, and when the power supply voltage reaches the predetermined voltage, access to the RAM 358 is permitted and the interrupt cycle is set. be done. Furthermore, communication circuit settings, etc. are also performed.

In step S302, RAM abnormality determination processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S303. Note that details of this RAM abnormality determination process will be described later using FIG. 95.

In step S303, a preparation process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S304. Note that details of this preparation process will be described later using FIG. 98. In step S304, a gaming machine information notification transmission process is executed, and the process advances to step S305. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 99.

In step S305, the count notification transmission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S306. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 101.

In step S306, a process for confirming receipt of the loan notification is executed, and the process proceeds to step S307. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 102.

In step S307, if the rental notification reception flag is on, the process proceeds to step S308, and if the flag is off, the process proceeds to step S304 again.

In step S308, the process of sending a loan acceptance result response is executed, and the process proceeds to step S304 again. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 103.

Next, details of the RAM abnormality determination process (step S302) in the medal number control section main process of FIG. 94 will be described using FIG. 95. This figure is a flowchart of the RAM abnormality determination process (step S302) in FIG.

First, in step S3001, if the power supply status is "normal," the process proceeds to step S3002, and if the power supply status is other than "normal," the process proceeds to step S3005.

In step S3002, a checksum value is derived based on the data in the RAM 358, and the process advances to step S3003.

In step S3003, the checksum value derived in step S3002 is compared with the checksum value derived at the time of power outage, and if these values are the same, the checksum value is determined to be normal and the process proceeds to step S3004. , if these values are different, it is determined that the checksum value is not normal and the process advances to step S3005.

In step S3004, a normal RAM clear process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3008. In this embodiment, there are four types of RAM clear processes, and as shown in FIG. 96, the normal RAM clear process has the fewest targets to be cleared. In addition to an area for storing information during gameplay, RAM 358 also has an area for storing hardware information such as a chip ID, an area for storing information regarding the status of the gaming machine such as the ratio of advantageous zones, and a buffer for temporarily storing information received from the game control unit 302, but the normal RAM clear process mainly clears the area for storing information during gameplay.

In step S3005, all RAM clear processing is executed, and the process advances to step S3006. The all RAM clear process clears the most areas among the four types of RAM clear processes, and as shown in FIG. 96, the entire area is cleared.

In step S3006, information indicating "RAM failure" is stored as RAM failure information, and the process proceeds to step S3007.

In step S3007, the game control unit chip ID acquisition flag is set to ON, and the process advances to step S3008.
In step S3008, if the game medal number clear button 172 is being operated, the process advances to step S3009, and if it is not being operated, the process advances to step S3011.

In step S3009, the number of game medals is set to 0, and the process advances to step S3010.

In step S3010, information indicating "detection has occurred" is set as the game medal count clear detection information, and the process proceeds to step S3011.

In step S3011, the power-on flag is set to on.

In step S3012, execution of interrupt processing is permitted.

In step S3013, this determination process is repeatedly executed until the strobe signal on from the game control section 302 is detected, and when the strobe signal on is detected, the process advances to step S3014.

In step S3014, execution of the interrupt process is prohibited.

In step S3015, the power-on flag is set to off.

In step S3016, it is determined whether the gaming control unit RAM clear command among the gaming control priority commands shown in FIG. 80(a) has been received. If this command has been received, the process advances to step S3017, and if it has not been received, the process advances to step S3020.

In step S3017, if the information included in the game control unit RAM clear command indicates clearing is "normal", the process advances to step S3018, and if the information does not indicate "normal", the process advances to step S3019.

In step S3018, limited (2) RAM clear processing is executed. In this process, as shown in FIG. 96, the area excluding chip information, role ratio monitor information, etc. is cleared.

In step S3019, limited (1) RAM clear processing is executed. In this process, as shown in FIG. 96, the area excluding chip information etc. is cleared.

In step S3020, if information indicating "RAM defect" is stored as RAM defect information, the process advances to step S3021; if information indicating "RAM defect" is not stored as RAM defect information, this RAM abnormality determination process is ended. do.

In step S3021, information indicating "RAM failure" (error code E8) is set as the error request setting value.

In step S3022, an error request setting process is executed. Details of this error request setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 97.

Next, the details of the error request setting process (step S3022) in the RAM abnormality determination process in FIG. 95 will be described with reference to FIG. 97. This figure is a flowchart of the error request setting process (step S3022) in FIG. 95, etc.

First, in step S3101 that is executed first, if no error code is set in the error request, the process advances to step S3102, and if some error code has already been set, the error request setting process is ended.

In step S3102, the value of the error request setting value (error code) is set as the error request.

In step S3103, if the error request is "E9" shown in FIG. 76(b), the process advances to step S3104; otherwise, the process advances to step S3105.

In step S3104, the rental machine communication abnormality error setting flag is set to on, and the process advances to step S3105.

In step S3105, if the error request is "E7" as shown in FIG. 76(b), the process proceeds to step S3106; otherwise, the error request setting process ends.

In step S3106, the game control unit chip ID acquisition flag is set to ON, and this error request setting process ends.

Next, the details of the preparation process (step S303) in the medal count control unit main process in FIG. 94 will be described with reference to FIG. 98. This figure is a flowchart of the preparation process (step S303) in FIG. 94.

First, in step S3201, which is executed first, the rental device communication anomaly counter is set to an initial value (5 in this embodiment).

In step S3202, the chip information (ID, manufacturer code, product code) of the medal number control unit 350 is updated. Note that this information is stored in the ROM of the medal control section.

In step S3203, interrupt processing is permitted.

In step S3204, this process is repeatedly executed while the gaming control unit chip ID acquisition flag is on, and when the gaming control unit chip ID acquisition flag is set to off, the process advances to step S3205.

In step S3205, the gaming machine installation information transmission interval timer is set to an initial value (a value corresponding to 60.196 seconds in this embodiment).

In step S3206, the gaming machine performance information transmission interval timer is set to an initial value (a value equivalent to 180.588 seconds in this embodiment).

Next, details of the gaming machine information notification transmission process (step S304) in the medal number control section main process of FIG. 94 will be described using FIG. 99. This figure is a flowchart of the gaming machine information notification transmission process (step S304) in FIG.

First, in step S3301, which is executed first, this process is repeated until the value of the gaming machine information notification interval timer reaches 0, at which point the process proceeds to step S3320.

In step S3302, the gaming machine information notification interval timer is set to an initial value (a value equivalent to 300.98 ms in this embodiment). In step S3303, the count notification interval timer is set to a value equivalent to 90 ms.

In step S3304, the value of the number of game medals is set as the number of game medals for count determination.

In step S3305, the gaming machine information type acquisition process is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 100.

In step S3306, preparations are made to transmit various gaming machine information according to the gaming machine information type. Specifically, when the value of the gaming machine information type is 0, preparations are made to send the gaming machine performance information, and when the value of the gaming machine information type is 1, preparations are made to send the gaming machine installation information, and the gaming machine information type is prepared to be sent. If the value of the machine information type is 2, preparations are made to transmit hole control/fraud monitoring information.

In step S3307, if the value of the gaming machine information type is 2, the process advances to step S3308, and if the value of the gaming machine information type is other than 2, the process advances to step S3311.

In step S3308, the number of inserted medals is set to 0.

In step S3309, the value of the number of medals to be paid out is set to zero.

In step S3310, the game information count value is set to 0.

In steps S3311 to S3317, various pieces of gaming machine information (message length, command type, gaming machine information serial number, gaming machine type, gaming machine information type, gaming machine information, checksum) (see Figures 75(a) and (b)) corresponding to the gaming machine information type prepared for transmission in step S3306 are sequentially transmitted. Note that the checksum is a value updated based on the contents transmitted up to that point.

In step S3318, the gaming machine information serial number is updated by 1 in the range of 1 to 255. Note that the value of the gaming machine information serial number is 0 only when the power is turned on.

Next, the details of the gaming machine information type acquisition process (step S3305) in the gaming machine information notification transmission process in FIG. 99 will be described with reference to FIG. 100. This figure is a flowchart of the gaming machine information type acquisition process (step S3305) in FIG. 99.

First, in step S3401, which is executed first, if the value of the gaming machine installation information transmission interval timer is 0, the process proceeds to step S3402, and if the value of the timer is not 0, the process proceeds to step S3404.

In step S3402, the gaming machine installation information transmission interval timer is set to an initial value (a value equivalent to 60.196 seconds in this embodiment).

In step S3403, the gaming machine information type is set to 1, and the gaming machine information type acquisition process is terminated.

In step S3404, 2 is set for the gaming machine information type, and the process advances to step S3405.

In step S3405, if the value of the gaming machine performance information transmission interval timer is 0, the process advances to step S3406, and if the value of the timer is not 0, the gaming machine information type acquisition process is ended.

In step S3406, the gaming machine performance information transmission interval timer is set to an initial value (a value equivalent to 180.588 seconds in this embodiment).

In step S3407, the gaming machine information type is set to 0, and the gaming machine information type acquisition process ends.

Next, the details of the counting notification sending process (step S305) in the medal count control unit main process in FIG. 94 will be described with reference to FIG. 101. This figure is a flowchart of the counting notification sending process (step S305) in FIG. 94.

First, in step S3501 that is executed first, this process is repeatedly executed until the value of the count notification interval timer becomes 0, and when the value of the timer becomes 0, the process advances to step S3502.

In step S3502, the rental notification interval timer is set to an initial value (a value corresponding to 170 ms in this embodiment).

In steps S3503 to S3505, the message length, command type, and counting serial number are sequentially transmitted to the lending machine 700.

In step S3506, the value of the number of sheets to be counted is set to zero.

In step S3507, if the VL signal is on, the process proceeds to step S3508, and if the VL signal is off, the process proceeds to step S3513. This VL signal is normally transmitted from the lending machine 700 to the medal count control unit 350 in an on state at all times.

In step S3508, if the scheduled number of sheets to be counted is not 0, the process advances to step S3509, and if the planned number of sheets to be counted is 0, the process advances to step S3513.

In step S3509, the input prohibition flag is set to ON.

In step S3510, if the number of medals to be counted is equal to or greater than the number of medals for counting determination, the process proceeds to step S3511, and if the number of medals to be counted is less than the number of medals for counting determination, the process proceeds to step S3512.

In step S3511, the value of the number of game medals for counting determination is set to the number of medals to be counted.

In step S3512, the value of the number of sheets to be counted is set to the number of sheets to be counted.

In step S3513, the counted number of sheets is transmitted to the lending machine 700.

In step S3514, the counted number is subtracted from the number of game medals.

In step S3515, the scheduled number of sheets to be counted is set to zero.

In step S3516, the input prohibition flag is set to OFF.

In step S3517, the value of the counted number is added to the cumulative number of medals. In step S3518, the cumulative number of medals is transmitted to lending machine 700.

In step S3519, the checksum is transmitted to rental machine 700. Note that the checksum value transmitted here is a value updated based on the data transmitted to the rental machine 700 in this count notification transmission process.

In step S3520, the counting serial number is updated by 1 in the range of 1 to 255. Note that the value of the counting serial number is 0 only when the power is turned on.

Next, the details of the loan notification reception confirmation process (step S306) in the medal count control unit main process in FIG. 94 will be described with reference to FIG. 102. This figure is a flowchart of the loan notification reception confirmation process (step S306) in FIG. 94.

First, in step S3601, which is executed first, if the loan notification receipt flag is off, the process proceeds to step S3602, and if the flag is on, the loan notification receipt confirmation process ends.

In step S3602, if the value of the loan notification interval timer is 0, proceed to step S3603, and if the value is not 0, return to step S3601.

In step S3603, if the VL signal is on, the process advances to step S3604, and if the signal is off, the rental notification reception confirmation process is ended. This VL signal is a signal that is transmitted from lending machine 700 to medal number control section 350 in an always-on state.

In step S3604, the value of the rental device communication error counter is decremented by 1, and the rental notification reception confirmation process is terminated.

Next, the loan receipt result response transmission process (step S308) in the medal count control unit main process in FIG. 94 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 103. This figure is a flowchart of the loan receipt result response transmission process (step S308) in FIG. 94.

First, in step S3701 that is executed first, an initial value (5 in this embodiment) is set in the rental machine communication abnormality counter.

In step S3702, the rental machine communication abnormality error setting flag is set to OFF.

In step S3703, if the loan quantity receipt result is "normal", proceed to step S3704, and if it is other than "normal", proceed to step S3707.

In step S3704, the value of the lending serial number is set to the normal lending serial number.

In step S3705, the value of the loan serial number is set to the confirmation loan serial number. The confirmation loan serial number is a value used for comparison with the next loan serial number (step S4104 in FIG. 106), and step S3705 is provided in preparation for this comparison.

In step S3706, the confirmation loan serial number is updated by 1 in the range of 1 to 255. Note that the value of the rental serial number for confirmation is 0 only when the power is turned on.

In steps S3707 to S3711, the length of the message, the command type, the normal lending serial number, the receipt result of the number of lending sheets, and the checksum) are sequentially transmitted to the lending machine 700. Note that the checksum is a value updated based on the previous transmission content.

In step S3712, if the lending number receipt result is "normal", the process advances to step S3712, and if it is other than "normal", this lending reception result response transmission process is ended.

In step S3713, standby processing is executed until the transmission from step S3707 to step S3711 is completed.

In step S3714, the number of loaned medals is added to the number of game medals, and the loan receipt result response sending process is terminated.

<Medal count control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, a medal count control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU of the medal count control unit 350 will be described with reference to Fig. 104. Note that Fig. 104 is a flow chart showing the flow of the medal count control unit timer interrupt process.

The medal number control section 350 is equipped with a counter timer that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined period (once every 0.745 ms in this embodiment), and this timer interrupt signal is used as a trigger for the medal number control section timer to be activated. Interrupt processing is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S401, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, the values of each register of the CPU are temporarily saved in the stack area.

In step S402, in order to prevent the count value of the WDT from exceeding the initial setting value and a WDT interrupt from occurring (to prevent the detection of a processing abnormality), the WDT is periodically activated (in this embodiment, the medal count control unit timer is used). The restart is performed once every 0.745ms, which is the interrupt cycle.

In step S403, an input port status update process (port read) is performed. In this input port status update process, the input contents for the I/O input port are stored in the signal status storage area in RAM 358.

In step S404, rental notification reception processing is executed. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 105.

In step S405, the process of updating the number of sheets to be counted is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 107.

In step S406, the game control unit executes a command reception process. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 108.

In step S407, error monitoring processing is performed. Details of this processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 119.

In step S408, a medal number control command transmission process to the game control unit is executed. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 120.

In step S409, display processing is executed. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 121.

In step S410, timer update processing is performed to update various timers in respective time units.

In step S411, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. If a low voltage signal is received (if a power cutoff is detected), the process advances to step S413, and if a low voltage signal is not received (a power cutoff is not detected), the process goes to step S412. move on.

In step S412, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the values of each register temporarily saved in step S401 are set back to the original registers, and other processing is performed. After that, the processing returns to the medal count control unit main processing shown in FIG. 94.

Meanwhile, in step S413, information that needs to be saved (return data), such as specific variables and stack pointers to return to the state at the time of power outage when power is restored, is saved in a specified area of RAM 358, a checksum value for a specified area that includes at least the used area of RAM 358 is derived and stored in RAM 358, and the power status is set to "normal." Note that the game control unit 302 also executes a similar process (step S214 in FIG. 90) when it detects a power outage, but if the process ends before the process on the game control unit 302 side ends, it will not be possible to receive commands from the game control unit 302. To prevent such problems from occurring, this embodiment employs a circuit configuration in which the process ends after the process on the game control unit 302 side ends.

Next, the details of the loan notification reception process (step S404) in the medal count control unit timer interrupt process in FIG. 104 will be described with reference to FIG. 105. This figure is a flowchart of the loan notification reception process (step S404) in FIG. 104.

First, in step S4001 that is executed first, the lending notification reception flag is set to OFF.

In step S4002, if a rental notification is received from the rental machine 700, the process advances to step S4003, and if not received, this rental notification reception process is ended.

In step S4003, information in the RAM 358 is updated based on the received lending notice. That is, the data included in the lending notice is stored in the RAM 358.

In step S4004, the loan quantity determination process is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 106.

In step S4005, the result of the determination in step S4004 is set as the number of loaned sheets received.

In step S4006, the rental notification reception flag is set to ON, and this rental notification reception process ends.

Next, using FIG. 106, details of the lending number determination process (step S4004) in the lending notification receiving process of FIG. 105 will be described. This figure is a flowchart of the loan number determination process (step S4004) in FIG. 105.

First, in step S4101 that is executed first, the determination result is set to "abnormal".

In step S4102, a checksum is calculated from the received loan notification data.

In step S4103, the value of the checksum included in the received lending notification is compared with the value calculated in step S4102, and if the two are equal, it is determined to be normal and the process proceeds to step S4104, and if the two are different, the number of borrowed sheets is determined. Finish the process.

In step S4104, the value of the loan serial number contained in the received loan notification is compared with the value of the confirmation loan serial number stored in RAM 358. If the two are equal, the process proceeds to step S4105. If the two are different, the loan quantity determination process ends. Note that if the previous loan notification was received normally, the confirmation loan serial number here will be the value set in steps S3705 and S3706 in FIG. 103 (the updated loan serial number from the previous time).

In step S4105, if the message length and command type information of the received loan notification correspond to the loan notification, it is determined to be normal and the process proceeds to step S4106; otherwise, the loan quantity determination process is terminated.

In step S4106, if the value of the number of loaned sheets included in the received loan notification is 0, proceed to step S4111, and if the value is not 0, proceed to step S4107.

In step S4107, if the value of the number of game medals is less than 15,000, the process advances to step S4108, and if the same value is 15,000 or more, this lending number determination process is ended.

In step S4108, it is determined whether the gaming machine information type value of the previously sent gaming machine information notification was 2, i.e., whether the gaming machine information notification was about hall control/fraud monitoring information. If the gaming machine information type value is 2, the process proceeds to step S4109, and if the value is not 2, the lending number determination process is terminated.

In step S4109, if the value of the counted number in the previously transmitted counting notification is 0, the process advances to step S4110, and if the same value is not 0, this lending number determination process is ended.

In step S4110, if the value of the number of rental sheets included in the received rental notification is 50 or less, the process advances to step S4111, and if the same value is greater than 50, the process of determining the number of rental sheets ends.

In step S4111, the judgment result is set to "normal" and the loan quantity judgment process is terminated.

Next, the details of the planned count number update process (step S405) in the medal count control unit timer interrupt process in FIG. 104 will be described with reference to FIG. 107. This figure is a flowchart of the planned count number update process (step S405) in FIG. 104.

First, in step S4201 that is executed first, if the power-on flag is on, the process advances to step S4202, and if the flag is off, the process of updating the scheduled number of sheets to be counted ends.

In step S4202, if the VL signal is on, the process advances to step S4203, and if the signal is off, the process advances to step S4213. In addition, this VL signal is a signal that is always transmitted from the rental machine 700 to the medal number control unit 350 in an on state if it is normal.

In step S4203, if the counting button 171 is being operated, the process advances to step S4204, and if the button is not being operated, the process advances to step S4210.

In step S4204, if the count long press flag is off, the process advances to step S4205, and if the flag is on, the process advances to step S4208.

In step S4205, if the value of the count long press timer is 0, the process advances to step S4206, and if the same value is not 0, the process advances to step S4207.

In step S4206, the count long press timer is set to its initial value (a value equivalent to 500 ms in this embodiment), and the process proceeds to step S4207.

In step S4207, if the value of the count long press timer is 1, proceed to step S4208, and if the value is not 1, proceed to step S4210.

In step S4208, the count long press flag is set to on.

In step S4209, the value of the planned count number is set to 50, and the planned count number update process is terminated.

In step S4210, if the count button 171 was previously operated (if the count button 171 was released), the process proceeds to step S4211; otherwise, the process ends the update process for the planned count number.

In step S4211, if the count long press flag is off, proceed to step S4212, and if the flag is on, proceed to step S4213.

In step S4212, the value of the planned count is incremented by 1, and the planned count update process is terminated.

In step S4213, the counting long press flag is set to OFF.

In step S4214, the value of the count long press timer is set to 0.

In step S4215, the value of the planned count is cleared (set to 0), and the planned count update process is terminated.

Next, details of the game control unit command reception process (step S406) in the medal number control unit timer interrupt process of FIG. 104 will be explained using FIG. 108. This figure is a flowchart of the game control unit command reception process (step S406) in FIG. 104.

First, in step S4301, which is executed first, if a change in the strobe signal from the game control unit 302 from off to on is detected, the process proceeds to step S4302; otherwise, the game control unit command reception process ends.

In step S4302, the game control command disconnection timer is set to an initial value (a value equivalent to 190 ms in this embodiment).

In step S4303, if the received command is a game control state command, the process proceeds to step S4304, and if the received command is not a game control state command (it is a game control priority command), the process proceeds to step S4305. In step S4304, a game control state command reception process is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 109.

In step S4305, the game control priority command reception process is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 110.

Next, the details of the game control state command reception process (step S4304) in the game control unit command reception process in FIG. 108 will be described with reference to FIG. 109. This figure is a flowchart of the game control state command reception process (step S4304) in FIG. 108.

First, in step S4401, which is executed first, if the received command is a command to transmit a checksum, the process proceeds to step S4404, and if it is any other command, the process proceeds to step S4402. In this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which 41 types of commands are repeatedly transmitted from the game control means to the medal count control unit 350, and the final command is a command to transmit a checksum calculated from the contents of the previous 40 types of commands. In other words, for the first through 40th commands, the process proceeds to step S4402, and for the 41st command, the process proceeds to step S4404.

In step S4402, the contents of the command reception buffer are updated according to the contents of the received command.

In step S4403, the checksum is updated based on the contents of the received command, and the game control status command reception process is terminated.

In step S4404, the checksum value updated in step S4403 based on the contents of the 1st to 40th commands is compared with the checksum value included in the command received from the game control unit 302, and if the two are equal, it is determined to be normal and the process proceeds to step S4405, and if the two are different, the game control status command reception process is terminated.

In step S4405, the checksum value updated in step S4403 is cleared.

In step S4406, the value of the gaming machine status information buffer (the value of the gaming machine status information shown in FIG. 73(a)) from the contents of the command receiving buffer is set in RAM 358.

In step S4407, if the game control unit chip ID acquisition flag is off, the process proceeds to step S4408, and if the flag is on, the process proceeds to step S4410.

In step S4408, the acquired chip ID is obtained based on the information in the gaming machine installation information buffer from the contents of the command receiving buffer.

In step S4409, if the chip ID stored in RAM 358 matches the acquired chip ID acquired in step S4408, the process proceeds to step S4410, and if they do not match, the process proceeds to step S4414.

In step S4410, the value of the gaming machine installation information buffer (the value of the gaming machine installation information shown in FIG. 73(c)) from the contents of the command receiving buffer is set in RAM 358.

In step S4411, the value of the role ratio monitor information buffer from the contents of the command receiving buffer is set in RAM 358.

In step S4412, the value of the gaming machine performance information buffer from the contents of the command receiving buffer is set in RAM 358. Steps S4411 and S4412 set the value of the gaming machine performance information shown in FIG. 73(b) in RAM 358.

In step S4413, the game control unit chip ID acquisition flag is set to OFF, and this game control state command reception process is ended.

In step S4414, information indicating "chip ID number mismatch" (error code E7) is set as the error request setting value.

In step S4415, the error request setting process of FIG. 97 is executed, and this game control state command reception process is ended.

Next, details of the game control priority command reception process (step S4305) in the game control unit command reception process of FIG. 108 will be explained using FIGS. 110 and 111. These figures are flowcharts of the game control priority command reception process (step S4305) in FIG. 108.

First, in step S4501, which is executed first, if a triple command is received, the process proceeds to step S4502, and if a command other than a triple command is received, the process proceeds to step S4514 in FIG. 111. As described above, a triple command is a command consisting of a group of three commands sent in succession, and in this embodiment, the deposit command, settlement command, and payout command shown in FIG. 80(a) are each triple commands. In other words, if the above triple command is received among the game control priority commands, the process proceeds to step S4502, and if an error occurrence command, RAM clear command, or start lever acceptance command other than these commands is received, the process proceeds to step S4514 in FIG. 111.

In step S4502, if the last command of the triplet command has been received, the process proceeds to step S4504, otherwise the process proceeds to step S4503. In this embodiment, the last command of the triplet command is a checksum, and the value of this checksum is calculated based on the contents of the commands excluding the last command. In other words, for commands excluding the last command, the process proceeds to step S4503, where their contents are stored in the receive buffer, and when the last command has been received, the process proceeds to step S4504.

In step S4504, information indicating "request" is set in the response command.

In step S4505, a checksum is calculated based on the contents of the receive buffer updated in step S4503.

In step S4506, the checksum value calculated in step S4505 is compared with the checksum value included in the last command of the triplet command, and if the two are equal, the process is determined to be normal and proceeds to step S4507, but if the two are different, the game control priority command reception process is terminated.

In step S4507, if the game control command serial number update flag described below is on, the process proceeds to step S4508, and if the flag is off, the process proceeds to step S4510. In step S4508, the value of the serial number of the triplet command stored in the receive buffer is set to the value of the game control command serial number.

In step S4509, the game control command serial number update flag is set to OFF.

Note that steps S4507 to S4509 are provided to initialize the command sequence number for determination.

In step S4510, if the value of the serial number of the triplet command stored in the receive buffer is equal to the value of the game control command serial number (the game control command serial number (command serial number for determination) updated in the previous S4511), proceed to step S4511, and if they are different, proceed to step S4512.

In step S4511, 1 is added to the game control command serial number, and the process proceeds to step S4514 in FIG. 111.

In step S4512, information indicating "game control command serial number abnormality" (error code E3) is set as the error request setting value.

In step S4513, the error request setting process in FIG. 97 is executed, and this game control priority command receiving process is terminated.

In step S4514 in FIG. 111, if the received command is a RAM clear command, the process advances to step S4515; otherwise, the process advances to step S4516.

In step S4515, the RAM clear command is received. Note that in this embodiment, nothing is executed here.

In step S4516, if the received command is an input command, proceed to step S4517; otherwise, proceed to step S4518.

In step S4517, the command submission reception process is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 112.

In step S4518, if the received command is a settlement command, the process advances to step S4519; otherwise, the process advances to step S4520.

In step S4519, payment command reception processing is executed. Details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 113.

In step S4520, if the received command is a start lever reception command, proceed to step S4521; otherwise, proceed to step S4522.

In step S4521, start lever acceptance command reception processing is executed. Details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 114.

In step S4522, if the received command is a payout command, proceed to step S4523; otherwise, proceed to step S4524.

In step S4523, payout command reception processing is executed. Details of this process will be described later using FIG. 116.

In step S4523, an error occurrence command reception process is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 118.

Next, the details of the input command reception process (step S4517) in the game control priority command reception process in Figs. 110 and 111 will be described with reference to Fig. 112. This figure is a flowchart of the input command reception process (step S4517) in Fig. 111.

First, in step S4601, which is executed first, information indicating "request again" is set in the response command.

In step S4602, if the input prohibition flag is off, the process proceeds to step S4603, and if the flag is on, the input command reception process ends.

In step S4603, information indicating "abnormality" is set in the response command.

In step S4604, if the number of game medals is equal to or greater than the value contained in the received command (the value contained in the first command of the triple command), the process proceeds to step S4605; otherwise, the input command reception process ends.

In step S4605, the value contained in the received command (the value contained in the first command of the triple command) is added to the number of inserted medals.

In step S4606, the value included in the received command (the value included in the first command of the triple command) is added to the value of the current bet amount.

In step S4607, the value included in the received command (the value included in the first command of the three commands) is subtracted from the value of the number of game medals.

In step S4608, information indicating "normal" is set in the response command, and the input command reception process ends.

Next, the details of the settlement command reception process (step S4519) in the game control priority command reception process in FIGS. 110 and 111 will be described with reference to FIG. 113. This figure is a flowchart of the settlement command reception process (step S4519) in FIG. 111.

First, in step S4701, which is executed first, the value contained in the received command (the value contained in the first command of the triple command) is subtracted from the value of the current bet.

In step S4702, if the current bet value is 0, the process proceeds to step S4703, and if the value is not 0, the process proceeds to step S4706.

In step S4703, the value contained in the received command (the value contained in the first command of the triple command) is subtracted from the number of inserted medals.

In step S4704, the value included in the received command (the value included in the first command of the three commands) is added to the value of the number of game medals.
In step S4705, information indicating "normal" is set in the response command, and this payment command receiving process is ended.

In step S4706, information indicating "settlement quantity mismatch" (error code E6) is set as the error request setting value.

In step S4707, the error request setting process in FIG. 97 is executed, and this settlement command reception process is terminated.

Next, details of the start lever acceptance command reception process (step S4521) in the game control priority command reception process of FIGS. 110 and 111 will be explained using FIG. 114. This figure is a flowchart of the start lever acceptance command reception process (step S4521) in FIG. 111.

First, in step S4801 that is executed first, the payout command acquisition flag is set to on.

In step S4802, if the game interval abnormality timer is 0, the process proceeds to step S4803, and if the timer is not 0, the process proceeds to step S4807.

In step S4803, the value of the game interval abnormality timer is set to an initial value (in this embodiment, a value equivalent to 4.1 seconds).

In step S4804, 11H (see FIG. 76(a)) is set in the type information setting value, and in the following step S4805, the value of the received command (the current number of bets in the game control unit 302) is set in the count information setting value. The information set here is later included in the gaming machine information and transmitted to the lending machine 700.

In step S4806, the game information setting process is executed, and the start lever reception command reception process is terminated. Details of the game information setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 115.

In step S4807, information indicating "game interval abnormality" (error code E5) is set as the error request setting value.

In step S4808, the error request setting process in FIG. 97 is executed, and this start lever acceptance command reception process is terminated.

Next, details of the gaming information setting process (step S4806) in the start lever acceptance command receiving process in FIG. 114 and the gaming information setting process (step S4A19) in the payout command receiving process in FIG. 116 will be described using FIG. 115. This figure is a flowchart of the game information setting process (steps S4806 and S4A19) in FIGS. 114 and 116.

First, in step S4901, which is executed first, the number of game play information items is incremented by 1.

In step S4902, if the number of game information is 1, the process proceeds to step S4903, and if the number of game information is not 1 (it is 2), the process proceeds to step S4905.

In step S4903, the type information setting value (the value set in step S4804 in FIG. 114 or step S4A14 in FIG. 116) is set as type information 1.

In step S4904, the count information setting value is set as count information 1, and this game information setting process is terminated. Note that here, if the value set in step S4804 of FIG. 114 is set as type information 1, the value set in step S4805 is set, and if the value set in step S4A14 of FIG. 116 is set as type information 1, the value set in step S4A16 or step S4A18 is set.

In step S4905, the value of the type information setting value (the value set in step S4804 in FIG. 114) is set as type information 2.

In step S4906, the count information setting value (the value set in step S4805 in FIG. 114) is set as count information 2, and this game information setting process is terminated.

The type information 2 and the count information 2 are provided in order to transmit information about both of them in case the game starts quickly after the payout (within the transmission cycle to the lending machine 700). It is something that That is, when payout information (step S4A14, etc. in FIG. 116) is set in type information 1 and count information 1, information on the current number of bets (step S4804, etc. in FIG. 114) is set in type information 2 and count information 2. may be set to . Note that from the start of the game to the payout, the reels are rotated and stopped, and even if there is type information or count information during that time, it will be sent to the lending machine 700 (cleared), so the payout information is not the type information. 2 and count information 2 is never set.

Next, details of the payout command reception process (step S4523) in the game control priority command reception process of FIGS. 110 and 111 will be explained using FIG. 116. This figure is a flowchart of the payout command reception process (step S4523) in FIG. 111.

First, in step S4A01 that is executed first, the game medal number clear detection information is cleared.

In step S4A02, if the payout command acquisition flag is on, the process proceeds to step S4A03, and if the flag is off, the process proceeds to step S4A09.

In step S4A03, if the replay has been won, proceed to step S4A04, and if the replay has not been won, proceed to step S4A05.

In step S4A04, the additional value for the number of game medals is set to 0.

In step S4A05, information indicating "abnormal number of dispensed coins" (error code E4) is set as the error request setting value.

In step S4A06, if the value of the received command (the value included in the first command among the three commands) is 15 or less, the process proceeds to step S4A07, and if the same value is greater than 15, the process proceeds to step S4A10.

In step S4A07, the value of the number of payout medals is set to the value included in the received command (the value included in the first command of the triple command).

In step S4A08, the game medal count addition value is set to the value included in the received command (the value included in the first command of the triple command). In step S4A09, information indicating "game sequence abnormality" (error code E2) is set as the error request setting value.

In step S4A10, the error request setting process shown in FIG. 97 is executed, and this payout command reception process is ended.

In step S4A11, a game medal number overflow confirmation process is executed. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 117.

In step S4A12, if the information of the response command indicates "normal", the process advances to step S4A13; otherwise, this payout command receiving process is ended.

In step S4A13, the payout command acquisition flag is set to off.

In step S4A14, the type information setting value is set to 21H (see FIG. 76(a)).

In step S4A15, if the replay winning combination is won, the process proceeds to step S4A18, otherwise the process proceeds to step S4A16.

In step S4A16, the value of the received command (the value included in the first command of the three commands) is set as the count information setting value. Note that the first command of the payout commands here includes the number of coins to be paid out by the game control section 302, and this number of coins to be paid out is set in the count information setting value. The information set here is included in the gaming machine information and transmitted to the rental machine 700 together with the type information setting value.

In step S4A17, the current bet is set to 0.

In step S4A18, the current number of bets is set as the count information setting value. The information set here is included in the gaming machine information together with the type information setting value and is sent to the lending machine 700.

In step S4A19, the game information setting process of FIG. 115 is executed, and this payout command receiving process is terminated.

Next, the details of the medal count overflow confirmation process (step S4A11) in the payout command reception process in FIG. 116 will be described with reference to FIG. 117. This figure is a flowchart of the medal count overflow confirmation process (step S4A11) in FIG. 116.

First, in step S4B01 that is executed first, information indicating "abnormality" is set in the response command.

In step S4B02, the total value of the number of game medals and the added value of the number of game medals is set as the addition result.

In step S4B03, if the value of the sum is less than or equal to 16,383, the process proceeds to step S4B04, and if the value of the sum is greater than 16,383, the game medal count overflow confirmation process ends. In step S4B04, the value of the sum is set as the game medal count.

In step S4B05, information indicating "normal" is set in the response command, and this game medal number overflow confirmation process is ended.

Next, details of the error occurrence command reception process (step S4524) in the game control priority command reception process of FIGS. 110 and 111 will be explained using FIG. 118. This figure is a flowchart of the error occurrence command reception process (step S4524) in FIG. 111.

First, in step S4C01 that is executed first, the error request is cleared. When an error occurrence command is received from the game control section 302, the error on the medal number control section 350 side is cleared by the processing here, so the error on the game control section 302 is processed with priority.

In step S4C02, if information (error code E1) indicating "gaming control disconnection" is set in the received command, the process advances to step S4C08; otherwise, the process advances to step S4C03.

In step S4C03, if the received command contains information indicating an "abnormal game sequence" (error code E2), the process proceeds to step S4C08; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S4C04.

In step S4C04, if information (error code E3) indicating "gaming control command serial number abnormality" is set in the received command, the process proceeds to step S4C08, otherwise the process proceeds to step S4C05.

In step S4C05, if the received command contains information indicating a "medal count control RAM error" (error code E8), proceed to step S4C08; otherwise, proceed to step S4C06.

In step S4C06, if the received command contains information indicating a "medal count control disconnection" (error code E0), proceed to step S4C08; otherwise, proceed to step S4C07.

In step S4C07, if information indicating "defective game control RAM" (error code rE) is set in the received command, the process advances to step S4C08; otherwise, this error command reception process is ended.

In step S4C08, the game control command serial number update flag is set to ON, and this error occurrence command reception process is terminated. By setting this flag to ON, the command serial number for judgment is initialized (step S4508 in FIG. 110).

Next, the details of the error monitoring process (step S407) in the medal count control unit timer interrupt process in FIG. 104 will be described with reference to FIG. 119. This figure is a flowchart of the error monitoring process (step S407) in FIG. 104.

First, in step S4D01 which is executed first, if the value of the game control command disconnection timer is 1, the process proceeds to step S4D02, and if the same value is not 1, the process proceeds to step S4D04.

In step S4D02, information indicating "gaming control disconnection" (error code E1) is set as the error request setting value.

In step S4D03, the error request setting process shown in FIG. 97 is executed, and the process advances to step S4D04.

In step S4D04, if the value of the rental machine communication abnormality counter is 1, the process proceeds to step S4D05, and if the same value is not 1, this error monitoring process is ended.

In step S4D05, if the rental machine communication abnormality error setting flag is off, the process advances to step S4D06, and if the flag is on, this error monitoring process is ended.

In step S4D06, information indicating "rental machine communication abnormality" (error code E9) is set as the error request setting value.

In step S4D07, the error request setting process in FIG. 97 is executed, and this error monitoring process is terminated.

Next, the details of the medal count control command transmission process (step S408) to the game control unit in the medal count control unit timer interrupt process in FIG. 104 will be described with reference to FIG. 120. This figure is a flowchart of the medal count control command transmission process (step S408) to the game control unit in FIG. 104.

First, in step S4E01 that is executed first, the information of the VL signal is updated.

In step S4E02, if the power-on flag is off, the process proceeds to step S4E03, and if the flag is on, the process of sending the medal count control command to the game control unit is terminated.

In step S4E03, if the value of the strobe counter is 0, the process proceeds to step S4E04, and if the value is not 0, the process proceeds to step S4E09.

In step S4E04, if no response command to be sent to the game control unit 302 (a response command set in either the insert command receiving process in FIG. 112, the settlement command receiving process in FIG. 113, or the payout command receiving process in FIG. 116) has been set, the process proceeds to step S4E05, and if a response command has been set, the process proceeds to step S4E07.

In step S4E05, the command offset is repeatedly updated by incrementing by 1 within the range of 1 to 6 (after 6, the next command is 1). In this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the medal count control unit 350 repeatedly transmits medal count control state commands (six types of commands) described using FIG. 78 to the game control unit 302 in sequence. The command offset is used to sequentially switch the type of command to be transmitted.

In step S4E06, the command corresponding to the command offset and the information targeted by this command are read out to generate transmission contents, and the transmission contents are set in the transmission buffer addressed to the game control section 302. When transmitting information on the number of game medals, this value is divided into an upper byte and a lower byte and transmitted using two of six types of commands; The value of the number of game medals acquired when transmitting the first command is used.

In step S4E07, the response command set in either the insert command receiving process in FIG. 112, the settlement command receiving process in FIG. 113, or the payout command receiving process in FIG. 116 is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the game control unit 302.

In step S4E08, the response command set in either the deposit command reception process in FIG. 112, the settlement command reception process in FIG. 113, or the withdrawal command reception process in FIG. 116 is cleared.

In step S4E09, if the value of the strobe counter is less than or equal to 3, proceed to step S4E10, and if the value is greater than 3, proceed to step S4E11.

In step S4E10, the strobe signal addressed to the game control section 302 is set to ON.

In step S4E11, the contents of the transmission buffer addressed to the game control section 302 are cleared.

In step S4E12, the strobe signal addressed to the game control unit 302 is set to off, and the process proceeds to step S4E13.

In step S4E13, the value of the strobe counter is incremented by 1. Note that this value is repeatedly updated within the range of 0 to 7 (7 is followed by 0).

In step S4E14, the contents of the transmission buffer addressed to the game control unit 302 are output to the game control unit 302, and the process of sending medal count control commands addressed to the game control unit is terminated. Note that the information output here is received by the game control unit 302 when the strobe signal addressed to the game control unit 302 is set to on.

Next, the details of the display display process (step S409) in the medal count control unit timer interrupt process in FIG. 104 will be described with reference to FIG. 121. This figure is a flowchart of the display display process (step S409) in FIG. 104.

First, in step S4F01, which is executed first, if the value of the number of game medals is different from the value of the number of display game medals, the process proceeds to step S4F02, and if they are the same value, the process proceeds to step S4F07.

In step S4F02, if the value of the discrete timer is 0, the process proceeds to step S4F03, and if the same value is not 0, the process proceeds to step S4F07.

In step S4F03, if the value of the number of game medals is greater than the value of the number of game medals for display, the process proceeds to step S4F04, and if the value of the number of game medals is less than the value of the number of game medals for display, the process proceeds to step S4F05.

In step S4F04, 1 is added to the value of the number of game medals for display.

In step S4F05, the displayed number of game medals is decremented by one.

In step S4F06, the discrete timer value is set to a value equivalent to 4 ms.

In step S4F07, the number of display medals is displayed, and the display display process ends.

《Modification 1》
Here, a modification example (hereinafter referred to as modification 1) of the process related to inserting medals will be explained using FIGS. 122 to 124. 122 is a modification of the medal insertion process in FIG. 84, FIG. 123 is a modification of the triple command transmission process in FIG. 87, and FIG. 124 is a modification of the input command reception process in FIG. 112. be.

First, in the modification shown in FIG. 122, among the processes shown in FIG. 84, step S1121 is provided between step S1107 and step S1108, and step S1122 is provided between step S1109 and step S1110. Further, steps S1112 and S1113 in FIG. 84 are deleted and step S1123 is provided. These processes will be explained below.

In step S1121, the input number limitation flag is set to ON.

In step S1122, the input number limitation flag is set to OFF.

In step S1123, the value of the response content is added to the value of the current bet amount.

In the modified example shown in FIG. 123, step S1402 is deleted from the process shown in FIG. 87, and step S1421 is added. This process is described below.

In step S1421, information on the requested number of medals and the input number limitation flag is set in the lower byte of the content (2 bytes) transmitted to the medal number control unit 350.

In the modified example shown in FIG. 124, step S4603 has been deleted from the process shown in FIG. 112. In addition, steps S4621, S4622, and S4623 have been newly provided at the end of the route where the determination in step S4604 is No, and further, step S4608 has been deleted and step S4624 has been provided. These processes will be described below.

In step S4621, the input quantity limit flag information contained in the received command (the first of the three commands) is referenced, and if the flag is off, the process proceeds to step S4622, and if the flag is on, the process proceeds to step S4623.

In step S4622, the value of the requested number of medals contained in the received command (the first command of the triple command) is set as the number of medals to be played, and the process proceeds to step S4605.

In step S4623, the received command value that stores the requested number of copies included in the received command (the first command of the triple command) is set to 0, and the process proceeds to step S4624.

In step S4624, the received command value is set in the response command, and the input command reception process is terminated.

<<Variation 2>>
Here, a modified example of the scheduled count number update process (hereinafter, referred to as Modification 2) will be described with reference to Fig. 125. Fig. 125 shows a modified example of the scheduled count number update process of Fig. 107.

First, in the modified example shown in FIG. 125, step S4204 is deleted from the process shown in FIG. 107. Step S4206 is deleted and step S4221 is added, and step S4209 is deleted and step S4222 is added. These processes are described below.

In step S4221, the value of the long press timer is set according to the time that the count button 171 is pressed.

In step S4222, the planned number of coins to be counted is set according to the time the count button 171 is pressed.

《Modification 3》
Here, a modified example (hereinafter referred to as modified example 3) of the scheduled counting number update process will be described using FIG. 126. FIG. 126 is a modification of the scheduled counting number update process of FIG. 107.

First, in the modification shown in FIG. 126, steps S4231 and S4232 are provided before step S4207 in the process shown in FIG. 107. Moreover, steps S4233 and S4234 are newly provided after the route of No in the determination of step S4207, and steps S4235 and S4236 are further provided before step S4210. Furthermore, step S4237 is provided after step S4215. These processes will be explained below.

In step S4231, if the value of the automatic count timer is 0, proceed to step S4232, and if the value is not 0, proceed to step S4207.

In step S4232, the automatic count timer is set to a value equivalent to 2.0 seconds, and the process proceeds to step S4207.

In step S4233, if the value of the automatic counting timer is 1, the process proceeds to step S4234, and if the same value is not 1, the process proceeds to step S4235.

In step S4234, the automatic counting flag is set to on, and the process advances to step S4208.

In step S4235, if the automatic counting flag is off, the process advances to step S4210, and if the flag is on, the process advances to step S4236.

In step S4236, if the number of game medals is 0, the process proceeds to step S4213, and if the value is not 0, the process proceeds to step S4208.

In step S4237, the automatic counting flag is set to OFF, and this process of updating the scheduled number of sheets to be counted ends.

<<Processing of the first sub-control unit 400>>
Next, the processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be explained using Figure 127. Note that Figure 127 (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. Figure 127 (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400. Figure 127 (c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400.
First, in step S501, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S501. In this initialization process, the input/output ports are initialized, and a storage area in the RAM 408 is initialized. In this process, an area for storing internal win information, which is information indicating the result of an internal win, and an area for storing RT update information, which is information indicating the game status, are provided in the RAM 408.

In step S503, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process moves to step S505.

In step S505, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S507, command processing is executed, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the game control unit 302. Details of this command processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 127(d).

In step S509, production control processing is performed. Here, preparations for the performance are made in accordance with the performance reservation information in the performance reservation area provided in the RAM 408. This preparation includes, for example, performing processing such as reading the effect data from the ROM 406, and performing an update process of the effect data if it is necessary to update the effect data.

In step S511, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S509. For example, if the performance data read in step S509 includes a command to the sound source IC 418, this command is output to the sound source IC 418.

In step S513, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S509. For example, if the performance data read in step S509 includes commands for the various lamps 420, these commands are output to the drive circuit 422.

In step S515, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S509. For example, if there is a command for shutter control in the effect data read in step S509, shutter control corresponding to this command is performed.

In step S517, an information output process is performed to set up sending a control command to the second sub-control unit 500 based on the processing result of step S509. For example, if the performance data read in step S509 contains a control command to be sent to the second sub-control unit 500, settings are made to output this control command, and the process returns to step S503.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be explained using FIG. 127(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process that is executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output by the game control unit 302. In step S521 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the game control unit 302 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

Next, the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. 127(c). The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and uses this timer interrupt as a trigger to perform timer interrupt processing in a predetermined manner. Execute at the cycle of

In step S531, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S503 in the first sub-control unit main processing shown in FIG. 127(a), and the value is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S503, it is determined that the value of the timer variable is 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S533, the device data set in step S515 is sent to the second sub-control unit 500, and the random number values for performance are updated.

Next, details of the command processing (step S507) in the first sub-control unit main processing of FIG. 127(a) will be described using FIG. 127(d). This figure is a flowchart of command processing (step S507) in FIG. 127(a).

First, in step S541 that is executed first, it is determined whether there is an unprocessed command. If this condition is met, the process advances to step S543; otherwise, this command processing is ended.

In step S543, command processing is executed, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the game control unit 302.

<<Processing of the second sub-control unit 500>>
Next, the processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 128. Note that FIG. 128(a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 128(b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing by the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 128(c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing by the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 128(d) is a flowchart of image control processing by the second sub-control unit 500.

First, in step S601 in FIG. 128(a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S601. In this initialization process, the input/output ports are initialized, and the memory area in RAM 508 is initialized.

In step S603, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process moves to step S605.

In step S605, the timer variable is assigned the value 0.

In step S607, command processing is performed. In the command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 .

In step S609, effect control processing is performed. Specifically, if there is a new command in step S607, processing corresponding to this command is performed. For example, a process of reading out effect data for controlling an image related to a background image from the ROM 506 is executed. It also includes performing processes such as reading out performance data other than this from the ROM 506, and performing update processing of the performance data when it is necessary to update the performance data.

In step S611, image control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S609. For example, if there is an image control command in the effect data read in step S609, image control corresponding to this command is performed. For example, image control regarding display images (notification images, background images) is performed. This image control processing will be described later using FIG. 128(d). When this image control process ends, the process returns to step S603. Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be explained using FIG. 128(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process that is executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first sub-control unit 400. In step S615 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

Next, using FIG. 128(c), we will explain the second sub-control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 is equipped with a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and this timer interrupt is used as a trigger to execute the timer interrupt processing at a predetermined period.

In step S617, the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 508 described in step S603 in the second sub-control unit main processing shown in FIG. 128(a) is incremented by 1 and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S603, the timer variable value is determined to be 10 or greater every 20 ms (2 ms x 10).

In step S619, processing for updating the random number value for effect, etc. is performed.

Next, the image control processing of step S611 in the main processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 128(d). This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the image control processing.

In step S621, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the drawing area of display area A and display area B of the VRAM 518. As a result, one frame of image stored in a display area not designated as a drawing area is displayed on the performance image display device 157. Next, the CPU 504 sets the ROM coordinates (the source address of the ROM 506), the VRAM coordinates (the destination address of the VRAM 518), etc. in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then sets a command to start transferring image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the command set in the attribute register. The VDP 516 then outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S623, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal has been input from VDP516. If a transfer end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S625; if not, the process waits for the transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S625, parameter settings are performed based on the production scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S621, the CPU 504 displays information on image data constituting the display image (coordinate axes of the VRAM 518, image size , VRAM coordinates (placement coordinates), image overlay and transparency, etc.) to the VDP 516. The VDP 516 performs parameter settings according to attributes based on instructions stored in the attribute register.

In step S627, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to instructions from the CPU 504.

In step S629, it is determined whether a generation end interrupt signal has been input from VDP516 based on the end of image drawing. If a generation end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S631; if not, the process waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S631, the scene display counter, which is set in a specified area of RAM 508 and counts how many scene images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<<Operation Description>>
The operation of the above-described slot machine 100 will now be described.

[Operation when power is turned on]
In the medal number control unit 350, the contents of the RAM are backed up when the power is turned off. If it is determined that there is no abnormality in the RAM when the power is turned on, normal RAM clearing processing is performed and the state returns to the state when the power was turned off (Yes in step S3003 in FIG. 95). Note that when the power is turned on for the first time, it is in the initial state.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the RAM is abnormal when the power is turned on, all RAM is cleared (No in step S3003 in FIG. 95). Furthermore, by storing information indicating "RAM failure" in the RAM failure information, information indicating "RAM failure" (error code E8) is set in the error request (Yes in step S3006 and step S3020 in FIG. 95, and step S3102 in FIG. 97). This error information is sent to the game control unit 302 (FIG. 120), and an error notification based on this information is executed (step S1002 in FIG. 92 and FIG. 83). Note that the game control unit 302 does not clear the contents of the RAM even if it receives an error from the medal count control unit 350. Furthermore, by setting the game control unit chip ID acquisition flag to ON in the medal count control unit 350, various information is updated (initialized) when the game control unit status command is received (Yes in step S3007 in FIG. 95 and step S4407 in FIG. 109).

Further, a RAM clear command may be transmitted from the gaming control unit 302 when the power is turned on (step S101 in FIG. 82). The medal number control unit 350 that has received this RAM clear command employs a configuration that clears the RAM in response to the RAM clear command from the game control unit 302 (determination of Yes in step S3016 in FIG. 95). At this time, the medal number control unit 350 once permits the interrupt process, and then, upon receiving a command from the game control unit 302, disables the interrupt process and performs the subsequent process. The process upon reception can be reliably executed (steps S3012 to S3014 in FIG. 95). Furthermore, by setting the power-on flag to OFF while interrupts are permitted, the counting process by operating the counting button 171 is not executed (steps S3011 and S3015 in FIG. 95).

In addition, in the medal number control unit 350, the number of game medals can be initialized by operating the number of game medals clear button 172 when the power is turned on (determination of Yes in step S3008 in FIG. 95). At this time, information indicating "detected" is set in the gaming medal number clear detection information, but while this information is set, information regarding this clearing is included in the gaming machine information notification and the rental machine 700 (Figure 99). Note that the game medal count clear detection information is cleared when a payout command is received from the game control unit 302 (step S4A01 in FIG. 116).

[Game control state command transmission (periodic transmission from the game control unit 302 to the medal count control unit 350)] In the slot machine 100, 41 types of game control state commands (see FIG. 77) are transmitted to the medal count control unit 350. Specifically, in the game control command transmission process (step S207 in FIG. 90, FIG. 93) of the game control unit timer interrupt process of the game control unit 302, the game control state commands are set one by one in the transmission buffer for the medal count control unit (determination of Yes in step S2201 in FIG. 93). However, if the game control priority command has been set in the transmission buffer for the medal count control unit 350 first, the game control state command is not set in the transmission buffer (determination of No in step S2201 in FIG. 93).

After the game control status command and the game control priority command are set in the transmission buffer addressed to the medal number control unit 350, the contents of this transmission buffer are output and the strobe signal is set on (step S2208 in FIG. 93). (Determination of Yes). By setting this strobe signal to ON, the medal number control unit 350 side receives a command. Note that the strobe signal is set to OFF in the next interrupt processing and the contents of the transmission buffer are also cleared (No determination in step S2208 in FIG. 93), but the output from the I/O port remains unchanged. . This makes it possible to more stably receive commands on the medal number control unit 350 side. When the contents of the transmission buffer are cleared, the contents of the transmission buffer are updated in order to transmit a new command in the next interrupt process (Yes in step S2201 in FIG. 93). That is, in the game control unit 302, one command is transmitted while two interrupt processes are executed, and the transmission state and the transmission stop state are switched each time one interrupt process is executed. In addition, while the transmission state continues for 1.49ms (however, the command output itself continues for 2.98ms), the gaming control unit 302 has two reception timings (interrupt processing of 0.745ms is performed twice). Therefore, it is possible to prevent commands from being missed.

[Game control priority command transmission (interrupt transmission from the game control unit 302 to the medal count control unit 350)]
In the game control unit 302, a game control state command is sent to the medal count control unit 350 in the timer interrupt process, but a game control priority command is sent to the medal count control unit 350 in priority according to the game situation in the game control unit main process. More specifically, when the transmission buffer becomes empty in the game control command transmission process (FIG. 93), the game control priority command is set in the transmission buffer in the game control unit main process before the game control command transmission process in the next timer interrupt process is executed (the next game control state command is set in the transmission buffer), and this game control priority command is sent to the medal count control unit 350 in priority to the game control state command. The game control priority command includes an insertion command associated with an insertion operation of a game medal, a settlement command associated with a settlement operation of the game medals currently set to the bet number, a start lever acceptance command associated with the acceptance of a start lever operation, a payout command associated with the payout of a game medal, an error occurrence command associated with an error occurrence, and a RAM clear command associated with a RAM clear (FIG. 80(a)).

Among the game control priority commands, the input command, settlement command, and payout command each consist of three commands. The first command is a command that includes information on the number of target game medals, the second command is a command that includes the communication number (command serial number) of the game control priority command, and the third command is a command that includes information on the number of target game medals. This command includes a checksum based on the contents of two commands. These commands are sometimes called triple commands because they are sent consecutively without being interrupted by other commands. Furthermore, the values of the upper bytes of the triple command are consecutive values.

Note that if the response command from the medal number control unit 350 is not received, or if the response command from the medal number control unit 350 includes information indicating “request”, the command is retransmitted. (No determination in step S1308 in FIG. 86, No determination in step S1310) exceeds the upper limit number of retransmissions, information indicating "abnormality" is set as a response result from the medal number control unit 350. (No determination in step S1302 and step S1306).

Furthermore, if the response command from the medal number control unit 350 includes information other than “request”, this information is set in the response result from the medal control unit, and the command sequence number is incremented by 1 (see Figure 86 steps S1311, S1312).

[Operation of game control unit 302 due to input operation (transmission of input command, etc.)]
When the game medal insertion operation is performed, the number of game medals (requested number) required by this operation is determined (steps S1105 to S1109 in FIG. 84). In this embodiment, two types of bet buttons, the 1 bet button and the MAX bet button, can be used to perform the placing operation. If the MAX bet button is operated, the number of game medals required to set the maximum bet amount is set to the requested number (step S1107 in FIG. 84), and if the 1 bet button is operated, 1 is set to the requested number of medals. is set (step S1109 in FIG. 84). However, if the current number of bets is the maximum number of bets, the required number of coins is set to 0 by the insertion operation (No determination in step S1106 in FIG. 84).

Next, a command consisting of upper byte data indicating that it is an input command and lower byte data indicating the requested number of coins (the first of the commands constituting the input command) is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the medal count control unit 350 (steps S1110 and S1111 in FIG. 84, steps S1402 and S1403 in FIG. 87, and FIG. 88). When the game control command transmission process of the game control unit timer interrupt process (steps S207 and S207 in FIG. 90 and FIG. 93) is executed in this state, the game control status command is not set in the transmission buffer, and the command previously set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the medal count control unit 350 (No is determined in step S2201 in FIG. 93).

After that, when the transmission buffer is cleared in the game control command transmission process of the next game control unit timer interrupt process (No determination in step S2208 in FIG. 93), the checksum is updated, and the upper byte data is added to 1. The command is added and updated to a value indicating the second command, and the command consisting of the lower byte data indicating the command serial number (the second of the commands that make up the input command) is sent to the transmission buffer addressed to the medal number control unit 350. is set (steps S1404 to S1407 in FIG. 87, FIG. 88). Then, in the game control command transmission process of the next game control unit timer interrupt process (step S207 in FIG. 90, FIG. 93), the command of the transmission buffer is sent to the medal number control unit 350, and the next game control unit timer interrupt process When the transmission buffer is cleared in the game control command transmission process (No determination in step S2208 in FIG. 93), the checksum is updated, and 1 is added to the upper byte data to indicate the third command. At the same time, a command consisting of lower byte data indicating the checksum (the third of the commands composing the input command) is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the medal number control unit 350 (step S1408 in FIG. 87). ~S1411, Figure 88). Then, in the game control command transmission process (step S207 in FIG. 90, FIG. 93) of the next game control unit timer interrupt process, the command of the transmission buffer is transmitted to the medal number control unit 350.

The insertion command is sent to the medal count control unit 350 in the above manner, and if the response command to this command contains information indicating "normal", the requested number of medals is added to the current bet value (Yes in step S1112 of Figure 84).

Note that in the case where a re-game combination is won and a re-game is awarded (the re-game flag is on), the process of the input command described above is not executed (No determination in step S1104 in FIG. 84).

In addition, even if the bet button is operated, the input command is not sent from the time the input command is sent until the response command is received from the medal number control unit 350 (step S1112 in FIG. 84 receives the response command). ).

In addition, when the bet button is operated, a command is sent to the first sub-control unit 400 (step S1114 in FIG. 84), regardless of whether a response command to the insertion command is received or the contents of the response command from the medal count control unit 350. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives this command, it can execute a presentation corresponding to the operation of the bet button.

[Operation of the gaming control unit 302 in response to a settlement operation (transmission of a settlement command, etc.)]
When the insertion operation is performed, the current bet amount is increased accordingly, and by operating the settlement button 134 (settling operation), the game medals set to the current bet amount can be settled.

When the settlement operation is performed, the current bet value is set as the number of game medals (requested number) requested in the settlement operation (No in step S1101 of FIG. 84, step S1203 of FIG. 85).

Next, a command (the first of the commands that make up the payment command) consisting of upper byte data indicating that it is a settlement command and lower byte data indicating the value of the requested number of coins is sent to the medal number control unit 350. It is set in the transmission buffer (steps S1204 and S1205 in FIG. 85, steps S1402 and S1403 in FIG. 87, and FIG. 88). When the game control command transmission process (step S207 in FIG. 90, FIG. 93) of the game control unit timer interrupt process is executed in this state, the game control status command is not set in the transmission buffer, but is first set in the transmission buffer. The command being displayed is transmitted to the medal number control unit 350 (No determination in step S2201 in FIG. 93).

Next, the second and third commands that make up the settlement command are sent, but the process for these is the same as for the input command, so a description will be omitted.

A settlement command is sent to the medal number control unit 350 in the above flow, but if the response command to this command includes information indicating that it is "normal", the current value of the number of bets becomes 0. is set (Yes in step S1206 in FIG. 85).

In the above example, the value of the current bet becomes 0 after the response command is received (if a response command indicating "normal" is received, the value of the current bet is subtracted), and the value of the current bet is not subtracted before the response command is received. On the other hand, the medal count control unit 350 that received the settlement command adds the number of game medals, so at this point, the number of game medals owned by the player is temporarily increased. If a response command indicating "normal" is not received, the value of the current bet is not subtracted and an error occurs (No judgment in step S1206 of FIG. 85). However, if this error is avoided by some means, the value of the current bet is not subtracted, so that the number of medals increases by the amount of the medal count control unit 350 that added the number of game medals, and game medals are acquired illegally by the settlement operation. For this reason, the value of the current bet may be set to 0 before and after the settlement command is sent, and a configuration may be adopted in which the response command to the settlement command is not waited for (response command not used). Note that with this configuration that does not use response commands, there is a risk that errors in the communication state will not be discovered, but by configuring it to use response commands for input commands, errors in the communication state can be discovered, so that communication quality does not decrease. Note that command indexes can be managed between the game control unit 302 and the medal count control unit 350, and an error can be generated if the number of mismatches reaches a predetermined number (e.g., five times). With this configuration, it is possible to prevent operations based on fraudulent information from being performed.

Note that when the medal number control unit 350 receives a payment command that includes information on the number of medals exceeding the number of inserted medals, the payment may not be accepted and an error may be detected. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent game medals from being fraudulently acquired.

If the medal count control unit 350 receives a settlement command that includes information on the number of medals exceeding 16, it may not accept the settlement and may result in an error. This configuration can prevent game medals from being acquired fraudulently.

Note that when the medal number control unit 350 receives a payment command including information on the number of medals exceeding 16,384, the payment may not be accepted and an error may be detected. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent game medals from being fraudulently acquired.

In addition, in the case where a re-game combination is won and a re-game is awarded (the re-game flag is on), the processing of the above settlement command is not executed (No determination in step S1202 in FIG. 85).

Furthermore, when the payment button 134 is operated, a command is sent to the first sub-control unit 400 regardless of whether or not a payment command is sent or the content of the response command from the medal number control unit 350 ( Step S1201 in FIG. 85). The first sub-control unit 400 that has received this command can execute an effect corresponding to the operation of the payment button 134.

[Operation of the game control unit 302 by operating the start lever (transmission of start lever reception command, etc.)]
When the start lever is operated while the current bet value is equal to or greater than the startable number, a command (start lever acceptance command) consisting of upper byte data indicating the start lever acceptance command and lower byte data indicating the current bet value is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the medal count control unit 350 (steps S1012 to S1014 in FIG. 83). Furthermore, the start lever acceptance command is sent to the first sub-control unit 400 (step S1014 in FIG. 83). The first sub-control unit 400 that receives this command can execute a performance corresponding to the operation of the start lever.

[Operation of game control unit 302 due to payout (transmission of payout command, etc.)]
When the game ends and a payout winning combination is won, the value of the payout number is set to the number of game medals (requested number) required for payout (step S1602 in FIG. 89). Next, a command (the first of the commands constituting the payout command) consisting of upper byte data indicating that it is a payout command and lower byte data indicating the value of the requested number of medals is addressed to the medal number control unit 350. It is set in the transmission buffer (steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 89, steps S1402 and S1403 in FIG. 87, and FIG. 88). When the game control command transmission process (step S207 in FIG. 90, FIG. 93) of the game control unit timer interrupt process is executed in this state, the game control status command is not set in the transmission buffer, but is first set in the transmission buffer. The command being displayed is transmitted to the medal number control unit 350 (No determination in step S2201 in FIG. 93).

Next, the second and third commands that make up the payout command are sent, but as this processing is the same as for the insert command, a description will be omitted. The payout command is sent to the medal count control unit 350 in the above manner, and if the response command to this command contains information indicating "normal", a command is sent to the first sub-control unit 400 (step S1607 in FIG. 89). The first sub-control unit 400, which receives this command, can execute a performance corresponding to the payout.

On the other hand, if the response command is "abnormal" and nothing is set in the error request, the number of game medals has overflowed and the payout cannot be accepted, so the command indicating this state is The information is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 (step S1608 in FIG. 89). The first sub-control unit 400 that has received this command can perform an effect corresponding to the overflow. Note that if the overflow condition is not resolved, the retransmission of the payout command is repeated and the game becomes unable to proceed. In this case, the overflow state can be resolved by operating the count button 171. Once the overflow condition is resolved, the performance corresponding to the payout is executed and the game can be played. That is, if the game cannot proceed due to an overflow, the player can deal with the situation by himself without calling a store clerk.

[Operation when receiving medal number control command]
When the game control unit 302 receives a command from the medal number control unit 350 (detected by switching the strobe signal, step S2101 in FIG. 92), it determines the type of this command (game control status command (FIG. 78) or response command (FIG. 80). (b)), and the contents of the RAM 308 are updated according to the type of command (step S2102 in FIG. 92).The response commands for the input command, settlement command, and payout command are the contents updated here. In addition, if the command received here is a command that includes an error code, this error code indicates an error in the game control unit 302, provided that the error status in the game control unit 302 is not set. The status is set (step S2104 in FIG. 92).

[Transmission of medal number control command (from medal number control unit 350 to game control unit 302)]
In the slot machine 100, six types of medal number control state commands (see FIG. 78) are transmitted to the game control section 302. Specifically, by the medal number control unit timer interrupt process of the medal number control unit 350 that sends a medal number control command to the game control unit (step S408 in FIG. 104, FIG. 120), one medal number control state command is sent. 120 (Yes determination in step S4E04 of FIG. 120). However, if the response command is first set in the transmission buffer addressed to the game control unit 302, the medal number control state command is not set in the transmission buffer (No determination in step S4E04 of FIG. 120).

The medal number control state command and response command set in the transmission buffer addressed to the game control unit 302 are then output to the game control unit 302 (step S4E14 in FIG. 120). In this state, if the strobe signal is set to ON (step S4E10 in FIG. 120), the command will be received on the game control section 302 side. In addition, in managing the on/off of the strobe signal, a strobe counter that is incremented by 1 for each interrupt in the range of 0 to 7 is used, and when the strobe counter is between 0 and 3, it is set to on. It is set to off between 4 and 7 (steps S4E09 and S4E13 in FIG. 120). Note that the transmission buffer is updated when the strobe counter is 0 (step S4E03 in FIG. 120). In other words, in the medal number control unit 350, one command is transmitted while eight interrupt processes are executed, and the transmission state and the transmission stop state are switched every four interrupt processes. . In addition, while the transmission state continues for 2.98ms (0.745ms x 4 times), the game control unit 302 has two reception timings (two 1.49ms interrupt processing), so the command It is possible to prevent omissions.

[Operation when game control status command is received]
When the medal count control unit 350 receives a command from the game control unit 302 (detected by switching of the strobe signal, step S4301 in Figure 108), if the command is a game control state command, it executes a game control state command receiving process (step S4304 in Figure 108, Figure 109).

41 types of game control status commands (Fig. 77) are sequentially transmitted, but the 1st to 40th commands are temporarily stored in the buffer and the checksum is updated (if No in step S4401 of Fig. 109) judgment). When the 41st command (checksum) is received, if the contents are normal, the checksum is cleared and the RAM is updated based on the information temporarily stored in the buffer (step S4406 in FIG. 109, S4410-S4413). However, when updating the gaming machine installation information buffer, role ratio monitor information buffer, and gaming machine performance information buffer, it is executed when the chip ID stored in RAM and the chip ID in the gaming machine installation information buffer match. (Yes in step S4409 in FIG. 109). Note that if the IDs do not match, error code E7 is set as an error request (No determination in step S4409 in FIG. 109). In addition, if all RAM is cleared in the medal number control unit 350, the chip ID stored in the RAM has been cleared, so in this case, as an exception, the above chip ID check is not performed. The update process is executed (the gaming control unit chip ID acquisition flag is turned on in FIG. 95, and the determination is No in step S4407 in FIG. 109).

[Operation when receiving game control priority command]
When the medal number control unit 350 receives a command from the game control unit 302 (detected by switching the strobe signal, step S4301 in FIG. 108), if this command is a game control priority command, the game control priority command reception process (FIG. 108) is performed. Step S4305, FIG. 110, FIG. 111) is executed.

First, if the game control priority command is not a triple command (RAM clear command, start lever reception command, error occurrence command), processing corresponding to each command is executed (FIG. 111).

On the other hand, if the game control priority command is a triple command (input command, settlement command, payout command), the first and second commands are temporarily stored in the buffer (step S4503 in FIG. 110), and the third command is If so, the checksum value included in this command is compared with the checksum calculated from the contents previously stored in the buffer, and if it is abnormal, information indicating "request" is sent as a response command. (Steps S4504 to S4606 in FIG. 110).

Next, if the gaming control command serial number update flag is on, the gaming control command serial number is updated to the value of the command serial number stored in the reception buffer, and the gaming control command serial number updating flag is set to off (Fig. 110 (Yes determination in step S4507). Note that the game control command serial number update flag is a flag that is set to ON in order to prevent a situation where an error in the command serial number occurs separately after the error is resolved (FIG. 118).

Next, it is determined whether the game control command serial number matches the command serial number stored in the receive buffer (step S4510 in FIG. 110). Since the game control unit 302 and medal count control unit 350 both add 1 to the command serial number (step S1312 in FIG. 86, step S4511 in FIG. 110), these values will match if there are no abnormalities. If these values do not match, error code E3 is set to an error request (No determination in step S4510 in FIG. 110).

After the above processing, processing corresponding to each command is executed (FIG. 111).

[Operation when receiving a submission command]
If the received game control priority command is an insertion command, an insertion command reception process is executed (step S4517 in FIG. 111, FIG. 112). In this process, if the value included in the insertion command (hereinafter, the requested number of insertions) is within the number of game medals, the requested number of insertions is added to the number of insertion medals, the requested number of insertions is added to the current bet number, the requested number of insertions is subtracted from the number of game medals, and then information indicating "normal" is set in the response command (Yes in step S4604 in FIG. 112). If the requested number of insertions is greater than the number of game medals, information indicating "abnormal" is set in the response command (No in steps S4603 and S4604 in FIG. 112). The value of the number of insertion medals is a value used in the game machine information transmitted to the lending machine 700, and is initialized to 0 each time the game machine information is transmitted (step S3308 in FIG. 99).

Note that while the counting notification transmission process is being executed, the input prohibition flag is set on (step S3509 in FIG. 101), and when this flag is on, information indicating "re-request" is included in the response command. is set (No determination in steps S4601 and S4602 in FIG. 112).

[Operation when receiving payment command]
If the received game control priority command is a settlement command, settlement command reception processing is executed (step S4519 in FIG. 111, FIG. 113). In this process, the value included in the settlement command (hereinafter referred to as the number of coins requested for settlement) is subtracted from the current bet amount (step S4701 in FIG. 113). If the current value of the number of bets is 0, the number of coins requested for settlement is subtracted from the number of inserted medals, the number of coins requested for settlement is added to the number of gaming medals, and then information indicating "normal" is set in the response command. (Yes in step S4702 of FIG. 113). Note that the value of the number of inserted medals is a value used in gaming machine information transmitted to the lending machine 700, and is initialized to 0 each time gaming machine information is transmitted (step S3308 in FIG. 99). Note that if the current bet number is not 0, error code E6 is set as an error request (No determination in step S4702 in FIG. 113).

[Operation when receiving start lever reception command]
If the received game control priority command is a start lever acceptance command, the payout command acquisition flag is set to on (step S4801 in FIG. 114). If this flag is not set to on, an error may occur in the subsequent payout command reception process, and fraud prevention may be discovered. Next, if the value of the game interval abnormality timer is 0 (determination of Yes in step S4802 in FIG. 114), the initial value is set in the game interval abnormality timer (step S4803 in FIG. 114), and further, game information is set. The processing to do so is executed (steps S4804 to S4806 in FIG. 114). Here, 11H is set as the type information setting value, and this value indicates reception of the start lever. Further, the current bet amount is set in the count information setting value. That is, in these processes, information on the number of game medals used by reception of the start lever is stored as game information. Note that the gaming information is information used for gaming machine information transmitted to the lending machine 700, and the number of pieces of this information is initialized each time gaming machine information is transmitted (step S3310 in FIG. 99). Note that if the game interval abnormality timer is not 0, error code E5 is set as an error request (No determination in step S4802 in FIG. 114). This game interval abnormal timer is a timer similar to the game interval counter (step S106 in FIG. 82) in the game control unit 302, but by using this timer in the medal number control unit 350 separately from the game control unit 302, Preventing fraud.

[Operation when receiving a payout command]
If the received game control priority command is a payout command, first the game medal number clear detection information is cleared. This information is set by operating the game medal number clear button 172 when the power is turned on, but the configuration is such that this information is sent to the lending machine 700 until it is cleared upon reception of this payout command. ing.

Next, if the payout command acquisition flag is not on, error code E2 is set as an error request (No determination in step S4A02 of FIG. 116). This flag is set to ON when the start lever reception command is received, so if this flag is OFF, it means that the payout command has been received even though the start lever reception command has not been received. Used to prevent fraud.

Next, if a replay win has been won, the game medal number addition value is set to 0 (step S4A04 in FIG. 116). In cases other than a replay win, if the value included in the payout command (hereinafter, the payout number) is 15 or less, the payout medal number and game medal number addition value are set to the payout medal number, respectively (steps S4A07 and S4A08 in FIG. 116). The payout medal number value is a value used in the gaming machine information sent to the rental machine 700, and is initialized to 0 each time the gaming machine information is sent (step S3309 in FIG. 99). If the payout number is greater than 15, error code E4 is set as an error request (No is determined in steps S4A05 and S4A06 in FIG. 116).

Subsequently, a game medal number overflow confirmation process is executed (step S4A11 in FIG. 116, FIG. 117). Here, if the total value of the number of game medals and the additional value of the number of game medals is less than or equal to 16383, which is the upper limit for the number of game medals for payout, this total value is set as the number of game medals, and "normal" is indicated in the response command. The information is set (Yes in step S4B03 of FIG. 117). On the other hand, if the total value is greater than the upper limit for the number of game medals, the number of game medals is maintained as is, and information indicating "abnormality" is set in the response command (No determination in step S4B03 of FIG. 117). In addition, regarding the determination of the number of game medals here, as described later (see [Rental notification (periodically transmitted from lending machine 700 to medal number control unit 350)]), in actual operation, the number of game medals is equal to the actual threshold value. If it exceeds the actual threshold value, it cannot be increased by dispensing (response command ``abnormal''), and if it does not exceed the actual threshold value, it can be increased by dispensing (response command ``normal''). Any process may be used for the determination process and the determination value (16383 in this embodiment); for example, the actual threshold value does not need to be the same as the determination value in the process.

If information indicating "abnormality" is set in the response command in the game medal number overflow confirmation process, the payout command reception process ends and this response command is sent to the game control unit 302.

On the other hand, if information indicating "normal" is set in the response command, the payout command acquisition flag is set to OFF (step S4A13 in FIG. 116). Furthermore, processing for setting game information is executed (steps S4A14 to S4A19 in FIG. 116). Here, 21H is set as the type information setting value, and this value indicates that there has been a payout. Further, the number of coins to be paid out (the current number of bets in the case of replay winnings) is set as the count information setting value. That is, in these processes, information on the number of game medals obtained by payout is stored as game information. Note that the gaming information is information used for gaming machine information transmitted to the lending machine 700, and the number of pieces of this information is initialized each time gaming machine information is transmitted (step S3310 in FIG. 99).

[Gaming Machine Information Notification (Periodic Transmission from the Medal Count Control Unit 350 to the Rental Machine 700)]
In the medal count control unit 350, a gaming machine information notification is transmitted in the medal count control unit main process (step S304 in FIG. 94, FIG. 99). This gaming machine information notification is configured to be executed at intervals of about 300 ms by a gaming machine information notification interval timer (steps S3301, S3302 in FIG. 99). In addition, a count notification interval timer for adjusting the time until the count notification executed after the transmission of this gaming machine information notification is set to 90 ms (step S3303 in FIG. 99).

Next, the value of the current number of game medals is set as the number of game medals for counting and determination. In the slot machine 100, since the number of game medals may change when performing the counting process (transferring the number of game medals from the medal number control unit 350 to the lending machine 700), the value for the counting process is temporarily changed. is set as the number of game medals for count determination (step S3304 in FIG. 99).

Next, the gaming machine information type is obtained (step S3305 in FIG. 99, FIG. 100). The gaming machine information notification includes gaming machine information, and one of three types of gaming machine information is selected as this gaming machine information: gaming machine installation information, gaming machine performance information, and hall control/fraud monitoring information (FIG. 75 (b)). Specifically, when the gaming machine information type is 0, gaming machine performance information is selected, when it is 1, gaming machine installation information is selected, and when it is 2, hall control/fraud monitoring information is selected. Here, using the gaming machine installation information transmission interval timer and the gaming machine performance information transmission interval timer, 0, 1, or 2 is set as the gaming machine information type (FIG. 100). In this embodiment, the gaming machine information type is set to 1 at approximately 60 second intervals, the gaming machine information type is set to 0 at approximately 180 second intervals, and otherwise the gaming machine information type is set to 2. That is, in the gaming machine information notification with a cycle of about 300 ms, the gaming machine information mainly contains hall control and fraud monitoring information, but the gaming machine information contains gaming machine installation information at intervals of about 60 seconds, and the gaming machine information contains gaming machine performance information at intervals of about 180 seconds. The data that is the subject of the gaming machine information notification (FIG. 75(a)(b)), including the gaming machine information according to the gaming machine information type, is set in the transmission buffer for the loaned machine (step S3306 in FIG. 99) and transmitted sequentially (steps S3311 to S3317 in FIG. 99). Note that the gaming machine information serial number is updated during this transmission (step S3318 in FIG. 99).

The hall control/fraud monitoring information corresponding to the gaming machine information type 2 includes gaming information according to the number of medals inserted, the number of medals paid out, and the number of gaming information items, but after this information is set in the transmission buffer for the loaned machine, it is initialized in preparation for the next transmission (Yes is determined in step S3307 in FIG. 99).

[Counting notification (periodically transmitted from the medal count control unit 350 to the lending machine 700)]
In the medal count control unit 350, a counting notification is transmitted in the medal count control unit main process (step S305 in FIG. 94, FIG. 101). This counting notification transmission process is configured to be executed 90 ms or more after the start of the gaming machine information notification transmission process (step S3303 in FIG. 99, step S3501 in FIG. 101).

In the counting notification transmission process, the data to be notified of the counting (FIGS. 75(a) and 75(c)) is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the rental machine and sequentially transmitted (steps S3503 to S3505, S3513, and S3518 in FIG. 101). , S3519). Note that the counting serial number is updated during this transmission (step S3520 in FIG. 101).

This count notification includes information on the number of sheets to be counted, but if the scheduled number of sheets to be counted is 0, 0 is transmitted as the number of sheets to be counted (No determination in step S3508 in FIG. 101, step S3513). In this case, the number of game medals does not change (step S3514 in FIG. 101). On the other hand, if the number of tokens to be counted is set to a value other than 0, the number of tokens to be counted is set based on this value (steps S3511 and S3512 in FIG. 101), and the number of game medals is further subtracted (steps S3511 and S3512 in FIG. 101). step S3514). Note that the setting of the number of coins to be counted and the subtraction of the number of game medals are executed in a state where the insertion operation is prohibited (steps S3509 and S3516 in FIG. 101). Note that the scheduled number of medals to be counted is set in the scheduled number of medals to be counted update process of the medal number control unit timer interrupt process (step S405 in FIG. 104, FIG. 107).

[Setting of planned number of medals to be counted (number of medals control unit 350)]
In the medal number control unit 350, the scheduled number of medals to be counted is updated in the medal number control unit timer interrupt process (step S405 in FIG. 104, FIG. 107). In this process, the number of sheets to be counted is determined based on the scheduled number of sheets to be counted, and a count notification containing this information is sent to the lending machine 700.

First, we will explain what happens when the count button 171 is pressed for less than 500 ms. In this case, the count long press timer is set to an initial value (step S4206 in FIG. 107), but because the count button 171 is released before the timer value reaches 1 (500 ms have elapsed since it was pressed), the count long press flag is not set to ON (no Yes determination is made in step S4207 in FIG. 107). When the count button 171 is released in this state, 1 is added to the planned number of coins to be counted (Yes determination in step S4210 in FIG. 107, step S4212).

Next, a case where the count button 171 has been pressed for 500 ms or more will be described. In this case, the count long press timer is set to an initial value (step S4206 in FIG. 107), and when the value of the timer reaches 1 (500 ms has elapsed since pressing), the count long press flag is set to ON and the planned count number is set to 50 (Yes judgement in step S4207 in FIG. 107). Thereafter, while the count button 171 is being pressed with the count long press flag on, the process of setting the planned count number to 50 is repeated, and the count number based on this planned count number is set each time a count notification is sent. On the other hand, when the count button 171 is released with the count long press flag on, the count long press flag is set to OFF, the count long press timer is set to 0, and the value of the planned count number is cleared (Yes judgement in step S4210 in FIG. 107, No judgement in step S4211).

[Rental notification (regularly sent from the lending machine 700 to the medal number control unit 350)]
When the medal number control unit 350 receives the lending notification from the lending machine 700, the contents of the RAM are updated based on the contents of the lending notification (step S4003 in FIG. 105). Then, it is determined whether the checksum calculated from the rental notification and the checksum included in the rental notification match (steps S4102 and S4103 in FIG. 106). Next, it is determined whether the confirmation lending serial number of the medal number control unit 350 and the lending serial number included in the lending notification match (step S4104 in FIG. 106). Note that the confirmation lending serial number holds a value obtained by adding 1 to the lending serial number included in the previously received lending notice (step S3706 in FIG. 103), and is configured so that they match if communication is normal. has been done. Furthermore, it is determined whether the message length and command data are normal. If an abnormality is determined in these determinations, the determination result is set to "abnormal".

Following the above judgment, if the number of loaned sheets included in the loan notification is 0, the judgment result is set to "normal" (Yes judgment in step S4106 in FIG. 106). On the other hand, if the number of loaned sheets is not 0, the following judgment is further executed (No judgment in step S4106 in FIG. 106).

First, if the number of game medals is 15,000 or more, the determination result is set to "abnormal" (No determination in step S4107 in FIG. 106). In this embodiment, if the number of game medals is 15,000 or more, it is configured such that it cannot be increased by lending. In this configuration, if the number of game medals exceeds 14,999, the number cannot be increased by lending, but if it does not exceed 14,999 (if it is 14,999 or less), it can be increased by lending. In order to realize this operation, for example, if the number is 15,000 or more, the increase due to lending is restricted, and if the number is 14,999 or less, the increase due to lending is possible. It will behave the same. Further, if the number is 14999 or less, it is possible to increase the number by lending, and in other cases, even if the increase by lending is restricted, the same operation as in this embodiment is performed. As described above, in actual operation, if the number of game medals exceeds the actual threshold (14,999 in the above case), the number of game medals cannot be increased by lending, but if it does not exceed the actual threshold, it can be increased by lending. , it is sufficient that there exists a value that is the actual threshold value, and any process may be used for the determination process and the determination value (15000 in this embodiment).For example, the actual threshold value does not need to be the same as the determination value in the process. do not have.

Alternatively, the above determination may be made based on the added number of game medals instead of the current number of game medals. However, this configuration can also be said to be a configuration in which there is a value that is an actual threshold value that includes the number of game medals to be added to the current number of game medals. That is, this configuration can also be said to be such that in actual operation, if the number of game medals exceeds the actual threshold, the number cannot be increased by lending, but if it does not exceed the actual threshold, it can be increased by lending.

Next, if the gaming machine information type is not 2, the judgment result is set to "abnormal" (No judgment in step S4108 of FIG. 106). In this embodiment, the system is configured to accept lending when the gaming machine information type is set to 2.

Next, if the counted number is not 0, the judgment result is set to "abnormal" (No judgment in step S4109 in FIG. 106). If the counted number is not 0, the number of game medals is subtracted, and if the number of loaned medals is not 0, the number of game medals is added, so this embodiment is configured so that these processes are not mixed.

Finally, if the number of sheets lent is greater than 50, the judgment result is set to "abnormal" (No judgment in step S4110 of FIG. 106). In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of sheets lent at one time is set to 50.

If the above judgment does not result in an abnormality, the judgment result is set to "normal" (Yes judgment in steps S4107 to S4110 in Figure 106).

The determination result of the above process is set as the rental number receipt result, and the rental notification reception flag is set on (steps S4005 and S4006 in FIG. 105).

In addition to the above lending notification reception process, the medal number control section 350 executes a lending notification reception confirmation process in the medal number control section main processing (step S306 in FIG. 94, FIG. 102). In this rental notification reception confirmation process, it is confirmed whether the rental notification reception flag is on for 170ms from the start of the counting notification transmission process (step S3502 in FIG. 101, steps S3601, and step S3602 in FIG. 102). . This lending notification reception flag is set in the lending notification receiving process of the medal number control unit timer interrupt process (step S404 in FIG. 104, FIG. 105).

Even though the VL signal is on, if the rental notification reception flag is not turned on by the time 170ms elapses from the start of the counting notification transmission process, the value of the rental machine communication abnormality counter is decremented by 1 ( Step S3604 in FIG. 102). The value of this rental machine communication abnormality counter is initialized when executing the rental machine reception result response transmission (step S3701 in FIG. 103), but if the value of the rental machine communication abnormality counter reaches 1, an error occurs (Fig. 119 steps S4D06, S4D07).

[Lending receipt result response (periodically transmitted from medal count control unit 350 to lending machine 700)]
In the medal count control unit 350, after the loan notification reception confirmation process, if the loan notification reception flag is set to ON, the medal count control unit main process executes the loan reception result response sending process (step S308 in FIG. 94, FIG. 103).

In this rental reception result response transmission process, parameters related to rental machine communication abnormality are initialized (steps S3701 and S3702 in FIG. 103).

Subsequently, if the lending number reception result is set to "normal", the value of the lending serial number included in the received lending notice is set to the normal lending serial number (step S3704 in FIG. 103). Further, after the value of the lending serial number included in the received lending notice is set as the confirmation lending serial number, 1 is added to the value of the confirmation lending serial number (steps S3705 and S3706 in FIG. 103). That is, the value of the confirmation lending serial number here is the same value as the value of the lending serial number scheduled to be included in the next lending notification.

Subsequently, the data to be the subject of the lending reception result response (FIGS. 10A and 10E) is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the lending machine and sequentially transmitted (steps S3707 to S37011 in FIG. 103). Through the above process, if the result of receiving the number of borrowed sheets is "normal", the currently received loan serial number will be sent; if the result of receiving the number of loaned sheets is "abnormal", the previously received loan serial number will be sent. . Note that if the result of receiving the number of loaned medals is "normal", the value of the number of loaned medals is added to the number of game medals after this transmission is completed (determination of Yes in step S3712 in FIG. 103).

[Operation in response to error (gaming control unit 302)]
The game control unit 302 determines various errors (step S203 in FIG. 90). For example, if a strobe signal during command transmission from the medal number control unit 350 is not detected for a certain period of time, a medal number control disconnection error is set in the error status (FIG. 91). In a state where the error status is not set in the game control section 302, the error status is set based on the error code of the medal number control section 350. If the error status is set, a process to notify that an error has occurred is executed (step S1002 in FIG. 83, step S1603 in FIG. 89). Therefore, an error on the game control section 302 side is processed with priority over an error on the medal number control section 350 side. For example, if there is no error on the game control section 302 side, an error on the medal number control section 350 side is notified. will be done. Further, the error status is transmitted to the medal number control unit 350 by an error occurrence command (step S203 in FIG. 90).

[Operation for Errors (Medal Count Control Unit 350)]
When the medal count control unit 350 determines that an error has occurred, an error code is set in the error request (step S3021 in FIG. 95, step S4414 in FIG. 109, step S4512 in FIG. 110, step S4706 in FIG. 113, step S4807 in FIG. 114, step S4A05 in FIG. 116, step S4A09 in FIG. 116, step S4D02 in FIG. 119, step S4D06 in FIG. 119, FIG. 97). This error code information is sent to the game control unit 302 by a medal count control state command. When an error occurrence command is received from the game control unit 302, the error request is cleared (step S4C01 in FIG. 118). This is configured so that errors on the game control unit 302 side are processed with priority over errors on the medal count control unit 350 side.

[Modifications to the inserting operation]
Fig. 122 is a modified example of the medal insertion process of Fig. 84, Fig. 123 is a modified example of the triple command transmission process of Fig. 87, and Fig. 124 is a modified example of the insertion command reception process of Fig. 112. The operations according to these processes will be described below.

In the medal insertion process in FIG. 84, the requested number of medals is determined according to the operated bet button 130, 132 and the current bet amount, and an insertion command including this information is sent to the medal count control unit 350 (FIG. 87). In contrast, in FIG. 122, when the MAX BET button (bet button 132) is operated, the insertion number limit flag is set to ON (step S1121 in FIG. 122), and when the 1 coin bet button (bet button 130) is operated, the insertion number limit flag is set to OFF (step S1122 in FIG. 122). Then, an insertion command including information on this insertion number limit flag is sent to the medal count control unit 350 (FIG. 123).

In the insertion command receiving process of FIG. 124, if there is a number of game medals greater than or equal to the requested number, the requested number is added to the number of inserted medals and the current bet amount, and the requested number is subtracted from the number of game medals, so that the value of the requested number is The response command is returned to the game control unit 302 (Yes in step S4604 in FIG. 124). The game control unit 302 that receives this response command adds the value returned by this response command to the current number of bets (step S1123 in FIG. 122).

In the input command receiving process of FIG. 124, if there is no number of game medals equal to or greater than the requested number, the input number limitation flag is referred to (No determination in step S4604 of FIG. 124). If the input number limited flag is on, no processing is performed on the requested number of coins, and 0 is returned to the game control unit 302 as a response command (No determination in step S4621 of FIG. 124). The game control unit 302 that receives this response command adds 0, which is the value returned by this response command, to the current number of bets (step S1123 in FIG. 122), so the current number of bets is maintained without changing. It turns out.

In the input command reception process in FIG. 124, if the number of game medals remaining is less than or equal to the requested number and the input number limit flag is off, the operation is the same as when the current number of game medals is set to the requested number (Yes is determined in step S4621 in FIG. 124, and the number of game medals is set as the value of the received command in S4622). That is, the value of the current number of game medals is added to the number of inserted medals and the current bet number, and the number of game medals is subtracted to 0. The value of the number of game medals before the subtraction (the value set in the received command) is then returned to the game control unit 302 by a response command. The game control unit 302 that receives this response command adds the value returned by this response command to the current bet number (step S1123 in FIG. 122).

In the above modified example, when the number of game medals available to correspond to the number requested in the input command is insufficient, if the input limit flag is on, 0 is returned for the requested number, and if the input limit flag is off, the maximum number currently available is returned for the requested number. With this configuration, when the medal count control unit 350 cannot accommodate the number requested by the game control unit 302, it switches between not accommodating and accommodating as much as possible, and transmits information for this distinction (input limit flag) along with the requested number. With this configuration, for example, in a configuration in which the degree of advantage changes depending on the current number of bets, it may be possible to prevent the current number of bets from unintentionally becoming an unfavorable value.

In this embodiment, when the MAX BET button 132 is operated, the required number of coins is set to a value required to set the maximum number of coins to bet. However, the required number may be set to a fixed value such as the maximum number of coins to bet or another value.

For example, in a case where a configuration is adopted in which the maximum bet number is set as the required number of coins, if the 1 bet button 130 is operated first and the current bet number is 1, the MAX bet button 132 is pressed. When an input command is transmitted with the maximum bet number as the requested number, the medal number control unit 350 does not accept this requested number (exceeds the maximum bet number). In this case as well, there will be a case where the number of medals control section 350 cannot respond to the number of medals requested from the game control section 302. In such cases, by sending the information for proper usage and the requested number of sheets together, you can choose between an action that does not correspond to the requested number of sheets (for example, returning 0 as a response command) and an action that corresponds to the requested number of sheets as much as possible (for example, returning 0 as a response command). For example, it is possible to use a command that returns the maximum bet amount as a response command.

《Operation example》
An example of the operation of the slot machine 100 described above will be described below.

[Example of operation related to counting process]
FIG. 129 is a diagram showing a first example in which the count button 171 is operated. FIG. 129(a) is a timing chart of the first example, and FIG. 129(b) is a diagram showing the display mode of the game medal number display device 170, which is a 5-digit, 7-segment display.

In the timing chart shown in FIG. 129(a), time progresses from left to right. This also applies to the timing charts shown in the following figures.

At the top of the timing chart shown in FIG. 129(a), there are arrows with symbols corresponding to (i) to (v) shown in FIG. 129(b). These arrows represent the display periods of the game medal count display device 170.

Furthermore, at the bottom of the timing chart shown in FIG. 129(a), the timing at which the counting notification is transmitted from the medal number control unit 350 to the lending machine 700 is written as "counting timing." This counting timing has a cycle of 0.3 seconds (300 ms). The number of coins counted (the number of gaming values transmitted to the rental machine 700) at this counting timing is shown. Furthermore, the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 is shown below the "counted number". Furthermore, below that, the operation mode of the count button 171 is shown.

In the first example shown in FIG. 129, the operation of the count button 171 is started when the "game medal count" is 250. As shown in FIG. 129(b)(i), the number "250" is displayed on the game medal count display device 170.

Even when the first counting timing arrives after the operation of the count button 171 is started, the count button 171 remains operated. Eventually, 0.5 seconds (500 ms) have passed since the operation of the count button 171 was started. Even after 0.5 seconds have passed, the count button 171 is still operated, which results in a long press operation, and the value of the planned count number is set to 50 (step S4209 of the planned count number update process shown in FIG. 107). In the following explanation, the operation of the count button 171 for 0.5 seconds or more is referred to as a long press, and the operation of the count button 171 for less than 0.5 seconds is referred to as a short press. The planned count number update process shown in FIG. 107 is executed at 0.7 ms intervals, and while the count button 171 continues to be operated for more than 0.5 seconds, the value of the planned count number continues to be overwritten to a value of 50 at 0.7 ms intervals. After 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the operation of the count button 171 started, when the first count timing arrives while the count button 171 is still being operated, the count number is set based on the value of the number of medals to be counted (50 in this example), and a count notification of 50 medals is sent from the medal count control unit 350 to the lending machine 700. The "game medal number" is reduced by 50 medals to 200 medals. As shown in (ii) of FIG. 129(b), the game medal number display device 170 displays a change display in which "1" is subtracted from the number "250". This change display is displayed by the display display process shown in FIG. 121, with the number being reduced by "1" at intervals of about 4 ms. If the display on the medal count display device 170 suddenly changes from "250" to "200," the player may not notice the change in the display, so here a change display is used to show how the numerical value is changing (a display that is performed until the number of medals remaining after 50 medals have been subtracted is displayed, allowing the player to recognize that the number of medals is changing). Then, after approximately 200 ms has passed, the number "200" is displayed on the medal count display device 170, as shown in (iii) of FIG. 129(b).

When the count button 171 is pressed and held and the next counting timing arrives, the count number is again set based on the value of the number of medals to be counted (50 in this example), and a count notification of 50 medals is again sent from the medal count control unit 350 to the lending machine 700. The "game medal count" is reduced by 50 medals to 150 medals. As shown in (iv) of FIG. 129(b), the game medal count display device 170 displays a change display in which the number "200" is subtracted by "1" at approximately 4 ms intervals. Then, after approximately 200 ms has passed, the game medal count display device 170 displays the number "150" as shown in (v) of FIG. 129(b).

Furthermore, when the third counting timing arrives while the counting button 171 is still pressed, a counting notification of 50 medals is sent from the medal count control unit 350 to the lending machine 700, and the "game medal count" decreases by 50 medals to 100 medals. Then, assume that the counting button 171 is released before the fourth counting timing arrives. In other words, the long press of the counting button 171 ends. In this case, the value of the number of medals to be counted (here, 50 medals) is cleared in step S4215 shown in FIG. 107, so that even when the fourth counting timing arrives, a counting notification of 50 medals is not sent, and the value of the "counting medal count" becomes 0 medals. Therefore, the "game medal count" also remains at 100 medals. In addition, the change display is performed in a time (approximately 200 ms) that is shorter than the counting timing of 300 ms, so if the player wants to keep that number of game medals after visually checking the number after 50 medals have been subtracted, they can do so by ending the operation of the counting button 171.

In addition, if the count button 171 is released before the first counting timing arrives after operation of the count button 171 is started (if the hand is released at the timing of arrow A shown in FIG. 129(a)), one coin is added to the value of the number of coins to be counted (step S4212 shown in FIG. 107), and when the counting timing arrives, that one coin is sent as a counting notification. The "number of game medals" decreases by one to 249 coins, and the number "249" is displayed on the game medal count display device 170.

In addition, if the count button 171 is operated multiple times after the first operation of the count button 171 is started and before the first count timing arrives, that is, if the button is short-pressed multiple times before the count timing arrives, the value of the number of sheets to be counted is incremented by one each time the button is short-pressed. When the count timing arrives, the number to be counted is set based on the value of the number of sheets to be counted (in this case, equivalent to the number of single presses), and the value of the number of short presses performed up to that point is sent as a count notification.

On the other hand, if the count button 171 is released 0.5 seconds after the operation of the count button 171 is started and before the first count timing arrives (if the hand is released at the timing of arrow B shown in FIG. 129(a)), even if the value of the number of medals to be counted is set to 50, this is cleared in step S4215 shown in FIG. 107, and therefore a count notification of 50 medals is not sent and the "count" value becomes 0 medals (a count notification with the number of medals counted being 0 is sent). Similarly, if the count button 171 is released before the next count timing arrives after the display on the game medal count display device 170 changes from 250 medals to 200 medals over a period of about 200 ms (if the hand is released at the timing of arrow C shown in FIG. 129(a)), a count notification of 50 medals is not sent and the "count" value becomes 0 medals (a count notification with the number of medals counted being 0 is sent).

Figure 130 is a timing chart showing a first example of a presentation when counting is taking place.

Figure 130 shows the performance image display device 157 and the speaker 272. As described above, the security command sent from the game control unit 302 to the first sub-control unit 400 at 100 ms intervals contains information indicating the number of counted coins.

When the count button 171 is pressed briefly to count one coin, the effect image display device 157 does not display any indication that counting is taking place, and if, for example, a game background display is displayed, that display continues. Also, no counting sound is output from the speaker 272. For example, if an effect sound corresponding to the game background display is output, that output continues. If a counting sound is output for a small number, it may mix with other effect sounds, giving the player a sense of expectation different from the sense of expectation that the other effect sounds were intended to express, so in the first example, no counting sound is output. If a counting sound is output for a large number, the output time is longer, so there is less risk of it mixing with other effect sounds, and it has less impact on other effect sounds. Note that, even if a small number such as two coins is counted, the counting sound may not be output in the same way as when one coin is counted.

On the other hand, when the count button 171 is pressed and held down and 50 coins are counted, a display notifying the user that counting is taking place is displayed on the performance image display device 157, and a counting sound is output from the speaker 272. That is, as described above, the security command sent from the game control unit 302 to the first sub-control unit 400 at 100 ms intervals contains information indicating the number of coins being counted. When information indicating 50 coins is sent as the number of coins being counted, the first sub-control unit 400 outputs a counting sound. Also, when information indicating 50 coins is sent as the number of coins being counted via the first sub-control unit 400, the second sub-control unit 500 displays a counting in progress notification.

Furthermore, as the long press continues and 50 sheets are being counted every 0.3 seconds, as shown in FIG. be done. This character display is displayed so as to overlap the game background display. Further, the speaker 272 outputs a counting sound (for example, a notification sound of "piyo piyo...") having a length of 0.3 seconds or more. Since the length of the counting sound that is output at one time is 0.3 seconds or more, it is connected to the counting sound that is output at the timing of counting the next 50 sheets, and it sounds as if it is being output continuously. For example, if the counting sound is longer than 0.5 seconds, it will overlap with the counting sound that is output at the next 50 sheet counting timing, and continuity will be maintained, and the counting sound will not be output during consecutive counting periods. Continue without interruption. Continuous counting is recognized by the text display "Continuous counting" and continuous counting sounds.

Note that when the number of sheets counted exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 10 sheets) of 2 or more and less than 50 sheets, a counting sound may be output. In this case, a counting sound different from the counting sound during long press may be output. By doing this, for example, if a short press is repeated, it is possible to recognize that a plurality of sheets have been counted. Alternatively, if the "number of game medals" stored in the medal number control unit 350 is pressed for a long time when less than 50 medals remain (for example, 10 medals remaining), 10 medals are counted instead of 50. Therefore, it is possible to recognize that there is only a little time remaining from the change in the performance sound. FIG. 131 is a timing chart showing an example in which a bet operation is performed before operating the counting button 171 and the number of bets is not 0. In this embodiment, even if the counting button 171 is operated, the value of the current number of bets does not change, but in FIG. 131, if the current number of bets is not 0 when the counting button 171 is operated, the counting process is executed. This is a modification example in which a settlement process (setting the current number of bets to 0 and adding the decrease to the number of game medals) is performed beforehand.

In the example shown in FIG. 131, when the bet buttons 130 and 132 are operated and the count button 171 is operated before the start lever 135 is operated, settlement is performed (the number of coins bet is returned to the "number of medals to be played").

In FIG. 131, the "current bet number" is shown, and below that, the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 is shown. Further below that, the value of the counted number is shown, and at the very bottom, the operation mode of the count button 171 is shown.

In this example, the MAX bet button 132 is operated and the "current bet number" is three. In response to this bet operation, three medals are subtracted from the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358, and the number is reduced from 68 to 65. Eventually, the count button 171 is operated instead of the start lever 135. When the counting button 171 is operated, an up edge of a signal representing the on/off state of the counting button 171 is detected, and based on this up edge detection, the number of betted coins is first returned to the "number of game medals". . As a result, the "current number of bets" becomes 0, and the "number of game medals" increases by three to 68. In other words, the state returns to the state before the bet operation, and the previous bet operation is cancelled. After this cancellation, counting processing is performed. The counting button 171 is pressed for a long time, and when the counting timing arrives while the counting button 171 is kept pressed for a long time, 50 coins are counted, and the "number of game medals" decreases by 50 and becomes 18 coins.

In this example, the current bet number can be returned to the "game medal number" by operating the counting button 171 without operating the settlement button 134 shown in FIG. 68, but the number of game medals will change due to further counting processing. In this configuration, if you want to change only the current bet number, you can operate the settlement button 134. For example, if you want to change to a bet of 1 coin after betting 3 coins, you can operate the settlement button 134 to temporarily return the bet of 3 coins to the "game medal number", and then operate the bet button 130 for betting 1 coin again to set the current bet number to 1 coin. Note that since the settlement process can be performed by operating the counting button 171 without operating the settlement button 134, the settlement button 134 may not be provided.

Figure 132 is a timing chart showing an example of the counting end presentation.

As described above, information representing the number of coins to be counted is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 from the game control unit 302 in a security command. The first sub-control unit 400 accumulates the counted number of sheets that are included in the security command and is sent until the number of sheets that is sent becomes 0, at which point it becomes 0 (when counting ends). Execute the counting end effect with . The counting end performance here is a performance according to the number of counts to be performed at one time.

FIG. 132(a) is a diagram showing an example of a counting end effect performed when the cumulative counted number of sheets is less than a predetermined number (for example, 1000 sheets). During counting, the effect image display device 157 displays a counting effect (for example, displays the text "Continuous counting" and outputs a counting sound, as explained using FIG. 130), and when counting is completed, a counting effect is performed. , a counting end effect 1 is performed in which characters "Counting End" are displayed on the effect image display device 157. On the other hand, FIG. 132(b) is a diagram illustrating an example of a counting end effect performed when the cumulative counted number of sheets is a predetermined number (for example, 1000 sheets) or more. When the counting of more than a predetermined number of coins is completed, counting end effect 2 is performed, and in addition to the character display of ``Counting completed'', a warning display of ``Be careful not to save too much'' is added to the effect image display device 157.

As described above, in this embodiment, the RAM 358 of the medal number control unit 350 can store a maximum of 16,383 "game medals". However, in the slot machine 100, there is a possibility that the "number of game medals" may disappear. Therefore, it is desirable that the slot machine 100 not continue to store too many "number of game medals." Therefore, it is preferable to provide notification to increase the frequency of operation of the counting button 171. The alert display described using FIG. 132(b) is an example of a notification that increases the frequency of operation of the counting button 171, and urges the lending machine 700 to appropriately transfer gaming value. Note that the counting effect may also be changed according to the cumulative number of sheets counted. For example, if the cumulative count is less than a predetermined number (for example, 1000 sheets), counting effect A is performed, and after the cumulative count exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 1000 sheets), counting effect B is performed. shall be carried out. Further, counting performance A is a performance that gives an impression of being in an appropriate state, and counting performance B is a performance that gives an impression of being in an inappropriate state. A large cumulative number of coins may give an unfavorable impression to the player.

Here, we will explain the operation of the slot machine 100 when the settlement button 134 is operated.

FIG. 133 is a timing chart showing an example when the payment button 134 is operated.

In a conventional slot machine, real medals are lent, the real medals are inserted to secure credits, and the credits are used to set the number of bets. In such conventional slot machines, the subject of actual medal settlement processing includes not only the betted medals but also the stored medals (for example, the maximum number of medals that can be bet is 3 and the maximum number that can be stored is 50). A total of 53 tickets will be processed for settlement.) When this payment process is completed, a demo command is output to the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500 may execute a process of displaying a demo screen on the effect image display device 157. That is, there is a certain amount of time while the payment processing, which may involve the physical discharge of medals, is being performed. A settlement button command indicating that the settlement button 134 has been pressed is output to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 performs an effect related to settlement based on this settlement button command, and when the settlement is completed, a demonstration is performed. Shift to demonstration performance based on commands.

On the other hand, in the slot machine 100 of the present embodiment, which does not require actual medals, the object of settlement is the betted medals (currently the number of bets, maximum 3), and since physical medals are not ejected, The processing time involved in payment is very short. Therefore, after the payment button 134 is pressed, there is only a short processing time related to payment, and the demo command is output to the first sub-control unit 400 without delay. Therefore, if the specification is such that the performance is executed based on the execution of the payment process, this performance will only be performed for a short period of time before the demonstration performance, and there is a risk that the performance will feel strange to the player. There is.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 133, a settlement button command indicating that the settlement button 134 has been pressed is output to the first sub-control unit 400, but the first sub-control unit 400 does not execute any effect based on this settlement button command (such as outputting a settlement sound).

As shown in FIG. 133, when the bet operation is performed and the "current bet number" is 3, the settlement button 134 is operated and the settlement operation is performed. As a result of this settlement operation, the number of betted medals (3 medals) is added to the "number of game medals" and becomes 68 medals from 65 medals.

Figure 133 shows the speaker 272 and the performance image display device 157. Even when a settlement operation is performed, no settlement sound is output from the speaker 272. In addition, the game background display continues to be displayed on the performance image display device 157, and the settlement display is not displayed. The performance image display device 157 shown in Figure 133 immediately switches to a demo display. That is, the first sub-control unit 400 starts a demo performance based on receiving a settlement button command (or a demo command immediately after the settlement button command). In this example, only the demo performance is executed at the start of the demo, making the start of the demo more clear.

The specification may also be such that a settlement effect is executed (for example, for two seconds). While this settlement effect is being executed, even if a demo effect has started, the settlement effect will continue, and both effects will be executed at the same time. Although the frequency with which settlement operations are performed is expected to be lower than in conventional slot machines, there is still a possibility that settlement operations may be performed as a result of fraudulent behavior (so-called cheating), so the fact that a settlement process has occurred is made known to those nearby.

Next, we will explain an example in which the number of sheets counted changes depending on the length of time the count button 171 is operated.

FIG. 134 is a diagram showing an example in which the number of sheets to be counted increases as the operation time of the counting button 171 becomes longer. In this example, instead of the scheduled count number updating process shown in FIG. 107, the scheduled count number updating process shown in FIG. 125 is adopted.

Figure 134 (a) is a table showing the specific values of the count long press timer set in step S4221 in the flowchart of the planned count number update process shown in Figure 125. In this table, the value of the count long press timer is set for each long press stage value. That is, between the long press stage value of 1 and 4, when the long press stage value increases, the value of the count long press timer decreases by a predetermined time (300 ms in this case). In other words, the value of the count long press timer is shortened in stages. And when the long press stage value is 4 or more, the value of the count long press timer becomes a constant value (300 ms in this case).

FIG. 134(b) is a table showing specific values of the scheduled number of sheets to be counted used in step S4222 in the flowchart of the scheduled number of sheets to be counted update process shown in FIG. 125. In this table, the value of the number of sheets to be counted is set for each long press stage value. That is, until the value of the long press stage value increases from 1 to 4, as the long press stage value increases, the value of the number of sheets to be counted increases. As a result, the number of sheets to be counted increases in stages according to the operation time of the counting button 171. Note that even if the same value is set multiple times, the number of sheets to be counted will increase in stages. For example, even if the value of the number of sheets to be counted is set as 10→10→20→20→20→30→30→30→30, etc., the result is a stepwise increase. When the long press step value is 4 or more, the number of sheets to be counted is a constant value (here, 50 sheets).

Figure 134 (c) is a timing chart showing counting using the count long press timer shown in Figure 134 (a) and the planned number of sheets to be counted shown in Figure 134 (b).

At the bottom of the timing chart shown in FIG. 134(c), the timing at which the counting notification is transmitted from the medal number control unit 350 to the lending machine 700 is written as "counting timing." This counting timing has a cycle of 0.3 seconds (300 ms). On the other hand, at the top of the timing chart, a timing chart is shown in which the state in which the counting button 171 is operated is represented as an ON state.

When the count button 171 is turned on from the OFF state, a count long press timer (value for 1.2 seconds) with a long press step value of 1 is set (step S4221 shown in FIG. 125). If the count button 171 is kept operated until the timer value becomes "1", 10 sheets are set as the planned number of sheets to be counted (step S4222 shown in FIG. 125). Then, when the count button 171 is kept on and the timer value becomes "0", a count long press timer with a long press step value of 2 (value for 0.9 seconds) is set (step S4221 shown in FIG. 125). If the count button 171 is kept operated until the 0.9 seconds set in the count long press timer have elapsed, the 10 sheets set as the planned number of sheets to be counted will be counted every time the count timing arrives at 0.3 second intervals.

Eventually, when the value of the count long press timer reaches "1" while the count button 171 is being operated, 20 sheets is set as the number of sheets to be counted (step S4222 shown in FIG. 125). Subsequently, when the timer value reaches "0" while the count button 171 is in the ON state, a count long press timer (value for 0.6 seconds) with a long press step value of 3 is set (as shown in FIG. 125). Step S4221). If the count button 171 is kept pressed until the 0.6 seconds set in the count long press timer elapses, the count timing of 20 sheets will be 0. It will be counted every time it arrives every 3 seconds.

When the count long press timer value reaches "1" again while the count button 171 is still operated, 30 sheets are set as the planned number to be counted (step S4222 shown in FIG. 125). Furthermore, when the timer value reaches "0" while the count button 171 is still ON, the count long press timer with a long press step value of 4 (a value for 0.3 seconds) is set (step S4221 shown in FIG. 125). If the count button 171 is kept operated until the 0.3 seconds set in the count long press timer has elapsed, the number of sheets set as the planned number to be counted, 30, will be counted when the counting timing arrives.

Then, when the value of the count long press timer reaches "1" while the count button 171 is being operated, 50 sheets is set as the number of sheets to be counted (step S4222 shown in FIG. 125). Thereafter, a value of 0.3 seconds is repeatedly set on the count long press timer (step S4221 shown in FIG. 125), and 50 sheets is repeatedly set as the number of sheets to be counted (step S4222 shown in FIG. 125). As a result, if the counting button 171 is maintained in the operated state, 50 sheets will be counted every time the counting timing arrives.

In the example described here, the longer the operation time of the count button 171, the shorter the value of the count long press timer becomes and the value of the number of sheets to be counted increases; however, the longer the operation time of the count button 171, the longer the value of the count long press timer may become and the value of the number of sheets to be counted increases, the longer the value of the count long press timer may become and the value of the number of sheets to be counted decreases, or the shorter the value of the count long press timer may become and the value of the number of sheets to be counted decreases.

In addition, the value set in the counting long press timer is gradually shortened and the value of the number of medals to be counted is gradually increased until the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 becomes 0. You can.

Figure 135 (a) is a timing chart showing an example of a continuation of the example shown in Figure 134 (c).

In the example shown in FIG. 134(c), after the long press stage value reaches 4, the value of the count long press timer becomes constant at the shortest 0.3 seconds, and the number of medals to be counted becomes constant at the maximum 50 medals. This state may be continued until the value of the "number of medals played" stored in RAM 358 becomes 0, but if the number of medals played falls below a certain value (e.g., 300 medals), end-game processing may be executed. The end-game processing referred to here is processing in which the value of the count long press timer is increased and the value of the number of medals to be counted is decreased as the number of medals played decreases.

The timing chart shown in FIG. 135(a) displays the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358. At the left end of this timing chart, the value of the count long press timer is set to a value of 0.3 seconds, and the "number of game medals" is set to 299 with the scheduled number of medals to be counted set to 50. The "number of game medals" is less than a certain value (300 medals).

When the count long press timer value reaches "1" while the count button 171 is still being operated, the planned number of sheets to be counted is again set to 50 sheets (step SS4222 shown in FIG. 125). Note that the number of sheets set at this timing may be a number less than 50 sheets (e.g., 30 sheets). Furthermore, when the timer value reaches "0" while the count button 171 is still in the ON state, the count long press timer value is set to a value of 0.6 seconds (step S4221 shown in FIG. 125), which is longer.

Eventually, when the count long press timer value reaches "1" while the count button 171 is being operated, 30 sheets is set as the number of sheets to be counted (step S4222 shown in FIG. 125). Furthermore, when the value of the timer reaches "0" while the count button 171 is in the ON state, the value of the count long press timer is set to a value of 0.9 seconds (step S4221 shown in FIG. 125), and becomes longer again.

When the count long press timer value reaches "1" again while the count button 171 is still being operated, the planned number of sheets to be counted is set to 20 (step S4222 shown in FIG. 125). Furthermore, when the timer value reaches "0" while the count button 171 is still in the ON state, the count long press timer value is set to a value of 1.2 seconds (step S4221 shown in FIG. 125), becoming even longer.

Then, when the count long press timer value reaches "1" while the count button 171 is being operated, 20 sheets is again set as the number of sheets to be counted (step S4222 shown in FIG. 125). Note that a number less than 20 sheets (for example, 10 sheets) may be set as the scheduled number of sheets to be counted. Furthermore, when the value of the timer reaches "0" while the count button 171 is in the ON state, the value of the count long press timer is again set to the value of 1.2 seconds (step S4221 shown in FIG. 125). Note that a value exceeding a value of 1.2 seconds (for example, a value of 1.5 seconds) may be set as the value of the count long press timer. In the example shown in FIG. 135(a), after the "number of game medals" reaches 9, the player releases the counting button 171 and the counting button 171 becomes OFF. As a result, the counting ends when the "number of game medals" reaches nine.

In the final stage process described above, the number of sheets to be counted decreases step by step, and furthermore, the value of the count long press timer becomes longer. The "number of game medals" becoming 0 is reduced. Note that if you want to set the "number of game medals" to 0, you can continue to operate the counting button 171 until the display on the number of game medals display device 170 becomes "0".

FIG. 135(b) is a timing chart showing an example of a case where, in the example shown in FIG. 134(c), a power outage occurs when 30 sheets are set as the scheduled number of sheets to be counted, and then the power is restored.

In the example shown in FIG. 135(b), the counting button 171 remains operated after the power outage occurs and until the power is restored. For example, in the case of a momentary power outage, the power may be restored before the counting button 171 is released. Alternatively, some players do not take their hands off the count button 171 even if they know that the power has been cut off. However, this was done in consideration of the case where the counting button 171 was left being operated after the power was cut off until the power was restored; in reality, the counting button 171 was not operated until the power was restored. I don't know if it was still there. If the power is restored while the counting button 171 is still being operated, an on signal is detected without detecting an up edge of the signal representing the on/off state of the counting button 171 after the power is restored. In this case, if the ON signal is detected even after 0.5 seconds, which is the determination time for the long press operation, the medal number control unit 350 selects the maximum number of medals (in this example, 50 medals) as the number of medals to be counted. ) is set (step S4222 shown in FIG. 125). Even if the control is temporarily interrupted due to a power outage, the fact that the count button 171 has been operated for a long period of time can be reflected after the power is restored.

After power is restored, the number may be set to a number slightly less than the maximum number (e.g., 30). Alternatively, the number of sheets to be counted at the time of power outage may be reset.

Although the explanation here has been about the number of medals to be counted, the same applies to the value of the count long press timer. In other words, if power is restored while the count button 171 is still operated, the medal count control unit 350 sets the value of the count long press timer to the shortest time (300 ms in this example) (step S4221 shown in FIG. 125).

FIG. 136 is a timing chart showing an example of the process of updating the scheduled number of sheets to be counted in FIG. 126.

Operation of the counting button 171 starts at timing A, and when 0.5 seconds elapses while it is in the ON state (timing B), it becomes a long press operation and 50 sheets are counted. Furthermore, when 1.5 seconds (cumulatively 2.0 seconds from the start of operation: timing C) elapses while the ON state remains ON, automatic counting will be performed even if you release your hand from the counting button 171, and the count will be counted for 0.3 seconds. Each time the timing comes, 50 pieces are counted. This automatic counting continues until the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 becomes zero. Therefore, it is possible to quickly reduce the number of game medals to 0 with a hassle-free operation.

When automatic counting is started, the change display on the game medal count display device 170 described with reference to FIG. 129(b) is not performed, and the displayed number on the game medal count display device 170 decreases in units of 50 medals. In the seven-segment display that is the game medal count display device 170, the change display in which one medal is subtracted at approximately 4 ms intervals may appear as if all seven segments are lit and some segments are slightly flashing due to afterimages. Furthermore, if the change display continues until the number of game medals in the "game medal count" becomes 0, it may actually make the current displayed number difficult to understand. Furthermore, players who select automatic counting often want the number of game medals in the "game medal count" to be 0, and there are cases where there is little need to display the change display to show the number being subtracted by one.

Since there is no player operation during the period when automatic counting is being performed, it is preferable to notify the player that automatic counting is being performed with a lamp or the like. Furthermore, if any payout is made based on the game result during automatic counting, the payout amount is also included in the automatic counting. In other words, the number of medals paid out during automatic counting is added to the "game medal count" stored in RAM 358, and will be included in the counting from the next time onwards.

Figure 137 (a) is a timing chart showing an example in which automatic counting ends when the value of the "game medal number" stored in RAM 358 reaches a certain value. Automatic counting starts when 2.0 seconds have elapsed since the start of the counting button 171 operation, and 50 medals are counted each time the counting timing of 0.3 seconds arrives. In Figure 137 (a), the value of the "game medal number" stored in RAM 358 is also written under the "counted number". In this example, the counting button 171 is released when the "game medal number" is around 147 medals, but the "game medal number" continues to decrease due to automatic counting. Eventually, when the "game medal number" falls below a certain value (for example, the value counted at one counting timing, here 50 medals), automatic counting automatically ends, and the "game medal number" will not decrease unless the counting button 171 is operated. Here, the remaining 47 medals remain without being automatically counted. If the player wishes to continue playing after the automatic counting, the player can start playing promptly if there is a remaining number. There are also cases where the player wishes to count all the game medals. When the player wishes to start counting again, the player operates the counting button 171 again. For example, if the player presses and holds the button for 0.5 seconds, the "game medal number" becomes 0. Although the certain value is set to 50 medals, the player may set the certain value. For example, the player may select from 0 medals, 20 medals, and 50 medals. The player may leave a desired number of game medals after the counting. The certain value may be set according to the game state. For example, in the normal game state, the certain value is set to 0 medals, and in the special game state such as during AT play, the certain value is set to 50 medals. In the special game state, the player is unlikely to end the game, so the player can start playing promptly by leaving a certain amount of game medals. The certain value may be set according to the number of game medals counted automatically. For example, if less than 100 game medals are counted, a certain value is set to 0, and if 100 or more game medals are counted, a certain value is set to 20. If a small number of game medals is counted, the purpose may be to exchange the counted number of game medals for prizes such as drinks, and game play may continue after automatic counting. Leaving a certain amount of game medals allows game play to begin promptly. The opposite is also possible. If a large number of game medals is counted, the purpose may be to count them once due to the execution of a notification or the like to encourage counting, and game play may continue after automatic counting. Leaving a certain amount of game medals allows game play to begin promptly.

Figure 137 (b) is a timing chart showing an example of when power is interrupted during automatic counting and then restored.

In the example shown in FIG. 137(b), automatic counting is started and the counting button 171 is released. A power outage occurs while 50 medals are being counted every time the counting timing of 0.3 seconds arrives due to automatic counting. After that, the power is restored, but if the counting button 171 is operated again at the timing of this power restoration, or if the counting button 171 is started during a power outage and the power is restored while it is being operated, After the power is restored, an on signal indicating the on state of the counting button 171 is detected. If this ON signal is detected at the time of power restoration, automatic counting is started even if 2 seconds, which is the determination time for starting automatic counting, has not elapsed. That is, when the first counting timing arrives after power is restored, 50 sheets are counted. Therefore, even if the user takes his hand off the counting button 171 before 2 seconds have passed after the power is restored, automatic counting is started.

FIG. 138 is a diagram showing an example display indicating that automatic counting is in progress.

FIG. 138 shows an effect image display device 157, which is a liquid crystal display, and a game medal number display device 170, which is a 5-digit, 7-segment display.

The upper part of FIG. 138 shows the state during counting before automatic counting is started. In other words, the number of sheets to be counted is determined by the manner in which the counting button 171 is operated (long press or one or more short presses). In this state, characters "Counting" are displayed on the effect image display device 157 where the game background is displayed. That is, the character display "Counting" is displayed so as to overlap the game background display.

Further, in the game medal number display device 170 shown on the upper side, a segment representing 97 is lit.

On the other hand, the lower side of FIG. 138 shows a state in which automatic counting is being performed. When the medal number control unit 350 starts automatic counting, it sends a command to the game control unit 302 including automatic counting information indicating that the counting is performed by automatic counting, in the counted number information of the medal number control state command. The game control section 302 sends the security command to the first sub-control section 400, including the above-mentioned automatic counting information in addition to the information representing the number of coins to be counted. The second sub-control unit 500 receives the automatic counting information via the first sub-control unit 400, and causes the effect image display device 157 to display the text "Counting automatically" and a message 157m. Automatic counting status notification is performed while automatic counting is being performed. Note that while automatic counting is being performed, notification may be provided by sound or lamp. In FIG. 138, the words "Automatically counting" are displayed on the effect image display device 157 where the game background is displayed. Further, below that, there is an explanation about how to handle the counting button 171 during automatic counting, such as ``Counting will continue even if you release your hand from the button.'' In a state where automatic counting status notification is being performed, button operation unnecessary notification is performed. Furthermore, an explanation such as ``you can play games'' is also given. In a state where automatic counting state notification is being performed, notification that game progress is possible is performed. It is reported that it is possible to proceed with the game, such as operating the start lever 135 and operating the stop buttons 130 to 132, even during automatic counting. Note that during the counting process, operations on the bet buttons 130 and 132 are not accepted. In addition, since it is expected that there will be cases where you want to manually end automatic counting after automatic counting has started, if you operate the counting button 171 again after automatic counting has started, automatic counting will end. Good too. That is, when the medal number control unit 350 detects an up edge of the signal representing the on/off state of the counting button 171 during automatic counting, it ends the automatic counting. When automatic counting ends, automatic counting status notification ends.

FIG. 139 is a diagram showing an example of a sound output indicating that automatic counting is in progress.

The counting button 171 is operated at timing A, and when 0.5 seconds have passed while it is still ON (timing B), it becomes a long press operation and 50 coins are counted. When a further 1.5 seconds have passed while it is still ON (a cumulative total of 2.0 seconds from the start of operation: timing C), automatic counting continues even if the counting button 171 is released. In this example, when the first counting timing arrives after 2.0 seconds has passed, a counting sound indicating that automatic counting has started is output from the speaker 272. Note that the counting sound may also be output after 2.0 seconds have passed.

The volume of the counting sound increases at a predetermined time interval. The predetermined time here is 1.2 seconds, but it may be 3 seconds or 0.3 seconds. By increasing the volume as time passes, it is possible to easily recognize that the cumulative counting amount is increasing. The first counting sound output first and the second counting sound output next are output continuously, the second counting sound and the third counting sound output next are also output continuously, and the third counting sound and the fourth counting sound output next are also output continuously. In addition to the volume, the rhythm, pitch, tone, etc. may be changed. That is, the counting sound may change in stages. For example, the n+1th counting sound may be a counting sound with a faster rhythm or a higher pitch than the nth counting sound. In addition, the volume may not increase at a predetermined time interval, and only the tone may change at a predetermined time interval. For example, the first counting sound may be a sound consisting of only instrument sound A, the second counting sound may be a sound consisting of multiple sounds consisting of instrument sound A plus instrument sound B, and the third counting sound may be a sound consisting of multiple sounds consisting of instrument sound A, instrument sound B, and instrument sound C. It is possible to easily recognize that the cumulative count is increasing.

On the other hand, if the counting sound continues to be output during counting, the player may feel uncomfortable. For example, counting 5,000 coins earned through a game at once takes approximately 50 seconds. If the counting sound is continuously output during this period, it may be unpleasant to the user's ears, and may also be disliked by the player next to him. As a countermeasure for these cases, the volume of the counting sound may be lowered as time passes, or the counting sound may be output for a predetermined period of time and thereafter be silent (volume 0). Note that the volume of the counting sound may be lowered as time passes, and after the counting sound has been output for a predetermined period of time, the sound may be set to a constant sound (volume 1).

Furthermore, in the case of slot machines that have a function that allows players to perform various customizations, the type of counting sound, the volume, and the way it changes (for example, whether the volume increases or decreases), etc. The player may be able to make a selection. This can also make counting more interesting.

Furthermore, in addition to sound, a lamp may be made to emit light or an image may be output, and the light emission mode of the lamp or the image may be changed in stages.

Figure 140 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where a power interruption occurs before the 0.5 second threshold for determining a long press operation has elapsed after the count button 171 has been operated.

In the example shown in FIG. 140(a), the operation of the counting button 171 is started, and a power outage occurs before the counting long press flag described with reference to FIG. 107 (or FIG. 125, FIG. 126) is set to ON, and the counting button 171 remains in an operated state until power is restored. For example, in the case of a momentary power outage, power may be restored before the player releases his/her hand from the counting button 171. Alternatively, some players may not release their hands from the counting button 171 even after realizing that power has been cut off. However, this is merely a consideration of the case where the counting button 171 remains in operation from the time the power outage occurs until power is restored, and it is not possible to know whether the counting button 171 remains in operation until power is restored. If power is restored while the counting button 171 remains in operation, an ON signal is detected after power is restored without detecting the rising edge of the signal representing the ON/OFF state of the counting button 171. If an ON signal is detected without detecting an up edge after power is restored, the medal count control unit 350 determines that the count button 171 has continued to be operated, and again determines whether the count button 171 remains operated until 0.5 seconds have elapsed since power was restored. If the count button 171 remains operated, the count long press flag is set to ON, and if the count button 171 continues to be operated, 50 medals are counted at the counting timing.

If the button is pressed and held for a long time after power is restored, a notification that the button is being pressed and held may be issued. The notification that the button is being pressed and held will start from the point at which the first counting timing arrives 0.5 seconds after power is restored, if the button is still being pressed and held. This is because if the counting button 171 is released before 0.5 seconds have elapsed, it will not be considered a long press, and if the counting button 171 is released before the first counting timing arrives after 0.5 seconds have elapsed, not a single coin will be counted. Therefore, the notification that the button is being pressed and held will start on the condition that the button is still being pressed and held when the first counting timing arrives after 0.5 seconds have elapsed.

Note that if the counting button 171 is released before 0.5 seconds have passed after the power is restored, one sheet will be counted, but this may be due to an erroneous operation. For this reason, if the operation of the counting button 171 is completed within 0.5 seconds immediately after the power is turned on, it may be determined that the counting button 171 is an erroneous operation and no sheets are counted. Note that FIG. 140(b) shows an example in which the start of operation of the counting button 171 is determined by detecting only the up edge of the signal representing the on/off state of the counting button 171.

According to the example shown in FIG. 140(b), since the counting button 171 has been operated during the power outage, the up edge of the signal representing the on/off state of the counting button 171 is not detected after the power is restored. No matter how long the counting button 171 is continued to be operated, a long-press determination is not made and counting is not performed. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 140(a), the long press is determined based on whether 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the ON signal of the count button 171 was detected, so even if an up edge is not detected, Long press determination is executed.

FIG. 141 is a timing chart showing a modification of the example shown in FIG. 140.

In the first modified example shown in FIG. 141(a), power is interrupted when X seconds, which is shorter than the 0.5 seconds that is the determination time for a long press operation, has elapsed since the start of operation of the counting button 171, and then power is restored.

After the power is restored, if an on signal is detected without detecting the up edge of the signal representing the on/off state of the count button 171, press and hold for the X seconds that had elapsed before the power was cut off. If the operation of the count button 171 continues for the remaining time ((0.5-X) seconds), the count button 171 will be operated for 0.5 seconds. The count long press flag is set to on, assuming that the count is still in the state of being pressed.

Also in the modification shown in FIG. 141(b), the power is cut off when X seconds have elapsed from the start of the operation of the count button 171, which is shorter than 0.5 seconds, which is the judgment time for a long-press operation, and then Power will be restored.

In the second modified example shown in FIG. 141(b), a standby process is provided for a certain period (2 seconds in this example) when power is restored (when power is turned on). That is, since the processing load increases immediately after power is turned on, the process waits until it is an appropriate timing to perform the counting process before performing the process related to the counting button 171. After the standby time has elapsed, the process related to the counting button 171 is performed as in FIG. 141(a). That is, if an ON signal is detected without detecting a rising edge of a signal indicating the ON/OFF state of the counting button 171, the X seconds that have elapsed before the power failure are subtracted from 0.5 seconds, which is the judgment time for the long press operation, and if the operation of the counting button 171 continues for the remaining time ((0.5-X) seconds) after the standby time has elapsed, it is determined that the counting button 171 has been operated for 0.5 seconds, and the counting long press flag is set to ON.

FIG. 142 is a timing chart showing another modification of the example shown in FIG. 140.

In the third modification shown in FIG. 142(a), a power outage occurs before 0.5 seconds, which is the judgment time for a long press operation, has elapsed after the start of the operation of the counting button 171, and then the power is restored. .

After the power is restored (power is turned on), if an on signal is detected without an up edge of the signal representing the on/off state of the counting button 171 being detected, the medal number control unit 350 determines whether the counting button 171 is operated. It determines that this has continued and starts a timer dedicated to when the power is turned on. This timer measures a longer time (for example, 2 seconds) than the normal long press operation determination time (0.5 seconds). Specifically, 2000 ms is set as an initial value exclusively for power-on to the count long press timer, which is set to 500 ms as an initial value in step S4206 in FIG. 107 . By doing this, when the long press operation is performed immediately after the power is turned on, the count long press flag is set to ON, and when the count timing comes while the count button 171 is being operated continuously, 50 The pieces are counted.

In the fourth modification shown in FIG. 142(b), a power outage occurs before 0.5 seconds, which is the judgment time for a long press operation, has elapsed after the start of the operation of the counting button 171, and then the power is restored. . In this example, the operator takes his hand off the count button 171 during the power outage, and the operation ends. Therefore, when the power is restored (power is turned on), an on signal indicating the on state of the counting button 171 is not detected. In this fourth modification, a timer dedicated to power-on is activated in conjunction with power-on. This timer measures a longer time (for example, 3 seconds) than the normal long press operation determination time (0.5 seconds). Further, the timer setting value exclusively for power-on in this example is longer than the timer setting value exclusively for power-on (for example, 2 seconds) in the third modification. If the operation of the counting button 171 is started while the timer dedicated for power-on is counting time, and the operation of the counting button 171 continues even after 3 seconds have passed, the counting long press flag is set to on. Ru. That is, while this timer is counting time, at least one of the up edge of the signal representing the on/off state of the counting button 171 and the on signal is detected, and the on signal is not detected even after 3 seconds have passed. If so, the count long press flag is set to on. Then, when the counting timing arrives while the counting button 171 continues to be operated, 50 sheets are counted.

Next, the display mode of the game medal number display device 170, which is a 5-digit, 7-segment display, described using FIG. 129(b) will be explained in detail again.

Figure 143 (a) shows an example of a change display (subtraction) on the game medal count display device 170.

As shown at the top of FIG. 143(a), the number "100" is displayed on the game medal count display device 170. When the change display starts, the game medal count display device 170 displays a number that is decremented by "1" at approximately 4 ms intervals in the display display process shown in FIG. 121. FIG. 143(a) shows how "1" is decremented by "99" → "98" → "97" → "96" → "95" → "94".

When 50 sheets are counted by pressing and holding the counting button 171, the time required to display the change is approximately 4 ms x 50 = approximately 200 ms in order to display the change by "1" at approximately 4 ms intervals. Since the counting timing has a cycle of 300 ms, the display time of the change display for subtraction is shorter than the cycle of the count timing, and it is possible to display the change for subtracting 50 sheets.

FIG. 143(b) is a diagram showing an example of change display (addition) on the game medal number display device 170.

The number "100" is also displayed on the game medal number display device 170 shown at the top of FIG. 143(b). When the change display starts, the game medal number display device 170 displays a number incremented by "1" at intervals of about 4 ms, the same as the change display during subtraction. FIG. 143(b) shows how 1 is added in the order of ``101'' → ``102'' → ``103'' → ``104'' → ``105'' → ``106''.

When the loan button 707 is operated and 50 coins are loaned out, and 15 coins (the maximum number of coins allowed by the rules) are paid out as a result of playing, the time required for the change display to change (add or subtract) by "1" at intervals of about 4 ms will be about 4 ms x 65 = about 260 ms. Since the counting timing has a cycle of 300 ms, the display time for the change display to add is shorter than the cycle of the counting timing, and it is also possible to display a change display that adds 65 coins.

FIG. 144 is a diagram showing another example of change display on the game medal number display device 170. Since the player may not notice a change in the display content of the game medal number display device 170, this is an example of notifying the player that there has been a change in the display content.

The number "100" is also displayed on the game medal count display device 170 shown in FIG. 144(a). In this example, the change display is performed using all digits, making it easy to recognize that the number is changing. In changing from the number "100" to the number "85", in this example, a display in which all segments of all five digits are lit (display of "88888") and a display in which all segments of all five digits are turned off (display of "00000") are alternately displayed every 8 ms. Eventually, after 250 ms has elapsed in this example, the number "85" is displayed on the game medal count display device 170. Since the change display is performed using all digits, it can be confirmed whether or not a malfunction that causes the display to be disabled has occurred in any of the segments of the game medal count display device 170. If it can be recognized that no malfunction has occurred, it can be recognized that there is no error in the number displayed after the change display.

Although all digits are used to display the change here, only some digits may be used to reduce processing load and data capacity. For example, one-digit display including the rightmost one digit, two-digit display, or three-digit display is performed. If all digits are not used and the rightmost single digit is not included, it may give the impression that the rightmost single digit segment has failed, so it is used to indicate that there is no failure. It is best to include the rightmost digit.

The number "100" is also displayed on the game medal count display device 170 shown in FIG. 144(b). In this example, the number changes from "100" to "85". In other words, it changes from a three-digit number to a two-digit number. Therefore, a change display is performed using three-digit segments. The change display here changes the position of the lit segment for each digit, making it appear as if the segments are rotating. This change display gives the impression that the change is starting from "100". Then, in this example, when 250 ms has elapsed since the change display began, the number "85" is displayed on the game medal count display device 170.

If you use two-digit segments instead of three-digit segments to show the change, it will give the impression that the change ends at "85."

As described above, the display may change stepwise by a predetermined number (e.g., 20) toward the target value, sandwiched between the two types of change displays described using FIG. 144. Specifically, when changing from "100" to a final value of "60" (target value), the display will read "100" → change display → "80" → change display → "60." Furthermore, when a full-color 7-segment LED display is used as the game medal count display device 170, the light emission color of the segments may be changed when the segments are lit during the change display.

FIG. 145 is a diagram showing an example in which the “number of game medals” stored in the RAM 358 is displayed on the effect image display device 157 in addition to the game medal number display device 170.

The medal count control unit 350 sends a command including information representing the "game medal count" (the number of game medals displayed as shown in FIG. 78) to the game control unit 302 as a medal count control state command. The game control unit 302 includes information representing the "game medal count" in the security command and sends the security command to the first sub-control unit 400. The security command is sent to the first sub-control unit 400 at 100 ms intervals. The second sub-control unit 500 receives the information representing the "game medal count" via the first sub-control unit 400, and causes the performance image display unit 157 to display the "game medal count". In this example, the "game medal count" is always displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen of the performance image display unit 157.

In this example, the display of the "game medal count" on the performance image display device 157 displays the number as is according to the information representing the "game medal count" contained in the security command transmitted at 100 ms intervals. The performance image display device 157 shown on the left side of FIG. 145 displays the number "100" according to the previous security command. The number "100" is also displayed on the game medal count display device 170 displayed at the far left. In this state, the count button 171 is pressed and held, and 50 medals are counted. The medal count control unit 350 starts executing the display display process shown in FIG. 121, and the game medal count display device 170 starts a change display that subtracts "1" at approximately 4 ms intervals. Note that in FIG. 145, the display during the change display is shown as if all 7 segments are lit and some segments are slightly blinking due to an afterimage. The game medal count display device 170 takes about 200 ms to display a change that subtracts "1" at a time, and the number "50" is displayed about 200 ms after 50 medals have been counted.

On the other hand, on the first sub-control unit 400 side, when the count of 50 medals is performed, a security command containing information indicating that the "number of game medals" is 50 is sent during the transmission period (100 ms) of the security command. Receive commands. In the example shown in FIG. 145, the first sub-control unit 400 receives the security command after approximately 20 ms have passed since the counting of 50 sheets, and the display process is executed. The display process here is a frame replacement process in which an image displaying "100" is replaced with an image displaying "50", and is completed in a short time. As a result, the number "50" will be displayed on the performance image display device 157 before the change display on the game medal number display device 170 is completed.

In the example shown in FIG. 145 described above, the sub-controllers (400, 500) that receive the "game medal count" information do not display any changes, but the main control unit 300 that issues the information does. In this way, the final number "50" displayed by the game medal count display device 170 can be ascertained from the display on the performance image display device 157, and it can be recognized that the change display has been completed when "50" is displayed on the game medal count display device 170.

Figure 146 shows a modified example of the example shown in Figure 145.

In the modification shown in FIG. 146, the display of the "number of game medals" on the performance image display device 157 also displays a change in which the number is subtracted by "1". Moreover, the change display takes more time than the change display on the game medal number display device 170. Specifically, the change display on the effect image display device 157 takes 280 ms. This time of 280 ms is the time period for the game medal number display device 170 when 50 medals are lent out by operating the lending button 707 and 15 medals (corresponding to the maximum number of medals to be paid out) are paid out as a result of the game. This time is longer than the time required to display the addition change (approximately 4 ms×65=approximately 260 ms) and less than 300 ms, which is the cycle of the counting timing.

Usually, the player often looks at the effect image display device 157, and does not look at the game medal number display device 170 frequently. As described above, it is desired that the slot machine 100 does not continue to store too many "game medal numbers", and it is desired to increase the frequency of operation of the count button 171. To achieve this, it is necessary for the player to pay attention to the "game medal number". The reason why the "game medal number" is also displayed on the effect image display device 157 is to make the player pay attention to the "game medal number" as much as possible. However, since the effect image display device 157 displays attractive effect displays such as game background displays, even if the "game medal number" is displayed, the player tends to be distracted by the attractive effect displays. Therefore, as in this modified example, if the display of the "game medal number" on the effect image display device 157 is made to take longer than the display on the game medal number display device 170, it can be expected that the player will also pay attention to the game medal number display device 170, which displays quickly. If you look at the game medal count display device 170, you will see that it does not display any special effects, allowing the player to clearly recognize the "game medal count." As a result, it becomes easier for players to notice that the number of game medals is accumulating, and it is expected that the frequency of operating the count button 171 will increase.

The change display on the performance image display device 157 not only displays changing text, but also displays an animation indicating that a change is occurring, which draws attention to the "game medal count," and it is expected that the frequency of operation of the count button 171 will also increase. By displaying the change display on the performance image display device 157 in a different manner from the change display on the game medal count display device 170, it is possible to display the change display in a manner appropriate to the period of the change display. The change display on the performance image display device 157 may also be displayed in the same manner as the change display on the game medal count display device 170. This makes it easy to recognize that a change display is occurring.

Figure 147 shows another example that is completely different from the example shown in Figure 145.

In this alternative example shown in FIG. 147, the game medal count display device 170 does not display any changes, but only displays the "game medal count" on the performance image display device 157. That is, in this alternative example, the display device display process shown in FIG. 121 is not executed, and when 50 medals are counted, the number "50" is immediately displayed on the game medal count display device 170. On the other hand, even if the performance image display device 157 receives a security command, it does not immediately display according to the information representing the "game medal count" contained in the security command, but instead displays a change by subtracting "1" at a time.

In this example, just like the modified example shown in FIG. 146, it takes longer for the "game medal count" to be displayed on the performance image display device 157 than on the game medal count display device 170, so it is expected that the player will also pay attention to the game medal count display device 170, which displays quickly. By looking at the game medal count display device 170, the player will be able to clearly recognize the "game medal count." As a result, it becomes easier for the player to notice that the number of game medals is accumulating, and it is expected that the frequency of operating the count button 171 will increase. In addition, in the medal count control unit 350, the amount of data for displaying changes is reduced, and the processing load is also reduced.

Figure 148 (a) is a timing chart showing what happens when a payout is about to be made beyond the payout threshold.

This Figure 148(a) shows the value of the "game medal count" stored in RAM 358. Also, below that, the number of payout medals to be added to the "game medal count" is shown.

The RAM 358 of the medal number control unit 350 can store a maximum of 16,383 "game medals". That is, the maximum number of sheets that can be stored in the RAM 358 is 16,383. The payout threshold is set to this maximum stored number of coins.

When the "number of game medals" is stored up to 16373, a further 15 medals (corresponding to the maximum number of medals allowed by the rules) are paid out, which corresponds to the maximum number of medals to be paid out. The number of medals to be paid out, which is 15 medals, is included in the game control state command 1 (payout command) and is sent from the game control unit 302 to the medal count control unit 350. If the number of medals to be paid out is added, the "number of game medals" exceeds the maximum number of medals stored, and exceeds the payout threshold value in step S4B03 of FIG. 117. For this reason, the payout response command includes "abnormality" and is sent from the medal count control unit 350 to the game control unit 302. If the payout response command includes "abnormality", the game control unit 302 sends a command to the first sub-control unit 400 indicating that the number of game medals is in an overflow state (addition by payout is not possible) (step S1608 shown in FIG. 89). Based on this command, the sub-control unit (400, 500) issues an error notification indicating that the upper limit has been exceeded. In the example shown in FIG. 148(a), on the performance image display device 157 where the game background display is displayed, a text display is displayed overlapping the game background display as an over-limit error notification, informing the user that the payout threshold has been exceeded and encouraging the user to operate the count button 171. In other words, the over-limit error notification is executed even during play.

Note that an error sound may be output from the speaker 272 or a lamp may be lit as an upper limit exceedance error notification.

Figure 148 (b) shows another example of an upper limit exceeded error notification.

A blinking display on the effect image display device 157 may be performed as an upper limit exceedance error notification. In the example shown in FIG. 148(b), the character display of upper limit error notification is displayed every second so as to overlap with the game background display. The upper limit exceedance error notification is displayed during the game so as to overlap the game background display, making the game background display difficult to see. Therefore, in order to avoid putting the player at a disadvantage, a blinking display is performed to ensure a period during which the game background display is easily visible.

When the game control unit 302 receives the payout response command including “normal” from the medal number control unit 350, it transmits the payout command to the first sub-control unit 400 (step S1607 shown in FIG. 89). On the side of the sub-control unit (400, 500), when receiving the payout command while the upper limit exceedance error notification is being executed, the execution of the upper limit exceedance error notification is terminated. Note that if the count button 171 is operated, the upper limit exceedance error notification may be terminated regardless of the number of game medals. After the counting button 171 is operated, even if the counting process takes time, the upper limit exceedance error notification can be ended early.

Further, information representing the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 is included in the security command and transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. If the information representing the "number of game medals" that has been sent is the number of medals for the payout threshold (16383 medals), even if the sub-control unit (400, 500) side issues an error notification that the upper limit has been reached. good. For example, the effect image display device 157 may display a text message that reads, "The upper limit has been reached. Please operate the counting button." This upper limit reaching error notification ends when the transmitted information representing the "number of game medals" becomes less than the payout threshold (16,383 medals). Note that if the counting button 171 is operated, the upper limit reaching error notification may be ended regardless of the number of game medals. After the counting button 171 is operated, even if the counting process takes time, the upper limit reaching error notification can be ended early.

Further, other cases in which the "number of game medals" is added include when there is payment and when there is lending from lending machine 700. Although this embodiment does not determine whether the upper limit has been reached for settlement, it may be determined whether the upper limit has been reached in the same way as in the case of payout. For example, even if the settlement threshold is set to the maximum number of stored medals and the settlement threshold is exceeded, the settlement response command will include "abnormality" and the medal number control unit 350 will send it to the game control unit 302. Allow it to be sent. Even if the payment response command includes "abnormality", the game control unit 302 sends an error occurrence command to the first sub-control unit 400 indicating that an error has occurred in which the number of displayed game medals exceeds the upper limit. , the sub-control unit (400, 500) side issues an upper limit exceedance error notification. On the other hand, the lending threshold is set to a smaller number than the maximum memory number (for example, 15,000), and if the "number of game medals" exceeds the lending threshold due to lending, an error exceeding the upper limit lending will occur. , lending is not accepted (if the determination in step S3712 in FIG. 103 is No), and the "number of game medals" is not added. The notification of the lending error exceeding the upper limit is displayed on the information display 703 of the lending machine 700. However, by transmitting the fact that the upper limit lending error has occurred from the medal number control section 350 to the game control section 302 and further from the game control section 302 to the first sub-control section 400, the production image display device 157 Notification can be made on the slot machine 100 side, such as the speaker 272 or the lamp.

Figure 149 (a) is a timing chart showing what happens when a payout is about to be made when the second payout threshold is exceeded.

In this Figure 149 (a), the value of the "number of game medals" stored in RAM 358 is also shown, and below that, the number of medals to be paid out that will be added to the "number of game medals" is shown.

A command including the display number of game medals (number of game medals) is transmitted to the game control unit 302 from the medal number control unit 350 as a medal number control state command. A second payout threshold (for example, 15,000 pieces) is set in the game control unit 302, which is smaller than 16,383 pieces (payout threshold), which is the maximum number of pieces stored in the RAM 358. In the game control unit 302, if the number of game medals to be displayed that has been sent a command is equal to or higher than this second payout threshold, the first sub-control unit 400 is notified that an error indicating that the number of game medals to be displayed is close to the upper limit has occurred. Sends an error occurrence command indicating this. On the side of the sub-control unit (400, 500), based on this error occurrence command, an upper limit approaching notification is performed. In the example shown in FIG. 149(a), on the effect image display device 157 on which the game background display is displayed, a character display prompting the operation of the counting button 171 is displayed as an upper limit notification so as to overlap the game background display. Displayed. That is, in this example as well, the upper limit approaching notification is executed during the game. FIG. 148(a) shows the effect image display device 157 that has switched from displaying this upper limit nearing notification to displaying upper limit exceeding error notification.

Note that as the upper limit approaching notification, a notification sound may be output from the speaker 272, or a lamp may be lit. In addition, it was decided that the near-limit notification will continue from the start of the near-limit notification until the start of the upper limit exceeded error notification, but considering the game up to the upper limit of the number of game medals, the near-limit notification will continue during one game. The notification may be carried out only during a part of the time. For example, the notification may be performed within one second after the start lever 135 is operated. On the other hand, the upper limit exceedance error notification is a notification carried out during one game. For example, if it is known that there are only a few bonus periods left for AT games etc. even if the upper limit approaching notification is started, it is possible to easily give priority to the remaining AT games etc. Furthermore, when switching from upper limit nearing notification to upper limit exceeded error notification, it is possible to easily recognize that the notification has been changed.

FIG. 149(b) is a diagram showing another example of upper limit nearing notification.

The notification of approaching the upper limit may also be displayed in a flashing manner on the performance image display device 157. In the example shown in FIG. 149(b), the text display of the notification of approaching the upper limit is displayed every second so as to overlap with the gaming background display. Since the notification of approaching the upper limit is displayed during play and so as to overlap with the gaming background display, it becomes difficult to see the gaming background display. Therefore, to avoid causing any disadvantage to the player, a flashing display is used to ensure a period during which the gaming background display is easily visible.

When the game control unit 302 receives a command from the medal count control unit 350 that includes a medal count display number that is less than the second payout threshold, it sends an error release command to the first sub-control unit 400, indicating that the medal count display number is close to being released error has been released. The sub-control units (400, 500) end the execution of the upper limit approaching notification based on this error release command.

Further, a second threshold for payout may be set in the first sub-control unit 400. In the first sub-control unit 400, if the information indicating the "number of game medals" transmitted in the security command is equal to or greater than the second payout threshold, the first sub-control unit 400 500) side may perform the above-mentioned upper limit approaching notification. This near-limit notification ends when the transmitted information representing the "number of game medals" becomes less than the second payout threshold.

Furthermore, a second payout threshold may be set in the medal count control unit 350. In this case, the medal count control unit 350 determines whether the "game medal count" is equal to or greater than the second payout threshold, and if it is equal to or greater than the second payout threshold, it transmits a notification command to the game control unit 302, and the game control unit 302 transmits a notification command to the sub-control unit (400, 500) based on the command information. This also allows the sub-control unit (400, 500) to execute the upper limit approach notification. Then, when it falls below the second payout threshold, it transmits a notification end command via the medal count control unit 350 → game control unit 302 → sub-control unit (400, 500) route. Note that the blinking period of the blinking display of the upper limit approach notification should be longer than the blinking period of the blinking display of the upper limit exceeding error notification. If the blinking cycle is short when the notification switches from the approaching upper limit to the upper limit exceeded error notification, the urgency of the notification can be easily recognized. Note that if the notification about the approaching upper limit is a blinking display, the upper limit exceeded error notification can be displayed constantly. This makes it easy to recognize the urgency of the notification.

FIG. 150 is a diagram illustrating an example in which a highly urgent error notification overlaps with a notification prompting counting.

On the effect image display device 157 shown on the left side of FIG. 150(a), a display indicating that the upper limit is near is displayed, overlapping with the game background display. Note that the upper limit approaching notification display may be displayed constantly, but it is a blinking display that is displayed every second. The front door 102 is opened while the upper limit nearing notification is being performed. When the front door 102 is opened, the game control section 302 transmits an error occurrence command indicating that a door opening error has occurred to the first sub-control section 400. The sub-control unit (400, 500) side performs error notification based on this error occurrence command. When the front door 102 is open, there is an increased possibility of fraudulent acts (so-called cheating), so it is necessary to close the front door 102 as soon as possible. Therefore, the error notification of the door opening error is more urgent than the notification prompting counting. Note that even when the front door 102 is open, the operation of the counting button 171 is accepted. The effect image display device 157 shown on the right side of FIG. 150(a) displays an error notification of a door opening error overlapping the game background display. The error notification display for the door open error (hereinafter referred to as the door open error display) is always displayed as the words "Door is open." This door open error display is displayed on the same layer as the near-limit notification display, but it may also be displayed on a layer before the near-limit notification display so that it overlaps with the near-limit notification display. . Alternatively, since the door open error display is always displayed, it is displayed on a layer deeper than the blinking upper limit notification, and the blinking upper limit nearing notification overlaps with the always displayed door open error display. You can do it like this.

FIG. 150(b) shows that in contrast to the door open error display which is always displayed, a character display indicating that the upper limit is near is displayed every second. The right side of FIG. 150(b) shows how the character display of the upper limit nearing notification disappears due to the blinking display, and the door open error display that remains constantly displayed is displayed. In the state shown on the right side, the highly urgent door open error display is easy to see. Further, the speaker 272 outputs a sound such as "The door is open" as an error notification of a door open error, but a notification sound of an upper limit approaching notification is not output.

Although this is not an error with as high an urgency as a door open error, a message such as "Please stop the reels that are spinning" or "A communication error has occurred" may be displayed to request improvement, in which case a wire may be loose, a wire may be broken, or a power outage may occur in the rental machine 700. In some cases, a message urging the user to count may also be displayed along with these messages.

Figure 151 (a) shows an example in which the notification prompting counting continues even after switching to the demonstration display.

In the slot machine 100, if no bet operation is performed within a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) from when all reels 110-112 have stopped if no payout has been made, or from when the payout has been completed if a payout has been made, the slot machine 100 will transition to a demonstration state (demonstration in progress). The slot machine will also transition to demonstration in progress if the settlement button 134 is operated.

In the example shown in FIG. 151(a), during the game (during a bet, while the reels are rotating 110 to 112, or during a payout), the text display indicating that the upper limit is near is started, and the transition to the demo begins without the counting button 171 being operated. . The effect image display device 157 displays a game background display during the game, but switches to the demo display when the demo is in progress. The demo display is a display that introduces the story and characters. Even in the case of transitioning to the demonstration, the character display of the upper limit nearing notification continues to be displayed as long as the "number of game medals" does not become less than the second threshold for payout. If the transition occurs during a demonstration, there is a high possibility that the player will leave his/her seat. By prompting the player to operate the counting button 171 even during the demonstration, it may be possible to prevent the player from leaving the slot machine 100 by taking only the cards from the lending machine 700 and leaving the game medals in the slot machine 100. Note that the blinking display of the near upper limit notification may be continued to ensure visibility of the demo display, or the blinking display of the near upper limit notification may be constantly displayed to ensure visibility of the near upper limit notification.

FIG. 151(b) is a diagram showing an example of notification after the counting button 171 is operated during the demonstration.

A demonstration image is displayed on the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 151(b). The notification prompting counting is displayed in the largest size so as to overlap the demo display. Here, since we want the user to operate the counting button 171 with priority, the notification prompting counting is displayed in the largest size. Further, below that, a warning message is displayed to prevent the card from being stolen while the user is away, such as ``Be careful not to forget or steal your card.'' Further, in this example, the "number of game medals" is displayed at the lower right of the display screen of the performance image display device 157, and "15300", which exceeds the second threshold for payout, is displayed. Note that "16383", which is the payout threshold value, may be displayed. The display of "number of game medals" on the effect image display device 157 may be displayed all the time, may be displayed temporarily, or may not be displayed as in the example shown in FIG. 151(a). good.

Eventually, the counting button 171 is operated, and the "number of game medals" decreases to a number less than the second threshold for payout. Then, the notification prompting counting disappears (is not displayed), and this time, the warning display is displayed in the largest size and stands out. Note that the "number of game medals" displayed at the lower right of the performance image display device 157 has decreased to "14,950".

FIG. 152(a) is a diagram showing an example of notification when the "number of game medals" once exceeds a certain specified number such as a payout threshold or a second payout threshold and then falls below the specified number.

In FIG. 152(a), the value of the "game medal count" stored in the RAM 358 is displayed as X medals. This X medals corresponds to a certain prescribed number such as a payout threshold or a second payout threshold. In the performance image display device 157, a notification is displayed urging the player to count because the "game medal count" has exceeded the prescribed number. When this notification is displayed, the player starts to operate the count button 171, and the "game medal count" immediately falls below the prescribed number. Here, the count button 171 is being held down for a long time. In this example, the notification urging the player to count continues even if the "game medal count" falls below the prescribed number. In other words, the notification urging the player to count continues until the "game medal count" falls below the prescribed number by a further prescribed number (for example, 100, which is 50 times 2 times). The arrow of the notification period in the figure indicates the period during which a notification urging the player to count, such as "Please operate the count button," is being issued.

If you set the specification to start the notification when the specified number is reached, and immediately end the notification when the number falls below the specified number, there is a high possibility that only a small number will be counted.In this example, the specified number to start the notification is The notification will continue until the number is less than . By doing so, repetition of notification and counting operations can be reduced. Incidentally, the notification prompting the counting may be made always at a certain time (for example, 10 seconds) regardless of the number of game medals. You can encourage children to count in large numbers.

The above-mentioned specified number may be a settlement threshold, a loan threshold, or some other threshold.

In addition, if the "number of game medals" falls below the specified number due to a bet operation, the number of "game medals" will be reduced by the predetermined number above, although it will only be reduced by a maximum of 3 medals in the first place. Regardless of the value, the notification prompting counting may be continued.

Figure 152 (b) shows an example of a notification that prompts the player to count when the "number of game medals" exceeds the second payout threshold over multiple games.

When the "number of game medals" exceeds the second threshold for payout (15,000 in this example) in a certain game, a notification to prompt counting is started. The notification prompting counting is displayed on the effect image display device 157 on which the game background display is displayed. Even if the notification prompting counting is started, the player does not operate the counting button 171 and continues playing the game. As a result, the game continues without the "number of game medals" falling below the second payout threshold. Here, when the "number of game medals" exceeds the second threshold for payout, a notification prompting the player to count is performed once every multiple games (four games in this example). Therefore, for three games after the notification prompting counting is given, no notification prompting counting is made. During the three games in which no notification is given to encourage counting, the performance display such as the game background display displayed on the performance image display device 157 becomes easier to see, which may improve the interest of the game. Note that, when the "number of game medals" falls below the second threshold for payout, the notification prompting counting is no longer performed. Therefore, if the "number of game medals" falls below the second threshold for payout during three games in which no notification to prompt counting is made, the notification to prompt counting will not be made until the second threshold for payout is exceeded. It won't happen. On the other hand, if the "number of game medals" falls below the second payout threshold during a game in which a notification prompting counting is being made, the notification prompting counting that has been in progress will disappear (become invisible). ).

Next, we will explain more about counting notifications.

FIG. 153(a) is a diagram illustrating an example in which notification is issued to prompt counting every time the "number of game medals" increases by a predetermined number. Note that each of the figures ((a) to (c)) shown in FIG. 153 shows the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358.

In the example shown in FIG. 153(a), every time the "number of game medals" increases by 1000, a notification prompting the user to count is performed. First, when the "number of game medals" exceeds 1,000, a message indicating that the number has exceeded 1,000 and prompting the user to count is displayed on the effect image display device 157. These displays continue to be displayed for a predetermined period of time or until the next change in the "number of game medals" (the same applies hereinafter). Therefore, it is displayed even during the game. Next, when the "number of game medals" exceeds 2,000, a message indicating that the number has exceeded 2,000 and prompting the user to count is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Furthermore, when the "number of game medals" exceeds 3,000, a message indicating that the number has exceeded 3,000 and prompting the user to count is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Thereafter, these notifications are repeated until the number of sheets exceeds 14,000. Then, when the "number of game medals" reaches the second payout threshold of 15,000 pieces, the display prompting for counting continues until the "number of game medals" becomes less than 15,000 pieces, as shown in FIG. 149(a). It will be displayed. In addition, if the number of game medals reaches 15,000, the message "You have reached 15,000 or more" and a display prompting you to count may continue to be displayed, or if the "number of game medals" is equal to or higher than the second payout threshold. If it is below the payout threshold, the actual value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 may be displayed (eg, 15,015 medals are now displayed). Since the number of game medals is displayed periodically, the user can roughly grasp the number of game medals without looking at the game medal number display device 170. Even in the unlikely event that a problem occurs with the game machine and the "number of game medals" disappears, it is easy to know how much has been lost. It should be noted that a display prompting for counting may be displayed in accordance with the time that has passed since the start of a bonus game such as an AT game. For example, after starting a bonus game such as an AT game, a display prompting for counting will be displayed when 10 minutes have passed, a display prompting counting will be displayed when 20 minutes have passed, and a display will be displayed when 30 minutes have passed. A display will be displayed to encourage the following. The display can be performed periodically regardless of the number of game medals.

FIG. 153(b) is a diagram showing an example when the counting button 171 is operated in a state advantageous to the player.

Here, the AT state is a state advantageous to the player. During the AT state, the "number of game medals" tends to increase due to payout. During the AT state game, the effect image display device 157 displays a display (AT game display) suggesting or representing that the player is currently in the AT state. When the "number of game medals" exceeds 1000 pieces during the AT state, as shown in the effect image display device 157 shown on the left side of FIG. A message will appear prompting you to do so. In this example, the count button 171 continues to be pressed and operated, and the "number of game medals" decreases to a certain value ("100" in this example).

The state advantageous to the player here means a state in which the "number of game medals" is easily increased by payout. Therefore, it is not limited to the AT state, but may be a state in which a bonus (RB, BB) is in operation, or an ART state. If the player is in an advantageous state, the "number of game medals" is expected to increase further, and it can be said that the player can count (output to the lending machine 700) all of the number of game medals. However, if all of the number of game medals is counted, the number of medals inserted for the next game (for example, three medals) will also be counted, and the next game cannot be played unless the medals are lent from the lending machine 700. Even if the player is in an advantageous state, there are cases in which the consumption of the "number of game medals" happens to be greater than the payout. Therefore, even if the player is in an advantageous state, a notification is given that it is better to leave some "number of game medals" in reserve. The effect image display device 157 shown on the right side of FIG. 153(b) is in a state where the "number of game medals" has decreased to 100 due to counting in the AT state, and this effect image display device 157 issues a notification (counting end guidance notification) such as "Stop counting and continue playing" to advise the player that it is advisable to save a small number of "game medals". In other words, the counting end guidance notification is issued before the counting of all game medals is completed. Note that instead of the counting end guidance notification shown here, a notification such as "It is advisable to save some game value" or "If you count them all, you will no longer be able to play" may be used. In other words, a notification of the drawbacks of counting all game medals may be issued before the counting of all game medals is completed.

In the slot machine 100 in the example of FIG. 153(b), the automatic counting described above is not performed, and counting ends when the player releases the count button 171. In this example, the player sees the notification that it is a good idea to leave a small number of "game medals", so he releases the count button 171 and counting ends when 50 "game medals" are left.

FIG. 153(c) is a diagram illustrating an example in which the count button 171 is operated at a disadvantage to the player.

Here, the disadvantageous situation for the player refers to a situation in which the "number of game medals" tends to decrease if the game is played repeatedly without being lent out. An example is the normal state. The effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 153(c) displays a display (normal game display) that suggests or represents the normal state.

In the example shown in FIG. 153(c), the counting button 171 is pressed and held continuously when the "game medal count" is 1000, causing the "game medal count" to decrease beyond a certain value (in this example, "100"). If the situation is unfavorable to the player, it is unlikely that the player will continue playing after counting is completed, so no notification is given to the player that it is a good idea to leave some "game medal count" remaining. In this example, the counting button 171 is pressed and held continuously until the "game medal count" reaches 0. When the "game medal count" reaches 0, the text display 157 displays the message "Please stop counting."

Figure 154(a) is a diagram showing a modified example of the example shown in Figure 153(b). The following explanation focuses on the differences from the example shown in Figure 153(b).

In the example shown in FIG. 154(a), the counting operation continues in a state advantageous to the player (for example, AT state), and when the "number of game medals" decreases to a predetermined value ("50" in this example), the counting operation continues. To temporarily invalidate the counting operation even if the operation is continued. That is, even if the long-press operation of the counting button 171 is continued, counting is temporarily ended. As a result, the decrease in the "number of game medals" temporarily stops. FIG. 154(a) shows the effect image display device 157 when the "number of game medals" has decreased to 50, and the display screen displays the message "Counting has ended once." ing. To restart counting once it has been forcibly ended, a new operation of the counting button 171 is required.

Figure 154 (b) shows an example in which counting that was forcibly terminated is restarted.

The example shown in FIG. 154(b) is a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 154(a), where the counting operation continues in a state advantageous to the player (for example, AT state), and the "game medal number" decreases to a predetermined value ("50" in this example), so the counting is forcibly terminated. In this example, the player has a reason to stop playing even in an advantageous state, and the player operates the counting button 171 again. That is, the player presses the counting button 171 again. In this modified example, when the "game medal number" falls below the predetermined value, the counting of "50" by the long press of the counting button 171 is not effective, and even if the long press is performed, only "1" is counted. That is, the "game medal number" decreases by "1" each time the counting timing (300 ms) arrives. This is for the same reason as mentioned above, if all of the game medals were counted, the number of medals inserted for the next game (for example, three medals) would also be counted, and the next game would not be possible unless medals were loaned out from the loaning machine 700. Therefore, to prevent the number of game medals from reaching 0, the number is only counted in increments of "1".

Eventually, when the number of game medals reaches 0, the effect image display device 157 displays the words "Counting has ended".

Note that if the player presses and holds the counting button 171 again, counting in increments of "50" may be started. In this example, since the number of game medals has decreased to "50", it becomes "0" at once, and the output of the "number of game medals" to the lending machine 700 is quickly completed.

The example shown in FIG. 154(c) is an example of the modified example described using FIGS. 154(a) and 154(b) when the player is in an unfavorable state (for example, the normal state). In the modified example, if the player is in an unfavorable state, pressing and holding the counting button 171 until the "game medal count" becomes 0 is effective, just like the example shown in FIG. 153(c), and when the "game medal count" becomes 0, the text display 157 displays "Please stop counting."

However, even if the player is in an unfavorable state (for example, the normal state), in order to motivate the player to continue playing, the same processing as when the player is in an advantageous state (the processing shown in Figures 154(a) and 154(b) or the processing shown in Figure 153(b)) may be performed.

[Example of operation when the VL signal from the lending device 700 is turned off]
Next, an example will be described in which the VL signal from the rental device 700 is turned off.

Figure 155 is a timing chart showing an example of when the VL signal from the rental device 700 is turned off.

A VL signal is always transmitted from the lending machine 700 to the medal number control unit 350 in an on state. If this VL signal is in an off state, it is suspected that the lending machine 700 is not powered on, and lending and counting may not be possible. It is also possible that the communication line connecting the slot machine 100 and the lending machine 700 is disconnected.

The medal count control unit 350 transmits VL signal information indicating that the VL signal is off to the game control unit 302 by a medal count control state command shown in FIG. 78 in which the upper byte is 01H. When the game control unit 302 receives VL signal information indicating that the VL signal is off, the judgment result in step S1007 shown in FIG. 83 becomes No, and the process cannot proceed to the next step until the VL signal is turned on. Therefore, even if the start lever 135 is operated, the operation is not considered to be a valid operation, and even if the bet buttons 130 and 132 are operated, the operation is not considered to be a valid operation. In other words, some of the multiple types of game progress operations are invalidated. In this embodiment, the operations performed in the first half of a game are targeted as some of the operations. Therefore, if the game is started (the reels start spinning) by the operation in the first half, when the VL signal is turned off, the operation in the second half (the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 (stop operation)) is valid. Therefore, the game can proceed, although in a limited manner. If the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 becomes invalid when the timing of the operation is being waited for, the operation becomes valid and the timing must be waited for from scratch, which may give a bothersome impression, but this can be reduced. Furthermore, if the operation up to the internal winning decision of the game progress operation is made valid even when counting is not possible, for example, if a result favorable to the player is obtained and a grand performance suddenly starts, the player may feel more eager to continue the game. As a result, there is a possibility that a delay may occur in the countermeasure when the VL signal is turned off, but this possibility can be reduced. However, the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 may be made invalid. The fact that the VL signal is turned off can be quickly notified to the player. Note that even if the VL signal is turned off, it is not treated as an error on the main control unit 300 (slot machine 100) side, and no notification regarding this is executed. Also, if it is treated as an error, an error reset operation is required, but since the VL signal being in the OFF state suggests that there is an abnormality on the lending machine 700 side, no error reset operation is required for the main control unit 300 (slot machine 100). Note that, as in the following example, a configuration may be adopted in which an error is notified when the VL signal is in the OFF state.

Figure 155 (a) shows whether the operation (insertion) of the bet buttons 130, 132 and the operation (insertion/lever operation) of the start lever 135 (lever) are treated as valid or invalid. Also shown below that is the value of the "number of game medals" stored in RAM 358. Also shown below that is the state of the VL signal.

As shown in FIG. 155(a), when the VL signal is on, the operation of the bet buttons 130, 132 and the operation of the start lever 135 are treated as valid operations. In addition, no error notification, which will be described later, is performed.

When the VL signal is in the OFF state, the operation of the bet buttons 130, 132 and the operation of the start lever 135 are treated as invalid operations. In addition, an error notification is displayed on the performance image display device 157. The performance image display device 157 shown in FIG. 155(a) displays text such as "Communication with the lending machine not established." Note that the error notification may also be a notification that the operation of the bet buttons 130, 132 or the operation of the start lever 135 is invalid. For example, a text display such as "Bet operation/lever operation is invalid" or a text display such as "Bet operation/lever operation is invalid because communication with the lending machine has not been established" may be displayed.

Next, a modification of this embodiment will be described. In this embodiment, regardless of the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358, when the VL signal turns off, the operations of the bet buttons 130 and 132 and the operation of the start lever 135 are treated as invalid operations. In the modified example described below, the response differs depending on the value of the "number of game medals". That is, in the first modification, both the operation of the bet buttons 130 and 132 and the operation of the start lever 135 are performed in a state where the "number of game medals" is less than a certain threshold (in this example, 15,000, which is the second threshold for payout). As shown in FIG. 155(a), if the VL signal is turned off in the state of, for example, 980 sheets), it is treated as an invalid operation. The fact that the "number of game medals" is small means that the player could end the game at any time. Therefore, the player should be made aware of the fact that communication with the rental machine 700 has not been established, and the clerk should promptly Promote repair. On the other hand, even if the VL signal is turned off while the "number of game medals" is greater than or equal to the certain threshold value, it is treated as a valid operation.

Figure 155 (b) shows a first modified example in which the "number of game medals" is 15,550 medals, which is greater than or equal to the second payout threshold of 15,000.

When the "number of game medals" reaches the payout threshold, all of the multiple types of game progress operations are invalidated. That is, the input operation for the next game (operation of the bet buttons 130, 132) becomes invalid, and there is no opportunity to operate the start lever 135 or the stop buttons 137 to 139.

In the first modified example shown in FIG. 155(b), when the "number of game medals" is equal to or greater than the second payout threshold, the "number of game medals" will eventually reach the payout threshold and the player will no longer be able to play the next game, so the game is not stopped until that point, allowing the player to continue enjoying the game. Also, continuing to play even when the "number of game medals" exceeds the second payout threshold often means that the player is in an advantageous state (such as an AT state), and stopping the game in this state is likely to significantly reduce the player's interest in the game, which is undesirable, so the game is not stopped.

In the first modified example in FIG. 155(b), the game does not stop even if the VL signal is turned off, but even in this modified example, an error notification is displayed on the performance image display device 157 when the VL signal is turned off.

Figure 156 shows a second modified example in which the operation differs depending on whether the "number of game medals" is below a certain threshold.

The state shown in FIG. 156(a) is a state in which the number of game medals is 14,000, which is less than a certain threshold (15,000, which is the second payout threshold in this example). In the second modification, even if the VL signal is turned off in this state, all of the plurality of types of game progress operations are treated as valid operations. Therefore, both the operation of the bet buttons 130 and 132 and the operation of the start lever 135 are effective. However, even in the second modification, when the VL signal is turned off, an error notification is displayed on the effect image display device 157.

The state shown in FIG. 156(b) is a state in which the number of game medals is 15,550, which is equal to or greater than a certain threshold (second payout threshold). In the second modified example, when the VL signal is turned off in this state, some of the multiple types of game progression operations are invalidated. In other words, the operation of the bet buttons 130, 132 and the operation of the start lever 135 performed in the first half of a game are invalidated. In addition, an error notification is displayed on the performance image display device 157.

The second modification shown in FIG. 156 is the exact opposite of the first modification, but the fact that the "number of game medals" is small means that the game may have just started, so it does not interfere with the progress of the game that has just started. There is a purpose. In addition, in the slot machine 100, it cannot be said that there is a possibility that the "number of game medals" may disappear no matter what kind of trouble occurs, so the "number of game medals" is large. If the "number of game medals" disappears in this state, the disadvantage will be great. Therefore, when the "number of game medals" is equal to or higher than a certain threshold (second threshold for payout), the progress of the game is stopped and prompt repair by the clerk is encouraged. Furthermore, if there is a large number of game medals, it can be assumed that the player can perform counting operations at any time, so the player should be made aware of the fact that communication with the lending machine 700 has not been established. The aim is to encourage store staff to make repairs as soon as possible.

As explained above, the way to respond when the VL signal is turned off will depend on the value of the "game medal count" and whether the state is advantageous or disadvantageous to the player. Note that an advantageous state for the player here refers to a state in which the "game medal count" can be easily increased by payouts (for example, AT state, ART state, BB state, BR state, etc.), and an unfavorable state refers to a state in which the "game medal count" is likely to decrease as play continues (for example, the normal state, etc.).

If the value of the "number of game medals" is less than a certain threshold value in a disadvantageous situation for the player, when the VL signal is turned off, one of the multiple types of game progress operations is performed as shown in FIG. 155(a). At least some operations are disabled. On the other hand, if the value of the "number of game medals" is greater than or equal to a certain threshold value in a situation that is advantageous to the player, even if the VL signal is turned off, there are multiple types of game progress as shown in FIG. 155(b). All operations in the operation are treated as valid operations. Alternatively, if the value of the "number of game medals" is less than a certain threshold value in a situation that is disadvantageous to the player, even if the VL signal is turned off, there are multiple types of game progress as shown in FIG. 156(a). All operations may be treated as valid operations. On the other hand, if the value of the "number of game medals" is greater than or equal to a certain threshold value in a situation that is advantageous to the player, when the VL signal is turned off, one of the multiple types of game progress operations is performed, as shown in FIG. 156(b). The operations of at least some of them may be disabled.

When the "number of game medals" is equal to or greater than a certain threshold value and the player is in an unfavorable state, it is not unusual for the player to end the game at any time. Therefore, when the VL signal is turned off, at least some of the multiple types of game progress operations are invalidated to let the player realize early on that communication with the lending machine 700 has not been established and to encourage early repairs by a store employee. On the other hand, when the "number of game medals" is less than a certain threshold value and the player is in an advantageous state, it is possible that the player has just entered an advantageous state. Therefore, even if the VL signal is turned off, all of the multiple types of game progress operations are treated as valid operations so as not to impede the progress of the game.

Alternatively, if the "game medal count" is greater than or equal to a certain threshold value in an unfavorable state for the player, counting may not be necessary. Therefore, even if the VL signal is turned off, all of the multiple types of game progress operations may be treated as valid operations so as not to impede game progress. On the other hand, if the "game medal count" is less than a certain threshold value in an advantageous state for the player, at least some of the multiple types of game progress operations may be invalidated when the VL signal is turned off in order to make the player aware of this early on before the "game medal count" reaches or exceeds the certain threshold value and encourage early repairs by a store employee.

Figure 157 is a timing chart showing another example of when the VL signal from the rental device 700 is turned off.

In the above explanation, even if the VL signal turns off, it is not treated as an error on the main control unit 300 (slot machine 100) side, and no error cancellation operation is requested to the main control unit 300 (slot machine 100). However, in the example shown in FIG. 157(a), it is treated as an error on the main control unit 300 (slot machine 100) side, and a request is made to the main control unit 300 (slot machine 100) to perform an error cancellation operation. As explained above, there is a high possibility that the VL signal is turned off because the lending machine 700 is not powered on or the communication line connecting the slot machine 100 and the lending machine 700 is disconnected. Therefore, even if an error cancellation operation is performed on the main control unit 300 (slot machine 100) side, there is a high possibility that an error will occur again. However, by indicating an error, a clerk can be called, and the clerk can turn on the rental machine 700.

The example shown in FIG. 157(b) is an example in which the game can continue until the counting button 171 is operated, even if the VL signal is turned off.

In the example shown in FIG. 157(b), even if the VL signal is turned off, all of the plurality of types of game progress operations are treated as valid operations. The fact that the VL signal is turned off means that communication with the rental machine 700 has not been established, and the rental machine 700 side can also determine that there is an abnormality and issue an error notification. If an error notification is made on the rental machine 700 side immediately after the VL signal is turned off, the clerk can be called without the need for the notification on the slot machine 100 side immediately. Furthermore, since communication with the lending machine 700 has not been established, a counting notification may not be sent to the lending machine 700 even if the counting button 171 is operated. Therefore, in this example, the slot machine 100 side makes a notification at the timing when the counting button 171 is operated. By doing this, the slot machine 100 can make notifications with the minimum number of opportunities, and by suppressing excessive notifications, the player can play the game comfortably.

Note that after the operation of the counting button 171 is detected, the notification on the slot machine 100 side continues until the VL signal is turned back on.

[About the configuration regarding the difference between payout and counting processing]
If the amount of increase in the number of game medals per unit game in a game state that is advantageous to the player, such as the AT state or bonus state, is greater than the amount of decrease in the number of game medals per unit game due to counting processing, it is advantageous to the player. In this situation, it becomes difficult to finish the counting process. For example, if the increase in the number of game medals per game (net increase) is 10 and it is possible to count less than 10 medals in the minimum time required for one game, 4.1 seconds, proceed with the AT game. If counting is performed while the player is playing the AT game, the number of game medals will continue to increase during the AT game. Therefore, when a performance associated with counting is performed while proceeding with the AT game, the execution period of this performance becomes long, making it difficult to perform a performance with an ending scene that anticipates the end of counting, for example. Further, when a counting effect (FIG. 130, etc.) is executed in connection with the counting process, this counting effect interferes with other effects, reducing the interest of the game. On the other hand, by designing the game so that the amount of increase in the number of game medals per unit game in an advantageous gaming state is smaller than the amount of decrease in the number of game medals per unit game due to counting processing, such problems can be made less likely to occur. I can do it. For example, if the increase in the number of game medals per game (net increase) is 10 and it is possible to count more than 10 medals in the minimum time required for one game, 4.1 seconds, proceed with the AT game. When counting is performed while playing the AT game, the number of game medals continues to decrease. For example, if it is possible to count 50 sheets every 300 ms when the counting button 171 is held down, it is expected that the number of sheets will decrease by approximately 700 sheets in 4.1 seconds. Therefore, when performing an effect associated with counting while proceeding with the AT game, it is possible to estimate the end of the execution period of this effect. Note that, for example, the setting suggestion effect may be executed (or the execution probability may be increased) depending on the execution time of the counting process.

The counting performance is not limited to a configuration in which the counting performance ends in accordance with the counting process, but may end even while the counting process is continuing. The execution time of the counting process for transferring the number of game medals to the lending machine 700 increases as the number of game medals increases. For this reason, if the counting performance is executed uniformly in accordance with the execution period of the counting process, there is a risk of problems such as a decrease in interest in the game due to the counting performance being executed for a long time, or the counting performance interfering with other performances. Such problems may be prevented by ending the counting performance even while the counting process is continuing. Examples of such a configuration include a configuration in which the counting performance ends depending on the game situation or the passage of time, or the counting performance ends when the content defined as the counting performance is executed. If the counting process ends before the end condition of the counting performance is satisfied, the counting performance may end or may continue.

Furthermore, the content of the counting effect may change depending on the amount of game medals that have been counted. In this case, the performance content may be set based on the amount of game medals in the counting process, or the performance content may be set based on the cumulative number of game medals in the counting process in an advantageous state. You can also do this. Further, for example, when the amount of game medals that have been counted exceeds a predetermined value, a setting suggestion effect may be executed (or the execution probability may be increased). After the player acquires a large number of game medals, the player starts counting and can select a game move. In addition, regarding such a counting performance according to the amount of game medals, if the counting process and counting performance are terminated midway due to reasons such as unintentionally releasing the counting button 171, the interest in the game will decrease. There is a risk of it getting lost. Therefore, even after a counting performance ends midway, if a new counting process is started within a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second), if a new counting process is started within a predetermined time (for example, one second), It is also possible to restart the lost counting performance from the middle. In addition, the counting effect continues to be executed within a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) after the counting process ends, and a new counting process is not started while this counting effect continues. In this case, the counting effect that is currently being executed may be continued as is. With these configurations, it is possible to prevent the counting effect from disappearing due to the end of the counting process due to an unintended operation. Note that the above-mentioned predetermined time may be the same as, for example, the determination time of long press of the count button 171.

Further, for example, when operating the count button 171 while performing a game progress operation, it is difficult to further operate the effect button. If a performance that requests an operation on such an operating means is performed while the counting performance is being performed, there is a possibility that an erroneous operation may be induced. For this reason, while the counting performance is being performed, the performance that requires operation of some kind of operating means may not be performed (or the probability of execution may be reduced). Furthermore, effects that become extremely difficult to recognize when executed simultaneously with the counting effects may be similarly restricted. That is, a configuration may be provided in which a performance is limited during execution of the counting performance. Note that the performance does not have to require operation of the operating means; for example, it is recommended not to execute a performance that involves a freeze that prevents the game from progressing, or a performance that takes a long time to execute and the result is not known until the end. You can.

For example, if the counting process is started while the side lamp is on, which is an advantageous effect, the side lamp effect may change to a counting effect, and the advantageous effect may be replaced with a counting effect. Also, if a certain effect is started while a counting effect is being executed, the counting effect may be replaced with the effect that will be executed later.

In addition, the content of the counting effect changes depending on the degree of game progress while the counting process is being executed, such as the character changing (for example, growing) when the game progresses while the counting process is being executed. You can also do this.

In addition, when the number of game medals reaches 0 and the counting process and counting effect are finished, by keeping the counting button 171 pressed, if a new number of game medals is acquired and the counting process starts, it will be possible to The counting performance that has ended may be restarted from where it left off.

Furthermore, at least some of the game progress operations may be restricted while the counting process is being executed, such as not being able to start the next game while the counting process is being executed.

[About the configuration regarding payout and settlement operations during counting process]
In the embodiment described above, by pressing and holding the count button 171, the number of game medals can be transferred to the lending machine 700 in increments of up to 50 game medals. FIG. 158(a) shows the change in the number of game medals when the count button 171 is held down from a state where there are 120 game medals. Specifically, 50 of the 120 game medals are transferred to the lending machine 700, then 50 of the remaining 70 game medals are transferred to the lending machine 700, and then the remaining 20 are transferred to the lending machine 700. The flow from when all the game medal numbers are transferred to the lending machine 700 until the game medal number becomes 0 is shown.

In the above counting process, the value of the current number of game medals is temporarily set as the number of game medals for counting judgment (step S3304 in FIG. 99), and the counting process is executed based on this number of game medals for counting judgment. (Figure 101). At this time, if there is an increase in the number of game medals (by payout or settlement operation) after the number of game medals for count determination is set, the content is reflected in the number of game medals for count determination that is set next. FIG. 158(b) shows a change in the number of game medals when 8 coins are paid out while 70 game medals are being transferred to the lending machine 700 in the flow shown in FIG. 158(a). has been done. In this example, 50 of the remaining 70 game medals have been transferred to the lending machine 700, leaving 20 game medals remaining, and the 8 payout amount is added to the remaining 28 game medals. After that, all remaining game medals are transferred to the lending machine 700, and the number of game medals becomes 0.

In the embodiment described above, as in the example shown in FIG. As a result, the number of game medals at the time the counting process started (120 in Figure 158(b)) and the number of game medals transferred by the counting process (128 in Figure 158(b)) no longer match, and the counting process This may result in a workload when the data needs to be checked later. In such a case, as shown in FIG. 158(c), the increase in the number of game medals (due out or payment operation) while the counting process is continuing is not reflected immediately; for example, the increase in the number of game medals is This increase may be reflected after the number of game medals reaches 0 or after the counting process that was being continued is finished by releasing the counting button 171 before the number of game medals becomes 0. For example, if you continue to press and hold the count button 171, count the 120 sheets that were stored when you started pressing and holding the count button 171, and then count the 8 sheets that increased while pressing and holding the count button 171. do. For example, if you release the long press on the count button 171 midway, the long press on the count button 171 will be resumed after counting 60 of the 120 sheets that were stored when you started holding the count button 171. I counted 68 pieces that I had memorized at the time. After restarting, since the number of game medals at the time of starting the counting process is 68, the 68 medals are counted in the order of 50 → 18. In FIG. 158(c), while 70 game medals are being transferred to the lending machine 700 in the flow of FIG. 158(a), 8 coins are paid out, but until the number of game medals reaches 0. does not reflect this increase (same flow as in FIG. 158(a)), but this increase is reflected after the number of game medals reaches 0, and the counting process continues until the number of game medals reaches 0. It is shown that In this configuration, the number of game medals at the time the counting process starts (120 in FIG. 158(c)) and the number of game medals transferred by the counting process until the number of game medals reaches 0 (FIG. 158(c)) 120 sheets) can be matched.

In addition, in FIG. 158(e), while the number of 70 game medals is being transferred to the lending machine 700 in the flow of FIG. 158(a), 8 coins are paid out. Immediately after counting the 120 coins that were stored when the game started, the 8 coins that were paid out were counted. With this configuration, the time required for counting can be shortened.

Note that if the number of game medals increases multiple times while the counting process is continuing, the total value of all these increases may be reflected later, or the count process may continue. If there are, the number of game medals may be reflected one by one each time the number of game medals becomes 0.

In addition, the display of the game medal count display device 170 in the case where the above configuration is adopted may be displayed according to the change in the game medal count. In addition, the increase in the game medal count (payout or settlement operation) during the counting process may be reflected immediately on the display (reflected in the display of the decrease in the game medal count). However, the amount of change in the value due to the counting process in this case is the same for the actual game medal count and the displayed game medal count (a state in which a discrepancy in the increase occurs). Figure 158 (d) shows a flow in the case where a configuration is adopted in which the increase in the game medal count (payout or settlement operation) is reflected immediately on the display, in contrast to the flow in Figure 158 (c). In this configuration, the actual game medal count value and the displayed game medal count value are in a state in which a discrepancy in the increase occurs, but they match at the end of the counting process. Even if you release the count button 171 and end the counting process before the number of game medals reaches 0, the increase will be reflected in the number of game medals at that point, so the actual number of game medals will match the displayed number of game medals.

The timing for reflecting the increase in the number of game medals while the counting process is continuing is not particularly limited, and may be, for example, the timing when the counting button 171 is released. In this case, the reflected increase can be transferred to the lending machine 700 by operating the counting button 171 again. Alternatively, it may be the timing when the number of game medals becomes 0 while the counting process is continuing, and further in this case, it may be possible to transfer the reflected increase to the lending machine 700 without operating the counting button 171 again (the counting process continues, FIG. 158 (e)).

Incidentally, the increase in the number of game medals may be due to payout or settlement operations, but either one of these may be the target of the configuration described in FIG. 158(c), or both may be the target.

[About setting the bet reduction by bet button operation]
In the embodiment described above, if the player wishes to change the number of game medals from three medals bet to one medal, the player can operate the settlement button 134 to return the three medals bet to the "number of game medals" once, and then operate the bet button 130 for one medal bet again to change the current bet to one medal. In this case, the operation of the settlement button 134 and the operation of the bet button 130 are required, but the configuration may be such that these operations can be performed by one operation of the bet button 130. As an example of such a configuration, when the bet button 130 is operated while the current bet number is at the maximum value, a settlement button process (FIG. 85) is executed and then a process for the bet button operation is executed. In addition, when the bet button 130 is operated while the current bet number is at the maximum value, a settlement command (FIG. 80) is sent with the change in the bet number from the maximum value to the minimum value (the difference of 2 in the above example) as the settlement number, and the value of the current bet number may be set to the minimum value. This configuration is such that a part of the bet number is settled by the operation of the bet button 130, and a separate insertion process or insertion command is not required. These configurations correspond to examples of a configuration in which the current bet amount is set to the minimum value based on the operation of an operating means capable of setting the minimum value of the bet amount when the current bet amount is at the maximum value.

When the above configuration is adopted, the current bet number can be changed from 0 to 1 to 2 to 3 to 1 to 2... by repeatedly operating the bet button 130, and the current bet number can be changed by simply operating the bet button 130.

Note that if there is a settlement sound that can be output in response to the operation of the settlement button 134 and an input sound that can be output in response to the operation of the bet button 130, the bet button 130 when the current bet amount changes from the maximum value to the minimum value For this operation, the checkout sound and the input sound may be output continuously. However, since there is a risk of confusion for the player if two types of sounds are output for a single operation, the current number of bets will change from the maximum value to the minimum value when the bet button 130 is operated. , the input sound may be output without outputting the payment sound. In addition, in response to the operation of the settlement button 134, characters etc. indicating that the settlement has been made are displayed on the screen of the effect image display device 157, and when the bet button 130 is operated when the current bet amount changes from the maximum value to the minimum value. On the other hand, the screen of the effect image display device 157 may not display characters indicating that payment has been made. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the user from misunderstanding that he or she has operated the settlement button 134 instead of the bet button 130.

[About the effects according to the number of medals played]
A configuration for executing different effects depending on the number of game medals will be described below with reference to Fig. 159. Fig. 159 is a diagram showing an example of effects executed depending on the number of game medals.

In the above embodiment, information on the number of game medals stored in the RAM 358 of the medal count control unit 350 is sent to the first sub-control unit 400 via the game control unit 302 (medal count control state command and security command). The following example is an example of an operation for executing different effects depending on the value of this game medal count. In this example, in the AT state, a normal effect is executed until the game medal count reaches a specified number (3000 in this example), and a special effect is executed when the specified number is reached.

First, FIG. 159(a1) shows the situation at the start of the AT state (the number of game medals at the start=500), and FIG. 159(a2) shows the state of the game in the AT state. FIG. 159(a3) shows what happens when medals are acquired in the AT state, and FIG. 159(a4) shows what happens when the AT state ends. In addition, in the AT state, the value of the number of game medals is displayed as the "possession" value in the upper left corner of the screen, and the number of medals acquired after entering the AT state is displayed in the "...GET" section in the upper right corner of the screen. Displayed.

In the flow of FIGS. 159(a1) to (a4), since the number of game medals does not exceed 3000 in the AT state, the special performance is not performed and the normal performance (FIG. 159(a2)) is performed.

Next, Fig. 159 (b1) to (b3) show an example of a case where a special effect is executed when the number of game medals reaches a predetermined number (3000). In this example, the state where a normal effect is executed because the number of game medals has not reached the predetermined number (Fig. 159 (b1)) changes to a state where medals are acquired and the number of game medals reaches the predetermined number (Fig. 159 (b2)), and then the state where a special effect is executed (Fig. 159 (b3)). In this special effect, the background, the color of the operation navigation, and the background music are different from the normal effect. In other words, the effect changes when many game medals have been acquired, which can increase the excitement of the game.

The different effects are not limited to the above-mentioned special effects, and various effects can be used. The different effects are not limited to configurations in which different effects are used, but may be, for example, a different effect inserted into a part of a base effect while it is being executed, resulting in a different effect overall. For example, the number of game medals played and the number of medals acquired may be displayed in different colors or sizes, such as changing the color of each digit to make it rainbow, or changing the color of each digit periodically. The state in which the effects are different is not limited to the AT state, and it is sufficient if the effects are different when the player is in a favorable state.

Further, the present invention is not limited to a configuration in which the performance is switched immediately after the number of game medals reaches a predetermined number, but it is sufficient that the performance executed differs depending on whether or not the number of game medals reaches a predetermined number. The presentation may be switched when the number of game medals reaches a predetermined number and further satisfies some condition (for example, playing the number of games, winning a switching lottery), or whether the number of game medals reaches a predetermined number or not. It is also possible to have a different ending.

Furthermore, when the number of game medals has reached a predetermined number, a display suggesting a set value may be executed. In the example of FIG. 159(c1), when the number of game medals has reached a predetermined number, a display suggesting a set value (in this example, a family crest) is executed at the time of the ending.

In addition, it is not limited to a configuration in which a different effect or display is always executed when the number of game medals reaches a predetermined number, but a different effect or display is more likely to be executed than when the number of game medals does not reach a predetermined number. It may be a configuration.

In addition, for example, when the number of game medals reaches 3000, the above special effect is executed, and when the number of game medals reaches 2000, a display suggesting the setting value is executed at the ending. The value of the number of game medals, which is a trigger for making the values different, may be provided separately.

In addition, in the above example, a configuration was described in which the number of game medals is used to determine whether or not to execute a different effect or display. A similar effect may be achieved even when the number of medals is used as the determination target, or the total value of the number of game medals and the number of held medals is used as the determination target. Further, the value used at this time is not limited to the total number of held medals, but a portion thereof (for example, when the number of held medals is 5000, 1000 of them) may be used. When adopting such a configuration, information regarding the number of medals held may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. In addition, if the credit balance is handled by the card inserted in the lending machine 700 or by the host server, the above number of medals can be calculated using the value of this credit balance or the value obtained by converting the credit balance into the number of game medals. A configuration similar to that using . In this way, the card inserted into the lending machine 700 and the information regarding the gaming value managed by the host server may be used to determine whether or not to perform a different effect or display.

Furthermore, for example, a different effect is executed when the number of game medals is 2000 or more and the number of held medals is 5000 or more, that is, the number of game medals and the number of held medals (or either one) satisfy some condition. It is also possible to use a configuration in which a plurality of types of determination targets are used and the results are combined, such that different effects are performed depending on the case. Note that the value of the above judgment target may not be displayed, but if the value to be judged is displayed as in the example above, the relationship between the judgment target and the performance cannot be grasped. It is expected that the game will become easier and more interesting.

In the above example, the number of game medals or the number of medals held is used as the determination target for whether or not to execute a different effect or display, but the number of medals acquired in the AT state may be used as the determination target. Figures 160 (d1) to (d7) show an example of a case where a special effect is executed when the number of medals acquired reaches a predetermined number (3000). In this flow, Figures 160 (d2) to (d4) show a case where the number of game medals reaches 3000, as in the case described using Figures 159 (b1) to (b3). However, in this example, the execution of a special effect is determined based on the number of medals acquired, so that the special effect is not executed at this point, unlike Figures 159 (b1) to (b3). After that, the number of medals acquired reaches a predetermined number (3000 in this case) (Figure 160 (d5)), and then the special effect is executed (Figure 160 (d6)). In this example, the effect changes when the number of medals acquired increases, which can improve the interest of the game. This example also shows that the number of medals won has reached 2000, and setting suggestions similar to those shown in Figure 159 (c1) are displayed.

In the above example, a configuration was described in which different effects or displays are executed when the number of game medals, the number of held medals, or the number of earned medals reaches a predetermined number. However, a configuration in which the number of game medals is used to execute a certain part of an effect, and the number of earned medals is used to execute a different part of an effect, for example, may be used. Also, a configuration in which the effects described above can be executed in parallel, for example, an effect using the number of held medals and an effect using the number of earned medals are executed in parallel, may be used. In these configurations, for example, if the counting process is not executed in a state advantageous to the player, the number of earned medals may exceed the number of held medals, and when this situation occurs, a different effect may be executed. A configuration in which multiple types of judgment targets are used and the results are combined may be used.

[Operation when multiple errors occur]
Operations related to errors will be described below with reference to Figures 161 to 163. Figure 161 is a diagram showing an example of operations when an overflow of the number of game medals occurs. Figure 162 is a diagram showing an example of operations when a medal count control wire break error (error code E0) occurs. Figure 163 is a diagram showing an example of operations when an error of exceeding the upper limit of the number of game medals and a medal count control wire break error (error code E0) occur simultaneously.

In the above embodiment, the number of game medals stored in the slot machine 100 (RAM 358 of the medal number control unit 350) can be transferred to the lending machine 700 by operating the counting button 171 (counting process). In FIGS. 161(a1) to (a3), from a state where there are 1336 game medals (FIG. 161(a1)), the counting button 171 is operated (FIG. 161(a2)), and all the game medals are lent out. 161(a3) until the value on the game medal number display device 170 (the number of game medals stored in the slot machine 100) becomes 0 as a result of the transmission to the slot machine 700. .

In the above embodiment, the upper limit of the number of game medals is set to 16,383, and when a certain role is won and the sum of the payout and the number of game medals exceeds the upper limit, an overflow state occurs (the response command becomes "abnormal" in FIG. 117). In this overflow state, the addition process due to the payout is not executed, and the game waits for the overflow state to be resolved, which can be considered a type of error. This overflow state can be resolved by operating the counting button 171 to move the number of game medals to the lending machine 700. 161(b1)-(b4) show a series of steps from when the number of game medals is at the upper limit (FIG. 161(b1)), when a combination with a payout is won and the game enters an overflow state (FIG. 161(b2)), and then when the counting button 171 is pressed and held (FIG. 161(b3), 50 is moved to the lending machine 700 as the number of game medals, and the value of the game medal number display device 170 decreases by 1 each time), until the overflow state is resolved (FIG. 161(b4)). Note that the message "Error has been cleared" in FIG. 161(b4) indicates the elimination of this overflow state, and is displayed for a few seconds and then erased. Also, when the overflow state is resolved, the amount of the payout is added to the number of game medals. Note that in this example, the counting button 171 is pressed and held, but if the counting button 171 is not pressed and held, 1 is moved to the lending machine 700 as the number of game medals. In this case, the overflow state can be released by repeatedly pressing the count button 171 until the number of game medals falls below the upper limit. In either case, the overflow state can be released by operating the count button 171.

Further, in the above embodiment, the configuration is such that the game control unit 302 can detect various errors (for example, the error shown in FIG. 76(b)) that hinder the progress of the game. Since these errors require countermeasures on the part of the store, the system is configured to disable the player from proceeding with the game and to notify them of these errors. Figures 162 (c1) to (c3) show a state in which no error has occurred (Figure 162 (c1)), a state in which a disconnection error has occurred in the medal number control section (Figure 162 (c2)), and then the 162(c3) shows a series of steps from when the user takes action and when the reset button R is operated, the error is resolved (FIG. 162(c3)). The message "Error E0 has been resolved" in Figure 162 (c3) indicates that the error that occurred (in this example, the disconnection error in the medal number control section) has been resolved, and after being displayed for a few seconds, will be deleted. Note that the reset button R is a button for transmitting a reset signal to each control section, and is provided inside the gaming machine so that the player cannot operate it.

As described above, in the slot machine 100 of the above embodiment, there are errors related to the game control unit 302 that need to be cleared by the store's operation (for example, the abnormal game sequence error and the chip ID number mismatch in FIG. 76(b), hereinafter referred to as game control error, etc.), and errors related to the medal count control unit 350 that can be cleared by the player's operation (for example, overflow state, hereinafter referred to as medal count control error). Compared to game control errors, medal count control errors are errors that do not have a serious impact on game progress. For this reason, if these errors occur at the same time, it is considered that the game control error with the highest importance is prioritized and cleared. An example of the operation when such a configuration is adopted will be described below. Note that in the following explanation, examples of medal count control unit disconnection error and overflow state will be explained, but errors related to the game control unit 302 and medal count control unit 350 are not limited to these errors, and can be applied to errors that employ a similar clearing method.

FIG. 163 (d1) shows a state in which the number of game medals is at the upper limit, and it is assumed that a winning combination with a payout is entered from there, resulting in an overflow state. FIG. 163(d2) shows a state in which a message prompting the user to operate the counting button 171 in order to release the overflow state is displayed. The overflow state can be canceled by operating the count button 171, but here it is assumed that a medal number control section disconnection error occurs before this operation is performed (the game control error and the medal number control error overlap). . FIG. 163(d3) shows a state in which the message shown in FIG. 163(d2) has been cleared and a message indicating that a medal number control section disconnection error has occurred is displayed. Note that in the above example, the message indicating an overflow state (Fig. 163 (d2)) is cleared when a disconnection error occurs in the medal number control section. Display a message indicating that an error has occurred over the message indicating that an overflow condition has occurred, or display a message indicating that an overflow condition has occurred in a position that does not interfere with the message indicating that a disconnection error has occurred in the medal number control section. Messages related to both errors may be displayed. Furthermore, when displaying messages related to both errors, a configuration may be used in which a display different from a display when an error occurs alone is used.

When a game control error and a medal count control error overlap, the overflow state is not released because the counting process is not executed even if the count button 171 is operated. At this time, a message is displayed indicating that the operation of the count button 171 is invalid. Figure 163 (d4) shows a state in which, as a result of operating the count button 171, in addition to the message shown in Figure 163 (d3), a message is displayed indicating that the operation of the count button 171 is invalid and urging the player to resolve the medal count control unit disconnection error first. With this configuration, the medal count control unit disconnection error can be given priority for processing.

Then, the store takes action and the reset button R is operated, and the error is resolved, and the state returns to one in which an overflow state has occurred (resolving overlap between the game control error and the medal count control error). FIG. 163 (d5) shows a state in which a message is displayed indicating that the medal count control unit disconnection error has been resolved. FIG. 163 (d6) shows a state in which a message similar to that shown in FIG. 163 (d2) is displayed after this message has been cleared. After that, as explained in FIG. 161, the counting process can be executed by operating the counting button 171, and the overflow state can be released. FIG. 163 (d7) (d8) shows a state in which the overflow state has been resolved by pressing and holding the counting button 171, as in FIG. 161 (b3) (b4). In this case, the payout amount is added to the number of game medals after the overflow state is resolved.

In order to realize the above operation, the process corresponding to the operation of the operation means (counting button 171 in the above example) used to resolve the medal number control error is not executed while the game control error is occurring. Good too. 164(e1) to (e3), the state changes from a state in which no error has occurred (FIG. 164(e1)) to a state in which a disconnection error has occurred in the medal number control section (FIG. 164(e2)), and this error Although the counting button 171 (operating means for canceling the overflow state) was operated during the occurrence of the overflow, a message is displayed indicating that the operation is invalid (the counting process is not executed) (Fig. 164 ( e3)) has been shown.

In the above example, a configuration was described in which the operation means for clearing the game control error and the operation means for clearing the medal count control error are different. Here, for example, the error clearing operation means for clearing the game control error and the medal count control error may be the same, such that both errors can be cleared by the reset button R. In addition, the error clearing operation means in this case may be operable by the player, or may not be operable (for example, an operation means installed inside the gaming machine). In this configuration, when a game control error occurs while a medal count control error is occurring, the game control error is cleared by operating the error clearing operation means (the medal count control error is not cleared, and the game control error is cleared preferentially), so that the game control error with the highest importance can be resolved preferentially.

[About notification of counting process (1)]
In a situation advantageous to the player, a performance to liven up the game may be executed, but the configuration described below is such that the volume of this performance is reduced while the counting button 171 is operated (counting process). This provides a case where the sound is lowered (or muted). With this configuration, it is possible for the player to understand that the counting process is being executed by the change in the sound volume of the performance, and to allow the player to concentrate on the counting process. This change in volume corresponds to an example of count notification. Note that, hereinafter, the count notification based on the change in the performance sound volume will be referred to as count notification A. Note that here we will mainly explain a configuration that changes the volume of the performance by counting processing, but a configuration that changes the performance in a state advantageous to the player by counting processing (for example, a change in volume, a change in sound quality, a change in display) (a part of the lamp may change, the color of the lamp, the lighting mode may change).

In some cases, the so-called demonstration performance is not executed in a state advantageous to the player (for example, AT state, bonus state), but in a state disadvantageous to the player (for example, normal state), the demonstration performance is executed. In this case, the performance in a state advantageous to the player is continuously executed. The above-mentioned counting notification A can make it possible to grasp the execution of the counting process even in such a configuration.

Although the count notification A has the above-mentioned effects, there is a problem in that depending on the timing of execution, it may make the production of important scenes difficult to understand. Here, the state in which all reels have stopped rotating corresponds to the period between games, and the effect that is executed is less important, so all reels have stopped rotating. The configuration may be such that the count notification A is executed in the state. Furthermore, after the last stop operation on the reels is performed, there may be a winning performance, etc., so if a predetermined period of time has passed after the last stop operation on the reels and all reels have stopped spinning. The configuration may be such that the count notification A is executed on the condition that the vehicle is stopped. In addition, count notification A is issued on the condition that all reels have stopped rotating after the effects caused by the last stop operation on the reels have been executed (for example, when switching to a demo effect). It may also be configured to execute. In addition, regardless of the presence or absence of counting processing, a configuration is adopted in which the volume of the performance is reduced (or muted) as time passes since the last stop operation was performed on the reels (for example, a configuration aimed at reducing power consumption). In this case, the degree of each volume reduction may be made different so that it can be distinguished from the reduction in the performance volume due to the count notification A. Further, in the case where performance volume reduction due to passage of time and execution of count notification A overlap, a configuration may be adopted in which priority is given to volume reduction due to count notification A.

On the other hand, when any of the reels is rotating, the game is being executed, and the performance to be executed has a high degree of importance. Therefore, a configuration may be adopted in which the count notification A is not executed while any of the reels is rotating.

In addition, depending on the operation during play, an effect may be executed in response to this. For example, as described above, when all the reels have stopped spinning, the operation of the bet button 132 or the start lever 135 may be triggered to execute an effect for the next game, and an effect to increase the interest of the game may be executed in response to the operation of an operation means for the effect. For this reason, the counting notification A that is being executed may be terminated (for example, the volume that has been changed may be returned) in response to an operation of any operation means.

In addition, in the above explanation, it is determined whether or not to output a counting sound depending on the number of sheets to be counted (for example, as shown in FIG. 130), and that the counting sound is made different depending on the operating time of the counting button 171 (for example, 130), but when the above-mentioned count notification A is executed, a count sound corresponding to such a count process may be output. Also, for example, while the above counting notification A is executed only when all reels have stopped rotating, the counting sound can be output at any time in response to the counting process. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which a counting sound is output separately from the counting notification A. The counting sound added here can be changed while changing the volume depending on the situation, for example, set the volume to 50% while the reels are rotating, and set the volume to 100% while the reels are stopped. You may also add . Further, it is also possible to combine not only the counting sound but also various effects corresponding to the counting process (for example, the output of the counting sound, a count display related to the counting process, and a combination thereof) with the counting notification A. Examples of various effects for such counting processing include outputting a counting sound in accordance with the execution of the counting processing, and allowing the counting display to be performed after the game ends (after the third stop operation, after all reels have stopped). (while the reels are spinning, only the counting sound is output). In addition, as another example, the counting sound is output in accordance with the execution of the counting process, and the counting sound is displayed after a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) after the game ends (after the third stop operation, after all reels have stopped). After that, execution is allowed (only the counting sound is output while the reels are rotating).

[About notification of counting process (2)]
In the above description, it is determined whether or not to output the counting sound depending on the number of sheets to be counted (for example, FIG. 130), and the counting sound is made different depending on the operating time of the counting button 171 (for example, FIG. 130). , a configuration that outputs a counting sound according to the counting process was mentioned.

In a situation that is advantageous to the player, an effect may be executed to liven up the game, but the configuration described below can output a counting sound while the counting button 171 is operated (counting process). At the same time, a case is provided in which the effect sound is maintained in an advantageous state. With this configuration, the effect sound in an advantageous state may be maintained even during the counting process, and it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing. Furthermore, the counting sound allows the player to understand that the counting process is being executed. This counting sound corresponds to an example of counting notification. In addition, below, the counting notification by this counting sound will be called counting notification B.

Although the count notification B has the above-mentioned effects, there is a problem in that depending on the timing of execution, it may make the production of important scenes difficult to understand. Here, the state in which all reels have stopped rotating corresponds to the period between games, and the effect that is executed is less important, so all reels have stopped rotating. The configuration may be such that the count notification B is executed in the state. Furthermore, after the last stop operation on the reels is performed, there may be a winning performance, etc., so if a predetermined period of time has passed after the last stop operation on the reels and all reels have stopped spinning. The configuration may be such that the count notification B is executed on the condition that the vehicle is stopped. In addition, count notification B is issued on the condition that all reels have stopped rotating after the final stop operation for the reels has been performed and all reels have been executed (for example, when switching to a demo performance). It may also be configured to execute.

On the other hand, when any of the reels are spinning, the game is in progress, and the effects that are executed are of higher importance. For this reason, the configuration may be such that counting notification B is not executed when any of the reels are spinning.

Further, depending on the operation during the game, a performance may be executed using this as an opportunity. For example, in a state where all the reels have stopped rotating as described above, the operation of the bet button 132 or the start lever 135 may trigger the performance of the next game, and the performance of the next game may be executed. There are cases where an operation of the operating means is used as an opportunity to execute a performance that increases the interest of the game. For this reason, a configuration may be adopted in which the count notification B is not executed after any operation is performed on any operating means.

In addition, in the above description, the case where the counting notification B is executed and the case where it is not executed were explained, but for example, when there is a counting sound of the first aspect and a counting sound of the second aspect as the counting sound ( For example, the melody may be different, the tone color, the number of notes, the volume, etc. may be different). In other words, the case where the count notification B is executed is read as the case where the counting sound of the first aspect is output, and the case where the count notification B is not executed is read as the case where the count sound of the second aspect is output. good. Since there are various types of sounds, for example, if the counting sound of the second aspect is a type of sound that does not significantly interfere with the production of an advantageous state, the counting process can be executed without reducing the interest of the game. The player can be made aware that the game is inside.

Furthermore, for example, the output of the counting sound of the first mode may be interpreted as the execution of the counting performance of the first mode, and the output of the counting sound of the second mode may be interpreted as the execution of the counting performance of the second mode. Since there are various types of performances, not limited to sounds, for example, if the counting performance of the second mode is a type of performance that does not significantly interfere with the performance of an advantageous state, it is possible to make the player aware that the counting process is being executed without reducing the interest of the game.

[Example of notification of counting process]
Hereinafter, a specific example of the configuration of the count notifications (count notification A, count notification B) described above will be described using FIGS. 165 to 167. FIG. 165 is a diagram illustrating an example of the operation when an output permission period for the sound is provided when outputting the counting sound for the counting process. FIG. 166 is a diagram showing the state of the slot machine 100 in the operation of FIG. 165(a), and FIG. 167 is a diagram showing the state of the slot machine 100 in the operation of FIG. 165(b).

165(a) and 165(b) both show a configuration in which the output of the counting sound is permitted when a predetermined time has elapsed from the third stop operation in the AT state, and the counting sound stops when a bet operation is performed. This is an example of operation. FIGS. 165(a) and 165(b) show a period during which this counting sound is permitted and a period during which the counting sound is output in response to the operation of the counting button 171 within this period. It is assumed that in the AT state, the AT effect sound corresponding to the AT state is continuously output, except when the counting sound is output.

The example in FIG. 165(a) shows the timing (a1) when the AT state starts, and FIG. 166(a1) shows the situation at this time. In this AT state, operation navigation may be executed during a game. As an example of this situation, FIG. 166 (a2) shows an example in which the operation navigation is displayed at timing (a2) after the start operation. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 166(a2) to (a7), in this example, the current number of game medals is displayed in the upper left frame as a value of "possession", and the upper right frame is displayed in the AT state. It is assumed that the cumulative total of the number of game medals is displayed.

Next, it is assumed that the count button 171 is pressed and held for a period of time after the third stop operation and before the bet button operation for the next game is performed. FIG. 165(a) shows the operation period of this count button 171. Timings (a3) to (a7) shown in FIG. 165(a) will be sequentially explained below.

First, timing (a3) is the timing after the third stop operation and before the count button 171 is operated. FIG. 166 (a3) shows that, at this timing (a3), the performance when winning a prize (in this case, the number of game medals is 8) is being executed.

The following timing (a4) is the timing when the count button 171 is operated after the third stop operation. At this timing (a4), the counting sound is not permitted, and the display of FIG. 166(a3) continues as shown in FIG. 166(a4), and the AT performance sound also continues. There is. Then, when the counting button 171 is operated, the words "Counting" are displayed in the frame at the top left of the screen to indicate that the counting process is being executed, and when the counting process has started, the game medals It is shown that the value of the number is starting to decrease.

The following timing (a5) is a timing when the count button 171 is kept pressed and the count sound is permitted. At this timing (a5), as shown in FIG. 166(a5), the display of FIG. 166(a3) continues, but the AT effect sound is not output, and the counting sound is output. . Then, as the counting button 171 is operated, the words "Counting" continue to be displayed in the frame at the top left of the screen, indicating that the value of the number of game medals is decreasing.

The next timing (a6) is when the counting button 171 is released. At this timing (a6), the display of FIG. 166(a3) continues as shown in FIG. 166(a6). Also, because the counting button 171 has not been operated, the counting sound is not output, and the output of the AT performance sound has resumed. Note that the words "Counting" in the box at the top left of the screen have been erased.

The next timing (a7) is when the bet button 132 is operated. At this timing (a7), the background display of FIG. 166(a3) continues as shown in FIG. 166(a7). In addition, the AT performance sound is being output.

In the above example, the operation at timing (a5) corresponds to an example of count notification A. In this operation, a configuration of the count notification A is shown in which the AT effect sound is not output during the counting process. Further, the operation at timings (a4) and (a5) corresponds to an example of count notification B. In this operation, a configuration of count notification B is shown in which the AT effect sound is maintained during the counting process and the counting sound is outputted in some cases.

Next, the example of FIG. 165(b) shows the timing (b1) when the AT state starts, and FIG. 167(b1) shows the situation at this time. In this AT state, operation navigation may be executed during a game. As an example of this situation, FIG. 167 (b2) shows an example in which the operation navigation is displayed at the timing (b2) after the first stop operation. In addition, as shown in Figures 167 (b2) to (b8), in this example, the current number of game medals is displayed in the upper left frame as a value of "possession", and the upper right frame is displayed as the value acquired in the AT state. It is assumed that the cumulative total of the number of game medals is displayed.

Next, it is assumed that the count button 171 is pressed and held for a period of time after the first stop operation is performed until immediately after the next game start operation. FIG. 165(b) shows the operation period of this count button 171. The timings (b3) to (b8) shown in FIG. 165(b) will be sequentially explained below.

First, timing (b3) is the timing when the count button 171 is operated after the first stop operation. At this timing (b3), the counting sound is not permitted, and as shown in FIG. 167(b3), the effect (including the AT effect sound) of FIG. 167(b2) continues. Then, when the counting button 171 is operated, the words "Counting" are displayed in the frame at the top left of the screen to indicate that the counting process is being executed, and when the counting process has started, the game medals It is shown that the value of the number is starting to decrease.

The following timing (b4) is the timing after the third stop operation and when the count button 171 is continuously pressed. FIG. 167 (b4) shows that, at this timing (b4), the performance when winning a prize (in this case, the number of game medals is 8) is being executed. Note that at this timing (b4), the counting sound is not permitted, and the AT effect sound is output. Then, as the counting button 171 is operated, the words "Counting" continue to be displayed in the frame at the top left of the screen, indicating that the value of the number of game medals is decreasing.

The following timing (b5) is a timing when the count button 171 is kept pressed and the count sound is permitted. At this timing (b5), as shown in Fig. 167 (b5), the display of Fig. 167 (b4) continues, but the AT effect sound is not output, and the counting sound is output. . Then, as the counting button 171 is operated, the words "Counting" are displayed in the frame at the upper left of the screen, indicating that the value of the number of game medals is decreasing.

The following timing (b6) is the timing when the bet button 132 is operated while the counting button 171 is being held down for a long time. At this timing (b6), the display of FIG. 167(b4) continues as shown in FIG. 167(b6). In addition, when the bet button 132 is operated, the counting sound permission period ends, and the output of the AT performance sound resumes. Note that as the counting button 171 is operated, the words "Counting" are displayed in the frame at the upper left of the screen, indicating that the value of the number of game medals is decreasing.

The next timing (b7) is the timing after the start lever 135 is operated. At this timing (b7), the operation navigation is displayed as shown in FIG. 167 (b7), and the AT performance sound is being output. Note that, as the count button 171 is being operated, the words "Counting" are displayed in a box in the upper left corner of the screen, indicating that the number of game medals is decreasing.

The following timing (b8) is the timing when the counting button 171 is released. At this timing (b8), the display of FIG. 167(b7) continues as shown in FIG. 167(b8). Further, since the counting button 171 is not operated, the counting sound is not output, and the AT performance sound is output. Note that the text "Counting" in the upper frame on the left side of the screen has been erased.

In the above example, the operation at timing (b5) corresponds to an example of counting notification A. This operation shows a configuration of counting notification A in which the AT performance sound is no longer output during the counting process. Furthermore, the operation at timings (b3) to (b5) corresponds to an example of counting notification B. This operation shows a configuration of counting notification B in which the AT performance sound is sometimes maintained during the counting process and the counting sound is sometimes output.

[Display and effects based on information from the medal count control unit]
In this embodiment, the medal count control state command (see Figs. 74 and 78) sent periodically (every 5.9 ms or 8 ms in Fig. 74) from the medal count control unit 350 allows the game control unit 302 to grasp information such as the number of game medals (Fig. 92). Some of this information is then sent to the first sub-control unit 400 by a security command (Fig. 74) sent periodically (every 100 ms in Fig. 74) from the game control unit 302. The first sub-control unit 400 can perform various displays and performance controls based on this information. Furthermore, the player can grasp this information through these displays and performances.

Here, in the above configuration, if the time it takes for communication to be established between the medal count control unit 350 and the game control unit 302 when the power is turned on is slower than the time it takes for communication to be established between the game control unit 302 and the first sub-control unit 400 when the power is turned on, a security command will be sent from the game control unit 302 to the first sub-control unit 400 even though the medal count control state command from the medal count control unit 350 has not yet arrived at the game control unit 302. Since the security command sent at this time does not reflect the information of the medal count control unit 350, if various displays and presentation controls are performed based on the information contained in this security command, the player will be given information that differs from the actual state.

To prevent such a situation from occurring, a security command may be sent from the game control unit 302 to the first sub-control unit 400 after communication is established between the game control unit 302 and the medal count control unit 350. For example, the game control unit 302 may send the first security command after powering on after receiving the medal count control state command. Also, the security command may be sent after a sufficient waiting time has been set.

In addition, until communication is established between the game control unit 302 and the medal count control unit 350, the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured not to execute processing based on a security command even if it receives the command. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to ignore security commands received several times after power-on, or to ignore security commands received until a certain waiting time has elapsed.

In addition, information indicating the communication status between the game control unit 302 and the medal count control unit 350 may be included in the security command, and when the game control unit 302 receives a medal count control status command (communication between the medal count control unit 350 and the game control unit 302 is established), information indicating normal communication may be included in the security command and sent, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be allowed to execute various displays and presentation controls on the condition that this information is included. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being given information that differs from the actual status.

Here, we will provide additional explanation of the operations that occur from when the above security command is sent until the next security command is sent. For example, if there is a change in information such as the number of game medals played between security commands, and this information is not updated until the next security command is received, the latest information will not be reflected in the various displays and presentation controls. In the game control unit 302, various processing commands are sent to the first sub-control unit 400 in conjunction with game control (Figure 74), and by including the latest information in these various processing commands and using this information to perform various displays and presentation controls, it is possible to ensure that the latest information is reflected.

<others>
In this embodiment, the slot machine 100 using medals (coins) as a game medium is shown as an example of a game machine, but the invention is not limited to this, and game balls (for example, pachinko balls) are used as game media. It can be applied to slot machines, pachinko machines, arranged ball game machines, Jankyu ball game machines, smart balls, etc. as media.

The slot machine may be a slot machine that does not use medals but only exchanges electronic data, such as one that runs on a mobile terminal (smartphone, game machine) or PC using a program that simulates operation based on the above configuration. In this case, the gaming medium includes electronic data equivalent to medals, and inserting the gaming medium includes inputting the electronic data from a specified external device (electronic storage device), and paying out the gaming medium includes outputting the electronic data to the specified external device (electronic storage device).

Although the present embodiment has been described above, it is not limited to the above-mentioned embodiment, and various modifications and changes can be made to the embodiment of the present invention without departing from the gist of the present invention, and such modifications and changes are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. Furthermore, the actions and effects described in the embodiment of the invention are merely a list of the most preferable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects of the present invention are not limited to those described in the embodiment of the present invention.

<<Configuration of the invention and correspondence between embodiments>>
The configurations of the invention described above will be described below with reference to corresponding configurations.

In the above explanation,
An input operation means (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of a game based on an operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting input operation information (e.g., an input command) to the game value number control means based on an operation performed on the input operation means (e.g., steps S1110 and S1111 of FIG. 84 );
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the requested number of game values to be inserted based on the reception of the insertion operation information, and performing the game value update process based on the requested number of game values (for example, step S4607 in FIG. 112 );
The game value number control means is a means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4608 in FIG. 112 );
The gaming control means is a means for not transmitting the input operation information to the gaming value number control means based on an operation performed on the input operation means during the period from when the input operation information is transmitted to the gaming value number control means until the response information is received (for example, step S1112 in FIG. 84 waits until a response command is received, see the description of [Operation of the gaming control unit 302 due to an input operation (transmission of an input command, etc.)]).
The gaming machine described above is characterized by the above.
The input operation means includes a first input operation means (e.g., a 1-coin bet button 130) and a second input operation means (e.g., a MAX bet button 132) different from the first input operation means,
The game control means includes:
transmits first input operation information (e.g., an input command for requesting input of one coin) to the game value number control means as the input operation information based on an operation performed on the first input operation means;
a means for transmitting second input operation information (e.g., an input command for requesting the number of input coins to be three) different from the first input operation information as the input operation information to the game value number control means based on an operation being performed on the second input operation means;
The game value number control means
Based on the reception of the first insertion operation information, a first game value update process (for example, subtraction of the number of game medals for one requested insertion medal) is performed as the game value update process;
a means for performing a second game value update process (e.g., subtracting the number of game medals from the number of medals required to be inserted, 3 medals) different from the first game value update process as the game value update process based on reception of the second input operation information;
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value number control means may not subtract the game value number stored in the game value number storage means based on the reception of the input operation information (for example, when the current bet number is the maximum bet number or the number of game medals is 0).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The game control means is means for updating a communication number with the game value number control means based on reception of the response information (for example, step S1312 in FIG. 86);
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
Equipped with effect control means (for example, first sub-control unit 400) that controls the effects performed by the effect means (for example, effect image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420),
The game control means is
Based on the fact that the response information is received within a predetermined period after transmitting the input operation information, predetermined game information is output to the production control means (for example, step S1114 in FIG. 84). ),
The means outputs the predetermined game information to the performance control means even if the response information is not received during the elapse of the predetermined period after transmitting the input operation information (for example, , in FIG. 84, if the response command is not received, the response command is considered abnormal and step S1114 is executed).
The performance control means is a means for causing the performance means to perform a predetermined performance based on reception of the predetermined game information (description of [operation of game control unit 302 due to input operation (transmission of input command, etc.)] reference),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (for example, slot machine 100), the game machine comprising:
Insertion operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
a game control means (for example, game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation of the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game control means is a means for transmitting input operation information (for example, input command) to the game value number control means based on the operation performed on the input operation means (for example, as shown in FIG. 84). Steps S1110, S1111),
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the number of gaming value input requests based on the reception of the input operation information, and performing the gaming value update process based on the input request number ( For example, step S4607 in FIG. 112),
The game value number control means is means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4608 in FIG. 112),
If an operation is performed on the input operation means after transmitting the input operation information to the game value number control means and before receiving the response information, the game control means performs an operation based on the operation. (For example, step S1112 in FIG. 84 waits until a response command is received; Sending commands, etc.))
A game media management device is described.

Also,
A gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100);
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, a gaming system S) including at least
The gaming machine includes:
An input operation means (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of a game based on an operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting input operation information (e.g., an input command) to the game value number control means based on an operation performed on the input operation means (e.g., steps S1110 and S1111 of FIG. 84 );
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the requested number of game values to be inserted based on the reception of the insertion operation information, and performing the game value update process based on the requested number of game values (for example, step S4607 in FIG. 112 );
The game value number control means is a means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4608 in FIG. 112 );
The gaming control means is a means that, if an operation is performed on the input operation means between the transmission of the input operation information to the gaming value number control means and the reception of the response information, does not transmit the input operation information to the gaming value number control means based on the operation (for example, step S1112 in Figure 84 waits until a response command is received, see the description of [Operation of the gaming control unit 302 due to an input operation (transmission of an input command, etc.)]).

Also, in the above explanation,
An input operation means (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of a game based on an operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting input operation information (e.g., an input command) to the game value number control means based on an operation performed on the input operation means (e.g., steps S1110 and S1111 of FIG. 84 );
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the requested number of game values to be inserted based on the reception of the insertion operation information, and performing the game value update process based on the requested number of game values (for example, step S4607 in FIG. 112 );
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a counting process (e.g., steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101 ) including a transmission process of the game value number to an external processing device (e.g., the lending machine 700, a higher-level server) and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number;
The game value number control means
transmitting first response information (e.g., other than a re-request) to the game control means based on the fact that the counting process is not being performed when the input operation information is received;
a means for transmitting second response information (e.g., a re-request) to the game control means based on the fact that the counting process is being performed when the input operation information is received (see [Operation when a input command is received]);
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The gaming value number control means is means having a transmission buffer for temporarily storing the gaming value number in order to transmit the gaming value number to the external processing device,
The gaming value number control means is
In the counting process, the number of game values to be transmitted to the external processing device is stored in the transmission buffer, and the game value update process is performed (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101);
In the counting process, when the number of game values is stored in the transmission buffer and the input operation information is received while the game value update process is being performed, the second response information is sent to the game control means. is a means of transmitting
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
In one counting process, the gaming value number control means stores a part of the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage means in the transmission buffer, and calculates a part of the gaming value number from the gaming value number. This means may subtract the part of the number of game medals (for example, since the maximum number of medals counted at one time is 50 (step S4209 in FIG. 107), it may become a part of the number of game medals) ,
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

In the gaming machine described above, the gaming value number control means is a means for transmitting the first response information to the gaming control means when the input operation information is received during the period from the end of one counting process to the start of the next counting process (for example, since the input prohibition flag is turned off, the response command is other than a re-request);
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game control means is a means capable of retransmitting the input operation information transmitted immediately before to the game value number control means when the second response information is received (for example, a judgment of No in step S1310 of FIG. 86 ).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game control means is a means for not performing the retransmission after the number of retransmissions reaches the upper limit (for example, a judgment of No in step S1306 in FIG. 86) and invalidating the operation performed on the input operation means (for example, the response result is abnormal, so step S1113 in FIG. 84 is not executed),
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The game value number control means may not subtract the game value number stored in the game value number storage means based on the receipt of the input operation information (for example, if the current number of bets is equal to the maximum number of bets) , the number of game medals is 0),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The game control means is means for updating a communication number with the game value number control means based on reception of the first response information (for example, step S1312 in FIG. 86);
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A gaming medium management device (e.g., a lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100),
The gaming machine includes:
An input operation means (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of a game based on an operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting input operation information (e.g., an input command) to the game value number control means based on an operation performed on the input operation means (e.g., steps S1110 and S1111 of FIG. 84 );
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the requested number of game values to be inserted based on the reception of the insertion operation information, and performing the game value update process based on the requested number of game values (for example, step S4607 in FIG. 112 );
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101 ) including a transmission process of the game value number to the game media management device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number;
The game value number control means
transmitting first response information (e.g., other than a re-request) to the game control means based on the fact that the counting process is not being performed when the input operation information is received;
a means for transmitting second response information (e.g., a re-request) to the game control means based on the fact that the counting process is being performed when the input operation information is received (see [Operation when a input command is received]);
The present invention describes a game media management device.

Also,
A game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
an external processing device (for example, rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) configured to include at least
The gaming machine is
Inserting operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
a game control means (for example, game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation of the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game control means is a means for transmitting input operation information (for example, input command) to the game value number control means based on the operation performed on the input operation means (for example, as shown in FIG. 84). Steps S1110, S1111),
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the number of gaming value input requests based on the reception of the input operation information, and performing the gaming value update process based on the input request number ( For example, step S4607 in FIG. 112),
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101), including a process of transmitting the number of game values to the external processing device and a process of updating the game value to subtract the number of game values. is a viable means,
The gaming value number control means is
transmitting first response information (for example, other than re-request) to the game control means based on the fact that the counting process is not performed when the input operation information is received;
It is a means for transmitting second response information (for example, re-request) to the game control means based on the fact that the counting process is performed when the inputting operation information is received. operation]),
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
An input operation means (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of a game based on an operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting input operation information (e.g., an input command) to the game value number control means based on an operation performed on the input operation means (e.g., steps S1110 and S1111 of FIG. 84 );
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the requested number of game values to be inserted based on the reception of the insertion operation information, and performing the game value update process based on the requested number of game values (for example, step S4607 in FIG. 112 );
The game value number control means is a means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4608 in FIG. 112 );
The game value number control means
When the requested number of inputs derived based on the received input operation information is equal to or less than the number of game values stored in the game value number storage means, the game value update process is executed to subtract the requested number of inputs from the number of game values stored in the game value number storage means, and the response information including information indicating that the requested number of inputs has been subtracted is transmitted to the game control means (for example, in the modified examples of Figures 122 to 124, a Yes is determined in step S4604 of Figure 124, a value equal to the requested number of inputs is subtracted from the number of game medals, and this subtraction amount is returned in a response command).
When the number of input requests derived based on the received input operation information is greater than the number of game values stored in the game value number storage means, the number of game values stored in the game value number storage means is maintained, and the response information including information indicating that the number of game values has been maintained may be transmitted to the game control means (for example, in the modified example of FIG. 122 to FIG. 124, the judgment of No in both steps S4604 and S4621 in FIG. 124, the number of game medals is not subtracted (maintained), and 0 (maintained) is returned as the subtraction amount in the response command).
The game control means includes:
When the response information including the information indicating that the requested number of inputs has been subtracted is received, an input process is performed to input the gaming value of the requested number of inputs (for example, step S1123 in FIG. 122 ).
When the response information including information indicating that the number of game values has been maintained is received, the input process is not performed (for example, since 0 is added in step S1123 of FIG. 122, the input requested number is not input).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The input operation means includes a maximum number input operation means (e.g., a MAX BET button 132),
the game control means is a means capable of transmitting maximum number insertion operation information (e.g., an insertion command with the maximum bet number as the required number) which is the insertion operation information to the game value number control means based on an operation being performed on the maximum number insertion operation means;
The game value number control means is a means for deriving the maximum number of game values that can be used in one game as the number of game value requests based on the reception of the maximum number input operation information (see [Modification for Input Operation]).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The input operation information may include predetermined information (for example, information on turning on a limited number of inputs flag),
The number of input requests derived based on the received input operation information is larger than the number of game values stored in the game value number storage means, and the input operation information includes the predetermined information. In this case, the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means is maintained, and the response information including information indicating that the number of game values has been maintained is transmitted to the game control means (for example, , a modification example of FIGS. 122 to 124, No determination in steps S4604 and S4621 in FIG. 124, the number of game medals is not subtracted (maintained), and 0 (maintained) is returned as the subtraction amount in the response command),
The number of input requests derived based on the received input operation information is greater than the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means, and the input operation information does not include the predetermined information. In this case, the game value update process is executed to set the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means to 0, and the response information includes information indicating the number of game values before it becomes 0. to the game control means (for example, in the modified examples of FIGS. 122 to 124, No determination is made in step S4604 of FIG. 124, Yes determination is made in S4621, and the number of game medals is all subtracted. (becomes 0), the number of game medals before subtraction is returned in the response command as the subtraction amount),
The game control means is
When the response information including the information indicating the number of gaming values before reaching 0 is received, it is a means for performing an input process of inserting the gaming value of the number of gaming values (for example, step S1123 in FIG. 122). ,
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
As the insertion operation means, there is a minimum number insertion operation means (for example, 1 bet button 130),
The game control means converts minimum number insertion operation information (for example, an insertion command with a requested number of coins of 1), which is the insertion operation information, into the game value based on the operation performed on the minimum number insertion operation means. means capable of transmitting to a number control means;
The gaming value number control means is a means for deriving the minimum number of gaming values that can be used in one game as the requested number of inputs, based on the reception of the minimum number inputting operation information,
The minimum number insertion operation information does not include the predetermined information (for example, step S1122 in FIG. 122);
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game control means is a means for updating a communication number with the game value number control means based on the reception of the response information (for example, step S1312 of FIG. 86 ).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Also,
A gaming medium management device (e.g., a lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100),
The gaming machine includes:
An input operation means (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of a game based on an operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting input operation information (e.g., an input command) to the game value number control means based on an operation performed on the input operation means (e.g., steps S1110 and S1111 of FIG. 84 );
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the number of game value input requests based on the reception of the input operation information and performing the game value update process based on the number of input requests (e.g., step S4607 in FIG. 112), and the game value number control means is a means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (e.g., step S4608 in FIG. 112),
The game value number control means
When the requested number of inputs derived based on the received input operation information is equal to or less than the number of game values stored in the game value number storage means, the game value update process is executed to subtract the requested number of inputs from the number of game values stored in the game value number storage means, and the response information including information indicating that the requested number of inputs has been subtracted is transmitted to the game control means (for example, in the modified examples of Figures 122 to 124, a Yes is determined in step S4604 of Figure 124, a value equal to the requested number of inputs is subtracted from the number of game medals, and this subtraction amount is returned in a response command).
When the number of input requests derived based on the received input operation information is greater than the number of game values stored in the game value number storage means, the number of game values stored in the game value number storage means is maintained, and the response information including information indicating that the number of game values has been maintained may be transmitted to the game control means (for example, in the modified example of FIG. 122 to FIG. 124, the judgment of No in both steps S4604 and S4621 in FIG. 124, the number of game medals is not subtracted (maintained), and 0 (maintained) is returned as the subtraction amount in the response command).
The game control means includes:
When the response information including the information indicating that the requested number of inputs has been subtracted is received, an input process is performed to input the gaming value of the requested number of inputs (for example, step S1123 in FIG. 122 ).
When the response information including information indicating that the number of game values has been maintained is received, the input process is not performed (for example, since 0 is added in step S1123 of FIG. 122, the input requested number is not input).
The present invention describes a game media management device.

Also,
A gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100);
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, a gaming system S) including at least
The gaming machine includes:
An input operation means (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of a game based on the operation of the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting input operation information (e.g., an input command) to the game value number control means based on an operation performed on the input operation means (e.g., steps S1110 and S1111 of FIG. 84 );
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the requested number of game values to be inserted based on the reception of the insertion operation information, and performing the game value update process based on the requested number of game values (for example, step S4607 in FIG. 112 );
The game value number control means is a means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4608 in FIG. 112 );
The game value number control means
When the requested number of inputs derived based on the received input operation information is equal to or less than the number of game values stored in the game value number storage means, the game value update process is executed to subtract the requested number of inputs from the number of game values stored in the game value number storage means, and the response information including information indicating that the requested number of inputs has been subtracted is transmitted to the game control means (for example, in the modified examples of Figures 122 to 124, a Yes is determined in step S4604 of Figure 124, a value equal to the requested number of inputs is subtracted from the number of game medals, and this subtraction amount is returned in a response command).
When the number of input requests derived based on the received input operation information is greater than the number of game values stored in the game value number storage means, the number of game values stored in the game value number storage means is maintained, and the response information including information indicating that the number of game values has been maintained may be transmitted to the game control means (for example, in the modified example of FIG. 122 to FIG. 124, the judgment of No in both steps S4604 and S4621 in FIG. 124, the number of game medals is not subtracted (maintained), and 0 (maintained) is returned as the subtraction amount in the response command).
The game control means includes:
When the response information including the information indicating that the requested number of inputs has been subtracted is received, an input process is performed to input the gaming value of the requested number of inputs (for example, step S1123 in FIG. 122 ).
When the response information including information indicating that the number of game values has been maintained is received, the input process is not performed (for example, since 0 is added in step S1123 of FIG. 122, the input requested number is not input).
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A payment operation means (for example, payment button 134),
A game control means (for example, game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game control means is a means for transmitting payment operation information (for example, a payment command) to the game value number control means based on the operation of the payment operation means (for example, as shown in FIG. 85). Step S1204, Step S1205),
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the settlement number of the gaming value based on the receipt of the settlement operation information and performing the gaming value update process based on the settlement number (for example, Step S4704 in FIG. 113),
The gaming value number control means performs a counting process (for example, , steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101).
The counting process may be executed in accordance with a communication cycle (for example, 300 ms) between the game value number control means and the external processing device,
The game value number control means is configured to control the number of game values when a second counting process, which is the counting process, is executed in the next communication cycle after the first counting process, which is the counting process, is executed. When the payment operation information is received during execution of the first counting process, the payment number derived based on the reception of the payment operation information may be subjected to the second counting process. (For example, the number of game medals to be counted is determined before the counting process (step S3304 in FIG. 99), and the number of game medals added by the settlement command during the counting process is to be counted from the next time onwards. Become),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
the first counting process and the second counting process are executed consecutively in accordance with the communication cycle;
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value number control means may, when receiving the settlement operation information during the execution of the first counting process, sum up the settlement number derived based on the reception of the settlement operation information and the game value number stored in the game value number storage means, and subject the sum to the second counting process.
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value number control means may not add the game value number stored in the game value number storage means based on the reception of the settlement operation information (for example, when the current bet number is 0),
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value number control means is a means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4705 in FIG. 113 );
The game control means is a means for updating a communication number with the game value number control means based on the reception of the response information (for example, step S1312 of FIG. 86 ).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Also,
A gaming medium management device (e.g., a lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100),
The gaming machine includes:
A settlement operation means (e.g., a settlement button 134);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) for controlling the progress of a game;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting settlement operation information (e.g., a settlement command) to the game value number control means based on an operation performed on the settlement operation means (e.g., step S1204 and step S1205 of FIG. 85 ),
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving a settlement number of the game value based on the reception of the settlement operation information, and performing the game value update process based on the settlement number (for example, step S4704 in FIG. 113 );
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101 ) including a transmission process of the game value number to the game media management device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number;
The counting process may be performed in accordance with a communication cycle (e.g., 300 ms) between the game value number control means and the game media management device.
The game value number control means is a means for, when a second counting process, which is the counting process, is executed in the next or subsequent communication cycle after the first counting process has been executed, and, if the settlement operation information is received during the execution of the first counting process, making the settlement number derived based on the reception of the settlement operation information the target of the second counting process (for example, the number of game medals to be the target of the counting process is determined before the counting process (step S3304 in FIG. 99 ), and the number of game medals added by a settlement command during the counting process becomes the target of the next or subsequent counting process).
The present invention describes a game media management device.

Also,
A gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100);
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, a gaming system S) including at least
The gaming machine includes:
A settlement operation means (e.g., a settlement button 134);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) for controlling the progress of a game;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting settlement operation information (e.g., a settlement command) to the game value number control means based on an operation performed on the settlement operation means (e.g., step S1204 and step S1205 of FIG. 85 ),
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving a settlement number of the game value based on the reception of the settlement operation information, and performing the game value update process based on the settlement number (for example, step S4704 in FIG. 113 );
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101 ) including a transmission process of the game value number to the external processing device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number;
The counting process may be performed in accordance with a communication cycle (e.g., 300 ms) between the game value control means and the external processing device.
The game value number control means is a means for, when a second counting process, which is the counting process, is executed in the next or subsequent communication cycle after the first counting process is executed, if the settlement operation information is received during the execution of the first counting process, making the settlement number derived based on the reception of the settlement operation information the target of the second counting process (for example, the number of game medals to be the target of the counting process is determined before the counting process (step S3304 in FIG. 99 ), and the number of game medals added by a settlement command during the counting process becomes the target of the next or subsequent counting process).
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A game control means (for example, game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game control means is means for transmitting payout information (for example, payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in a game (for example, steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 89). ,
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the payout number of the gaming value based on the reception of the payout information and performing the gaming value update process based on the payout number (for example, as shown in FIG. 116, step S4B04 in FIG. 117),
The gaming value number control means performs a counting process (for example, , steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101).
The counting process may be executed in accordance with a communication cycle (for example, 300 ms) between the game value number control means and the external processing device,
The game value number control means is configured to control the number of game values when a second counting process, which is the counting process, is executed in the next communication cycle after the first counting process, which is the counting process, is executed. When the payout information is received during execution of the first counting process, the payout number derived based on the reception of the payout information may be subject to the second counting process (for example, , the number of game medals to be counted is determined before the counting process (step S3304 in FIG. 99), and the number of game medals added by the payout command during the counting process is to be counted in the next time onward). ,
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first counting process and the second counting process are performed continuously in accordance with the communication cycle,
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value number control means may, when receiving the payout information during the execution of the first counting process, sum up the payout number derived based on the reception of the payout information and the game value number stored in the game value number storage means, and subject the sum to the second counting process.
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The apparatus includes a performance control means (e.g., a first sub-control unit 400) that controls the performance performed by the performance means (e.g., the performance image display device 157, the speakers 272, 277, the various lamps 420),
The game value number control means is a means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4B05 in FIG. 117 );
The gaming control means outputs predetermined gaming information to the presentation control means based on the reception of the response information indicating that the gaming value update process based on the reception of the payout information has been normally completed (for example, step S1607 in FIG. 89 ),
The performance control means is a means for causing the performance means to perform a predetermined performance based on the reception of the predetermined game information (see Operation of the game control unit 302 due to payout (transmission of a payout command, etc.)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Also,
A gaming medium management device (e.g., a lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100),
The gaming machine includes:
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) for controlling the progress of a game;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
A gaming machine including a gaming value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process for updating the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage means,
The game control means is a means for transmitting payout information (e.g., a payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in a game (e.g., steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 89 );
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the payout number of the game value based on the reception of the payout information and performing the game value update process based on the payout number (for example, step S4B04 in FIG. 116 and FIG. 117 ),
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101 ) including a transmission process of the game value number to the game media management device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number;
The counting process may be performed in accordance with a communication cycle (e.g., 300 ms) between the game value number control means and the game media management device.
The game value number control means is a means for, in a case where a second counting process, which is the counting process, is executed in the next or subsequent communication cycle after the first counting process has been executed, if the payout information is received during the execution of the first counting process, making the payout number derived based on the reception of the payout information the target of the second counting process (for example, the number of game medals to be the target of the counting process is determined before the counting process (step S3304 in FIG. 99 ), and the number of game medals added by a payout command during the counting process becomes the target of the next or subsequent counting process).
The present invention describes a game media management device.

Also,
A game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) configured to include at least
The gaming machine is
A game control means (for example, game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game control means is means for transmitting payout information (for example, payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in a game (for example, steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 89). ,
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the payout number of the gaming value based on the reception of the payout information and performing the gaming value update process based on the payout number (for example, as shown in FIG. 116, step S4B04 in FIG. 117),
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101), including a process of transmitting the number of game values to the external processing device and a process of updating the game value to subtract the number of game values. is a viable means,
The counting process may be executed in accordance with a communication cycle (for example, 300 ms) between the game value number control means and the external processing device,
The game value number control means is configured to control the number of game values when a second counting process, which is the counting process, is executed in the next communication cycle after the first counting process, which is the counting process, is executed. When the payout information is received during execution of the first counting process, the payout number derived based on the reception of the payout information may be subject to the second counting process (for example, , the number of game medals to be counted is determined before the counting process (step S3304 in FIG. 99), and the number of game medals added by the payout command during the counting process is to be counted in the next time onward). , a gaming system characterized by the following is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the number of loaned game values based on receipt of loan information from an external processing device (e.g., a loaner machine 700, a higher-level server) and performing the game value update process based on the number of loaned game values (e.g., step S4003 in FIG. 105 and step S3714 in FIG. 103),
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing the game value update process of adding the loan number to the game value number stored in the game value number storage means when the game value number stored in the game value number storage means does not exceed a first value (for example, a judgment of Yes in step S4107 of FIG. 106 ),
The game value number control means is a means for maintaining the game value number stored in the game value number storage means when the game value number stored in the game value number storage means exceeds the first value (for example, see the judgment of No in step S4107 of FIG. 106, [Lending notification (periodically transmitted from the lending machine 700 to the medal count control unit 350)]),
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game control unit 302 controls the progress of the game.
The game control means is a means for transmitting payout information (e.g., a payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in a game (e.g., steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 89 );
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the payout number of the game value based on the reception of the payout information and performing the game value update process based on the payout number (for example, step S4B04 in FIG. 116 and FIG. 117 ),
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing the game value update process of adding the payout number to the game value number stored in the game value number storage means when the game value number stored in the game value number storage means does not exceed a second value (for example, a judgment of Yes in step S4B03 of FIG. 117 ),
The game value number control means is a means for maintaining the game value number stored in the game value number storage means when the game value number stored in the game value number storage means exceeds the second value (for example, a judgment of No in step S4B03 of FIG. 117),
The second value is greater than the first value (e.g., step S4B03 in FIG. 117 and step S4107 in FIG. 106 ).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The gaming value number control means is a means for transmitting response information to the external processing device when performing the gaming value update process based on reception of the rental information (for example, step S3713 in FIG. 102);
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value number control means is a means having a transmission buffer for temporarily storing the response information in order to transmit the response information to the external processing device, and the game value number control means is a means capable of executing the game value update process of storing the response information in the transmission buffer when the game value number stored in the game value number storage means does not exceed the first value, and adding the loan number to the game value number stored in the game value number storage means after the transmission buffer is cleared in response to the transmission of the response information to the external processing device (for example, a Yes judgment in step S3712 of FIG. 103 ),
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
If the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means does not exceed the first value, the game value number control means updates the communication number with the external processing device (for example, , Yes determination in step S3703 of FIG. 103, step S3706), means for transmitting the response information including first information (for example, the loan serial number received this time) to the external processing device,
If the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means exceeds the first value, the number of game values control means (without updating the communication number with the external processing device) For example, if the determination in step S3703 in FIG. 103 is No, step S3706 is not executed), and the response information including second information (for example, the loan serial number received last time) is transmitted to the external processing device ([ Loan receipt result response (periodic transmission from medal number control unit 350 to lending machine 700));
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first information is the latest communication number received from the external processing device,
The second information is a communication number received from the external processing device one time before the latest communication number,
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
The gaming machine is
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the lending number of the gaming value based on reception of lending information from the gaming media management device and performing the gaming value updating process based on the lending number. (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 105, step S3714 in FIG. 103),
The gaming value number control means controls the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage means when the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage means does not exceed a first value. means that can execute the game value update process of adding the number of loans to (for example, a Yes determination in step S4107 in FIG. 106);
When the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage means exceeds the first value, the gaming value number control means controls the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage means. It is a means for maintaining the number (for example, the determination of No in step S4107 in FIG. 106, see [Rental notification (periodically transmitted from the lending machine 700 to the medal number control unit 350)]),
A game media management device is described. Also,
A game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
an external processing device (for example, rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) configured to include at least
The gaming machine is
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the lending number of the gaming value based on reception of lending information from the external processing device and performing the gaming value updating process based on the lending number. Yes (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 105, step S3714 in FIG. 103),
The gaming value number control means controls the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage means when the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage means does not exceed a first value. means that can execute the game value update process of adding the number of loans to (for example, a Yes determination in step S4107 in FIG. 106);
When the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage means exceeds the first value, the gaming value number control means controls the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage means. It is a means for maintaining the number (for example, the determination of No in step S4107 in FIG. 106, see [Rental notification (periodically transmitted from the lending machine 700 to the medal number control unit 350)]),
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The gaming value number control means derives the number of lending out gaming values based on reception of lending information from an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server), and updates the gaming value based on the number of lending out. It is a means that can perform processing (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 105, step S3714 in FIG. 103),
The gaming value number control means is a means for transmitting response information to the external processing device when performing the gaming value update process based on reception of the rental information (for example, step S3713 in FIG. 102),
The gaming value number control means is means having a first transmission buffer that temporarily stores the response information in order to transmit the response information to the external processing device,
The game value number control means stores the response information in the first transmission buffer, and after the first transmission buffer is cleared as the response information is transmitted to the external processing device, the game value number control means Means for executing the game value update process of adding the loan number to the game value number stored in the value number storage means (for example, Yes determination in step S3712 of FIG. 103);
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101 ) including a transmission process of the game value number to the external processing device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number;
the game value number control means is a means having a second transmission buffer for temporarily storing the game value number in order to transmit the game value number to the external processing device;
The game value number control means is a means for storing the game value number to be transmitted to the external processing device in the counting process in the second transmission buffer and performing the game value update process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101 );
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
If the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means does not exceed a predetermined value (for example, a Yes determination in step S4107 in FIG. 106), the game value number control means controls the external processing. In addition to updating the communication number with the device (for example, a Yes determination in step S3703 in FIG. 103, step S3706), the response information including the first information (for example, the rental serial number received this time) is sent to the external processing device. means capable of executing the game value update process of adding the loaned number to the game value number stored in the game value number storage means (for example, step S3714 in FIG. 103);
If the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means exceeds the predetermined value (for example, a determination of No in step S4107 in FIG. 106), the number of game value control means controls the external The response information including the second information (for example, the lending serial number received last time) is sent without updating the communication number with the processing device (for example, the determination of No in step S3703 in FIG. 103, step S3706 is not executed). means for transmitting to the external processing device and maintaining the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means (for example, if the determination is No in step S3712 in FIG. 103, S3714 is not executed);
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first information is the latest communication number received from the external processing device,
The second information is a communication number received from the external processing device one time before the latest communication number,
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A gaming medium management device (e.g., a lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100),
The gaming machine includes:
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the number of loans of the game value based on receipt of loan information from the game media management device, and performing the game value update process based on the number of loans (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 105 and step S3714 in FIG. 103),
The game value number control means is a means for transmitting response information to the game media management device when performing the game value update process based on the receipt of the rental information (for example, step S3713 of FIG. 102 );
the game value number control means is a means having a first transmission buffer for temporarily storing the response information in order to transmit the response information to the game medium management device;
The game value number control means is a means for storing the response information in the first transmission buffer, and after the first transmission buffer is cleared in response to the transmission of the response information to the game media management device, executing the game value update process of adding the loan number to the game value number stored in the game value number storage means (for example, a judgment of Yes in step S3712 of FIG. 103 ).
The present invention describes a game media management device.

Also,
A game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) configured to include at least
The gaming machine is
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the lending number of the gaming value based on reception of lending information from the external processing device and performing the gaming value updating process based on the lending number. Yes (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 105, step S3714 in FIG. 103),
The gaming value number control means is a means for transmitting response information to the external processing device when performing the gaming value updating process based on reception of the rental information (for example, step S3713 in FIG. 102),
The gaming value number control means is means having a first transmission buffer that temporarily stores the response information in order to transmit the response information to the external processing device,
The game value number control means stores the response information in the first transmission buffer, and after the first transmission buffer is cleared as the response information is transmitted to the external processing device, the game value number control means Means for executing the game value update process of adding the loan number to the game value number stored in the value number storage means (for example, Yes determination in step S3712 of FIG. 103);
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
An operation means (for example, counting button 171),
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game value number control means transmits the game value number to an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) and controls the game value number based on the operation performed on the operation means. is a means capable of executing the game value update process of subtracting (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101),
The gaming value number control means is
If the predetermined operating state is resolved before a predetermined time elapses after the operating means enters the predetermined operating state, the gaming value number is set to a first value (for example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 107). ) can be transmitted to the external processing device,
If the predetermined time elapses while the operating means remains in the predetermined operating state, the counting promotion state can be set (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 107);
The counting promotion state is a state that is maintained when the operating means is in the predetermined operating state, and is canceled when the predetermined operating state of the operating means is eliminated,
In the counting promotion state, a second value larger than the first value (for example, 50, step S4209 in FIG. 107) as the number of game values is repeatedly sent to the external processing device at a predetermined period (for example, 300 ms). sent,
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A presentation means (e.g., a presentation image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420) is provided for not performing a predetermined presentation when the first value is transmitted to the external processing device as the gaming value number, and for performing the predetermined presentation when the second value is transmitted to the external processing device as the gaming value number (e.g., FIG. 130).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value number control means is a means capable of setting the counting promotion state when a power outage occurs while the counting promotion state is set and the operation means is in the predetermined operation state after the power is restored (for example, FIG. 135(b)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The gaming value number control means is a means for not transmitting the gaming value number to the external processing device when the predetermined operating state of the operating means is canceled after setting the counting promotion state (for example, No determination in step S4211 of FIG. 107, clearing of the scheduled number of sheets to be counted),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A gaming medium management device (e.g., a lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100),
The gaming machine includes:
An operation means (e.g., a count button 171);
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a process of transmitting the game value number to the game media management device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number based on an operation performed on the operation means (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101 );
The game value number control means
When the predetermined operation state of the operation means is canceled before a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation means was in a predetermined operation state, a first value (for example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 107) can be transmitted to the game media management device as the number of game values,
a means for setting a counting promotion state when the predetermined time has elapsed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 107 );
the counting promotion state is maintained while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, and is released when the predetermined operation state of the operation means is released,
The present invention describes a gaming media management device, characterized in that in the counting promotion state, a second value greater than the first value (e.g., 50, step S4209 in FIG. 107) is repeatedly transmitted to the gaming media management device at a predetermined period (e.g., 300 ms) as the gaming value number.

Also,
A game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) configured to include at least
The gaming machine is
An operation means (for example, counting button 171),
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game value number control means performs a process of transmitting the number of game values to the external processing device and a process of updating the game value of subtracting the number of game values based on the operation performed on the operation means. is an executable means (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101),
The gaming value number control means is
If the predetermined operating state is resolved before a predetermined time elapses after the operating means enters the predetermined operating state, the gaming value number is set to a first value (for example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 107). ) can be transmitted to the external processing device,
If the predetermined time elapses while the operating means remains in the predetermined operating state, the counting promotion state can be set (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 107);
The counting promotion state is a state that is maintained when the operating means is in the predetermined operating state, and is canceled when the predetermined operating state of the operating means is eliminated,
In the counting promotion state, a second value larger than the first value (for example, 50, step S4209 in FIG. 107) as the number of game values is repeatedly sent to the external processing device at a predetermined period (for example, 300 ms). sent,
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
An operation means (e.g., a count button 171);
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a process of transmitting the game value number to an external processing device (e.g., the lending machine 700, a higher-level server) and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number based on an operation performed on the operation means (e.g., steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101 );
The game value number control means
When the predetermined operation state of the operation means is canceled before a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation means was in a predetermined operation state, a first value (for example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 125) can be transmitted to the external processing device as the number of game values,
a means for setting a counting promotion state when the predetermined time has elapsed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 125 );
the counting promotion state is maintained while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, and is released when the predetermined operation state of the operation means is cancelled,
In the counting promotion state, a second value (e.g., 10, step S4222 in FIG. 125) larger than the first value is repeatedly transmitted to the external processing device at a predetermined cycle (e.g., 300 ms) as the gaming value number.
The second value may be increased according to the duration of the predetermined operating state (FIG. 134).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The second value may increase in accordance with the duration of the predetermined operating state (FIG. 134).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value number control means is a means capable of setting the counting promotion state and maximizing the degree of increase when a power outage occurs while the counting promotion state is set and the operation means is in the predetermined operation state after the power is restored (FIG. 135(b)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
When the first value is sent to the external processing device as the number of gaming values, the predetermined effect is not performed, and when the second value is sent to the external processing device as the number of gaming values, the predetermined effect is not performed. Equipped with performance means (for example, performance image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420) for performing a predetermined performance (for example, FIG. 130),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
When the number of gaming values stored by the number of gaming values storage means does not exceed a predetermined value, the number of gaming values controlling means controls the number of gaming values stored by the number of gaming values storage means. is means for reducing the degree of increase in the second value compared to the case where the second value exceeds the predetermined value (FIG. 135(a)),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A gaming medium management device (e.g., a lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100),
The gaming machine includes:
An operation means (e.g., a count button 171);
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a process of transmitting the game value number to the game media management device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number based on an operation performed on the operation means (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101 );
The game value number control means
a means capable of transmitting a first value (e.g., 1, step S4212 in FIG. 125) as the number of game values to the game media management device when the predetermined operation state is canceled before a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation means was placed in the predetermined operation state, and capable of setting a counting promotion state when the predetermined time has elapsed with the operation means remaining in the predetermined operation state (e.g., step S4208 in FIG. 125);
the counting promotion state is maintained while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, and is released when the predetermined operation state of the operation means is released,
In the counting promotion state, a second value (e.g., 10, step S4222 in FIG. 125) larger than the first value is repeatedly transmitted to the gaming media management device at a predetermined cycle (e.g., 300 ms) as the gaming value number.
The second value may be increased according to the duration of the predetermined operating state (FIG. 134).
The present invention describes a game media management device.

Also,
A gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100);
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, a gaming system S) including at least
The gaming machine includes:
An operation means (e.g., a count button 171);
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a process of transmitting the game value number to the external processing device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number based on an operation performed on the operation means (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101 );
The game value number control means
When the predetermined operation state of the operation means is canceled before a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation means was in a predetermined operation state, a first value (for example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 125) can be transmitted to the external processing device as the number of game values,
a means for setting a counting promotion state when the predetermined time has elapsed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 125 );
the counting promotion state is maintained while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, and is released when the predetermined operation state of the operation means is released,
In the counting promotion state, a second value (e.g., 10, step S4222 in FIG. 125) larger than the first value is repeatedly transmitted to the external processing device at a predetermined cycle (e.g., 300 ms) as the gaming value number.
The second value may be increased according to the duration of the predetermined operating state (FIG. 134).
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
An operation means (e.g., a count button 171);
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a process of transmitting the game value number to an external processing device (e.g., the lending machine 700, a higher-level server) and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number based on an operation performed on the operation means (e.g., steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101 );
The game value number control means
When the predetermined operation state is canceled before a first time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the operation means entered a predetermined operation state, a first value (e.g., 1, step S4212 in FIG. 126) can be transmitted to the external processing device as the number of game values,
When the first time period has elapsed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, a second value (e.g., 50, step S4209 in FIG. 126) that is greater than the first value can be transmitted to the external processing device as the number of game values.
a means for setting an automatic counting state when a second time (e.g., 2 seconds) longer than the first time has elapsed while the operating means is in the predetermined operating state (e.g., step S4234 in FIG. 126 );
In the automatic counting state, even if the predetermined operation state of the operation means is canceled, the second value is repeatedly transmitted as the gaming value number to the external processing device at a predetermined period (e.g., 300 ms) (e.g., Yes is determined in step S4235 of FIG. 126, and step S4209 is repeated, FIG. 136).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
comprising notification means (for example, effect image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420) for making a predetermined notification when the automatic counting state is set (FIGS. 138 and 139);
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The device includes a presentation means (e.g., a presentation image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420) for not performing a predetermined presentation when the first value is transmitted to the external processing device as the gaming value number, and for performing the predetermined presentation when the second value is transmitted to the external processing device as the gaming value number (e.g., FIG. 130),
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value number control means is a means capable of setting the automatic counting state when a power outage occurs while the automatic counting state is set and the operation means is in the predetermined operation state when power is restored thereafter (for example, FIG. 137(b)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The gaming value number control means is a means for not setting the automatic counting state when the gaming value number stored by the gaming value number storage means is smaller than a predetermined value (FIG. 137(a)). ,
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A gaming medium management device (e.g., a lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100),
The gaming machine includes:
An operation means (e.g., a count button 171);
A gaming machine including a gaming value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) that stores a gaming value number related to a gaming value used in a game, and a gaming value number control means (e.g., medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process that updates the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage means,
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a process of transmitting the game value number to the game media management device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number based on an operation performed on the operation means (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101 );
The game value number control means
When the predetermined operation state is canceled before a first time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the operation means entered a predetermined operation state, a first value (e.g., 1, step S4212 in FIG. 126) can be transmitted to the game media management device as the number of game values,
When the first time period has elapsed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, a second value (e.g., 50, step S4209 in FIG. 126) that is greater than the first value can be transmitted to the game media management device as the number of game values;
a means for setting an automatic counting state when a second time (e.g., 2 seconds) longer than the first time has elapsed while the operating means is in the predetermined operating state (e.g., step S4234 in FIG. 126 );
In the automatic counting state, even if the predetermined operation state of the operation means is canceled, the second value is repeatedly transmitted as the game value number to the game media management device at a predetermined cycle (e.g., 300 ms) (e.g., Yes is determined in step S4235 of FIG. 126, and step S4209 is repeated, FIG. 136).
The present invention describes a game media management device.

Also,
A gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100);
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, a gaming system S) including at least
The gaming machine includes:
An operation means (e.g., a count button 171);
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a process of transmitting the game value number to the external processing device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number based on an operation performed on the operation means (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101 );
The game value number control means
When the predetermined operation state is canceled before a first time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the operation means was in a predetermined operation state, a first value (e.g., 1, step S4212 in FIG. 126) can be transmitted to the external processing device as the number of game values,
When the first time period has elapsed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, a second value (e.g., 50, step S4209 in FIG. 126) that is greater than the first value can be transmitted to the external processing device as the number of game values;
a means for setting an automatic counting state when a second time (e.g., 2 seconds) longer than the first time has elapsed while the operating means is in the predetermined operating state (e.g., step S4234 in FIG. 126 );
In the automatic counting state, even if the predetermined operation state of the operation means is canceled, the second value is repeatedly transmitted as the gaming value number to the external processing device at a predetermined period (e.g., 300 ms) (e.g., Yes is determined in step S4235 of FIG. 126, and step S4209 is repeated, FIG. 136).
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
An operation means (e.g., a count button 171);
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a process of transmitting the game value number to an external processing device (e.g., the lending machine 700, a higher-level server) and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number based on an operation performed on the operation means (e.g., steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101 );
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing the game value update process by treating the predetermined operation state as a valid operation state when the operation means is in a predetermined operation state when power is restored after a power outage occurs (for example, FIG. 140(a)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value number control means
When the predetermined operation state is canceled before a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation means entered the predetermined operation state, a first value (for example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 107) can be transmitted to the external processing device as the number of game values,
a means for setting a counting promotion state when the predetermined time has elapsed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 107 );
the counting promotion state is maintained while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, and is released when the predetermined operation state of the operation means is cancelled,
In the counting promotion state, a second value (e.g., 50, step S4209 in FIG. 107) larger than the first value is repeatedly transmitted to the external processing device as the gaming value number at a predetermined cycle (e.g., 300 ms),
The game value number control means is a means for determining the game value number to be transmitted to the external processing device based on the time during which the operation means has been in the predetermined operation state after power recovery, regardless of the time during which the operation means has been in the predetermined operation state before the power failure, when a power failure occurs and the operation means has been in the predetermined operation state since power recovery thereafter (FIG. 140(a)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value number control means
When the predetermined operation state is canceled before a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation means was in the predetermined operation state, a first value (for example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 107) can be transmitted to the external processing device as the number of game values,
a means for setting a counting promotion state when the predetermined time has elapsed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 107 );
the counting promotion state is maintained while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, and is released when the predetermined operation state of the operation means is cancelled,
In the counting promotion state, a second value (e.g., 50, step S4209 in FIG. 107) larger than the first value is repeatedly transmitted to the external processing device as the game value number at a predetermined cycle (e.g., 300 ms), and the game value number control means is a means capable of setting the counting promotion state when the operation means is in the predetermined operation state after a power outage occurs and then is restored (FIG. 140(a)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
When the first value is sent to the external processing device as the number of gaming values, the predetermined effect is not performed, and when the second value is sent to the external processing device as the number of gaming values, the predetermined effect is not performed. Equipped with performance means (for example, performance image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420) for performing a predetermined performance (for example, FIG. 130),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A gaming medium management device (e.g., a lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100),
The gaming machine includes:
An operation means (e.g., a count button 171);
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a process of transmitting the game value number to the game media management device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number based on an operation performed on the operation means (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101 );
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing the game value update process by treating the predetermined operation state as a valid operation state when the operation means is in a predetermined operation state when power is restored after a power outage occurs (for example, FIG. 140(a)).
The present invention describes a game media management device.

Also,
A game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) configured to include at least
The gaming machine is
An operation means (for example, counting button 171),
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game value number control means performs a process of transmitting the number of game values to the external processing device and a process of updating the game value of subtracting the number of game values based on the operation performed on the operation means. is an executable means (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101),
If a power outage occurs and the operating means is in a predetermined operating state when the power is restored, the gaming value number control means determines the predetermined operating state as a valid operating state and controls the gaming value number control means. A means capable of executing update processing (for example, FIG. 140(a)),
A gaming system is described. Also, in the above explanation,
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
Display means capable of displaying the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means (for example, a number of game medal display device 170, a performance image display device 157),
A game machine comprising:
The display means displays a change that changes the display value in stages from a pre-update value to a post-update value when the play value number stored in the play value number storage means is updated. is a means that can be performed (for example, FIGS. 143 to 147),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101 ) including a transmission process of the game value number to an external processing device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number;
The counting process is executed at a predetermined cycle (e.g., every 300 ms),
The display means is a means for performing the change display in a time shorter than the predetermined period (FIG. 143, FIG. 144).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
An operation means (e.g., a counting button 171) is provided,
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing the counting process based on an operation performed on the operation means,
The game value number control means
When the predetermined operation state is canceled before a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation means was in a predetermined operation state, a first value (for example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 107) can be transmitted to the external processing device as the number of game values,
a means for setting a counting promotion state when the predetermined time has elapsed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 107 );
the counting promotion state is maintained while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, and is released when the predetermined operation state of the operation means is released,
In the counting promotion state, a second value (e.g., 50, step S4209 in FIG. 107) larger than the first value is repeatedly transmitted to the external processing device at the predetermined period,
The game value number control means is a means for not transmitting the game value number to the external processing device when the predetermined operation state of the operation means is eliminated after the counting promotion state is set (for example, determining No in step S4211 of FIG. 107, clearing the number of coins to be counted),
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Also,
A gaming medium management device (e.g., a lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100),
The gaming machine includes:
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A display means (e.g., a game medal number display device 170, a performance image display device 157) capable of displaying the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The display means is a means capable of performing a change display in which the display value is gradually changed from a value before the update to a value after the update when the game value number stored in the game value number storage means is updated (for example, FIG. 143 to FIG. 147 ).
The present invention describes a game media management device.

Also,
A game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
an external processing device (for example, rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) configured to include at least
The gaming machine is
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
Display means capable of displaying the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means (for example, a number of game medal display device 170, a performance image display device 157),
A game machine comprising:
The display means displays a change that changes the display value in stages from a pre-update value to a post-update value when the play value number stored in the play value number storage means is updated. is a means that can be performed (for example, FIGS. 143 to 147),
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) having a game information storage means (e.g., a RAM 308) for storing game information related to the state of the game and performing control related to the progress of the game;
a game value information control means (e.g., a medal count control unit 350) that has a game value information storage means (e.g., a RAM 358) that stores game value information related to game values used in a game, and updates the game value information stored in the game value information storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game control means is a means for clearing at least a part of the game information storage means when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the game information stored in the game information storage means (for example, step S101 of FIG. 82 );
The gaming value information control means is a means for clearing at least a part of the gaming value information storage means when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the gaming value information stored in the gaming value information storage means (for example, step S3005 in FIG. 95 ),
The gaming control means is a means for not clearing the gaming information storage means when the gaming value information control means determines that there is an abnormality in the gaming value information stored in the gaming value information storage means (for example, the gaming control unit 302 does not clear the RAM 308 even when it receives an error from the medal count control unit 350),
The gaming value information control means is a means for clearing at least a part of the gaming value information storage means when the gaming control means determines that there is an abnormality in the gaming information stored in the gaming information storage means (for example, a determination of Yes in step S3016 of FIG. 95 ).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, in the gaming machine described above, an abnormality in the gaming control means is reported in priority to an abnormality in the gaming value information control means (see [Operation for Errors (Gaming Control Unit 302)]).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The gaming value information control means is a means for transmitting information to the gaming control means at a predetermined period (for example, transmitting one command with 8 interruptions (0.745 ms x 8)),
The game control means is means for determining a communication abnormality with the game value information control means based on the transmission status of information from the game value information control means (for example, in FIG. Section 302)]),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The abnormality of the game control means is notified with priority over the communication abnormality (see [Operations for errors (game control unit 302)]),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
When determining that there is an abnormality in the gaming value information stored in the gaming value information storage means, the gaming value information control means controls the abnormality in the gaming information stored in the gaming information storage means. Corresponding processing may be executed (for example, No determination in step S3007 in FIG. 95, step S4407 in FIG. 109, initialization of chip information),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A gaming medium management device (e.g., a lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100),
The gaming machine includes:
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) having a game information storage means (e.g., a RAM 308) for storing game information related to the state of the game and performing control related to the progress of the game;
a game value information control means (e.g., a medal count control unit 350) that has a game value information storage means (e.g., a RAM 358) that stores game value information related to game values used in a game, and updates the game value information stored in the game value information storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game control means is a means for clearing at least a part of the game information storage means when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the game information stored in the game information storage means (for example, step S101 of FIG. 82 );
The gaming value information control means is a means for clearing at least a part of the gaming value information storage means when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the gaming value information stored in the gaming value information storage means (for example, step S3005 in FIG. 95 ),
The gaming control means is a means for not clearing the gaming information storage means when the gaming value information control means determines that there is an abnormality in the gaming value information stored in the gaming value information storage means (for example, the gaming control unit 302 does not clear the RAM 308 even when it receives an error from the medal count control unit 350),
The gaming value information control means is a means for clearing at least a part of the gaming value information storage means when the gaming control means determines that there is an abnormality in the gaming information stored in the gaming information storage means (for example, a determination of Yes in step S3016 of FIG. 95 ).
The present invention describes a game media management device.

Also,
A game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) configured to include at least
The gaming machine is
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that has a game information storage means (for example, RAM 308) that stores game information regarding the state of the game and controls the progress of the game;
Gaming value information comprising a gaming value information storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing gaming value information regarding gaming values used in games, and updating the gaming value information stored in the gaming value information storage means. A control means (for example, medal number control unit 350),
A game machine comprising:
The game control means is a means for clearing at least a part of the game information storage means when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the game information stored in the game information storage means (for example, as shown in FIG. step S101),
The gaming value information control means is means for clearing at least a part of the gaming value information storage means when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the gaming value information stored in the gaming value information storage means. (For example, step S3005 in FIG. 95),
The game control means is a means for not clearing the game value information storage means when the game value information control means determines that there is an abnormality in the game value information stored in the game value information storage means. Yes (for example, the game control unit 302 does not clear the RAM 308 even if it receives an error from the medal number control unit 350),
The gaming value information control means clears at least a part of the gaming value information storage means when the gaming control means determines that there is an abnormality in the gaming information stored in the gaming information storage means. (for example, a Yes determination in step S3016 of FIG. 95),
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) having a game information storage means (e.g., a RAM 308) for storing game information related to the state of the game and performing control related to the progress of the game;
a game value information control means (e.g., a medal count control unit 350) that has a game value information storage means (e.g., a RAM 358) that stores game value information related to game values used in a game, and updates the game value information stored in the game value information storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The gaming control means is a means for executing a process for an abnormality when the gaming value information control means determines that there is an abnormality in the gaming value information stored in the gaming value information storage means (see [Operation for Errors (Gaming Control Unit 302)]).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
An abnormality in the game control means is notified with priority over an abnormality in the game value information control means (see [Operation in response to error (game control unit 302)]),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game control means is a means for determining whether a communication abnormality with the game value information control means exists based on a transmission status of information from the game value information control means (for example, FIG. 91 );
The gaming machine is characterized in that an abnormality in the gaming control means is reported with priority over the communication abnormality (see [Operation for Errors (Gaming Control Unit 302)]).

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When the gaming value information control means determines that there is an abnormality in the gaming value information stored in the gaming value information storage means, the gaming value information control means may execute a process corresponding to the abnormality in the gaming information stored in the gaming information storage means (for example, determining No in step S3007 of FIG. 95 or step S4407 of FIG. 109, or initializing chip information).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Also,
A gaming medium management device (e.g., a lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100),
The gaming machine includes:
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) having a game information storage means (e.g., a RAM 308) for storing game information related to the state of the game and performing control related to the progress of the game;
a game value information control means (e.g., a medal count control unit 350) that has a game value information storage means (e.g., a RAM 358) that stores game value information related to game values used in a game, and updates the game value information stored in the game value information storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The gaming control means is a means for executing a process for an abnormality when the gaming value information control means determines that there is an abnormality in the gaming value information stored in the gaming value information storage means (see [Operation for Errors (Gaming Control Unit 302)]).
The present invention describes a game media management device.

Also,
A game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
an external processing device (for example, rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) configured to include at least
The gaming machine is
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that has a game information storage means (for example, RAM 308) that stores game information regarding the state of the game, and controls the progress of the game;
Gaming value information comprising a gaming value information storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing gaming value information regarding gaming values used in games, and updating the gaming value information stored in the gaming value information storage means. A control means (for example, medal number control unit 350),
A game machine comprising:
When the gaming value information control means determines that there is an abnormality in the gaming value information stored in the gaming value information storage means, the gaming control means may execute processing for the abnormality. means (see [Operation in response to error (gaming control unit 302)]),
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) for controlling the progress of a game;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
A game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process to update the game value number stored in the game value number storage means by communicating bidirectionally with the game control means;
A presentation control means (e.g., a first sub-control unit 400) that is in one-way communication with the game control means and controls the presentation performed by the presentation means (e.g., the presentation image display device 157, the speakers 272, 277, and various lamps 420);
A gaming machine equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting payout information (e.g., a payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in a game (e.g., steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 89 );
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the payout number of the game value based on the reception of the payout information and performing the game value update process based on the payout number (for example, step S4B04 in FIG. 116 and FIG. 117 ),
The game value number control means is a means for transmitting predetermined information to the game control means when the game value number stored in the game value number storage means exceeds a predetermined value upon receiving the payout information (for example, the determination in step S4B03 of FIG. 117 is No, and the response command is set to “abnormal”).
The game control means outputs predetermined game information to the performance control means based on receiving the predetermined information (for example, step S1608 in FIG. 89 ),
The presentation control means is a means for causing the presentation means to perform a predetermined presentation based on the reception of the predetermined game information (see, for example, FIG. 148, [Operation of the game control unit 302 due to payout (transmission of a payout command, etc.)]).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game control means is a means capable of making the game unable to proceed when the predetermined information is received (for example, the determination in step S1606 of FIG. 89 is No and the process is repeated [operation of the game control unit 302 due to payout (transmission of a payout command, etc.)]),
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
Equipped with counting operation means (for example, counting button 171),
The game value number control means transmits the game value number to an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) and the game value number based on the operation performed on the counting operation means. means capable of executing the game value update process of subtracting the number (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101),
The effect control means is a means for causing the effect means to display a background,
The predetermined performance is a performance that flashes a display prompting the operation of the counting operation means,
The display prompting the operation of the counting operation means is a display displayed in front of the background display (for example, FIG. 148(b)),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A gaming medium management device (e.g., a lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100),
The gaming machine includes:
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) for controlling the progress of a game;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means by communicating bidirectionally with the game control means;
A presentation control means (e.g., a first sub-control unit 400) that is in one-way communication with the game control means and controls the presentation performed by the presentation means (e.g., the presentation image display device 157, the speakers 272, 277, and various lamps 420);
A gaming machine equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting payout information (e.g., a payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in a game (e.g., steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 89 );
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the payout number of the game value based on the reception of the payout information and performing the game value update process based on the payout number (for example, step S4B04 in FIG. 116 and FIG. 117 ),
The game value number control means is a means for transmitting predetermined information to the game control means if the game value number stored in the game value number storage means exceeds a predetermined value when the payout information is received (for example, the determination is No in step S4B03 of FIG. 117, and the response command is set to “abnormal”).
The game control means outputs predetermined game information to the performance control means based on receiving the predetermined information (for example, step S1608 in FIG. 89 ),
The performance control means is a means for causing the performance means to perform a predetermined performance based on the reception of the predetermined game information (for example, see FIG. 148, [Operation of the game control unit 302 due to payout (transmission of a payout command, etc.)]).
The present invention describes a game media management device.

Also,
A gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100);
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, a gaming system S) including at least
The gaming machine includes:
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) for controlling the progress of a game;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
A game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process to update the game value number stored in the game value number storage means by communicating bidirectionally with the game control means;
A presentation control means (e.g., a first sub-control unit 400) that is in one-way communication with the game control means and controls the presentation performed by the presentation means (e.g., the presentation image display device 157, the speakers 272, 277, and various lamps 420);
A gaming machine equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting payout information (e.g., a payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in a game (e.g., steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 89 );
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the payout number of the game value based on the reception of the payout information and performing the game value update process based on the payout number (for example, step S4B04 in FIG. 116 and FIG. 117 ),
The game value number control means is a means for transmitting predetermined information to the game control means if the game value number stored in the game value number storage means exceeds a predetermined value when the payout information is received (for example, the determination is No in step S4B03 of FIG. 117, and the response command is set to “abnormal”).
The game control means outputs predetermined game information to the performance control means based on receiving the predetermined information (for example, step S1608 in FIG. 89 ),
The presentation control means is a means for causing the presentation means to perform a predetermined presentation based on the reception of the predetermined game information (for example, see FIG. 148, [Operation of game control unit 302 due to payout (sending a payout command, etc.)]).

Also, in the above explanation,
A game control means (for example, game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
A gaming value number control means (e.g., , medal number control unit 350),
A production control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) that has one-way communication with the game control means and controls production performed by the production means (for example, the production image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420). )and,
A game machine comprising:
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the lending number of the gaming value based on reception of lending information from the external processing device and performing the gaming value updating process based on the lending number. Yes (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 105, step S3714 in FIG. 103),
When the number of game values stored in the number of game values storage means exceeds a predetermined value when receiving the lending information, the number of game values control means transmits predetermined information to the game value control means. is a means of transmitting
The game control means outputs predetermined game information to the performance control means based on receiving the predetermined information,
The performance control means is a means for causing the performance means to perform a predetermined performance based on reception of the predetermined game information (for example, in the modified example of FIG. If the limit exceeds the limit, an error will occur when borrowing exceeds the limit).
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The performance control means is a means capable of causing the performance means to perform a demonstration performance when a game is not being executed,
The predetermined performance is a performance that is performed even when the demo performance is being performed (for example, FIG. 151(a));
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A counting operation means (e.g., a counting button 171) is provided,
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a process of transmitting the game value number to the external processing device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number based on an operation performed on the counting operation means (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101 );
the presentation control means is means for causing the presentation means to perform background display,
The predetermined effect is an effect of flashing a display prompting the user to operate the counting operation means,
The display prompting the user to operate the counting operation means is displayed in front of the background display (for example, FIG. 148(b)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
The game machine includes: a game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that communicates bidirectionally with the gaming media management device and performs a gaming value update process for updating the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit; ,
A production control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) that has one-way communication with the game control means and controls production performed by the production means (for example, the production image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420). )and,
A game machine comprising:
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the lending number of the gaming value based on reception of lending information from the gaming media management device and performing the gaming value updating process based on the lending number. (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 105, step S3714 in FIG. 103),
When the number of game values stored in the number of game values storage means exceeds a predetermined value when receiving the lending information, the number of game values control means transmits predetermined information to the game value control means. is a means of transmitting
The game control means outputs predetermined game information to the performance control means based on receiving the predetermined information,
The performance control means is a means for causing the performance means to perform a predetermined performance based on reception of the predetermined game information (for example, in the modified example of FIG. If it exceeds the upper limit, an error will occur when lending beyond the upper limit).
A game media management device is described.

Also,
A game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) configured to include at least
The gaming machine is
A game control means (for example, game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process that bidirectionally communicates with the external processing device and updates the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A production control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) that has one-way communication with the game control means and controls production performed by the production means (for example, the production image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420). )and,
A game machine comprising:
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the lending number of the gaming value based on reception of lending information from the external processing device and performing the gaming value updating process based on the lending number. Yes (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 105, step S3714 in FIG. 103),
When the number of game values stored in the number of game values storage means exceeds a predetermined value when receiving the lending information, the number of game values control means transmits predetermined information to the game value control means. is a means of transmitting
The game control means outputs predetermined game information to the performance control means based on receiving the predetermined information,
The performance control means is a means for causing the performance means to perform a predetermined performance based on reception of the predetermined game information (for example, in the modified example of FIG. If the limit exceeds the limit, an error will occur when borrowing exceeds the limit).
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A gaming machine equipped with a main control means (e.g., a main control unit 300) that performs two-way communication with an external processing device (e.g., a rental machine 700, a host server) and progresses a game,
The main control means is a means for performing a game value update process for updating the number of game values related to game values used in a game (for example, updating the number of game medals),
The main control means is a means capable of deriving the number of loans of the gaming value based on receipt of loan information from the external processing device, and performing the gaming value update process based on the number of loans (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 105 and step S3714 in FIG. 103),
The main control means is a means for determining whether a communication abnormality occurs with the external processing device based on a state of a predetermined signal (e.g., a VL signal) transmitted from the external processing device,
The main control means is a means capable of making it impossible to proceed with the game when it is determined that the communication abnormality has occurred (for example, a judgment of No in step S1007 of FIG. 83 ).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A performance control means (e.g., a first sub-control unit 400) is provided that is in one-way communication with the main control means and controls the performance performed by the performance means (e.g., the performance image display device 157, the speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420),
The performance control means is a means for not notifying the performance means of the communication abnormality when the communication abnormality is determined (for example, not executing an error notification for a VL signal abnormality),
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
A production control means (for example, a first sub-control unit 400) that has one-way communication with the main control means and controls production performed by production means (for example, production image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420). ),
Equipped with counting operation means (for example, counting button 171),
The main control means executes a process of transmitting the number of game values to the external processing device and a process of updating the game value of subtracting the number of game values based on the operation performed on the counting operation means. is a possible means (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101),
The effect control means is a means for causing the effect means to display a background,
The effect control means is a means for causing the effect means to perform an effect of blinking a display prompting the operation of the counting operation means,
The display prompting the operation of the counting operation means is a display displayed in front of the background display (for example, FIG. 148(b)),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A gaming medium management device (e.g., a lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100),
The gaming machine includes:
A gaming machine equipped with a main control means (e.g., a main control unit 300) that performs two-way communication with the gaming medium management device and progresses a game,
The main control means is a means for performing a game value update process for updating the number of game values related to game values used in a game (e.g., updating the number of game medals), the main control means is a means for deriving the number of loans of the game value based on receipt of loan information from the game media management device, and performing the game value update process based on the number of loans (e.g., step S4003 in FIG. 105 and step S3714 in FIG. 103),
The main control means is a means for determining a communication abnormality with the game media management device based on a state of a predetermined signal (e.g., a VL signal) transmitted from the game media management device,
The main control means is a means capable of making it impossible to proceed with the game when it is determined that the communication abnormality has occurred (for example, a judgment of No in step S1007 of FIG. 83 ).
The present invention describes a game media management device.

Also,
A gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100);
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, a gaming system S) including at least
The gaming machine includes:
A gaming machine equipped with a main control means (e.g., a main control unit 300) that performs two-way communication with the external processing device and progresses a game,
The main control means is a means for performing a game value update process for updating the number of game values related to game values used in a game (for example, updating the number of game medals),
The main control means is a means capable of deriving the number of loans of the gaming value based on receipt of loan information from the external processing device, and performing the gaming value update process based on the number of loans (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 105 and step S3714 in FIG. 103),
The main control means is a means for determining whether a communication abnormality occurs with the external processing device based on a state of a predetermined signal (e.g., a VL signal) transmitted from the external processing device,
The main control means is a means capable of making it impossible to proceed with the game when it is determined that the communication abnormality has occurred (for example, a judgment of No in step S1007 of FIG. 83 ).
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
An input operation means (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132);
A counting operation means (e.g., a counting button 171);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of a game based on an operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A performance control means (e.g., the first sub-control unit 400) that controls the performance performed by the performance means (e.g., the performance image display device 157, the speakers 272, 277, the various lamps 420),
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a counting process (e.g., steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101 ) including a transmission process of the game value number to an external processing device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number based on an operation of the counting operation means;
The game control means is a means capable of setting a first game state (e.g., an AT state) in which an auxiliary function advantageous to a player can be activated,
the game value number control means is a means capable of executing the counting process based on an operation of the counting operation means even in the first game state;
The performance control means is a means capable of executing a counting performance (e.g., FIG. 130) in association with the counting process,
The increase in the number of game values per unit game in the first game state when the game is played according to the activated auxiliary function is smaller than the decrease in the number of game values per unit game due to the counting process (see the configuration in [Regarding the configuration related to the difference between payout and counting process] where the increase in the number of game medals per unit game in an advantageous game state is smaller than the decrease in the number of game medals per unit game due to the counting process).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The above-mentioned counting effect is an effect with a termination condition that is different from the end of the above-mentioned counting process. (see configuration that may terminate),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The production control means is a means capable of executing a specific production,
The performance control means is a means for not executing the specific performance while the counting performance is being executed.
A gaming machine characterized by this (refer to the configuration in which a performance that requires some kind of operation is not performed in the description of [Regarding the configuration regarding the difference between payout and counting processing]) is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The specific effect is an effect that requires an operation by a player.
The present invention describes a gaming machine that is characterized by the above (see the configuration that does not execute a presentation that requires some kind of operation in the description of [Configuration regarding the difference between payout and counting processing]).

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The counting effect is an effect whose content changes depending on the amount of subtraction of the game value number by the counting process.
The present invention describes a gaming machine characterized by the above (see the description of the configuration relating to the difference between payout and counting processing, in which the content of the counting presentation changes depending on the number of gaming medals counted).

Further, the game machine described above,
The performance control means is a means for restarting the immediately preceding counting performance from the middle when a new counting process is started within a predetermined time after the counting process is terminated halfway due to the completion of the counting process. is,
A gaming machine characterized by the following (during the description of [Regarding the configuration regarding the difference between payout and counting processing]), even after the counting performance ends midway, the immediately preceding counting performance (counting performance that ended midway) ) is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The performance control means continues the counting performance within a predetermined time after the counting process ends, and if a new counting process is started while the counting process continues, the performance control means controls the counting performance to continue. It is a means of continuous execution,
A game machine characterized by the following (during the description of [Concerning the configuration regarding the difference between payout and counting processing]), the counting effect continues even after the counting process ends, and when a new counting process starts, the counting effect that is being executed (see the configuration to keep it as is), is described.

The document also describes a gaming media management device (e.g., a lending machine 700) that is connected to the gaming machine described above.

Also,
The game machine described above,
an external processing device (for example, rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) characterized in that it is configured to include at least the following is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
An input operation means (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132) used to set the bet amount;
A settlement operation means (e.g., a settlement button 134);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of a game based on the operation of the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting first information regarding settlement (e.g., a settlement command) to the game value number control means based on an operation being performed on the settlement operation means;
the game value number control means is means for deriving a settlement number of the game value based on reception of the first information, performing the game value update process based on the settlement number, and then not transmitting response information to the first information to the game control means;
The game control means is a means capable of setting the bet amount to 0 based on an operation performed on the settlement operation means.
The present invention describes a gaming machine characterized by the above (see configuration that does not wait for a response command to a settlement command (no response command used)).

Further, the game machine described above,
The game control means is a means for transmitting second information regarding the input (for example, an input command) to the game value number control means based on the operation of the input operation means,
The gaming value number control means derives the number of gaming value input requests based on the reception of the second information, performs the gaming value update process based on the input request number, and then Means capable of transmitting response information to the information to the game control means,
The game control means is means capable of setting the number of bets based on reception of response information to the second information.
A game machine (for input commands, refer to a configuration using response commands) is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101 ) including a transmission process of the game value number to an external processing device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number;
The game value number control means is a means for transmitting the game value number excluding the increased game value number to the external processing device when the game value number is increased while the counting process is continuing, and then transmitting the increased game value number to the external processing device (see the configuration for the increase in the number of game medals while the counting process is continuing in the description of [Configuration for payout and settlement operation during counting process]).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Also,
A gaming media management device (e.g., a lending machine 700) is described, which is characterized by being connected to the gaming machine described above.

Also,
The game machine described above,
an external processing device (for example, rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) characterized in that it is configured to include at least the following is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
An input operation means (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of a game based on an operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101 ) including a transmission process of the game value number to an external processing device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number;
The game value number control means is a means for transmitting the game value number excluding the increased game value number to the external processing device when the game value number is increased while the counting process is continuing, and then transmitting the increased game value number to the external processing device (see the configuration for the increase in the number of game medals while the counting process is continuing in the description of [Configuration for payout and settlement operation during counting process]).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value number control means is a means for reflecting the increase in the game value number while the counting process is continuing after the state in which the counting process is continuing ends before the game value number becomes 0 (see the operation when the count button 171 is released before the game medal number becomes 0 in the description of [Configuration regarding payout and settlement operation during counting process]).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A settlement operation means (e.g., a settlement button 134);
Equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting settlement operation information (e.g., a settlement command) to the game value number control means based on an operation performed on the settlement operation means (e.g., step S1204 and step S1205 of FIG. 85 ),
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving a settlement number of the game value based on the reception of the settlement operation information, and performing the game value update process based on the settlement number (for example, step S4704 in FIG. 113 ),
The increase is based on the settlement number (see the configuration for either the payout or the settlement operation as the increase in the number of game medals in the description of [Regarding the configuration for the payout and settlement operation during the counting process]).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The game control means is means for transmitting payout information (for example, payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in a game (for example, steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 89). ,
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the payout number of the gaming value based on the reception of the payout information and performing the gaming value update process based on the payout number (for example, as shown in FIG. 116, step S4B04 in FIG. 117),
The increase is based on the number of payouts (in the description of [Configuration related to payout and settlement operations during counting process], the increase in the number of game medals refers to either payout or settlement operations). (see configuration),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
The present invention also describes a gaming media management device (e.g., a lending machine 700) that is connected to the gaming machine described above.

Also,
The game machine described above,
an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) characterized in that it is configured to include at least the following is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
An input operation means (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of a game based on an operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101 ) including a transmission process of the game value number to an external processing device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number;
The game value number control means is a means for, when there is an increase in the number of game values while the counting process is continuing, transmitting the number of game values excluding the increased number of game values to the external processing device, and then transmitting the increased number of game values to the external processing device (see the configuration for the increase in the number of game medals while the counting process is continuing in the description of [Configuration for payout and settlement operation during counting process]).
The game value number control means is a means capable of transmitting the game value number at a fixed number to the external processing device at a periodically occurring transmission timing (for example, the transmission of the game medal number by the counting process (counting notification) is every 300 ms, FIG. 72 ),
The game value number control means is a means for transmitting the increased game value number at the next transmission timing of the transmission timings when the transmission of the game value number excluding the increased game value number is completed at the current transmission timing of the transmission timings (in FIG. 158(c)(e), the increased number is transmitted after the transmission of 120 game medals at the time of the counting process is completed first).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value number control means is a means for reflecting the increase in the game value number while the counting process is continuing after the state in which the counting process is continuing ends before the game value number becomes 0 (see the operation when the count button 171 is released before the game medal number becomes 0 in the description of [Configuration regarding payout and settlement operation during counting process]).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
A payment operation means (for example, payment button 134),
Equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting payment operation information (for example, a payment command) to the game value number control means based on the operation performed on the payment operation means (for example, as shown in FIG. 85). Step S1204, Step S1205),
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the settlement number of the gaming value based on the reception of the settlement operation information and performing the gaming value update process based on the settlement number (for example, Step S4704 in FIG. 113),
The increase is based on the number of settlements (in the description of [Configuration regarding payout and settlement operations during counting process], the increase in the number of game medals refers to either payout or settlement operations). (see configuration),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game control means is a means for transmitting payout information (e.g., a payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in a game (e.g., steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 89 );
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the payout number of the game value based on the reception of the payout information and performing the game value update process based on the payout number (for example, step S4B04 in FIG. 116 and FIG. 117 ),
The increase is based on the number of payouts (see the configuration for either the payout or the settlement operation as the increase in the number of game medals in the description of [Regarding the configuration for the payout and settlement operation during the counting process]).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) characterized in that it is connected to the game machine described above is described.

Also,
The game machine described above,
an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) characterized in that it is configured to include at least the following is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
An input operation means (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of a game based on the operation of the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A display means (e.g., a performance image display device 157, a game medal number display device 170) capable of displaying the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101 ) including a transmission process of the game value number to an external processing device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number;
The game value number control means is a means for, when there is an increase in the number of game values while the counting process is continuing, transmitting the number of game values excluding the increased number of game values to the external processing device, and then transmitting the increased number of game values to the external processing device (see the configuration for the increase in the number of game medals while the counting process is continuing in the description of [Configuration for payout and settlement operation during counting process]).
the display means is a means capable of executing a subtraction display for subtracting the gaming value number in accordance with the gaming value number subtracted by the counting process,
The display means is a means capable of executing the subtraction display reflecting an increase in the number of game values when the number of game values increases while the counting process is continuing (FIG. 158(d)(f)),
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The gaming value number control means is configured to control, with respect to the increase in the number of gaming values while the counting process continues, after the state where the counting process ends before the number of gaming values becomes 0. (Refer to the operation when the counting button 171 is released before the number of game medals reaches 0 in the description of [Configuration regarding payout and settlement operations during counting process]).
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A settlement operation means (e.g., a settlement button 134);
Equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting settlement operation information (e.g., a settlement command) to the game value number control means based on an operation performed on the settlement operation means (e.g., step S1204 and step S1205 of FIG. 85 ),
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving a settlement number of the game value based on the reception of the settlement operation information, and performing the game value update process based on the settlement number (for example, step S4704 in FIG. 113 ),
The increase is based on the settlement number (see the configuration for either the payout or the settlement operation as the increase in the number of game medals in the description of [Regarding the configuration for the payout and settlement operation during the counting process]).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The game control means is means for transmitting payout information (for example, payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in a game (for example, steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 89). ,
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the payout number of the gaming value based on the reception of the payout information and performing the gaming value update process based on the payout number (for example, as shown in FIG. 116, step S4B04 in FIG. 117),
The increase is based on the number of payouts (in the description of [Configuration regarding payout and settlement operations during counting process], the increase in the number of game medals refers to either payout or settlement operations). (see configuration),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
The present invention also describes a gaming media management device (e.g., a lending machine 700) that is connected to the gaming machine described above.

Also,
The gaming machine described above,
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
The present invention describes a gaming system (e.g., gaming system S) that is characterized by including at least the above.

Also, in the above explanation,
An input operation means (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132) used to set the bet amount;
A settlement operation means (e.g., a settlement button 134);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of a game based on an operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The input operation means includes a predetermined input operation means (e.g., a bet button 130) capable of setting the minimum value of the bet amount,
The game control means is a means for transmitting settlement information (e.g., a settlement command) to the game value number control means based on an operation performed on the settlement operation means,
the game control means is a means capable of setting the minimum value to the bet amount based on an operation being performed on the predetermined input operation means in a state in which a value different from the minimum value is set to the bet amount, and capable of transmitting information on a difference between the different value and the minimum value to the game value number control means as the settlement information;
The game value control means is a means capable of performing the game value update process based on the receipt of the settlement information.
The present invention describes a gaming machine characterized by the above (see the description under [Regarding setting of reduction in the number of bets by operating the bet button]).

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game control means is a means for transmitting the settlement information including a value obtained by subtracting the minimum value from the maximum value to the game value number control means, based on an operation being performed on the predetermined input operation means when the bet number is set to the maximum value.
The present invention describes a gaming machine characterized by the above (see the description under [Regarding setting of reduction in the number of bets by operating the bet button]).

Further, the game machine described above,
including audio output means (e.g., speakers 272, 277);
The audio output means is a means for outputting a payment sound based on the operation of the payment operation means,
The audio output means is a means for outputting a charging sound based on the operation of the charging operation means,
The audio output means is a means for outputting the making sound based on the fact that the predetermined placing operation means is operated while the number of bets is set to the maximum value.
A game machine ((refer to the description of [Regarding the setting to reduce the number of bets by operating the bet button])) is described.

Also,
A gaming media management device (e.g., a lending machine 700) is described, which is characterized by being connected to the gaming machine described above.

Also,
The game machine described above,
an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) characterized in that it is configured to include at least the following is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
Insertion operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132) used to set the number of bets;
A payment operation means (for example, payment button 134),
audio output means (for example, speakers 272, 277);
A game control means (for example, game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The insertion operation means includes a predetermined insertion operation means (for example, bet button 130) that can set the minimum value of the number of bets,
The game control means is a means for transmitting payment information to the game value number control means based on the operation of the payment operation means,
The game control means sets the minimum value to the number of bets based on the operation of the predetermined input operation means when the number of bets is set to a value different from the minimum value. means that can be set and that can transmit information on the difference between the different values and the minimum value to the gaming value number control means as the settlement information;
The game value number control means is a means capable of performing the game value update process based on reception of the settlement information,
The audio output means is a means for outputting a payment sound based on the operation of the payment operation means,
The audio output means is means that does not output the settlement sound when the predetermined insertion operation means is operated while the bet number is set to a value different from the minimum value. ,
A game machine (see the description of [Regarding the setting for reducing the number of bets by operating the bet button]) is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
the sound output means is means for outputting a insertion sound based on an operation being performed on the insertion operation means,
The sound output means is a means for outputting the insertion sound based on an operation to the predetermined insertion operation means in a state where the bet amount is set to a maximum value.
The present invention describes a gaming machine characterized by the above (see the description under [Regarding setting of reduction in the number of bets by operating the bet button]).

Also,
The present invention also describes a gaming media management device (e.g., a lending machine 700) that is connected to the gaming machine described above.

Also,
The gaming machine described above,
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
The present invention describes a gaming system (e.g., gaming system S) that is characterized by including at least the above.

Also, in the above explanation,
Inserting operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
a game control means (for example, game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation of the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
Production control means (for example, first sub-control unit 400) that controls production performed by production means (for example, production image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420);
A game machine comprising:
The game value number control means is a means capable of performing the game value update process of updating the game value number based on reception of information from an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server). (For example, step S4003 in FIG. 105, step S3714 in FIG. 103),
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of transmitting external information to the gaming control means when receiving external information regarding gaming values managed by the external processing device,
The game control means is a means capable of transmitting the external information to the production control means,
The performance control means is a means capable of executing a performance according to a determination target in a certain gaming state that is advantageous to the player,
The determination target is the total number of the number included in the external information and the gaming value number,
A game machine characterized by this (see the configuration in which the total value of the number of game medals and the number of held medals is the subject of determination in the description of [Regarding the performance according to the number of game medals]) is described.

Also,
Insertion operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
A game control means (for example, game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
Production control means (for example, first sub-control unit 400) that controls production performed by production means (for example, production image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420);
A game machine comprising:
The game value number control means is a means capable of performing the game value update process of updating the game value number based on reception of information from an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server). (For example, step S4003 in FIG. 105, step S3714 in FIG. 103),
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of transmitting external information to the gaming control means when receiving external information regarding gaming values managed by the external processing device,
The game control means is a means capable of transmitting the external information to the production control means,
The performance control means is a means capable of executing a performance according to a determination target in a certain game state that is advantageous to the player,
The determination target is a number included in the external information,
A gaming machine characterized by this (see the configuration in which the number of held medals is the subject of determination in the description of [Regarding the performance according to the number of game medals]) is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The number included in the external information is the number of game values acquired in the game stored (for example, the number of medals held is the number of game values acquired in the game stored),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The performance control means executes a first performance when the number of judgment targets has not reached the predetermined number, and executes a second performance based on the fact that the number of judgment targets has reached the predetermined number. (Refer to the configuration that executes different effects depending on the number of game medals in the description of [Regarding effects according to the number of game medals]),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The performance control means is a means capable of displaying information regarding the determination target at least in the certain game state (during the description of [Regarding the performance according to the number of game medals], the value to be determined is displayed) (see configuration),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The performance control means is a means capable of executing, in the certain game state, a performance according to the number of game values acquired in the certain game state (in the description of [Regarding the performance according to the number of game medals], (See the configuration that executes a performance using the number of medals you have and a performance using the number of acquired medals in parallel),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
In the above-mentioned certain gaming state, there is a case where the number of gaming values acquired in the certain gaming state exceeds the number included in the above-mentioned external information. If the counting process is not carried out under favorable conditions, the number of medals earned may exceed the number of medals held).
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The performance control means is a means that can execute a setting suggestion performance according to the determination target ("When the number of game medals reaches a predetermined number," in [About the performance according to the number of game medals]) ),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
The present invention also describes a gaming media management device (e.g., a lending machine 700) that is connected to the gaming machine described above.

Also,
The gaming machine described above,
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
The present invention describes a gaming system (e.g., gaming system S) that is characterized by including at least the above.

Also, in the above explanation,
An input operation means (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of a game based on the operation of the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A performance control means (e.g., the first sub-control unit 400) that controls the performance performed by the performance means (e.g., the performance image display device 157, the speakers 272, 277, the various lamps 420),
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of performing a game value update process for updating the game value number based on information received from an external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) (e.g., step S4003 in FIG. 105, step S3714 in FIG. 103),
The presentation control means is a means capable of displaying the number of game values in a certain game state advantageous to the player (for example, the value of “possession” in FIG. 160 ),
The effect control means is a means capable of executing, in the certain game state, an effect according to the number of game values acquired in the certain game state.
The present invention describes a gaming machine characterized by the above (in the description of [Regarding the presentation according to the number of game medals], the number of medals won in the AT state is the subject of judgment, see Figure 160).

Further, the game machine described above,
The effect control means is a means capable of displaying the number of acquired gaming values in the certain gaming state (for example, the value of "...GET" in FIG. 160),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The presentation control means is a means for updating and displaying both the display of the number of acquisitions and the display of the number of game values when game values are acquired in the certain game state (for example, FIG. 160 (d2) (d3)),
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The performance control means is a means that can execute a performance according to the number of game values in the certain gaming state (during the description of [Regarding the performance according to the number of game medals], it is possible to execute performances in parallel). (see configuration),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) characterized in that it is connected to the game machine described above is described.

Also,
The game machine described above,
an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) characterized in that it is configured to include at least the following is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
An input operation means (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132);
A first operating means (e.g., a reset button R);
A second operating means (e.g., a count button 171);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of a game based on an operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
A game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
the first operation means is an operation means capable of canceling a first error related to the game control means,
the second operation means is an operation means capable of canceling a second error related to the game value number control means,
When the first error occurs while the second error is occurring, the first error becomes resolvable and the second error becomes unresolvable.
The present invention describes a gaming machine characterized by the above (see description of [Operation when errors are repeated], FIG. 163).

Further, the game machine described above,
The first operating means is a reset button (see FIG. 162),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101 ) including a transmission process of the game value number to an external processing device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number;
The second error is an error that can be cleared by executing the counting process (see FIG. 161 ).
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing the counting process based on the operation of the second operation means (see FIG. 161 ).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value number control means
If the first error has not occurred, the game value update process is executed based on the operation of the second operation means (see FIG. 161 ).
a means for not executing the game value update process based on the operation of the second operation means when the first error occurs (see FIG. 163);
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first operating means is the same operating means as the second operating means,
(Refer to the configuration in which the error canceling operation means for canceling the game control error and the medal number control error are the same in the description of [Regarding the operation when errors overlap]), which is characterized by the following: There is.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) characterized in that it is connected to the game machine described above is described.

Also,
The game machine described above,
an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) characterized in that it is configured to include at least the following is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
An input operation means (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132);
A first operating means (e.g., a reset button R);
A second operating means (e.g., a count button 171);
Notification means (e.g., a performance image display device 157);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of a game based on the operation of the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
the first operation means is an operation means capable of canceling a first error related to the game control means,
the second operation means is an operation means capable of canceling a second error relating to the game value number control means,
When the first error occurs while the second error is occurring, the first error becomes resolvable and the second error becomes an unresolvable first state;
the notification means is means capable of executing a first error notification regarding the first error in the first state;
The present invention describes a gaming machine characterized by the above (see description of [Operation when errors are repeated], FIG. 163).

Further, the game machine described above,
The notification means is a means that can issue a notification prompting cancellation of the first error based on the operation of the second operation means in the first state (see FIG. 163 (d4)). ),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The notification means is a means capable of executing a second error notification (see FIG. 163 (d2)) regarding the second error.
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The notification means is a means for interrupting the second error notification being executed when executing the first error notification in the first state (see (d2) and (d3) of FIG. 163 ),
The notification means is a means for starting notification of the second error when the first state ends by releasing the first error (see FIG. 163 (d4) to (d6)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The notification means is a means for continuously executing the second error notification when executing the first error notification in the first state (in the description of [About operations when errors overlap]), (see configuration to display messages about both errors),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101), including a process of transmitting the number of game values to an external processing device and a process of updating the game value to subtract the number of game values. is a viable means,
The second error is an error that can be canceled by executing the counting process,
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing the counting process based on the operation of the second operation means,
A game machine (see FIGS. 161 (b2) to (b4)) characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first operating means is a reset button (see FIG. 162),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The gaming value number control means is
If the first error has not occurred, execute the game value update process based on the operation of the second operation means (see FIG. 161);
means for not executing the game value update process based on the operation of the second operation means when the first error has occurred (see FIG. 163);
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A gaming media management device (e.g., a lending machine 700) is described, which is characterized by being connected to the gaming machine described above.

Also,
The game machine described above,
an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) characterized in that it is configured to include at least the following is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
Insertion operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
audio output means (for example, speakers 272, 277);
A game control means (for example, a game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation performed on the input operation means, and stores the number of game values related to the game values used in the game. A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358),
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101), including a process of transmitting the number of game values to an external processing device and a game value update process of subtracting the number of game values. is a viable means,
The game control means is a means that can set a first game state (for example, AT state) that is advantageous to the player,
The audio output means is a means capable of outputting a first effect sound (for example, an effect sound in the AT state) in the first gaming state,
The audio output means is a means that may reduce the volume of the first performance sound when the counting process is executed in the first gaming state.
A gaming machine (see [Regarding Notification of Counting Process (1)]) is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A plurality of reels (e.g., reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and which are driven to rotate;
A plurality of stop buttons (e.g., stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels, for individually stopping the rotation of the reels;
a stop control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) for performing stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop button that has been operated to stop the reel based on a result of an internal lottery after the plurality of reels have been rotated;
Equipped with
the sound output means is a means for reducing the volume of the first sound effect when the counting process is being executed in a state in which all of the reels are stopped in the first gaming state;
The present invention describes a gaming machine characterized by the above (see the description of [Regarding the notification of counting process (1)] in which counting notification A is executed when all reels are stopped).

Further, the game machine described above,
The voice output means is configured to output the voice output means when the counting process is being executed after a predetermined time has elapsed after all the stop operations for the plurality of rotating reels have been performed in the first gaming state. It is a means that may reduce the volume of the first performance sound,
A game machine characterized by the following (during the description of [Regarding notification of counting process (1)], a predetermined period of time has passed since the last stop operation was performed on the reels, and all reels have stopped rotating) (Refer to the configuration for executing count notification A on the condition that .) is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
the sound output means being capable of outputting a second sound effect (e.g., a counting sound) when the counting process is being executed;
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The device includes a predetermined operation means (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132),
the sound output means is means for returning the volume of the first sound effect to a previous volume when the predetermined operation means is operated in a state in which the volume of the first sound effect is reduced;
The present invention describes a gaming machine characterized in that (see the description of [Regarding the notification of counting process (1)], the configuration in which the currently executing counting notification A is terminated when some operation is performed on an operating means).

Further, the game machine described above,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) decorated with a plurality of types of symbols and driven to rotate;
a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping rotation of the reels;
After the plurality of reels are rotationally driven, a stop control means (for example, the game control unit 302 )and,
Production means (for example, production image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420) including the audio output means,
Equipped with
The game control means is a means that can set a second game state (for example, a normal state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state,
The production means is a means capable of performing demonstration production,
The presentation means is a means for not performing a demonstration presentation when all of the plurality of reels are stopped in the first gaming state,
The production means is a means capable of executing a demonstration production when all of the plurality of reels are stopped in the second gaming state;
A game machine characterized by the following (in the description of [Regarding Notification of Counting Process (1)]), a so-called demonstration performance is not performed in a state that is advantageous to the player, and a demonstration performance is performed in a state that is disadvantageous to the player. , see the description).

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) characterized in that it is connected to the game machine described above is described.

Also,
The game machine described above,
an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) characterized in that it is configured to include at least the following is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
An input operation means (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132);
Audio output means (e.g., speakers 272, 277);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of a game based on the operation of the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101 ) including a transmission process of the game value number to an external processing device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number;
The game control means is a means capable of setting a first game state (e.g., an AT state) advantageous to a player, and the sound output means is a means capable of outputting a first effect sound (e.g., an AT state effect sound) in the first game state,
the sound output means is means for outputting a second sound effect (e.g., a counting sound) when the counting process is being executed,
The sound output means may maintain a state in which a first effect sound is output when the counting process is being executed in the first gaming state.
The present invention describes a gaming machine (see [Regarding notification of counting process (2)]) that is characterized by the above.

Further, the game machine described above,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) decorated with a plurality of types of symbols and driven to rotate;
a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping rotation of the reels;
After the plurality of reels are rotationally driven, a stop control means (for example, the game control unit 302 )and,
Equipped with
The audio output means may output the second effect sound when the counting process is executed with all the plurality of reels stopped in the first gaming state. be,
A game machine characterized by the following (refer to the configuration in which counting notification B is executed in a state where all reels are stopped in the description of [Regarding notification of counting process (2)]) is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A plurality of reels (e.g., reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and which are driven to rotate;
A plurality of stop buttons (e.g., stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels, for individually stopping the rotation of the reels;
a stop control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) for performing stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop button that has been operated to stop the reels based on a result of an internal lottery after the plurality of reels have been rotated;
Equipped with
the sound output means is means for not outputting the second sound effect when any of the plurality of reels is spinning in the first gaming state;
The present invention describes a gaming machine characterized by the above (see the description of [Regarding the notification of counting process (2)], in which counting notification B is not executed while any of the reels are spinning).

Further, the game machine described above,
Predetermined operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
Equipped with
The audio output means is a means that does not output the second performance sound from the time the predetermined operation means is operated in the first gaming state until the plurality of reels start rotating.
A gaming machine characterized by this (refer to the configuration in which counting notification B is not executed after some operation means is performed in the description of [Regarding notification of counting process (2)]) is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A plurality of reels (e.g., reels 110 to 112) that are rotated and have a plurality of different patterns applied thereto; a plurality of stop buttons (e.g., stop buttons 137 to 139) that are provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and that individually stop the rotation of the reels;
a stop control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) for performing stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop button that has been operated to stop the reels based on a result of an internal lottery after the plurality of reels have been rotated;
Equipped with
the sound output means is means for outputting the second sound effect in a first manner when the counting process is being executed in a state in which all of the reels in the first gaming state are stopped;
The present invention describes a gaming machine characterized by the above (see the configuration in which, in the description of [Regarding the notification of counting process (2)], the case where counting notification B is executed is read as the case where a counting sound of a first type is output, and the case where counting notification B is not executed is read as the case where a counting sound of a second type is output).

Further, the game machine described above,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) decorated with a plurality of types of symbols and driven to rotate;
a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping rotation of the reels;
After the plurality of reels are rotationally driven, a stop control means (for example, the game control unit 302 )and,
Equipped with
The audio output means outputs the second performance sound in a second manner when the counting process is executed while any of the plurality of reels is rotating in the first gaming state. It is a means of outputting
(In the description of [Regarding Notification of Counting Process (2)], the case where the counting sound of the first aspect is output is the case where the counting notification B is executed, and the case where the counting sound of the first aspect is not executed is the case where the counting notification B is not executed. In the case where the counting sound of the second aspect is output, the following configurations are described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A predetermined operation means (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132);
Equipped with
the sound output means is means for outputting the second sound effect in a second manner when the counting process is being executed during a period from when the predetermined operation means is operated in the first gaming state until when the plurality of reels start to rotate;
The present invention describes a gaming machine characterized by the above (see the configuration in which, in the description of [Regarding the notification of counting process (2)], the case where counting notification B is executed is read as the case where a counting sound of a first type is output, and the case where counting notification B is not executed is read as the case where a counting sound of a second type is output).

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) characterized in that it is connected to the game machine described above is described.

Also,
The gaming machine described above,
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
The present invention describes a gaming system (e.g., gaming system S) that is characterized by including at least the above.

Also, in the above explanation,
An input operation means (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of a game based on the operation of the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A performance control means (e.g., the first sub-control unit 400) that controls the performance performed by the performance means (e.g., the performance image display device 157, the speakers 272, 277, the various lamps 420),
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means for transmitting information on the game value number to the game control means,
the game control means is a means for transmitting a command (e.g., a security command) including information on the game value number received from the game value number control means to the performance control means;
The presentation control means is a means for executing a first control regarding the number of game values based on receiving the command.
The document describes a gaming machine that features the above-mentioned characteristics (see [Display and presentation based on information from the medal count control unit]).

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When power is turned on, communication between the game control means and the performance control means may be established before communication between the game control means and the game value number control means is established;
The performance control means is a means for not executing the first control even if the command is received until communication between the game control means and the game value number control means is established.
The document describes a gaming machine that features the above-mentioned characteristics (see [Regarding displays and effects based on information from a medal count control unit]).

Further, the game machine described above,
When the power is turned on, communication between the game control means and the performance control means may be established before communication is established between the game control means and the number of game value control means,
The command includes information indicating whether communication between the game control means and the game value number control means is normal,
The performance control means is means that does not execute the first control even if the command is received until information indicating that communication between the game control means and the game value number control means is normal is received. be,
A game machine (see [Regarding display and performance based on information of medal number control unit]) characterized by the following is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The presentation control means is a means for executing the first control based on the fact that communication between the game control means and the game value number control means is normal.
The document describes a gaming machine that features the above-mentioned characteristics (see [Regarding displays and effects based on information from a medal count control unit]).

Further, the game machine described above,
The game control means is a means for transmitting the command to the production control means at a predetermined period (for example, a security command is sent at a period of 100 ms),
The game control means transmits various processing commands (for example, the various processing commands in FIG. 72) including the information on the number of game values received from the game value number control means to the performance control means in accordance with the progress of the game. It is a means to
The effect control means is means for executing the first control based on receiving the various processing commands,
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
The present invention also describes a gaming media management device (e.g., a lending machine 700) that is connected to the gaming machine described above.

Also,
The gaming machine described above,
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
The present invention describes a gaming system (e.g., gaming system S) that is characterized by including at least the above.

<Difference number counter, virtual difference number counter>
Next, using FIG. 168 and FIG. 169, the number of differential sheets provided by the game machine (pinball game machine (pachinko machine), reel-type game machine (slot machine), enclosed game machine, or medalless slot machine) according to the present invention The counter and the virtual difference number counter will be explained.

The difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) calculate the difference obtained by subtracting the amount of gaming value used in the game from the amount of gaming value awarded as a result of the game. It is a counter that can count, and is composed of, for example, a software counter provided in a RAM or the like, a hardware counter provided in a control unit, or the like.

For example, if the gaming machine is a slot machine, the difference number counter (first counting means) can count the value (obtained difference) obtained by subtracting the value of the number of medals inserted (the amount of gaming value used in the game) from the value of the number of medals paid out (the amount of gaming value awarded as a result of the game) in the advantageous zone (second zone).

In addition, if the gaming machine is a pachinko machine, the difference number counter (first counting means) can count the value (gain difference) obtained by subtracting the out (number of fired gaming balls) value (amount of gaming value used in the game) from the safe (number of paid out gaming balls) value (amount of gaming value awarded as a result of the game).

On the other hand, the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is the same as the difference number counter (first counting means) in that it is a counter that can count the acquired difference obtained by subtracting the amount of game value used in the game from the amount of game value awarded as a result of the game, but the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) have different update conditions (conditions for performing counting).

<Difference number counter, virtual difference number counter/update conditions>
FIG. 168(a) is a diagram showing an example of update conditions for the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means).

In the slot machine 100 described using FIG. 1 etc., when the first operation is performed in a certain game, both the value of the first counting means and the value of the second counting means are updated. It is composed of

In the example shown in FIG. 168(a), (1) in a 3-coin bet game (3-BET game), when the left stop button 137 corresponding to the left reel 110 is subjected to a first stop operation (first stop left operation), or (3) in a 3-coin bet game (3-BET game), when an operation other than the push order navigation is performed, both the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) and the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) are updated in that game.

In addition, (3) If an operation different from the push order navigation is performed in a 3 bet game (3BET game), the difference number counter (first counting means) is changed to the actual difference number in the game (=actual While updating the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) based on the number of payouts - actual number of bets), the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is updated based on the virtual difference number (= Updated based on the specified number of payouts for winning combinations - actual number of bets).

In addition, in the slot machine 100, there are cases where the AT state (first state) is advantageous to the player in the advantageous section (second section), and in the state before the AT state (first state), When the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is updated, the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) may also be updated. When the value of the number of sheets counter (first counting means) is updated, the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) may also be updated, and after the AT state (first state) ends In this state, when the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is updated, the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) may also be updated.

According to this example, the second counting means can hold the same value as the first counting means before and after a state advantageous to the player (for example, AT state), and during the advantageous state, and the second counting means can maintain the same value as the first counting means. It is possible to provide a game machine with a wide range of functions.

Additionally, the amount of update when the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is updated is the same as the amount of update when the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is updated. is preferred.

In this example, the second counting means can hold the same value as the first counting means, providing a fair gaming machine.

On the other hand, in slot machine 100, when a second operation is performed in a certain game, the value of the first counting means is updated, but the value of the second counting means is not updated.

In the example shown in FIG. 168(a), (2) in a 3-coin bet game (3-BET game), when the first stop operation (operation other than the first left stop operation) is performed on the middle stop button 138 or the right stop button 139 other than the left stop button 137 corresponding to the left reel 110, (4) when a 2-coin bet (2-BET game) is performed, or (5) when a 3-coin bet game (3-BET game) is performed in the ED state, in that game, the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is updated and the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is not updated.

The update conditions for the first and second counting means are not limited to this example, and may be configured such that, for example, when a first operation (a recommended operation in the first game, for example, the first stop operation of the left stop button 137) is performed in a first game (for example, a three-coin bet game in a favorable zone or a non-navigation notification game), the value of the first counting means (for example, the difference number counter) is updated and the value of the second counting means (for example, the virtual difference number counter) is updated, and when a second operation (a non-recommended operation in the first game, for example, the first stop operation of the middle stop button 138 or the right stop button 139) is performed in the first game, the value of the first counting means is updated and the value of the second counting means is not updated.

According to this example, when a first operation is performed in a first game, the value of the first counting means is updated and the value of the second counting means is updated, and when a second operation is performed in a first game, the value of the first counting means is updated and the value of the second counting means is not updated. This allows the second counting means to hold a value that does not reflect that a second operation has been performed in the first game, and the value at which the first operation has been performed can be grasped by the second counting means, making it possible to provide a fair gaming machine.

In addition, when the recommended operation in the first game is performed in the first game, the value of the first counting means is updated, the value of the second counting means is updated, and the value of the first counting means is updated in the first game. When a non-recommended operation is performed in a game, the value of the first counting means is updated, but the value of the second counting means is not updated, so it does not reflect that the non-recommended operation was performed in the first game. The value can be held by the second counting means, the value obtained by the recommended operation can be grasped by the second counting means, and a fair gaming machine can be provided.

In addition, in the case of a gaming machine with A+AT functionality, the second counting means (e.g., virtual difference number counter) may be configured not to update the value during a two-coin bet game during a bonus win or when the reel stops on the first position other than the left.

<Difference counter, virtual difference counter/advantageous zone>
Next, the relationship between the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) and the advantageous zone will be explained. Figure 168 (b) is a diagram showing an example of the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) and various processes that refer to these counting means.

As explained using FIG. 7 and the like, the slot machine 100 manages the game status by dividing it into a non-advantageous section (first section) and an advantageous section (second section). Among these, in the advantageous section, it is possible to notify (operation navigation, operation instruction notification) of the advantageous operation mode of the stop buttons 137 to 139 (stop operation means), but in the non-advantageous section, this advantageous operation mode is not notified. .

Then, when the transition conditions are met in the non-advantageous zone (first zone) (for example, a lottery for transition to the advantageous zone is held based on an internally won role, and the player wins this lottery), the player transitions to the advantageous zone (second zone).

In addition, if the end condition is met in the advantageous section (second section) (for example, when the advantageous section (second section) continues for a predetermined number of games (for example, 1500 games), or when the advantageous section (second section) If the number of coins acquired in the second section exceeds a predetermined net increase (for example, 2400 or 3000 coins), the advantageous section (second section) ends and the non-advantageous section (first section).

In the slot machine 100, as shown in FIG. 168(b), in the reset determination process (second process) for the advantageous area (second area), the difference number counter (first counting means) is referred to and this difference is calculated. When the value of the number of sheets counter (first counting means) reaches the first value (for example, 65279), it is determined that the end condition of the advantageous section (second section) is satisfied, and the advantageous section (second section) is started. (Second section) to the non-advantageous section (First section).

On the other hand, the update condition for the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is different from the update condition for the difference number counter (first counting means), and the update condition for the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is different from the update condition for the difference number counter (first counting means). 2), (4), and (5)) are performed, the virtual difference number counter (the second (2) counting means) is not referenced, but it is updated when the first operation (for example, operations (1) and (3) shown in FIG. 168(a)) is performed, so the virtual difference number The counter (second counting means) may be updated when the difference number counter (first counting means) is updated.

In this example, by storing the winning difference in the second section (e.g., the advantageous section) in the first counting means and the second counting means, the end condition of the second section can be grasped by the two counting means, and a fair gaming machine can be provided.

In addition, there are cases (first case) where the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) reaches a first value (e.g., 65279) before the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) reaches the first value, and in this first case, the advantageous period (second period) does not end.

According to this example, when the value of the second counting means that is not updated by the second operation reaches the first value, the second section can be completed, and a fair game machine can be created that takes the second operation into account. can be provided.

Further, the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) reaches the first value (for example, 65279), and the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) reaches the first value. In this second case, the advantageous section (second section) ends.

According to this example, since both the first counting means and the second counting means reach the first value, it is possible to understand that the second section has ended without the second operation being performed. .

Also, the first value (in this example, 65279 in decimal notation) is the value obtained by adding the first absolute value (in this example, 2400 in decimal notation) to the initial value (in this example, 62879 in decimal notation). , and the value obtained by subtracting the first absolute value from the initial value is a value greater than zero.

According to this example, even if the number of acquired coins exceeds the value obtained by subtracting the first absolute value from the initial value depending on the player's gaming state, there is still room for the player to recover.

<Difference Counter, Virtual Difference Counter/ED Status>
Next, the relationship between the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) and the ED state will be described.

As explained using FIG. 7 etc., in the slot machine 100, the game state is managed by dividing it into a non-advantageous zone (first zone) and an advantageous zone (second zone). When the number of remaining games in the advantageous zone (second zone) becomes a predetermined number of games (e.g., 20 games) or less, the machine transitions to an ED state, and in this ED state, an ED (ending) presentation is executed to indicate the end of the advantageous zone (second zone).

The condition for transitioning to the ED state is not limited to the number of remaining games in the advantageous zone (second zone) being a predetermined number of games (e.g., 20 games) or less, but may be, for example, the predetermined number of games being more or less than 20 games, or the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) reaching a predetermined number (e.g., 2000).

In the slot machine 100, as shown in FIG. 168(b), in the ED transition process (first process) of the advantageous zone (second zone), the difference number counter (first counting means) is referenced, and when the value of this difference number counter (first counting means) reaches a certain value (e.g., 2000), it is determined that the transition condition to the ED state has been met, and the advantageous zone (second zone) is transitioned to the ED state.

On the other hand, the update conditions for the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) are different from the update conditions for the difference number counter (first counting means), and are not updated when a second operation (for example, operations (2), (4), and (5) shown in FIG. 168(a)) is performed, so the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is not referenced in the ED transition determination process (first process) for the advantageous zone (second zone).

Note that this counting means is different from the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means), and it is a counting means that is different from the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means). A third counting means capable of counting the acquisition difference obtained by subtracting the amount of value is further provided, and the ED transition processing (first processing) of the advantageous section (second section) and the advantageous section (second section) are performed. In the reset determination process (second process), the third counting means may be referred to and each determination may be executed.

<Difference number counter, virtual difference number counter/freeze effect>
Next, the relationship between the difference number counter (first counting means), the virtual difference number counter (second counting means), and the freeze effect will be explained.

As described above, the slot machine 100 is capable of performing an effect accompanied by a freeze that prevents the game from proceeding (freeze effect), and is capable of performing an AT lottery process (first lottery means) that allows an AT lottery (first lottery) to be executed. ), a freeze lottery process (second lottery means) capable of executing a freeze lottery (second lottery) for determining whether or not to execute a freeze effect is provided. Note that the freeze lottery (second lottery) is a lottery with a higher gaming value than the AT lottery (first lottery).

The AT lottery process (first lottery means) is configured to be able to execute an AT lottery (first lottery) in a first game (e.g., a three-coin bet game/non-navigation notification game in a favorable zone) in which a first operation (e.g., operations (1) and (3) shown in FIG. 168(a)) is performed, but not to execute an AT lottery (first lottery) in a first game in which a second operation (e.g., operations (2), (4) and (5) shown in FIG. 168(a)) is performed.

In this example, the second operation will not execute the first lottery and will put the player at a disadvantage, so the player can be prompted to execute the first operation and play the game.

On the other hand, in the freeze lottery process (second lottery means), as shown in FIG. The freeze lottery (second lottery) is executed by referring to the value of the means).

According to this example, even if the player intentionally performs the second operation, it is not reflected in the value of the second counting means and does not affect the second lottery (freeze lottery), so a fair gaming machine can be provided. In addition, since the value of the first counting means that reflects the second operation intentionally performed by the player is not referenced by the second lottery means, it does not affect the second lottery, so a fair gaming machine can be provided.

<Example of counting>
Next, an example of counting by the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) will be described using FIG. 169.

FIG. 169 is a diagram showing, in chronological order, an example of counting by the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means). Prior to explaining the counting example, the items shown in the top row of FIG. 169 will be explained.

The "section" is information for managing the state of the game, and in this example, there are a non-advantageous section (first section) and an advantageous section (second section). The "performance state" is information for managing the performance state, and in this example, there is a normal state (normal state A) as the performance state of the non-advantageous section (first section), and the production state of the non-advantageous section (the second section) is The performance states of the section) include a normal state (normal state B), a chance state, an AT state, and an ED state.

"Display means navigation" indicates the display mode of the operation navigation on the liquid crystal display device 157, "3-1-2" indicates that operation navigation is displayed to encourage a stop operation (first stop operation) to be performed in the order of middle stop button 138 → right stop button 139 → left stop button 137, "3-2-1" indicates that operation navigation is displayed to encourage a stop operation (first stop right operation) to be performed in the order of right stop button 139 → middle stop button 138 → left stop button 137, and "1-2-3" indicates that operation navigation is displayed to encourage a stop operation (first stop left operation) to be performed in the order of left stop button 137 → middle stop button 138 → right stop button 139.

Note that hereinafter, the first stop left operation may be referred to as "L first stop", and stop operations other than the first stop left operation, that is, the first stop operation and the first stop right operation, are collectively referred to as It may also be referred to as "operation other than L first stop."

"Number of bets" indicates the number of bets on medals in the game (amount of gaming value used in the game), and "3" indicates that a 3-bet bet game (3BET game) was performed; 2'' indicates that a two bet game (2BET game) has been performed. Note that hereinafter, a two bet game (2BET game) may be referred to as a "bet number other than 3".

The winning combination indicates the winning combination (including losing) and chance winnings in the game, the "common bell" indicates the small winning combination 4 (common bell), and the "push order bell" indicates the small winning combination 5. (Push order bell), "Replay" indicates a replayed winning combination, "2BETBB" indicates a bonus in a two-bet bet game, and "Loss" indicates that no winning combination was won. ing.

"Stop order" indicates the actual order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 were operated. For example, "LCR" indicates that the stop operations (first left stop operation) were performed in the order of left stop button 137 → middle stop button 138 → right stop button 139, "CRL" indicates that the stop operations (first stop operation) were performed in the order of middle stop button 138 → right stop button 139 → left stop button 137, and "RCL" indicates that the stop operations (first right stop operation) were performed in the order of right stop button 139 → middle stop button 138 → left stop button 137. "Number won" indicates the number of medals won (paid out) in the game (the amount of game value awarded as a result of the game).

"First counting means" and the "Decimal notation" to the right are the values (count values) of the difference number counter (first counting means) expressed in hexadecimal and decimal notation, respectively, and "difference from initial value in decimal notation" is the difference between the initial value of the difference number counter (first counting means) (in this example, f59f in hexadecimal and 62879 in decimal) and the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) expressed in decimal.

"Second counting means" and the "Decimal notation" to the right are the values (count values) of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) expressed in hexadecimal and decimal notation, respectively, and "difference from initial value in decimal notation" is the difference between the initial value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) (in this example, f59f in hexadecimal and 62879 in decimal) and the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) expressed in decimal notation.

"Player credit" is a number indicating the number of medals (play value) electronically stored in the slot machine 100; in this example, 50 medals are credited at the start of play.

<Example of counting/(1) Power OFF → (2) Power ON>
The "(2) Power ON (setting change)" state shown in FIG. 169 (2) is the "Power OFF" state shown in FIG. In this state, the power is turned on and settings have been changed.

In this state, the section and presentation state are set to the non-advantageous section (first section) and normal state, respectively, as the initial settings when the power is turned on, and the values of the difference number counter (first counting means) and virtual difference number counter (second counting means) are set to their initial values (in this example, f59f in hexadecimal, 62879 in decimal) as the initial settings when the power is turned on.

In this example, the initial value of the first counting means (in this example, the difference number counter) is a value greater than 0 (in this example, 62879 in decimal), so even if the value of the first counting means falls below the initial value due to the player's playing situation, the value can be counted without taking the negative into account, reducing the control burden.

In this example, the initial values of the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) are set to the same numerical value, but they may be different numerical values. In this case, the initial value of one counter may be greater than the initial value of the other counter, or may be smaller. For example, the initial value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) may be 32879 in decimal. Also, the initial values of the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) may be 0 or a value less than 0.

In addition, the trigger for setting (resetting) the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) to their initial values is not limited to when the power is turned on, but may be one, several, or all of the following: when the end condition of the advantageous period (second period) is met, when the slot machine is reset, when a setting is changed, when the RAM is cleared, or when an error occurs. In addition, the trigger for setting one counter to its initial value and the trigger for setting the other counter to its initial value may be the same or different.

<Counting example / (2) Power ON → (3) Transition to favorable zone>
The state of “(3) Transition to favorable zone” shown in FIG. 169 (3) is a state in which a three-coin bet game is played in the normal state of the non-favorable zone (first zone), and a miss (amount of payout 0) is won in the stopping order LCR.

In this state, the game has a bet of 3 and a payout of 0, so the difference in coins is -3 (=0-3) and the credits are subtracted from 50 to 47 (=50-3). However, the difference in coins counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference in coins counter (second counting means) do not count (update) in the non-advantageous zone (first zone), so their respective values are maintained at their initial values (in this example, f59f in hexadecimal, 62879 in decimal).

In addition, in this game, the conditions for transitioning to the advantageous zone (second zone) are met (in this example, the transition lottery was won), so from the next game, the game will transition to the normal state of the advantageous zone (second zone).

<Example of counting/(3) Advantageous section transition → (4) L first stop>
The state of "(4) L first stop" shown in FIG. 169 (4) is when a three-coin bet game is played in the normal state of the advantageous section (second section) after the transition, and the player loses in the stop order LCR. The number of payouts is 0).

In the game in the same state, the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 0, so the difference in the number of coins in the game is -3 (=0-3), and the credits are subtracted from 47 to 44 (=47-3). At the same time, as explained using FIG. 168(a)(1), when the first operation (in this example, the L first stop operation) is performed in the advantageous section (second section), counts (updates) both the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means), so each value is the initial value (in this example, in hexadecimal). f59f (62879 in decimal) is updated to f59c in hexadecimal (62876 (=62879-3) in decimal).

<Counting Example / (4) L First Stop → (5) L First Stop>
The state of “(5) L first stop” shown in Figure 169 (5) is a state in which a three-coin bet game is played in the normal state of the advantageous zone (second zone), and a replay (re-play role) is won in the stop order LCR.

In this state, the game has a bet of 3 and a payout of 0, but a replay (replay role) is won, and the difference in coins in this game is 0 (= number won 3 - number bet 3), so the credits are maintained at 44, and the values of both the difference coins counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference coins counter (second counting means) are maintained at f59c in hexadecimal and 62876 in decimal.

<Counting Example / (5) L First Stop → (6) L First Stop>
The state of “(6) L first stop” shown in Figure 169 (6) is a state in which a three-coin bet game is played in the normal state of the advantageous zone (second zone), and a common bell (payout amount 15) is won in the stop order LCR.

In the game in the same state, the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 15, so the difference in the number of coins in the game is 12 (=15-3), and the credits are added from 44 to 56 (=44+12). , as explained using FIG. 168(a)(1), when the first operation (in this example, the L first stop operation) is performed in the advantageous section (second section), the difference Since both the sheet number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference sheet number counter (second counting means) are counted (updated), each value is calculated from f59c in hexadecimal and 62876 in decimal. f5ab is updated to 62891 (=62879+12) in decimal.

<Counting example / (6) L first stop → (7) Other than L first stop>
The state of “(7) First stop other than L” shown in FIG. 169 (7) is a state in which a three-coin bet game is played in the normal state of the advantageous zone (second zone), and a miss (amount of payout 0) is won in the stopping order CRL.

In the game in this state, the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 0, so the difference in the number of coins in that game is -3 (=0-3), and the credits are subtracted from 56 to 53 (=56-3). Also, as explained using FIG. 168(a)(2), in the first game (in this example, a 3-coin bet game in the advantageous zone (second zone) and a non-navigation notification game), if a second operation (in this example, the first stop operation other than L) is performed, the difference in the number of coins is calculated. Since the difference number counter (first counting means) is counted (updated) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is not counted (updated), the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is updated from f59c in hexadecimal and 62876 in decimal to f5a8 in hexadecimal and 62888 (=62891-3) in decimal, but the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is maintained at f5ab in hexadecimal and 62891 in decimal.

In the subsequent game period from "(7) First stop other than L" to "(12) First stop other than L", the first game (in this example, the 3-piece bet game in the advantageous section (second section) - When the second operation (in this example, the first stop operation other than L) is performed in the non-navigation notification game), the value of the first counting means (in this example, the difference number counter) is updated, and the second operation is performed. Since the value of the second counting means (in this example, the virtual difference number counter) is not updated, the second counting means can hold a value that does not reflect that the second operation was performed in the first game, and The value obtained by the first operation can be grasped by the second counting means, and a fair gaming machine can be provided.

In addition, in the subsequent game period from "(7) First stop other than L" to "(12) First stop other than L", the first game (in this example, the three pieces in the advantageous section (second section) When a non-recommended operation in the first game (in this example, the first stop operation other than L) is performed in the betting game/non-navigation notification game), the first counting means (in this example, the difference number counter) The value is updated, and the value of the second counting means (in this example, the virtual difference number counter) is not updated, so the second counting means uses a value that does not reflect that a non-recommended operation was performed in the first game. The value of the recommended operation can be grasped by the second counting means, and a fair gaming machine can be provided.

In addition, in the slot machine 100, if a second operation (in this example, the first stop operation other than L) is performed in the first game (in this example, a three-coin bet game/non-navigation notification game in the advantageous zone (second zone)), the AT lottery (first lottery) is not executed, and therefore the AT lottery is not executed in the subsequent game period from "(7) First stop other than L" to "(12) First stop other than L".

According to this example, the first lottery is not executed with the second operation (in this example, the first stop operation other than L), and the player is at a disadvantage. In this example, it is possible to prompt the player to perform the L first stop operation and have the player execute the first operation and play the game.

<Counting example / (7) First stop except L → (8) First stop except L>
The state of “(8) First stop other than L” shown in Figure 169 (8) is a state in which a three-coin bet game is played in the normal state of the advantageous zone (second zone) and a miss (amount of payout 0) is won in the stopping order RCL.

In the game in the same state, the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 0, so the difference in the number of coins in the game is -3 (=0-3), and the credits are subtracted from 53 to 50 (=53-3). At the same time, as explained using FIG. 168(a)(2), in the first game (in this example, the 3-piece bet game/non-navigation notification game in the advantageous section (second section)), When the second operation (in this example, the first stop operation other than L) is performed, the difference number counter (first counting means) is counted (updated), and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is counted (updated). means) does not count (update), the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is f5a8 in hexadecimal and 62888 in decimal, f5a5 in hexadecimal and 62885 in decimal (=62888-3 ), but the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is maintained at f5ab in hexadecimal and 62891 in decimal.

<Counting example / (8) First stop on L → (9), (10) First stop on anything other than L>
The states of "(9) L first stop" and "(10) L first stop" shown in Figure 169 (9) and (10) are states in which a three-coin bet game is played in the normal state of the advantageous zone (second zone), and a replay (re-play role) is won with the stop order CRL and the stop order RCL.

In the game in the same state, the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 0, but the replay (replay combination) is won and the difference in the number of coins in the game is 0 (= number of wins 3 - number of bets 3). , the credit is maintained at 50, the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is maintained at f5a5 in hexadecimal, 62885 in decimal, and the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is maintained as f5ab in hexadecimal and 62891 in decimal.

<Counting Example / (10) First stop except L → (11) First stop except L>
The state of “(11) First stop other than L” shown in Figure 169 (11) is a state in which a three-coin bet game is played in the normal state of the advantageous zone (second zone), and a common bell (payout number 15) is won in the stopping order CRL.

In the game in this state, the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 15, so the difference in the number of coins in that game is 12 (=15-3), and the credits are added from 50 to 62 (=50+12). Also, as explained using FIG. 168(a)(2), if a second operation (in this example, the first stop operation other than L) is performed in the first game (in this example, a 3-coin bet game in the advantageous zone (second zone) and a game with no navigation notification), the difference in the number of coins is Since the counter (first counting means) is counted (updated) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is not counted (updated), the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is updated from f5a5 in hexadecimal and 62885 in decimal to f5b1 in hexadecimal and 62897 in decimal (=62885+12), but the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is maintained at f5ab in hexadecimal and 62891 in decimal.

In addition, the first winning combination (in this example, the common bell) that will result in a larger number of payouts than the number of bets when the second operation (in this example, the first stop operation other than L) is performed, is in the normal state. Since the probability of winning is lower than that of losing, even if the second operation is continued, the virtual difference in the number of coins will be larger than the actual difference in the number of coins, and the player will not have an advantage, so it will be fair. It is possible to provide a game machine with a wide range of functions.

The first combination is not limited to a "common bell" that pays out 15 coins regardless of the stopping order, but may be, for example, a "biased bell" that pays out 1 coin on the first stop on the left and 15 coins on the first stop on any other side of the left.

<Counting Example / (11) First stop except L → (12) First stop except L>
The state of “(12) First stop other than L” shown in Figure 169 (12) is a state in which a three-coin bet game is played in the normal state of the advantageous zone (second zone), and a common bell (payout number 15) is won in the stopping order RCL.

In the game in this state, the bet amount is 3 and the payout amount is 15, so the difference in the number of coins in that game is 12 (=15-3), and the credits are added from 62 to 74 (=62+12). Also, as explained using FIG. 168(a)(2), if a second operation (in this example, the first stop operation other than L) is performed in the first game (in this example, a 3-coin bet game in the advantageous zone (second zone) and a game with no navigation notification), the difference in the number of coins is Since the counter (first counting means) is counted (updated) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is not counted (updated), the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is updated from f5b1 in hexadecimal and 62897 in decimal to f5bd in hexadecimal and 62909 in decimal (=62897+12), but the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is maintained at f5ab in hexadecimal and 62891 in decimal.

<Example of counting / (12) First stop other than L → (13) Betting number other than 3>
The state of “(13) Bet number other than 3” shown in FIG. 169 (13) is a state in which a two-coin bet game is played in the normal state of the advantageous zone (second zone), and a loss (amount of payout 0) is won in the stopping order LCR.

In the game in this state, the number of bets is 2 and the number of payouts is 0, so the difference in the number of coins in the game is -2 (=0-2), and the credits are subtracted from 74 to 72 (=74-2). As explained with reference to FIG. 168(a)(4), when a 2-coin bet game is played in the advantageous zone (second zone), regardless of the stopping order, the difference number counter (first counting means) is counted (updated), and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is not counted (updated). Therefore, the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is updated from f5bd in hexadecimal and 62909 in decimal to f5bb in hexadecimal and 62907 in decimal (=62909-2), but the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is maintained at f5ab in hexadecimal and 62891 in decimal.

In the subsequent game periods from "(13) Bet number other than 3" to (23) 2 BETBB consumption", if a first bet number game (in this example, a 2-coin bet game) is played, the value of the first counting means (in this example, the difference number counter) is updated, but the value of the second counting means (in this example, the virtual difference number counter) is not updated, so that the second counting means can hold a value that does not reflect that the second operation was performed in the first game, and the second counting means can grasp the value of the first operation, making it possible to provide a fair gaming machine.

In addition, in the slot machine 100, if a two-coin bet game is played in the advantageous zone (second zone), the AT lottery (first lottery) is not executed, and therefore the AT lottery is not executed during the subsequent game period from "(13) Number of bets other than 3" to (23) 2 BETBB consumption."

According to this example, the first lottery is not executed in the first bet number game (in this example, a two-bet bet game), and the player is at a disadvantage. It is possible to encourage the player to play a game (in this example, a 3-coin bet game) and have them play the first game.

<Counting Example / (13) Betting Number Other Than 3 → (14) Betting Number Other Than 3>
The state of “(14) Bet number other than 3” shown in FIG. 169 (14) is a state in which a two-coin bet game is played in the normal state of the advantageous zone (second zone), and a loss (amount of payout 0) is won in the stopping order CRL.

In the game in this state, the number of bets is 2 and the number of payouts is 0, so the difference in the number of coins in the game is -2 (=0-2), and the credits are subtracted from 72 to 70 (=72-2). As explained with reference to FIG. 168(a)(4), when a 2-coin bet game is played in the advantageous zone (second zone), regardless of the stopping order, the difference number counter (first counting means) is counted (updated), and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is not counted (updated). Therefore, the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is updated from f5bb in hexadecimal and 62907 in decimal to f5b9 in hexadecimal and 62905 in decimal (=62907-2), but the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is maintained at f5ab in hexadecimal and 62891 in decimal.

<Counting Example / (14) Betting Number Other Than 3 → (15) Betting Number Other Than 3>
The state of “(15) Bet number other than 3” shown in FIG. 169 (15) is a state in which a two-coin bet game is played in the normal state of the advantageous zone (second zone), and a loss (amount of payout 0) is won in the stopping order RCL.

In the game in this state, the number of bets is 2 and the number of payouts is 0, so the difference in the number of coins in the game is -2 (=0-2), and the credits are subtracted from 70 to 68 (=70-2). As explained with reference to FIG. 168(a)(4), when a 2-coin bet game is played in the advantageous zone (second zone), regardless of the stopping order, the difference number counter (first counting means) is counted (updated), and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is not counted (updated). Therefore, the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is updated from f5b9 in hexadecimal and 62905 in decimal to f5b7 in hexadecimal and 62903 in decimal (=62905-2), but the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is maintained at f5ab in hexadecimal and 62891 in decimal.

<Counting Example / (15) Betting Number Other Than 3 → (16) Betting Number Other Than 3>
The “(16) bet number other than 3” shown in FIG. 169 (16) is a state in which a two-coin bet game is played in the normal state of the advantageous zone (second zone), and a replay (replay role) is won in the stopping order LCR.

In this state, the game has a bet of 2 and a payout of 0, but a replay (replay role) is won, and the difference in coins in this game is 0 (= number won 2 - number bet 2), so the credits are maintained at 68, the value of the difference in coins counter (first counting means) is maintained at f5b7 in hexadecimal and 62903 in decimal, and the value of the virtual difference in coins counter (second counting means) is maintained at f5ab in hexadecimal and 62891 in decimal.

<Example of counting/(16) Number of bets other than 3 → (17) Number of bets other than 3>
"(17) Number of bets other than 3" shown in FIG. 169 (17) is a 2-coin bet game performed in the normal state of the advantageous section (second section) and replayed (replayed combination) in the stopping order CRL. It is in a state where it has won a prize.

In this state, the game has a bet of 2 and a payout of 0, but a replay (replay role) is won, and the difference in coins in this game is 0 (= number won 2 - number bet 2), so the credits are maintained at 68, the value of the difference in coins counter (first counting means) is maintained at f5b7 in hexadecimal and 62903 in decimal, and the value of the virtual difference in coins counter (second counting means) is maintained at f5ab in hexadecimal and 62891 in decimal.

<Counting Example / (17) Betting Number Other Than 3 → (18) Betting Number Other Than 3>
The "(18) bet number other than 3" shown in Figure 169 (18) is a state in which a two-coin bet game is played in the normal state of the advantageous zone (second zone) and a replay (replay role) is won in the stopping order RCL.

In this state, the game has a bet of 2 and a payout of 0, but a replay (replay role) is won, and the difference in coins in this game is 0 (= number won 2 - number bet 2), so the credits are maintained at 68, the value of the difference in coins counter (first counting means) is maintained at f5b7 in hexadecimal and 62903 in decimal, and the value of the virtual difference in coins counter (second counting means) is maintained at f5ab in hexadecimal and 62891 in decimal.

<Counting Example / (18) Betting Number Other Than 3 → (19) Betting Number Other Than 3>
The state of “(19) Bet number other than 3” shown in Figure 169 (19) is a state in which a two-coin bet game is played in the normal state of the advantageous zone (second zone), and the common bell (payout number 15) is won in the stopping order LCR.

In the game in the same state, the number of bets is 2 and the number of payouts is 15, so the difference in the number of coins in the game is 13 (=15-2), and the credits are added from 68 to 81 (=68+13). , as explained using FIG. 168(a)(4), when a two-coin bet game is performed in an advantageous section (second section), the difference number counter (first Since the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) does not count (update), the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is f5b7, 10 in hexadecimal. It is updated from 62903 in hexadecimal to f5c4 in hexadecimal and 62916 (=62903+13) in decimal, but the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is maintained at f5ab in hexadecimal and 62891 in decimal. be done.

<Example of counting/(19) Number of bets other than 3 → (20) Number of bets other than 3>
The state of "(20) number of bets other than 3" shown in FIG. This is the state in which the player won a prize in number 15).

In the game in the same state, the number of bets is 2 and the number of payouts is 15, so the difference in the number of coins in the game is 13 (=15-2), and the credits are added from 81 to 94 (=81+13). , as explained using FIG. 168(a)(4), when a two-coin bet game is performed in an advantageous section (second section), the difference number counter (first Since the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) does not count (update), the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is f5c4,10 in hexadecimal. It is updated from 62916 in hexadecimal to f5d1 in hexadecimal and 62929 (=62916+13) in decimal, but the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is maintained at f5ab in hexadecimal and 62891 in decimal. be done.

<Counting Example / (20) Betting Number Other Than 3 → (21) Betting Number Other Than 3>
The state of “(21) Bet number other than 3” shown in Figure 169 (21) is a state in which a two-coin bet game is played in the normal state of the advantageous zone (second zone), and the common bell (payout number 15) is won in the stopping order RCL.

In the game in this state, the number of bets is 2 and the number of payouts is 15, so the difference in the number of coins in the game is 13 (=15-2), and the credits are added from 94 to 107 (=94+13). As explained with reference to FIG. 168(a)(4), when a game in which two coins are bet is played in the advantageous zone (second zone), regardless of the stopping order, the difference number counter (first counting means) is counted (updated), and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is not counted (updated). Therefore, the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is updated from f5d1 in hexadecimal and 62929 in decimal to f5de in hexadecimal and 62942 in decimal (=62929+13), but the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is maintained at f5ab in hexadecimal and 62891 in decimal.

<Counting Example / (21) Bet Number Other Than 3 → (22) 2BETBB Winning>
The state of "(22) 2 BETBB winning" shown in Figure 169 (22) is a state in which a two-coin bet game is played in the normal state of the advantageous zone (second zone), and 2 BETBB (payout amount 0) is won in the stopping order LCR.

In the game in the same state, the number of bets is 2 and the number of payouts is 0, so the difference in the number of coins in the game is -2 (=0-2), and the credits are subtracted from 107 to 105 (=107-2). In addition, as explained using FIG. 168(a)(4), if a two-coin bet game is performed in the advantageous section (second section), the difference number counter ( Since the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) does not count (update), the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is expressed in hexadecimal. f5de, 62942 in decimal is updated to f5dc in hexadecimal, 62940 (=62942-2) in decimal, but the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is f5ab, 10 in hexadecimal. It is maintained at 62891 in base.

<Example of Counting / (22) 2BETBB Winning → (23) 2BETBB Consumption>
The state of “(23) 2 BET BB consumed” shown in FIG. 169 (23) is a state in which a BB game is won in the normal state of the advantageous zone (second zone), a 2-coin bet game is played in the BB game, and a common bell (payout amount 15) is won in the stopping order LCR.

In the game in this state, the number of bets is 2 and the number of payouts is 15, so the difference in the number of coins in the game is 13 (=15-2), and the credits are added from 105 to 118 (=105+13). As explained with reference to FIG. 168(a)(4), when a 2-coin bet game is played in the favorable zone (second zone), regardless of the stopping order, the difference number counter (first counting means) is counted (updated), and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is not counted (updated). Therefore, the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is updated from f5dc in hexadecimal and 62940 in decimal to f5e9 in hexadecimal and 62953 in decimal (=62940+13), but the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is maintained at f5ab in hexadecimal and 62891 in decimal.

<Example of counting/(23) 2 BETBB consumption → (24) Chance (AT winning)>
The state of "(24) Chance (AT winning)" shown in FIG. In addition to winning the payout number 15), he also won the AT lottery.

In the game in this state, the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 15, so the difference in the number of coins in the game is 12 (=15-3), and the credits are added from 118 to 130 (=118+12). In addition, as explained using FIG. 168(a)(1), when the first operation (in this example, the L first stop operation) is performed in the advantageous zone (second zone), the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second Since both the actual number and the virtual number are counted (updated), the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is updated from f5e9 in hexadecimal and 62953 in decimal to f5f5 in hexadecimal and 62965 in decimal (=62953+12), and the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is updated from f5ab in hexadecimal and 62891 in decimal to f5b7 in hexadecimal and 62903 in decimal (=62891+12).

<Counting Example / (24) Chance Eye (AT Winning) → (25) AT>
The state of “(25) AT” shown in FIG. 169 (25) is a state in which a three-coin bet game is played in the AT state of the advantageous zone (second zone), and the push order bell (payout amount 15) is won in the stopping order CRL according to the operation navigation “center (1) → right (2) → left (3)”.

In the game in the same state, the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 15, so the difference in the number of coins in the game is 12 (=15-3), and the credits are added from 130 to 142 (=130 + 12). , the game is a 3-piece bet game/navigation notification game in an advantageous section (second section), and in the first game (3-piece bet game/non-navigation notification game in an advantageous section (second section)). Therefore, both the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) are counted (updated), and the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is 16. It is updated from f5f5 in hexadecimal and 62965 in decimal to f601 in hexadecimal and 62977 (=62965+12) in decimal, and the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is f5b7 in hexadecimal and 62977 in decimal. 62903 is updated to f5c3 in hexadecimal and 62915 (=62903+12) in decimal.

<Counting Example/(26) AT>
The state of “(26) AT” shown in FIG. 169 (26) is a state in which a three-coin bet game is played in the final game of the AT state in the advantageous zone (second zone), and the push order bell (payout amount 15) is won in the stopping order CRL following “center (1) → right (2) → left (3).”

In the game in the same state, the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 15, so the difference in the number of coins in the game is 12 (=15-3), and the credits are updated to 442 (=previous credit 430 + 12). In addition, the game is a 3-piece bet game/navigation notification game in an advantageous section (second section), and the first game (3-piece bet game/non-navigation notification game in an advantageous section (second section)) Therefore, both the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) are counted (updated), and the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is It is updated to f72d in hexadecimal and 63277 in decimal, and the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is updated to f6d7 in hexadecimal and 63191 in decimal.

<Counting Example / (26) AT → (27) Normal State>
The state of "(27) Normal State" shown in Figure 169 (27) is a state in which a three-coin bet game is played in the normal state transitioned from the AT state in the advantageous zone (second zone), and a common bell (payout amount 15) is won in the stopping order LCR.

In the game in the same state, the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 15, so the difference in the number of coins in the game is 12 (=15-3), and the credits are added from 312 to 324 (=312+12). , as explained using FIG. 168(a)(1), when the first operation (in this example, the L first stop operation) is performed in the advantageous section (second section), the difference Both the sheet number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference sheet number counter (second counting means) are counted (updated), and the value of the difference sheet number counter (first counting means) is f739, 10 in hexadecimal. The value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is updated to f6e3 in hexadecimal and 63203 (=63191+12) in decimal.

<Counting Example / (28) First Stop Other Than L>
The state of “(28) First stop other than L” shown in FIG. 169 (28) is a state in which a three-coin bet game is played in the normal state of the advantageous zone (second zone), and a miss (amount of payout 0) is won in the stopping order RCL.

In the game in the same state, the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 0, so the difference in the number of coins in the game is -3 (=0-3), and the credits are 68 (=previous credit 71-3). In addition to being subtracted, as explained using FIG. 168(a)(2), in the first game (in this example, the 3-piece bet game/non-navigation notification game in the advantageous section (second section)) , when the second operation (in this example, the first stop operation other than L) is performed, the difference number counter (first counting means) is counted (updated), and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is counted (updated). Since the counter (counting means) does not count (update), the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is updated to edcf in hexadecimal and 60879 in decimal, and the difference from the initial value is set to a predetermined value (in this example 2000 in decimal notation), but the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is maintained at f5ab in hexadecimal notation and 62891 in decimal notation.

In addition, in the same state, the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) (in this example, 60879 in decimal) is smaller than the initial value (in this example, 62879 in decimal) (the difference from the initial value is negative), and the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) (in this example, 62891 in decimal) is larger than the initial value (in this example, 62879 in decimal) (the difference from the initial value is positive).

In this example, one of the values of the first counting means (in this example, the difference number counter) and the second counting means (in this example, the virtual difference number counter) may be greater than the initial value and the other may be smaller than the initial value, so that the value of the first counting means and the value of the second counting means that are referenced (or not referenced) in the performance, lottery, etc. may not match, thereby improving playability.

<Example of counting/(28) Stops other than L → (29) L first stop>
The state of "(29) L first stop" shown in FIG. 169 (29) is when a three-coin bet game is played in the normal state of the advantageous section (second section) after the transition, and the player loses in the stop order LCR. The number of payouts is 0).

In the game in the same state, the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 0, so the difference in the number of coins in the game is -3 (=0-3), and the credits are subtracted from 47 to 44 (=47-3). At the same time, as explained using FIG. 168(a)(1), when the first operation (in this example, the L first stop operation) is performed in the advantageous section (second section), counts (updates) both the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means), and the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is expressed in hexadecimal. edcc is updated to 60876 (=60879-3) in decimal, and the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is updated to f5a8 in hexadecimal, 62888 (=62891-2) in decimal. .

As explained using FIG. 168(b), in the slot machine 100, the freeze lottery process (second lottery means) is configured to execute the freeze lottery (second lottery) by referring to the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) without referring to the value of the difference number counter (first counting means). Therefore, even if the player intentionally performs a second operation (in this example, the first stop operation other than L), it is not reflected in the value of the second counting means (in this example, the virtual difference number counter) and does not affect the second lottery (in this example, the freeze lottery), so a fair gaming machine can be provided. Also, since the second lottery means does not refer to the value of the first counting means (in this example, the difference number counter) that reflects the second operation intentionally performed by the player, it does not affect the second lottery (freeze lottery), so a fair gaming machine can be provided.

<Counting Example / (30) Betting Numbers Other Than 3>
The state of “(30) Bet number other than 3” shown in Figure 169 (30) is a state in which a two-coin bet game is played in the normal state of the advantageous zone (second zone), and the common bell (payout number 15) is won in the stopping order LCR.

In the game in this state, the bet amount is 2 and the payout amount is 15, so the difference in the number of coins in the game is 13 (=15-2), and the credits are added to 118 (=previous credits of 105+13). As explained with reference to FIG. 168(a)(4), when a 2-coin bet game is played in the advantageous zone (second zone), regardless of the stopping order, the difference number counter (first counting means) is counted (updated), and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is not counted (updated). Therefore, the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is updated to f5e9 in hexadecimal and 62953 in decimal, and the difference from the initial value has turned positive, but the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is maintained at f5ab in hexadecimal and 62891 in decimal.

In addition, in the normal state of the advantageous section (second section), if a two-coin bet game is performed and the common bell (number of payouts 15) continues to be won in the stopping order LCR, the difference number counter will be displayed as in this example. The difference from the initial value (first counting means) may turn positive.

<Example of counting/(30) Number of bets other than 3 → (31) Chance (AT winning)>
The state of "(31) Chance (AT winning)" shown in FIG. In addition to winning the payout number 15), he also won the AT lottery.

In the game in this state, the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 15, so the difference in the number of coins in the game is 12 (=15-3), and the credits are added from 118 to 130 (=118+12). In addition, as explained using FIG. 168(a)(1), when the first operation (in this example, the L first stop operation) is performed in the advantageous zone (second zone), the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second Since both the actual number and the virtual number are counted (updated), the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is updated from f5e9 in hexadecimal and 62953 in decimal to f5f5 in hexadecimal and 62965 in decimal (=62953+12), and the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is updated from f5ab in hexadecimal and 62891 in decimal to f5b7 in hexadecimal and 62903 in decimal (=62891+12).

<Counting Example / (31) Chance Eye (AT Winning) → (32) AT>
The state of “(32) AT” shown in FIG. 169 (32) is a state in which a three-coin bet game is played in the AT state in the advantageous zone (second zone), and the push order bell (payout amount 15) is won in the stopping order CRL according to the operation navigation “center (1) → right (2) → left (3)”.

In the game in the same state, the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 15, so the difference in the number of coins in the game is 12 (=15-3), and the credits are added from 130 to 142 (=130 + 12). , the game is a 3-piece bet game/navigation notification game in an advantageous section (second section), and in the first game (3-piece bet game/non-navigation notification game in an advantageous section (second section)). Therefore, both the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) are counted (updated), and the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is 16. It is updated from f5f5 in hexadecimal and 62965 in decimal to f601 in hexadecimal and 62977 (=62965+12) in decimal, and the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is f5b7 in hexadecimal and 62977 in decimal. 62903 is updated to f5c3 in hexadecimal and 62915 (=62903+12) in decimal.

<Example of counting/(32) AT) → (33) AT>
The state "(33) AT" shown in FIG. →Left (3)'' and won the push order bell (number of payouts 15) in the stop order LCR.

In the game in this state, the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 0, so the difference in the number of coins in the game is -3 (= 0-3), and the credits are subtracted from 142 to 139 (= 142-3). Also, since the game is a 3-coin bet game in the advantageous zone (second zone) with navigation notification, and is not the first game (3-coin bet game in the advantageous zone (second zone) with no navigation notification), as explained using FIG. 168(a)(3), even if the stop operation is performed without following the operation navigation, the difference in number counter (first counting means) is updated based on the actual difference in number of coins in the game (in this example, -3 (= actual payouts 0 - actual bets 3)), while the virtual difference in number counter (second counting means) is updated based on the virtual difference in number of coins in the game (in this example, 12 (= the prescribed payout number for winning combinations 15 - actual bets 3)) assuming that the stop operation was performed in accordance with the operation navigation.

As a specific example, the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is updated from f601 in hexadecimal and 62977 in decimal to f5fe in hexadecimal and 62974 in decimal (=62977-3), and the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is updated from f5c3 in hexadecimal and 62915 in decimal to f5cf in hexadecimal and 62927 in decimal (=62915+12).

<Example of counting/(34) AT>
The state of "(34) AT" shown in FIG. →Left (3)'', the winning order bell (number of payouts: 15) was won in the stop order CRL.

In the game in this state, the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 15, so the difference in the number of coins in that game is 12 (=15-3), and the credits are added to 4043 (=previous credits of 4031 + 12). Also, since the game in question is a 3-coin bet game in the advantageous zone (second zone) with navigation notification and not the first game (a 3-coin bet game in the advantageous zone (second zone) with no navigation notification), both the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) are counted (updated), and the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is updated to fd6e in hexadecimal and 64878 in decimal, and the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is updated to fd3f in hexadecimal and 64831 in decimal.

<Counting Example/(34)AT→(35)AT>
The state of "(35) AT" shown in Figure 169 (35) is a state in which a three-coin bet game is played in the AT state of the advantageous zone (second zone), and the push order bell (payout amount 15) is won in the stopping order RCL according to the operation navigation "Right (1) → Center (2) → Left (3)".

In the game in this state, the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 15, so the difference in the number of coins in the game is 12 (=15-3), and the credits are added from 4043 to 4045 (=4043+12). In addition, since the game is a three-coin bet game/navigation notification game in the advantageous zone (second zone) and not the first game (a three-coin bet game/non-navigation notification game in the advantageous zone (second zone), the difference in the number of coins counter (first counting means) and the virtual Both the difference number counter (second counting means) are counted (updated), and the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is updated from fd6e in hexadecimal and 64878 in decimal to fd3f in hexadecimal and 64890 in decimal (=64878+12), and the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is updated from fd3f in hexadecimal and 64831 in decimal to fd4b in hexadecimal and 64843 in decimal (=64831+12).

Further, as explained using FIG. 168(b), the slot machine 100 uses a difference number counter (first counting means) in the ED transition process (first process) of the advantageous area (second area). When the value of this difference counter (first counting means) reaches a certain value (in this example, 2000 in decimal and fd6f in hexadecimal), the condition for transition to the ED state is satisfied. It is determined that the state is shifted to the ED state in the advantageous section (second section).

In this example, the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is updated to fd3f in hexadecimal and 64890 (=64878+12) in decimal, and the difference from the initial value becomes 2011 in decimal, reaching 2000. As a result, the state shifts to ED.

<Counting Example / (35) AT → (36) ED>
The state of "(36) ED" shown in Figure 169 (36) is a state in which a three-coin bet game is played in the ED state transitioned from the AT state in the advantageous zone (second zone), and the push order bell (payout amount 15) is won in the stop order LCR according to the operation navigation "Left (1) → Center (2) → Right (3)".

In the game in the same state, the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 15, so the difference in the number of coins in the game is 12 (=15-3), and the credits are added from 4055 to 4067 (=4055+12). , as explained using FIG. 168(a)(5), when a 3 bet game (3BET game) is performed in the ED state, the difference number counter (first counting means) is counted (updated). ), and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) does not count (update), so the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is from fd7a in hexadecimal and 64890 in decimal, to hexadecimal. is updated to fd86 in decimal notation and 64902 (=64890+12), but the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is maintained at fd4b in hexadecimal notation and 64843 in decimal notation.

<Example of counting/(37) ED, (38) ED>
The states "(37) ED" and "(38) ED" shown in FIG. 169 (37) and FIG. , the player won the push order bell (number of payouts 15) in the stop order CRL according to the operation navigation "Middle (1) → Right (2) → Left (3)".

In the game in the same state, the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 15, so the difference in the number of coins in the game is 12 (=15-3), the credits are updated from 4427 to 4439, and the number of credits shown in FIG. 168 ( a) As explained using (5), when a 3 bet game (3BET game) is performed in the ED state, the difference number counter (first counting means) is counted (updated) and the virtual Since the difference number counter (second counting means) does not count (update), the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is updated from feee to fefa in hexadecimal and from 65262 to 65274 in decimal. However, the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is maintained at fd4b in hexadecimal and 64843 in decimal.

<Example of counting/(38) ED → (39) ED>
The state of "(39) ED" shown in FIG. →Left (3)'', the winning order bell (number of payouts: 15) was won in the stop order CRL.

In the game in the same state, the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 15, so the difference in the number of coins in the game is 12 (=15-3), and the credits are added from 4439 to 4461 (=4439+12). , as explained using FIG. 168(a)(5), when a 3 bet game (3BET game) is performed in the ED state, the difference number counter (first counting means) is counted (updated). ), and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) does not count (update), so the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is ff06 in hexadecimal and 65286 (=65274+12) in decimal. However, the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is maintained at fd4b in hexadecimal and 64843 in decimal.

Furthermore, as explained using FIG. 168(b), in the slot machine 100, the difference number counter (first counting means) is used in the reset determination process (second process) for the advantageous area (second area). When the value of this difference number counter (first counting means) reaches the first value (in this example, 65279 in decimal notation), the condition for ending the advantageous section (second section) is satisfied. It is determined that this is the case, and the advantageous section (second section) is shifted to the non-advantageous section (first section).

In this example, the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is updated to ff06 in hexadecimal and 65286 (=65274+12) in decimal, and the difference from the initial value is 2407. Since it has reached 2400, the state transitions from the ED state of the favorable zone (second zone) to the normal state of the non-favorable zone (first zone). Note that if it is determined whether the upper byte has become ff and it is determined that the upper byte is ff, the state transitions from the ED state of the favorable zone (second zone) to the normal state of the non-favorable zone (first zone), and in this case, the capacity of the determination process associated with the transition can be reduced.

According to this example, by holding the number of gains in the second section (in this example, advantageous section) in the first counting means and the second counting means, the end condition of the second section is set to 2. This can be grasped by two counting means, and a fair gaming machine can be provided.

In addition, the first value (in this example, 65279 in decimal) is the initial value (in this example, 62879 in decimal) plus the first absolute value (in this example, 2400 in decimal), and the value obtained by subtracting the first absolute value from the initial value is greater than 0. Therefore, even if the number of coins won exceeds the value obtained by subtracting the first absolute value from the initial value due to the player's playing state, there is still room for the player to make up for lost money.

<Counting Example / (39) ED → (40) Unfavorable Zone>
The state of "(40) Non-favorable zone" shown in Figure 169 (40) is a state in which a favorable zone (second zone) has been transitioned to a non-favorable zone (first zone).

In the same state, the section and presentation state are set to the non-advantageous section (first section) and the normal state, respectively, as when the power is turned on, and the differential sheet number counter (first counting means) and virtual differential sheet number counter ( The values of the second counting means) are initialized as initial settings at the time of transition from the advantageous section (second section) to the non-advantageous section (first section). (62879 in decimal).

<Example of counting / (40) Non-favorable zone → (41) Advantageous zone transition>
The state of "(41) Transition to favorable zone" shown in Figure 169 (41) is a state in which a three-coin bet game is played in the normal state of the non-favorable zone (first zone), and a miss (amount of payout 0) is won in the stopping order LCR.

In the game in the same state, the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 0, so the difference in the number of coins in the game is -3 (=0-3), and the credits are subtracted from 4461 to 4458 (=4461-3). However, since the difference number counter (first counting means) and virtual difference number counter (second counting means) do not count (update) in the non-advantageous interval (first interval), their respective values are , is maintained at the initial value (in this example, f59f in hexadecimal and 62879 in decimal).

In addition, in this game, since the conditions for transition to the advantageous section (second section) were met (in this example, the transfer lottery was won), from the next game, the transfer condition to the advantageous section (second section) will be changed to the normal period of the advantageous section (second section). transition to state.

<Example of Counting / (41) Transition to Favorable Zone → (42) First L Stop>
The state of "(42) L first stop" shown in Figure 169 (42) is a state in which a three-coin bet game is played in the normal state of the advantageous zone (second zone) after the transition, and a miss (amount of payout 0) is won in the stop order LCR.

In the game in the same state, the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 0, so the difference in the number of coins in the game is -3 (=0-3), and the credits are subtracted from 4458 to 4455 (=4458-3). At the same time, as explained using FIG. 168(a)(1), when the first operation (in this example, the L first stop operation) is performed in the advantageous section (second section), counts (updates) both the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means), so each value is the initial value (in this example, in hexadecimal). f59f (62879 in decimal) is updated to f59c in hexadecimal (62876 (=62879-3) in decimal).

<Counting Example / (43) L First Stop>
The state of "(43) L first stop" shown in Figure 169 (43) is a state in which a three-coin bet game is played in the normal state of the advantageous zone (second zone), and the stop order LCR results in a miss (amount of payout 0).

In the game in this state, the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 0, so the difference in the number of coins in that game is -3 (= 0-3), and the credits are subtracted to 2458 (= previous credits 2461-3). As explained using FIG. 168(a)(1), when the first operation is performed in the advantageous zone (second zone), both the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) are counted (updated), and the respective values are updated from the previous values to f59c in hexadecimal and 62876 (= 62879-3) in decimal, and the difference from the initial value in both cases exceeds a predetermined value (in this example, 2000 in decimal).

As explained using FIG. 168(b), the slot machine 100 is configured to execute a freeze lottery (second lottery) by referring to the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means), and in this example, executes (the second lottery) when the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) exceeds a predetermined value (in this example, 2000 in decimal).

In this example, even if the player intentionally performs the second operation (in this example, the first stop operation other than L), it is not reflected in the value of the second counting means (in this example, the virtual difference number counter) and does not affect the second lottery (in this example, the freeze lottery), so a fair gaming machine can be provided.

In addition, in this example, the winning probability of the freeze lottery in the state of "(28) First stop other than L" shown in FIG. 169 (28) and the advantage after winning the freeze effect are higher than those shown in FIG. 169 (43). It is configured such that the probability of winning the freeze lottery in the state of "(43) L first stop" and the advantage after winning the freeze effect are high.

That is, in this example, the value (in this example, the difference from the initial value) regarding the second counting means (in this example, the virtual difference number counter) is the second value (in this example, 12 in decimal). The second lottery (in this example, the freeze lottery) in which the value related to the second counting means is the third value (in this example, -2000 in decimal) is more likely to be played than the second lottery (in this example, the freeze lottery). (for example, it is easier to win the second lottery, or the gaming value (size of AT) is larger when winning the second lottery), and the third value is more advantageous than the second value. small.

According to this example, the worse the playing situation of the player, excluding the intentional second operation, the more advantageous the second lottery is for the player, so that the player's motivation to play can be increased even if the player's playing situation is poor.

In addition, since the value (in this example, the difference from the initial value) of the second counting means (in this example, the virtual difference number counter) may become a third value (in this example, -2000 in decimal) and then a second value (in this example, 12 in decimal), a second lottery can be executed depending on the playing status of the player, and a fair gaming machine can be provided.

<Example of counting/(44) AT>
The state "(44) AT" shown in FIG. →Left (3)'', the winning order bell (number of payouts: 15) was won in the stop order CRL.

In the game in the same state, the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 15, so the difference in the number of coins in the game is 12 (=15-3), and the credits are added to 6638 (=previous credit 6626 + 12) In addition, the game is a 3-piece bet game/navigation notification game in an advantageous section (second section), and the first game (3-piece bet game/non-navigation notification game in an advantageous section (second section)) Therefore, both the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) are counted (updated), and the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is It is updated to fe9b in hexadecimal and 65179 in decimal, and the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is updated to ff13 in hexadecimal and 65299 in decimal.

In this example, the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is updated to ff13 in hexadecimal and 65299 in decimal, and the difference from the initial value is 2420 in decimal, reaching 2400. However, as explained using FIG. 168(b), in the slot machine 100, there are cases (first case) where the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) reaches the first value (e.g., 65279) before the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) reaches the first value. In this first case, the advantageous period (second period) does not end, so when the value of the second counting means that is not updated by the second operation reaches the first value, the second period can end, and a fair gaming machine that takes the second operation into account can be provided.

Although not shown in the figures, in the slot machine 100, there are cases (second case) when the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) reaches a first value (e.g., 2400) and the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) reaches the first value. In this second case, the advantageous period (second period) ends, and both the first counting means and the second counting means reach the first value, so it is possible to know that the second period has ended without performing the second operation.

<About the initial value of the counter to reduce the load of arrival determination processing>
In the examples shown in FIGS. 168 and 169, the advantageous section is ended by updating the difference number counter and determining that the value has reached a predetermined value. In this configuration, depending on the bit pattern when a predetermined value is reached, the load of the determination process can be reduced in some cases. Therefore, by determining a predetermined value that will result in such a bit pattern, and then determining the initial value by calculating backwards from the amount of change required to reach this value, the load on the processing for determining the end of an advantageous section is reduced. be able to. Such an example will be explained below.

In the first example, the initial value is set to "0xf59fh (62879)" when the advantageous period ends when the difference number counter is incremented by 2401 or more (the advantageous period continues until 2400 is incremented). In this example, the specified value is "0xff00h (65280)", and the upper two digits (8 bits) of the four hexadecimal digits are "ff". The upper two digits of the four hexadecimal digits remain "ff" until 255 is further added to this value to become "0xffffh (65535)". In other words, when the upper two digits are "ff", the amount of change from the initial value is within the range of 2401 to 2656. Since the game does not update beyond this range at once, it is possible to determine whether the specified value has been reached by determining whether the upper two digits are "ff".

In the second example, the initial value is set to "0xe69fh (59039)" when the advantageous section ends when the difference counter increases by 2401 or more (the advantageous section continues until 2400 is added). It is. In this example, the predetermined value is "0xf000h (61440)", and the high-order digit (4 bits) of the 4 hexadecimal digits is "f". Until 4095 is further added to this value to become "0xffffh (65535)", the upper digit of the four hexadecimal digits remains "f". That is, when the first digit is "f", the amount of change from the initial value is within the range of 2401 to 6496. Since updates exceeding this range are not performed at once in a game, it is possible to determine whether a predetermined value has been reached by determining whether the first digit is "f".

In the third example, the initial value is set to "0x769fh (30367)" when the advantageous period ends when the difference number counter is incremented by 2401 or more (the advantageous period continues until 2400 is incremented). In this example, the specified value is "0x8000h (32768)" and the most significant bit is "1". The most significant bit remains "1" until 32767 is further incremented from this value to become "0xffffh (65535)". In other words, when the most significant bit is "1", the amount of change from the initial value is within the range of 2401 to 35168. Since updates that exceed this range at once are not made during play, it is possible to determine whether the specified value has been reached by determining whether the most significant bit is "1".

In the fourth example, the initial value is set to "0x0a60h (2656)" when the advantageous section ends when the difference number counter is decremented by 2401 or more (the advantageous section continues until 2400 is subtracted). It is. In this example, the predetermined value is "0x00ffh (255)", and the upper two digits (8 bits) of the four hexadecimal digits are "00". The upper two digits of the four hexadecimal digits remain "00" until 255 is further subtracted from this value to become "0x0000h(0)". That is, when the upper two digits are "00", the amount of change from the initial value is within the range of 2401 to 2656. Since updates exceeding this range are not performed at once in a game, it is possible to determine whether a predetermined value has been reached by determining whether the upper two digits are "00".

In the above example, we have described a case where all of the upper digits up to a specific digit have the same bit pattern, but for example, in the first example, the predetermined value may be "0xee00h (60928)" to determine whether the upper two digits are "ee" or the upper seven bits are "1110111". In this configuration, if the advantageous period ends when the difference number counter is incremented by 2401 or more, the initial value should be set to "0xe49f00h (58527)".

As in the four examples above, by determining a predetermined value that allows only the upper few digits of the corresponding bit pattern to be considered for judgment, and then calculating the amount of change in the difference number counter from there. , the initial value can be derived. Note that the above bit pattern is carried up (or carried down) when a predetermined value is reached, and the same value (0 or 1) continues from the lower digit, and the value of a specific digit is reversed. state. For example, in the first example "0xff00h (65280)", the 8th digit (8th bit) from the top is 1, and the lower digits are all 0, and these values are inverted. It has become. In the second example, "0xf000h (61440)", the fourth digit (4th bit) from the top is 1, and the lower digits are all 0, and these values are inverted. There is. In the third example, "0x8000h (32768)", the first digit (1st bit) from the top is 1, and the lower digits are all 0, so these values are inverted. There is. In the fourth example, "0x00ffh (255)", the 8th digit (8th bit) from the top is 0, and all the lower digits are 1, so these values are inverted. There is.

With the above configuration, it is sufficient to handle only the upper digits including a specific digit in the program, and the register capacity for reading this can also be reduced. That is, it is possible to determine whether a predetermined value has been reached using only the upper digits including a specific digit, and the processing load and capacity load can be reduced.

Further, in the above example, the above determination process can be performed even if the difference number counter changes within a certain range after reaching a predetermined value. Therefore, after reaching a predetermined value, it becomes possible to play the game a certain number of times or perform some kind of performance.

Furthermore, in the above example, regarding the value range of the difference number counter, the first range in the direction of the predetermined value with the initial value as Sakai is the opposite of the direction of the predetermined value with the initial value as Sakai. It is narrower than the second range of directions. For example, in the first example, the initial value is "0xf59fh (62879)" and the first range is 62879 to 65535, while the second range is 0 to 62879, and the first range is 62879 to 65535. This range is narrower than the second range. Depending on the content of the game, the difference number counter may be updated in a direction opposite to the predetermined value, but even in such a case, there is room for the difference number counter to recover, and the interest of the game can be improved.

As described above, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, a pachinko machine, an enclosed gaming machine, or a medalless slot machine) is a gaming machine equipped with a first counting means (e.g., a difference number counter) and a second counting means (e.g., a virtual difference number counter), and has a first section (e.g., a non-advantageous section) in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop operation means (e.g., stop buttons 137-139) is not notified, and a second section (e.g., an advantageous section) in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop operation means can be notified, and when a transition condition is met in the first section (e.g., when a transition lottery to a favorable section is executed based on an internally won role and this lottery is won), the second section and when a termination condition is met in the second section (for example, when a predetermined net increase in number of medals (for example, 2,400 medals) is exceeded), the second section is terminated and a transition to the first section is possible; the first counting means is a means capable of counting an acquired difference obtained by subtracting the amount of game value used in the game (for example, the number of medals inserted) from the amount of game value awarded as a result of the game (for example, the number of medals paid out) in the second section; when the value of the first counting means reaches a first value (for example, 65,279), the termination condition is met, and when the value of the first counting means is updated, the value of the second counting means may also be updated.

In the gaming machine according to this embodiment, the winning difference in the second section (e.g., advantageous section) is stored in the first counting means and the second counting means, so that the end condition of the second section can be grasped by the two counting means, and a fair gaming machine can be provided.

In addition, when the first operation (for example, L first stop operation) is performed in the first game (for example, 3-coin bet game/non-navigation notification game in the advantageous section (second section)), the When the value of the first counting means is updated, the value of the second counting means is updated, and a second operation (for example, a first stop operation other than L) is performed in the first game, the second counting means is updated. The value of one counting means may be updated and the value of the second counting means may not be updated.

With this configuration, the second counting means can hold a value that does not reflect that the second operation has been performed in the first game, and the second counting means can grasp the value when the first operation has been performed, making it possible to provide a fair gaming machine.

The first operation may be a recommended operation in the first game, and the second operation may be a non-recommended operation in the first game.

With this configuration, the second counting means can hold a value that does not reflect that a non-recommended operation has been performed in the first game, and the second counting means can grasp the value that represents when a recommended operation has been performed, making it possible to provide a fair gaming machine.

The game may also include a first lottery means (e.g., AT lottery processing) capable of executing a first lottery (e.g., AT lottery), the first lottery means being a means capable of executing the first lottery in the first game in which the first operation is performed, and the first lottery means being a means not executing the first lottery in the first game in which the second operation is performed.

With this configuration, the first lottery will not be executed if the second operation is performed, putting the player at a disadvantage, so the player can be prompted to perform the first operation and play the game by executing the first operation.

Further, the amount of update when the value of the second counting means is updated may be the same as the amount of update when the value of the first counting means is updated.

With such a configuration, the second counting means can hold the same value as the first counting means, and a fair gaming machine can be provided.

Furthermore, one of the values of the first counting means and the second counting means may be larger than the initial value, and the other may be smaller than the initial value.

With this configuration, the value of the first counting means and the value of the second counting means, which are referenced (or not referenced) in the presentation, lottery, etc., may not match, thereby improving gameplay.

In addition, the initial value of the first counting means (e.g., 62879) may be a value greater than 0.

With such a configuration, even if the value of the first counting means falls below the initial value depending on the player's playing situation, the value can be counted without considering the negative value, and the control burden can be reduced. .

The first value (e.g., 65279) may be the initial value (e.g., 62879) plus a first absolute value (e.g., 2400), and the value obtained by subtracting the first absolute value from the initial value may be a value greater than 0.

With this configuration, even if the number of coins won exceeds the initial value minus the first absolute value due to the player's playing status, there is still room for the player to make up for lost time.

In addition, a first state (e.g., an AT state) advantageous to the player may be reached during the second interval, and in the state prior to the first state, the value of the second counting means may also be updated when the value of the first counting means is updated, in the first state, the value of the second counting means may also be updated when the value of the first counting means is updated, and in the state after the first state ends, the value of the second counting means may also be updated when the value of the first counting means is updated.

With this configuration, the second counting means can hold the same value as the first counting means before, during and after a state advantageous to the player (e.g., an AT state), providing a fair gaming machine.

In addition, the first winning combination (e.g., a common bell) that results in a payout amount greater than the bet amount when the second operation is performed may have a lower probability of winning than a losing combination under normal conditions.

With this configuration, even if the second operation continues, the virtual difference in number of coins will be larger than the actual difference in number of coins, and the player will not gain an advantage, so a fair gaming machine can be provided.

Furthermore, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. A gaming machine comprising a second counting means (for example, a virtual difference number counter) and a second lottery means (for example, a freeze lottery process) capable of executing a second lottery (for example, a freeze lottery process). , a first section (for example, a non-advantageous section) in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) is not reported, and a second section in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop operation means can be notified. section (for example, an advantageous section), and if the transfer condition is satisfied in the first section (for example, when a lottery is executed to transfer to the advantageous section based on the internally won winning combination and this lottery is won) When the second section is reached, and the end condition is met in the second section (for example, when a predetermined net increase in number of sheets (for example, 2,400 sheets) is exceeded), the second section is ended and the end condition is satisfied in the second section. The first counting means calculates the game value used for the game from the amount of game value (for example, the value of the number of medals paid out) given as a result of the game in the second period. It is a means that can count the number of acquisition differences obtained by subtracting the amount of value (for example, the value of the number of inserted medals), and when the value of the first counting means reaches the first value (for example, 65279), When the end condition is satisfied and the value of the first counting means is updated, the value of the second counting means may also be updated, and the first game (for example, advantageous section (second When the first operation (for example, L first stop operation) is performed in the 3-coin bet game/non-navigation notification game) in the section), the value of the first counting means is updated, and the second counting means is updated. When the value of the means is updated and a second operation (for example, a first stop operation other than L) is performed in the first game, the value of the first counting means is updated and the second counting means is updated. The gaming machine is characterized in that the value of the means is not updated and the second lottery means is a means for executing the second lottery by referring to the value of the second counting means.

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, even if the player intentionally performs the second operation, it is not reflected in the value of the second counting means and does not affect the second lottery, so that a fair game machine can be achieved. can be provided.

Further, the second lottery means may be a means for executing the second lottery without referring to the value of the first counting means.

With this configuration, the value of the first counting means, which reflects the second operation intentionally performed by the player, is not referenced by the second lottery means, and therefore does not affect the second lottery, making it possible to provide a fair gaming machine.

Furthermore, the value related to the second counting means is a third value (in this example, the value related to the second counting means is a third value (in this example, The second lottery at decimal number -2000) may be more advantageous to the player, and the third value may be smaller than the second value.

With this configuration, the worse the playing situation of the player, excluding the intentional second operation, the more advantageous the second lottery will be for the player, so the player's motivation to play can be increased even if the player's playing situation is poor.

Further, the value related to the second counting means may become the second value after reaching the third value.

With this configuration, the second lottery can be conducted depending on the playing status of the player, providing a fair gaming machine.

Furthermore, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. The game machine is equipped with a second counting means (e.g., virtual difference number counter), and a first section (e.g., a non-advantageous section) and a second section (for example, an advantageous section) in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop operation means can be notified, and when the transition condition is satisfied in the first section (for example, an internal winning If you execute a lottery to move to an advantageous section based on the winning combination and win this lottery), move to the second section, and if the ending conditions are met in the second section (for example, a predetermined net increase number (For example, if the number of coins exceeds 2,400) The second section can be ended and the transition can be made to the first section, and the first counting means will be awarded as a result of the game in the second section. means capable of calculating the number of earned differences obtained by subtracting the amount of gaming value used in the game (for example, the value of the number of inserted medals) from the amount of gaming value played (for example, the value of the number of medals paid out); When the value of one counting means reaches a first value (for example, 65279), the termination condition is satisfied, and when the value of the first counting means is updated, the second counting means The value may also be updated, and when a first operation is performed in a first game, the value of the first counting means is updated, the value of the second counting means is updated, and the value of the second counting means is updated. When a second operation is performed in one game, the value of the first counting means is updated, the value of the second counting means is not updated, and the value of the first counting means is There is a case where the value of the second counting means reaches the first value before reaching the first value (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"), and in the first case, , the gaming machine is characterized in that the second section does not end.

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, the second section can be ended when the value of the second counting means that is not updated by the second operation reaches the first value, and the second section can be completed by taking the second operation into consideration. A fair gaming machine can be provided.

Further, when the value of the first counting means reaches the first value and the value of the second counting means reaches the first value (hereinafter referred to as "second case"). In the second case, the second section may end.

With this configuration, both the first counting means and the second counting means reach the first value, so it is possible to know that the second interval has ended without performing the second operation.

The first operation may be a recommended operation in the first game, and the second operation may be a non-recommended operation in the first game.

With such a configuration, the second counting means can hold a value that does not reflect that a non-recommended operation was performed in the first game, and the second counting means cannot grasp the value that a recommended operation has been performed. , can provide a fair gaming machine.

Further, the first lottery means (for example, AT lottery processing) capable of executing a first lottery (for example, AT lottery) is provided, and the first lottery means is configured to perform the first lottery on which the first operation is performed. The first lottery means is a means capable of executing the first lottery in one game, and the first lottery means is a means that does not execute the first lottery in the first game in which the second operation is performed. There may be.

With this configuration, the first lottery will not be executed if the second operation is performed, putting the player at a disadvantage, so the player can be prompted to perform the first operation and play the game by executing the first operation.

In addition, the amount of update when the value of the second counting means is updated may be the same as the amount of update when the value of the first counting means is updated.

With this configuration, the second counting means can hold the same value as the first counting means, providing a fair gaming machine.

Furthermore, one of the values of the first counting means and the second counting means may be larger than the initial value, and the other may be smaller than the initial value.

With this configuration, the value of the first counting means and the value of the second counting means, which are referenced (or not referenced) in the presentation, lottery, etc., may not match, thereby improving gameplay.

Further, the initial value (for example, 62879) of the first counting means may be a value larger than 0.

With this configuration, even if the value of the first counting means falls below the initial value due to the player's playing status, the value can be counted without taking the negative into account, reducing the control burden.

The first value (e.g., 65279) may be the initial value (e.g., 62879) plus a first absolute value (e.g., 2400), and the value obtained by subtracting the first absolute value from the initial value may be a value greater than 0.

With this configuration, even if the number of coins won exceeds the initial value minus the first absolute value due to the player's playing status, there is still room for the player to make up for lost time.

Furthermore, in the second period, the player may be in a first state (for example, an AT state) that is advantageous, and in the state before the first state, the value of the first counting means is When the value of the second counting means is updated, the value of the second counting means may also be updated, and in the first state, when the value of the first counting means is updated, the value of the second counting means The value of the second counting means may also be updated when the value of the first counting means is updated in a state after the first state ends. You can.

With such a configuration, the second counting means can hold the same value as the first counting means before and after a state advantageous to the player (for example, an AT state), and during the advantageous state. , it is possible to provide a fair gaming machine.

In addition, the first winning combination (e.g., a common bell) that results in a payout amount greater than the bet amount when the second operation is performed may have a lower probability of winning than a losing combination under normal conditions.

With this configuration, even if the second operation continues, the virtual difference in number of coins will be larger than the actual difference in number of coins, and the player will not gain an advantage, so a fair gaming machine can be provided.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first counting means (for example, main control unit 300, first counting means),
A determining means (for example, main control unit 300),
A game machine comprising:
It has a first section (for example, a non-advantageous section) in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is not reported, and a second section (for example, an advantageous section) in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch can be notified,
Shifting to the second section based on the transition condition being satisfied in the first section,
Shifting to the first section based on the judgment means determining that the termination condition is satisfied in the second section;
The first counting means calculates the number of winnings (for example, a difference number counter) using the result of subtracting the number of gaming values used in the game from the number of gaming values awarded as a result of the game in the second period. ) is an updateable means,
The determining means is means for determining that the end condition is satisfied when the amount of change from the initial value of the number of acquisition differences reaches a first value (for example, 2400 pieces),
The determination means is means for determining whether the termination condition is satisfied using values from the upper to a specific digit of the bit pattern corresponding to the number of acquired differences (for example, <to reduce the load of the arrival determination process). Regarding the initial value of the counter),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this game machine, the processing load and data capacity can be reduced compared to the case where all digits of the first counting means are determined.

Further, the game machine described above,
In the bit pattern corresponding to the total value of the initial value and the first value, all values of digits lower than the specific digit are inverted values of the specific digit (for example, < Regarding the initial value of the counter to reduce the load of arrival determination processing>),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first counting means is a means that can update the number of obtained differences even in a game after the amount of change in the number of obtained differences from the initial value reaches the first value (for example, if Regarding the initial value of the counter to reduce the load of the judgment process>),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this gaming machine, accurate counting is possible even after the amount of change in the number of earned differences from the initial value reaches the first value.

Further, the game machine described above,
The initial value is a value greater than 0 (for example, see <Regarding the initial value of the counter for reducing the load of the arrival determination process>),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this gaming machine, counting can continue even if the value of the first counting means falls below the initial value due to the player's playing status.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
the first counting means being a means capable of updating the acquired difference number within a predetermined range;
the predetermined range includes a first range, which is a sum of the initial value and the first value, and a second range, which is different from the first range, with the initial value as a boundary;
The first range is narrower than the second range (for example, see the description of <Regarding the initial value of the counter for reducing the load of the arrival determination process>).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this gaming machine, even if the winning difference falls within the second range depending on the player's gaming situation, the player can still have some room to recover.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A second counting means (e.g., a virtual difference number counter) may be provided, which may update a value when the first counting means updates the acquired difference number.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the number of earned differences in the second section can be held by the first counting means and the second counting means, and the end condition of the second section can be grasped by the two counting means, so that a fair gaming machine can be achieved. can be provided.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes a firing device that fires a ball into a predetermined gaming area, a prize opening that is configured to allow the ball fired from the firing device to enter, and a prize opening that allows the ball that enters the prize opening to be received. A game ball is provided with a detection means for detecting a ball, a payout means for paying out a ball when the detection means detects a ball, and a variable display device that variably displays a predetermined symbol (identification information), and a game ball enters the winning opening to win a prize. Taking this as an opportunity, it is also suitable for a pachinko machine or the like in which the variable display device changes the symbols and then stops displaying them to notify the transition of the gaming state.

The gaming machine according to the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed gaming machine. Here, an "enclosed gaming machine" is one that circulates and uses gaming balls enclosed within the gaming machine. The main control unit, the first sub-control unit, and the second sub-control unit may be configured on a single chip, and the main control unit and the first sub-control unit may be configured to enable two-way communication. Furthermore, while two-way communication is enabled between the main control unit and the first sub-control unit, communication from the first sub-control unit to the second sub-control unit may be one-way communication.

The actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention are merely a list of the most favorable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects of the present invention are not limited to those described in the embodiments of the present invention. Furthermore, by applying the content described in one of the multiple configurations described in the examples to other configurations, the range of play may be expanded.

<Production based on the difference number counter>
Next, the effect based on the difference number counter will be explained using FIGS. 170 to 175.

<Example 1 of production based on the difference number counter>
FIG. 170 is a graph showing an example of the change in the number of difference sheets in a certain game period, and FIGS. 171 and 172 are diagrams showing examples of various performances in a certain game period shown in FIG. 171.

<Example 1 of production based on the difference number counter/Power on>
The timing shown in FIG. 170(1) is the timing when the setting key provided inside the main body 101 is turned on, the power is turned on, and the settings are changed.

At the same timing, the section and presentation state are set to the non-advantageous section (first section) and the normal state, respectively, as the initial settings when the power is turned on, and the difference number counter (the first section) that counts the difference number of sheets (obtained difference number) is set. The value of the first counting means) and the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) described above are each set to an initial value CT1 (for example, 0) as an initial setting when the power is turned on.

Note that the initial values of the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) may be a value larger than 0 (positive value) or a value smaller than 0. (a negative value). In addition, the timing for setting the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) to their initial values (the trigger for resetting them) is not limited to when the power is turned on; one or more of the following: if the end conditions for the section (section) are met, if the slot machine is reset, if the settings are changed, if the RAM is cleared, or if an error occurs. , or all of them. Furthermore, the timing for setting the initial value for one counter and the timing for setting the initial value for the other counter may be the same or different.

<Example 1 of presentation based on difference number counter / game period PT1 (normal state)>
The game period PT1 in Figure 170 (1) to (2) is the normal state of the non-advantageous zone (first zone) or the normal state of the advantageous zone (second zone), in which the difference in the number of coins is decreasing.

In this example, during a certain game of normal play in a non-advantageous zone (first zone), the condition for transition to the advantageous zone (second zone) is met (in this example, the transition lottery is won), and the game transitions from the normal state of the non-advantageous zone (first zone) to the normal state of the advantageous zone (second zone).

The game period PT1 (normal state) is a game state in which the difference in number of coins (= number of coins paid out - number of coins bet) decreases, and in this example, the difference in number of coins decreases from difference in number of coins CT1 (0 in this example, the first point) to difference in number of coins CT2 (for example, -1500, the second point).

In addition, in the game period PT1 (normal state) in FIGS. 170 (1) and (2), all the game periods are such that the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is the initial value (in this example, 0. This is a state (second state) in which the difference in the number of sheets is smaller than the value (the value of the difference), and hereinafter, this state may be referred to as a "minus area of the difference in the number of sheets" or a "minus area".

On the other hand, for example, during the gaming period PT8, etc., the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is in a state (first Hereinafter, this state may be referred to as a "plus area of the difference in the number of sheets" or a "plus area".

During the gaming period PT1 (normal state), the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to perform a normal effect (such as displaying a normal background) corresponding to the current gaming state (normal state in this example). There are cases where a certain effect appears (is executed) with a probability of .

The certain effects include reel effects (freeze effects) performed using reels 110 to 112, display effects (for example, tutorial displays, etc.), specific character effects in which a specific character appears, effects that increase the appearance rate of existing effects, and effects that suggest a negative zone (second state) (demo effects, etc.).

These effects may appear (be executed) with a certain probability even in the positive difference in number of coins, but in this example, the probability of the effect appearing in the negative difference in number of coins is higher than the probability of the effect appearing in the positive difference in number of coins, and the effect is configured to appear (be executed) more easily in the negative difference in number of coins (second state) than in the positive difference in number (second state).

Note that a certain effect may be more likely to appear in the negative difference number area (second state) than in the positive difference number area (first state). For example, the probability that a certain effect will appear in the positive difference number area may be 0%, and the probability that a certain effect will appear in the negative difference number area may be greater than 0%. In other words, a certain effect may only appear in the negative difference number area.

Also, the probability that a certain effect will appear in the positive difference number range may be less than 100%, and the probability that a certain effect will appear in the negative difference number range may be 100%. In other words, a certain effect may always appear in the negative difference number range.

Figure 171 (a) shows an example of a tutorial display, which is one of the presentation techniques.

The tutorial display is one type of effect, and in this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display a princess character image and the appearance of a freeze effect, which will be described later, is suggested using FIG. 171(e). A display (in this example, a display of the character string "If you pull the freeze, it's super hot") is displayed.

FIG. 171(b) is a diagram showing an example of a specific character performance, which is one of certain performances.

The specific character effect is one type of effect, and in this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display the image of a vassal character and a display (in this example, the text string "Chance!") suggesting that a beneficial benefit will be given to the player (for example, the appearance of a freeze effect).

The appearance of these effects shown in Figures 171(a) and 171(b) allows the player to recognize the possibility of gaining a lot of game value in the AT state described below, which may increase the player's motivation to continue playing. Specifically, the player can expect to gain a point in one AT state from the point where the AT state starts in the negative (for example, CT2 in Figure 170) to the point where the AT state is completed and the advantageous zone is reset (for example, CT6 in Figure 170).

Further, in this example, during the gaming period PT1 (normal state), the conditions for transition to the AT state are satisfied (in this example, the AT lottery is won), so the normal state is transitioned to the AT state.

<Production example 1 based on the difference number counter/gaming period PT2 (AT state)>
The game period PT2 in FIGS. 170 (2) to (3) is an AT state, and the difference in the number of coins is increasing.

The game period PT2 (AT state) is a game state in which the difference in number of coins (= payout amount - bet amount) gradually increases, and in this example, the difference in number of coins increases from difference in number of coins CT2 (e.g., -1500. Second point) to difference in number of coins CT3 (e.g., -697 (= -1500 + 803). First point).

In addition, in the game period PT2 (AT state) of FIGS. 170 (2) and (3), all the game periods are such that the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is the initial value (in this example, 0. This is a state (second state) in which the number of sheets is decreased compared to the value of the difference in number of sheets, and is in the negative region of the difference in the number of sheets.

During the gaming period PT2 (AT state), in addition to using the liquid crystal display device 157 to execute an AT effect corresponding to the current gaming state (AT state in this example), a certain There are cases where a performance appears (is executed).

Figure 171 (c) shows an example of an AT effect.

The AT effect is an effect that suggests that the player is in the AT state, and in this example, includes a display of the number of gaming media won during AT play (in this example, the string "255 GET" is displayed), an image of the Banchou character, and a display that notifies the player that the player is in the AT state (in this example, the string "AT in progress" is displayed).

In addition, in this example, in the gaming period PT2 (AT state), since the end condition of the AT state is satisfied (in this example, a predetermined number of AT games have been played), the AT state shifts to the normal state, and In the final game of the game period PT2 (AT state), an AT end effect is executed using the liquid crystal display device 157.

Figure 171 (d) shows an example of an AT end presentation.

The AT end performance is a performance that suggests the end of the AT state, and in this example, the total number of game media acquired in the AT game is displayed (in this example, the character string "TOTAL 803 GET" is displayed), and the bancho's number is displayed. This is a performance that includes the display of character images.

<Production example 1 based on the difference number counter/gaming period PT3>
The game period PT3 in FIGS. 170(3) and 170(4) is a normal state in which the number of differential sheets is decreasing.

The game period PT3 (normal state) is a game state in which the difference in number of coins (= number of coins paid out - number of coins bet) decreases, and in this example, the difference in number of coins decreases from difference in number of coins CT3 (in this example, -300; first point) to difference in number of coins CT4 (for example, -1700; second point).

In addition, in the game period PT3 (normal state) in FIGS. 170 (3) and (4), all the game periods are such that the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is the initial value (in this example, 0. This is a state (second state) in which the number of sheets is decreased compared to the value of the difference in number of sheets, and is in the negative region of the difference in the number of sheets.

During the gaming period PT3 (normal state), the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to perform a normal effect (such as displaying a normal background) corresponding to the current gaming state (normal state in this example). There are cases where a certain effect appears (is executed) with a probability of .

Further, in this example, during the gaming period PT3 (normal state), the conditions for transition to the AT state are satisfied (in this example, the AT lottery is won), so the normal state is transitioned to the AT state.

<Production example 1 based on the difference number counter/gaming period PT4 (AT state)>
The game period PT4 in FIGS. 170 (4) to (6) is an AT state, and a state in which the difference in the number of coins is increasing.

The game period PT4 (AT state) is a game state in which the difference in number of coins (= payout amount - bet amount) gradually increases. In this example, the difference in number of coins increases from difference in number of coins CT4 (e.g., -1700; second point) via difference in number of coins CT5 (e.g., 0) to difference in number of coins CT6 (e.g., 2400; first point), and the end condition of the advantageous period (second period) is met.

In addition, in the game period PT4 (AT state) shown in FIG. 170 (4) to (6), the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is This is a state (second state) in which the number of sheets has decreased from the initial value (in this example, 0, a certain value), and is in the negative area of the difference in number of sheets, whereas in the second half (5) to ( 6) The gaming period is a state (first state) in which the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is increasing from the initial value (in this example, 0, a certain value), and the difference is This is a positive area for the number of sheets.

During the gaming period PT4 (AT state), in addition to using the liquid crystal display device 157 to execute an AT effect corresponding to the current gaming state (in this example, the AT state), a certain There are cases where a performance appears (is executed).

FIG. 171(e) is a diagram showing an example of a freeze effect, which is one of certain effects.

The freeze effect is one type of effect, and in this example, in addition to the freeze effect using the reels 110 to 112, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display the character image of the bancho and to provide an advantageous effect to the player. In this example, it is possible to obtain gaming value until the difference in the number of coins moves from the negative area (second state) to the positive difference area (first state). (In this example, a display of the character string "Breaking the limit!") is displayed.

In this example, in the gaming period PT4 (AT state), the difference number (virtual difference number counter) shifts from the negative area (second state) to the difference number (virtual difference number counter) positive area (first state). If it is determined that the game value can be earned until A performance lottery is performed using numerical values, and if the performance lottery is won, a freeze performance (a certain performance) is executed.

In this example, the probability of internally winning the middle cherry is 1/300, and the probability of executing the freeze effect (second probability) in the negative area of the difference number (second state) is 1/20. The probability that the freeze effect will be executed is 1/6000 (=1/300×1/20). Note that the probability (second probability) of executing the freeze effect in the negative region (second state) of the difference in number of sheets may be 100%.

According to this example, when a certain effect appears, it suggests the possibility of acquiring a lot of game value until the end condition of the advantageous zone is met (until the advantageous zone is reset), which can increase the player's motivation to continue playing. Also, immediately after starting play in the morning, when a certain effect appears, the player can recognize that the setting may remain unchanged (it is possible to infer that the setting has not been changed and that the player is still in the second state), so it may be possible for the certain effect to function as an element for determining whether the setting has been changed. Also, when a certain effect appears after the end of the AT, it suggests the possibility that the player is still in the second state in which game value can be acquired up to the first value, even though the AT has ended and a certain amount of game value has been acquired, which may increase the player's motivation to continue playing after the end of the AT.

In addition, when a certain effect (in this example, a freeze effect) appears, it suggests the possibility of gaining a lot of game value until the game moves from the second state (negative area of the difference in number of coins) to the first state (positive area of the difference in number of coins), which can increase the player's motivation to continue playing.

In addition, by generating a certain effect, game value can be earned at least until the transition from the second state to the first state, so that the player's motivation to continue playing is not diminished even when the player has not acquired an AT or the like and the game value is being reduced as the difference in number of coins.

In addition, by executing a certain effect based on the value of the second counting means (virtual difference number counter) that is not updated under certain conditions (for example, as shown in FIG. 168(a) when (4) a two-coin bet (2-bet game) is made, or when (5) a three-coin bet game (3-bet game) is made in the ED state), a certain effect can be executed at an appropriate timing, and a fair gaming machine can be provided.

In this example, the freeze effect (a certain effect) is configured to be executed based on the value of the second counting means (virtual difference number counter), but the freeze effect (a certain effect) is executed based on the value of the first counting means (the virtual difference number counter). ) may be configured to be executed based on.

Figure 171 (f) shows an example of one type of effect, an ending confirmation effect (completed).

The ending confirmation effect (completed) is one of the effects, and uses the liquid crystal display device 157 to display the character image of the boss, the character images of three pandas, and a display (in this example, three pandas appear lined up in a V shape) indicating that the player will be granted a favorable advantage (in this example, the player can gain gaming value until the difference in number of coins reaches a first value (2400 in this example) from the negative area (second state) of the difference in number of coins and the end condition of the favorable zone (second zone) is met).

In this example, the ending confirmation effect is determined when the first counting counter reaches 2400 (CT6 point in Figure 170), and the ending confirmation effect continues until the "1400 GET" display in Figure 171 (f) becomes "4100 GET" (1700 + 2400).

In this example, in the gaming period PT4 (AT state), the difference number reaches the first value (2400 in this example) from the negative region (second state) of the difference number and enters the advantageous section (second section). When it is determined that a game value can be acquired until the termination condition is satisfied, and when the performance lottery of the freeze performance is won, the ending confirmation performance is executed after the freeze performance is executed.

According to this example, when a certain effect (in this example, an ending confirmation effect (completion confirmed)) appears, it suggests the possibility of gaining a lot of game value until the end condition of the advantageous zone is met (until the advantageous zone is reset), which can increase the player's motivation to continue playing. Moreover, in this example, the ending confirmation effect (completion confirmed) appears after the freeze effect, which can instantly increase the player's sense of anticipation.

In this example, an ending confirmation effect is executed after a freeze effect is executed, but if only the execution conditions for the freeze effect are met and the execution conditions for the ending confirmation effect (in this example, it is confirmed that game value can be earned (completion confirmation) until the difference in number of coins reaches a first value (2400 in this example) from the negative area (second state) of the difference in number of coins and the end condition of the advantageous zone (second zone) is met) are not met, only the freeze effect may be executed.

In addition, in this example, at the timing shown in FIG. 170 (6), the difference number of sheets reaches the difference number CT6 (for example, 2400, the first value), and the end condition of the advantageous section (second section) is satisfied. Therefore, at the same timing, the section and production state are set to the non-advantageous section (first section) and the normal state, respectively, as the initial settings when the end condition of the advantageous section (second section) is satisfied, and the difference in the number of sheets is The value of the difference number counter (first counting means) that counts the (obtained difference number) and the value of the above-mentioned virtual difference number counter (second counting means) are determined at the end of the advantageous section (second section). As an initial setting when the condition is satisfied, each is set to an initial value CT1 (for example, 0).

The condition for ending the advantageous period (second period) is not limited to when the difference in number of coins reaches 2400, but may be, for example, a value greater than 2400, which is the maximum value at which completion is confirmed in the positive region of the difference in number of coins, such as 4000.

In addition, in this example, at the timing shown in FIG. 170 (6), the conditions for ending the AT state are met (in this example, the conditions for ending the advantageous zone (second zone) are met), so in the final game of the game period PT4 (AT state), the AT end presentation is executed using the liquid crystal display device 157.

Figure 172 (a) shows an example of an AT end presentation (ending presentation).

The AT end performance (ending performance) is a performance that suggests the end of the AT state, and in this example, the total number of game media acquired in the AT game is displayed (in this example, the character string "TOTAL 5104 GET" is displayed) This is an effect that includes displaying a character image of a bancho, and character images of three pandas. In addition, in the case of CT4 to CT6 in FIG. 170, the total number of acquired coins is displayed as "4100 GET".

<Example 1 of production based on the difference number counter/Game period PT5 (normal state)>
The gaming period PT5 in FIGS. 170 (6) and (7) is the normal state of the non-advantageous section (first section) or the normal state of the advantageous section (second section), and the difference in the number of sheets is decreasing. state.

In this example, during a certain game of normal play in a non-advantageous zone (first zone), the condition for transition to the advantageous zone (second zone) is met (in this example, the transition lottery is won), and the game transitions from the normal state of the non-advantageous zone (first zone) to the normal state of the advantageous zone (second zone).

The gaming period PT5 (normal state) is a gaming state in which the difference number of coins (=number of payouts - number of bets) decreases, and in this example, the difference number of coins is the difference number CT1 (in this example, 0. First point) The difference is reduced from the number of sheets to the difference number CT7 (for example, -150, second point).

In addition, the game period PT5 (normal state) in Figures 170 (6) to (7) is a state (second state) in which the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is less than the initial value (0 in this example, a certain value) during the entire game period, and is in the negative area of the difference number.

In addition, in this example, during game period PT5 (normal state), the condition for transitioning to the AT state is met (in this example, the AT lottery is won), so the state transitions from the normal state to the AT state.

<Example 1 of Presentation Based on Difference Number Counter / Game Period PT6 (AT State)>
The game period PT7 in Figure 170 (7) to (8) is in the AT state, and the difference in number of coins is increasing.

The game period PT7 (AT state) is a game state in which the difference in number of coins (= payout amount - bet amount) gradually increases, and in this example, the difference in number of coins increases from difference in number of coins CT7 (e.g., -150, second point) to difference in number of coins CT8 (e.g., 1000, first point).

Further, in this example, in the game period PT7 (AT state), the end condition of the AT state is satisfied (in this example, a predetermined number of AT games have been played), so the AT state shifts to the normal state.

<Example 1 of presentation based on difference number counter / game period PT7 (normal state)>
The game period PT7 in Figures 170 (8) to (9) is the normal state of the non-advantageous zone (first zone) or the normal state of the advantageous zone (second zone), in which the difference in number of coins is decreasing.

The game period PT7 (normal state) is a game state in which the difference in number of coins (= number of coins paid out - number of coins bet) decreases, and in this example, the difference in number of coins decreases from difference in number of coins CT8 (in this example, 1000; first point) to difference in number of coins CT9 (for example, 700; second point).

In addition, the game period PT7 (normal state) in Figures 170 (8) to (9) is a state (first state) in which the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is increased from the initial value (0 in this example, a certain value) during the entire game period, and is in the positive area of the difference number.

In addition, in this example, during game period PT7 (normal state), the condition for transitioning to the AT state is met (in this example, the AT lottery is won), so the state transitions from the normal state to the AT state.

<Production example 1 based on the difference number counter/gaming period PT8 (AT state)>
The game period PT8 in FIGS. 170 (9) and (10) is an AT state, and the difference number of sheets is increasing.

The game period PT8 (AT state) is a game state in which the difference in number of coins (= payout amount - bet amount) gradually increases. In this example, the difference in number of coins increases from difference in number of coins CT9 (e.g., 700, second point) to difference in number of coins CT10 (e.g., 2400, first point), and the end condition of the advantageous period (second period) is met.

Note that both game periods PT4 (AT state) and PT8 (AT state) are game periods in which game value can be earned until the end conditions of the advantageous period (second period) are met, but the difference in number of coins CT4 (in this example, -1700) at the start of game period PT4 (AT state) is in the negative area, whereas the difference in number of coins CT9 (in this example, 700) at the start of game period PT8 (AT state) is in the positive area. Therefore, the increase in the difference in number of coins during game period PT8 (AT state) (in this example, 1400 (= 2400 - 700)) is less than the increase in the difference in number of coins during game period PT4 (AT state) (in this example, 4100 (= 2400 + 1700)).

In addition, in the game period PT8 (AT state) of FIGS. 170 (9) and (10), all the game periods are such that the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is the initial value (in this example, 0. This is the state (first state) in which the number of sheets is increased compared to the value of the difference in number of sheets (the first state), and is in the positive region of the difference in the number of sheets.

During the gaming period PT8 (AT state), in addition to executing AT performance etc. corresponding to the current gaming state (AT state in this example) using the liquid crystal display device 157, a certain There are cases where a performance appears (is executed).

Figure 172 (b) shows an example of a non-freeze effect, which is one type of effect.

The no-freeze effect is one type of effect, and in this example, the freeze effect using the reels 110 to 112 is not executed, and the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display the princess character image and the player's (In this example, the game value is earned until the difference number reaches the first value (2400 in this example) and the end condition of the advantageous section (second section) is met. (In this example, a display of the character string "Hot!") is displayed to suggest that it is possible.

In this example, in a certain game during the game period PT8 (AT state), the game is played until the difference in the number of coins reaches the first value (2400 in this example) and the end condition of the advantageous section (second section) is satisfied. If it is determined that it is possible to acquire value, and a certain internal winning role (in this example, middle-tier cherry) is internally won, a performance lottery is performed using random numbers, and the player wins this performance lottery. Then, a no-freeze effect (a certain effect) is executed.

In this example, the probability of an internal win on the middle cherry is 1/300, and the probability (first probability) of executing a no-freeze effect in the positive difference number area (first state) is 1/200, so the probability of executing a no-freeze effect is 1/60,000 (= 1/300 x 1/200). Note that the probability (first probability) of executing a no-freeze effect in the positive difference number area (first state) may be 0.

In this example, even with the same internal winning combination (middle cherry), by making at least a portion of the appearance of the freeze effect and the non-freeze effect different, it is possible to make the player guess whether it is in the first state or the second state, thereby improving gameplay.

The combination of the effect (second effect) performed in the negative area (second state) of the difference in number of coins and the effect (first effect) performed in the positive area (first state) of the difference in number of coins is not limited to a freeze effect and a non-freeze effect, and for example, the second effect may be freeze + display effect A and the first effect may be display effect A without freezing, or the second effect may be freeze + display effect A and the first effect may be display effect B without freezing, or the second effect may be freeze + display effect A and the first effect may be no effect.

<Example 2 of production based on the difference number counter>
FIG. 173 is a graph showing an example of a change in the number of differential sheets in a certain game period, and FIGS. 174 and 175 are diagrams showing examples of various effects in a certain game period shown in FIG. 173.

<Example 2 of performance based on difference number counter/power on>
The timing shown in Figure 173 (11) is the timing when the power is turned on and the settings are changed with the setting key inside the main body 101 in the on position, which is the same as the "power on" state described using Figure 170.

To avoid repetition, detailed explanations will be omitted, but at this timing, the section and presentation state are set to a non-advantageous section (first section) and normal state, respectively, as initial settings when the power is turned on, and the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) that counts the difference number of coins (obtained difference number), and the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) mentioned above are each set to an initial value CT11 (e.g., 0) as initial settings when the power is turned on.

<Production example 2 based on the difference number counter/gaming period PT11 (normal state)>
The gaming period PT1 in FIGS. 173 (11) and (12) is the normal state of the non-advantageous section (first section) or the normal state of the advantageous section (second section), and the difference in the number of coins is decreasing. state.

In this example, in a certain game of the normal game in the non-advantageous section (first section), the conditions for transition to the advantageous section (second section) were met (in this example, the transition lottery was won). , the normal state of the non-advantageous section (first section) is transitioning to the normal state of the advantageous section (second section).

The gaming period PT11 (normal state) is a gaming state in which the difference number of coins (=number of payouts - number of bets) decreases, and in this example, the difference number of coins is the difference number CT11 (in this example, 0.First point) The number of sheets is decreased from the difference number CT12 (for example, -1500 at the second point).

In addition, the game period PT11 (normal state) in Figure 173 (11) to (12) is a state (second state) in which the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is less than the initial value (0 in this example, a certain value) during the entire game period, and is in the negative area of the difference number.

During the gaming period PT11 (normal state), the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to perform a normal effect (displaying a normal background, etc.) corresponding to the current gaming state (normal state in this example). There are cases where a certain effect appears (is executed) with a probability of .

FIG. 174(a) is a diagram showing an example of a tutorial display, which is one of the effects.

The tutorial display is one of the effects, and in this example, the LCD display device 157 is used to display an image of the princess character, as well as a display suggesting the appearance of a freeze effect (described below) using FIG. 174(f) (in this example, the text "If you get a freeze it's super hot" is displayed).

In addition, in this example, during game period PT11 (normal state), the condition for transitioning to the AT state is met (in this example, the AT lottery is won), so a transition from the normal state to the AT state occurs.

<Production example 2 based on the difference number counter/gaming period PT12 (AT state)>
The game period PT12 in FIGS. 173 (12) and (13) is an AT state, and a state in which the difference in the number of sheets is increasing.

The gaming period PT12 (AT state) is a gaming state in which the difference in number of coins (=number of payouts - number of bets) gradually increases, and in this example, the difference in number of coins is CT12 (for example, -1500). ) to the difference number CT13 (for example, -950, first point).

In addition, the game period PT2 (AT state) in Figure 173 (12) to (13) is a state (second state) in which the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is less than the initial value (0 in this example, a certain value) during the entire game period, and is in the negative area of the difference number.

During the game period PT12 (AT state), in addition to executing AT effects and the like corresponding to the current game state (in this example, the AT state) using the liquid crystal display device 157, a certain effect may appear (be executed) with a predetermined probability.

Figure 174 (b) shows an example of an AT presentation.

The AT effect is an effect that suggests that the player is in the AT state, and in this example, includes a display of the number of gaming media won during AT play (in this example, the string "255 GET" is displayed), an image of the Banchou character, and a display that notifies the player that the player is in the AT state (in this example, the string "AT in progress" is displayed).

In addition, in this example, at the timing shown in FIG. 173 (13), the conditions for ending the AT state are met (in this example, a predetermined number of AT games have been played), so the AT state transitions to the normal state, and an AT end presentation is executed using the liquid crystal display device 157 in the final game of the game period PT12 (AT state).

Figure 174 (c) shows an example of an AT end presentation.

The AT end performance is a performance that suggests the end of the AT state, and in this example, the total number of game media acquired in the AT game is displayed (in this example, the character string "TOTAL 550 GET" is displayed) and the bancho's number is displayed. This is a performance that includes the display of character images.

In addition, in this example, the difference in number of sheets CT13 at the time when the end condition of the AT state is met is in the negative area (-300 in this example), so the end condition of the advantageous zone (second zone) is less likely to be met than if the difference in number of sheets at the time when the end condition of the AT state is met is in the positive area, and in this example, the end condition of the advantageous zone (second zone) is not met, the zone is maintained in the advantageous zone (second zone), and the difference in number of sheets is maintained without being initialized.

<Production example 2 based on the difference number counter/gaming period PT13>
The game period PT13 shown in FIGS. 173 (13) and (14) is a normal state in which the number of differential sheets is decreasing.

The game period PT13 (normal state) is a game state in which the difference in number of coins (= number of coins paid out - number of coins bet) decreases, and in this example, the difference in number of coins decreases from difference in number of coins CT13 (in this example, -950; first point) to difference in number of coins CT14 (for example, -1700; second point).

In addition, in the game period PT13 (normal state) shown in FIGS. 173 (13) and (14), all the game periods are such that the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is the initial value (in this example, 0. This is a state (second state) in which the number of sheets is decreased compared to the value of the difference in number of sheets, and is in the negative region of the difference in the number of sheets.

During the gaming period PT13 (normal state), the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to perform a normal effect (displaying a normal background, etc.) corresponding to the current gaming state (normal state in this example). There are cases where a certain effect appears (is executed) with a probability of .

In addition, in this example, during game period PT13 (normal state), the condition for transitioning to the AT state is met (in this example, the AT lottery is won), so a transition from the normal state to the AT state occurs.

<Example 2 of Presentation Based on Difference Number Counter / Game Period PT14 (AT State)>
The game period PT14 in Figure 173 (14) to (16) is in the AT state, and the difference in number of coins is increasing.

The gaming period PT14 (AT state) is a gaming state in which the difference number of coins (=number of payouts - number of bets) gradually increases. ) to the difference number CT16 (for example, 1077, the first point), and the conditions for ending the advantageous section (second section) are satisfied.

In addition, in the game period PT4 (AT state) shown in FIG. 173 (4) to (6), the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is This is a state (second state) in which the number of sheets has decreased from the initial value (in this example, 0, a certain value), and is in the negative area of the difference in number of sheets, whereas in the second half (5) to ( 6) The gaming period is a state (first state) in which the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is increasing from the initial value (in this example, 0, a certain value), and the difference is This is a positive area for the number of sheets.

During the game period PT14 (AT state), in addition to executing AT effects and the like corresponding to the current game state (in this example, the AT state) using the liquid crystal display device 157, a certain effect may appear (be executed) with a certain probability, but in this example, it has not appeared.

Figure 174 (d) shows an example of an AT presentation.

The AT performance is a performance that suggests an AT state, and in this example, the number of acquired game media in the AT game is displayed (in this example, the character string "255 GET" is displayed), and the character image of the bancho is displayed. This is an effect that includes a display of , and a display notifying that the AT state is present (in this example, a display of the character string "AT in progress").

In addition, in this example, at the timing shown in FIG. 173 (16), the number of medals acquired in the AT state (=CT16-CT14) reaches a certain number (for example, 2000), and the advantageous section (second section) Since the end condition of , at the same timing, the end condition of the advantageous section (second section) is met, the section and performance state are the initial settings when the end condition of the advantageous section (second section) is satisfied, and the non-advantageous section (first section) and normal state, respectively. The value of the difference number counter (first counting means) that counts the difference number (obtained difference number) and the value of the above-mentioned virtual difference number counter (second counting means) are set to As an initial setting when the end condition for the second section) is satisfied, the respective initial values CT11 (for example, 0) are set.

In addition, in this example, in the gaming period PT14 (AT state), the end condition of the AT state was satisfied (in this example, the end condition of the advantageous section (second section) was satisfied), so the gaming period PT14 (AT state) was satisfied. In the final game in the AT state), an AT end performance is executed using the liquid crystal display device 157.

Figure 173 (e) shows an example of an AT end presentation.

The AT end performance is a performance that suggests the end of the AT state, and in this example, the total number of game media acquired in the AT game is displayed (in this example, the character string "TOTAL 2777 GET" is displayed), and the bancho's number is displayed. This is a performance that includes the display of character images.

<Production example 2 based on the difference number counter/gaming period PT15 (normal state)>
The gaming period PT15 in FIGS. 173 (16) and (17) is the normal state of the non-advantageous section (first section) or the normal state of the advantageous section (second section), and the difference in the number of coins is decreasing. state.

In this example, in a certain game of the normal game in the non-advantageous section (first section), the conditions for transition to the advantageous section (second section) were met (in this example, the transition lottery was won). , the normal state of the non-advantageous section (first section) is transitioning to the normal state of the advantageous section (second section).

The gaming period PT15 (normal state) is a gaming state in which the difference number of coins (=number of payouts - number of bets) decreases, and in this example, the difference number of coins is the difference number CT11 (in this example, 0.First point) The difference in number of sheets has decreased from CT17 (for example, -811 at the second point).

In addition, in the game period PT15 (normal state) shown in FIGS. 173 (16) and (17), all the game periods are such that the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is the initial value (in this example, 0. This is a state (second state) in which the number of sheets is decreased compared to the value of the difference in number of sheets, and is in the negative region of the difference in the number of sheets.

In addition, in this example, in the gaming period PT15 (normal state), the conditions for transition to the AT state were satisfied (in this example, the AT lottery was won), so at the timing shown in FIG. 173 (17), the normal state to the AT state.

<Example 2 of Presentation Based on Difference Number Counter / Game Period PT16 (AT State)>
The game period PT16 in Figure 173 (17) to (19) is in the AT state, and the difference in number of coins is increasing.

The game period PT16 (AT state) is a game state in which the difference in number of coins (= payout amount - bet amount) gradually increases. In this example, the difference in number of coins increases from difference in number of coins CT17 (e.g., -811, second point) to difference in number of coins CT19 (e.g., 2400, first point), and the end condition of the advantageous period (second period) is met.

In addition, in the game period PT17 (AT state) shown in FIG. 173 (17) to (19), the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is This is a state (second state) in which the number of sheets is smaller than the initial value (in this example, 0, a certain value), and is in the negative area of the difference in number of sheets, whereas in the second half (18) to ( 19) is a state (first state) in which the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is increasing than the initial value (in this example, 0, a certain value), and the difference is This is a positive area for the number of sheets.

During the gaming period PT16 (AT state), in addition to using the liquid crystal display device 157 to execute an AT effect corresponding to the current gaming state (AT state in this example), a certain There are cases where a performance appears (is executed).

FIG. 174(f) is a diagram showing an example of a freeze effect, which is one of certain effects.

The freeze effect is one type of effect, and in this example, in addition to the freeze effect using reels 110 to 112, the LCD display device 157 is used to display an image of the Banchou character and a display (in this example, the text "Break the limit!") suggesting that the player will be given a favorable benefit (in this example, the player can gain gaming value until the number of coins moves from the negative difference area (second state) to the positive difference area (first state)).

In this example, during play period PT4 (AT state), it is determined that game value can be acquired until the number of difference changes from a negative area (second state) to a positive area (first state) of the number of difference, and during a certain game during play period PT16 (AT state), if a certain internal winning combination (in this example, a middle cherry) is internally won, a performance lottery is held using a random number value, and if this performance lottery is won, a freeze performance (a certain performance) is executed.

In this example, the probability of an internal win on the middle cherry is 1/300, and the probability (second probability) of executing a freeze effect in the negative difference area (second state) is 1/20, so the probability of executing a freeze effect is 1/6000 (= 1/300 x 1/20).

In addition, in this example, at the timing shown in FIG. 173 (19), the difference number of sheets reaches the difference number CT6 (for example, 2400, the first value), and the condition for ending the advantageous section (second section) is satisfied. Therefore, at the same timing, the section and production state are set to the non-advantageous section (first section) and the normal state, respectively, as the initial settings when the end condition of the advantageous section (second section) is satisfied, and the difference in the number of sheets is The value of the difference number counter (first counting means) that counts the (obtained difference number) and the value of the above-mentioned virtual difference number counter (second counting means) are determined at the end of the advantageous section (second section). As an initial setting when the condition is satisfied, each is set to an initial value CT1 (for example, 0).

In addition, in this example, since the conditions for ending the AT state are met (in this example, the conditions for ending the advantageous zone (second zone) are met) at the timing shown in FIG. 173 (19), the AT end presentation is executed using the liquid crystal display device 157 in the final play of the play period PT16 (AT state).

Figure 175 (a) shows an example of an AT end presentation.

The AT end performance is a performance that suggests the end of the AT state, and in this example, the total number of game media acquired in the AT game is displayed (in this example, the character string "TOTAL 3211 GET" is displayed), and the bancho's number is displayed. This is a performance that includes displaying character images and displaying character images of three pandas.

Note that the AT end effect is not limited to this example, and may be an AT end effect as shown in FIG. 175(b), for example.

The AT end effect in this example is an effect that includes, in addition to the AT end effect display shown in FIG. 175(a), a display suggesting that the end conditions of the advantageous zone (second zone) have been met (in this example, a display including the string "Advantageous Zone Reset!").

Furthermore, the effects executed when the end conditions of the advantageous section (second section) are satisfied are not limited to the AT end effects shown in FIGS. 174(e), 175(a), and (b), and include , it may be an AT end effect as shown in FIG. 175(c).

The AT end effect in this example is an effect that includes the display of a specific character image in addition to the display of the AT end effect shown in FIG. 174(e). This AT end effect is one of the effects that is more likely to appear in the negative difference number area than in the positive difference number area, and may be executed when the difference number is in the negative area at the time when the end condition of the AT state is met.

In this example, the conditions for ending the advantageous zone (second zone) are less likely to be met when the difference in number of coins at the time the conditions for ending the AT state are met is in a negative zone than when the difference in number of coins at the time the conditions for ending the AT state are met is in a positive zone, and the zone is maintained as an advantageous zone (second zone) and the difference in number of coins is maintained without being initialized. Therefore, when an AT end effect including the display of a specific character image as shown in FIG. 174 (e) is executed, the player can be given a sense of expectation that the advantageous zone may not end, thereby maintaining their desire to play.

On the other hand, if the AT end effect that does not include the display of a specific character image is executed, as shown in FIG. Since the value is high, it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from decreasing even if the advantageous period ends.

As explained above, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. ), a certain effect (for example, a freeze effect shown in FIG. 171(e), a display effect (for example, a tutorial display, etc.) shown in FIG. 171(a), a specific character appearing as shown in FIG. 171(b) A production means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1, 3, speakers 272, 277, various lamps), and the first counting means is configured to calculate the value of the gaming value given as a result of the game (for example, the value of the number of medals paid out). ) is a means capable of counting the winning difference obtained by subtracting the value of the gaming value used in the game (for example, the value of the number of inserted medals) from the value of the first counting means (for example, the value of the number of inserted medals), and the value of the first counting means is , 2400), the gaming state advantageous to the player (hereinafter referred to as the "predetermined gaming state") has ended, and the value of the first counting means has increased beyond a certain value. There is a state (hereinafter referred to as the "first state") and a state in which the value of the first counting means is smaller than the certain value (hereinafter referred to as the "second state"), The game machine is characterized in that the certain effect is more likely to appear in the second state than in the first state.

Furthermore, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 171 (e.g., freeze effect shown in FIG. 171(e), display effect (e.g., tutorial display, etc.) shown in FIG. 171(a), A production means (e.g. , the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1, the speakers 272, 277 shown in FIG. It has a first section (for example, a non-advantageous section) in which no information is given and a second section (for example, an advantageous section) in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop operation means can be notified, and in the first section, When the transition conditions are met (for example, if a lottery is executed to transition to an advantageous zone based on the internally won winning combination and the lottery is won), the game transitions to the second zone, and the end condition is met in the second zone. When the number of coins is satisfied (for example, when a predetermined net increase number (for example, 2400 coins) is exceeded), the second section can be completed and the transition can be made to the first section, and the first counting means Means capable of counting the number of earned differences obtained by subtracting the amount of gaming value used in the game (for example, the value of the number of inserted medals) from the amount of gaming value awarded as a result (for example, the value of the number of medals paid out) When the value of the first counting means reaches a first value (for example, 2400), the termination condition is satisfied, and the value of the first counting means is updated. The value of the second counting means may also be updated, and the state in which the value of the first counting means has increased by more than a certain value (hereinafter referred to as the "first state") and the state in which the value of the first counting means has increased by more than a certain value There is a state in which the value of the counting means is smaller than the certain value (hereinafter referred to as a "second state"), and the certain performance is such that the value of the counting means is lower than the certain value. This game machine is characterized by the fact that it is more likely to appear.

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, when a certain effect appears, it is suggested that a large amount of gaming value can be acquired until the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied (until the advantageous section is reset). Therefore, the player's motivation to continue playing can be improved. In addition, immediately after the morning game starts, if a certain effect appears, there is a possibility that the settings remain unchanged (it is possible to assume that the settings are staying in the second state because the settings have not been changed). Since the player can recognize this, it may be possible to make a certain effect function as a factor in setting change determination. In addition, if a certain effect appears after the AT ends, even though the AT ends and a certain amount of gaming value has been acquired, the player is still in the second state where he can still acquire the gaming value up to the first value. Since the possibility is suggested, it may be possible to increase the motivation to continue playing the game after the AT ends.

Furthermore, when the certain performance is executed in the second state, the gaming value may be obtainable until the transition from the second state to the first state. Furthermore, the certain performance may be a performance in which the game value can be acquired at least until the transition from the second state to the first state occurs in connection with the appearance of the certain performance. .

With such a configuration, when a certain performance occurs, gaming value can be acquired at least until the transition from the second state to the first state. It is possible to reduce the game value in terms of the number of coins, so that even if the player remains in the second state, the player's desire to continue playing the game is not impaired.

The predetermined game state may be a state that is started after the appearance of the certain effect, and may be one in which an effect that allows the game value to be acquired can be realized until the value of the first counting means reaches the first value and the predetermined game state ends. The certain effect may also be an effect that allows the game value to be acquired from the second state in relation to the appearance of the certain effect until the value of the first counting means reaches the first value and the end condition is met.

With such a configuration, when a certain effect occurs, a lot of gaming value can be acquired until the end conditions of the advantageous section are met (until the advantageous section is reset), so the player can use AT, etc. It is possible to reduce the game value as the difference in the number of coins that have not been acquired, so that even if the player remains in the second state, the desire to continue playing the game is not impaired.

The reel may further include an internal winning role determination means (e.g., an internal winning role lottery process) capable of determining an internal winning role, and the certain performance may be executed when the internal winning role determination means determines a certain internal winning role (e.g., a middle cherry), and the probability that the performance means executes the certain performance when the internal winning role determination means determines the certain internal winning role in the second state is a second probability (e.g., 1/6000), and the probability that the performance means executes the certain performance when the internal winning role determination means determines the certain internal winning role in the first state (hereinafter referred to as the "first case") is a first probability (e.g., 1/60000), and the second probability may be higher than the first probability.

With this configuration, it is possible to change the probability of a certain effect being executed depending on whether the player is in the first or second state, and it may be possible to increase the player's expectations of staying in the second state even if the player has not acquired an AT or the like and the game value is reduced as the difference in the number of coins, and the player is staying in the second state.

In the first case, the presentation means may be capable of executing a presentation that is different in at least some aspects from the certain presentation.

With this configuration, even if the same internal winning combination occurs, by varying at least a portion of the presentation to be executed, the player can guess whether the combination is in the first state or the second state, thereby improving gameplay.

In some cases, a second counting means (for example, a virtual difference number counter) is provided, and when the value of the first counting means is updated, the value of the second counting means is also updated; The effect may be executed based on the value of the second counting means.

With such a configuration, under certain conditions (for example, as shown in FIG. 168(a), (4) when a 2-bet bet (2-BET game) is made, or (5) when a 3-bet bet game is made in the ED state) By executing a certain effect based on the value of the second counting means that is not updated (when a 3 BET game is played), a certain effect can be executed at an appropriate timing, and a fair game machine can be created. can be provided.

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, a pachinko machine, an enclosed gaming machine, or a medalless slot machine) is a gaming machine equipped with a first counting means (for example, a difference number counter) and a presentation means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1, the speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 3, and various lamps) capable of executing a certain presentation (for example, a freeze presentation shown in FIG. 171(e), a display presentation shown in FIG. 171(a) (for example, a tutorial display, etc.), a specific character presentation in which a specific character appears as shown in FIG. 171(b), a presentation in which the appearance rate of an existing presentation increases, a presentation suggesting a second state (demo presentation, etc.)), and the first counting means is a game machine that is equipped with a difference number counter (for example, a difference number counter) and a presentation means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1, the speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 3, and various lamps) capable of executing a certain presentation (for example, a freeze presentation shown in FIG. 171(e), a display presentation shown in FIG. 171(a) (for example, a tutorial display, etc.), a specific character presentation in which a specific character appears as shown in FIG. 171(b), a presentation in which the appearance rate of an existing presentation increases, a presentation suggesting a second state (demo presentation, etc.)), and This gaming machine is characterized in that it is a means capable of counting the difference obtained by subtracting the value of the game value used in the game (e.g., the number of medals inserted) from the value of the value (e.g., the number of medals paid out), and when the value of the first counting means reaches a first value (e.g., 2400), a game state advantageous to the player (hereinafter referred to as a "predetermined game state") ends, and there are a state in which the value of the first counting means is increased above a certain value (hereinafter referred to as a "first state") and a state in which the value of the first counting means is decreased below the certain value (hereinafter referred to as a "second state"), and in connection with the execution of the certain performance in the second state, the predetermined game state can be continued until the first state is reached.

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, a pachinko machine, an enclosed gaming machine, or a medalless slot machine) executes a first counting means (for example, a difference number counter), a second counting means (for example, a virtual difference number counter), and a certain effect (for example, a freeze effect shown in FIG. 171(e), a display effect shown in FIG. 171(a) (for example, a tutorial display, etc.), a specific character effect in which a specific character appears as shown in FIG. 171(b), an effect in which the appearance rate of existing effects increases, an effect suggesting that the game is in a second state (demo effect, etc.)). The gaming machine has a first section (e.g., a non-advantageous section) in which an advantageous operation mode of a stop operation means (e.g., stop buttons 137 to 139) is not notified, and a second section (e.g., an advantageous section) in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop operation means is notified. When a transition condition is satisfied in the first section (e.g., when a transition lottery to a beneficial section is executed based on an internally won role and the lottery is won), the gaming machine transitions to the second section, and the second section is notified. When a termination condition is met in the second interval (for example, when a predetermined net increase in number of medals (for example, 2400 medals) is exceeded), the second interval is terminated and a transition to the first interval can be made, and the first counting means is a means capable of counting an acquired difference obtained by subtracting the amount of game value used in a game (for example, the value of the number of medals inserted) from the amount of game value awarded as a result of a game (for example, the value of the number of medals paid out), and when the value of the first counting means reaches a first value (for example, 2400), the termination condition is established, and the value of the first counting means is updated. The value of the second counting means may also be updated, and there are a state in which the value of the first counting means is increased above a certain value (hereinafter referred to as the "first state") and a state in which the value of the first counting means is decreased below the certain value (hereinafter referred to as the "second state"); when a transition is made to a game state (e.g., an AT state) that is advantageous to the player in relation to the execution of the certain performance in the second state, the game value can be acquired in the advantageous game state, and the first state is reached at least through the advantageous game state.

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, when a certain effect appears, it is suggested that there is a possibility that a large amount of gaming value can be acquired until reaching the first state due to an advantageous gaming state. It is possible to improve the player's motivation to continue playing the game.

In addition, when a transition to the specified gaming state occurs in association with the execution of the certain performance in the second state, the gaming value may be earned until the value of the first counting means reaches the first value and the specified gaming state ends.

With this configuration, a certain effect occurs, allowing a player to gain a lot of game value until the conditions for ending the advantageous zone are met (until the advantageous zone is reset), so that even if the player has not gained an AT or the like and the game value is reduced as the difference in number of coins, the player's motivation to continue playing is not diminished even if the player is in the second state.

In addition, there is also a point where the value of the first counting means is a second value (hereinafter referred to as "first point"), and a point where the value of the first counting means is a third value (hereinafter referred to as "first point"). , referred to as a "second point."), and the second value is larger than the third value, and is greater than the probability that the presentation means will execute the certain presentation at the first point. The probability that the performance means executes the certain performance at the second point may be higher.

With this configuration, the player who is losing money (addicted to the game) has a higher appearance rate of a certain performance and the reward is large, so that the player's desire to continue playing the game can be improved.

The device may also include an internal winning role determination means (e.g., an internal winning role lottery process) capable of determining an internal winning role, and the certain performance may be executed when the internal winning role determination means determines a certain internal winning role (e.g., a middle cherry), and when the internal winning role determination means determines the certain internal winning role in the second state (hereinafter referred to as the "second case"), the probability that the performance means executes the certain performance may be a second probability (e.g., 1/6000), and when the internal winning role determination means determines the certain internal winning role in the first state (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"), the probability that the performance means executes the certain performance may be a first probability (e.g., 1/60000), and the second probability may be higher than the first probability.

With this configuration, it is possible to change the probability of a certain effect being executed depending on whether the player is in the first or second state, and it may be possible to increase the player's expectations of staying in the second state even if the player has not acquired an AT or the like and the game value is reduced as the difference in the number of coins, and the player is staying in the second state.

Further, in the first case, the certain effect is likely to be executed in the first mode, and in the second case, the certain effect is likely to be executed in the second mode, and the certain effect is likely to be executed in the second mode, and the certain effect is likely to be executed in the second mode. The second aspect may be at least partially different.

With this configuration, even if the same internal winning combination occurs, by varying at least a portion of the presentation to be executed, the player can guess whether the combination is in the first state or the second state, thereby improving gameplay.

In addition, a second counting means (e.g., a virtual difference number counter) may be provided, and when the value of the first counting means is updated, the value of the second counting means may also be updated, and the certain performance may be executed based on the value of the second counting means (e.g., a virtual difference number counter).

With this configuration, a certain effect can be executed at the appropriate timing by executing the certain effect based on the value of the second counting means, which is not updated under certain conditions (for example, as shown in FIG. 168(a) when (4) a two-coin bet (2-bet game) is made, or when (5) a three-coin bet game (3-bet game) is made in the ED state). This makes it possible to provide a fair gaming machine.

Furthermore, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. (for example, the freeze effect shown in FIG. 171(e), the display effect (for example, tutorial display, etc.) shown in FIG. 171(a), the specific character effect in which a specific character appears as shown in FIG. 171(b), the existing A production means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1, a speaker shown in FIG. 3 272, 277, various lamps), and the first counting means calculates the value of the game value from the value of the game value (for example, the value of the number of medals paid out) given as a result of the game. The means is capable of counting the number of earned points obtained by subtracting the value of the used gaming value (for example, the value of the number of inserted medals), and the value of the first counting means is equal to the first value (for example, 2400). When the player reaches the point where the gaming state advantageous to the player (hereinafter referred to as the "predetermined gaming state") ends and the value of the first counting means is the second value (hereinafter referred to as the "first ) and a point where the value of the first counting means is a third value (hereinafter referred to as the "second point"), and the second value is the third point. the probability that the performance means executes the certain performance at the second point is higher than the probability that the performance means executes the certain performance at the first point. It is a game machine that is characterized by certain things.

Furthermore, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 171 (e.g., freeze effect shown in FIG. 171(e), display effect (e.g., tutorial display, etc.) shown in FIG. 171(a), A production means (e.g. , the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1, the speakers 272, 277 shown in FIG. It has a first section (for example, a non-advantageous section) in which no information is given and a second section (for example, an advantageous section) in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop operation means can be notified, and in the first section, When the transition conditions are met (for example, if a lottery is executed to transition to an advantageous zone based on the internally won winning combination and the lottery is won), the game transitions to the second zone, and the end condition is met in the second zone. When the number of coins is satisfied (for example, when a predetermined net increase number (for example, 2400 coins) is exceeded), the second section can be completed and the transition can be made to the first section, and the first counting means Means capable of counting the number of earned differences obtained by subtracting the amount of gaming value used in the game (for example, the value of the number of inserted medals) from the amount of gaming value awarded as a result (for example, the value of the number of medals paid out) When the value of the first counting means reaches a first value (for example, 2400), the termination condition is satisfied, and the value of the first counting means is updated. The value of the second counting means may also be updated, and the point where the value of the first counting means is the second value (hereinafter referred to as the "first point"), and the point where the value of the first counting means is the second value, There is a point where the value of is a third value (hereinafter referred to as "second point"), and the value obtained by subtracting a certain value from the second value is the certain value from the third value. is greater than the value obtained by subtracting . This game machine is characterized by a high probability.

With the gaming machine according to this embodiment, the appearance rate of certain effects is high when the player is losing (getting addicted), so it may be possible to maintain the desire to continue playing even if the player is addicted.

Furthermore, a state in which the value of the first counting means is greater than a certain value (hereinafter referred to as a "first state"), and a state in which the value of the first counting means is greater than the certain value. There is a decreasing state (hereinafter referred to as a "second state"), the first point is a certain point in the first state, and the second point is a certain point in the second state. It may be a certain point in the state.

With this configuration, certain effects are more likely to appear when the difference in number of coins is negative, so players can maintain their desire to continue playing even if they are addicted.

In addition, when a transition to the specified gaming state occurs in connection with the execution of the certain performance, the gaming value may be earned until the value of the first counting means reaches the first value and the specified gaming state ends.

With this configuration, a certain effect occurs, allowing a player to gain a lot of game value until the conditions for ending the advantageous zone are met (until the advantageous zone is reset), so that even if the player has not gained an AT or the like and the game value is reduced as the difference in number of coins, the player's motivation to continue playing is not diminished even if the player is in the second state.

Further, it is provided with an internally-winning role determining means (for example, an internally-winning role lottery process) capable of determining an internally-winning role; This is a performance that may be executed when the internal winning combination determining means determines the certain internal winning combination in the second state (hereinafter referred to as the "second case"). The probability that the performance means executes the certain performance is a second probability (for example, 1/6000), and the internal winning combination determining means executes the certain internal winning combination in the first state. In the determined case (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"), the probability that the production means executes the certain production is a first probability (for example, 1/60000), and the first probability The second probability may be higher than the second probability.

With such a configuration, it is possible to change the execution probability of a certain performance depending on whether the player is in the first state or the second state, and if the player has not acquired AT etc. , even if the user is staying in the second state, it may be possible to increase expectations for staying in the second state.

In addition, in the first case, the certain performance is likely to be performed in a first manner, and in the second case, the certain performance is likely to be performed in a second manner, and the first manner and the second manner may be at least partially different.

With such a configuration, even if the internal winning combination is the same, by varying at least part of the performance mode to be executed, it is possible to make the player guess whether it is in the first state or the second state, and the game You can increase your sexuality.

In addition, a second counting means (e.g., a virtual difference number counter) may be provided, and when the value of the first counting means is updated, the value of the second counting means may also be updated, and the certain performance may be executed based on the value of the second counting means (e.g., a virtual difference number counter).

With such a configuration, under certain conditions (for example, as shown in FIG. 168(a), (4) when a 2-bet bet (2-BET game) is made, or (5) when a 3-bet bet game is made in the ED state) By executing a certain effect based on the value of the second counting means that is not updated (when a 3 BET game is played), a certain effect can be executed at an appropriate timing, and a fair game machine can be created. can be provided.

Furthermore, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine, the enclosed game machine, the medalless slot machine) includes a first counting means (for example, a difference number counter). The first counting means calculates the value of the game value used in the game (for example, the value of the number of medals paid out) from the value of the game value given as a result of the game (for example, the value of the number of medals paid out). The means is capable of counting the number of acquisition differences obtained by subtracting the value of the number of inserted medals, and when the value of the first counting means reaches a first value (for example, 2400), an A point where a gaming state (hereinafter referred to as a "predetermined gaming state") ends and the value of the first counting means is a second value (hereinafter referred to as a "first point"); There is a point where the value of one counting means is a third value (hereinafter referred to as "second point"), and the second value is greater than the third value, and the second value is greater than the third value, and The gaming machine is characterized in that the predetermined gaming state is more difficult to end at the second point than at the second point.

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, a pachinko machine, an enclosed gaming machine, or a medalless slot machine) is a gaming machine equipped with a first counting means (for example, a difference number counter) and a second counting means (for example, a virtual difference number counter), and has a first section (for example, a non-advantageous section) in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 137-139) is not notified, and a second section (for example, an advantageous section) in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop operation means can be notified, and when a transition condition is met in the first section (for example, when a transition lottery to a favorable section is executed based on an internally won role and this lottery is won), the machine transitions to the second section, and when an end condition is met in the second section (for example, when a predetermined net increase in number of coins (for example, 2,400 coins) is exceeded), the second section ends and the machine transitions to the first section. The first counting means is a means capable of counting the difference obtained by subtracting the amount of game value used in a game (e.g., the number of medals inserted) from the amount of game value awarded as a result of a game (e.g., the number of medals paid out), and when the value of the first counting means reaches a first value (e.g., 2400), the end condition is met, and when the value of the first counting means is updated, the value of the second counting means may also be updated, there is a point (hereinafter referred to as the "first point") where the value of the first counting means is a second value, and a point (hereinafter referred to as the "second point") where the value of the first counting means is a third value, the value obtained by subtracting a certain value from the second value is greater than the value obtained by subtracting the certain value from the third value, and the end condition is less likely to be met at the second point than at the first point.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the second point where there is a grace period up to the upper limit of the difference number of coins will have a greater benefit if the race is completed in the next AT, so it is difficult to satisfy the conditions for ending the advantageous section. By doing so, it may be possible to maintain the desire to continue playing the game after the AT ends.

Also, a certain effect (for example, a freeze effect shown in FIG. 171(e), a display effect (for example, a tutorial display, etc.) shown in FIG. 171(a), a specific character in which a specific character appears as shown in FIG. 171(b)) A presentation means (e.g., the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1, FIG. 3 (speakers 272, 277, various lamps) shown in FIG. The game value may be obtainable until the value is reached and the predetermined game state ends.

With such a configuration, when a certain effect occurs, a lot of gaming value can be acquired until the end conditions of the advantageous section are met (until the advantageous section is reset), so the player can use AT, etc. It is possible to reduce the game value as the difference in the number of coins that have not been acquired, so that even if the player remains in the second state, the desire to continue playing the game is not impaired. Further, by keeping the execution probability of a certain performance at a relatively high state after the AT ends, it is possible to maintain the desire to continue the performance.

In addition, there is a state in which the value of the first counting means is increased above the certain value (hereinafter referred to as the "first state"), and a state in which the value of the first counting means is decreased above the certain value (hereinafter referred to as the "second state"), and the first point at the end of the specified game state may be a certain point in the first state, and the second point at the end of the specified game state may be a certain point in the second state.

With this configuration, advantageous zones and difference number resets are relatively likely to occur at the first point when the AT ends, so when they are reset, it is more likely to enter a negative area and certain effects are more likely to occur. Therefore, when a reset occurs at the end of the AT, the occurrence rate of a freeze increases and the player moves to a state where it is easier to benefit from a freeze, which can increase the desire to continue playing. On the other hand, at the second point when the AT ends, although the occurrence rate of a freeze may be lower than when the AT began, the benefit of getting a freeze is greater than when the player is reset, so in either case the desire to continue playing can be sustained.

Further, when the certain effect is executed, the value of the first counting means may always reach the first value.

The device may also include an internal winning role determination means (e.g., an internal winning role lottery process) capable of determining an internal winning role, and the certain performance may be executed when the internal winning role determination means determines a certain internal winning role, and at the first location, the certain performance is likely to be executed in a first manner, and at the second location, the certain performance is likely to be executed in a second manner, and the first manner and the second manner may be at least partially different.

With this configuration, it may be possible to guess whether the conditions for the end of the advantageous zone will be met after the AT ends (whether the advantageous zone will be reset).

In addition, a second counting means (e.g., a virtual difference number counter) may be provided, and when the value of the first counting means is updated, the value of the second counting means may also be updated, and the certain performance may be executed based on the value of the second counting means (e.g., a virtual difference number counter).

With this configuration, a certain effect can be executed at the appropriate timing by executing the certain effect based on the value of the second counting means, which is not updated under certain conditions (for example, as shown in FIG. 168(a) when (4) a two-coin bet (2-bet game) is made, or when (5) a three-coin bet game (3-bet game) is made in the ED state). This makes it possible to provide a fair gaming machine.

<Complete function and game value display>
Next, the complete function and game value display will be explained using Figures 176 to 182.

<Complete function>
The complete function is a function that, when the difference between the maximum value of the above-mentioned acquired difference number and the minimum value of the acquired difference number (maximum difference number; the so-called MY value, or the value of the MY counter) reaches a second value (in this example, 19,000) (when the complete function is activated), issues an alert (complete upper limit reached alert) suggesting that game play should be stopped, and stops game play.

Note that if the complete function is activated in the AT state, the AT state ends immediately and the state shifts to the normal state. Furthermore, if the complete function is activated during the bonus game, the bonus game may be immediately ended and the normal state may be entered, or the normal state may be entered after the bonus game is completed. When the complete function is activated, it is possible to cancel the complete function by changing the settings, but it is not possible to cancel the complete function simply by turning the power off and on or performing a reset operation.

<Complete function/Complete upper limit reached notification>
The notification means of the slot machine 100 executes a notification (complete upper limit reached notification) suggesting execution of game stop when the MY value (maximum difference number) reaches a second value (19000 in this example). There are cases.

Figure 176 (b) shows an example of a completion upper limit reaching notification.

The complete upper limit reached notification is a notification that suggests that play will be stopped, and in this example, the complete upper limit reached notification is a notification that includes a display that suggests play will be stopped (in this example, the display of the text string "Play has reached its limit. Play will be stopped") and a display that prompts the player to settle their medals (in this example, the display of the text string "Press the count button"). Note that, although this example is configured to execute the complete upper limit reached notification using the performance image display device 157, it may also be configured to execute the complete upper limit reached notification using a device managed by the main control unit 300, such as the payout number display 127.

In this example, when the MY value (maximum difference number) reaches the second value (19,000 in this example), the LCD display device 157 is used to execute the completion upper limit reaching notification shown in FIG. 176(b).

<Complete function/Complete function advance notification>
The notification means of slot machine 100 may issue a notification (pre-complete function notification) suggesting the possibility that the MY value (maximum difference number) will reach the second value (in this example, 19,000) before the MY value (maximum difference number) reaches the second value (in this example, 19,000).

FIG. 176(a) is a diagram showing an example of complete function advance notification.

The complete function advance notification is a notification that suggests the possibility that the MY value (maximum difference number) will reach a second value (19,000 in this example), and the complete function advance notification in this example is a notification that includes a display that suggests in advance that play will be stopped (in this example, the display of the text string "500 coins remaining").

In this example, when the MY value (maximum difference number) reaches a certain value (18500 in this example) that is smaller than the second value, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display the image shown in FIG. 176(a). Execute the complete function advance notification shown in .

In this example, by notifying the player in advance that the maximum difference number will reach the second value (the upper limit of the complete function is approaching), the player can be encouraged to settle their account in advance.

Note that the threshold value (second value) for starting the completion upper limit notification is not limited to 19000, and may be any other numerical value. Further, the threshold value for starting the complete function preliminary notification is not limited to 18500, but may be a numerical value smaller than the threshold value (second value) for executing the completion upper limit notification.

Furthermore, although we have shown an example in which the completion upper limit notification is executed when the "MY value" reaches the second value, the amount of gaming value awarded as a result of the game (for example, the value of the number of medals paid out) ), when the "obtained difference" obtained by subtracting the amount of gaming value used in the game (for example, the value of the number of inserted medals) reaches a second value, execute the completion upper limit notification. Good too.

Further, the completion upper limit reaching notification and the complete function advance notification are not limited to being executed in the positive area of the number of difference sheets, but may be performed in the negative area of the number of difference sheets.

<Game value display>
The slot machine 100 is equipped with a game value display means (medal display device MD) capable of displaying the winning difference (winning difference in medals) obtained by subtracting the value of the game value used in the game from the value of the game value awarded as a result of the game.

For example, when executing the complete function advance notification shown in FIG. When executing the completion upper limit notification shown in FIG. 176(b), the game value display means (medal display device MD) is used to display the number of medals obtained (number display). In this example, the number "14000" is displayed.

<Medal display device/gaming value display upper limit reached notification>
The notification means of the slot machine 100 executes a notification (play value display upper limit reached notification) prompting the player to settle the medals when the difference in the number of medals obtained reaches a third value (16383 in this example).

Figure 176 (d) shows an example of a notification that the game value display upper limit has been reached.

The gaming value display upper limit reaching notification is a notification that prompts the settlement of medals, and the gaming value display upper limit reaching notification in this example indicates that the number of medal acquisition differences has reached a third value (16383 in this example). This is a notification that includes a suggestive display (in this example, the text string "No more displays are possible") and a display prompting for medal settlement (in this example, the text string "Please press the counting button"). be.

In this example, when the difference in the number of medals obtained reaches the third value (16383 in this example), the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to notify the player of reaching the gaming value display upper limit as shown in FIG. 176(d). Execute.

<Medal display device/advance notification of reaching upper limit of game value display>
The notification means of slot machine 100 may issue a notification (advance notification of reaching the game value display upper limit) suggesting the possibility that the difference in the number of medals won will reach a third value (in this example, 16,383) before the difference in the number of medals won reaches the third value (in this example, 16,383).

Figure 176 (c) shows an example of advance notification of reaching the upper limit of the game value display.

The advance notification of reaching the game value display upper limit is a notification that suggests the difference in the number of medals won may reach a third value (in this example, 16,383), and the advance notification of reaching the game value display upper limit in this example is a notification that includes a display that suggests the difference in the number of medals won may reach a third value (in this example, 16,383) (in this example, display of the string "Counting limit is approaching") and a display that prompts the player to settle their medals (in this example, display of the string "Press the count button").

In this example, when the difference in the number of medals acquired reaches a certain value (15,369 in this example) that is smaller than the third value, the liquid crystal display device 157 executes an advance notification of reaching the upper limit of the game value display, as shown in FIG. 176(c).

According to this example, by notifying in advance that the upper limit (third value) of the display of the number of earned differences by the playing value display means will be reached (that the display upper limit of the playing value display means is near), the game It is possible to encourage people to pay in advance.

Note that the threshold value (third value) for starting the notification that the gaming value display upper limit has been reached is not limited to 16383, and may be any other numerical value. Further, the threshold value for starting the advance notification of reaching the gaming value display upper limit is not limited to 15369, but may be a numerical value smaller than the threshold (third value) for executing the notification that the gaming value display upper limit has been reached.

In addition, the notification of reaching the upper limit of the game value display and the advance notification of reaching the upper limit of the game value display are not limited to being executed in the positive range of the difference in number of coins, but may be executed in the negative range of the difference in number of coins. Also, since the amount of game value acquired on another gaming machine can be added (lend) to the gaming machine being played on, when the amount of game value acquired on another gaming machine is added (lend) to the gaming machine being played on, the difference in the number of medals acquired may reach a third value (16,383 in this example) before the MY value (maximum difference in number of medals acquired) reaches a second value (19,000 in this example).

In addition, the completion limit reaching notification and the game value display limit reaching notification are not limited to this example. For example, when the MY value (maximum winning difference) reaches a second value (19,000 in this example) and the winning difference in medals reaches a third value (16,383 in this example), a notification of reaching both function limits as shown in FIG. 176 (d) may be executed.

In this example, the notification that the upper limit of both functions has been reached is a display that suggests the execution of a game stop (in this example, a display of the character string "Stopped, the game will be stopped"), and a third value that indicates the difference in the number of medals earned. A display suggesting that the number has been reached (in this example, the text string ``No more can be displayed'') and a display prompting you to settle the medals (in this example, the text string ``Please press the counting button'') ).

<Example 1 of the complete function and game value display>
Next, a specific example 1 of the complete function and game value display will be explained using Figures 177 to 180.

FIG. 177 is a graph showing an example of the change in the number of differential sheets during a certain gaming period, and FIGS. 178 to 180 are diagrams showing examples of various performances and various notifications during a certain gaming period shown in FIG. be.

<Specific example of complete function and game value display 1/Power on>
The timing shown in FIG. 177(1) is the timing when the power is turned on with the setting key provided inside the main body 101 in an on state, and the settings are changed.

At the same time, the section and presentation state are set to the non-advantageous section (first section) and normal state, respectively, as the initial settings when the power is turned on, and the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) that counts the difference number of sheets (obtained difference number) and the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) mentioned above are each set to the initial value CT21 (e.g., 0), respectively, as the initial settings when the power is turned on.

<Specific example of complete function and gaming value display 1/Game section PT21 (normal state)>
The gaming period PT21 in FIGS. 177 (1) and (2) is the normal state of the non-advantageous section (first section) or the normal state of the advantageous section (second section), and the difference in the number of coins is decreasing. state.

In this example, during a certain game of normal play in a non-advantageous zone (first zone), the condition for transition to the advantageous zone (second zone) is met (in this example, the transition lottery is won), and the game transitions from the normal state of the non-advantageous zone (first zone) to the normal state of the advantageous zone (second zone).

The gaming period PT21 (normal state) is a gaming state in which the difference number of coins (=number of payouts - number of bets) decreases, and in this example, the difference number of coins is the difference number CT21 (in this example, 0.First point) The difference number CT22 (for example, -1500, second point) decreases from the number CT22.

In addition, the game period PT21 (normal state) in Figures 177 (1) to (2) is a state (second state) in which the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is less than the initial value (0 in this example, a certain value) during the entire game period, and is in the negative area of the difference number.

As shown in FIG. 178(a), during the game period PT21 (normal state), the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to execute normal effects (such as displaying a normal background) corresponding to the current game state (in this example, the normal state), and the game value display means (medal display device MD) is used to display a display showing the difference in the number of medals acquired (in this example, the display of the numbers "00050" corresponding to 50 medals lent).

<Specific example of complete function and gaming value display 1/Game section PT22 (AT state)>
The game period PT22 shown in FIGS. 177(2) and 177(3) is an AT state, and is a state in which the difference in the number of coins is increasing.

The gaming period PT22 (AT state) is a gaming state in which the difference number of coins (=number of payouts - number of bets) gradually increases, and in this example, the difference number of coins is the difference number CT22 (for example, 31. Second point) The difference number CT23 (for example, 7033, the first point) increases from

In addition, the game period PT22 (AT state) in Figures 177 (2) to (3) is a game period from CT22 (-1500 in this example) to CT21 (0 in this example) in which the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is less than the initial value (0 in this example, a certain value) (second state), and is in a negative area of the difference number, whereas the game period from CT21 (0 in this example) to CT23 (7033 in this example) in which the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is more than the initial value (0 in this example, a certain value) (first state), and is in a positive area of the difference number.

During the first play of the play period PT22 (AT state), in addition to the freeze effect using reels 110 to 112, as shown in FIG. 178(b), the liquid crystal display device 157 displays an image of the Banchou character and a display (in this example, the text "Break the Limit!") suggesting that the player will be awarded a favorable advantage (in this example, the player will be able to earn game value until the number of coins moves from the negative difference area (second state) to the positive difference area (first state)).

In addition, in the gaming period PT22 (AT state), in the first game of the gaming period PT22 (AT state), the MY value (maximum difference number) is set to the initial value (in this example, 0), and the MY value (maximum difference number) is set to the initial value (0 in this example). At the same time, as shown in FIG. 178(c), a display indicating the current MY value (maximum number of differences) (in this example, indicating that the MY value (maximum number of differences) is 0) is started. At the same time, the game value display means (medal display device MD) is used to display the current number of medals obtained (in this example, the number of medals obtained is The number "00031" indicating that there are 31 sheets is displayed.

In addition, in the gaming period PT22 (AT state), if the end condition of the AT state is satisfied (in this example, a predetermined number of AT games have been played), the AT state transitions to the normal state, and the gaming period PT22 In the final game (AT state), as shown in FIG. 178(d), the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display the current MY value (maximum difference number). ) is 7002), and the game value display means (medal display device MD) is used to display the current medal acquisition difference (this example). , the number "07033" indicating that the difference in the number of medals obtained is 7033 is displayed.

<Example 1 of the complete function and game value display / game section PT23 (normal state)>
The game period PT23 in Figure 177 (3) to (4) is the normal state of the advantageous zone (second zone), in which the difference in number of coins is decreasing.

The game period PT23 (normal state) is a game state in which the difference in number of coins (= number of coins paid out - number of coins bet) decreases, and in this example, the difference in number of coins decreases from difference in number of coins CT23 (e.g., 7033; first point) to difference in number of coins CT24 (e.g., 6832; second point).

During game period PT23 (normal state), although not shown in the figure, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to execute normal effects (such as displaying a normal background) corresponding to the current game state (in this example, the normal state), and the game value display means (medal display device MD) is used to display a display showing the difference in the number of medals acquired.

<Example 1 of the complete function and game value display / game section PT24 (AT state)>
The game period PT24 in Figure 177 (4) to (5) is in the AT state, and the difference in number of coins is increasing.

The gaming period PT24 (AT state) is a gaming state in which the difference number of coins (=number of payouts - number of bets) gradually increases, and in this example, the difference number of coins is the difference number CT24 (for example, 6832. Second point) to the difference number CT25 (for example, 8882, the first point).

During play period PT24 (AT state), in the first play of play period PT22 (AT state), as shown in FIG. 178(e), the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to execute AT effects etc. corresponding to the current play state (in this example, the AT state).

In addition, in the gaming period PT22 (AT state), in the first game of the gaming period PT22 (AT state), the MY value (maximum difference number) is set to the initial value (in this example, 0), and the MY value (maximum difference number) is set to the initial value (0 in this example). At the same time, as shown in FIG. 178(e), a display indicating the current MY value (maximum number of differences) (in this example, indicating that the MY value (maximum number of differences) is 0) is started. At the same time, the game value display means (medal display device MD) is used to display the current number of medals obtained (in this example, the number of medals obtained is The number "06832" indicating that there are 6832 sheets is displayed.

In addition, in the gaming period PT24 (AT state), if the end condition of the AT state is satisfied (in this example, a predetermined number of AT games have been played), the AT state shifts to the normal state, and the gaming period PT24 In the final game (AT state), as shown in FIG. 178(f), the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display the current MY value (maximum difference number). ) is 2050 (displaying the number and character string "2050 GET"), and using the gaming value display means (medal display device MD) to display the current medal acquisition difference (in this example , the number "08882" indicating that the difference in the number of medals obtained is 8882 is displayed.

<Example 1 of the complete function and game value display / game section PT25 (normal state)>
The game period PT25 in Figure 177 (5) to (6) is the normal state of the advantageous zone (second zone), in which the difference in number of coins is decreasing.

The gaming period PT25 (normal state) is a gaming state in which the difference number of coins (=number of payouts - number of bets) decreases. The number of sheets has decreased to CT26 (for example, 7365 at the second point).

During game period PT25 (normal state), although not shown in the figure, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to execute normal effects (such as displaying a normal background) corresponding to the current game state (in this example, the normal state), and the game value display means (medal display device MD) is used to display a display showing the difference in the number of medals acquired.

<Specific example of complete function and gaming value display 1/Game section PT26 (AT state)>
The game period PT26 in FIGS. 177(6) to 177(7) is an AT state, and the difference in the number of coins is increasing.

The gaming period PT26 (AT state) is a gaming state in which the difference number of coins (=number of payouts - number of bets) gradually increases, and in this example, the difference number of coins is the difference number CT26 (for example, 7365. Second point) The number of different sheets increases from CT27 (for example, 15706, the first point).

During the gaming period PT26 (AT state), in addition to the freeze effect using the reels 110 to 112 in the first game of the gaming period PT26 (AT state), as shown in FIG. 179(a), the liquid crystal display device 157 is is used to display the character image of the bancho and to give an advantageous profit to the player (in this example, from the negative area of the difference number (second state) to the positive area of the difference number (first state) A display (in this example, a display of a character string "Breaking the limit!") indicating that the game value can be acquired until the game moves to the limit is displayed.

In addition, in the game period PT26 (AT state), in the first game of the game period PT26 (AT state), the MY value (maximum difference number) is set to the initial value (in this example, 0), and the MY value (maximum difference number) is set to the initial value (0 in this example). At the same time, as shown in FIG. 179(b), a display indicating the current MY value (maximum number of differences) (in this example, indicating that the MY value (maximum number of differences) is 0) is started. At the same time, the game value display means (medal display device MD) is used to display the current number of medals obtained (in this example, the number of medals obtained is The number "07365" indicating that there are 7365 sheets is displayed.

In addition, in the gaming period PT26 (AT state), if the end condition of the AT state is satisfied (in this example, a predetermined number of AT games have been played), the AT state shifts to the normal state, and the gaming period PT26 (AT state), as shown in FIG. 179(c), the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display the current MY value (maximum difference number). ) is 8341), and the game value display means (medal display device MD) is used to display the current medal acquisition difference (this example). , the number "15706" indicating that the difference in the number of medals obtained is 15706 is displayed.

<Specific example of complete function and gaming value display 1/Game section PT27 (normal state)>
The gaming period PT27 in FIGS. 177 (7) to (8) is a normal state of the advantageous section (second section), and is a state in which the number of differential sheets is decreasing.

The game period PT27 (normal state) is a game state in which the difference in number of coins (= number of coins paid out - number of coins bet) decreases, and in this example, the difference in number of coins decreases from difference in number of coins CT27 (e.g., 15706, a first point) to difference in number of coins CT28 (e.g., 15128, a second point).

During the gaming period PT27 (normal state), although not shown, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to perform normal effects (display of normal background, etc.) corresponding to the current gaming state (normal state in this example). At the same time, a display indicating the difference in the number of medals obtained is displayed using the game value display means (medal display device MD).

<Example 1 of the complete function and game value display / game section PT28 (AT state)>
The game period PT28 in Figure 177 (8) to (9) is in the AT state, and the difference in number of coins is increasing.

The gaming period PT28 (AT state) is a gaming state in which the difference number of coins (=number of payouts - number of bets) gradually increases, and in this example, the difference number of coins is the difference number CT28 (for example, 15128. Second point) The number of difference sheets increases from CT30 (for example, 19,000 at the first point).

During the gaming period PT28 (AT state), in the first game of the gaming period PT28 (AT state), as shown in FIG. 179(d), the current gaming state (in this example, AT AT performance etc. corresponding to the state) is executed.

In addition, in the first game of the game period PT28 (AT state), the MY value (maximum difference number) is set to the initial value (0 in this example), and counting of the MY value (maximum difference number) is started. As shown in FIG. 179(d), a display is made indicating the current MY value (maximum difference number) (in this example, the number and character string "0000GET" is displayed, indicating that the MY value (maximum difference number) is 0), and a display is made indicating the current difference in the number of medals acquired (in this example, the number "15128" is displayed, indicating that the difference in the number of medals acquired is 15128 medals) using the game value display means (medal display device MD).

In addition, in this example, in the game before the timing shown in FIG. 177 (9) during the game period PT28 (AT state), the number of medal acquisition differences is smaller than the third value (16383 in this example). Since a certain value (in this example, 16369) has been reached, advance notification of reaching the gaming value display upper limit is executed using the liquid crystal display device 157, as shown in FIG. 179(e).

The advance notification that the gaming value display upper limit has been reached is a notification that suggests the possibility that the number of medal acquisition differences will reach the third value (16383 in this example), and the advance notification that the gaming value display upper limit has been reached in this example is A display that suggests the possibility that the difference in the number of medals earned will reach the third value (16383 in this example) (in this example, the text string "Near the upper limit of counting") and a prompt to settle the medals This is a notification that includes a display (in this example, a display of the character string "Please press the counting button").

According to this example, by notifying in advance that the upper limit (third value) of the display of the number of earned differences by the playing value display means will be reached (that the display upper limit of the playing value display means is near), the game It is possible to encourage people to pay in advance.

Next, in this example, during play at the timing shown in FIG. 177 (9) during play period PT28 (AT state), the difference in the number of medals won reaches a third value (16,383 in this example), and so a notification that the play value display upper limit has been reached is executed using the liquid crystal display device 157, as shown in FIG. 179 (f).

The gaming value display upper limit reaching notification is a notification that prompts the settlement of medals, and the gaming value display upper limit reaching notification in this example indicates that the number of medal acquisition differences has reached a third value (16383 in this example). A notification that includes a suggestive display (in this example, the string ``No more displays are possible'') and a display prompting the user to pay for medals (in this example, the string ``please press the counting button'') be.

Next, in this example, in a game during play period PT28 (AT state) after the timing shown in FIG. 177 (9), the settlement button 134 (counting button) is pressed and the medals are settled, so that, as shown in FIG. 179 (f), the game value display means (medal display device MD) displays a display showing the current difference in the number of medals acquired (in this example, the number "10000" is displayed, indicating that the difference in the number of medals acquired is 10,000).

Next, in this example, during game period PT28 (AT state), in game play prior to the timing shown in FIG. 177 (10), the MY value (maximum difference number) reaches a value (in this example, 18,500) that is smaller than the second value (in this example, 19,000), and therefore the LCD display device 157 is used to execute the complete function advance notification shown in FIG. 180 (b).

The complete function advance notification is a notification that suggests the possibility that the MY value (maximum difference number) will reach a second value (19,000 in this example), and the complete function advance notification in this example is a notification that includes a display that suggests in advance that play will be stopped (in this example, the display of the text string "500 coins remaining").

In this example, by notifying the player in advance that the maximum difference number will reach the second value (the upper limit of the complete function is approaching), the player can be encouraged to settle their account in advance.

Subsequently, in this example, in the game at the timing shown in FIG. 177 (10) during the gaming period PT28 (AT state), the MY value (maximum difference number) reaches the second value (19000 in this example). Therefore, the complete function advance notification shown in FIG. 180(c) is executed using the liquid crystal display device 157.

The completion upper limit notification is a notification that suggests the execution of a gaming stop, and the complete upper limit reaching notification in this example is a display that suggests the execution of a gaming stop (in this example, the text "Cancelled. Game will be stopped") This notification includes a display prompting the user to pay for medals (in this example, a display of a character string "Please press the counting button").

<Specific example 2 of complete function and gaming value display>
Next, specific example 1 of the complete function and game value display will be explained using FIG. 177 and FIGS. 181 to 182.

181 and 182 are diagrams showing modified examples of various performances and various notifications during a certain game period shown in FIG. 177.

Specific example 1 described using Figures 177 to 179 shows an example in which a notification that the play value display upper limit has been reached is executed first, followed by a notification that the complete upper limit has been reached. Specific example 2 differs in that a notification that the play value display upper limit has been reached is executed first, followed by a notification that the complete upper limit has been reached. Note that the various effects and notifications during play periods PT21 to PT25 are the same in specific examples 1 and 2, and therefore will not be described here.

<Specific example 2 of complete function and gaming value display/gaming section PT26 (AT state)>
The game period PT26 in FIGS. 177(6) to 177(7) is an AT state, and the difference in the number of coins is increasing.

The game period PT26 (AT state) is a game state in which the difference in number of coins (= payout amount - bet amount) gradually increases, and in this example, the difference in number of coins increases from difference in number of coins CT26 (e.g., 7365, the second point) to difference in number of coins CT27 (e.g., 15706, the first point).

During play period PT26 (AT state), in the first play of play period PT26 (AT state), the MY value (maximum difference) is set to the initial value (0 in this example), counting of the MY value (maximum difference) is started, and, as shown in FIG. 181(a), a display is made indicating the current MY value (maximum difference) (in this example, the number and character string "0000GET" is displayed indicating that the MY value (maximum difference) is 0), and a display is made indicating the current difference in medals acquired (in this example, the number "07365" is displayed indicating that the difference in medals acquired is 7365 medals) using the play value display means (medal display device MD).

Subsequently, in this example, in the game after the timing shown in FIG. 177 (6) during the game period PT26 (AT state), the settlement button 134 (counting button) is pressed, and the medal settlement (main) is performed. In the example, since a payment of 5,000 coins has been made, as shown in FIGS. 181(b) to (c), the difference in medals obtained before payment is displayed using the gaming value display means (medal display device MD). After displaying the number (in this example, the number "10165" indicating that the difference in the number of medals earned is 10165), the display showing the difference in the number of medals obtained after payment (in this example, the number ``10165'') is displayed. , the number "05165" indicating that the difference in the number of medals obtained is 05165 is displayed.

In addition, in the gaming period PT26 (AT state), if the end condition of the AT state is satisfied (in this example, a predetermined number of AT games have been played), the AT state shifts to the normal state, and the gaming period PT26 (AT state), as shown in FIG. 181(d), the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display the current MY value (maximum difference number). ) is 8341), and the game value display means (medal display device MD) is used to display the current medal acquisition difference (this example). , the number "10706" indicating that the difference in the number of medals obtained is 10706 is displayed.

<Specific example 3 of complete function and game value display/Game section PT27 (normal state)>
The gaming period PT27 in FIGS. 177 (7) to (8) is a normal state of the advantageous section (second section), and is a state in which the number of differential sheets is decreasing.

The game period PT27 (normal state) is a game state in which the difference in number of coins (= number of coins paid out - number of coins bet) decreases, and in this example, the difference in number of coins decreases from difference in number of coins CT27 (e.g., 10706, the first point) to difference in number of coins CT28 (e.g., 10128, the second point).

During the gaming period PT27 (normal state), although not shown, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to perform normal effects (display of normal background, etc.) corresponding to the current gaming state (normal state in this example). At the same time, a display indicating the difference in the number of medals obtained is displayed using the game value display means (medal display device MD).

<Specific example 2 of the complete function and game value display / game section PT28 (AT state)>
The game period PT28 in Figures 177 (8) to (19) is in the AT state, and the difference in number of coins is increasing.

The game period PT28 (AT state) is a game state in which the difference in number of coins (= payout amount - bet amount) gradually increases, and in this example, the difference in number of coins increases from difference in number of coins CT28 (e.g., 10,128, the second point) to difference in number of coins CT30 (e.g., 14,000, the first point).

During the game period PT28 (AT state), in the first game of the game period PT28 (AT state), the current game state (in this example, AT AT performance etc. corresponding to the state) is executed.

In addition, in the game period PT28 (AT state), in the first game of the game period PT28 (AT state), the MY value (maximum difference number) is set to the initial value (in this example, 0), and the MY value (maximum difference number) is set to the initial value (0 in this example). At the same time, as shown in FIG. 181(e), a display indicating the current MY value (maximum number of differences) (in this example, indicating that the MY value (maximum number of differences) is 0) is started. At the same time, the game value display means (medal display device MD) is used to display the current number of medals obtained (in this example, the number of medals obtained is The number "10128" indicating that there are 10128 sheets is displayed.

Next, in this example, during game period PT28 (AT state), in game play prior to the timing shown in FIG. 177 (10), the MY value (maximum difference number) reaches a value (in this example, 18,500) that is smaller than the second value (in this example, 19,000), and therefore the LCD display device 157 is used to execute the complete function advance notification shown in FIG. 181 (f).

The complete function advance notification is a notification that suggests the possibility that the MY value (maximum difference number) will reach a second value (19,000 in this example), and the complete function advance notification in this example is a notification that includes a display that suggests in advance that play will be stopped (in this example, the display of the text string "500 coins remaining").

According to this example, by notifying in advance that the maximum difference number will reach the second value (that the upper limit of the complete function is near), it is possible to urge the player to make a payment in advance.

Subsequently, in this example, in the game at the timing shown in FIG. 177 (10) during the gaming period PT28 (AT state), the MY value (maximum difference number) reaches the second value (19000 in this example). Therefore, the complete function advance notification shown in FIG. 182(a) is executed using the liquid crystal display device 157.

The completion upper limit notification is a notification that suggests the execution of a gaming stop, and the complete upper limit reaching notification in this example is a display that suggests the execution of a gaming stop (in this example, the text "Cancelled. Game will be stopped") column display), a display prompting you to settle the medals (in this example, the text string "Please press the counting button"), and a display showing the current MY value (maximum difference) (in this example, the MY This notification includes the number and character string "3872GET" indicating that the value (maximum difference number) is 3872.

According to this example, before reaching the upper limit value (third value) of the display of the number of earned differences by the game value display means, a notification suggesting the execution of a game stop may be executed, so that the game value The game can be progressed without giving the player the trouble of reaching the upper limit (third value) of the display of the number of acquired differences by the display means, and the player's desire to play can be maintained. can.

In addition, if the maximum difference reaches the second value (the upper limit of the complete function) after the upper limit (third value) of the display of the acquired difference by the game value display means is reached, the player will be prompted to settle twice. However, if the maximum difference reaches the second value first (the upper limit of the complete function is reached), the player will only be prompted to settle once, which may allow the player to enjoy playing without feeling annoyed.

Further, at the time when the player completes settlement of at least a part of the earned difference number (in this example, a certain game in the game period shown in FIG. 177 (6)), the second value (in this example, 19000) If the value obtained by subtracting the number of obtained differences from the third value (in this example, 16383) is greater than the value obtained by subtracting the maximum number of differences from In some cases, the maximum difference number reaches the second value, so if the player frequently settles (counts) the gaming value, the gaming value can reach the second value (the upper limit of the complete function). The number of gaming values up to the upper limit (third value) displayed by the gaming value display means can be larger than the number of gaming values, so when a large amount of gaming value is acquired, settlement ( In some cases, counting) can be completed in one go.

The manner in which the completion upper limit is reached notification is not limited to this example. For example, as shown in FIG. 182(b), even if the MY value (maximum difference number) reaches the second value, it is not necessary to display a display showing the current MY value (maximum difference number).

In addition, in this example, during the game period PT28 (AT state), the difference in the number of medals won has not reached a certain value (in this example, 15,369) that is smaller than the third value (in this example, 16,383), so unlike the above specific example 1, no advance notification of reaching the game value display upper limit or notification of reaching the game value display upper limit is executed.

<Example of movement of movable body in response to completion upper limit notification and complete function advance notification>
Next, an example of the operation of the movable body accompanying the complete upper limit reaching notification and the complete function advance notification will be described with reference to FIGS. 183 to 185. In addition, in the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the configurations already described in other embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted. Furthermore, for configurations that are inconsistent between the following description and the previous embodiment, the words and symbols in this example shall take precedence.

Figure 176 and other figures explain a configuration in which a completion upper limit reaching notification and a completion function advance notification are given in relation to the operation of the complete function. Here, in a configuration in which a movable body that can move in front of the performance image display device 157 is provided, the above notifications may be difficult to recognize depending on the position of this movable body. Figure 183 (a) shows an example in which, when these notifications are not being executed, the contents of the performance image display device 157 become difficult to see due to the execution of a performance in which the movable body, the shutter 163, is in a closed state.

In view of the above problems, when these notifications are being executed, the movable body may be arranged in a position that does not block the display area of the performance image display device 157 so that the notification contents are not obscured. In this example, detection pieces 1631a and 1631b are provided for the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b that constitute the shutter 163, respectively, and sensors 1632a and 1632b are further provided to detect the detection pieces 1631a and 1631b. Then, by moving the detection pieces 1631a and 1631b to a position where the sensors 1632a and 1632b detect them, the shutter 163 is opened and does not block the display area of the performance image display device 157. The position where the sensors 1632a and 1632b detect the detection pieces 1631a and 1631b is the initial position of the shutter 163. FIG. 183(b) shows that the shutter 163 is in an open state (initial position) while the complete function advance notification is being executed. Also, FIG. 183(c) shows that the shutter 163 is in an open state (initial position) while the complete upper limit reached notification is being executed.

In this example, the shutter 163 is configured such that the position where the sensors 1632a and 1632b detect the detection pieces 1631a and 1631b is the initial position, and the position information from there is derived based on the drive information. In this configuration, if the shutter 163 is moved by an external force, a deviation occurs between the position information grasped by the control unit and the actual position, so a configuration may be adopted in which a position correction operation is performed to return the shutter 163 to the initial position. For example, when the sensors 1632a and 1632b detect the detection pieces 1631a and 1631b (open state), the shutter 163 is moved once to a position where the sensors 1632a and 1632b do not detect the detection pieces 1631a and 1631b, and then moved again from there to the initial position (hereinafter, position correction 1). In addition, when the sensors 1632a and 1632b are not detecting the detection pieces 1631a and 1631b, the shutter 163 is moved to a position where the sensors 1632a and 1632b detect the detection pieces 1631a and 1631b (hereinafter, position correction 2). Position correction 1 may be performed again after position correction 2. Completion of this series of operations makes it possible to determine that there is no abnormality in the drive system and sensor of the shutter 163, and to correct the position information while moving the shutter 163 to the initial position. The timing for performing position correction is not particularly limited, and may be, for example, when the front door 102 is opened or closed, when the power is turned on, or when the position of the shutter 163 in the initial position shifts and the sensors 1632a and 1632b no longer detect the detection pieces 1631a and 1631b, as described below.

Here, if a complete upper limit reaching notification or a complete function advance notification is executed when performing the position correction 1, the above notification may be difficult to recognize depending on the position of the shutter 163. Therefore, when performing position correction 1, the shutter 163 may be operated within a range of positions that do not block the display area of the effect image display device 157 as much as possible.

FIGS. 184(a) to 184(c) show an example in which position correction 1 is performed during execution of complete function advance notification. First, in FIG. 184(a), it is assumed that the shutter 163 is in an open state (initial position) during execution of complete function advance notification, and the front door 102 is opened from there. At this time, since the position of the shutter 163 may shift due to vibration, the position correction is executed when the front door 102 is closed. FIG. 184(b) shows the situation when position correction 1 is executed because the shutter 163 is at the initial position. This figure shows that the shutter 163 is moved to a position where the sensors 1632a and 1632b do not detect the detection pieces 1631a and 1631b, and so as not to block the display area of the effect image display device 157 as much as possible. There is. FIG. 184(c) shows that position correction 1 has been completed and the shutter 163 has moved to the initial position. Note that the same operation will occur even if the complete upper limit reaching notification is not the complete function advance notification.

FIGS. 185(a) to 185(c) show an example in which position correction 1 is performed during execution of complete upper limit reaching notification. First, in FIG. 185(a), it is assumed that the shutter 163 is in the open state (initial position) during execution of the complete upper limit reaching notification, and then a power outage recovery occurs (the setting key is in the OFF state). Before the power is turned on, there is a possibility that the position of the shutter 163 may shift due to maintenance work or the like, so the position correction is executed when the power is turned on. FIG. 185(b) shows the situation when position correction 1 is executed because the shutter 163 is at the initial position. This figure shows that the shutter 163 is moved so that the detection pieces 1631a and 1631b are not detected by the sensors 1632a and 1632b, and the display area of the effect image display device 157 is not blocked as much as possible. There is. FIG. 185(c) shows that position correction 1 has been completed and the shutter 163 has moved to the initial position. In addition, as in the example above, even if the power is restored after a power outage while the completion upper limit reaching notification is being executed, the complete function is not canceled, but in the case of advance notification of the complete function, when the power is restored after a power outage, the MY counter is cleared. Complete function advance notification will not be executed due to this. In this case, position correction 1 will be executed on the normal screen, but since complete function advance notification has not been executed, for example, even if position correction 1, which temporarily closes the shutter 163, is executed, good.

Note that the examples in FIGS. 184 and 185 are when position correction 1 is executed, and when position correction 2 is executed (in a state where the sensors 1632a and 1632b do not detect the detection pieces 1631a and 1631b), the shutter 163 is The action is to move to the initial position. The position correction during execution of these completion upper limit notification or complete function advance notification is such that the amount of movement is smaller than the maximum amount of movement of the shutter 163 during normal gaming. Furthermore, the examples shown in FIGS. 184 and 185 are examples in which position correction 1 is executed while completion upper limit reaching notification or complete function advance notification is being executed, and position correction 1 when these notifications are not being executed. The operation is not limited to the above-mentioned operation, but may be such that, for example, the shutter 163 is once closed and then opened.

In addition, in the case of a configuration in which various notifications during the game are executed using the effect image display device 157, shutter 163, etc., the above-mentioned complete function advance notification and various notifications may be executed in duplicate. In this case, during the completion function advance notification, among the various notification operations, the shutter 163 may be restricted from operating while remaining at the initial position, or while the complete function advance notification is being executed, the various notification operations may be restricted to normal operation. It may be configured such that the values are different. In addition, during the execution of complete function advance notification, among the various notification operations, the shutter 163 is restricted from operating while remaining stopped at the initial position, and then the value of the MY counter moves away from the upper limit, and the execution condition of complete function advance notification is changed. If the value is not satisfied, the restriction of the shutter 163 may be canceled and various notifications may be executed.

<Main control unit processing related to complete function>
Next, an example of processing of the main control unit regarding the complete function will be described using FIGS. 186 to 188. In addition, in the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the configurations already described in other embodiments, and the description will be omitted. Furthermore, for configurations that are inconsistent between the following description and the previous embodiment, the words and symbols in this example shall take precedence.

First, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described using FIG. 186. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing by the main control section.

As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a startup signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs a startup signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input is reset-started by a reset interrupt and executes the main control section main processing shown in FIG. 186 according to the control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

When the power is turned on, first, in step S101, the main control unit initial setting process is performed. In this main control unit initial setting process, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, interrupt prohibition is set, the I/O 310 is initialized, various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and operation permission and initial values are set in the WDT 314. Details of this process will be described later using FIG. 187.

In step S103, a game start process is executed. In this process, it is checked whether or not medals have been inserted (by care or by operating the bet buttons 130 to 132), and if medals have been inserted, preparations are made to send an insert command indicating this. Note that if the player wins a replay in the previous game, the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game are inserted, so there is no need for the player to insert medals. Also, a check is made to see if the start lever 135 has been operated while a specified number (2 or 3) of medals have been used, and if the start lever 135 has been operated, the number of inserted medals and the valid winning line are checked. Confirm and start playing.

In step S105, various lottery processes are executed, including the internal winning lottery process.

In step S107, reel stop data corresponding to the first stop operation is prepared based on the result of the internal winning combination lottery. This reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control section 300.

In step S109, rotation of the reels 110 to 112 is started on the condition that the game interval timer (subtracted in a timer update process described later) is 0, and an initial value is set in the game interval timer. Furthermore, when the reels 110 to 112 start rotating, preparations are made to send a reel rotation start command to the first sub-control unit 400. After that, when the reels 110 to 112 reach a predetermined rotational speed and the optical sensor provided on each reel detects the symbol position of each reel, the stop operation for the stop buttons 137 to 139 is enabled. Note that the game interval counter ensures the minimum time required for one game (4.1 seconds in this embodiment) and suppresses the gambling nature.

In step S111, reel stop control processing is executed. In this process, when any of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is pressed after the stop operation is enabled, the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to the pressed stop button 137 to 139 are stopped. Specifically, each time a stop operation is performed, a stop table of reel stop data is referred to, and the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to the stop operation are stopped according to the number of drawn frames set in the stop table. Further, for the first stop operation, reel stop data corresponding to the second stop operation is prepared, and for the second stop operation, reel stop data corresponding to the third stop operation is prepared. Note that for each stop operation, preparations are made to send the corresponding command (first to third press commands) to the first sub-control unit 400, and each time the reels 110 to 112 stop, the corresponding command (the first to third press commands) is prepared. Preparations are made for transmitting the first to third stop commands) to the first sub-control unit 400. When all the reels 110 to 112 have stopped, the process advances to step S113.

In step S113, winning determination processing is performed. Here, when a symbol combination corresponding to some winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. Note that after determining the winning combination, preparations are made for transmitting the winning command to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S115, if a winning combination with a payout has been won, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is awarded (paid out), and the number of medals awarded is displayed using the payout number display 127.

In step S117, a state update process for updating various states in the slot machine 100 is executed.

In step S119, complete function activation processing is executed. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 188.

This completes one game. After this, the game will proceed by returning to step S103 and repeating the above-mentioned process.

Next, the details of the main control unit initial setting process (step S101) in the main control unit main process in FIG. 186 will be described with reference to FIG. 187. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main control unit initial setting process (step S101) in FIG. 186.

First, in step S1001 that is executed first, initial settings at startup are performed. This initial setting includes processing such as setting the stack initial value to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304 (temporary setting), setting the interrupt mask, initial setting of the I/O 310, and initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308. conduct.

In step S1003, whether the low voltage signal is on or not, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 330 determines whether the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 300 is less than a predetermined value (9V in this embodiment). monitor whether a low voltage signal is output indicating that the voltage has decreased. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects a power cutoff), this step S1003 is repeatedly executed, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 has not detected a power cutoff) Then, the process advances to step S1005. Note that even if the supply voltage does not yet reach the predetermined value (9V) immediately after the power is turned on, step S1003 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage reaches the predetermined value or more.

In step S1005, it is determined whether the setting key switch 281, which is located inside the slot machine 100 and cannot be operated by the player, is on. If the setting key switch 281 is on (the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch and turned 90 degrees to the right), the process advances to step S1013; otherwise, the process advances to step S1006.

In step S1006, it is determined whether the complete function is in operation. If the complete function is in operation, the process advances to step S1011; otherwise, the process advances to step S1007.

In step S1007, it is determined whether the reset switch 291 (RAM clear switch) is on. If this switch is on, the process advances to step S1009; otherwise, the process advances to step S1011.

In step S1009, RAM 308 is initialized (RAM cleared), and this main control unit initial setting process is terminated. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 executes a process to notify the user that initialization has been performed (for example, displaying or outputting a sound indicating that RAM has been cleared or reset) based on receiving a command indicating that this process has been performed.

In step S1011, a RAM data write-back process is executed. In this process, it is first determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the data stored in RAM 308. The data determined here is data that was saved to RAM 308 when the power to slot machine 100 was turned off or due to a momentary interruption (a voltage drop below the operating voltage). In other words, in step S1011, it is determined whether or not the data has been securely saved to RAM 308. Specifically, it is determined whether the power flag is normal (on) and whether the calculation result using the checksum is normal, and if both determinations are normal, it is determined that there is no abnormality in the restored data in RAM 308.

If it is determined that there is no abnormality in the restoration data in the RAM 308, processing is performed to restore the state of the register to the state immediately before the power-off processing was performed. In this RAM data write-back process, for example, the data stored in the RAM 308 is written back to the register of the CPU 304, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power outage is read, and the stack Reset to pointer (main setting). In addition, after reading out the values of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power outage and resetting them in each register, interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, the CPU 304 executes the control program based on the reset stack pointer and register, and as a result, the slot machine 100 returns to the state at power-off. Furthermore, here, a power restoration command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This power recovery command is a command that indicates that the power has returned to the state at power-off. This power restoration command includes information such as RT at the time of power cut, gaming status, performance status, etc., and is transmitted by the main control unit timer interrupt processing.

On the other hand, if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the recovery data of RAM 308, preparations are made to clear all memory areas of RAM 308 except for the used stack area, and then the system transitions to an infinite loop state (RAM error processing). From this state, it is necessary to turn the power back on with the RAM clear switch or setting key switch turned on. In other words, this embodiment is configured so that the progress of the game is stopped if an error occurs in RAM 308.

In step S1013, which is proceeded to when the setting key switch 281 is on in step S1005, a setting change process is executed according to the state of the setting key switch 281, and this main control unit initial setting process is ended. Note that the complete function activation flag is set to OFF by the RAM clearing process executed in this process.

Next, the details of the complete function activation process (step S119) in the main control unit main process in FIG. 186 will be described with reference to FIG. 188. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the complete function activation process (step S119) in FIG. 186.

First, in step S1701 that is executed first, the complete function activation flag is referred to. This complete function activation flag is turned on when the difference between the maximum number of differences obtained and the minimum number of differences obtained (maximum number of differences, so-called MY value) reaches a predetermined value (19000 in this example). Set. For example, if a big bonus (accessory item) is installed, the complete function activation flag may not be referenced while this big bonus is activated, or when a predetermined value is reached and the big bonus is not activated. It may be set to on in some cases.

In step S1703, it is determined whether the complete function activation flag is on. If the complete function activation flag is on, the process proceeds to step S1705. If the flag is off, the complete function activation process ends.

In step S1705, a notification of the operation of the complete function is executed. Specifically, a process (including sending a command to the first sub-control unit 400) is executed to issue a notification indicating that play has stopped (a game stop state) using various notification means (e.g., the game information display 126, the payout number display 127, the performance image display device 157, the speakers 272, 277, and various lamps 420).

In step S1707, a process for transmitting a security command including information on the complete function activation flag to the first sub-control unit 400 every 100 ms is executed, and thereafter the process shifts to an infinite loop state.

After step S1707, no new processing is executed and the game cannot proceed. On the other hand, in addition to sending the security command set in step S1707, the main control unit 300 transmits the security command set in step S1707 by main control unit timer interrupt processing that is executed at a predetermined cycle (approximately once every 2 ms in this embodiment). Detection processing (for example, disconnection detection), error notification processing, error release switch reception processing, and error release processing are executed. Note that if the security command includes information indicating that the complete function activation flag is on, the completion upper limit notification is executed. Further, if an error is detected, notification regarding the error is executed. In this case, in the effect image display device 157, the error notification may be performed in an area that does not interfere with the complete upper limit reaching notification, or the complete upper limit reaching notification may be executed in addition to the error notification.

The following explains the operation when the complete function is activated, based on the flowchart explained above.

The complete function is a function that sets the slot machine 100 to a discontinued state when the above-mentioned number of acquisition differences reaches a predetermined value (in this example, 19,000) based on the time when the number of acquisition differences is the lowest. It is. In this embodiment, this function is activated by setting the complete function activation flag to ON when this condition is satisfied. Specifically, if the complete function activation flag is set to on at the end of the game, a notification indicating a discontinued state is executed in the complete function activation process (step S119 in FIG. 186), and the game is stopped. (Yes in step S1703 of FIG. 187, and then an infinite loop is entered). Note that while this complete function is in operation, processing based on the operations of the counting button 171 and lending button 707 can be executed, but processing based on other operating means can also be executed (for example, various information (for example, various information using menu operation buttons) can be executed. It is also possible to display a two-dimensional code (such as a two-dimensional code) according to the progress of the game. Additionally, the process of determining whether or not a setting key switch operation to confirm settings, a bet operation, a lever operation, a payment operation, and various performance settings (volume settings using the volume adjustment switch, etc.) have been performed will not be executed. Various processes based on some operations, such as , may not be executed while the complete function is in operation. That is, while the complete function is in operation, there may be processes that can be executed by an operation, and there may also be processes that are not executed even if an operation is performed.

When the complete function is not in operation (including during a complete function advance notification), the RAM clear process can be executed by turning the power back on while pressing the reset switch 291 (step S1009 in FIG. 187). For example, the front door 102 can be opened and the setting key turned on to switch to the setting value confirmation mode. However, once the complete function activation flag is set to on, if the power is turned back on while the reset switch 291 is pressed, the MY value is cleared but the complete function activation flag is not cleared. When this complete function activation flag is on, even if the reset switch 291 is pressed and the power is turned back on, the operation is stopped again and the state in which the complete function is in operation is not canceled (Yes in step S1006 in FIG. 187). Also, when the complete function is in operation, even if the power of the first sub-control unit 400 or the second sub-control unit 500 is turned on again, the complete upper limit reaching notification is executed as long as a security command including information that the complete function activation flag is set to on is transmitted from the main control unit 300. On the other hand, when the setting change operation is performed (power is turned on with the setting key switch 218 on), the setting change process (transition to setting change mode) is executed, the complete function activation flag is set to off, and the stopped state is released.

As described above, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, a pachinko machine, an enclosed gaming machine, a medalless slot machine) is a gaming machine equipped with a counting means (e.g., a difference number counter), an alarm means (e.g., the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1, the speakers 272, 277 shown in FIG. 3, various lamps), and a gaming value display means (e.g., the medal display device MD shown in FIG. 181) capable of displaying the amount of gaming value (e.g., gaming medals, gaming balls, virtual credits, virtual medals), and the counting means is a means capable of counting the acquired difference number obtained by subtracting the amount of the gaming value used in the game (e.g., the value of the number of medals inserted) from the amount of the gaming value awarded as a result of the game, and the counting means When the value reaches a first value (e.g., 2400), a game state advantageous to the player (hereinafter referred to as a "predetermined game state") ends, and the notification means may issue a notification (e.g., a completion upper limit reaching notification as shown in FIG. 176(b)) suggesting the execution of a game stop when the difference between the maximum and minimum values of the acquired difference number (hereinafter referred to as the "maximum difference number"; for example, the MY value) reaches a second value (e.g., 19000), the game value display means is a means capable of displaying the acquired difference number up to a third value (e.g., 16383), and there is a case where the maximum difference number reaches the second value (hereinafter referred to as the "first case") before the acquired difference number reaches the third value.

Furthermore, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. , the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1, the speakers 272, 277, and various lamps shown in FIG. means (for example, medal display device MD shown in FIG. 181), and a first section (for example, , a non-advantageous section) and a second section (for example, an advantageous section) in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop operation means can be notified, and when a transition condition is satisfied in the first section (for example, an internal If a lottery is executed to move to an advantageous section based on the winning combination, and if the lottery is won, the lottery will proceed to the second section, and if the end conditions are met in the second section (for example, a predetermined net increase If the number of coins (for example, 2,400 coins) is exceeded, the second section can be completed and the transition can be made to the first section, and the counting means calculates the game value from the amount of the gaming value awarded as a result of the game. means capable of counting the number of earned points obtained by subtracting the amount of the gaming value used for the game (e.g., the value of the number of inserted medals), and the value of the counting means reaches a first value (e.g., 2400). In this case, the termination condition is satisfied, and the notification means determines that the difference between the maximum value of the number of acquired differences and the minimum value of the number of acquired differences (hereinafter referred to as "maximum number of differences"; for example, MY value) is When the second value (for example, 19000) is reached, a notification suggesting the execution of a game stop (for example, the completion upper limit reaching notification shown in FIG. 176(b)) may be executed, and the gaming value display means is means capable of displaying the number of acquired differences up to a third value (for example, 16383), and before the number of acquired differences reaches the third value, the maximum difference number reaches the second value. This gaming machine is characterized in that there is a case in which the first case is reached (hereinafter referred to as the "first case").

In the gaming machine according to this embodiment, a notification suggesting that play should be stopped may be issued before the upper limit (third value) of the difference in the number of wins displayed by the gaming value display means is reached, so the game can be progressed without causing the player any inconvenience when the upper limit (third value) of the difference in the number of wins displayed by the gaming value display means is reached, and the player's motivation to play can be sustained.

Further, when the value of the counting means reaches the first value, the value of the counting means is set to an initial value (for example, 0) in connection with the end of the predetermined gaming state, and the maximum difference When the number reaches the second value, the game is stopped, and the notification means causes the game value to be settled (for example, paid out using a settlement button, credit is returned to one's own card, chips, etc.). etc.) The notification means executes a notification (for example, the complete function advance notification shown in FIG. 176(a)) to encourage players to play, and when the number of earned differences reaches the third value, the notification means It may also be possible to issue a notification prompting payment (for example, a notification that the gaming value display upper limit has been reached as shown in FIG. 176(d)).

If the maximum difference number reaches the second value (reaches the upper limit of the complete function) after reaching the upper limit value (third value) of the display of the number of earned differences by the gaming value display means, payment will be made. You will be prompted twice, but if the maximum difference number reaches the second value first (reaching the upper limit of the complete function), you will only be prompted to pay once, which may be annoying to players. There are cases where you can enjoy the game without having to worry about it.

Further, at the time when the player completes settlement of at least a portion of the earned difference number, the earned difference number is subtracted from the third value by less than the value obtained by subtracting the maximum difference number from the second value. If the above value is larger, the first case may occur.

With such a configuration, if the player frequently settles (counts) the gaming value, the number of gaming values up to the second value (upper limit of the complete function) will be higher than the number of gaming values displayed by the gaming value display means. Since the number of gaming values up to the upper limit (third value) of the display of the number of acquired differences can be increased, settlement (counting) can be done only once when a large amount of gaming value has been acquired. There are cases.

In addition, the notification means may provide notification indicating the possibility that the maximum difference number will reach the second value before the maximum difference number reaches the second value (for example, as shown in FIG. 176(a) Complete function advance notification shown in Figure 1) may be executed.

With this configuration, the player can be notified in advance that the maximum difference number will reach the second value (the upper limit of the complete function is approaching), which can encourage the player to settle their account in advance.

In addition, the notification means may provide a notification (for example, as shown in FIG. (Advance notification of reaching the gaming value display upper limit) may be executed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to notify in advance that the upper limit value (third value) of the display of the winning difference by the gaming value display means will be reached (that the display upper limit of the gaming value display means is near). , players can be prompted to pay in advance.

Also, in the above explanation,
A counting means (e.g., the main control unit 300) for updating a count value (e.g., a MY value) relating to a game value from an initial value;
Notification means (for example, the game information display 126, the payout number display 127, the performance image display device 157, the speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420),
A movable body (e.g., a shutter 163),
A gaming machine equipped with
The game is stopped when the count value reaches a first value (e.g., 19,000) (e.g., Yes in step S1703 of FIG. 188).
The notification means is a means for executing a first notification (e.g., a notification that a complete upper limit has been reached) that notifies the game stop state based on the count value reaching the first value (e.g., step S1705 in FIG. 188),
The movable body may move to an initial position based on the count value reaching the first value (for example, FIG. 183(c)).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this game machine, it may be possible to make the user understand that the game is in a stopped state by the movement of the movable body.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
In the game stop state, the movable body may execute a predetermined operation including an operation of moving in a direction away from the initial position (for example, FIG. 184, FIG. 185).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this game machine, even if the movable body moves due to external factors such as vibrations applied to the game machine, the movable body can be moved to the initial position and the player can recognize that the game is in a stopped state.

Further, the game machine described above,
comprising a detection means for detecting a detection piece of the movable body,
The predetermined operation is an operation in which the detection piece moves away from the detection means and then moves toward the detection means (for example, FIGS. 184 and 185);
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this gaming machine, even if the movable body moves due to external factors such as vibrations applied to the gaming machine, the movable body can be moved to its initial position, allowing the player to understand that play has stopped.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A door body (e.g., a front door 102) is provided,
The movable body is provided on the door body (for example, FIG. 184).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this game machine, even if the movable body moves due to vibrations when the door is opened and closed, the movable body can be moved to the initial position and it can be recognized that the game is in a stopped state.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The notification means includes a display means (e.g., a performance image display device 157),
the display means is means capable of executing the first notification by using a display,
When the predetermined operation is performed from the initial position, the movable body does not overlap with a display area of the first notification on the display means (e.g., FIG. 184 and FIG. 185 ).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this game machine, since the movable body and the first notification do not overlap, it is possible to ensure that the game is stopped.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When the power is cut off during the game stop state and then restored, the game stop state is maintained,
When power is restored, the predetermined operation is executed (for example, FIG. 185).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this game machine, even when the power is turned on, it is possible to ensure that the game is stopped.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The notification means is a means for executing a second notification (e.g., a complete function advance notification) that notifies in advance that the game will be stopped based on the fact that the count value has reached a second value (e.g., 18,500) that is closer to the initial value than the first value,
The movable body may move to the initial position based on the count value reaching the second value (for example, FIG. 183(b)).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this game machine, it is possible to recognize that the game is about to be stopped by the movement of the movable body.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The notification means is a means capable of executing a third notification (e.g., various notifications) during operation of the movable body,
The notification means is a means capable of executing the third notification while the second notification is being executed and the movable body is located at the initial position (for example, see the description that "the complete function advance notification and various notifications may be executed in an overlapping manner").
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine allows the player to know that the game is about to stop by a third notification that does not involve the movement of a moving body.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When the count value reaches the second value and then a third value closer to the initial value than the second value, and the third notification is being executed, the movable body moves from the initial position to a position corresponding to the third notification (for example, see the description that "when the value reaches a value that does not satisfy the execution condition of the complete function advance notification, the restriction on the shutter 163 may be released and various notifications may be executed").
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this gaming machine, the player can know that the game stop state is approaching through the movement of the movable body and the third notification.

Also, in the above explanation,
A counting means (for example, main control unit 300) that updates a count value (for example, MY value) related to gaming value from an initial value;
Notification means (for example, game information display 126, payout number display 127, effect image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420),
a first operating means (e.g. a reset button);
A game machine comprising:
Based on the count value reaching a first value (for example, 19000), the non-gaming halt state changes to the gaming halt state (for example, Yes in step S1703 of FIG. 188),
The notification means is a means for executing a first notification (for example, complete upper limit reaching notification) for notifying the game stop state based on the count value reaching the first value (for example, as shown in FIG. 188 step S1705),
When the power is cut off in the non-game stop state and the power is turned on with the first operation means being operated, a first process (for example, step S1009 in FIG. 187) is executed;
If the power is cut off in the game stop state and the power is turned on with the first operation means being operated, the first process is not executed (for example, if Yes in step S1006 in FIG. 187, step S1009 is executed) ),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, the fact that the first process is not executed allows the player to understand that the game is in a stopped state.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
the first operating means is a RAM clear switch,
The first process is a RAM clear process.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, by not executing RAM clearing, it is possible to prevent the gaming stop state from being canceled by an operation other than the administrator.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When the power is turned off in the non-playing state and the power is turned on while the first operating means is being operated, the notification means executes a second notification (for example, a display or a voice output of "Reset has been performed");
When the power is cut off in the game stop state and the power is turned on in a state where the first operating means is operated, the second notification is not executed (for example, Yes in step S1006 of FIG. 187, step S1009 is not executed).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the second notification is not executed, so that the player can know that the game is in a stopped state.

Further, the game machine described above,
A second operating means (for example, a setting key switch) that cannot be operated by the player is provided,
When the power is cut off in the non-game stop state and the power is turned on with the second operation means being operated, a second process (for example, step S1013 in FIG. 187) is executed,
When the power is cut off in the game stop state and the power is turned on with the second operation means being operated, the second process is executed.
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

This gaming machine accepts the second operation by an arcade attendant even when play is stopped, improving the maintainability of the gaming machine.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The notification means is a means for executing a third notification (e.g., a complete function advance notification) that notifies in advance that the game will be stopped based on the fact that the count value has reached a second value (e.g., 18,500) that is closer to the initial value than the first value,
When the power is cut off during the execution of the third notification and the power is turned on while the first operating means is being operated, the first process is executed (for example, No in step S1006 of FIG. 187, Yes in step S1007, and step S1009 is executed).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this game machine, since the operation of the first operation means is accepted during the third notification, the maintainability of the game machine is improved.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
Equipped with a movable body (e.g., a shutter 163),
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A counting means (e.g., the main control unit 300) for updating a count value (e.g., a MY value) relating to a game value from an initial value;
Notification means (for example, the game information display 126, the payout number display 127, the performance image display device 157, the speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420),
A first operating means (e.g., a setting key, a volume control switch);
A gaming machine equipped with
The non-game stop state is changed to the game stop state based on the fact that the count value has reached a first value (e.g., 19000) (e.g., Yes in step S1703 of FIG. 188),
The notification means is a means for executing a first notification (e.g., a notification that a complete upper limit has been reached) that notifies the game stop state based on the count value reaching the first value (e.g., step S1705 in FIG. 188),
When the first operation means is operated in the non-game stop state, a first process (for example, display of a setting value by operating a setting key switch (setting value confirmation mode), various performance settings, etc.) is executed,
When the first operating means is operated in the game stop state, the first process is not executed (for example, see the description that "various processes based on some operations may not be executed while the complete function is operating").
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this gaming machine, the first process is not executed, allowing the player to be sure that gaming has stopped.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A display means (e.g., a setting value display device) is provided,
The first process is a process of executing a first display on the display means.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this game machine, since the first display is not executed, it is possible to ensure that the game is stopped.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A second operation means (e.g., a count button 171, a lending button 707, a menu operation button) that can be operated by a player is provided,
When the second operation means is operated in the non-game stop state, a second process (e.g., a counting process, etc.) is executed,
When the second operation means is operated in the game stop state, the second process (for example, see the description "during the operation of the complete function, there may be a process that can be executed by the operation") is executed.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine will accept a second operation from the player even when play has stopped, so it may be possible to deal with the situation without calling a store attendant.

Further, the game machine described above,
A second display means (for example, a game medal number display device 170, a performance image display device 157),
The second display means is a means for performing a second display (for example, a display by operating the count button 171 or the lending button 707) when the second operation means is operated in the game stop state. ,
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this gaming machine, during the first notification, it is possible to execute the second display while executing the first notification.

Further, the game machine described above,
The notification means is configured to notify in advance that the game will be stopped based on the count value reaching a second value (for example, 18500) that is closer to the initial value than the first value. It is a means for executing the second notification (for example, complete function advance notification),
If the first operating means is operated during execution of the second notification, the first processing is executed.
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, since the operation of the first operation means is accepted during the second notification, the maintainability of the game machine is improved.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
Equipped with a movable body (e.g., a shutter 163),
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A main control means (e.g., a main control unit 300);
A sub-control means (e.g., a first sub-control unit 400) that controls a notification means (e.g., a performance image display device 157);
A counting means (e.g., the main control unit 300) for updating a count value (e.g., a MY value) relating to a game value from an initial value;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game is stopped when the count value reaches a first value (e.g., 19,000) (e.g., Yes in step S1703 of FIG. 188).
The main control means is a means capable of transmitting a first command (e.g., a security command) including information indicating whether or not the game is stopped to the sub-control means,
The sub-control means is a means for causing the notification means to execute a first notification (for example, a complete upper limit reaching notification) for notifying the game stop state based on the information of the received first command.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

On this gaming machine, the first notification is issued to let the player know that play has stopped.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
In the game stop state, the first notification is executed even if only the sub-control means is turned off and power is restored (for example, see the description "Even if the power of the first sub-control unit 400 or the second sub-control unit 500 is turned on again, the completion upper limit reaching notification is executed").
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, even if the secondary control means is cut off, the first notification is issued after power is restored, allowing the player to know that gaming has stopped.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first notification is executed based on the information of the first command regardless of the value of the count value (for example, when the complete function is activated, even if the MY value is cleared by turning the power off and on again, the complete function is not activated. The activation flag remains on, and the completion upper limit notification is executed again).
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this gaming machine, even if the value of the counting means is cleared, the first notification can be executed to let the player know that the game is in a stopped state.

Further, the game machine described above,
The main control means is a means capable of executing error-related processing (for example, error detection processing) even in the game stop state;
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this game machine, processing related to errors can be executed even when the game is in a stopped state.

Further, the game machine described above,
The notification means is configured to notify in advance that the game will be stopped based on the count value reaching a second value (for example, 18500) that is closer to the initial value than the first value. It is a means for executing the second notification (for example, complete function advance notification),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
Equipped with a movable body (e.g., a shutter 163),
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

<Operation when the harness connection status changes>
Next, an example of operation when the connection state of the harness changes will be described with reference to Figures 189 to 195. In the following description, the configurations already described in other embodiments (e.g., Figures 66 to 167) will not be described. In addition, for configurations that contradict the following description and the previous embodiment, the words and symbols in this example will take precedence.

Various boards are arranged inside a game machine, but since space is limited, a plurality of boards and each operation unit are connected with appropriate harnesses. FIG. 189 shows an example of the connection of the boards inside the game machine. For example, the main control board 300B provided with the main control unit 300 is connected to the relay board RB1 by a harness HB1, and this relay board RB1 is further connected to a lever unit 135U (with a start lever 135) and a stop lever unit 135U (equipped with a start lever 135) by harnesses HA1 to HA5. It is connected to a button unit 136U (equipped with stop buttons 137 to 139), a bet button unit 132U (equipped with bet buttons 130 and 132, and a settlement button 134), and the like.

Using such harnesses allows for efficient placement of boards and components in a limited space, but it also creates another problem: poor connections in the harness. Checking for such poor connections requires a considerable amount of work.

In light of this, by having some kind of action occur depending on the connection status of the harness, the presence or absence of this action can make it easier to check the connection status. Below, these examples of action are explained using the drawings. Note that each example of action can be used in combination as long as there is no contradiction.

[Example of operation when the harness connection status is normal]
FIG. 190(a) is a diagram showing the flow of operations when the harness connection state is normal. In this figure, it is assumed that the operations are performed in the order of bet operation, lever operation, left stop operation, middle stop operation, and right stop operation. In FIG. 190(a), the front door 102 is in a closed state throughout the entire operation, and the corresponding door sensor is also in a state in which it has detected the closed state.

First, when a bet operation is performed, the number of bets required to start playing is placed. This stage is before the game is started by lever operation (reels are stopped), the normal background is displayed on the performance image display device 157, normal background music is output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the various lamps 420 are in their normal light-emitting state. In addition, the lever monitor LED provided on the main control board 300B is in the first state (lighted or unlit, a state different from the second state described below). This lever monitor LED is in the second state when the start lever 135 is pressed down, and is provided to check the state of the start lever 135. The lever monitor LED is not limited to being provided on the main control board 300B, and may be provided on the relay board RB1.

Next, when the start lever 135 is operated and changes from a non-pressed state to a pressed state, a signal of this change is received and the game begins (the reels start spinning). At this time, the effect image display device 157 starts a first display (for example, an operation instruction display (push order navigation, aim for XX), a small win suggestion display, a preview display, etc.), the speakers 272, 277 start outputting a first sound (effect corresponding to the first display), and the various lamps 420 go into a first light emission state (effect corresponding to the first display). In addition, the lever monitor LED goes into a second state (lit or unlit, a state different from the first state).

Next, when a left stop operation is performed as the first stop operation, the corresponding reel is stopped. At this time, the first display continues on the performance image display device 157, the first sound continues to be output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the various lamps 420 continue to be in the first light emission state. In addition, the lever monitor LED is in the first state.

Subsequently, when a middle stop operation is performed as a second stop operation, the corresponding reel comes to a stop state. At this time, the first display continues on the effect image display device 157, the first sound continues to be output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the various lamps 420 continue in the first light emission mode. There is. Further, the lever monitor LED is in the first mode.

Finally, when the right stop operation is performed as the third stop operation, all the reels come to a stop state. At this time, the effect image display device 157 displays the second display (stop result display (stop small role display, XX pieces obtained display, XX bonus display, updated display (number of credits, number of games, number of remaining ATs)) etc.) is being displayed, the speakers 272 and 277 are outputting a second sound (effect corresponding to the second display), and the various lamps 420 are in the second light emitting mode (corresponding to the second display). It is a performance that will be performed). Further, the lever monitor LED is the first aspect.

[Example of operation when the lever unit harness is disconnected (1)]
An example of the operation when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected will be described below with reference to Fig. 190(b). The gaming machine in this example is configured such that when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected, the main control unit 300 receives a signal similar to that received when the start lever 135 is pressed down.

In FIG. 190(b), it is assumed that the lever unit harness HA1 is pulled out after the bet operation, and then the left stop operation, the middle stop operation, and the right stop operation are performed in this order. Note that descriptions of parts that overlap with those described in FIG. 190(a) will be omitted. In FIG. 190(b), the front door 102 is in an open state to confirm the operation of the game machine, and the corresponding door sensor has also detected the open state. Each harness shown in FIG. 189 is provided at a visible position inside the game machine with the door open.

First, when a bet operation is performed, the number of bets required to start playing is placed. This stage is before the game starts by operating the lever (reels are stopped), and the normal background is displayed on the performance image display device 157, normal background music is output from the speakers 272, 277, and the various lamps 420 are in their normal light emission state. Also, the lever monitor LED is in its first state.

Subsequently, when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected while the start lever 135 is not pressed down, the main control unit 300 sends the same signal as when the start lever 135 changes from the not pressed state to the pressed state. Since this is received, the game starts (the reels start rotating). At this time, the first display starts on the effect image display device 157, the first sound output starts from the speakers 272 and 277, and the various lamps 420 become in the first light emission mode. Further, the lever monitor LED is of the second aspect.

Next, when the left stop operation is performed as the first stop operation, the corresponding reel comes to a stop. At this time, the first display continues on the performance image display device 157, the first sound continues to be output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the various lamps 420 continue to be in the first light emission mode. In addition, the lever monitor LED remains in the second mode because it is in the same state as when the start lever 135 is pressed down due to the lever unit harness HA1 being unplugged.

Next, when a middle stop operation is performed as a second stop operation, the corresponding reel is stopped. At this time, the first display continues on the performance image display device 157, the first sound continues to be output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the various lamps 420 continue to be in the first light emission mode. In addition, the lever monitor LED remains in the second mode because it is in the same state as when the start lever 135 is pressed down due to the lever unit harness HA1 being unplugged.

Finally, when the right stop operation is performed as the third stop operation, all the reels come to a stop state. At this time, the second display is being displayed on the effect image display device 157, the second sound is being output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the various lamps 420 are in the second light emission mode. Further, the lever monitor LED remains in the second mode because it is in the same state as when the start lever 135 is pressed down due to the lever unit harness HA1 being disconnected.

In the above example, if a fault such as a poor connection occurs in the lever unit harness HA1, the player may start the game even if the start lever 135 is not operated, which may make it easier to notice this fault. Furthermore, the state of the lever monitor LED may be changed to the second mode even when the start lever 135 is not operated, thereby making it easier to notice this failure.

Note that, for example, when the harness HC2 connected to the chance button unit 190U in FIG. 189 is pulled out in a state where the chance button 190 is not operated, a process corresponding to the pressing of the chance button 190 is executed. As such, the present invention is not limited to the configuration related to the start lever 135 described above, and can be applied to other devices. In this case, the explanation regarding the lever monitor LED may be interpreted as replacing it with a monitor for monitoring other devices.

Note that in the above configuration, the operation is to start reel rotation when the harness connected to the operation unit becomes disconnected, but for example, if the harness connected to the operation unit becomes disconnected. The action in this case may be an action executed during a game. Further, if the operation when the harness connected to the operation section is disconnected is an operation that can be visually recognized inside the game machine with the door open, the burden of maintenance work may be reduced. Further, such an operation may be executed by a process different from error processing. In this case, operation confirmation can be performed without using error processing.

[Example of operation when the lever unit harness is disconnected (2)]
An example of the operation when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected will be described below with reference to FIG. 190(c). The game machine of this example is configured so that when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected, the main control section 300 receives the same signal as when the start lever 135 is pressed down. Further, the main control unit 300 is configured not to accept a stop operation while receiving a signal indicating that the start lever 135 is pressed down.

In Figure 190(c), after the bet operation, the lever unit harness HA1 is unplugged, and then the left stop operation, center stop operation, and right stop operation are performed in that order. Note that explanations of parts that overlap with those explained in Figure 190(a) will be omitted. In this Figure 190(c), the front door 102 is in the open state to check the operation of the gaming machine, and the corresponding door sensor has also detected the open state. Each harness shown in Figure 189 is installed in a position that can be seen inside the gaming machine with the door in the open state.

First, when a bet operation is performed, the number of bets required to start playing is placed. This stage is before the game starts by operating the lever (reels are stopped), and the normal background is displayed on the performance image display device 157, normal background music is output from the speakers 272, 277, and the various lamps 420 are in their normal light emission state. Also, the lever monitor LED is in its first state.

Next, when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected while the start lever 135 is not pressed, the main control unit 300 receives a signal similar to that received when the start lever 135 changes from a not pressed state to a pressed state, which starts the game (the reels start spinning). At this time, the first display begins on the performance image display device 157, the first sound begins to be output from the speakers 272, 277, and the various lamps 420 enter a first light emission state. Additionally, the lever monitor LED enters a second state.

Subsequently, the stop operations are performed in the order of left stop operation, middle stop operation, and right stop operation, but while the start lever 135 is receiving a depressed signal due to the lever unit harness HA1 being disconnected. The stop operation is not accepted, and the corresponding reel remains in a rotating state. At this time, the first display continues on the effect image display device 157, the first sound continues to be output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the various lamps 420 continue in the first light emission mode. There is. Further, the lever monitor LED remains in the second mode because it is in the same state as when the start lever 135 is pressed down due to the lever unit harness HA1 being disconnected.

In the above example, if a fault such as a poor connection occurs in the lever unit harness HA1, the fault may be easily noticed because play may start even if the start lever 135 is not operated, or the player may be unable to stop play thereafter. In addition, the state of the lever monitor LED may also change to the second mode even if the start lever 135 is not operated, making the fault easily noticeable.

Note that, for example, when the harness HC2 connected to the chance button unit 190U in FIG. 189 is pulled out in a state where the chance button 190 is not operated, a process corresponding to the pressing of the chance button 190 is executed. As such, the present invention is not limited to the configuration related to the start lever 135 described above, and can be applied to other devices. In this case, the explanation regarding the lever monitor LED may be interpreted as replacing it with a monitor for monitoring other devices.

Note that in the above configuration, the operation is to start reel rotation when the harness connected to the operation unit becomes disconnected, but for example, if the harness connected to the operation unit becomes disconnected. The action in this case may be an action executed during a game. Further, if the operation when the harness connected to the operation section is disconnected is an operation that can be visually recognized inside the game machine with the door open, the burden of maintenance work may be reduced. Further, such an operation may be executed by a process different from error processing. In this case, operation confirmation can be performed without using error processing.

[Example of operation when the lever unit harness is disconnected (3)]
An example of the operation when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected will be described below with reference to Fig. 191(a). The gaming machine in this example is configured such that when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected, the main control unit 300 receives a signal similar to that received when the start lever 135 is pressed down.

In Figure 191(a), the start lever 135 is pressed, a bet is placed in that state, and then the lever unit harness HA1 is unplugged. Note that explanations of parts that overlap with those explained in Figure 190(a) will be omitted. In Figure 191(a), the front door 102 is in the open state to check the operation of the gaming machine, and the corresponding door sensor has also detected the open state. Each harness shown in Figure 189 is installed in a position that can be seen inside the gaming machine with the door in the open state.

First, at the timing when the lever is pressed, the number of bets necessary to start the game has not yet been placed, so the game has not yet started (the reels are stopped), and the normal background is displayed on the performance image display device 157. Normal BGM is output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the various lamps 420 are in a normal light emitting mode. Further, the lever monitor LED is in the second mode since the start lever 135 is in the depressed state.

Subsequently, at the timing when the bet operation is performed, the number of bets required to start the game will be in a state. At this time, since the start lever 135 remains in the pressed state, the main control unit 300 does not receive a signal indicating that the start lever 135 has changed from the non-pressed state to the pressed state. Therefore, the state before the start of the game (reels stopped state) continues. Further, the lever monitor LED remains in the second mode since the start lever 135 is in the depressed state.

Next, when the lever unit harness HA1 is unplugged, the main control unit 300 continues to receive the same signal as when the start lever 135 is pressed down. Therefore, the main control unit 300 does not receive a signal indicating that the start lever 135 has changed from a non-pressed state to a pressed state. Therefore, the state before the start of play (reels stopped state) continues. Also, the lever monitor LED remains in the second state because the start lever 135 is pressed down.

[Example of operation when the lever unit harness is disconnected (4)]
An example of the operation when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected will be described below with reference to Fig. 191(b). The gaming machine in this example is configured such that when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected, the main control unit 300 receives a signal similar to that received when the start lever 135 is pressed down.

In FIG. 191(b), it is assumed that the left stop button is pressed down after the bet operation, and then the left stop button is brought to a non-depressed state after the lever is pressed down, and finally, the lever unit harness HA1 is drawn out. Note that descriptions of parts that overlap with those described in FIG. 190(a) will be omitted. In FIG. 191(b), the front door 102 is in an open state to confirm the operation of the game machine, and the corresponding door sensor has also detected the open state. Each harness shown in FIG. 189 is provided at a visible position inside the game machine with the door open.

First, at the timing when a bet operation is performed, the number of bets required to start the game will be in a state. At this stage, before the start of the game by lever operation (the reels are stopped), the effect image display device 157 normally displays the background, the speakers 272 and 277 normally output BGM, and the various lamps 420 normally It is a light emitting mode. Further, the lever monitor LED is the first aspect.

Subsequently, the left stop button is pressed down, but since the game has not yet started, the state before the start of the game (reels stopped state) continues.

Subsequently, the start lever 135 is operated and changes from a non-pressed state to a pressed state, and the main control unit 300 receives a signal of this change. However, in this example, the signal indicating that the left stop button is pressed (in operation) is also received, so the game does not start (the reels start rotating) and the state before the game starts (reels stopped) continues. It is configured to do this. Note that the lever monitor LED is in the second mode since the start lever 135 is in the depressed state.

Subsequently, the left stop button becomes unpressed. At this time, although the number of bets necessary to start the game has been placed, the start lever 135 remains pressed down, so the start lever 135 is not pressed down from its unpressed state. The main control unit 300 does not receive the signal that has changed to the current state. Therefore, the state before the start of the game (reels stopped state) continues. Further, the lever monitor LED remains in the second mode since the start lever 135 is in the depressed state.

Next, when the lever unit harness HA1 is unplugged, the main control unit 300 continues to receive the same signal as when the start lever 135 is pressed down. Therefore, the main control unit 300 does not receive a signal indicating that the start lever 135 has changed from a non-pressed state to a pressed state. Therefore, the state before the start of play (reels stopped state) continues. Also, the lever monitor LED remains in the second state because the start lever 135 is pressed down.

[Example of operation when the harness of the main control board and relay board is disconnected (1)]
An example of the operation when the harness HB1 connecting the main control board 300B and the relay board RB1 is disconnected will be described below with reference to FIG. 192(a). The game machine of this example is configured so that when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected, the main control section 300 receives the same signal as when the start lever 135 is pressed down.

In FIG. 192(a), operations before and after the harness HB1 connecting the main control board 300B and the relay board RB1 are disconnected will be described. Note that descriptions of parts that overlap with those described in FIG. 190(a) will be omitted. In FIG. 192(a), the front door 102 is in an open state to confirm the operation of the game machine, and the corresponding door sensor has also detected the open state. Each harness shown in FIG. 189 is provided at a visible position inside the game machine with the door open.

First, before the harness HB1 connecting the main control board 300B and the relay board RB1 is unplugged, the number of bets required to start playing has not been placed, and the game has not yet started by operating the lever (the reels are stopped), and the performance image display device 157 displays the normal background, normal background music is output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the various lamps 420 are in the normal light emission mode. Also, the lever monitor LED is in the first mode.

Subsequently, when the harness HB1 connecting the main control board 300B and the relay board RB1 is disconnected, the main control unit 300 detects this connection abnormality. At this time, the third display (error display (board connection error display)) starts on the effect image display device 157, and the third sound (effect corresponding to the third display) is output from the speakers 272 and 277. The various lamps 420 start in a third light emission mode (an effect corresponding to the third display). Further, the lever monitor LED is in the second mode, similar to when the harness HA1 of the lever unit 135U is disconnected.

In the above example, the operation when the harness HB1 connecting the main control board 300B and the relay board RB1 is disconnected is described. However, for example, when the harness HD1 connecting the sub-control board 400B and the relay board RB4 is disconnected, the performance image display device 157 may start a third display (error display (board connection error display)), the speakers 272 and 277 may start outputting a third sound (performance corresponding to the third display), and the various lamps 420 may be in a third light emission state (performance corresponding to the third display). Also, for example, if a monitor LED is provided for monitoring the operation of the chance button 190 or menu button, the same state as when the harness HC1 or harness HC2 is disconnected may be displayed.

[Example of operation when the harness of the main control board and relay board is disconnected (2)]
An example of the operation when the harness HB1 connecting the main control board 300B and the relay board RB1 is disconnected will be described below with reference to FIG. 192(b). The game machine of this example is configured so that when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected, the main control section 300 receives the same signal as when the start lever 135 is pressed down.

In Figure 192(b), after a bet operation, the lever unit harness HA1 is unplugged, and then the harness HB1 connecting the main control board 300B and the relay board RB1 is unplugged. Note that explanations of parts that overlap with the contents explained in Figure 190(a) will be omitted. Note that in Figure 192(a), the front door 102 is in the open state to check the operation of the gaming machine, and the corresponding door sensor has also detected the open state. Each harness shown in Figure 189 is installed in a position that can be seen inside the gaming machine when the door is in the open state.

First, at the timing when a bet operation is performed, the number of bets required to start the game will be in a state. At this stage, before the start of the game by lever operation (the reels are stopped), the effect image display device 157 normally displays the background, the speakers 272 and 277 normally output BGM, and the various lamps 420 normally It is a light emitting mode. Further, the lever monitor LED is the first aspect.

Next, when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected while the start lever 135 is not pressed, the main control unit 300 receives a signal similar to that received when the start lever 135 changes from a not pressed state to a pressed state, which starts the game (the reels start spinning). At this time, the first display begins on the performance image display device 157, the first sound begins to be output from the speakers 272, 277, and the various lamps 420 enter a first light emission state. Additionally, the lever monitor LED enters a second state.

Subsequently, when the harness HB1 connecting the main control board 300 and the relay board RB1 is disconnected, the main control unit 300 detects this connection abnormality. At this time, the third display (error display (board connection error display)) starts on the effect image display device 157, and the third sound (effect corresponding to the third display) is output from the speakers 272 and 277. The various lamps 420 start in a third light emission mode (an effect corresponding to the third display). Further, the lever monitor LED is in the second mode, similar to when the harness HA1 of the lever unit 135U is disconnected.

In addition, in the above example, the operation was explained when the harness HB1 connecting the main control board 300B and the relay board RB1 was disconnected, but for example, the harness HD1 connecting the sub control board 400B and the relay board RB4 was disconnected. When this happens, the third display (error display (board connection error display)) starts on the effect image display device 157, and the third sound (the effect corresponding to the third display) starts from the speakers 272 and 277. The output may start, and the various lamps 420 may take on a third light emission mode (an effect corresponding to the third display). Further, for example, if a monitor LED for monitoring the operation of the chance button 190 or the menu button is provided, the situation may be the same as when the harness HC1 or the harness HC2 is disconnected.

[Example of behavior when multiple harnesses are disconnected]
An example of the operation when the lever unit harness HA1, the stop button unit harness HA2, and the bet button unit harness HA3 are each disconnected will be described below with reference to Fig. 193(a). The gaming machine in this example is configured so that when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected, the main control unit 300 receives a signal similar to that received when the start lever 135 is pressed down.

In FIG. 193(a), the following operations are performed in the order of a menu display (a screen for customizing the performance settings): unplugging the bet button unit harness HA3, pressing the bet button 132, connecting the bet button unit harness HA3, unplugging the lever unit harness HA1, unplugging the stop button unit harness HA2, pressing all stop buttons 137 to 139, connecting the stop button unit harness HA2, unplugging the stop button unit harness HA2, connecting the stop button unit harness HA2, unplugging the stop button unit harness HA2, and connecting the stop button unit harness HA2. Note that explanations of parts that overlap with those described in FIG. 190(a) will be omitted. In FIG. 193(a), the front door 102 is in an open state to check the operation of the gaming machine, and the corresponding door sensor also detects the open state. Each harness shown in FIG. 189 is provided in a position that can be seen inside the gaming machine with the door open.

First, in the initial state, the effect settings are being customized (before the game starts), the effect image display device 157 is displaying a menu, the speakers 272 and 277 are outputting menu background music, and the various lamps 420 are in a menu illumination mode.

Then, the bet button unit harness HA3 is disconnected, but this does not cause any change in state. Furthermore, if the bet button unit harness HA3 is connected while the bet button 132 is kept pressed, operation of the bet button 132 becomes effective, and the number of bets required to start playing is placed. Operation of the bet button 132 also cancels the menu display, etc., the normal background is displayed on the performance image display device 157, normal background music is output from the speakers 272, 277, and the various lamps 420 go into their normal illumination mode.

Next, when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected while the start lever 135 is not pressed, the main control unit 300 receives a signal similar to that received when the start lever 135 changes from a not pressed state to a pressed state, thereby starting the game (the reels start spinning). At this time, the first display begins on the performance image display device 157, the first sound begins to be output from the speakers 272, 277, and the various lamps 420 enter a first light emission mode.

Subsequently, the stop button unit harness HA2 is removed, but the state does not change due to this. Further, the stop button unit harness HA2 is connected while keeping all the stop buttons 137 to 139 pressed down. In this case, one of the pressed stop buttons 137 to 139 that can perform an effective stop operation (all stop buttons 137 to 139 at this stage) is accepted in accordance with the priority order. In this example, the priority is left-center-right, and the operation of the left stop button 137 is effective as the first stop operation, and the corresponding reel is brought to a stop state. Note that the first display continues on the effect image display device 157, the first sound continues to be output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the various lamps 420 continue in the first light emission mode. . Note that here, multiple stop buttons 137 to 139 are pressed down when connecting the stop button unit harness HA2, but only one stop button that can perform an effective stop operation is pressed down. If so, the operation of that stop button is accepted, and if no stop button is pressed, no operation is performed.

Next, while keeping all the stop buttons 137 to 139 pressed down, the stop button unit harness HA2 is disconnected and then connected. In this case as well, the operation of the middle stop button 138, which is one of the pressed stop buttons 137 to 139 that can perform an effective stop operation (at this stage, the middle stop button 138 and the right stop button 139) is accepted and the corresponding reel becomes stopped. Note that the first display continues on the effect image display device 157, the first sound continues to be output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the various lamps 420 continue in the first light emission mode. .

Next, while keeping all the stop buttons 137 to 139 pressed down, the stop button unit harness HA2 is disconnected and then connected. In this case as well, the operation of the right stop button 139, which is one of the pressed stop buttons 137 to 139 that can perform an effective stop operation (at this stage, only the right stop button 139) is accepted. The corresponding reel becomes stopped. In addition, since all the reels are in a stopped state, the second display is displayed on the effect image display device 157, the second sound is output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the various lamps 420 turn on the second light emission. It becomes a mode.

Note that if the stop button unit harness HA2 is disconnected and then reconnected while all stop buttons 137-139 are pressed, and there is an out-of-step reel, the stop button corresponding to that reel will not be treated as capable of valid stop operation. Figure 193(b) shows an example of operation when the left reel 110 is out of step when the stop button unit harness HA2 disconnected in Figure 193(a) is first connected. In this case, of the stop buttons 137-139, the ones capable of valid stop operation are the middle stop button 138 and the right stop button 139, and it shows that operation of one of these, the middle stop button 138, is accepted and the corresponding reel is placed in a stopped state.

In the above example, for example, when replacing the stop button unit 136U, by connecting the stop button unit harness HA2 while holding down the stop button, it is possible to check whether the replaced stop button unit 136U is operating normally based on the presence or absence of the corresponding action.

In the above configuration, the action taken when the harness is connected is to stop the reels from spinning during play. However, this action is not limited to actions that are performed during play, and various actions can be applied. In particular, if this action is visible inside the gaming machine with the door open, it may be possible to reduce the burden of maintenance work. Furthermore, such actions may be performed by a process different from error processing. In this case, the operation can be checked without using error processing.

[Example of behavior when the menu button harness is disconnected]
Below, using Figure 194 (a), an example of the operation when the menu button unit harness HC1 is disconnected and reconnected will be described.

In FIG. 194(a), the following operations are performed in the order of menu display (screen for customizing performance settings), unplugging the menu button unit harness HC1, pressing the entire menu button, connecting the menu button unit harness HC1, unplugging the menu button unit harness HC1, connecting the menu button unit harness HC1, unplugging the menu button unit harness HC1, and connecting the menu button unit harness HC1. Note that explanations of parts that overlap with those explained in FIG. 190(a) will be omitted. In FIG. 194(a), the front door 102 is in an open state to check the operation of the gaming machine, and the corresponding door sensor has also detected the open state. Each harness shown in FIG. 189 is provided in a position that can be seen inside the gaming machine with the door in the open state.

First, in the initial state, the effect settings are being customized (before the game starts), the effect image display device 157 is displaying a menu, the speakers 272 and 277 are outputting menu BGM, and various lamps are displayed. 420 is a menu lighting mode.

Next, the menu button unit harness HC1 is disconnected, but this does not cause any change in state. Furthermore, the menu button unit harness HC1 is connected while all the menu buttons (here, the up, down, left, right and OK buttons) are pressed. In this case, one of the pressed menu buttons is accepted according to priority. In this example, the operation of the left direction button, which has the highest priority, is valid. This operation causes the performance image display device 157 to display a fourth display in which the cursor on the menu screen moves to the left, a fourth sound (performance corresponding to the fourth display) is output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the various lamps 420 to have a fourth light emission mode (performance corresponding to the fourth display). Note that here, multiple menu buttons are pressed when the menu button unit harness HC1 is connected, but if one menu button is pressed, the operation of that button is accepted, and if none of the menu buttons are pressed, no operation is executed.

Next, while keeping all the menu buttons pressed, the menu button unit harness HC1 is disconnected and then connected. In this case as well, one of the pressed menu buttons is accepted in accordance with the priority order. In this example, the operation of the left button with the highest priority is effective. With this operation, the effect image display device 157 displays a fifth display in which the cursor on the menu screen moves further to the left, and the speakers 272 and 277 output a fifth sound (effect corresponding to the fifth display). Then, the various lamps 420 take on a fifth light emission mode (an effect corresponding to the fifth display).

In the above example, each time the menu button unit harness HC1 is disconnected and reconnected while all the menu buttons are pressed, the operation of the left direction button, which has the highest priority, becomes effective, and the cursor on the menu screen moves to the left. The movement of the cursor by this operation can be circular, such as when the cursor moves to the end and then reappears from the end in the opposite direction, or non-circular, in which the cursor moves to the end and does not move any further. The right edge of FIG. 194(a) shows that the fourth display and the related performance are executed again due to the circular movement of the cursor by the above operation. In contrast, FIG. 194(b) shows an example in which the cursor moves non-circularly by the above operation. In this example, only the state of the right edge is different from FIG. 194(a), and it shows that the fifth display and the related performance are maintained because the cursor no longer moves due to the above operation.

In the above example, when replacing the menu button unit 900U, for example, by connecting the menu button unit harness HC1 while holding down the menu button, the replaced menu button unit 900U will be able to function normally depending on whether or not there is a corresponding operation. You can confirm that it is working.

Note that in the above configuration, the operation when the harness is connected is the operation on the menu screen, but this operation is not limited to the operation on the menu screen, but may be an operation during a game. , various operations can be applied. Further, especially regarding this operation, if the operation is visible inside the game machine with the door open, the burden of maintenance work may be reduced. Further, such an operation may be executed by a process different from error processing. In this case, operation confirmation can be performed without using error processing.

[Example of behavior when the harness connecting the main control board and the sub control board is disconnected]
Below, using Figure 195 (a), we will explain an example of the operation when the harness connecting the main control board and the sub-control board is disconnected and reconnected.

In this embodiment, power to the sub-control board 400B is supplied from the power supply PS via the main control board 300B and the harness HE1. When the harness HE1 is disconnected, power is no longer supplied to the sub-control board 400B. At this time, the power stored in the electrolytic capacitor provided on the sub-control board 400B is supplied, and during this time, the operating state of the sub-control board 400B is maintained. When this power supply stops, the sub-control board 400B enters a power-off state. FIG. 195(a) shows changes from when the harness HE1 becomes disconnected to when the sub control board 400B becomes a power-off state in the period from timing T1 to T2. Note that the main control board 300B is provided with a monitor LED to check the power supply status, but since the power supply to the main control board 300B is maintained regardless of the connection status of the harness HE1, this The monitor LED remains lit.

After the sub-control board 400B is turned off in the above-described flow, when the harness HE1 is reconnected, power is supplied from the power supply PS via the harness HE1. At this time, the electrolytic capacitor of the sub-control board 400B stores power again, so power consumption temporarily increases by that amount. Additionally, the voltage on the main control board 300B side will drop temporarily due to this, but if it falls below the operating voltage of the main control board 300B, the main control board 300B will perform a reset process (same as turning the power back on). . When this reset process is executed, the main control board 300B shifts to a setting confirmation mode in which the current setting values can be confirmed. Further, if the setting key provided inside the game machine is in the on state when the reset process is executed, the game machine shifts to a setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed. In FIG. 195(a), these changes are shown after timing T2. Note that regardless of the connection status of the harness HE1, the power supply to the main control board 300B is maintained, so the monitor LED remains lit.

Here, assume that the period from when the harness HE1 becomes disconnected until when it becomes connected again is short, and while the power stored in the electrolytic capacitor provided in the sub-control board 400B is being supplied, the harness HE1 becomes connected again. In this case, the sub-control board 400B does not enter a power cut state (it continues to operate without restarting). Also, if the power consumed while the harness HE1 is disconnected is small, the amount of charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor when the harness HE1 becomes connected again may be small, and the voltage drop in the main control board 300B may not fall below the operating voltage and the operation may continue (the reset process may not be executed). In FIG. 195(b), an example is shown in which the harness HE1 becomes disconnected at timing T3, and while the power stored in the electrolytic capacitor provided in the sub-control board 400B is being supplied, the harness HE1 becomes connected again at timing T4, and both the main control board 300B and the sub-control board 400B continue to operate. In this example, the electrolytic capacitor of the sub-control board 400B stores electricity again, which temporarily increases power consumption and temporarily reduces the voltage on the main control board 300B side, but the amount of change is smaller than in the example of Figure 195(a). Also, unlike the example of Figure 195(a), it is shown that the main control board 300B has not been reset after timing T4.

In the above configuration, the main control board 300B can be reset by disconnecting the harness HE1, waiting for a while, and then reconnecting it. On the other hand, if the harness HE1 is disconnected when the harness HE1 is not desired to be reset, it is possible to prevent the harness from being reset by immediately reconnecting the harness HE1.

[Technical idea corresponding to the embodiment related to the harness]
The technical ideas described in the description of Figures 189 to 195 will be described below with reference to the corresponding configurations.

In the above explanation,
A first board (for example, main control board 300B),
a first operation part (for example, start lever 135) connected to the first board via a first harness (for example, lever unit harness HA1);
A game machine that is capable of executing a first process (for example, starting reel rotation) based on the operation of the first operation section,
When the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operation part is not operated, the first process may be executed ([Lever unit harness is disconnected] Example of operation in case (1)] [Example of operation when lever unit harness is disconnected (2)]),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

The first process is executed when the first harness of the first operating part becomes disconnected during a pre-shipment inspection at a factory or during replacement, cleaning, or maintenance of the first operating part at an amusement arcade. By doing so, it is possible to confirm that the first operation section is operating normally. Moreover, it is possible to understand that the first harness is disconnected by executing the first process.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first process may be executed during a game (see [Operation Example (1) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]),
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the operation of the first operating unit can be checked based on whether or not a first process, which may be executed during play, is being executed.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first process is a process different from the error process (see [Operation Example (1) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]),
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine allows you to check the operation of the first control unit without using a dedicated error processing system.

Further, the game machine described above,
When a certain condition (for example, a bet that allows a game to be started) is satisfied and the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state with the first operation unit not being operated, the first process is performed. is executed,
If the certain condition is not satisfied and the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operation unit is not operated, the first process is not executed. (See [Example of operation when the lever unit harness is disconnected (1)])
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this game machine, it is also possible to check whether a certain condition is satisfied when the first harness is in a disconnected state.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A second operation unit (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132) is provided,
When the second operating portion is operated, the certain condition may be satisfied (see [Operation Example (1) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this game machine, it is also possible to check whether or not the second operating section is operated when the first harness is disconnected.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
a second board (e.g., a relay board RB1) connected to the first board via a second harness (e.g., a harness HB1);
Notification means (for example, a performance image display device 157),
The notification means may execute a connection error notification (e.g., a third display) when the second harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state (see [Operation example (1) when the harness between the main control board and the relay board is disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this game machine, the presence or absence of a connection state between the first harness and the second harness can be distinguished by the notification from the notification means.

Further, the game machine described above,
A third operating unit (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) connected to the first board via a harness different from the first harness;
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first board (for example, main control board 300B),
a first operation part (for example, start lever 135) connected to the first board via a first harness (for example, lever unit harness HA1);
A game machine that is capable of executing a first process (for example, starting reel rotation) based on the operation of the first operation section,
When the first harness changes from the connected state to the unconnected state while the first operation part is not operated, the first process may be executed ([Lever unit harness is disconnected]). Example of operation when the lever unit harness is disconnected (1)] [Example of operation when the lever unit harness is disconnected (2)])
When the first harness changes from the connected state to the disconnected state while the first operation unit is being operated and the first process based on the operation is not being executed, the first The process is not executed (see [Example of operation when the lever unit harness is pulled out (3)] [Example of operation when the lever unit harness is pulled out (4)]),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

During a pre-shipment inspection at a factory or when replacing the first operation section at an amusement arcade, the first process is executed when the first harness of the first operation section becomes disconnected. It can be confirmed that one operation section is operating normally. Moreover, it is possible to understand that the first harness is disconnected by executing the first process. In addition, if the first operating section is in the operating state, the first notification will not be executed even if the first harness becomes disconnected, so if the first operating section is in the operating state and the first operating section is in contact with some member, the first notification will not be executed. You may notice that

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first process may be executed during a game (see [Operation Example (1) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]),
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the operation of the first operating unit can be checked based on whether or not a first process, which may be executed during play, is being executed.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first process is a process different from the error process (see [Operation Example (1) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]),
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine allows you to check the operation of the first control unit without using a dedicated error processing system.

Further, the game machine described above,
When a certain condition (for example, a bet that allows a game to be started) is satisfied and the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state with the first operation unit not being operated, the first process is performed. is executed,
If the certain condition is not satisfied and the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operation unit is not operated, the first process is not executed. (See [Example of operation when the lever unit harness is disconnected (1)])
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this game machine, it is also possible to check whether a certain condition is met when the first harness is in a disconnected state.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A second operation unit (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132) is provided,
When the second operating portion is operated, the certain condition may be satisfied (see [Operation Example (1) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this gaming machine, it is also possible to check whether the second operating section has been operated when the first harness is disconnected.

Further, the game machine described above,
a second board (for example, relay board RB1) connected to the first board via a second harness (for example, harness HB1);
Notifying means (for example, effect image display device 157),
The notification means is a means that may issue a connection error notification (for example, a third display) when the second harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state ([Main control board and relay board harness Example of operation when is omitted (see (1))),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this gaming machine, the connection status of the first harness and the second harness can be distinguished by a notification from the notification means.

Further, the game machine described above,
A third operating unit (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) connected to the first board via a harness different from the first harness;
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first board (e.g., a main control board 300B);
A light emitting means (e.g., a lever monitor LED);
a first operating unit (e.g., a start lever 135) connected to the first board via a first harness (e.g., a lever unit harness HA1);
A gaming machine capable of executing a first process (for example, starting a reel spin) based on an operation of the first operation unit,
When the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operating unit is not operated, the first process may be executed (see [Operation Example (1) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected] and [Operation Example (2) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]).
the light emitting means has a different light emitting state when the first operation unit is operated and when the first operation unit is not operated,
When the first harness is changed from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operating unit is not being operated, the light emitting means changes to the same light emitting mode as when the first operating unit is operated (see [Operation Example (1) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected] and [Operation Example (2) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

When the first harness of the first operating unit is disconnected during pre-shipment inspection at the factory or when the first operating unit is replaced at an amusement arcade, the first process is executed, making it possible to confirm that the first operating unit is operating normally. Also, by executing the first process, it is possible to know that the first harness has been disconnected. Also, the operation of the light emitting means can be confirmed.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first process may be executed during a game (see [Operation Example (1) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]),
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this game machine, the operation of the first operation section can be checked based on whether or not the first process is executed, which may be executed during the game.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first process is a process different from the error process (see [Operation Example (1) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]),
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this game machine, it is possible to check the operation of the first operating section without using dedicated error processing.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When a certain condition (e.g., a bet that allows a game to be started) is satisfied and the first harness is changed from a connected state to a disconnected state in a state in which the first operating unit is not operated, the first process is executed;
When the certain condition is not satisfied and the first operating part is not operated and the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state, the first process is not executed (see [Operation example (1) when the lever unit harness is disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this game machine, it is also possible to check whether a certain condition is satisfied when the first harness is in a disconnected state.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A second operation unit (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132) is provided,
When the second operating portion is operated, the certain condition may be satisfied (see [Operation Example (1) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this game machine, it is also possible to check whether or not the second operating section is operated when the first harness is disconnected.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
a second board (e.g., a relay board RB1) connected to the first board via a second harness (e.g., a harness HB1);
Notification means (for example, a performance image display device 157),
The notification means may execute a connection error notification (e.g., a third display) when the second harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state (see [Operation example (1) when the harness between the main control board and the relay board is disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the connection status of the first harness and the second harness can be distinguished by a notification from the notification means.

Further, the game machine described above,
A third operating unit (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) connected to the first board via a harness different from the first harness;
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first board (for example, main control board 300B),
a first operation part (for example, start lever 135) connected to the first board via a first harness (for example, lever unit harness HA1);
A movable body (for example, reels 110 to 112),
A game machine that is capable of executing a first process (for example, starting reel rotation) based on the operation of the first operation section,
When the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operation unit is not operated, the first process may be executed;
The first process is a process of operating the movable body ([Example of operation when the lever unit harness is disconnected (1)] [Example of operation when the lever unit harness is disconnected (2) ]reference),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

During a pre-shipment inspection at a factory or when replacing the first operation section at an amusement arcade, the first process is executed when the first harness of the first operation section becomes disconnected. It can be confirmed that one operation section is operating normally. Moreover, it is possible to understand that the first harness is disconnected by executing the first process. It is also possible to check the operation of the movable body.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first process may be executed during a game (see [Operation Example (1) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]),
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the operation of the first operating unit can be checked based on whether or not a first process, which may be executed during play, is being executed.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first process is a process different from the error process (see [Example of operation when the lever unit harness is disconnected (1)]),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

This gaming machine allows you to check the operation of the first control unit without using a dedicated error processing system.

Further, the game machine described above,
When a certain condition (for example, a bet that allows a game to be started) is satisfied and the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state with the first operation unit not being operated, the first process is performed. is executed,
If the certain condition is not satisfied and the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operation unit is not operated, the first process is not executed. (See [Example of operation when the lever unit harness is disconnected (1)])
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this game machine, it is also possible to check whether a certain condition is met when the first harness is in a disconnected state.

Further, the game machine described above,
A second operation unit (for example, bet buttons 130, 132) is provided,
When the second operation part is operated, the certain condition may be satisfied (see [Example of operation when the lever unit harness is disconnected (1)]),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, it is also possible to check whether or not the second operating section is operated when the first harness is disconnected.

Further, the game machine described above,
a second board (for example, relay board RB1) connected to the first board via a second harness (for example, harness HB1);
Notifying means (for example, effect image display device 157),
The notification means is a means that may issue a connection error notification (for example, a third display) when the second harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state ([Main control board and relay board harness Example of operation when is omitted (see (1))),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, the presence or absence of a connection state between the first harness and the second harness can be distinguished by the notification from the notification means.

Further, the game machine described above,
A third operating unit (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) connected to the first board via a harness different from the first harness;
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first board (e.g., a main control board 300B);
a first operating unit (e.g., a start lever 135) connected to the first board via a first harness (e.g., a lever unit harness HA1);
A gaming machine capable of executing a first process (for example, starting a reel spin) based on an operation of the first operation unit,
When the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operating unit is not being operated, the first process may be executed (see [Operation Example (1) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected] and [Operation Example (2) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]), and the manner in which the first process is executed can be confirmed inside the gaming machine with the door open,
The first harness is provided at a position that can be confirmed inside the gaming machine when the door is open (see [Operation Example (1) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected] and [Operation Example (2) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

During a pre-shipment inspection at a factory or when replacing the first operation section at an amusement arcade, the first process is executed when the first harness of the first operation section becomes disconnected. It can be confirmed that one operation section is operating normally. Moreover, it is possible to understand that the first harness is disconnected by executing the first process. Furthermore, it becomes easier for the operator to operate the first harness and confirm the operation of the first process with the door open.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first process may be executed during a game (see [Operation Example (1) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]),
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the operation of the first operating unit can be checked based on whether or not a first process, which may be executed during play, is being executed.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first process is a process different from the error process (see [Operation Example (1) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]),
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this game machine, it is possible to check the operation of the first operating section without using dedicated error processing.

Further, the game machine described above,
When a certain condition (for example, a bet that allows a game to be started) is satisfied and the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state with the first operation unit not being operated, the first process is performed. is executed,
If the certain condition is not satisfied and the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operation unit is not operated, the first process is not executed. (See [Example of operation when the lever unit harness is disconnected (1)])
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this game machine, it is also possible to check whether a certain condition is satisfied when the first harness is in a disconnected state.

Further, the game machine described above,
A second operation unit (for example, bet buttons 130, 132) is provided,
When the second operation part is operated, the certain condition may be satisfied (see [Example of operation when the lever unit harness is disconnected (1)]),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, it is also possible to check whether or not the second operating section is operated when the first harness is disconnected.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
a second board (e.g., a relay board RB1) connected to the first board via a second harness (e.g., a harness HB1);
Notification means (for example, a performance image display device 157),
The notification means may execute a connection error notification (e.g., a third display) when the second harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state (see [Operation example (1) when the harness between the main control board and the relay board is disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this game machine, the presence or absence of a connection state between the first harness and the second harness can be distinguished by the notification from the notification means.

Further, the game machine described above,
A third operating unit (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) connected to the first board via a harness different from the first harness;
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first board (e.g., a main control board 300B, a sub-control board 400B),
a first operation unit (e.g., a stop button unit 136U, a menu button unit 900U) connected to the first board via a first harness (e.g., a stop button unit harness HA2, a menu button unit harness HC1);
A gaming machine equipped with
The first operation unit has a first operation part and a second operation part (e.g., a left stop button 137, a middle stop button 138, a left direction button and an up direction button),
A first process (e.g., stopping the left reel 110, moving the cursor left) may be executed by operating the first operating unit,
A second process (e.g., stopping the center reel 111, moving the cursor up) may be executed by operating the second operation unit.
When the first harness is changed from a non-connected state to a connected state while the first operating unit is being operated, the first process may be executed.
When the first harness is changed from a non-connected state to a connected state while the second operation unit is being operated, the second process may be executed.
When the first harness is changed from a disconnected state to a connected state while both the first operation unit and the second operation unit are being operated, only the first process out of the first process and the second process may be executed (see [Example of Operation When Multiple Harnesses are Disconnected] and [Example of Operation When Menu Button Harness is Disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

When the first harness of the first operation unit is connected during pre-shipment inspection at the factory or when the first operation unit is replaced at an amusement arcade, the first process is executed, thereby making it possible to confirm that the first operation unit is operating normally. In addition, if the second process is executed without executing the first process, a break in the wiring of the first operation unit may be noticed.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first process may be executed during the game (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are pulled out] [Example of operation when menu button harness is pulled out]),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this gaming machine, the operation of the first operating unit can be confirmed by checking whether or not a first process, which may be executed during play, is being executed.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first process is different from error processing (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are disconnected] [Example of operation when menu button harness is disconnected]),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

This gaming machine allows you to check the operation of the first operating unit without using a dedicated error processing system.

Further, the game machine described above,
If the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operation unit is not operated, the first process is not executed;
If the first harness changes from the connected state to the disconnected state while the second operation unit is not operated, the second process is not executed ([If multiple harnesses are disconnected] [Example of operation] [Example of operation when the menu button harness is pulled out]),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, since the first process may not be executed when the first harness becomes disconnected, it is possible to make it easier to check the first operation unit.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When the first harness is changed from a non-connected state to a connected state while the first operating unit is not operated, the first process is not executed,
When the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while the second operation unit is not operated, the second process is not executed (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are disconnected] and [Example of operation when menu button harness is disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this game machine, since the first process may not be executed when the first harness becomes disconnected, it is possible to make it easier to check the first operation unit.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first operation unit has a third operation part (e.g., a right stop button 139, a right direction button),
A third process (e.g., stopping the right reel 112, moving the cursor to the right) may be executed by operating the third operation unit.
When the first harness is changed from a non-connected state to a connected state while the third operation unit is being operated, the third process may be executed.
When the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while both the second operation unit and the third operation unit are being operated, only the second process out of the second process and the third process may be executed (see [Example of Operation When Multiple Harnesses are Disconnected] and [Example of Operation When Menu Button Harness is Disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

When replacing the first operation unit in this gaming machine, it may be possible to confirm that the first operation unit is functioning normally by executing the second process.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state when a certain condition (for example, a reel rotation state) is satisfied and both the first operating section and the second operating section are operated. Then, only the first process of the first process and the second process is executed,
When the first harness changes from the unconnected state to the connected state when a certain condition is not satisfied and both the first operating section and the second operating section are operated, the first harness changes from the unconnected state to the connected state. One process is not executed (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are pulled out]),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this game machine, it is also possible to check whether a certain condition is met when the first harness is connected.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When a predetermined operation part (e.g., a start lever 135) different from the operation part belonging to the first operation unit is operated, the certain condition may be satisfied.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this game machine, when the first harness is in the connected state, it is also possible to check whether or not a predetermined operating section is operated.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
a second board (e.g., a relay board RB1) connected to the first board via a second harness (e.g., a harness HB1);
Notification means (for example, a performance image display device 157),
The notification means may execute a connection error notification (e.g., a third display) when the second harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state (see [Operation example (1) when the harness between the main control board and the relay board is disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this game machine, the presence or absence of a connection state between the first harness and the second harness can be distinguished by the notification from the notification means.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A second operation unit (e.g., a lever unit 135U) having an operation portion and connected to the first board via a harness different from the first harness is provided.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first board (for example, main control board 300B),
a first operation unit (for example, menu button unit 900U) connected to the first board via a first harness (for example, menu button unit harness HC1);
A game machine comprising:
The first operation unit has a first operation section and a second operation section (for example, a left direction button and an up direction button),
A first process (for example, moving a cursor to the left) may be executed by operating the first operation unit,
A second process (for example, moving the cursor up) may be executed by operating the second operation unit,
When the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while the first operation unit is being operated, the first process may be executed;
When the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while the second operation unit is being operated, the second process may be executed;
When the first harness changes from the unconnected state to the connected state while both the first operating section and the second operating section are being operated, one of the first processing and the second processing is performed. There are cases where only the first process is executed (hereinafter referred to as the "first case") (see [Example of operation when the menu button harness is disconnected]),
In a situation where the first harness changes from the connected state to the disconnected state after the first case, and the first case returns, the output result of the first process in the first case , the output result of the first process in the first case may be different (see [Example of operation when the menu button harness is drawn out], FIG. 194(a)),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

When the first harness of the first operation unit is connected during pre-shipment inspection at the factory or when the first operation unit is replaced at an amusement arcade, the first process is executed, making it possible to confirm that the first operation unit is operating normally. Also, if the second process is executed without executing the first process, a break in the wiring of the first operation unit may be noticed. Also, the operation of the first operation unit can be confirmed by checking whether the output result of the first process is different.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first process may be executed during a game (see [Example of operation when the menu button harness is disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this game machine, the operation of the first operation unit can be checked based on whether or not the first process is executed, which may be executed during the game.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first process is different from error processing (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are disconnected] [Example of operation when menu button harness is disconnected]),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this game machine, it is possible to check the operation of the first operation unit without using dedicated error processing.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When the first harness is changed from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operating unit is not operated, the first process is not executed,
When the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the second operation unit is not being operated, the second process is not executed (see [Example of operation when the menu button harness is disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this game machine, since the first process may not be executed when the first harness becomes disconnected, it is possible to make it easier to check the first operation unit.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When the first harness is changed from a non-connected state to a connected state while the first operating unit is not operated, the first process is not executed,
When the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while the second operation unit is not being operated, the second process is not executed (see [Example of operation when the menu button harness is disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the first process may not be executed when the first harness is disconnected, making it easier to check the first operating unit.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first operation unit has a third operation section (for example, a right direction button),
A third process (for example, moving the cursor to the right) may be executed by operating the third operation unit,
When the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while the third operation unit is being operated, the third process may be executed;
When the first harness changes from the unconnected state to the connected state while both the second operating section and the third operating section are being operated, one of the second processing and the third processing is performed. Only the second process may be executed (see [Example of operation when menu button harness is pulled out]),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, when replacing the first operation unit, it may be possible to confirm that the first operation unit is operating normally by executing the second process.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first board (e.g., a main control board 300B);
a first operation unit (e.g., a menu button unit 900U) connected to the first board via a first harness (e.g., a menu button unit harness HC1);
A gaming machine equipped with
the first operation unit has a first operation part and a second operation part (e.g., a left button and an up button);
A first process (e.g., moving a cursor left) may be executed by operating the first operation unit,
A second process (e.g., moving a cursor up) may be executed by operating the second operation unit,
When the first harness is changed from a non-connected state to a connected state while the first operating unit is being operated, the first process may be executed.
When the first harness is changed from a non-connected state to a connected state while the second operation unit is being operated, the second process may be executed.
When the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while both the first operating unit and the second operating unit are being operated (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"), only the first process out of the first process and the second process may be executed (see [Example of operation when the menu button harness is disconnected]).
In a situation where the first harness goes from a connected state to a disconnected state after the first case and returns to the first case, the first process may be executed in the first case, but the first process may not be executed in the second case (see [Example of operation when the menu button harness is disconnected], FIG. 194(b)).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

During a pre-shipment inspection at a factory or when replacing the first operation unit at an amusement arcade, the first process is executed when the first harness of the first operation unit is connected. can confirm that the operating unit is operating normally. Further, if the second process is executed without executing the first process, the user may notice that the wiring of the first operation unit is disconnected. Further, the operation of the first operation unit can also be confirmed by the operation when the first process is executed and when the first process is not executed.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first process may be executed during a game (see [Example of operation when the menu button harness is disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this game machine, the operation of the first operation unit can be checked based on whether or not the first process is executed, which may be executed during the game.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first process is a process different from the error process (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are disconnected] and [Example of operation when menu button harness is disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine allows you to check the operation of the first operating unit without using a dedicated error processing system.

Further, the game machine described above,
If the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operation unit is not operated, the first process is not executed;
If the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the second operation unit is not operated, the second process is not executed ([If the menu button harness is disconnected] operation example]),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, since the first process may not be executed when the first harness becomes disconnected, it is possible to make it easier to check the first operation unit.

Further, the game machine described above,
If the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while the first operation unit is not operated, the first process is not executed;
If the first harness changes from an unconnected state to a connected state while the second operation unit is not operated, the second process is not executed ([If the menu button harness is disconnected] operation example]),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this gaming machine, the first process may not be executed when the first harness is disconnected, making it easier to check the first operating unit.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
the first operation unit has a third operation part (e.g., a right direction button);
A third process (e.g., moving a cursor right) may be executed by operating the third operation unit,
When the first harness is changed from a non-connected state to a connected state while the third operation unit is being operated, the third process may be executed.
When the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while both the second operation unit and the third operation unit are being operated, only the second process out of the second process and the third process may be executed (see [Example of operation when the menu button harness is disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

When replacing the first operation unit in this gaming machine, it may be possible to confirm that the first operation unit is functioning normally by executing the second process.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first reel and a second reel (for example, the left reel 110 and the middle reel 111) that are rotationally driven;
a first stop button (for example, left stop button 137) for stopping the rotation of the first reel;
a second stop button (for example, middle stop button 138) for stopping rotation of the second reel;
A first board (for example, main control board 300B),
A stop button unit (for example, a stop button) that has the first stop button and the second stop button and is connected to the first board via a first harness (for example, stop button unit harness HA2). unit 136U) and
A game machine comprising:
A first process (for example, stopping the left reel 110, changing the navigation effect) may be executed by operating the first stop button,
A second process (for example, stopping the middle reel 111, changing the navigation effect) may be executed by operating the second stop button,
When the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while the first stop button is being operated, the first process may be executed;
When the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while the second stop button is being operated, the second process may be executed;
When the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while both the first stop button and the second stop button are operated, one of the first process and the second process is performed. There are cases where only the first process is executed (hereinafter referred to as the "first case") (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are pulled out]),
After the first case, when the first harness changes from the unconnected state to the connected state while both the first stop button and the second stop button are being operated, the first process is performed. In some cases, only the second process of the second process is executed (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are disconnected]),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

During a pre-shipment inspection at the factory or when replacing the stop button unit at an amusement arcade, the first process is executed when the first harness of the stop button unit is connected, ensuring that the stop button unit operates normally. You can confirm that it is working. Further, if the second process is executed without executing the first process, the user may notice that the wiring of the stop button unit is disconnected. Furthermore, the operation of the stop button unit can be confirmed by stopping the reels.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first process may be executed during a game (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are unplugged]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this game machine, the operation of the stop button unit can be confirmed by checking whether or not the first process is executed, which may be executed during the game.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first process is a process different from the error process (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this game machine, it is possible to check the operation of the stop button unit without using dedicated error processing.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When the first harness is changed from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first stop button is not operated, the first process is not executed,
When the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the second stop button is not operated, the second process is not executed (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the first process may not be executed when the first harness is disconnected, making it easier to check the first operating unit.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When the first harness is changed from a disconnected state to a connected state while the first stop button is not operated, the first process is not executed,
When the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while the second stop button is not operated, the second process is not executed (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this game machine, since the first process may not be executed when the first harness becomes disconnected, it is possible to make it easier to check the first operation unit.

Further, the game machine described above,
When a certain condition (for example, a reel rotation state) is met and both the first stop button and the second stop button are operated, the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state. Then, only the first process of the first process and the second process is executed,
When the first harness changes from the unconnected state to the connected state when a certain condition is not satisfied and both the first stop button and the second stop button are operated, the first harness changes from the unconnected state to the connected state. One process is not executed (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are pulled out]),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

This gaming machine can also check whether a certain condition is met when the first harness is connected.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When a predetermined operation unit (e.g., a start lever 135) other than the operation unit belonging to the stop button unit is operated, the certain condition may be satisfied.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this gaming machine, it is also possible to check whether a specific operating part has been operated when the first harness is connected.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
a second board (e.g., a relay board RB1) connected to the first board via a second harness (e.g., a harness HB1);
Notification means (for example, a performance image display device 157),
The notification means may execute a connection error notification (e.g., a third display) when the second harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state (see [Operation example (1) when the harness between the main control board and the relay board is disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this game machine, whether or not the first harness and the second harness are connected can be distinguished by notification from the notification means.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A second operation unit (e.g., a lever unit 135U) having an operation portion and connected to the first board via a harness different from the first harness is provided.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first reel and a second reel (for example, the left reel 110 and the middle reel 111) that are rotationally driven;
a first stop button (for example, left stop button 137) for stopping the rotation of the first reel;
a second stop button (for example, middle stop button 138) for stopping rotation of the second reel;
A first board (for example, main control board 300B),
A stop button unit (for example, a stop button) that has the first stop button and the second stop button and is connected to the first board via a first harness (for example, stop button unit harness HA2). unit 136U) and
A game machine comprising:
A first process (for example, stopping the left reel 110, changing the navigation effect) may be executed by operating the first stop button,
A second process (for example, stopping the middle reel 111, changing the navigation effect) may be executed by operating the second stop button,
When the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while the first stop button is being operated, the first process may be executed;
When the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while the second stop button is being operated, the second process may be executed;
The first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while the first reel is not out of step and both the first stop button and the second stop button are operated. In this case, only the first process of the first process and the second process may be executed (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are disconnected]),
When the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while the first reel is out of step and both the first stop button and the second stop button are being operated, Of the first process and the second process, only the second process may be executed (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are disconnected], FIG. 193(b)). ,
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

When a pre-shipment inspection is performed at a factory or when the stop button unit is replaced at an amusement parlor, the first process is executed when the first harness of the stop button unit is connected, thereby making it possible to confirm that the stop button unit is operating normally. Furthermore, if the second process is executed without executing the first process, a break in the wiring of the stop button unit may be noticed. Furthermore, by stopping the reels, it is possible to check the operation of the stop button unit and the condition of the reels.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first process may be executed during a game (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are unplugged]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the operation of the stop button unit can be checked by checking whether or not a first process, which may be executed during play, is executed.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first process is a process different from the error process (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine allows you to check the operation of the stop button unit without using a dedicated error processing system.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When the first harness is changed from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first stop button is not operated, the first process is not executed,
When the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the second stop button is not operated, the second process is not executed (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this game machine, since the first process may not be executed when the first harness becomes disconnected, it is possible to make it easier to check the first operation unit.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When the first harness is changed from a disconnected state to a connected state while the first stop button is not operated, the first process is not executed,
When the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while the second stop button is not operated, the second process is not executed (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the first process may not be executed when the first harness is disconnected, making it easier to check the first operating unit.

Further, the game machine described above,
When a certain condition (for example, a reel rotation state) is satisfied and both the first stop button and the second stop button are operated, the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state. Then, only the first process of the first process and the second process is executed,
When the first harness changes from the unconnected state to the connected state when a certain condition is not satisfied and both the first stop button and the second stop button are operated, the first harness changes from the unconnected state to the connected state. One process is not executed (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are pulled out]),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this game machine, it is also possible to check whether a certain condition is met when the first harness is in the connected state.

Further, the game machine described above,
The certain condition may be satisfied when a predetermined operating section (for example, the start lever 135) different from the operating section belonging to the stop button unit is operated.
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, when the first harness is in the connected state, it is also possible to check whether or not a predetermined operating section is operated.

Further, the game machine described above,
a second board (for example, relay board RB1) connected to the first board via a second harness (for example, harness HB1);
Notifying means (for example, effect image display device 157),
The notification means is a means that may issue a connection error notification (for example, a third display) when the second harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state ([Main control board and relay board harness Example of operation when is omitted (see (1))),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, the presence or absence of a connection state between the first harness and the second harness can be distinguished by the notification from the notification means.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A second operation unit (e.g., a lever unit 135U) having an operation portion and connected to the first board via a harness different from the first harness is provided.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first control board (for example, main control board 300B),
a second control board (for example, sub-control board 400B);
A game machine comprising:
The first control board is electrically connected to the second control board via a first harness (for example, harness HE1),
When the first harness changes from the connected state to the disconnected state (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"), the first control board maintains the activated state,
When the first harness changes from the unconnected state to the connected state after the first case (hereinafter referred to as the "second case"), the first control board may be reset ( (See [Example of operation when the harness connecting the main control board and sub-control board is disconnected])
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

During pre-shipment inspection at the factory or when parts are replaced at an amusement arcade, the first control board is reset when the first harness changes from an unconnected state to a connected state, thereby ensuring that the first control board operates normally. can be operated.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
the first control board includes a light emitting means (e.g., a monitor LED);
Even in the first case, the light emitting means continues to emit light (see [Example of operation when the harness connecting the main control board and the sub-control board is disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this game machine, it can be confirmed that the first control board is in the activated state.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
Even if the second case occurs while the light emitting means continues to emit light, the light emitting means continues to emit light (see [Example of operation when the harness connecting the main control board and the sub-control board is disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this gaming machine, it is possible to confirm that the first control board is in a powered state even while being reset.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first harness is connected to the first harness before a first time (for example, a time when the amount of stored electricity in the electrolytic capacitor falls below an amount that can maintain the operating voltage of the main control board 300B) after the first case occurs. changes from a non-connected state to a connected state, the first control board is not reset (see [Example of operation when the harness connecting the main control board and the sub-control board is disconnected]),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this gaming machine, the first control board can be reset depending on the situation.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first control board (e.g., a main control board 300B) having a predetermined operation means (e.g., a setting key) and controlling the progress of a game;
A second control board (e.g., a sub-control board 400B),
A gaming machine equipped with
the first control board is electrically connected to the second control board via a first harness (e.g., harness HE1);
When the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"), the first control board maintains an activated state,
If the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state after the first case (hereinafter referred to as the "second case"), the first control board may be reset (see [Example of operation when the harness connecting the main control board and the sub control board is disconnected]).
If the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while the specified operating means is operated after the first case, the first control board may transition to a state based on the operation of the specified operating means (e.g., a setting confirmation mode or a setting change mode) (see [Example of operation when the harness connecting the main control board and the sub-control board is disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

When the first harness goes from a disconnected state to a connected state during pre-shipment inspection at the factory or part replacement at the gaming parlor, the first control board is reset, allowing the first control board to operate normally. In addition, the gaming machine can be transitioned to a state based on the operation of a specified operating means while remaining in a powered state.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
the first control board includes a light emitting means (e.g., a monitor LED);
Even in the first case, the light emitting means continues to emit light (see [Example of operation when the harness connecting the main control board and the sub-control board is disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, it is possible to confirm that the first control board is in an activated state.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
Even if the second case occurs while the light emitting means continues to emit light, the light emitting means continues to emit light (see [Example of operation when the harness connecting the main control board and the sub-control board is disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this gaming machine, it is possible to confirm that the first control board is in a powered state even while being reset.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
If the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state before a first time period (e.g., the time period when the amount of charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor falls below the amount that can maintain the operating voltage of the main control board 300B) has elapsed since the first case occurred, the first control board is not reset (see [Example of operation when the harness connecting the main control board and the sub-control board is disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the first control board can be reset depending on the situation.

<Configuration related to cooling inside the game machine>
Next, an example of a configuration for discharging and cooling the heat inside the game machine to the outside will be described using FIGS. 196 to 201. In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the configurations already described in other embodiments (for example, FIGS. 17 to 32), and the description thereof will be omitted. Furthermore, for configurations that are inconsistent between the following description and the previous embodiment, the words and symbols in this example shall take precedence.

Figure 196 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 open.

In this figure, a cooling fan 950 is provided above the front door 102. Further, a plurality of through holes (hereinafter referred to as upper through hole 242H1 and lower through hole 242H2, respectively) are formed in the upper and lower parts of the back plate. The cooling fan 950 is used to cool the VDP 534 of the second sub-control unit 500 provided on the front door 102, and is also used to cool the main control unit 300 provided inside the main body 101. . The upper through hole 242H1 and the lower through hole 242H2 serve as an intake port and an exhaust port when the cooling fan 950 is in operation.

The heat dissipation configuration of the cooling fan 950 will be described below with reference to Figures 197 and 198. Figure 197 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the side, and Figure 198 is an enlarged schematic cross-sectional view of the sub-board case 500a and the main board case 300a. In these figures, the arrows indicate the air flow when the cooling fan 950 is operating.

To explain this air flow in order, first, air flows from the outside to the inside of the slot machine 100 through the lower through hole 242H2. The inflowing air then passes by the hopper unit 180 and the like, reaches the front door 102, and rises from there toward the cooling fan 950 above. At this time, it passes by the relay board RB1 on the way and further flows into the sub-board case 500a arranged above the reel unit 109.

The sub-board case 500a houses the boards 400B and 500B of the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, and these boards are fixed to the sub-board case 500a with screws 500b. There is. Note that a heat sink 950c for increasing the cooling efficiency of the VDP 534 is attached to the second sub-control board 500B. Further, the cooling fan 950 is fixed to the sub-board case 500a with screws 950b. This cooling fan 950 is provided at a position that does not face the VDP 534.

Air intakes 500H2 are formed at the top and bottom of the sub-board case 500a, and an exhaust port 500H1 is formed facing the main board case 300a. Air flowing in from the lower through-hole 242H2 flows into the inside of the sub-board case 500a through the air intake 500H2, and is exhausted from the exhaust port 500H1 toward the main board case 300a by the operation of the cooling fan 950. This operation cools the sub-control boards 400B, 500B (including the VDP 534) inside the sub-board case 500a.

The air discharged from the sub-board case 500a by the cooling fan 950 further hits the main board case 300a housing the board 300B of the main control section 300, flows along its surface, and is discharged from the upper through-hole 242H1. That is, the operation of cooling fan 950 cools main control board 300B inside main board case 300a.

The above air flow cools the various devices inside the slot machine 100, such as the relay board RB1, the first sub-control board 400B, the second sub-control board 500B, and the main control board 300B. In the above example, the configuration using the first sub-control board 400B, the second sub-control board 500B, and the main control board 300B was described, but the above boards are not limited, and various boards that require cooling can be used. In addition, in the first board case (main controller No. 300B in the above example) on the side directly exposed to the wind from the cooling fan 950, dust attached to this first board case can be blown away to improve the visibility of the first board inside the first board case. In addition, since cooling of the first board can be performed without providing it in the first board case, it may be possible to simplify the configuration of the first board case and improve visibility.

If the airflow of the cooling fan 950 is small and air is not discharged to the outside of the slot machine 100 through the upper through-hole 242H1 as shown in FIG. 199, air will convect inside and the cooling effect will be poor. For this reason, the airflow of the cooling fan 950 must be at least large enough to allow air to be discharged to the outside of the slot machine 100 through the upper through-hole 242H1 as shown in FIG. 200. This creates the air flow described above and cools the inside.

The cooling fan 950 described above is provided on the front door 102. For example, when the front door 102 is opened for maintenance, air from the cooling fan 950 is blown toward the worker SM as shown in FIG. 201, allowing the worker SM to perform maintenance work comfortably.

[Technical idea corresponding to the embodiment regarding cooling inside the game machine]
The technical ideas described in the explanations of FIGS. 196 to 201 will be described below with reference to the corresponding configurations.

In the above explanation,
A first board (e.g., a main control board 300B);
A second board (e.g., a second sub-control board 500B),
A cooling fan (e.g., cooling fan 950) for cooling the second substrate;
A gaming machine equipped with
The blowing direction of the cooling fan may be directed toward the first substrate (see, for example, FIG. 197 ).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, dust adhering to the periphery of the first board can be blown away to improve the visibility of the first board, and the first board can be cooled without providing a first board case, simplifying the structure around the first board and improving visibility.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first board is provided on the main body side of the game machine,
The second board and the cooling fan are provided on the door body side of the game machine,
When the door body is closed, the air blowing direction of the cooling fan is directed toward the first board,
When the door body is opened to a certain position, the air blowing direction of the cooling fan does not face the first board (for example, see FIGS. 197 and 201);
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

When the door of this gaming machine is open, the fan's wind is directed toward the worker who opened the door, rather than toward the first board, allowing maintenance work to be performed comfortably.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
the second board having a processor (e.g., a VDP534) that controls the operation of the second board;
The cooling fan is provided at a position different from the position facing the processor (see FIG. 198 for example).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine allows for improved visibility around the processor.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A reel unit (e.g., reel unit 109),
The gaming machine has a first opening (e.g., an upper through-hole 242H1) formed above the reel unit, and a second opening (e.g., a lower through-hole 242H2) formed below the reel unit,
When the cooling fan operates with the door body closed, the air taken into the inside of the game machine from the second opening passes through the cooling fan and is exhausted from the first opening (see, for example, FIG. 197).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, air is drawn in from the second opening, passes around the reel unit, heads toward the first board, and is then discharged from the first opening, so dust around the first board and heat inside the main unit can be discharged to the outside of the main unit without convection inside the main unit.

Further, the game machine described above,
comprising a reel unit (for example, reel unit 109),
The cooling fan is located above the reel unit when the door body is closed (see, for example, FIG. 197);
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

This gaming machine is able to expel heat generated by the operation of the reel unit outside the machine.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes a firing device that fires a ball into a predetermined gaming area, a prize opening that is configured to allow the ball fired from the firing device to enter, and a prize opening that allows the ball that enters the prize opening to be received. A game ball is provided with a detection means for detecting a ball, a payout means for paying out a ball when the detection means detects a ball, and a variable display device that variably displays a predetermined symbol (identification information), and a game ball enters the winning opening to win a prize. Taking this as an opportunity, it is also suitable for a pachinko machine or the like in which the variable display device changes the symbols and then stops displaying them to notify the transition of the gaming state.

Further, the game machine according to the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed game machine. Here, the "enclosed game machine" is one in which game balls enclosed within the game machine are reused. Further, the main control section, the first sub-control section, and the second sub-control section may be configured in one chip, or the main control section and the first sub-control section may be configured to enable bidirectional communication. good. Moreover, while bidirectional communication is possible between the main control section and the first sub-control section, communication from the first sub-control section to the second sub-control section may be unidirectional communication.

Further, the functions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention are merely a list of the most preferable functions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the functions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what has been done. Furthermore, by applying the content described in one of the plurality of configurations described in the embodiment to another configuration, the range of games may be further expanded.

Next, a gaming machine to which the present invention can be applied (for example, a reel gaming machine such as the slot machine 100 or a pinball gaming machine such as a pachinko machine) will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 202 to 260. Note that the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 202 to 260 are basically used only in the explanation using FIGS. In the explanation using FIG. 260, priority will be given to the symbols shown in FIGS. 202 to 260.
<Overall configuration>
FIG. 202 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 according to one embodiment. In the slot machine 100, a game is started by inserting medals, and medals are paid out according to the result of the game.

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 202 includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 that is attached to the front of the main body 101 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. Inside the center of the main body 101 (not shown in FIG. 202), three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, and right reel 112) each having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer circumferential surface are stored. It is configured so that it can rotate internally. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving means such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, a suitable number of each pattern is printed on a band-like member at equal intervals, and this band-like member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to constitute each reel 110 to 112. When viewed from the player, approximately three symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed vertically from the symbol display window 113, making a total of nine symbols visible. By rotating each reel 110 to 112, the combination of symbols visible to the player changes. In other words, each reel 110 to 112 functions as a display means that variably displays a plurality of symbol combinations. In addition to the reel, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can also be used as such a display means. Further, in this embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation positions of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) is provided on the back of each of the reels 110-112 to illuminate the individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 113. It is desirable that the backlight is shielded for each symbol so that each symbol can be illuminated evenly. Inside the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (not shown) consisting of a light-emitting section and a light-receiving section is provided near each of the reels 110-112, and a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the light-emitting section and the light-receiving section of this optical sensor. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotational direction is determined, and the reels 110-112 are stopped so that the desired symbol is displayed on the winning line.

The winning line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates a valid winning line. The valid winning line is determined in advance by the number of medals bet as game media. There are 5 winning lines. For example, if one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line will be activated, and if two medals are bet, an upper horizontal winning line and a lower horizontal winning line will be added. When the book is valid and three medals are bet, five lines with the addition of the right-down winning line and the right-up winning line become valid as winning lines. Note that the number of winning lines is not limited to 5 lines, and for example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line, the upper horizontal winning line, the lower horizontal winning line, and the lower right horizontal winning line. Five lines, including the winning line and the upper right winning line, may be valid as winning lines. Hereinafter, the winning line that becomes valid may be referred to as the valid line.

Figure 203 shows the relationship between the nine display areas 1 to 9 of the symbol display window 113 and the five winning lines mentioned above. In this embodiment, there are five winning lines: the upper horizontal winning line (horizontal winning line L2) made up of display areas 1, 4, and 7; the middle horizontal winning line (horizontal winning line L1) made up of display areas 2, 5, and 8; the lower horizontal winning line (horizontal winning line L3) made up of display areas 3, 6, and 9; the upward-right winning line (diagonal winning line L4) made up of display areas 3, 5, and 7; and the downward-right winning line (diagonal winning line L5) made up of display areas 1, 5, and 9.

The notification lamp 123 is a lamp that notifies the player that, for example, a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been internally won in an internal lottery described below, or that a bonus game is in progress. The medal insertion possible lamp 124 is a lamp that notifies the player that a medal can be inserted. The replay lamp 122 is a lamp that notifies the player that the current game can be replayed (no medal insertion is required) if a replay, which is one of the winning combinations, was won in the previous game. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for presentation purposes.

The medal insertion buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) that are electronically stored in the slot machine 100. In this embodiment, each time the medal insertion button 130 is pressed, one medal is inserted up to a maximum of three medals, when the medal insertion button 131 is pressed, two medals are inserted, and when the medal insertion button 132 is pressed, three medals are inserted. Hereinafter, the medal insertion button 132 is also referred to as the MAX medal insertion button. The game medal insertion lamps 129 light up the number of lamps corresponding to the number of medals inserted, and when the specified number of medals have been inserted, the game start lamp 121 lights up to indicate that the game can be started.

The medal slot 141 is an slot for the player to insert medals at the time of starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) through the medal insertion slot 141, and the term ``insertion'' includes both. It is. The stored medal number display 125 is a display device for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 is a display for numerically displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game). The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals paid out to the player as a result of winning some winning combination. In the present embodiment, the stored token number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout token number display 127 are composed of seven segment (SEG) displays.

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 110 to 112. In other words, when the desired number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 141 or when the medal insertion buttons 130 to 132 are operated and the start lever 135 is operated, the reels 110 to 112 start to rotate. The operation of the start lever 135 is called the operation to start the game.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-shaped switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with each reel 110 to 112. Hereinafter, the operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139 will be referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation will be referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation will be referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation will be referred to as a third stop operation. Further, the reel that is the target of the first stop operation is called the first stop reel, the reel that is the target of the second stop operation is called the second stop reel, and the reel that is the target of the third stop operation is called the third stop reel. Note that each of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is provided with light emitters 137a to 139a inside, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitters 137a to 139a are lit to notify the player. . That is, the light emitters 137a to 139a notify each of the stop buttons 137 to 139 that a stop operation is accepted, or in other words, that the rotation of the reel can be stopped for each reel. It is something. Each light emitting body 137a to 139a is, for example, an LED, and has a plurality of light emission modes (for example, blinking, turning off, emitting light in a first color, emitting light in a second color, emitting light while continuously changing the color, etc.). ).

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove the inserted medals when the medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settling medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and bet medals, and discharging them from the medal payout port 155. The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted. The medal payout port 155 is a payout port for paying out medals.

A title panel 162 is provided at the bottom of the stop button unit 136 for displaying the model name and pasting various certificate stamps. A medal payout opening 155 and a medal receiving tray 161 are provided at the bottom of the title panel 162.

The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker installed inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 installed on the left and right parts of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for livening up the game. The performance device 160 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102, and the sound hole 143 is provided on the upper part of the performance device 160. This performance device 160 is equipped with a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right shutters 163a and left shutters 163b that can be opened and closed horizontally, and a performance image display device 157 (not shown, liquid crystal display device) arranged on the back side of this shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally outward in front of the performance image display device 157, the display screen of the performance image display device 157 (not shown) appears on the front (player side) of the slot machine 100.

It should be noted that the display device does not have to be a liquid crystal display device, and may be configured to display various performance images and various game information, for example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, a reel (drum), or a display device consisting of a projector and a screen. The display screen is rectangular and configured so that the player can view the entire screen. In this embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but it may be square. Also, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen, so that part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, making the display screen look irregular. In this embodiment, the display screen is flat, but it may be curved.
<Circuit configuration of control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to Figure 204. Note that this figure is a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of the game, and a main control unit 300 that controls the main performance according to command signals (hereinafter simply referred to as “commands”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The second sub-control unit 500 controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-control unit 400.
<Main control section>
First, the main control section 300 of the slot machine 100 will be explained. The main control unit 300 is equipped with a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300, and this basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used for internal lottery of winning combinations, stop of reels, etc. A ROM 306 for storing position, etc., a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc. It is equipped. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and the same applies to the first sub-control unit 400 and second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of this basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 314b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits the frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 sets the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data. An interrupt request is sent to the CPU 304 at each interrupt time. The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as a trigger to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses. For example, if the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 314b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the frequency division data of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the reference time of the interrupt is 256 x 47 ÷ 8 MHz. =1.504ms.

The basic circuit 302 includes a random number generation circuit 316 used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535, and a startup signal output circuit 332 that outputs a startup signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. is provided, and when the CPU 304 receives a start signal from this start signal output circuit 332, it starts game control (starts main control section main processing to be described later).

In addition, the basic circuit 302 is provided with a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 detects signals from various sensors 318 (medal insertion button 130 sensor, medal insertion button 131 sensor, medal insertion button 132 sensor, medal insertion slot 141) at each interrupt time. A medal reception sensor for inserted medals, a start lever 135 sensor, a stop button 137 sensor, a stop button 138 sensor, a stop button 139 sensor, a settlement button 134 sensor, a medal payout sensor for medals paid out from the medal payout device 180, and a medal payout sensor for the reel 110. The status of the index sensor, reel 111 index sensor, reel 112 index sensor, etc.) is monitored.

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random number generation circuit 316. The random number generation circuit 316 receives this signal, latches the value at that timing, and stores it in a register that stores random numbers to be used in the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal slot 141, and detect whether or not a medal has passed. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect a start operation by a player. A stop button 137 sensor, a stop button 138 sensor, and a stop button 139 sensor are installed on each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and detect the operation of the stop button by the player.

The medal insertion button 130 sensor, medal insertion button 131 sensor, and medal insertion button 132 sensor are provided on each of the medal insertion buttons 130-132, and detect the insertion operation when medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are inserted as medals to be inserted into a game. The settlement button 134 sensor is provided on the settlement button 134. When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the medals electronically stored are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the medal payout device 180. Note that each of the above sensors may be a non-contact sensor or a contact sensor.

The index sensor of the left reel 110, the index sensor of the center reel 111, and the index sensor of the right reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting base of each reel 110-112, and go to L level every time a light-shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes by. When the CPU 304 detects this signal, it determines that the reel has made one rotation, resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero, and becomes able to calculate the stopping position of the reel.

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 that drives the stepping motors provided on the reels 110 to 112, a drive circuit 324 that drives a solenoid provided on the medal selector 170 that sorts the inserted medals, and a drive circuit 324 that drives the solenoids provided on the medal payout device 180. A drive circuit 326 that drives the motor, and various lamps 338 (winning line display lamp 120, notification lamp 123, game medal insertion possible lamp 124, replay lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121, storage number display) 125, game information display 126, and payout number display 127).

Further, an information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 connects a slot to an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 334. Outputs gaming information (for example, gaming status) of the machine 100.

The main control section 300 also includes an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400, and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400. Note that information communication between the main control section 300 and the first sub-control section 400 is one-way communication, and the main control section 300 can send signals such as commands to the first sub-control section 400; Signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the unit 400 to the main control unit 300.
<Sub-control unit>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be explained. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that receives control commands transmitted by the main control unit 300 via an input interface and controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on the control commands. There is. This basic circuit 402 is equipped with a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. are doing. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period outputted by the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The first sub-control unit 400 also has a ROM 406 that stores control programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, backlight lighting patterns, data for controlling various indicators, etc. It is set up.

The CPU 404 transmits the frequency division data stored in a specified area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a specified timing. The counter timer 412 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 for each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sound source IC 418, and speakers 272 and 277 are connected to the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls the audio output from the amplifier and speakers 272 and 277 in accordance with commands from the CPU 404. The sound source IC 418 is connected to an S-ROM (sound ROM) in which audio data is stored, and the audio data acquired from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277.

The first sub-controller 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 422, to which various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, etc.) are connected via an input/output interface.

Further, the CPU 404 transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-control unit 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control unit 500 of the slot machine 100 controls the effect image display device 157, the shutter 163, and the like. Note that the second sub-control unit 500 may be configured with a plurality of control units, such as a control unit that controls the effect image display device 157 and a control unit that controls the shutter 163.

Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the slot machine 100 will be explained. The second sub-control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface, and operates a basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on this control command. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter for measuring time, number of times, etc. It is equipped with a timer 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, the second sub-control unit 500 is provided with a ROM 506 in which control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, etc. are stored.

The CPU 504 transmits the frequency division data stored in a specified area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a specified timing. The counter timer 512 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 504 for each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the second sub-control unit 500 is provided with a drive circuit 530 that drives the shutter 163, and the shutter 163 is connected to the drive circuit 530 via an output interface. This drive circuit 530 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 in response to a command from the CPU 504.

Further, the second sub-control unit 500 is provided with a sensor circuit 532, and a shutter sensor 538 is connected to the sensor circuit 532 via an input interface. The CPU 504 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 538 at every interrupt time.

The second sub-control unit 500 is also provided with a VDP 534 (video display processor), which is connected to the ROM 506 and VRAM 536 via a bus. The VDP 534 reads out image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 536, and displays the image on the performance image display device 157.
<Pattern arrangement>
The symbol arrangement on each of the reels 110 to 112 will be described with reference to Figure 205(a). Note that Figure 205(a) shows the symbol arrangement on each of the reels (left reel 110, center reel 111, right reel 112) in a two-dimensional layout.

Each reel 110-112 has a number of symbols (8 in this embodiment) arranged on it for a predetermined number of frames (21 frames with the symbol number counter numbers 0-20. The symbol interval counter and symbol number counter will be described in detail later). The numbers 0-20 shown on the left side of the figure indicate the arrangement position of the symbols on each reel 110-112. For example, in this embodiment, a BB symbol is arranged on the number 0 frame of the left reel 110, a replay symbol is arranged on the number 1 frame of the center reel 111, and a bell symbol is arranged on the number 2 frame of the right reel 112.

When the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed on the active line becomes a symbol combination of a predetermined winning combination, it is determined that the winning combination has won. The winning combinations in this embodiment include a small role in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out, an active role, that is, a big bonus that is a role that moves to a bonus game, and a role that allows replaying without inserting new medals. It also includes replays, which are the role of Naru. In other words, "winning" in this embodiment includes cases where a symbol combination of an active role that does not involve a medal payout (does not involve a payout of medals) is displayed on the active line, such as a big bonus or replay. Includes winnings. The winning combinations will be detailed below. <Type of winning role>
FIG. 205(b) is a diagram showing the types of winning combinations (including activation combinations), the symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and the activation or payout of each winning combination.

Among the winning combinations in this embodiment, the Big Bonus (BB) is used as a combination that transitions to a bonus game, and the replays (Replay, Replay 2, and Replay 3) can be played again without inserting new medals. The winning combinations may be distinguished from winning combinations and are sometimes referred to as "actuation combinations," but in this embodiment, the "winning combinations" include the activation combinations of big bonuses and replays. In addition, "winning" in this embodiment includes a case where a symbol combination of an active role that does not involve a payout of medals (does not involve a payout of medals) is displayed on the active line, for example, a win for a big bonus. Includes winnings and winnings in replays.

The winning combinations in this embodiment include a big bonus (BB), small combinations (cherry, watermelon, bell), and replays (replay, replay 2, replay 3). The types of winning combinations are not limited to these and can be any combination. For example, a regular bonus may be provided in addition to a big bonus. Alternatively, neither a big bonus nor a regular bonus may be provided, and AT (assist time) or ART (assist replay time) may be used.

"Big Bonus (BB)" (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "BB") is a special role (operating role) that starts a special game, Big Bonus Game (BB game), when it is won. The corresponding symbol combination for BB is "7-7-7". Also, a flag is carried over for BB. That is, when an internal win is won for BB, a flag indicating this is set (stored in a specified area of RAM 308 of main control unit 300), but even if BB is not won in that game, the state in which the flag indicating the internal win is set (BB internal win state) is maintained until it is won, and BB remains an internal win even in the next game and thereafter, and the symbol combination "7-7-7" corresponding to BB is lined up, and it is in a state in which BB can be won.

"Small prizes (bell, watermelon, cherry)" (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "bell", "watermelon" and "cherry") are winning prizes in which a specified number of medals are paid out upon winning, and the corresponding symbol combinations are "bell-bell-bell" for bell, "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" for watermelon, and "cherry-ANY-ANY" for cherry. The corresponding payout numbers are as shown in Figure 205(b). In the case of "cherry-ANY-ANY", the symbol on the left reel 110 needs to be "cherry", and the symbols on the center reel 111 and right reel 112 can be any symbol.

"Replay" is a winning combination (operating combination) that allows the player to play the next game without inserting medals (game media), and no medals are paid out.

In addition, the corresponding symbol combinations are "Replay-Replay-Replay (normal replay)" for re-gaming role 1 (replay), and "Replay-Replay-Bell (high probability replay entry replay)" for re-gaming role 2 (replay 2). )'', and the replay combination 3 (Replay 3) is ``Replay-Bell-Replay (high probability replay puncture replay)''. If you win Replay 2 in the normal gaming state, you will move to a state where the internal winning probability of Replay (replay role) is high (replay high probability state), but if you win Replay 3 in the replay high probability state, If you put it away, you will return to the normal gaming state.
<Reel rotating device>
Next, the reel rotating device 10 for rotating the reels 110 to 112 of the slot machine 100 will be described in detail using FIGS. 206 to 208. FIG. 206 is an external perspective view showing the reel rotating device 10 of the slot machine 100. The reel rotating device 10 is roughly composed of reel drive units 20 to 40 and a case member 12 that houses them. The reel drive units 20 to 40 differ only in the arrangement of the designs printed on the reel band 610 (see FIG. 207) (see FIG. 205(a)), but structurally, they are all composed of the same parts. There is. Each of the reel drive units 20 to 40 (hereinafter, the reel drive unit 20 will be described because they have the same configuration) is individually and removably housed in the case member 12.

FIG. 207 is an exploded perspective view of the reel drive unit 20. Further, FIG. 208(a) is a schematic side view showing the assembled state of the reel drive unit 20, and FIG. 208(b) is a schematic front view thereof. Note that in FIGS. 208(a) and 208(b), illustration of some members is omitted for convenience of explanation. The reel drive unit 20 includes a reel 110, a drive device 604 that rotationally drives the reel 110, a rotation detection device 606 that detects the rotational position of the reel 110, and a rotation detection device 606 that detects the rotational position of the reel 110. and a reel illumination device 608 that illuminates the symbols placed on each reel 110.

The reel 110 is composed of a thin-walled cylindrical reel band 610, a first reel frame 612 attached to the left side of the reel band 610 and supporting the left side of the reel band 610, and a second reel frame 614 attached to the right side of the reel band 610 and supporting the right side of the reel band 610.

The first reel frame 612 includes an annular frame portion 612A, six support portions 612B extending from the frame portion 612A toward the center of the frame portion 612A, and the six support portions 612B. It is constituted by a cylindrical attachment portion 612C that projects toward the drive device 604 with the distal end of the portion 612B as the base end.

A plate-shaped light-shielding piece 612D is formed on one of the six support parts 612B so as to protrude toward the rotation detection device 606, and is configured so that this light-shielding piece 612D passes between the light-emitting part and the light-receiving part of the index sensor 606A (described later). In addition, four engagement recesses are formed at four locations in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical mounting part 612C, at approximately equal intervals (approximately 90 degree intervals in this example). These four engagement recesses are respectively fitted into four engagement protrusions of the movable body gear 620, thereby engaging and fixing the first reel frame 612 to the movable body gear 620.

The second reel frame 614 is made of a circular ring-shaped member of approximately the same diameter as the frame portion 612A of the first reel frame 612, and is disposed on the opposite side of the first reel frame 612 across the reel band 610.

The drive device 604 includes a drive motor 616, a drive gear 618 attached to a motor shaft 616A of the drive motor 616, a movable gear 620 that meshes with the drive gear 618, and a support member 623 and a washer. It is constituted by a pedestal 622 rotatably supported via a pedestal 621. Note that the drive motor 616 and the pedestal 622 are fixedly supported by a plate-shaped metal frame 626 with a plurality of mounting screws 624.

In this embodiment, the drive motor 616 is constituted by a 1-2 phase excitation type stepping motor 700 (details will be described later). The movable gear 620 is configured by a gear having a larger diameter than the drive gear 618, and the movable gear 620 and the drive gear 618 constitute a gear set. Further, as described above, after being engaged with the mounting portion 612C of the first reel frame 612, the movable gear 620 is fixed to the first reel frame 612 using the mounting screws 624 and washers 621, and is also mounted on the pedestal. It is rotatably supported by 622 and has a structure that can rotate together with the first reel frame 612.

The rotation detection device 606 is composed of an optical index sensor 606A consisting of a light-emitting section and a light-receiving section, and a mounting base 606B on which the index sensor 606A is attached, and is configured so that a light-shielding piece 612D provided on the first reel frame 612 passes between the light-emitting section and the light-receiving section of the index sensor 606A (see FIG. 208(b)). The mounting base 606B is fixed to a metal frame 626 by a mounting screw 624. The slot machine 100 determines the rotational position of the symbols on the reels 110 to 112 based on the detection result of the rotation detection device 606, and stops the reels 110 to 112 so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line 114. That is, the main control unit 300 resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero by detecting the light-shielding piece 612D of the rotating reel 110 by the index sensor 606A, and becomes able to control the stop position of the reel.

The reel lighting device 608 includes a lighting board 608B in which one cold cathode tube is arranged in the center, and a guide for guiding light emitted from the cold cathode tube in a predetermined direction with the lighting board 608B attached. The lighting case 608C includes a light plate, and the back cover 608A covers the back side of the lighting board 608B. Note that the lighting case 608C is fixed to the metal frame 626 with mounting screws 624 with the lighting board 608B and back cover 608A attached.
<Stepping motor>
FIG. 209 is an exploded perspective view of stepping motor 700. As shown in FIG. 209, the stepping motor 700 includes a motor shaft 710, a case member 720 that supports the motor shaft 710, and a first bearing 722 and a second bearing that are disposed on the case member 720 and support the motor shaft 710. , a stator 730 made of an electromagnet disposed inside the case member 720 and fixed, and a rotor 740 rotatably attached to the motor shaft 710. The stepping motor 700 of this embodiment is a PM (Permanent) motor.
This is a Magnet type stepping motor, and is configured so that the motor rotates once in 96 steps of 1-2 phase excitation type. In this embodiment, the gear ratio between the reel and the motor is 1:5.25, so the reel rotates once in 504 steps (=5.25×96).

The motor shaft 710 is a shaft to which the drive gear 618 shown in Figures 207 and 208 is attached and which outputs power. Hereinafter, the end of the motor shaft 710 to which the drive gear 618 is attached will be referred to as the output end 710A, and the opposite end will be referred to as the rear end 710B.

The case member 720 is a hollow cylinder with a bottom, consisting of a substantially cylindrical base portion 720A with one end open, and a lid portion 720B arranged to cover the opening of the base portion 720A. The case member 720 accommodates the stator 730 and rotor 740 inside, and supports the motor shaft 710, which passes from the bottom of the base portion 720A to the lid portion 720B, via a first bearing 722 and a second bearing 724. The base portion 720A is also provided with a fixing member 720C having a hole through which a mounting screw 624 is inserted to fix and support the base portion 720A to the metal frame 626 shown in FIG. 207.

The first bearing 722 is a roughly cylindrical sliding bearing that is disposed approximately in the center of the cover portion 720B of the case member 720 and rotatably supports the motor shaft 710 near the output end 710A.

The second bearing 724 is a substantially cylindrical sliding bearing that is disposed approximately at the center of the bottom of the base portion 720A of the case member 720 and rotatably supports the motor shaft 710 near the rear end 710B.

The stator 730 is disposed so as to surround the rotor 740, and the drive coil is wound in two stages (A phase, B phase). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 209, the magnetic pole teeth form a triangle (the upper side is called A phase and B phase, and the lower side is called A-phase and B-phase. The A phase and B phase have a phase relationship of 90 degrees electrical angle, and the A phase and the B phase and the B phase have a phase relationship of 180 degrees electrical angle), and each magnetic pole (A phase, A phase, B phase, B phase) has 12 teeth per circumference. FIG. 210 is a diagram showing the arrangement of the magnetic poles of the stator 730. As shown in FIG. 210, the magnetic poles are arranged circumferentially in the order of A phase, B phase, A-phase, B-phase in a clockwise direction.

In this embodiment, the rotor 740 is made of a permanent magnet and has 24 magnetic poles.

Here, we will explain the operating principle of the stepping motor 700. The stepping motor 700 is configured to pass a current through the coil wound around the stator 730, magnetize each phase of the stator 730 in sequence based on an excitation pattern described below, and attract the rotor 740 with a magnetic force, thereby rotating the rotor 740.

In the 1-2 phase excitation type, the four phases of the stator 730 described above are, for example, A phase (1 phase excitation) → A phase and B phase (hereinafter referred to as AB phase. 2 phase excitation) → B phase (1 phase excitation). ) → A-phase and B-phase (hereinafter referred to as A-B-phase. 2-phase excitation) → A-phase (1-phase excitation) → A-phase and B-phase (hereinafter referred to as A-B-phase. 2-phase By excitation in the order of (excitation) → B-phase (1-phase excitation) → A-phase and B-phase (hereinafter referred to as AB-phase. 2-phase excitation) → A-phase (1-phase excitation) →... The rotor 740 is rotated in a fixed direction.

More specifically, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 outputs an on-level pulse signal (for example, a high-level signal) to the phase that excites the stator 730 of the stepping motor 700 via the drive circuit 322 shown in FIG. At the same time, a predetermined phase is excited by outputting an off-level pulse signal (for example, a low-level signal) to a phase that is not being excited. As a result, the rotor 740 of the stepping motor 700 is rotated by a predetermined angle (one step). For example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 outputs an on-level pulse signal to the A phase of the stator 730 of the stepping motor 700, and at the same time outputs an off-level pulse signal to the B phase, A-phase, and B-phase. By exciting only the A phase, the rotor is rotated by one pulse (one step), and thereafter, by switching the excitation in the above-mentioned order, the rotor is rotated by a predetermined pulse. In addition, A phase → AB phase → B phase → A-B phase → A- phase → A-B- phase → B- phase → AB- phase (or A phase → AB- phase → B- phase → A-B- The rotation of 8 pulses (8 steps) of phase→A-phase→AB phase→B phase→AB phase) is hereinafter referred to as one cycle.

In this embodiment, as described above, the number of pulses required to rotate the reel once (360 degrees) is set to 504 pulses (504 pulses/8 pulses = 63 cycles). Therefore, the rotation angle of the rotor 740 per one pulse is approximately 0.71428 degrees (=360/504).

In addition, the number of steps (pulse number) required to rotate the reels once (360 degrees) is 504 steps, and as explained using FIG. 205(a), there are 21 symbols on one reel. are arranged, the number of steps for one frame is 504/21=24 steps.
<Excitation table>
A drive signal output from the CPU 304 to the drive circuit 322 is stored on the ROM 306 as an excitation table. The CPU 304 outputs the designated drive signal by referring to this excitation table. FIG. 211 is a table showing the contents of the excitation table of this embodiment. The data of each excitation table (also called rotation control data because it is data for controlling the rotation of the reel) consists of six bit data (specifically, A-I0, A-I1, A-Phase, B-I0). , B-I1, B-Phase) to represent the excitation phase and excitation force. Specifically, the combination of A-I0 and A-I1 indicates the magnitude of the current (excitation force) for exciting the A-phase or A-phase coil, and if A-I0 is 0 and A- 0% if I1 is 0, 20% if A-I0 is 1, 20% if A-I1 is 0, 60% if A-I0 is 0, A-I1 is 1, 1, when A-I1 is 1, it indicates 100%, when A-Phase is 1, it indicates excitation of A-phase, and when it is 0, it indicates excitation of A-phase. Similarly, the combination of B-I0 and B-I1 indicates the magnitude of the current (excitation force) for exciting the B-phase or B-phase coil, and B-I0 is 0, B-I1 0% if B-I0 is 0, 20% if B-I1 is 0, 60% if B-I0 is 0 and B-I1 is 1, B-I0 is 1 , BI1 indicates 100%, when B-Phase is 1, it indicates B-phase excitation, and when B-Phase is 0, it indicates B-phase excitation.

For example, in the excitation table "55H" whose table number is "B0", A-I0 is 1, AI1 is 0, A-Phase is 1, B-I0 is 1, B-I1 is 0, and B-Phase is 1, indicating that the AB phase is excited at 20%. In addition, in the excitation table "26H" with the table number "C2", A-I0 is 0, A-I1 is 1, A-Phase is 1, B-I0 is 0, B-I1 is 0, and B-Phase is Since it is 0, this indicates that the A phase is excited at 60% (B-phase is 0% and therefore not excited). Therefore, when switching the table number as "C0" → "C1" → "C2" → "C3" → "C4" → "C5" → "C6" → "C7", AB phase → A phase → It is possible to rotate the rotor 740 by an angle equivalent to one cycle by energizing each phase by 60% in the order of AB-phase → B-phase → AB-phase → A-phase → AB-phase → B-phase. can. As described above, in this embodiment, the rotation of the reel is controlled by outputting the excitation table data (rotation control data) composed of 6 bits as a drive signal to the drive circuit 322. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 211, 0% excitation force is also expressed as no excitation, 20% excitation force is also expressed as weak excitation, 60% excitation force is also expressed as medium excitation, and 100% excitation force is also expressed as strong excitation.
<Rotation control table>
FIG. 212 is a table showing the contents of the rotation control table of this embodiment. The rotation control table is stored on the ROM 306, and stores the contents of rotation control for each reel control status (specifically, it is composed of a general-purpose offset counter value, an excitation table, and a holding parameter). The reel control status is information regarding the control state of the reel that is stored independently for each reel 110 to 112, and is information indicating that each reel of the reels 110 to 112 is in a stopped state. "Stop control state (under stop control)", "Acceleration state (under acceleration control)" which is information indicating that each reel of reels 110 to 112 is in an acceleration state, and "Acceleration state (under acceleration control)" which is information indicating that each reel of reels 110 to 112 is in a constant speed state. ``Constant speed state (under constant speed control)'', which is information indicating that reels 110 to 112 are in a retracted state, ``retracted state (under retracting control)'', which is information indicating that each reel of reels 110 to 112 is in a retracted state, and reel 110 to 112. "Brake state (brake control in progress)" is information indicating that each reel 112 is in a brake state, and "brake state (brake control in progress)" is information indicating that each reel 110 to 112 is in reel production (details will be described later). "Reel performance control in progress" is stored. In this embodiment, the constant speed state is further classified into two states with different excitation forces: "constant speed 1 state (during constant speed 1 control)" which is set immediately after the acceleration state, and "constant speed 1 state (during constant speed 1 control)". There is a "constant speed 2 state (during constant speed 2 control)" which is set immediately after "constant speed 1 control in progress". The constant speed 1 state is provided to stably rotate the reels 110 to 112 and to save power, and the constant speed 2 state is provided to suppress the heat generation of the reels 110 to 112 by weakening the excitation force. It is set in. The slot machine 100 of the present embodiment changes the reel control status as follows: Under stop control → Under acceleration control → Under constant speed 1 control → Under constant speed 2 control → Under pull-in control → Under brake control → Under stop control, The rotation of the reels 110 to 112 is controlled by selecting an excitation table (rotation control data) corresponding to each reel status.

For example, when the reel control status is "under acceleration control", as shown in FIG. , the rotation control data of the excitation table "07H" corresponding to the general-purpose offset counter value "1" is held for "12", and then the rotation control data of the excitation table "37H" corresponding to the general-purpose offset counter value "2" is set to "12". 3" holding time, then the rotation control data of the excitation table "30H" corresponding to the general-purpose offset counter value "3" is sequentially controlled from the top row of the table to the bottom row as follows: "3" holding time... Set the data. Then, the reels 110 to 112 are accelerated by gradually decreasing the retention time of the sequentially set rotation control data.

The general-purpose offset counter value is a number (originating at 0) that indicates the order in which each rotation control data is executed in each reel control status, and is a cyclic value that returns to 0 after 7. The retention time (retention parameter) indicates the time for which the set rotation control data is retained, with one retention time indicating one interrupt time (for example, 1.49 ms). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 212, during "acceleration control" in this embodiment, 1-2 phase 100% excitation (strong excitation) is performed, and it is configured to take 89.4 ms (= 1.49 x 60) time.

In addition, when the reel control status is "constant speed 1 control in progress", as shown in FIG. 212, first, the rotation control data of the excitation table "77H" corresponding to the general-purpose offset counter value "0" is Then, the rotation control data of the excitation table "07H" corresponding to the general-purpose offset counter value "1" is set to "1" holding time, and then the rotation control data of the excitation table "37H" corresponding to the general-purpose offset counter value "2" is set. The rotation control data is set sequentially from the top row to the bottom row of the table, and the rotation control data listed in the table is set as one set and repeated 16 times. In other words, the reels are stably rotated at a constant speed by executing 16 sets of sequentially set rotation control data by switching them at one holding time. As a result, "during constant speed 1 control" in this embodiment is configured to require 190.72 ms (=1.49 x 8 x 16 sets) for 1-2 phase 100% excitation (strong excitation). ing. During the constant speed 1 control described above, a control pattern such as one set of rotation control data is always repeated a predetermined number of times.

In addition, when the reel control status is "constant speed 2 control in progress", as shown in FIG. Then, the rotation control data of the excitation table "06H" corresponding to the general-purpose offset counter value "1" is set to "1" holding time, and then the rotation control data of the excitation table "26H" corresponding to the general-purpose offset counter value "2" is set. The rotation control data is set sequentially from the top row to the bottom row of the table, such as "1" holding time, and so on. That is, the reels are rotated at a constant speed by switching sequentially set rotation control data every one holding time. As a result, during "constant speed 2 control" in this embodiment, the configuration is such that the state of 1-2 phase 60% excitation (medium excitation) continues until there is a stop operation in the stop possible state, which will be described in detail later. has been done. In the constant speed 2 control described above, a control pattern such as rotation control data with a general-purpose offset counter value of "0" to "7" is repeated an indefinite number of times, and when a stop operation is performed in a state where it is possible to stop, the control pattern is stopped in the middle of the control pattern. Even if there is, the constant speed 2 control is ended.

In addition, when the reel control status is "pulling in control", the rotation control data used in "constant speed 2 control" continues to be set in sequence. For example, when "constant speed 2 control" is performed, if the rotation control data of the excitation table "42H" corresponding to the general-purpose offset counter value "5" is set to a "1" hold time and then the rotation control data of the excitation table "62H" corresponding to the general-purpose offset counter value "6" is set to a "1" hold time, then the rotation control data of the excitation table "64H" corresponding to the general-purpose offset counter value "7" is set to a "1" hold time, and then the number of steps corresponding to the number of pull-in frames (number of pull-in frames x 24), the rotation control data of each excitation table corresponding to the general-purpose offset counter value 0 to 7 is set to a "1" hold time in sequence (to stop at AB phase in this embodiment).

In the following explanation, the process is performed separately into the second constant speed control process (FIG. 222) and the pull-in control process (FIG. 225), but "constant speed 2 control" and "during pull-in control" are combined as shown in FIG. 212. ``Second constant speed control'' shown in is now in progress.

Furthermore, when the reel control status is "brake control in progress", as shown in Figure 212, the rotating reel is braked by performing 1-2 phase 100% excitation (strong excitation) for 74.5ms. , the reels are stopped.

Furthermore, when the reel control status is "reel stop control in progress", the stopped state is maintained by continuing 1-2 phase 20% excitation (weak excitation) as shown in FIG.
<Operation>
Next, the operation of the slot machine 100 equipped with the above-mentioned stepping motor 700 will be described.
<Main processing of main control unit>
First, the main processing of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to Fig. 213. Note that Fig. 213 is a flow chart showing the flow of the main processing of the main control unit 300.

The basic control of the game is mainly performed by the CPU 304 of the main control section 300, and unless a power outage or the like is detected, the CPU 304 repeatedly executes the main processing of the main control section shown in the figure.

When the power is turned on, first, in step S101, various initial settings are performed. In this initial setting, the stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304 shown in FIG. Permit operation and set initial values.

In step S102, a medal insertion/start operation reception process is executed. Here, it is checked whether or not medals have been inserted, and the winning line display lamp 120 shown in FIG. 202 is turned on in response to the insertion of medals. Also, preparations are made to transmit a medal insertion command indicating that medals have been inserted to the first sub-control unit 400 shown in FIG. 204. Note that if the player wins a prize in the previous game, the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game are inserted, so there is no need for the player to insert medals. Also, it checks whether the start lever 135 has been operated or not, and if it is determined that the start lever 135 has been operated, it determines the number of inserted medals, determines a valid winning line, and generates it in the random number generation circuit 316. The random numbers (first random number and second random number) are obtained. Further, in this step S102, preparations are made to transmit a start lever acceptance command indicating that the start lever 135 has been operated to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S103, an internal lottery process for winning combinations is performed. Details of this internal lottery process for winning combinations will be described later.

In step S104, a reel stop preparation process is performed. In the reel stop preparation process, reel stop data is selected for each of the reels 110 to 112 based on the results of the winning combination internal lottery process in step S103, etc.

In step S105, a reel spin start process is executed based on the start operation, which starts the rotation of all reels 110 to 112. The details of this reel spin start process will be described later.

Steps S106 and S107 are performed for each reel, and are repeated three times for the three reels 110 to 112. A stop button acceptance flag is prepared for each reel in the RAM 308. Stop buttons 137 to 139 are provided in one-to-one correspondence for each reel, and the stop button acceptance flag also corresponds to the stop buttons 137 to 139 in one-to-one correspondence. This stop button acceptance flag is set to either acceptable or not acceptable. In step S106, since the reel rotation start process (step S105) has started, this stop button acceptance flag is set to acceptable. The stop button acceptance flag is set to not acceptable when the corresponding stop button is operated in the stop button acceptance process in the reel rotation control process executed in the main control unit timer interrupt process described later. In step S107, it is determined whether the stop button acceptance flag set to acceptable in step S106 has returned to not acceptable. This step S107 is repeatedly executed until the stop button acceptance flag returns to not acceptable. That is, in step S107, the system waits for the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 to be accepted. When the determination in step S107 for all three reels 110 to 112 becomes Yes, all three reels 110 to 112 are stopped.

In the next step S108, a winning determination is made for the symbols that have stopped due to the operation of the stop buttons 137-139. Here, if a winning symbol combination that corresponds to an internally won winning symbol or a winning symbol for which a flag is being carried over is lined up (displayed) on an activated winning line, it is determined that the winning symbol has been won. For example, if "replay-replay-replay" is lined up on an activated winning line, it is determined that a replay has been won. Also, in this step S108, preparations are made to send a display determination command indicating the result of the winning determination to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S109, a medal payout process is performed. In this medal payout process, if any winning combination that entails a payout is achieved, the number of medals corresponding to that winning combination is paid out.

In step S110, a game state control process is performed. In this gaming state control process, control is performed to shift the gaming state, and for example, in the case of a BB (big bonus) win, preparations are made to start the BB (big bonus) game from the next time, and in those final games, , prepare to start the normal game next time. Further, in this step S110, preparations are made to transmit a gaming status command indicating the gaming status to the first sub-control unit 400.

With the above, one game ends. Thereafter, the game progresses by returning to step S102 and repeating the above-described process. The various commands prepared in each of the above steps are transmitted in the command setting transmission process (step S209 shown in FIG. 216) of the main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later.
<Winning role internal lottery process>
FIG. 214 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the winning combination internal lottery process in step S103 shown in FIG. 213.

In step S1031, an internal lottery for the winning combination shown in FIG. 205(b) is performed using the first random number value obtained in step S102 and the winning combination lottery table stored in ROM 306. If any winning combination is internally won as a result of this internal lottery, the flag for that winning combination is internally turned on.

Next, in step S1032, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not a reel effect can be executed. A reel effect is an effect in which a spinning reel appears to have stopped, and in a reel effect, strictly speaking, the reel is not stopped but swings. In this embodiment, the reel effects include a first reel effect that does not require any operation by the player, and a second reel effect that requires the player to operate the stop buttons 137 to 139. The first reel effect is a so-called reel action, and the second reel effect is a so-called pseudo game. The lottery here uses the second random number value obtained in step S102 and a reel effect execution lottery table stored in ROM 306 to derive one of the lottery results of executing the first reel effect, executing the second reel effect, and not executing the reel effect.

In step S1033, it is determined whether or not the first reel effect (reel action) has been won, and if it has been won, the reel effect information prepared in RAM 308 is set to have a first reel effect (step S1034), and the process proceeds to step S1035. On the other hand, if it has not been won, the process proceeds directly to step S1035.

In step S1035, it is determined whether or not the second reel performance (pseudo game) has been won, and if it has been won, the presence of the second reel performance is set in the reel performance information prepared in the RAM 308 (step S1036); The process advances to step S1037. On the other hand, if the winner has not been selected, the process directly advances to step S1037.

In step S1037, preparations are made to send an internal lottery result command indicating the results of the internal lotteries for each winning role and reel effect to the first sub-control unit 400, and the winning role internal lottery process is then terminated.
<Reel spin start process>
FIG. 215 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the reel spin start processing of step S105 shown in FIG.

In step S1050, a gaming time monitoring timer value is acquired. The gaming time monitoring timer is a timer stored in a specific storage area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and is a timer that sets the time required for one game to a predetermined time (for example, the minimum playing time of 4.1 seconds). This timer is set for the purpose of limiting the number of game media gained or lost per unit time, and limiting the gambling nature of the game. The gaming time monitoring timer is set to a predetermined timer value (for example, a timer value corresponding to 4.1 seconds) in step S1052, which will be described later, and is activated every time the main control unit 300 executes timer interrupt processing (described later). is decremented.

In step S1051, it is determined whether the acquired game time monitoring timer value has exceeded 4.1 seconds. In other words, if the game time monitoring timer value is 0, then 4.1 seconds or more have passed, but if the game time monitoring timer value is greater than 0, then 4.1 seconds have not passed. If the game time monitoring timer value is 4.1 seconds or more, the current game may be started, and the process proceeds to step S1052. On the other hand, if the game time monitoring timer value has not exceeded 4.1 seconds, the process returns to step S1050 and the process is repeated. During the process, the timer value of the game time monitoring timer is decremented for each timer interrupt of the main control unit 300, and when the game time monitoring timer reaches 0, the process proceeds to step S1052.

In step S1052, the game time monitoring timer value is reset. Specifically, a timer value equivalent to 4.1 seconds is stored in a specific area of RAM 308. In this embodiment, the time when the game time monitoring timer value is set is the start timing of one game. The end timing of one game is the time when the game time monitoring timer value is set next. In other words, one game is from when the game time monitoring timer value is set to when the next game time monitoring timer value is set. In addition, since the game time monitoring timer value is set each time each reel 110 to 112 starts rotating, one game can also be the period from when each reel 110 to 112 starts rotating to when each reel 110 to 112 starts rotating next time. In addition, the end timing of one game may be when the game time monitoring timer value becomes 0 and the game state control process of S110 in FIG. 213 ends. Also, the start timing of one game may be the time when a valid start lever is accepted, and the end timing of one game may be the time when a valid bet button operation can be accepted, and the period from when a bet button operation can be accepted to when a valid start lever is accepted may be the preparation period for the start of the next game.

In step S1053, the reel spin start command to be sent to the first sub-controller 400 is set and prepared for transmission. The reel spin start command is a command that indicates the start of spinning of reels 110 to 112.

In step S1054, the status of the left reel 110 is set to "start spinning."

In step S1055, the status of the middle reel 111 is set to "rotation start".

In step S1056, the status of the right reel 112 is set to "start spinning."

In step S1057, it is determined whether or not the first reel effect or the second reel effect is set in the reel effect information set in step S1034 or step S1036 shown in FIG. , the reel control status is set to "reel performance control in progress" (step S1058), and this reel rotation start process is ended. If it has not been set, the reel control status is set to "acceleration state (under acceleration control)" (step S1058), and this reel rotation start process ends. As mentioned above, the reel control status is information regarding the reel control status that is stored independently for each reel 110 to 112 in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. "Control state (during stop control)", "Acceleration state (during acceleration control)", "Constant speed 1 state (during constant speed 1 control)", "Constant speed 2 state (during constant speed 2 control)", "Retraction state (During retraction control),” “brake state (during brake control),” and “Reel performance control in progress” is stored. Further, in step S1059, the acceleration start request flag is turned on. The acceleration start request flag is flag information stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and is referenced in the acceleration control process described later.
<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control section timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control section 300 will be described using FIG. 216. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main control section timer interrupt processing.

The main control unit 300 is equipped with a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (approximately once every 1.5 ms in this embodiment), and this timer interrupt signal is used as a trigger to execute the main control unit timer interrupt process at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. This timer interrupt start process includes processes such as temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 to a stack area.

In step S202, the WDT is periodically (maintained) so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt occurs (so that no processing abnormality is detected). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every 1.49 ms, which is the cycle of the main controller timer interrupt.

In step S203, input port status update processing is performed. In this input port status update process, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input through the input ports of the I/O 310 shown in FIG. The information is stored in a signal state storage area divided into two areas.

In step S204, various game processing is performed. Specifically, the interrupt status is acquired (various interrupt statuses are acquired based on signals from various sensors 318 shown in FIG. 204), and processing is performed according to this status. For example, if the interrupt status is in the process of inserting medals, a medal insertion acceptance process is performed, and if the interrupt status is in the process of dispensing, a process of dispensing medals is performed.

In step S205, timer update processing is performed. Update various timers in respective time units. In this embodiment, specifically, the above-described gaming time monitoring timer is updated by subtraction.

In step S206, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring processing, first, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area in step S1003 are read out to monitor for errors related to medal insertion abnormalities, medal payout abnormalities, etc., and error processing is performed if an error is detected. Furthermore, depending on the current game state, the medal selector 170 (a medal blocker operated by a solenoid provided in the medal selector 170), various lamps 338, and various seven-segment (SEG) displays are set.

In step S207, a stop button display control process is performed. Details of the stop button display control process will be described later.

In step S208, if the status of each reel stored in RAM 308 is "start spinning", a reel spin control process (described in detail below) is performed. In this reel spin control process, the spin of the reels is controlled, and the reel stop data to be actually used for the reel stop control is determined from the multiple reel stop data candidates selected in step S106 of the main control unit main process according to the stop order and stop status of the reels 110 to 112, and then the spin of the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to the pressed stop buttons 137 to 139 is stopped based on the determined reel stop data.

In step S209, a command setting and sending process is performed, and various commands are sent to the first sub-control unit 400. In this embodiment, the output schedule information sent to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, with bit 15 being strobe information (when on, indicates that data is set), bits 11 to 14 being command types (in this embodiment, basic commands, start lever acceptance commands, internal lottery commands, rotation start commands associated with starting the rotation of the reels 110 to 112, stop button acceptance commands associated with accepting the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139, stop position information commands associated with the stopping process of the reels 110 to 112, payout number commands and payout end commands associated with the medal payout process, etc.), and bits 0 to 10 being command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

The first sub-control unit 400 is able to determine performance control in accordance with changes in game control in the main control unit 300 based on the command type included in the received output schedule information, and also to Based on the information of the command data, it becomes possible to determine the contents of the production control.

In step S210, external signal output processing is performed. In this external signal output processing, game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to an information input circuit 652 separate from the slot machine 100 via an information output circuit 334 shown in FIG.

In step S211, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. If the low voltage signal is on (when power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S213, and if the low voltage signal is off (power cutoff is not detected), the process moves to step S212.

In step S212, various processes (timer interrupt termination process) for terminating the timer interrupt process are performed. In this timer interrupt termination process, the values of each register temporarily saved in step S201 are set to the original registers. Thereafter, the process returns to the main control section main processing shown in FIG. 213.

On the other hand, in step S213, specific variables and stack pointers for returning to the state at power outage upon power restoration are saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as recovery data, and power outage processing such as initialization of input/output ports is performed. After that, the process returns to the main control section main processing shown in FIG.
<Stop button display control processing>
Next, the stop button display control process will be described in detail using FIG. 217. Note that FIG. 217 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the stop button display control process in step S207 shown in FIG. 216.

In step S2071, it is determined whether any one of the stop button reception flags corresponding to each of the three reels 110 to 112 is set to "acceptable". As described above, the stop button reception flag is set to "acceptable" for each reel (each stop button) in step S106 in the main processing of the main control unit shown in FIG. 213. If all stop button reception flags are set to "prohibited", this stop button display control processing ends, and if one or more stop button reception flags are set to "acceptable", this time it is determined whether all reels 110 to 112 have transitioned to the constant speed 2 state by referring to the reel control status of each reel (step S2702). In this step S2702, if the reel control status of each reel is any of "constant speed 2 state", "retracted state", and "brake state", the determination result is Yes, and the process proceeds to step S2703. On the other hand, if the reel control status of even one reel is "accelerated state" or "constant speed 1 state", this stop button display control processing ends.

In step S2703, it is determined whether or not a light-blocking piece has been detected by the index sensor for all reels 110-112. An index sensor detection memory area is provided in RAM 308 for each reel in which detection information indicating whether or not the index sensor has detected a light-blocking piece is stored, and in step S2703, the index sensor detection memory area for all reels is referenced to make a determination. If undetected detection information is stored for even one reel, this stop button display control process ends. On the other hand, if detection information indicating detection has been stored for all reels 110-112, the process proceeds to step S2704.

The RAM 308 is also provided with a light emission mode storage area for storing the light emission modes of the light emitters 137a to 139a provided inside the stop buttons 137 to 139. That is, a light emission mode storage area is provided for each reel (stop button). The initial light emission mode of the light emitters 137a to 139a is, for example, a non-light emission mode (light-off mode) or a light emission mode of a first color. Hereinafter, the initial light emission mode is referred to as the first light emission mode. The light emission mode storage area initially stores the first light emission mode as the light emission mode information. In the situation that has progressed to step S2704, all the reels 110 to 112 are not stopped (at least one reel is rotating), all the reels 110 to 112 have transitioned to the constant speed 2 state, and a light-shielding piece has been detected. In this state, the light emission mode of the light emitters provided inside the stop buttons for the reels that continue to rotate in the constant speed 2 state is changed from the first light emission mode to the second light emission mode. The second light-emitting mode may be, for example, a blinking mode or a second color light-emitting mode. In addition, when the first light-emitting mode is the first color light-emitting mode, it may be a non-light-emitting mode (light-off mode). Furthermore, when the second light-emitting mode is the second color light-emitting mode, the first light-emitting mode may be a blinking mode. In this way, the first light-emitting mode and the second light-emitting mode may be different from each other, including a light-off mode and a blinking mode. The second light-emitting mode is a mode that notifies that the operation of the stop button of the second light-emitting mode is in a state in which the operation of the stop button corresponding to the second light-emitting mode is in a state in which the stop button can be operated. In step S2704, the light-emitting body information in the light-emitting mode storage area of the reel whose stop button reception flag is set to reception is updated to the second light-emitting mode, and the stop button display control process is terminated. By executing this step S2704, for example, if all of the reels 110-112 are not stopped, all of the reels 110-112 have transitioned to the constant speed 2 state, and a light-blocking piece has been detected, the light emission modes of the light-emitting bodies 137a-139a provided inside all of the stop buttons 137-139 change to the second light emission mode in unison. Also, if some of the reels are stopped and the remaining reels have transitioned to the constant speed 2 state and a light-blocking piece has been detected, only the light emission mode of the light-emitting bodies provided inside the stop buttons of the remaining reels (the reels that are spinning) changes to the second light emission mode.
<Reel rotation control process>
Next, the reel spin control process will be described in detail with reference to Figure 218. Note that Figure 218 is a flow chart showing in detail the flow of the reel spin control process in step S208 shown in Figure 216.

Steps S208a to S208c are performed for each reel, and since they are performed for the three reels 110 to 112, step S208a is repeated at least three times. In this step S208a, it is determined whether the stop button reception flag is set to reception possible. In other words, it is determined whether the target reel is spinning. If the stop button reception flag is set to reception prohibited, step S208a is executed for the remaining reels, or if step S208a has been executed for all reels, it proceeds to step S208d. On the other hand, if the stop button reception flag is set to reception possible, it is determined whether the light-shielding piece of the target reel is detected by the index sensor (step S208b). In this determination, it is determined whether a detection signal has been received from the index sensor, and if it has not been received, step S208a is executed for the remaining reels, or if step S208a has been executed for all reels, it proceeds to step S208d. On the other hand, if the signal has been received, the index sensor detection storage area of the target reel is updated to the already detected detection information (step S208c), and the process proceeds to step S208d. In this manner, in this embodiment, whenever the reel rotation control process is executed, if the stop button reception flag is set to reception, it is determined whether or not the light-shielding piece of the target reel has been detected by the index sensor, and the light-shielding piece of the target reel can be detected even if the reel control status is in the "accelerating state" or the "constant speed 1 state". However, if the light-shielding piece is to be detected only in a "certain state" (for example, the "constant speed 1 state" or the "constant speed 2 state"), the reel control status is referenced between steps S208a and S208b to determine whether or not the state is "certain", and if the answer is Yes, step S208b is executed, and if the answer is No, step S208a is executed for the remaining reels, or if step S208a has been executed for all reels, the process proceeds to step S208d.

In step S208d, the stop button acceptance process is executed. This stop button acceptance process will be described later.

Steps S208f to S208k are performed for each reel, and are performed for three reels 110 to 112. In step S208f, reel control information is acquired. Here, the reel control information refers to the entire information regarding rotation control of the reels 110 to 112, and is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308. In this embodiment, the reel control information includes the values of the reel control status described above, the general-purpose offset counter, the reel control status transition counter described later, the holding counter, and the like.

In step S208g, reel control determination processing (described in detail later) is performed based on the acquired reel control information.

In step S208h, it is determined whether the reel drive signal switching request flag is ON. The reel drive signal switching request flag is flag information stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and indicates whether or not the currently set rotation control data is to be switched. When the reel drive signal switching request flag is ON, the currently set rotation control data is switched, and when the reel drive signal switching request flag is OFF, the currently set rotation control data is not switched. Note that the reel drive signal switching request flag is set in the acceleration control process. If the reel drive signal switching request flag is ON, the process advances to step S208i, and if the reel drive signal switching request flag is OFF, the process advances to step S208k.

In step S208i, rotation control data is obtained based on the reel control status and the general-purpose offset counter value contained in the obtained reel control information. Specifically, the corresponding excitation table (spin control data) is obtained from the table shown in FIG. 212 based on the reel control status and the general-purpose offset counter value. For example, if the reel control status is "acceleration control in progress" and the general-purpose offset counter value is "0", the rotation control data of the excitation table "77H" is obtained.

In step S208j, the rotation control data acquired in step S208i is set.

In step S208k, the reel control information is updated because the content of the reel control information has been changed in accordance with the above-described processing.
<Reel control judgment process>
FIG. 219 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the reel control determination process in step S208g shown in FIG. 218. The reel control determination process is a process of sequentially switching reel rotation control according to the reel control status described above. Specifically, the processes are executed in the order of acceleration control process, reel effect control process, first constant speed control process, second constant speed control process, pull-in control process, and brake control process.

In step S301, the reel control status is obtained.

In step S302, it is determined whether the acquired reel control status is "stop control in progress", and if the acquired reel control status is "stop control in progress", the reel control determination process ends. On the other hand, if the acquired reel control status is not "stop control in progress", the process proceeds to S303.

In step S303, it is determined whether the acquired reel control state is "reel performance control in progress". When the reel control state is "reel performance control in progress", the process proceeds to step S304, where reel performance control processing is performed. As described above, there are two types of reel performance: the first reel performance (so-called reel action) that does not require player operation, and the reel performance (so-called pseudo game) that requires the player to operate the left, center, and right stop buttons 137 to 139. In the control of the first reel performance, at least one of the control processes of the acceleration control, first constant speed control, second constant speed control, and brake control of this game may be used, or each control process dedicated to the first reel performance control may be prepared. In addition, in the first reel performance, the reel may be accelerated and then decelerated (brake control is executed) before maintaining the constant speed state. In controlling the second reel performance, at least one of the control processes of the acceleration control, first constant speed control, second constant speed control, brake control, and retraction control of this game may be used, or each control process may be prepared specifically for reel performance control. In addition, retraction control based on the number of slipping frames of five or more, which is not possible in this game, may be performed. After the reel performance ends, a random delay process is performed to delay the timing at which each reel starts to spin so that multiple reels do not start spinning at the same time, and then the reel control status is set to under acceleration control. On the other hand, if the reel control state is not "under reel performance control", proceed to step S305.

In step S305, it is determined whether the acquired reel control state is "under acceleration control". When the reel control state is "acceleration control in progress", the process advances to step S306, and acceleration control processing (control processing for accelerating the rotation of the reels; details will be described later) is performed. On the other hand, if the reel control state is not "under acceleration control", the process advances to step S307.

In step S307, it is determined whether the acquired reel control state is "constant speed 1 control in progress." If the reel control state is "constant speed 1 control in progress," the process proceeds to step S308, where a first constant speed control process (control process for maintaining the rotation of the reel at a constant speed; details will be described later) is performed. On the other hand, if the reel control state is not "constant speed 1 control in progress," the process proceeds to step S309.

In step S309, it is determined whether the acquired reel control state is "constant speed 2 control in progress". When the reel control state is "constant speed 2 control in progress", the process proceeds to step S310, and a second constant speed control process (control process for maintaining the rotation of the reel at a constant speed; details will be described later) is performed. On the other hand, if the reel control state is not "constant speed 2 control in progress", the process advances to step S311.

In step S311, it is determined whether the acquired reel control state is "brake control in progress." If the reel control state is "brake control in progress," the process proceeds to step S312, where brake control processing (control processing for stopping the rotation of the reel; details will be described later) is performed. On the other hand, if the reel control state is not "brake control in progress," the process proceeds to step S313.

In step S313, since the reel control state is "retraction control in progress", retraction control processing (processing for controlling the reel to retract to a stop position; details will be described later) is performed.
<Acceleration control process>
FIG. 220 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the acceleration control process in step S306 shown in FIG.

In step S306a, it is determined whether there is an acceleration start request based on the acceleration start request flag. Note that since the acceleration start request flag is set to ON in step S1059 of the reel rotation start process shown in FIG. 215, the determination is YES in step S306a of the first timer interrupt process. Note that since the acceleration start request flag is set to OFF in step S306d, which will be described later, the determination is NO in step S306a of the second and subsequent timer interrupt processing. If there is a request to start acceleration, the process advances to step S306b, and if there is no request to start acceleration, the process advances to step S306f.

In step S306b, the value of the reel control status transition counter is set to 0, which is an initial value. Here, the reel control status transition counter is a counter that measures the number of repeated sets (cycle number) of rotation control data of 8 steps per cycle, and in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 212, it is repeated three times. and terminates the acceleration control process.

In step S306c, the value of the general-purpose offset counter is set to 0, which is an initial value.

In step S306d, the reel drive signal switching request flag is set to ON. Also, the acceleration start request flag is set to OFF.

In step S306e, the value of the symbol interval counter (described in detail below) is set to a dummy value of 0. The symbol interval counter value set in step S306e is used in the second constant speed control process described below. After step S306e is completed, the process proceeds to step S306q.

In step S306f, the value of the hold counter is decremented by 1. The value of the hold counter is set in step S306q, which will be described later, and is decremented by 1 each time a timer interrupt process is executed. Note that the initial value set in the hold counter in step S306q is the value of the hold parameter corresponding to the set generic offset counter value. For example, as shown in FIG. 212, when the generic offset counter value is 0, 12 is set as the initial value in the hold counter.

In step S306g, the reel drive signal switching request flag is set to OFF.

In step S306h, it is determined whether the subtracted value of the hold counter is 0. If the value of the hold counter is 0, it is time to switch the rotation control data, so the process proceeds to step S306i. If the value of the hold counter is not 0, it is not time to switch the rotation control data, so the acceleration control process ends.

In step S306i, since it is time to switch the rotation control data, the reel drive signal switching request flag is set to ON.

In step S306j, the general-purpose offset counter value is incremented by 1 to set the next rotation control data.

In step S306k, it is determined whether the incremented generic offset counter value is 8. If the generic offset counter value is 8, the rotation control of the set (cycle) has ended, so the process proceeds to step S306l. If the generic offset counter value is not 8, the rotation control of the set (cycle) has not ended, so the process proceeds to step S306q.

In step S306l, the general-purpose offset counter value is set to the initial value of 0 in order to move on to rotation control for the next set (cycle).

In step S306m, the reel control status transition counter is incremented by 1.

In step S306n, it is determined whether the incremented value of the reel control status transition counter is 3. If the value of the reel control status transition counter is 3, the process proceeds to step S306o, and if the value of the reel control status transition counter is not 3, the process proceeds to step S306q.

In step S306o, since all rotation controls set during acceleration control have been performed, the reel control status is set to "constant speed 1 control in progress."

In step S306p, the reel control status transition counter is set to an initial value of 0. After step S306p is completed, the acceleration control process ends.

In step S306q, the rotation control table shown in FIG. 212 is referred to, and the reel control status is "under acceleration control" and the holding parameter value corresponding to the set reel control status transition counter value and general-purpose offset counter value is acquired. Then, set the acquired retention parameter value as the initial value of the retention counter. For example, as shown in FIG. 212, when the reel control status transition counter value is 0 and the general-purpose offset counter value is 0, 12 is set as the initial value of the holding counter, and the reel control status transition counter value is 1 and the general-purpose offset counter value is 0. In the case of 7, 1 is set as the initial value of the holding counter. After the process in step S306q ends, the acceleration control process ends.
<First constant speed control process>
FIG. 221 is a flowchart showing in detail the first constant speed control process in step S308 shown in FIG. 219.

In step S308a, 1 is added to the value of the general-purpose offset counter. That is, in the first constant speed control process, as shown in FIG. 212, the rotation control data is switched every interrupt time, so the value of the general-purpose offset counter is incremented for each timer interrupt process. Note that since the reel drive signal switching request flag is set to ON in step S1309 of the acceleration control process, no switching process is performed, so the reel drive signal switching request flag remains ON during the first constant speed control process and the second constant speed control process described below. Therefore, in the reel rotation control process in FIG. 218, the rotation control data corresponding to the incremented general-purpose offset counter value is set for each timer interrupt process (see step S208j in FIG. 218).

In step S308b, it is determined whether the incremented general-purpose offset counter value is 8. If the general-purpose offset counter value is 8, the process proceeds to step S308c to move on to rotation control of the next set (cycle); if the general-purpose offset counter value is not 8, the rotation control of the set (cycle) has not ended, and the first constant speed control process ends.

In step S308c, in order to move on to the next set (cycle) of rotation control, the value of the general-purpose offset counter is set to an initial value of 0.

In step S308d, the reel control status transition counter is incremented by 1.

In step S308e, it is determined whether the incremented value of the reel control status transition counter is 16. If the value of the reel control status transition counter is 16, 16 sets of spin control have been completed (see FIG. 212), so the process proceeds to step S308f. If the value of the reel control status transition counter is not 16, the first constant speed control process is completed.

In step S308f, since all rotation controls set during constant speed 1 control have been performed, the reel control status is set to "constant speed 2 control in progress."
<Second constant speed control process>
FIG. 222 is a flowchart showing in detail the second constant speed control process of step S310 shown in FIG. 219. The second constant speed control process mainly involves tracking the symbol positions on the reels. In order for the main control unit 300 to grasp the symbol position on the reels, two counters, a "symbol number counter" and a "symbol interval counter" are used to monitor the symbol position. Here, the "symbol number counter" and "symbol interval counter" will be explained.

Figure 205 is also a diagram showing the relationship between the symbol number counter and the symbol interval counter. The symbol number counter is a counter provided in the RAM 308 to store and hold the symbol located in the middle of the symbol display window 113, which is the reference position. For example, for the left reel 110, the BB symbol at the top of the symbol row of the left reel 110 is the reference position, and counting begins when the index sensor 606A passes the light-shielding piece 612D. Each symbol and the count value are associated in advance, and the main control unit 300 can identify the symbol displayed in the symbol display window 113 from the symbol number counter value when the reel stops and determine whether it has won. The symbol interval counter is also a counter provided in the RAM 308, and counts the number of drive pulses per symbol (timer interrupt processing count). The main control unit 300 sets the number of drive pulses per symbol (24 in this case) in the symbol interval counter, subtracts it each time a drive pulse is output, and increments the symbol number counter by 1 when the symbol interval counter value becomes 0.

In step S310a, 1 is added to the value of the general-purpose offset counter. That is, in the second constant speed control process, as shown in FIG. 212, the rotation control data is switched every interrupt time, so the value of the general-purpose offset counter is incremented for each timer interrupt process. Also, since the reel drive signal switching request flag remains ON, in the reel rotation control process of FIG. 218, the rotation control data corresponding to the incremented general-purpose offset counter value is set for each timer interrupt process (see step S208l of FIG. 218).

In step S310b, it is determined whether the added value of the general-purpose offset counter is 8 or not. If the value of the general-purpose offset counter is 8, the process proceeds to step S310c in order to shift to the rotation control of the next set (cycle), and if the value of the general-purpose offset counter is not 8, the rotation control of the set (cycle) is performed. Since the rotation control has not ended, the process advances to step S310d.

In step S310c, the general-purpose offset counter is set to its initial value of 0 in order to move on to rotation control for the next set (cycle).

In step S310d, the value of the symbol interval counter is subtracted by 1. That is, the value of the symbol interval counter is decremented every interrupt time.

In step S310e, it is determined whether the decremented value of the symbol interval counter is 0. If the symbol interval counter value is 0, the process proceeds to step S310f, and if the symbol interval counter value is not 0, the process proceeds to step S310h.

In step S310f, if the value of the symbol interval counter is 0, the next symbol is substituted, so the initial value 24 is set as the value of the symbol interval counter.

In step S310g, the value of the symbol number counter is subtracted by 1 in order to update to the next symbol.

In step S310h, index sensor detection information is acquired from the index sensor detection storage area of the RAM 308. As described above, this detection information is updated during the reel rotation control process shown in FIG. 218 (step S208c). In each of the three reels, the light shielding piece is provided at the position where the symbol number counter value is 0 and the symbol interval counter value is 0, and the light shielding piece is located between the light emitting part and the light receiving part of the index sensor. Detection is determined when the

In step S310i, if the acquired index sensor detection information has already been detected, the process proceeds to step S310j, and if it has not yet been detected, the process proceeds to step S310n.

In step S310j, since the reel symbol positions have been searched for, stop button enable information is set in a specified area of RAM 308. That is, since the light blocking piece provided at the position where the symbol number counter value is 0 and the symbol interval counter value is 0 has been detected in a constant speed state, the reel stop position can be controlled and the reel enters a stoppable state. Once the stop button enable information is set (the reel enters a stoppable state), operation of the stop button becomes acceptable. Note that if a stop button for which stop button enable information is not set is operated, the operation itself is accepted, but is invalidated and the reel corresponding to that stop button does not stop. Alternatively, the operation itself may not be accepted.

In this embodiment, the stop button validity information is set in the second constant speed control process, but steps S310h to S310j may be executed in the first constant speed control process so that the stop button validity information is set in the first constant speed control process.

In step S310k, the initial value 24 is set to the value of the symbol interval counter.

In step S310l, the value of the pattern number counter is set to the initial value of 0.

In step S310m, the step-out detection counter in RAM 308 is set to an initial value of 0. After step S310m is completed, the second constant speed control process is completed.

In step S310n, step-out detection processing is performed based on the value of the step-out detection counter. In the step-out detection process, the value of the step-out detection counter is incremented by 1 for every 1 interruption to a specific value (for example, the value of the number of pulses required to rotate the reel once (360 degrees), here 504 ), it is determined that a step-out (so-called step-out) has occurred, and all reels that have not been operated are restarted from acceleration control, but only the reels that have stepped out may be restarted from acceleration control. Note that in this embodiment, the step-out detection process is performed only in the second constant-speed control process, so if the step-out detection process occurs during the period of the first constant-speed control process or acceleration control process that precedes the second constant-speed control process. In this case, the step-out detection process is not performed and the main control unit 300 is unable to detect the step-out, but the step-out detection process may be performed even during this period. Further, in addition to step-out, processing for detecting other abnormal conditions (for example, resonance, misstep, motor stop) may be performed. After the process in step S310n ends, the second constant speed control process ends.
<Stop button reception process>
FIG. 223 is a flowchart showing in detail the stop button reception process in step S208d shown in FIG. 218. Note that the stop button acceptance process is executed after the stop button enable information is set in a state where operations of the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be accepted, that is, in step S310j of the second constant speed control process shown in FIG. It is something that will be done. The stop button reception process is a process of determining the stop position of the corresponding reel based on the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139.

In step S208d1, stop reception information is acquired. Here, the stop acceptance information is stop button validity information or a part of reel control information, and means all the information necessary for determining whether to accept a stop.

In step S208d2, the reels that can be stopped are determined from the acquired stop acceptance information, and the stoppable reel information is set in a predetermined area of RAM 308 (for example, when it is determined that the left reel 110 is a stoppable reel, the left reel 110 is set).

In step S208d3, it is determined whether or not the stop button corresponding to the reel represented by the set stoppable reel information has been operated. In other words, it is determined whether or not the operation of the stop button corresponding to the stoppable reel has been accepted. If the stop button has been operated (accepted), the process proceeds to step S208d4, and if the stop button has not been operated (accepted), the process proceeds to step S208d8.

In step S208d4, data regarding the reel to be stopped (reel data to be stopped) is acquired.

In step S208d5, a pull-in counter setting process (details will be described later) is performed.

In step S208d6, the status of the reel that was stopped is updated to "stopped" as a result of the operation of the stop button corresponding to the stoppable reel.

In step S208d7, the stop button reception flag, which was previously set to "acceptable," is set to "not accepting."

In step S208d8, the light emission mode information stored in the light emission mode storage area prepared for each reel in RAM 308 is updated. That is, the light emission mode of the light emitter built into the stop button corresponding to the reel to be stopped is updated from the second light emission mode (e.g., blue light emission mode) to the first light emission mode (e.g., red light emission mode). When step S208d8 ends, the stop button reception process ends.
<Retraction counter setting process>
FIG. 224 is a flowchart showing in detail the pull-in counter setting process of step S208d5 shown in FIG. 223.

In step S8d51, the value of the pattern number counter is obtained and the position where the stop operation was performed is detected.

In step S8d52, the number of drawn frames is obtained from the selected reel stop control data based on the position where the stop operation was performed. That is, the reel stop control data is selected based on the result of the internal lottery process (internal lottery result) shown in FIG. 214. The reel stop control data defines the number of retractable frames corresponding to the symbol position number at the symbol position (middle stage reference) when the stop operation is performed.

In step S8d53, the number of remaining interrupts is obtained by referring to the excitation table. Specifically, in this embodiment, since the stop is made at a position corresponding to the AB phase, the rotation control data next to the excitation phase indicated by the previously set rotation control data (the last rotation control data set during constant speed 2 control) is The number of steps from the excitation phase to the excitation phase immediately before the AB phase is acquired as the number of remaining interrupts. For example, if a stop operation is performed during constant speed 2 control using the excitation table 22H, the number of remaining interrupts will be 3 steps.

In step S8d54, a retraction counter value is calculated from the obtained number of retraction frames and the remaining number of interrupts, and the calculated retraction counter value is set in the retraction counter. Specifically, the value up to a predetermined advance position (e.g., a position corresponding to the AB phase one cycle before the AB phase corresponding to the stopped holding position) before the stop holding position (e.g., a position corresponding to a predetermined AB phase) where the rotor 740 is scheduled to be stopped and held becomes the number of steps according to the number of retraction frames, and the value obtained by adding the remaining number of interrupts to this value is set in the retraction counter.

In step S8d55, the reel control status is set to "retraction control in progress".
<Retraction control process>
Fig. 225 is a flow chart showing the pull-in control process of step S313 shown in Fig. 219 in detail. Here, the pull-in control process refers to a process of sliding the reel a predetermined number of frames (0 to 4 frames in this embodiment) from the symbol position operated by the stop buttons 137 to 139 when stopping the reel in order to realize stop control according to the result of the internal lottery. As a result, for a winning combination that has been internally won in the internal lottery or a winning combination that is a so-called flag carryover, the corresponding symbol combination is allowed to be displayed in a line, while in other cases, the symbol combination corresponding to each winning combination is not displayed in a line.

In step S3131, 1 is added to the value of the general-purpose offset counter. That is, in the pull-in control process, the rotation control data is switched every interrupt time, so the value of the general-purpose offset counter is updated every time the timer interrupt process is performed. Furthermore, since the reel drive signal switching request flag continues to remain ON, in the reel rotation control process shown in FIG. 218, rotation control data corresponding to the added general-purpose offset counter value is set for each timer interrupt process ( (See step S208j in FIG. 218).

In step S3132, it is determined whether the added value of the general-purpose offset counter is 8 or not. If the value of the general-purpose offset counter is 8, the remaining rotation control of the set (cycle) has been completed, and the process advances to step S3133. If the value of the general-purpose offset counter is not 8, the rotation control of the set (cycle) is completed. Since the remaining rotation control has not been completed, the process advances to step S3134.

In step S3133, the general-purpose offset counter is set to an initial value of 0.

In step S3134, the value of the retraction counter is updated. Specifically, the retraction counter value is decremented by 1.

In step S3135, it is determined whether the updated value of the pull-in counter is 0 or not. If the value of the attraction counter is 0, the process advances to step S3136, and if the value of the attraction counter is not 0, the attraction control process is ended.

In step S3136, the reel control status is set to "brake control in progress" because the value of the retraction counter becomes 0 and the stop position has been reached.

In step S3137, the value of the hold counter is set to an initial value of 50. Here, this set hold counter value of 50 is the hold time of the spin control data when the reel control status is "under brake control" and the general-purpose offset counter value is 0 (see FIG. 212). After the process of step S3137 is completed, the retraction control process is terminated.
<Brake control process>
FIG. 226 is a flowchart showing in detail the brake control process of step S312 shown in FIG.

In step S3121, 1 is subtracted from the value of the hold counter. The hold counter value is initially set in step S3137 shown in FIG. 225, and is subtracted by 1 each time a timer interrupt process occurs.

In step S3122, it is determined whether the value of the subtracted holding counter is 0 or not. If the value of the holding counter is 0, the process advances to step S3123, and if the value of the holding counter is not 0, the brake control process is ended.

In step S3123, since the rotation control in the brake control has ended, the reel control status is set to "reel stop control in progress". When the reel control status is "reel stop control in progress", weak excitation (20% excitation) is continued at the stop holding position (for example, a predetermined AB phase) (see FIG. 212). After the processing of step S3123 is completed, the brake control processing is terminated.
<Processing of first sub-control unit 400>
The processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using Figure 227. Note that Figure (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. Figure (b) is a flowchart of the command input processing of the first sub-control unit 400, Figure (c) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400, and Figure (d) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400.

When the power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S2001. In this initialization process, initialization of input/output ports, initialization of the storage area in the RAM 408, etc. are performed.

In step S2002, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process moves to step S2003.

In step S2003, the timer variable is assigned the value 0.

In step S2004, first sub-control unit command input processing (described in detail later) is performed. In the first sub-control unit command input process, it is determined whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300 or not.

In step S2005, a performance update process is performed. For example, if a new command is received in step S2004, the performance data is read from ROM 406 based on the results of each event process (e.g., performance setting process, game state control process, etc.) corresponding to this command, and if the performance data needs to be updated, the performance data of each performance device (speaker, lamp, liquid crystal image display device, shutter, etc.) is updated.

In step S2006, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if there is a command to the sound source IC 418 in the performance data read in step S2005, this command is output to the sound source IC 418.

In step S2007, lamp control processing is performed. In the lamp control process, if there is a command for the various lamps 420 in the effect data read in step S2005, this command is output to the drive circuit 422.

In step S2008, information output processing is performed. In the information output processing, if the performance data read in step S2005 contains a control command to be sent to the second sub-control unit 500, settings are made to output this control command, and the process returns to step S2002. As a result, the set control command is sent to the second sub-control unit 500.

Next, the first sub-control unit 400 command input processing will be explained using Figure 227 (b). This first sub-control unit 400 command input processing is a flowchart showing the flow of the first sub-control unit 400 command input processing of step S2004 in Figure 227 (a).

In step S2101, it is determined whether there are any unprocessed commands in the command storage area of RAM 408. If there are any unprocessed commands, the process proceeds to step S2102, and if there are no unprocessed commands, the first sub-control unit 400 ends the command input process.

In step S2102, a jump is made to processing corresponding to the unprocessed command. For example, if the unprocessed command is a medal insertion command, a medal insertion processing is made; if the unprocessed command is a start lever acceptance command, a start lever acceptance processing is made; if the unprocessed command is an internal lottery command, an internal lottery processing is made; if the stop button acceptance command, a stop button acceptance processing is made; if the display determination command, a display determination processing is made; if the game status command, a game status control processing is made.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be explained using FIG. 227(c). This command reception interrupt process is a process that is executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S2201 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

Next, using FIG. 227(d), we will explain the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 is equipped with a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and executes the timer interrupt processing at a predetermined period in response to this timer interrupt.

In step S2301, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S2002 in the first sub-control unit main processing shown in FIG. 227(a), and the value is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S2002, it is determined that the value of the timer variable is 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S2302, the random number values for the effects are updated.

Next, we will explain a specific example of when each reel 110-112 starts spinning from a stopped state.

First, a conventional example will be explained using FIG. 228.

Figure 228 is a timing chart showing the changes in the state of the three reels, the changes in the detection state of the light-shielding pieces on each reel in the index sensor, the changes in the operation acceptance state of the stop buttons corresponding to each reel, and the changes in the light emission state of the light-emitting elements built into each stop button in a conventional system.

The timing chart shown in FIG. 228 shows start lever operation, left reel, middle reel, and right reel in order from the top. At the top of the timing chart, symbols indicating the timings (a) to (f) are marked, and below them are the arrows (a), (i), and (u). Arrows are shown. The arrow (a) indicates the period during which the acceleration control shown in FIG. 212 is being executed. Before the period indicated by the arrow in (a), each reel 110 to 112 was in a stopped state after rotating. The arrow in (i) is an arrow representing the period during which the first constant speed control is being executed, shown in FIG. 212, and the arrow in (c) is an arrow representing the period in which the second constant speed control is being executed, shown in FIG. be.

At the timing (a), the start lever is turned on, and the left, center, and right reels start to rotate simultaneously. As indicated by the arrow (a), all reels enter a period during which acceleration control is being performed. At the timing (b), acceleration control ends, and as indicated by the arrow (b), all reels enter a period during which first constant speed control is being performed. At the timing (c), first constant speed control ends, and as indicated by the arrow (c), all reels enter a period during which second constant speed control is being performed. In this example, no light-shielding pieces are detected on any of the reels during either the period during which acceleration control is being performed or the period during which first constant speed control is being performed, and during the period during which second constant speed control is being performed, the light-shielding piece 612D of the left reel 110 is detected at the timing (d), the light-shielding piece of the center reel is detected at the timing (e), and the light-shielding piece of the right reel is detected at the timing (f). The timing at which the light-blocking pieces on each reel are detected varies, and the detection timing differs depending on where the reel stopped before it began to spin.

Conventionally, during the execution period of the second constant speed control shown in FIG. 212, each stop button becomes ready for operation at the same time at the timing when all the light shielding pieces are detected. Until then, the operation of each stop button is not accepted even if it is operated, but after the timing (f), the operation of any stop button is accepted. The timing chart shown in FIG. 228 shows whether the operation of the left stop button can be accepted or not, the operation of the middle stop button can be accepted or not, and the operation of the right stop button can be accepted or not. In addition, even if the stop button operation is accepted, the operation may be treated as invalid or valid in terms of control.In short, if we consider the stopping of the reels, the operation of the stop button may be treated as invalid or valid. Acceptable/unacceptable indicates a reel stoppable/unstoppable state.

Further below, the light emitting mode of the light emitting body built into each stop button (hereinafter referred to as "stop button LED") is shown. The first light emitting mode of each stop button LED is, for example, a red light emitting mode, and the second light emitting mode is, for example, a blue light emitting mode. Both stop button LEDs change to the second light emission mode after the timing (f). That is, in a state in which stop button operations cannot be accepted (reels cannot be stopped), all stop button LEDs are in the first light emitting mode, and when the stop button is in a state in which operations can be accepted (reels can be stopped), all stop button LEDs are in the first light emitting mode. The button LED also changes to the second light emitting mode. In the conventional example shown in FIG. 218, the stop button LED notifies in the first light emitting mode that the stop button operation cannot be accepted (the reel cannot be stopped), and the stop button LED notifies that the stop button operation is not accepted (the reel can be stopped). state) is notified in a second light emitting mode.

FIG. 229 shows changes in the state of each reel 110 to 112, changes in the detection state of each light shielding piece, changes in the operation acceptance state of each stop button 137 to 139, and changes in each stop button LED 137a to 139 in this embodiment. 139 is a timing chart showing changes in the light emission mode of the light emitting device 139a. Hereinafter, explanations that overlap with the explanation of the timing chart shown in FIG. 228 will be omitted, and the explanation will focus on the differences from the timing chart shown in FIG. 228.

In the timing chart shown in FIG. 229, when a light-shielding piece is detected on any of the three reels 110 to 112, the stop buttons 137 to 139 corresponding to the reel on which the light-shielding piece is detected transition to an operation-accepting state. That is, after starting rotation, each reel can transition from a reel-stop-unavailable state to a reel-stop-able state. In the timing chart shown in FIG. 229, the light-shielding piece 612D on the left reel 110 is detected first (detected at timing (d)), so that the left stop button 137 transitions to an operation-accepting state first (at timing (d)), then the light-shielding piece on the center reel 111 is detected (detected at timing (e)), so that the center stop button 138 transitions to an operation-accepting state at timing (e), and finally the light-shielding piece on the right reel 112 is detected (detected at timing (f)), so that the right stop button 139 transitions to an operation-accepting state at timing (f). However, as in the past, none of the stop button LEDs 137a to 139a change from the first light emitting state to the second light emitting state until all the light blocking pieces are detected (timing (f)). That is, each reel can transition from a reel unstoppable state to a reel stoppable state, but the three stop button LEDs change to the second light emitting state together when the last reel transitions to a reel stoppable state. Therefore, in this embodiment, even if the stop button LED is in the first light emitting state, the corresponding stop button may be in an operation-accepting state. The arrow (e) in FIG. 229 indicates a period during which only some of the three stop buttons are in an operation-accepting state. On the other hand, the arrow (o) indicates a period during which all three stop buttons 137 to 139 are in an operation-accepting state.

According to the slot machine 100 of the present embodiment, by accepting a stop operation from a reel whose light-shielding piece has been detected and the reel stop position can be controlled, the stop button operation can be accepted faster than before. You will be able to do it. Therefore, the game progresses at a good pace without the player feeling stressed. Further, the sense of realism of the game may be enhanced by immediate response to the player's operations.

FIG. 230 is a timing chart when a step-out occurs in the rotating right reel in the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment. Hereinafter, explanations that overlap with the explanation of the timing chart shown in FIG. 229 will be omitted, and the explanation will focus on the differences from the timing chart shown in FIG. 229.

In the timing chart shown in FIG. 230, step-out occurs on the right reel 112 at a stage when no light shielding piece of any reel is detected. That is, while the second constant speed control is being executed on all reels 110 to 112, step-out occurs only on the right reel 112 (timing (g)). After a step-out occurs on the right reel 112, but before the step-out is detected in the step-out detection process (step S310n) shown in FIG. 222 (timing (a')), the light shielding piece 612D of the left reel 110 It is detected (timing (d)), and the left stop button 137 becomes ready for operation (the left reel 110 becomes ready for stopping). In addition, the light shielding piece of the middle reel 111 is also detected before the step-out is detected (timing (e)), and the middle stop button 138 is also in the state ready for operation before the step-out is detected (the middle reel 111 is also in the state ready to be stopped). ). Even if some of the stop buttons are ready for operation (during the period indicated by the arrow in (e)), some of the stop buttons will not be operated, and eventually the right reel 112 will step out at the timing of (a'). is detected. At the time when the step-out of the right reel 112 is detected, both the left reel 110 and the middle reel 111 continue to rotate at a constant speed, but when the step-out of the right reel 112 is detected, all three reels start over from acceleration control. become. That is, not only the right reel 112 that has stepped out, but also the remaining two reels (110, 111) that were rotating at a constant speed are accelerated again. Due to step-out and re-acceleration, the positional relationship of the light-shielding pieces on each reel changes, and during the execution of the second constant speed control after re-acceleration, the light-shielding piece on the right reel 112 is detected first. (timing of (d')), then the light shielding piece 612D of the left reel 110 is detected (timing of (e')), and finally the light shielding piece of the middle reel 111 is detected (timing of (f')). Therefore, after reacceleration, the order in which the stop buttons become operable (the order in which the reels become stoppable) is different from before reacceleration. Note that the stop button LEDs 137a to 139a remain in the first light emission mode before reacceleration, but change to the second light emission mode at timing (f') after reacceleration.

Figure 231 is a timing chart for when a step-out occurs in the slot machine 100 of this embodiment and the stop button is operated before re-acceleration. Below, explanations that overlap with the explanation of the timing chart shown in Figure 230 will be omitted, and the explanation will focus on the differences from the timing chart shown in Figure 230. At the bottom of Figure 231, the left stop button operation, the middle stop button operation, and the right stop button operation are shown.

In the timing chart shown in FIG. 231, after a step-out occurs on the right reel 112 (timing (g)), the light-shielding piece 612D on the left reel 110 is detected (timing (d)), and the left stop button 137 becomes operable. At timing (h) before the step-out that occurred on the right reel 112 is detected, the left stop button 137 is operated, and the left reel 110 is braked and stopped. Note that the timing chart in FIG. 231 shows the state of the left reel 110, ignoring the reel retraction control (the same applies to the subsequent timing charts). Note that before the step-out that occurred on the right reel 112 is detected, the light-shielding piece on the center reel 111 is also detected (timing (e)), but the center stop button 138 is not operated and the center reel 111 continues to rotate at a constant speed.

Eventually, at timing (a'), a step-out of the right reel 112 is detected. At timing (a'), the left reel 110 is stopped, the center reel 111 is spinning at a constant speed, and the right reel 112 is in a step-out state. When the step-out of the right reel 112 is detected, acceleration control is restarted for all reels except the stopped reel, i.e., only the reels that are spinning. As a result, the right reel 112 and center reel 111 that have stepped out accelerate again, while the left reel 110, which stopped earlier, remains stopped.

The left reel 110 maintains a stopped state even when the re-accelerated right reel 112 and middle reel 111 shift to constant speed rotation, so the light shielding piece 612D of the left reel 110 is not detected and the left stop button 137 is not ready for operation.

The light shielding piece of the re-accelerated right reel 112 is detected at the timing (d'), and the light shielding piece of the re-accelerated middle reel 111 is detected at the timing (f'). When the light-shielding pieces of all the rotating reels are detected except for the stop reel, the stop button LED corresponding to the rotating reel changes from the first light-emitting mode to the second light-emitting mode. In the example shown in FIG. 231, at the timing (f') when the light shielding piece of the middle reel 111 is detected, the right stop button LED 139a and the middle stop button LED 138a change to the second light emission mode. Note that the left stop button LED 137a remains in the first light emitting mode.

Figure 232 is a timing chart for when a power outage occurs and is restored while the second constant speed control is being executed in the slot machine 100 of this embodiment. Below, explanations that overlap with the explanation of the timing chart shown in Figure 229 will be omitted, and the explanation will focus on the differences from the timing chart shown in Figure 229.

During execution of the second constant speed control, the light shielding piece 612D of the left reel 110 is detected first (timing of (d)), then the light shielding piece of the middle reel 111 is detected (timing of (e)), and finally The light shielding piece of the right reel 112 is detected (timing (f)). During the period indicated by the arrow (o), all three reels 110 to 112 are in a stoppable state. However, when none of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is operated and the three reels 110 to 112 continue to rotate at a constant speed, a power outage occurs. All three reels 110 to 112, which were rotating due to inertia until the power is restored, stop. Eventually, the power is restored at timing (a'), all three reels 110 to 112 start acceleration control, and after passing through the first constant speed control, the second constant speed control is being executed. As each reel stopped due to a power outage, the positional relationship of the light shielding pieces on each reel changed, and during the execution of the second constant speed control after the power was restored, the light shielding piece of the middle reel 111 was detected first ( (timing (d')), then the light shielding piece of the right reel 112 is detected (timing (e')), and finally the light shielding piece 612D of the left reel 110 is detected (timing (f')). Therefore, after the power is restored, the order in which the stop buttons become operable (the order in which the reels become stoppable) is different from before the power outage.

The example shown in FIG. 232 described above is an example in which a long time elapsed between the time when the power was cut off and the time when the power was restored, so long that the reel stopped. If the power is disconnected and the power is restored immediately, that is, if the power is restored before the reels stop although the rotational speed of the reels decreases, each reel is The step-out of reels 110 to 112 is detected, and each reel 110 to 112 is re-accelerated as the step-out is detected, like the right reel 112 described in the example shown in FIG.

The example of power failure recovery described using FIG. 232 may occur after the end of the examples shown in the timing charts after FIG. 229, before the start of those examples, or in the middle of those examples.

Figure 233 is a timing chart for when a stop button operation is accepted before the stop button LED changes to the second light emission state in the slot machine 100 of this embodiment. Below, explanations that overlap with the explanation of the timing chart shown in Figure 229 will be omitted, and the explanation will focus on the differences from the timing chart shown in Figure 229. Figure 233 also shows the left stop button operation, middle stop button operation, and right stop button operation at the bottom.

During execution of the second constant speed control, the light shielding piece 612D of the left reel 110 is detected at the timing (d), and the left stop button 137 becomes ready for operation. Note that the left stop button LED 137a remains in the first light emitting mode. The left stop button 137 is operated at the timing (h) before the light shielding pieces of all the reels are detected, and the left reel 110 is brake-controlled and stopped. The light shielding piece of the middle reel 111 is detected at the timing (e). At the timing (f), the light shielding piece of the right reel 112 is detected, which means that the light shielding pieces of all the reels have been detected. Even at the timing (f), the middle reel 111 continues to rotate at a constant speed. That is, the middle stop button 138 is not operated even though it becomes ready for operation at the timing (e). At this timing (f), the middle stop button LED 138a and the right stop button LED 139a change to the second light emitting mode, but the left stop button LED 137a remains in the first light emitting mode. In this way, the stop button LED of a reel that has stopped before changing to the second light emission mode remains in the first light emission mode. Note that if the middle stop button 138 is operated between the timing (e) and the timing (f), the middle stop button LED 138a will remain in the first light emitting mode even after the timing (f) has arrived. Therefore, only the right stop button LED 139a changes to the second light emission mode.

FIG. 234 is a timing chart when the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment is stopped at the shortest number of frames after detecting the light shielding piece. Hereinafter, explanations that overlap with the explanation of the timing chart shown in FIG. 229 will be omitted, and the explanation will focus on the differences from the timing chart shown in FIG. 229. Also shown in FIG. 234 are a left stop button 137, a middle stop button 138, and a right stop button 139 at the bottom.

As shown by the holding parameter values in FIG. 212, acceleration control requires 60 interrupts, and first constant speed control requires 128 interrupts. Furthermore, in this example, even if the light shielding piece is detected, the stop button cannot shift to the operation-receiving state unless the state shifts to the second constant speed control state. In the timing chart shown in FIG. 234, the light shielding piece 612D of the left reel 110 is detected at the timing when the first constant speed control is started (the timing shown in (b)). Note that the light shielding piece 612D of the left reel 110 may be detected during the acceleration control (the period indicated by the arrow in (A)). However, the light shielding piece may not be detected during acceleration control, but may be detected only in a constant speed state (during first constant speed control or second constant speed control).

Figure 235 shows the state of the left reel at each timing. Figure 235 shows figures 235(b), (b'), (c'), (c''-1), and (c''-2), and in each figure, the left reel 110 is shown on the left, the right reel 112 is shown on the right, and the center reel 111 is shown in the center.

In FIG. 235(b), the left reel 110, center reel 111, and right reel 112 are all spinning, but only the left reel 110 is shown with the symbols visible (the same applies to FIG. 235(b') and FIG. 235(c')). FIG. 235(b) shows the left reel 110 at the timing of FIG. 234(b). That is, at the time when the first constant speed control is started (the time when the light blocking piece 612D of the left reel 110 is detected), the BB symbol, whose symbol number counter value is 0 as shown in FIG. 205, is located in the middle of the symbol display window 113 on the left reel 110.

It is necessary to output 24 drive pulses to move one symbol, and on the left reel 110, the middle row of the symbol display window 113 is displayed with a symbol whose symbol number counter value is 20 (cherry symbol) and a symbol whose value is 19 (BB symbol). , 18 symbols (replay symbols), and 17 symbols (bell symbols) pass in order. When the symbol (bell symbol) whose symbol number counter value is 17 has finished passing through the middle row of the symbol display window 113 (timing (b') shown in FIG. 234), 120 drive pulses are generated from the timing (b). (24 drive pulses x 5 symbols) is output. FIG. 235(b') shows the left reel 110 at the timing of (b'), and the watermelon symbol whose symbol number counter value is 16 is located in the middle of the symbol display window 113. are doing.

Furthermore, when the eight drive pulses are output, the control switches to the second constant speed control. In the time chart shown in FIG. 234, the timing at which the eight drive pulses are output is shown as timing (c). At timing (c), the second constant speed control is started, and the left stop button 137 transitions to an operation-accepting state. That is, in this example, even if a light-blocking piece is detected first, the stop button will not transition to an operation-accepting state unless the control transitions to the second constant speed control. However, although the condition for transitioning the stop button to an operation-accepting state is the same, that a light-blocking piece is detected, the stop button may transition to an operation-accepting state if the control state is the first constant speed control.

In addition, in the time chart shown in FIG. 234, the timing when the second constant speed control is started and the first drive pulse is output is shown as timing (c'). At this timing (c'), the left stop button 137 is operated, and the left reel 110 is brake-controlled and stopped.

Figure 235 (c') shows the left reel 110 at the timing of (c'), and in the middle row of the symbol display window 113, a bar symbol, which is the symbol with a symbol number counter value of 15, is positioned for 9/24 frames. The bar symbol is a so-called DDT symbol, and if the stop button is operated with the aim of stopping this bar symbol in the middle row, no small wins will be missed. The bar symbol may also be referred to as a specific symbol or a certain symbol.

FIG. 235 (c''-1) and FIG. 235 (c''-2) are diagrams showing the stopping pattern mode of the left reel 110 when the stopping operation is performed at the timing of (c'). If the small winning combination of watermelon shown in FIG. 205(b) has been internally won, the bar symbol will stop at the middle of the symbol display window 113, and the watermelon symbol will stop as shown in FIG. 235(c''-1). stops at the bottom. On the other hand, if the small winning combination of cherry shown in FIG. 205(b) has been internally won, the bar symbol will not stop in the middle of the symbol display window 113, as shown in FIG. 235(c''-2). First, retraction control is performed, and the cherry symbol slides two frames and stops at the upper row.

FIG. 236 is a timing chart when the effect regarding the reels is performed by the effect device in the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment. Hereinafter, explanations that overlap with the explanation of the timing chart shown in FIG. 229 will be omitted, and the explanation will focus on the differences from the timing chart shown in FIG. 229. In FIG. 236, the production device is shown at the bottom. This presentation device is, for example, a presentation image display device 157 (liquid crystal display device).

The first performance in the performance device is started when the start lever 135 is operated. Alternatively, it starts when all reels 110-112 start rotating. Alternatively, it is started when acceleration control of all reels 110 to 112 is started. As will be described later, the reels may undergo random delay processing that delays the rotation start timing for each reel, and it is not always the case that all reels 110 to 112 will start rotating or be under acceleration control. do not have. In the timing chart shown in FIG. 236, the operation timing of the start lever 135, the rotation start timing of all reels 110 to 112, and the start timing of acceleration control for all reels 110 to 112 coincide, and the timing of (a) It is. The first performance in the performance device is started at the timing (a).

FIG. 237 is a diagram showing an example of the first performance in the performance device.

In each diagram of FIG. 237, at the top is shown an effect image display device 157, which is an example of an effect device, and below that are shown a left reel 110, a center reel 111, and a right reel 112. Furthermore, below each reel are shown stop buttons 137-139 corresponding to each reel. Each stop button 137-139 has a built-in stop button LED 137a-139a.

Figure 237 (A) shown on the left is a diagram showing an example in which a small win suggestion effect is executed as the first effect in the effect image display device 157. On the other hand, Figure 237 (B) shown on the right is a diagram showing an example in which a navigation effect is executed as the first effect in the effect image display device 157.

First, I will explain the production that suggests small roles. (a1) in FIG. 237(A) shows the effect image display device 157 and the like at the timing (a) shown in FIG. 236 (start timing of the first effect). In the performance image display device 157 shown in (a1), a watermelon symbol is displayed, suggesting that the small winning combination of watermelon shown in FIG. 205(b) has been internally won. Furthermore, all three reels 110 to 112 shown in (a1) have started rotating. Furthermore, it is shown that the stop button LEDs 137a to 139a are emitting light in the first light emitting mode over each of the stop buttons 137 to 139.

(d1) in FIG. 237(A) is the timing (d) shown in FIG. 236 (the timing when the light shielding piece 612D of the left reel 110 is detected, and the timing when the left stop button 137 becomes ready for operation) ) are shown. In the effect image display device 157 shown in (d1), the small role suggestion effect continues, and the watermelon symbol is displayed. Further, all three reels 110 to 112 shown in (d1) continue to rotate under the second constant speed control. Furthermore, it is shown that the stop button LEDs 137a to 139a are emitting light in the first light emitting mode over each of the stop buttons 137 to 139. That is, it is shown that the stop button LED 137a built in the left stop button 137, which is now ready for operation, also emits light in the first light emitting mode like the other stop button LEDs 138a and 139a.

In (f1) of Figure 237(A), the effect image display device 157 and the like are shown at the timing of (f) shown in Figure 236 (the timing when the light-blocking piece on the right reel 112 is detected, and the light-blocking pieces on all reels are detected). The effect image display device 157 shown in (f1) also continues the small win suggestion effect, and displays a watermelon symbol. Also, all three reels 110-112 shown in (f1) continue to rotate under the second constant speed control. Furthermore, it is shown that the stop button LEDs 137a-139a have changed to the second light-emitting mode and are emitting light through the respective stop buttons 137-139.

In addition, in the small win suggestion performance, the watermelon symbol may be displayed continuously, or the watermelon symbol may be displayed and hidden repeatedly.

Next, the navigation effect will be described. The navigation effect is an effect that indicates the order of the stop button stop operation to win a certain winning combination. In (a2) of FIG. 237(B), the effect image display device 157 and the like at the timing (a) shown in FIG. 236 (start timing of the first effect) are shown. In the effect image display device 157 shown in (a2), numbers indicating the order of the stop operation are displayed at locations located directly above each of the reels 110 to 112. That is, 3 is displayed above the left reel 110, 2 is displayed above the center reel 111, and 1 is displayed above the right reel 112. In addition, all three reels 110 to 112 shown in (a2) have started spinning. Furthermore, it is shown that the stop button LEDs 137a to 139a are emitting light in the first light emission mode over each of the stop buttons 137 to 139.

(d2) in FIG. 237(B) is the timing of (d) shown in FIG. 236 (the timing when the light shielding piece 612D of the left reel 110 is detected, and the timing when the left stop button 137 becomes ready for operation) ) are shown. The navigation effect continues on the effect image display device 157 shown in (d2), and numbers representing the order of stop operations are displayed. Further, all three reels 110 to 112 shown in (d2) continue to rotate under the second constant speed control. Furthermore, it is shown that the stop button LEDs 137a to 139a are emitting light in the first light emitting mode over each of the stop buttons 137 to 139. That is, it is shown that the stop button LED 137a built into the left stop button 137, which has become ready for operation, is also emitting light in the first light emitting mode like the other stop button LEDs 138a and 139a.

(f2) in FIG. 237(B) shows the performance at the timing (f) shown in FIG. An image display device 157 and the like are shown. The navigation effect continues on the effect image display device 157 shown in (f2), and numbers representing the order of stop operations are displayed. Further, all three reels 110 to 112 shown in (f2) continue to rotate under the second constant speed control. Furthermore, it is shown that the stop button LEDs 137a to 139a change to the second light emitting mode and emit light over each of the stop buttons 137 to 139.

In the navigation effect in FIG. 237(B) described above, the order of the stop operations is displayed which is different from the order in which the light shielding pieces of the reels are detected. However, the order in which the light-shielding pieces of the reels are detected may coincide with the order in which the stop operations are instructed by the navigation effect.

Note that in the navigation performance, numbers representing the order of stop operations may be continuously displayed, or the numbers may be displayed and hidden repeatedly.

FIG. 238 is a timing chart in the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment when a slide push operation is performed on the three stop buttons 137 to 139, but only some operations are accepted. Hereinafter, explanations that overlap with the explanation of the timing chart shown in FIG. 229 will be omitted, and the explanation will focus on the differences from the timing chart shown in FIG. 229. In FIG. 238, left stop button operation, middle stop button operation, and right stop button operation are shown at the bottom.

The operation of the slide push is to operate multiple stop buttons 137 to 139 in a short time. In the example in FIG. 238, the light-shielding piece 612D of the left reel 110 is detected during the execution of the second constant speed control (timing (d)), and after the left stop button 137 becomes in an operation-acceptable state, the slide push operation is performed on the three stop buttons 137 to 139 from the timing (h1). That is, the left stop button 137 is operated first, and then the center stop button 138 and the right stop button 139 are operated (in order) in succession, tracing them in a short time. At the time the slide push is performed, neither the light-shielding piece of the center reel 111 nor the light-shielding piece of the right reel 112 has been detected, and the center stop button 138 and the right stop button 139 remain in an operation-acceptable state. For this reason, only the operation of the left stop button 137 in the slide push operation is accepted, and the operations of the remaining center stop button 138 and right stop button 139 are not accepted. Therefore, the left reel 110 is stopped by the brake control, but the center reel 111 and the right reel 112 continue to rotate at a constant speed. Eventually, the light-shielding piece of the center reel 111 is detected (timing (e)), and finally, the light-shielding piece of the right reel 112 is also detected (timing (f)). However, the operation of the center stop button 138 and the right stop button 139 in the slide push operation remains invalid, and in order to stop the center reel 111 and the right reel 112, the operation of the center stop button 138 and the right stop button 139 is required again. As described above, the arrow (e) represents a period in which only some of the three stop buttons are in an operation-accepting state. Also, at timing (f), the center stop button LED 138a and the right stop button LED 139a change to the second light-emitting state, but the left stop button LED 137a, which has already stopped the reel, remains in the first light-emitting state.

When the middle stop button LED 138a and the right stop button LED 139a are emitting light in the second light emission mode (the period indicated by the arrow in (e)), the slide push for the two stop buttons, the middle stop button 138 and the right stop button 139, is performed. Perform operations. That is, the middle stop button 138 is operated at the timing (h2), and the right stop button 139 is operated at the timing (h3). Brake control is executed for both the middle reel 111 and the right reel 112 to stop them.

After the brake control is executed and each of the three reels 110-112 stops, the start lever 135 is operated again and each of the three reels 110-112 starts to rotate (timing (a')). That is, the next game is started. In this next game, the first constant speed control is executed and then the second constant speed control is started (timing (c')). While the second constant speed control is being executed, the light blocking piece 612D of the left reel 110 is detected (timing (d')), and the left stop button 137 becomes ready to accept operation. Next, the light blocking piece of the center reel 111 is also detected (timing (e')), and the center stop button 138 also becomes ready to accept operation. Finally, the light blocking piece of the right reel 112 is also detected (timing (f')), and the right stop button 139 also becomes ready to accept operation. Furthermore, when the light-shielding pieces of all three reels 110-112 are detected without any of the stop buttons 137-139 being operated, the stop button LEDs 137a-139a built into each stop button change to a second light-emitting state. The first stop button LED 137a remained in the first light-emitting state in the previous game, but changes to the second light-emitting state in the current game.

FIG. 239 is a timing chart when all slide push operations performed on the three stop buttons 137 to 139 are accepted in the slot machine 100 of this embodiment. Hereinafter, explanations that overlap with the explanation of the timing chart shown in FIG. 238 will be omitted, and the explanation will focus on the differences from the timing chart shown in FIG. 238.

In the timing chart shown in FIG. 239, the slide push operation is performed after all of the light shielding pieces of the three reels 110 to 112 are detected. Therefore, in a state where all three stop buttons 137 to 139 are ready for operation and all three stop button LEDs 137a to 139a are emitting light in the second light emission mode (period indicated by the arrow (o)), Slide push operation starts. Here too, operations are performed continuously in a short period of time in the order of pressing from the left stop button 137, and the operation timing of each stop button 137 to 139 ((h), (h'), (h'') (timing), brake control is executed on the corresponding reel to stop the corresponding reel, and the built-in stop button LED returns to the first light emitting mode. The execution periods of brake control for each reel may overlap.

Figure 240 is a timing chart for when a pseudo game is played and then a real game is played in the slot machine 100 of this embodiment. Below, explanations that overlap with the explanation of the timing chart shown in Figure 229 will be omitted, and the explanation will focus on the differences from the timing chart shown in Figure 229. Figure 240 also shows the left stop button operation, middle stop button operation, and right stop button operation at the bottom.

The pseudo game is a type of reel performance (the above-mentioned second reel performance), and like the main game, it is a performance that makes it appear as if the reel corresponding to the operated stop button has been stopped by operating the stop button. . In the main game, after the reels have completely stopped, medals are awarded according to the derived stopping manner, but in the pseudo game, medals are not awarded according to the derived stopping manner.

In the pseudo game, each reel 110-112 starts to rotate by operating the start lever 135, and the acceleration control, the first constant speed control, and the second constant speed control are executed. The light-shielding pieces of each reel 110-112 are detected in the order of the light-shielding piece 612D of the left reel 110, the light-shielding piece of the center reel 111, and the light-shielding piece of the right reel 112, and the stop buttons 137-139 corresponding to the reels in which the light-shielding pieces are detected are made ready to accept operation. Then, only when the light-shielding pieces of all the reels 110-112 are detected, the three stop button lamps 137a-139a change to the second light-emitting mode. Therefore, even if the pseudo game starts, there is no difference from the actual game, and the player cannot distinguish between the pseudo game and the actual game. In the timing chart shown in FIG. 240, after the three stop button lamps 137a to 139a change to the second light emission mode, a slide push is performed from the left stop button 137, and at the operation timing (timing of (h), (h'), (h'')) of each stop button 137 to 139, the corresponding reel starts brake control, and the built-in stop button LED returns to the first light emission mode. In the pseudo game, the stop control is not executed, and instead, vibration control that slightly vibrates the reel is executed. The vibration control is executed for about several seconds so that the symbols can be clearly seen by the player. In the pseudo game, it is also possible to pull in more than the maximum number of symbols that can be pulled in. For example, in the BB internal winning state, the BB symbol alignment ("7-7-7") is displayed with vibration (shaking display). Also, in the case where the minor role is in the internal winning state, the bar symbol alignment is displayed with vibration. The player realizes that the game up to that point was a pseudo game by the vibration display.

When the vibration display is performed for about several seconds, the pseudo game ends and the real game starts. This game is started without operating the start lever 135. In a pseudo game, when the BB symbols are displayed vibrating ("7-7-7"), if the reels 110 to 112 start rotating at the same time, the reel 110 will move while maintaining the positional relationship in which the BB symbols are lined up side by side. ~112 will rotate. In such a positional relationship, the BB symbols on all the reels 110 to 112 appear in the symbol display window 113 at the same timing, making it easier for an expert player who is good at aiming at symbols to aim at the BB symbols. For this reason, it becomes impossible to ensure the fairness of the game with beginners who are not good at aiming at the symbols. Furthermore, since it becomes easier to aim at the symbols, the interest in the game decreases for players who look forward to aiming at the symbols and performing a stop operation. Therefore, random delay control is performed to randomly delay the rotation start timing of the reels between reels, thereby breaking the positional relationship in which the BB symbols are arranged side by side. The main game was started at the timing of (i), but none of the reels 110 to 112 started rotating, and first, after n1 (n1 ≧ 0) interruptions from the start of the main game (first time lapse), the right reel 112 starts rotating. Next, after the interruption occurs n2 times (n2>n1) from the start of the game (after the second time has elapsed), the middle reel 111 starts rotating. Finally, after the interruption occurs n3 times (n3>n2) from the start of the game (after the third time has elapsed), the left reel 110 starts rotating. When each reel 110 to 112 starts rotating, acceleration control is executed for 60 interruptions, but the execution periods are staggered. The arrow (A) shown in this game represents the period from the start of the acceleration control on the first right reel 112 until the end of the acceleration control on the last left reel 110. Next, in each reel, when the acceleration control ends, the first constant speed control is started. The arrow (i) shown in this game indicates the period from the start of the first constant speed control on the first right reel 112 until the end of the first constant speed control on the last left reel 110. It represents. Subsequently, in each reel, when the first constant speed control ends, the second constant speed control is started. In this game, the period during which the second constant speed control is performed on each reel 110 to 112 is represented by the arrow (C). Before the last left reel 110 finishes the first constant speed control, the first right reel 112 starts the second constant speed control. As the pseudo game and the random delay processing are performed, the positional relationship of the light shielding pieces on each reel changes, and during the execution of the second constant speed control in the main game, the light shielding piece on the right reel 112 is detected first. (timing of (f')), then the light shielding piece of the middle reel 111 is detected (timing of (e')), and finally the light shielding piece 612D of the left reel 110 is detected (timing of (d')). Therefore, the order in which the stop buttons become operable (the order in which the reels become stoppable) is different between the main game and the pseudo-game. Note that in this game as well, the three stop button lamps 137a to 139a change to the second light emitting mode (timing (d')) only when the light shielding pieces of all the reels 110 to 112 are detected.

Figure 241 is a timing chart for when reel action is performed and then the main game is played in the slot machine 100 of this embodiment. Below, explanations that overlap with the explanation of the timing chart shown in Figure 240 will be omitted, and the explanation will focus on the differences from the timing chart shown in Figure 240.

Reel action is a type of reel presentation (the first reel presentation described above), and unlike this game, it is a presentation that makes it look like the reels have stopped without the operation of the stop button. Note that, like the pseudo game, no medals are awarded in reel action.

In the reel action, the reels 110 to 112 start to rotate by operating the start lever 135, and acceleration control, first constant speed control, and second constant speed control are executed. The light-shielding pieces of the reels 110 to 112 are detected in the order of the light-shielding piece 612D of the left reel 110, the light-shielding piece of the center reel 111, and the light-shielding piece of the right reel 112. However, even if the light-shielding pieces are detected, the stop buttons 137 to 139 do not enter an operation-accepting state and remain in an operation-disabled state. Even if the light-shielding pieces of all the reels 110 to 112 are detected, the three stop button lamps 137a to 139a remain in the first light-emitting state. Eventually, without the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139, each of the reels 110 to 112 starts brake control on its own. In this reel action, the stop control is not executed, and instead, vibration control is performed to slightly vibrate the reels. The vibration control is performed for a few seconds to ensure that the symbols are clearly visible to the player. For example, if the BB internal win state is reached, the BB symbol alignment ("7-7-7") is displayed with a vibration (shaking display). Also, if a minor win is reached internally, the bar symbol alignment is displayed with a vibration.

When the vibration display continues for several seconds, the reel action ends and the main game begins. This game is the same as the main game explained in FIG. 240, and random delay control is performed, and acceleration control, first constant speed control, and second constant speed control are executed. As the reel action and random delay processing are performed, the positional relationship of the light shielding pieces on each reel changes, and during the execution of the second constant speed control in this game, the light shielding piece on the right reel 112 is detected first. (timing of (f')), then the light shielding piece of the middle reel 111 is detected (timing of (e')), and finally the light shielding piece 612D of the left reel 110 is detected (timing of (d')). Therefore, the order of the reels in which the light shielding pieces are detected may be different between the main game and the reel action. However, in reel action, there is no need to operate the stop button, so even if the order is different, the effect on the player is small.

Next, simultaneous pressing will be explained. Simultaneous pressing here means that all the stop buttons 137 to 139 are operated at the same time or almost at the same time. For example, if the time required from the first stop button operation to the last stop button operation is within a predetermined time (for example, 100 ms), it is determined that "simultaneous pressing" occurs. The above predetermined time is set in consideration of the average time required for continuous operation of all the stop buttons 137 to 139, and can be changed arbitrarily within the time range that is determined to be a relatively quick stop operation. It is.

When pressing simultaneously, in order for a specific symbol combination to win, the symbols on each reel that make up the specific symbol combination must be close within a maximum of 4 symbols between each reel. I can't.

Figure 242 shows the relative positional relationship of the symbols that make up a specific symbol combination, based on the symbol display window 113.

FIG. 242(a) is a diagram showing an example of a case where, in the BB internal winning state, a replay is internally won and the symbol combination "Replay-Replay-Replay" is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1. In FIG. 242(a), the replay symbols stopped and displayed on the winning line L1 are a replay symbol whose symbol number counter value is 2 on the left reel 110, and a replay symbol whose symbol number counter value is 1 on the middle reel 111. , the value of the symbol number counter on the right reel 112 is 14, which is a replay symbol. In the case of this stop symbol mode, the BB symbol is located at the second frame from the replay symbol on the left reel 110, the second frame from the replay symbol on the middle reel 111, and from the replay symbol on the right reel 112. It is located in the first frame. Therefore, the state in which the replay symbols are aligned as shown in FIG. 242(a) is a state in which the symbols constituting a specific symbol combination (in this case, BB symbols) are placed close to each other on each reel, and this state will be described below. It is called eye condition. By ending the game in the preparation state and pressing the buttons simultaneously in the next game, it is possible to easily win a specific symbol combination. That is, the preparation eye state refers to a state in which the symbols on each reel constituting a specific symbol combination are within a certain range. In FIG. 242(a), if you press the buttons simultaneously in the next game, it is possible to stop and display the BB symbol alignment on the winning line L1 as well as on any of the other winning lines L2 to L5 shown in FIG. 203. It is.

FIG. 242(b) is a diagram showing an example of a case where, in the BB internal winning state, the bell is internally won and the symbol combination "Bell-Bell-Bell" is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1. In FIG. 242(b), the bell symbols stopped and displayed on the winning line L1 are a bell symbol whose symbol number counter value is 1 on the left reel 110 and a bell symbol whose symbol number counter value is 19 on the middle reel 111. , the value of the symbol number counter on the right reel 112 is a bell symbol of 15. In the case of this stop symbol mode, the BB symbols on the left reel 110 are located at the 2nd and 4th frames from the BB symbol on the middle reel 111, and the BB symbols on the right reel 112 are located 3 frames from the BB symbol on the middle reel 111. It is located in the eyes. Therefore, the state in which the bell symbols are aligned as shown in FIG. 242(b) is also a preparation state, and the game can be ended in this preparation state, and in the next game, the BB symbols should be stopped and displayed by pressing the keys simultaneously. is possible.

In this example, the preparation state is made up of a replay symbol with a specific value of the symbol number counter, and a bell symbol with a specific value of the symbol number counter. It may be a configuration of a watermelon symbol, a configuration of a cherry symbol with a specific value of the symbol number counter, or a configuration of a losing symbol with a specific value of the symbol number counter.

In addition, the symbol combination that constitutes the preparation state does not need to be displayed in the symbol display window 113, and it is sufficient that the relative positional relationship of the symbols (BB symbols) that constitute a specific symbol combination is in the relative positional relationship shown in Figure 242 (a) or (b).

When the preparation state is reached during a BB internal winning state, the preparation state may be notified by the performance image display device 157 or speakers 272, 277, etc.

FIG. 243 is a timing chart when, in the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the three stop buttons 137 to 139 are pressed simultaneously, but only some of the operations are accepted. Hereinafter, explanations that overlap with the explanation of the timing chart shown in FIG. 229 will be omitted, and the explanation will focus on the differences from the timing chart shown in FIG. 229. In FIG. 243, the left stop button operation, middle stop button operation, and right stop button operation are shown at the bottom.

In the example of FIG. 243, the light blocking piece 612D of the left reel 110 is detected during execution of the second constant speed control (timing (d)), and the left stop button 137 becomes operable. Then, from timing (h), the three stop buttons 137 to 139 are pressed simultaneously. At the time the simultaneous pressing is performed, neither the light blocking piece of the center reel 111 nor the light blocking piece of the right reel 112 has been detected, and the center stop button 138 nor the right stop button 139 remains in an operable state. For this reason, only the operation of the left stop button 137 in the simultaneous pressing operation is accepted, and the remaining operations of the center stop button 138 and right stop button 139 are not accepted. Therefore, the left reel 110 stops at timing (h), but the center reel 111 and right reel 112 continue to rotate at a constant speed. Eventually, the light blocking piece on the center reel 111 is detected (at timing (e)), and finally, the light blocking piece on the right reel 112 is also detected (at timing (f)). However, the operation of the center stop button 138 and the right stop button 139 when pressed simultaneously remains disabled, and in order to stop the center reel 111 and the right reel 112, it is necessary to operate the center stop button 138 and the right stop button 139 again. At timing (f), the center stop button LED 138a and the right stop button LED 139a change to the second light emission mode, but the left stop button LED 137a, which has already stopped the reels, remains in the first light emission mode.

FIG. 244 is a timing chart in the slot machine 100 of this embodiment when all simultaneous pressing operations performed on the three stop buttons 137 to 139 are accepted. Hereinafter, explanations that overlap with the explanation of the timing chart shown in FIG. 243 will be omitted, and the explanation will focus on the differences from the timing chart shown in FIG. 243.

In the timing chart shown in FIG. 244, the simultaneous push operation is performed after all of the light shielding pieces of the three reels 110 to 112 are detected. Therefore, in a state where all three stop buttons 137 to 139 are ready for operation and all three stop button LEDs 137a to 139a are emitting light in the second light emission mode (period indicated by the arrow (o)), Simultaneous pressing operations are performed (timing (h)). In response to the simultaneous push operation, brake control is performed on each of the three reels 110 to 112, and the three reels 110 to 112 are stopped at the same time. That is, at least a portion of the periods during which brake control is performed for each reel 110 to 112 overlap. Note that all the periods may overlap. Furthermore, the stop button LEDs 137a to 139a built into the three stop buttons 137 to 139, respectively, return to the first light emitting mode at the same time. Note that they will stop at the same time. Strictly speaking, it looks like they stopped at the same time. and return at the same time. And to see it decrease, it looks like it returned at the same time. It is.

FIG. 245 is a timing chart in the slot machine 100 of this embodiment when simultaneous pressing is performed during a pseudo game. Hereinafter, explanations that overlap with the explanation of the timing chart shown in FIG. 240 will be omitted, and the explanation will focus on the differences from the timing chart shown in FIG. 240.

In the timing chart shown in FIG. 245, after the three stop button lamps 137a to 139a change to the second light emitting mode, the three stop buttons 137 to 139 are pressed simultaneously, and the three reels 110 to 112 makes it appear as if they are simultaneous in terms of timing, and as if they have stopped in terms of state. That is, the vibration display starts almost simultaneously. For example, in the BB internal winning state, the BB symbol alignment ("7-7-7") is displayed vibrating (shaking display). That is, here, a pseudo game (simultaneous reel effect) is performed in which the three rotating reels 110 to 112 appear to stop at the same time as an effect by simultaneous pressing operations.

After the vibration display is performed for a few seconds, the pseudo game ends and the actual game begins. In this game, random delay control is performed, and acceleration control, first constant speed control, and second constant speed control are executed. Even in this game, even if the three stop buttons 137 to 139 are pressed simultaneously, the random delay process makes it extremely unlikely that the BB pattern alignment ("7-7-7") can be stopped and displayed. During the execution of the second constant speed control in this game, the light-shielding piece on the right reel 112 is detected first (timing (f')), then the light-shielding piece on the center reel 111 is detected (timing (e')), and finally the light-shielding piece 612D on the left reel 110 is detected (timing (d')). The order in which the light-shielding pieces are detected on the reels is different between the pseudo game and the actual game.

Further, although the present embodiment is related to the game of the slot machine 100, the present invention is not limited to slot machines, and can be applied to other game machines such as pachinko.

In the above description,
“A plurality of reels [for example, two or more reels of the left reel 110, the middle reel 111, and the right reel 112, or all of these reels],
A stop operation means is provided in a one-to-one correspondence for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, and is operated in a stopable state to stop the rotating corresponding reel [for example, a left stop button 137, middle stop button 138, right stop button 139],
Regarding the rotation control executed for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, acceleration control to transition from a stopped state to a constant speed state [for example, acceleration control shown in FIG. 212], constant speed to maintain the constant speed state control [for example, the first constant speed control or the second constant speed control shown in FIG. 212, or a combination of the first constant speed control and the second constant speed control], and brake control for transitioning from the constant speed state to the stopped state A reel control means [for example, the main control unit 300] configured to be able to execute [for example, the brake control shown in FIG. 212];
Equipped with
Even if the stop operation means is operated, the reels constituting the plurality of reels cannot be stopped if the acceleration control is being executed [for example, the second constant speed control shown in FIG. Stop button enable information is set only during processing],
The reel control means is a means capable of executing the brake control after transitioning to the stoppable state [for example, the state in which the index sensor detects the light shielding piece of the target reel (step S310i shown in FIG. 222)],
Each reel constituting the plurality of reels [for example, step S208c in the reel rotation control process shown in FIG. 218 is executed for each reel] can transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state [for example, As shown in FIG. 229, the left stop button 137 transitions to the receptive state at the timing (d), the middle stop button 138 transitions to the receptive state at the timing (e), and the right stop button 139 transitions to the receptive state at the timing (f). Transition to possible state],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

With this gaming machine, the stop operation is accepted from the prepared reels, so that the operation of the stop operation means can be accepted more quickly than before. This allows the player to play at a good tempo without feeling stressed. Also, the immediate response to the player's operation can enhance the realism of the game. These effects are also common to the gaming machines described below, and may be referred to as the first common effect below.

The non-stoppable state may refer to a state in which the operation of the stop operation means provided in correspondence with the reels is not accepted, or may refer to a state in which the operation is accepted but is not treated as a valid operation (the same applies below). On the other hand, the stoppable state refers to a state in which the operation of the stop operation means provided in correspondence with the reels is accepted and is treated as a valid operation (the same applies below).

Further, when the stop position of the reel becomes controllable, the rotating reel shifts from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state (the same applies below).

Further, the reel control means may be a means capable of shifting the reel stop position to a controllable state during the execution of the constant speed control, and may be a means that can shift the reel stop position to a controllable state during the execution of the acceleration control. (The same applies below).

Furthermore, in the above description,
"A plurality of reels (e.g., two or more of the left reel 110, the center reel 111, and the right reel 112, or all of these reels) and
stop operation means (e.g., a left stop button 137, a center stop button 138, a right stop button 139) that are provided in one-to-one correspondence with each of the reels constituting the plurality of reels and that stop the corresponding reel that is spinning when operated in a stoppable state;
notification means (e.g., a left stop button LED 137a, a middle stop button LED 138a, a right stop button LED 139a) that are provided in one-to-one correspondence with each of the reels constituting the plurality of reels and that can execute notification (e.g., notification by a second light emission mode (a blue light emission mode)) that the corresponding rotating reel is in the stoppable state;
a reel control means (e.g., a main control unit 300) configured to be able to execute, with respect to rotation control executed for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, an acceleration control for transitioning from a stopped state to a constant speed state (e.g., the acceleration control shown in FIG. 212), a constant speed control for maintaining the constant speed state (e.g., the first constant speed control or the second constant speed control shown in FIG. 212, or a combination of the first constant speed control and the second constant speed control), and a brake control for transitioning from the constant speed state to the stopped state (e.g., the brake control shown in FIG. 212);
Equipped with
The reels constituting the plurality of reels cannot be stopped even if the stop operation means is operated when the acceleration control is being executed (for example, the stop button validity information is set only in the second constant speed control process shown in FIG. 222 );
The reel control means is a means capable of executing the brake control after transitioning to the stoppable state (for example, a state in which the index sensor detects the light-shielding piece of the target reel (step S310i shown in FIG. 222)),
Each of the reels constituting the plurality of reels (for example, step S208c in the reel rotation control process shown in FIG. 218 is executed for each reel) can transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state (for example, transition to a state in which the left stop button 137 can be accepted at timing (d), transition to a state in which the middle stop button 138 can be accepted at timing (e), and transition to a state in which the right stop button 139 can be accepted at timing (f) as shown in FIG. 229),
The notification means does not execute the notification unless all of the reels are shifted from the non-stoppable state to the stoppable state (for example, step S2703 shown in FIG. 217 );
The notification means executes the notification for all of the reels that are rotating when all of the reels transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state (for example, when the index sensor detects the light-shielding pieces of all the reels at the timing (f) shown in FIG. 229, each of the stop button LEDs 137a, 138a, 139a starts to light up all at once).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"The above-mentioned unstoppable state means a state in which the reel's stopping position cannot be controlled,
The stoppable state is a state in which the stopping position of the reel can be controlled in the constant speed state (for example, when a light-shielding piece is detected, it is determined that the reel has made one rotation, the rotational position information of the reel is reset to zero, and the stopping position of the reel can be calculated).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
“One reel constituting the plurality of reels is a first reel [for example, left reel 110],
One reel constituting the plurality of reels is a second reel [for example, middle reel 111],
In the first case [for example, the case shown in FIG. 229], the first reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the second reel [for example, (d) timing shown in 229],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

In addition, in some cases, the second reel may transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the first reel [for example, timing (d') shown in FIG. 232] (the same applies below).

The stop operation means may be a means including a first stop operation means [e.g., left stop button 137] and a second stop operation means [e.g., center stop button 138], the first stop operation means [e.g., left stop button 137] being a means for stopping the first reel [e.g., left reel 110] when the first reel is in a stoppable state, and the second stop operation means [e.g., center stop button 138] being a means for stopping the second reel [e.g., center reel 111] when the second reel is in a stoppable state (the same applies below).

Also,
"The first case refers to a case where the reel control means transitions the stop position of the first reel to a controllable state before transitioning the stop position of the second reel to a controllable state [for example, the timing (d) shown in FIG. 229],
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"The first reel [e.g., the left reel 110] is a reel on which a plurality of types of symbols [e.g., an arrangement of "left" symbols as shown in FIG. 205(a)] are arranged along the rotation direction,
The second reel (e.g., the middle reel 111) is also a reel on which a plurality of types of symbols (e.g., an arrangement of the “middle” symbols shown in FIG. 205(a)) are arranged along the rotation direction.
The state in which the stop position of the first reel can be controlled means a state in which the reel control means receives a first detection signal (for example, a detection signal of a light-shielding piece of the left reel 110 transmitted from an index sensor) for identifying the position of the stopped display of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel,
The state in which the stop position of the second reel can be controlled means a state in which the reel control means receives a second detection signal (e.g., a detection signal of a light-shielding piece of the right reel 112 transmitted from an index sensor) for identifying the position of the stopped display of the plurality of types of symbols on the second reel.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
``The first detection signal is received while the reel control means is executing the constant speed control for all of the plurality of reels [for example, the period indicated by the arrow (C) in FIG. 229]. In this case, the first reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“After the first case, the brake control of the first reel [e.g., left reel 110] is not started, and the brake control of the second reel [e.g., middle reel 111] is not started either. When power is restored from a power failure [for example, power is restored from a power failure as shown in FIG. 232] in the state, the second reel changes from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the first reel does. [For example, the timing in FIG. 232(d')]
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
"A first reel with multiple designs,
A second reel having a plurality of different patterns;
a first reel rotation drive means for rotating the first reel;
A second reel rotation drive means for rotating the second reel;
a first stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the first reel that is rotating;
a second stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the second reel that is rotating;
a first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying a display position of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
a second symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying a display position of the plurality of types of symbols on the second reel;
a reel control means configured to execute, with respect to rotation control executed on each of a plurality of reels including the first reel and the second reel, an acceleration control for transitioning to a constant speed state, a constant speed control for maintaining the constant speed state, and a stop control for transitioning to a stopped state;
a stop operation acceptance determination means for determining whether or not the stop operation can be accepted by any one of a plurality of stop operation means including the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means;
a stop operation control means for controlling any one of the plurality of stop operation means based on a result of the determination by the stop operation reception determination means;
A gaming machine equipped with
In a first case, a timing at which the first stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation is earlier than a timing at which the second stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, the stop operation can be accepted from the prepared reels, allowing the stop button to be operated more quickly than before.

Also,
"The first case is a case where the output of the detection signal of the first symbol position detection means is faster than the output of the detection signal of the second symbol position detection means.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, it is possible to start accepting a stop operation from the reel whose symbol position has been detected.

Also,
"When the constant speed control of the plurality of reels is executed and a detection signal of the first symbol position detection means is output, reception of the stop operation by the first stop operation means is started. ,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, it is possible to start accepting operations to stop the reels earlier than before.

Also,
"When a power outage occurs after the first case in a state in which the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means are not operated, the second stop operation means may start accepting the stop operation earlier than the first stop operation means.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, the order in which operations are accepted changes before and after a power outage, adding variety to the game.

In the above description,
“A plurality of reels [for example, two or more reels of the left reel 110, the middle reel 111, and the right reel 112, or all of these reels],
A stop operation means is provided in a one-to-one correspondence for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, and is operated in a stopable state to stop the rotating corresponding reel [for example, a left stop button 137, middle stop button 138, right stop button 139],
Regarding the rotation control executed for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, acceleration control to transition from a stopped state to a constant speed state [for example, acceleration control shown in FIG. 212], constant speed to maintain the constant speed state control [for example, the first constant speed control or the second constant speed control shown in FIG. 212, or a combination of the first constant speed control and the second constant speed control], and brake control for transitioning from the constant speed state to the stopped state A reel control means [for example, the main control unit 300] configured to be able to execute [for example, the brake control shown in FIG. 212];
Equipped with
Even if the stop operation means is operated, the reels constituting the plurality of reels cannot be stopped if the acceleration control is being executed [for example, the second constant speed control shown in FIG. Stop button enable information is set only during processing],
The reel control means is a means capable of executing the brake control after transitioning to the stoppable state [for example, the state in which the index sensor detects the light shielding piece of the target reel (step S310i shown in FIG. 222)],
For each reel constituting the plurality of reels [for example, step S208c in the reel rotation control process shown in FIG. 218 is executed for each reel], it is possible to transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state [for example, As shown in FIG. 229, the left stop button 137 transitions to the receptive state at the timing (d), the middle stop button 138 transitions to the receptive state at the timing (e), and the right stop button 139 transitions to the receptive state at the timing (f). Transition to possible state],
While the constant speed control is being performed on one reel among the plurality of reels [for example, the left reel 110], a reel other than the one reel among the plurality of reels [for example, , right reel 112] enters the first abnormal state [for example, the timing shown in FIG. 230 (g)], the one reel shifts from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state. In some cases [for example, the timing of (d) shown in FIG. 230],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this gaming machine, in addition to the first common effect described above, even if some of the reels are in the first abnormal state, the game can be continued with the remaining reels. In addition, the player may be able to concentrate on the game without wasting the rotation of the reels that would not have been in the first abnormal state.

Note that if the stop position of the reel is in an uncontrollable state, the one reel will not shift from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state.

Also,
``Equipped with a first abnormal state detection means for detecting that the reel has entered the first abnormal state [for example, a main control unit 300 that executes the step-out detection process shown in FIG. 222],
While the constant speed control is being executed on one of the plurality of reels, a reel other than the one reel among the plurality of reels enters the first abnormal state. [For example, the timing (g) shown in FIG. 230] may also be used until the first abnormal state detection means detects the first abnormal state of the other reel [for example, the timing (a' shown in FIG. 230)] )], the one reel can transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state [for example, the timing of (d) shown in FIG. 230],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
"The above-mentioned unstoppable state means a state in which the reel's stopping position cannot be controlled,
The stoppable state is a state in which the stopping position of the reel can be controlled in the constant speed state (for example, when a light-shielding piece is detected, it is determined that the reel has made one rotation, the rotational position information of the reel is reset to zero, and the stopping position of the reel can be calculated).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
“One reel constituting the plurality of reels is a first reel [for example, left reel 110],
One reel constituting the plurality of reels is a second reel [for example, middle reel 111],
In the first case [for example, the case shown in FIG. 229], the first reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the second reel [for example, (d) timing shown in 229],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“The first case means that the reel control means brings the stop position of the first reel into a controllable state before shifting the stop position of the second reel to a controllable state. This is the case when the transition occurs [for example, the timing of (d) shown in FIG. 229],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
"The first reel [e.g., the left reel 110] is a reel on which a plurality of types of symbols [e.g., an arrangement of "left" symbols as shown in FIG. 205(a)] are arranged along the rotation direction,
The second reel (e.g., the middle reel 111) is also a reel on which a plurality of types of symbols (e.g., an arrangement of the “middle” symbols shown in FIG. 205(a)) are arranged along the rotation direction.
The state in which the stop position of the first reel can be controlled means a state in which the reel control means receives a first detection signal (for example, a detection signal of a light-shielding piece of the left reel 110 transmitted from an index sensor) for identifying the position of the stopped display of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel,
The state in which the stop position of the second reel can be controlled means a state in which the reel control means receives a second detection signal (e.g., a detection signal of a light-shielding piece of the right reel 112 transmitted from an index sensor) for identifying the position of the stopped display of the plurality of types of symbols on the second reel.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"When the reel control means receives the first detection signal while executing the constant speed control for all of the plurality of reels [for example, the period indicated by the arrow (U) in FIG. 229], the first reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
“After the first case, the brake control of the first reel [e.g., left reel 110] is not started, and the brake control of the second reel [e.g., middle reel 111] is not started either. When power is restored from a power failure [for example, power is restored from a power failure as shown in FIG. 232] in the state, the second reel changes from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the first reel does. [For example, the timing in FIG. 232(d')]
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
"The first reel has multiple types of designs,
A second reel with multiple types of designs;
a first reel rotation drive means for rotating the first reel;
a second reel rotation drive means for rotating the second reel;
a first stop operation means that accepts a stop operation for stopping the rotating first reel;
a second stop operation means that receives a stop operation for stopping the rotating second reel;
a first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
a second symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the second reel;
Regarding the rotation control performed on each of the plurality of reels including the first reel and the second reel, acceleration control to shift to a constant speed state, constant speed control to maintain the constant speed state, and stop a reel control means configured to be able to execute stop control for transitioning to the state;
a stop operation acceptance determination means for determining whether or not the stop operation can be accepted in any one of the plurality of stop operation means including the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means;
Stop operation control means for controlling any one of the plurality of stop operation means based on the result of the determination by the stop operation acceptance determination means;
A game machine comprising:
In the first case, the first stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation earlier than the second stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation;
Even if the second reel rotation drive means steps out during the period in which the reel control means executes the constant speed control on the second reel, the stop operation by the first stop operation means Acceptance of operations will begin.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this gaming machine, by accepting a stop operation from a prepared reel, the stop button can be operated more quickly than before, and in addition, a player can play a game using some of the reels among the plurality of reels.

Also,
``The first case is a case where the output of the detection signal of the first symbol position detection means is faster than the output of the detection signal of the second symbol position detection means.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

With this gaming machine, the stop operation can begin from the reel whose symbol position has been detected.

Also,
``When the constant speed control of the plurality of reels is executed and a detection signal of the first symbol position detection means is output, reception of the stop operation by the first stop operation means is started. ,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, it is possible to start accepting operations to stop the reels earlier than before.

Also,
"If the power is restored after a power outage in a state where the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means are not operated after the first case, the stop operation at the second stop operation means The reception start time of the stop operation may be earlier than the start time of reception of the stop operation by the first stop operation means,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the order in which operations are accepted is different before and after the power is restored after a power outage, thereby making it possible to add variety to the game.

In the above description,
"A plurality of reels (e.g., two or more of the left reel 110, the center reel 111, and the right reel 112, or all of these reels) and
stop operation means (e.g., a left stop button 137, a center stop button 138, a right stop button 139) that are provided in one-to-one correspondence with each of the reels constituting the plurality of reels and that stop the corresponding reel that is spinning when operated in a stoppable state;
a reel control means (e.g., a main control unit 300) configured to be capable of executing at least an acceleration control (e.g., the acceleration control shown in FIG. 212) that increases the rotation speed of the reel from a stopped state to a constant speed state, a second constant speed control (e.g., the second constant speed control shown in FIG. 212) that maintains the constant speed state, and a brake control (e.g., the brake control shown in FIG. 212) that transitions from the constant speed state to the stopped state, for each of the reels constituting the plurality of reels;
Equipped with
The reels constituting the plurality of reels cannot be stopped even if the stop operation means is operated when the acceleration control is being executed (for example, the stop button validity information is set only in the second constant speed control process shown in FIG. 222 );
The reel control means is a means capable of executing the brake control after transitioning to the stoppable state (for example, a state in which the index sensor detects the light-shielding piece of the target reel (step S310i shown in FIG. 222)),
Each of the reels constituting the plurality of reels (for example, step S208c in the reel rotation control process shown in FIG. 218 is executed for each reel) can transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state (for example, transition to a state in which the left stop button 137 can be accepted at timing (c), transition to a state in which the middle stop button 138 can be accepted at timing (e), and transition to a state in which the right stop button 139 can be accepted at timing (f) as shown in FIG. 234),
The reel control means may transition to a state in which the stop position of the reel can be controlled before the second constant speed control is started (for example, at the timing of (b) shown in FIG. 234 ).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

According to this gaming machine, there is no need to wait until the second constant speed control is started to shift the reel stop position to a controllable state, and the operation of the stop operation means is accepted at an earlier timing. You will be able to do it. Therefore, the first common effect mentioned above is further enhanced.

The reel control means may be a means capable of transitioning the reel's stopping position to a controllable state while the second constant speed control is being executed, or may be a means capable of transitioning the reel's stopping position to a controllable state while the acceleration control is being executed.

Further, the second constant speed control may be a control that maintains the constant speed state by being repeatedly executed.

Also,
"When the rotation speed of the reel reaches a constant speed in the constant speed state, the reel control means executes a first constant speed control [for example, the first constant speed control shown in FIG. 212] after terminating the acceleration control, and then executes the second constant speed control,
The second constant speed control is a control that is repeatedly executed.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Note that the first constant speed control may be control using a current value (strong excitation) higher than the current value (for example, medium excitation) used in the second constant speed control (the same applies below). ).

The first constant speed control always transitions to the second constant speed control after the first control pattern [for example, the control pattern in which the general-purpose offset counter value is from 0 to 7 in the first constant speed control shown in FIG. 212] is repeatedly executed a first number of times [for example, 16 times], but the second constant speed control transitions to the brake control after the second control pattern [for example, the control pattern in which the general-purpose offset counter value is from 0 to 7 in the second constant speed control shown in FIG. 212] is repeatedly executed an indefinite number of times [for example, until the light blocking piece is detected and the stop button is operated].

The reel control means may be a means capable of transitioning the reel stopping position to a controllable state while the first constant speed control is being executed [for example, at timing (b) shown in FIG. 234].

Also,
"The above-mentioned unstoppable state means a state in which the reel's stopping position cannot be controlled,
The stoppable state is a state in which the stopping position of the reel can be controlled in the constant speed state (for example, when a light-shielding piece is detected, it is determined that the reel has made one rotation, the rotational position information of the reel is reset to zero, and the stopping position of the reel can be calculated).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"One of the reels constituting the plurality of reels is a first reel [e.g., the left reel 110],
One of the reels is a second reel [e.g., a center reel 111],
In a first case (e.g., the case of the example shown in FIG. 229), the first reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the second reel transitions (e.g., the timing of (c) shown in FIG. 234),
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
“The first case means that the reel control means brings the stop position of the first reel into a controllable state before shifting the stop position of the second reel to a controllable state. This is the case when the transition occurs [for example, the timing of (c) shown in FIG. 234],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“The first reel [for example, the left reel 110] is a reel on which a plurality of types of symbols [for example, the arrangement of “left” symbols shown in FIG. 205(a)] are applied along the rotation direction,
The second reel [for example, the middle reel 111] is also a reel on which a plurality of types of symbols [for example, the arrangement of "medium" symbols shown in FIG. 205(a)] are applied along the rotation direction,
The state in which the stop position of the first reel can be controlled means that the reel control means performs first detection to identify the stop display position of the plurality of types of symbols applied to the first reel. It is a state in which a signal [for example, a detection signal of the light shielding piece of the left reel 110 transmitted from the index sensor] is received,
The state in which the stop position of the second reel can be controlled means that the reel control means performs a second detection for identifying the stop display position of the plurality of types of symbols applied to the second reel. It is a state in which a signal [for example, a detection signal of the light shielding piece of the right reel 112 transmitted from the index sensor] is received.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
"When the reel control means receives the first detection signal while executing the second constant speed control for all of the plurality of reels [for example, the period indicated by the arrow (U) in FIG. 234], the first reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"After the first case, if a power interruption and restoration (for example, a power interruption and restoration as shown in FIG. 232) occurs while the brake control of the first reel (for example, the left reel 110) has not been started and the brake control of the second reel (for example, the center reel 111) has not been started, the second reel may transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the first reel (for example, the timing of FIG. 232(d')).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"The first reel has multiple types of designs,
A second reel with multiple types of designs;
a first reel rotation drive means for rotating the first reel;
a second reel rotation drive means for rotating the second reel;
a first stop operation means that accepts a stop operation for stopping the rotating first reel;
a second stop operation means that receives a stop operation for stopping the rotating second reel;
a first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
a second symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the second reel;
Regarding the rotation control performed on each of the plurality of reels including the first reel and the second reel, acceleration control for shifting to a constant speed state, constant speed control for maintaining the constant speed state, and stopping a reel control means configured to be able to execute stop control for transitioning to the state;
a stop operation acceptance determination means for determining whether or not the stop operation can be accepted in any one of the plurality of stop operation means including the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means;
Stop operation control means for controlling any one of the plurality of stop operation means based on the result of determination by the stop operation acceptance determination means;
A game machine comprising:
In the first case, the first stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation earlier than the second stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation;
The acceptance of the stop operation by the first stop operation means is performed when the detection signal of the first symbol position detection means is received within a predetermined period of time after the acceleration control for the first reel is started. When the output is output, it may start after the predetermined time has elapsed.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, it is possible to detect the reel index before the constant speed flag is turned on, and it is possible to start receiving a reel stop operation earlier than when detecting the reel index after the constant speed flag is turned on.

Also,
"The first case is a case where the output of the detection signal of the first symbol position detection means is earlier than the output of the detection signal of the second symbol position detection means.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, the stop operation can begin from the reel whose symbol position has been detected.

Also,
"When the constant speed control of the plurality of reels is executed and a detection signal of the first symbol position detection means is output, reception of the stop operation by the first stop operation means is started. ,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

With this gaming machine, the reel stopping operation can be accepted sooner than before.

Also,
"If the power is restored after a power outage in a state where the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means are not operated after the first case, the stop operation at the second stop operation means The reception start time of the stop operation may be earlier than the start time of reception of the stop operation by the first stop operation means,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

With this gaming machine, the order in which operations are accepted changes before and after a power outage, adding variety to the game.

Also,
“The reel control means is capable of executing a first constant speed control and a second constant speed control as the constant speed control,
The reel control means executes the first constant speed control on the first reel during at least a part of the period until the predetermined time elapses, and controls the second constant speed control after the predetermined time elapses. performing control on the first reel;
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

With this gaming machine, reel index detection is enabled during the first constant speed control.

In the above description,
"A plurality of reels (e.g., two or more of the left reel 110, the center reel 111, and the right reel 112, or all of these reels) and
stop operation means (e.g., a left stop button 137, a center stop button 138, a right stop button 139) that are provided in one-to-one correspondence with each of the reels constituting the plurality of reels and that stop the corresponding reel that is spinning when operated in a stoppable state;
a reel control means (e.g., a main control unit 300) configured to be able to execute, with respect to rotation control executed for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, an acceleration control for transitioning from a stopped state to a constant speed state (e.g., the acceleration control shown in FIG. 212), a constant speed control for maintaining the constant speed state (e.g., the first constant speed control or the second constant speed control shown in FIG. 212, or a combination of the first constant speed control and the second constant speed control), and a brake control for transitioning from the constant speed state to the stopped state (e.g., the brake control shown in FIG. 212);
Equipped with
The reels constituting the plurality of reels cannot be stopped even if the stop operation means is operated when the acceleration control is being executed (for example, the stop button validity information is set only in the second constant speed control process shown in FIG. 222 );
The reel control means is a means capable of executing the brake control after transitioning to the stoppable state (for example, a state in which the index sensor detects the light-shielding piece of the target reel (step S310i shown in FIG. 222)),
Each of the reels constituting the plurality of reels (for example, step S208c in the reel rotation control process shown in FIG. 218 is executed for each reel) can transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state (for example, transition to a state in which the left stop button 137 can be accepted at timing (d), transition to a state in which the middle stop button 138 can be accepted at timing (e), and transition to a state in which the right stop button 139 can be accepted at timing (f) as shown in FIG. 229),
When a plurality of stop operation means corresponding to each of the plurality of reels are operated in succession [for example, when a slide push is performed], there are cases where the reels corresponding to all of the operated stop operation means are in the stoppable state [for example, the example shown in FIG. 239], and there are also cases where only the reels corresponding to some of the operated stop operation means [for example, the left stop button 137] are in the stoppable state [for example, the example shown in FIG. 238].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

According to this game machine, even if the slide push operation is performed, the first common effect described above can be obtained.

It should be noted that it may also be the case that a plurality of stop operation means corresponding to each of the plurality of reels constituting the plurality of reels are operated in succession, and in this case, "one of the plurality of reels constituting the plurality of reels" The plurality of reels may be two of the three reels or three of the three reels.

In addition, when multiple stop operation means corresponding to each of the multiple reels constituting the multiple reels are operated in succession, the brake control may be performed on all of the reels corresponding to all of the operated stop operation means, or the brake control may be performed on only some of the reels corresponding to all of the operated stop operation means.

Further, when a plurality of stop operation means corresponding to each of the plurality of reels constituting the plurality of reels are operated in succession, the brake is applied to the reel corresponding to the stop operation means operated first. Even when the control is being executed, the brake control may also be executed for the reel corresponding to the next operated stop operation means.

Further, when a plurality of stop operation means corresponding to each of the plurality of reels constituting the plurality of reels are operated in succession, the brake is applied to the reel corresponding to the stop operation means operated first. Even if the control is being executed, the stop operation means operated next may be in the non-stop state.

Further, when a plurality of stop operation means corresponding to each of the plurality of reels constituting the plurality of reels are operated in succession, the brake is applied to the reel corresponding to the stop operation means operated first. Even when the control is being executed, the stop operation means operated next may also be in the stop possible state.

Also,
``The above-mentioned ``case where multiple stop operation means are operated in succession'' refers to a case where an operation is performed in which multiple stop operation means are operated in succession in a tracing manner.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“The unstoppable state is a state in which the stop position of the reel cannot be controlled,
The stoppable state is a state in which the stop position of the reel can be controlled in the constant speed state [for example, when a light shielding piece is detected, it is determined that the reel has made one rotation, and the reel rotation position information is set to zero. It is possible to reset the reel and calculate the stop position of the reel.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
"One of the reels constituting the plurality of reels is a first reel [e.g., the left reel 110],
One of the reels is a second reel [e.g., a center reel 111],
In a first case (e.g., the case of the example shown in FIG. 229), the first reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the second reel transitions (e.g., the timing of (d) shown in FIG. 229),
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"The first case refers to a case where the reel control means transitions the stop position of the first reel to a controllable state before transitioning the stop position of the second reel to a controllable state [for example, the timing (d) shown in FIG. 229],
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"The first reel [e.g., the left reel 110] is a reel on which a plurality of types of symbols [e.g., an arrangement of "left" symbols as shown in FIG. 205(a)] are arranged along the rotation direction,
The second reel (e.g., the middle reel 111) is also a reel on which a plurality of types of symbols (e.g., an arrangement of the “middle” symbols shown in FIG. 205(a)) are arranged along the rotation direction.
The state in which the stop position of the first reel can be controlled means a state in which the reel control means receives a first detection signal (for example, a detection signal of a light-shielding piece of the left reel 110 transmitted from an index sensor) for identifying the position of the stopped display of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel,
The state in which the stop position of the second reel can be controlled means a state in which the reel control means receives a second detection signal (e.g., a detection signal of a light-shielding piece of the right reel 112 transmitted from an index sensor) for identifying the position of the stopped display of the plurality of types of symbols on the second reel.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
``The first detection signal is received while the reel control means is executing the constant speed control for all of the plurality of reels [for example, the period indicated by the arrow (C) in FIG. 229]. In this case, the first reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“After the first case, the brake control of the first reel [e.g., left reel 110] is not started, and the brake control of the second reel [e.g., middle reel 111] is not started either. When power is restored from a power failure [for example, power is restored from a power failure as shown in FIG. 232] in the state, the second reel changes from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the first reel does. [For example, the timing in FIG. 232(d')]
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
"The first reel has multiple designs,
A second reel having a plurality of different patterns;
a first reel rotation drive means for rotating the first reel;
A second reel rotation drive means for rotating the second reel;
a first stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the first reel that is rotating;
a second stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the second reel that is rotating;
a first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying a display position of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
a second symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying a display position of the plurality of types of symbols on the second reel;
a reel control means configured to execute, with respect to rotation control executed on each of a plurality of reels including the first reel and the second reel, an acceleration control for transitioning to a constant speed state, a constant speed control for maintaining the constant speed state, and a stop control for transitioning to a stopped state;
a stop operation acceptance determination means for determining whether or not the stop operation can be accepted by any one of a plurality of stop operation means including the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means;
a stop operation control means for controlling any one of the plurality of stop operation means based on a result of the determination by the stop operation reception determination means;
A gaming machine equipped with
In a first case, a timing at which the first stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation is earlier than a timing at which the second stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation,
When an operation to the first stop operation means and an operation to the second stop operation means are performed during a first period in the first case, the operation to the second stop operation means is invalidated,
When an operation to the first stop operation means and an operation to the second stop operation means are performed during a second period following the first period in the first case, the operation to the second stop operation means becomes valid.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

According to this game machine, it is possible to create a situation in which some of the buttons do not stop even if a plurality of buttons are operated (slide push) in a short period of time, so that a player who is enthusiastic about the game can calm down.

Also,
``The first case is a case where the output of the detection signal of the first symbol position detection means is faster than the output of the detection signal of the second symbol position detection means.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

With this gaming machine, the stop operation can begin from the reel whose symbol position has been detected.

Also,
``When the constant speed control of the plurality of reels is executed and a detection signal of the first symbol position detection means is output, reception of the stop operation by the first stop operation means is started. ,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, it is possible to start accepting operations to stop the reels earlier than before.

Also,
"If the power is restored after a power outage in a state where the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means are not operated after the first case, the stop operation at the second stop operation means The reception start time of the stop operation may be earlier than the start time of reception of the stop operation by the first stop operation means,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the order in which operations are accepted is different before and after the power is restored after a power outage, thereby making it possible to add variety to the game.

In the above description,
“A plurality of reels [for example, two or more reels of the left reel 110, the middle reel 111, and the right reel 112, or all of these reels],
A stop operation means is provided in a one-to-one correspondence for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, and is operated in a stopable state to stop the rotating corresponding reel [for example, a left stop button 137, middle stop button 138, right stop button 139],
Regarding the rotational control executed for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, acceleration control that increases the rotational speed of the reel from a stopped state to a constant speed state [for example, the acceleration control shown in FIG. 212] is repeated. A second constant speed control that maintains the constant speed state by being executed [for example, the second constant speed control shown in FIG. 212], and a brake control that transitions from the constant speed state to the stopped state [for example, a reel control means [for example, the main control unit 300] configured to be able to perform at least the brake control shown in 212;
Equipped with
Even if the stop operation means is operated, the reels constituting the plurality of reels cannot be stopped if the acceleration control is being executed [for example, the second constant speed control shown in FIG. Stop button enable information is set only during processing],
The reel control means is a means capable of executing the brake control after transitioning to the stoppable state [for example, the state in which the index sensor detects the light shielding piece of the target reel (step S310i shown in FIG. 222)],
For each reel constituting the plurality of reels [for example, step S208c in the reel rotation control process shown in FIG. 218 is executed for each reel], it is possible to transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state [for example, As shown in FIG. 229, the left stop button 137 transitions to the receptive state at the timing (d), the middle stop button 138 transitions to the receptive state at the timing (e), and the right stop button 139 transitions to the receptive state at the timing (f). Transition to possible state],
When the rotational speed of the reel reaches a constant speed in the constant speed state, the reel control means executes a first constant speed control [for example, the first constant speed control shown in FIG. 212] after completing the acceleration control. and then executes the second constant speed control,
One of the plurality of reels (hereinafter referred to as "first reel") [for example, the left reel 110] has a plurality of types of symbols [for example, as shown in FIG. 205(a)] along the rotation direction. "Arrangement of patterns on the left"] is applied,
One of the plurality of patterns is a first pattern [for example, the watermelon pattern shown in FIG. 235 (c''-1) or the cherry pattern shown in FIG. 235 (c''-2)]. can be,
The first symbol is a symbol that is advantageous to the player when stopped and displayed [for example, a symbol that wins a small prize],
Even if the stop operation means is operated, the reel cannot be stopped when the first constant speed control is being executed [for example, when the second constant speed control process shown in FIG. Only the stop button valid information is set],
When the reel control means transitions to a state where the stop position of the first reel can be controlled (hereinafter referred to as "first state") during execution of the first constant speed control [e.g. There is a timing shown in FIG. 234 (b)],
When the first state is shifted to the first state during execution of the first constant speed control [for example, at the timing (b) shown in FIG. 234], the second constant speed control is started and the stop operation means is activated. When the first symbol is operated [for example, timing (c') shown in FIG. 234] when the first symbol is stopped and displayed [for example, FIG. 235 (c''-1) or FIG. 235 (c''-2) )]
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

With this gaming machine, even reels equipped with so-called DDT symbols can achieve the first common effect described above, and furthermore, if you are an expert who can judge the changes in reel speed, you will be able to win at the fastest possible timing.

Note that, for example, when the first state is shifted to the first state at the time when the first constant speed control is started, if the stop operation means is operated aiming at the start timing of the second constant speed control. The first symbol may be displayed in a stopped state.

Also,
“The first reel [e.g., left reel 110] has a first detection piece [e.g., light-shielding piece 612D],
The first detection piece is detectable during execution of the first constant speed control [for example, the timing shown in FIG. 234 (b)],
The reel control means shifts to the first state when the first detection piece is detected.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
"The above-mentioned unstoppable state means a state in which the reel's stopping position cannot be controlled,
The stoppable state is a state in which the stopping position of the reel can be controlled in the constant speed state (for example, when a light-shielding piece is detected, it is determined that the reel has made one rotation, the rotational position information of the reel is reset to zero, and the stopping position of the reel can be calculated).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
“Among the plurality of reels, one reel that is different from the first reel [e.g., left reel 110] is a second reel [e.g., middle reel 111],
In a third case [for example, the case shown in FIG. 234], the first reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the second reel [for example, (c) timing shown in 234],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
"The third case is a case where the reel control means transitions the stop position of the first reel to a controllable state before transitioning the stop position of the second reel to a controllable state [for example, the timing of (c) shown in FIG. 234],
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"The first reel [e.g., the left reel 110] is a reel on which a plurality of types of symbols [e.g., an arrangement of "left" symbols as shown in FIG. 205(a)] are arranged along the rotation direction,
The second reel (e.g., the middle reel 111) is also a reel on which a plurality of types of symbols (e.g., an arrangement of the “middle” symbols shown in FIG. 205(a)) are arranged along the rotation direction.
The state in which the stop position of the first reel can be controlled means a state in which the reel control means receives a first detection signal (for example, a detection signal of a light-shielding piece of the left reel 110 transmitted from an index sensor) for identifying the position of the stopped display of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel,
The state in which the stop position of the second reel can be controlled means a state in which the reel control means receives a second detection signal (e.g., a detection signal of a light-shielding piece of the right reel 112 transmitted from an index sensor) for identifying the position of the stopped display of the plurality of types of symbols on the second reel.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"When the reel control means receives the first detection signal while executing the second constant speed control for all of the plurality of reels [for example, the period indicated by the arrow (U) in FIG. 234], the first reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
“After the third case, the brake control of the first reel [e.g., left reel 110] is not started, and the brake control of the second reel [e.g., middle reel 111] is not started either. When power is restored from a power failure [for example, power is restored from a power failure as shown in FIG. 232] in the state, the second reel changes from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the first reel does. [For example, the timing in FIG. 232(d')]
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
"The above-mentioned "If the first state is shifted to the first state during execution of the first constant speed control, the second constant speed control is started and the stop operation means is operated" means the first The stop operation means is operated at a time when the first symbol can be stopped and displayed for the first time after the reels start rotating.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
"The first reel has multiple types of designs,
A second reel with multiple types of designs;
a first reel rotation drive means for rotating the first reel;
a second reel rotation drive means for rotating the second reel;
a first stop operation means that accepts a stop operation for stopping the rotating first reel;
a second stop operation means that receives a stop operation for stopping the rotating second reel;
a first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
a second symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the second reel;
Regarding the rotation control performed on each of the plurality of reels including the first reel and the second reel, acceleration control to shift to a constant speed state, constant speed control to maintain the constant speed state, and stop a reel control means configured to be able to execute stop control for transitioning to the state;
a stop operation acceptance determination means for determining whether or not the stop operation can be accepted in any one of the plurality of stop operation means including the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means;
Stop operation control means for controlling any one of the plurality of stop operation means based on the result of the determination by the stop operation acceptance determination means;
A game machine comprising:
In the first case, the first stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation earlier than the second stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation;
a first detection piece provided on the first reel;
a second detection piece provided on the second reel;
Equipped with
The first symbol position detection means outputs the detection signal when detecting the first detection piece,
The second symbol position detection means outputs the detection signal when detecting the second detection piece,
One of the plurality of types of designs is a first design,
The position of the first symbol is at least a position away from the position of the first detection piece toward the rear in the rotational direction in which the reel control means rotates until a predetermined time elapses after starting the constant speed control. ,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

This gaming machine allows you to press the first symbol as quickly as possible after operation is accepted.

Also,
``The first case is a case where the output of the detection signal of the first symbol position detection means is faster than the output of the detection signal of the second symbol position detection means.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

With this gaming machine, the stop operation can be accepted from the reel whose symbol position has been detected.

Also,
"When the constant speed control of the plurality of reels is executed and a detection signal of the first symbol position detection means is output, the first stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

According to this game machine, it is possible to start accepting operations to stop the reels earlier than before.

Also,
"If the power is restored after a power outage in a state where the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means are not operated after the first case, the stop operation at the second stop operation means The reception start time of the stop operation may be earlier than the start time of reception of the stop operation by the first stop operation means,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the order in which operations are accepted is different before and after the power is restored after a power outage, thereby making it possible to add variety to the game.

In the above description,
“A plurality of reels [for example, two or more reels of the left reel 110, the middle reel 111, and the right reel 112, or all of these reels],
A stop operation means is provided in a one-to-one correspondence for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, and is operated in a stopable state to stop the rotating corresponding reel [for example, a left stop button 137, middle stop button 138, right stop button 139],
Regarding the rotation control executed for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, acceleration control to transition from a stopped state to a constant speed state [for example, acceleration control shown in FIG. 212], constant speed to maintain the constant speed state control [for example, the first constant speed control or the second constant speed control shown in FIG. 212, or a combination of the first constant speed control and the second constant speed control], and brake control for transitioning from the constant speed state to the stopped state A reel control means [for example, the main control unit 300] configured to be able to execute [for example, the brake control shown in FIG. 212];
Equipped with
Even if the stop operation means is operated, the reels constituting the plurality of reels cannot be stopped if the acceleration control is being executed [for example, the second constant speed control shown in FIG. Stop button enable information is set only during processing],
The reel control means is a means capable of executing the brake control after transitioning to the stoppable state [for example, the state in which the index sensor detects the light shielding piece of the target reel (step S310i shown in FIG. 222)],
After the brake control is executed and stopped, each reel constituting the plurality of reels that has started rotating is stopped [for example, step S208c in the reel rotation control process shown in FIG. 218 is executed for each reel], and then stopped. It is possible to shift from the disabled state to the stoppable state [for example, as shown in FIG. Transition to available state, right stop button 139 transition to available state at timing (f')],
The reel control means is a means capable of executing a reel performance [for example, a reel action (first reel performance) or a pseudo game (second reel performance)],
The reel control means is a means capable of executing random delay control for randomly delaying the start of rotation after execution of the reel effect for each reel constituting the plurality of reels,
For each reel that has started rotating after the random delay control is performed, it is possible to shift from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state [for example, the timing of (f') and (e' shown in FIG. 240 or 241) ) timing, (d') timing],
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

According to this game machine, even if the game machine is equipped with random delay control, the first common effect described above can be achieved, and furthermore, the reel situation changes with the random delay control in between, It can add variety to the game.

Note that the reel effect may be an effect that makes the rotating reels appear to have stopped.

Also,
"The reel effect is a pseudo-game effect that makes it appear as if the reels have stopped in response to the operation of the stop operation means [for example, the timing of (h), (h'), and (h'') in FIG. 240].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
“The unstoppable state is a state in which the stop position of the reel cannot be controlled,
The stoppable state is a state in which the stop position of the reel can be controlled in the constant speed state [for example, when a light shielding piece is detected, it is determined that the reel has made one rotation, and the reel rotation position information is set to zero. This means that the reel stop position can be calculated by resetting the reel.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
"One of the reels constituting the plurality of reels is a first reel [e.g., the left reel 110],
One of the reels is a second reel [e.g., a center reel 111],
In a first case among the cases in which the plurality of reels start to rotate after being stopped by the execution of the brake control (for example, the case of the example shown in FIG. 229 or the case of the example shown in FIG. 238), the first reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the second reel (for example, the timing of (d) shown in FIG. 229 or the timing of (d') shown in FIG. 238),
In a second case (e.g., in the case of the example shown in FIG. 240 or the example shown in FIG. 241) among the cases in which the random delay control is performed and the plurality of reels start spinning after the reel performance is executed, the second reel transitions from the non-stoppable state to the stoppable state before the first reel transitions (e.g., at the timing of (e') shown in FIG. 240 or FIG. 241),
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"The first case refers to a case where the reel control means transitions the stop position of the first reel to a controllable state before transitioning the stop position of the second reel to a controllable state (for example, timing (d) shown in FIG. 229 or timing (d') shown in FIG. 238),
The second case refers to a case where the reel control means transitions the stop position of the second reel to a controllable state before transitioning the stop position of the first reel to a controllable state (for example, timing (e') shown in FIG. 240 or FIG. 241 );
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
“The first reel [for example, the left reel 110] is a reel on which a plurality of types of symbols [for example, the arrangement of “left” symbols shown in FIG. 205(a)] are applied along the rotation direction,
The second reel [for example, the middle reel 111] is also a reel on which a plurality of types of symbols [for example, the arrangement of "medium" symbols shown in FIG. 205(a)] are applied along the rotation direction,
The state in which the stop position of the first reel can be controlled means that the reel control means performs first detection to identify the stop display position of the plurality of types of symbols applied to the first reel. It is a state in which a signal [for example, a detection signal of the light shielding piece of the left reel 110 transmitted from the index sensor] is received,
The state in which the stop position of the second reel can be controlled means that the reel control means performs second detection for identifying the stop display position of the plurality of types of symbols applied to the second reel. It is a state in which a signal [for example, a detection signal of the light shielding piece of the right reel 112 transmitted from the index sensor] is received.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
``The first detection signal is received while the reel control means is executing the constant speed control for all of the plurality of reels [for example, the period indicated by the arrow (C) in FIG. 229]. In this case, the first reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“After the first case, the brake control of the first reel [e.g., left reel 110] is not started, and the brake control of the second reel [e.g., middle reel 111] is not started either. When power is restored from a power failure [for example, power is restored from a power failure as shown in FIG. 232] in the state, the second reel changes from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the first reel does. [For example, the timing in FIG. 232(d')]
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
"The first reel has multiple types of designs,
A second reel with multiple types of designs;
a first reel rotation drive means for rotating the first reel;
a second reel rotation drive means for rotating the second reel;
a first stop operation means that accepts a stop operation for stopping the rotating first reel;
a second stop operation means that receives a stop operation for stopping the rotating second reel;
a first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
a second symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the second reel;
Regarding the rotation control performed on each of the plurality of reels including the first reel and the second reel, acceleration control to shift to a constant speed state, constant speed control to maintain the constant speed state, and stop a reel control means configured to be able to execute stop control for transitioning to the state;
a stop operation acceptance determination means for determining whether or not the stop operation can be accepted in any one of the plurality of stop operation means including the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means;
Stop operation control means for controlling any one of the plurality of stop operation means based on the result of the determination by the stop operation acceptance determination means;
A game machine comprising:
In the first case, the first stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation earlier than the second stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation;
The reel control means is a means capable of executing random delay control for randomly delaying the rotation start timing of the plurality of reels for each reel,
When the random delay control is executed after the first game in the first case, in the second game after the first game, the stop operation in the second stop operation means is executed. The reception start time may be earlier than the reception start time of the stop operation in the first stop operation means,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

With this gaming machine, the start times of acceptance of each stop operation means for the first game and the second game can be made different, adding variety to the game.

Also,
"The first case is a case where the output of the detection signal of the first symbol position detection means is earlier than the output of the detection signal of the second symbol position detection means.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

According to this game machine, it is possible to start accepting a stop operation from the reel whose symbol position has been detected.

Also,
``When the constant speed control of the plurality of reels is executed and a detection signal of the first symbol position detection means is output, reception of the stop operation by the first stop operation means is started. ,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

With this gaming machine, the reel stopping operation can be accepted sooner than before.

Also,
"If the power is restored after a power outage in a state where the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means are not operated after the first case, the stop operation at the second stop operation means The start time of accepting the stop operation in the first stop operation means may be earlier than the start time of accepting the stop operation in the first stop operation means.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the order in which operations are accepted is different before and after the power is restored after a power outage, thereby making it possible to add variety to the game.

In the above description,
"A plurality of reels (e.g., two or more of the left reel 110, the center reel 111, and the right reel 112, or all of these reels) and
stop operation means (e.g., a left stop button 137, a center stop button 138, a right stop button 139) that are provided in one-to-one correspondence with each of the reels constituting the plurality of reels and that stop the corresponding reel that is spinning when operated in a stoppable state;
notification means (e.g., a left stop button LED 137a, a middle stop button LED 138a, a right stop button LED 139a) that are provided in one-to-one correspondence with each of the reels constituting the plurality of reels and that can execute notification (e.g., notification by a second light emission mode (a blue light emission mode)) that the corresponding rotating reel is in the stoppable state;
a reel control means (e.g., a main control unit 300) configured to be able to execute, with respect to rotation control executed for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, an acceleration control for transitioning from a stopped state to a constant speed state (e.g., the acceleration control shown in FIG. 212), a constant speed control for maintaining the constant speed state (e.g., the first constant speed control or the second constant speed control shown in FIG. 212, or a combination of the first constant speed control and the second constant speed control), and a brake control for transitioning from the constant speed state to the stopped state (e.g., the brake control shown in FIG. 212);
Equipped with
The reels constituting the plurality of reels cannot be stopped even if the stop operation means is operated when the acceleration control is being executed (for example, the stop button validity information is set only in the second constant speed control process shown in FIG. 222 );
The reel control means is a means capable of executing the brake control after transitioning to the stoppable state (for example, a state in which the index sensor detects the light-shielding piece of the target reel (step S310i shown in FIG. 222)),
A reel among the plurality of reels for which the notification is started by the notification means [for example, the left reel 110 or the center reel 111] may transition from an unstoppable state to the stoppable state [for example, at the timing of (d) or (e) shown in FIG. 238] before the notification is started [for example, at the timing of (f) shown in FIG. 238].
He explained:

According to this gaming machine, if the stop operation means is operated without waiting for the notification by the notification means, the reels may be stopped, and the player's operation may be prioritized, increasing the sense of realism of the game. be. Furthermore, the game can proceed at a good pace without the player feeling stressed. These effects are also common effects for the game machines described below, and may be hereinafter referred to as second common effects.

The certain reel may necessarily transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the notification begins (the same applies below).

Further, the notifying means may start notifying that each reel is in the stoppable state when all of the plurality of reels have transitioned to the stoppable state, and the notification means may start notifying that each reel is in the stoppable state, and It is also possible to start notifying that each reel is in the stoppable state at the time when all the stop positions are in the controllable state (the same applies below).

Also,
“The unstoppable state is a state in which the stop position of the reel cannot be controlled,
The stoppable state is a state in which the stop position of the reel can be controlled in the constant speed state [for example, when a light shielding piece is detected, it is determined that the reel has made one rotation, and the reel rotation position information is set to zero. This means that the reel stop position can be calculated by resetting the reel.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
"One of the reels constituting the plurality of reels is a first reel [e.g., the left reel 110],
The notification means is a means including a first notification means (e.g., a left stop button LED 137a),
the first notification means is means capable of executing a first notification (for example, a notification by a second light emission mode (a blue light emission mode)) indicating that the first reel is in the stoppable state,
In a fourth case [for example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 238 ], the first reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the first notification is started by the first notification means [for example, at the timing of (d) shown in FIG. 238 ],
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Note that one reel constituting the plurality of reels is a third reel [for example, the middle reel 111], and the notification means also includes a third notification means [for example, the middle stop button LED 138a]. and the third notification means is capable of executing a third notification indicating that the third reel is in the stoppable state [for example, notification by a second light emitting mode (blue light emitting mode)]. In some cases, the third reel moves from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the third notification is started by the third notification means. For example, the timing (e) shown in FIG. 238] may be used (the same applies below).

Also,
"One of the reels constituting the plurality of reels is a second reel [e.g., the right reel 112],
The notification means includes a second notification means (e.g., a right stop button LED 139a),
the second notification means is means capable of executing a second notification (for example, a notification by a second light-emitting mode (a blue light-emitting mode)) indicating that the second reel is in the stoppable state,
In the fourth case, the second notification may be started by the second notification means and the second reel may transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state (for example, at the timing of (f) shown in FIG. 238 ).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

In the fourth case, the second reel may transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state at the same time that the second notification is initiated by the second notification means.

Also,
“The second reel is a reel whose reel stop position is in a controllable state at the latest timing among the plurality of reels [for example, the timing (f) shown in FIG. 238];
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
"At the timing when the first notification is started by the first notification means [for example, the timing of (f) shown in FIG. 238], the second notification by the second notification means is also started.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Note that the timing at which the first notification is started by the first notification means and the timing at which the second notification is started by the second notification means may be the same (hereinafter the same). .

Also,
"After the fourth case, if a power interruption and restoration (for example, the power interruption and restoration shown in FIG. 232) occurs while the brake control of the second reel (for example, the right reel 112) has not been started, the second reel may transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the second notification is started by the second notification means (for example, the timing of FIG. 232(e')).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Note that among the plurality of reels, a reel [for example, the right reel 112] that is different from the certain reel [for example, the left reel 110 or the middle reel 111] for which the notification is started by the notification means is There may be a case where the state shifts from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state at the same time as the notification starts (the same applies below). That is, among the plurality of reels, a reel other than the certain reel for which the notification is started by the notification means changes from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state at the same time as the notification starts. (The same applies below.)

Furthermore, the other reel may be the last reel among the plurality of reels that has entered a state where the stop position of the reel can be controlled (the same applies below).

Further, at the timing when the notification is started for the certain reel, the notification for the other reel may also be started (the same applies hereinafter).In other words, the notification for the certain reel in the notification means may be started. The start timing of the notification and the start timing of the notification regarding the other reel in the notification means may be the same timing (the same applies below).

Also,
"The first reel has multiple types of designs,
A second reel with multiple types of designs;
a first reel rotation drive means for rotating the first reel;
a second reel rotation drive means for rotating the second reel;
a first stop operation means that accepts a stop operation for stopping the rotating first reel;
a second stop operation means that receives a stop operation for stopping the rotating second reel;
a first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
a first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
Regarding the rotation control performed on each of the plurality of reels including the first reel and the second reel, acceleration control to shift to a constant speed state, constant speed control to maintain the constant speed state, and stop a reel control means configured to be able to execute stop control for transitioning to the state;
a stop operation acceptance determination means for determining whether or not the stop operation can be accepted in any one of the plurality of stop operation means including the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means;
Stop operation control means for controlling any one of the plurality of stop operation means based on the result of the determination by the stop operation acceptance determination means;
a first operation reception display means capable of displaying a first display indicating that the first stop operation means is ready for operation;
a first operation reception display means capable of displaying the first display indicating that the second stop operation means is ready for operation;
A game machine comprising:
In the second case, the time when the first stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation is earlier than the time when the first operation acceptance display means starts displaying the first display.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

This gaming machine can stop faster than conventional gaming machines, shortening the time between waits.

Also,
"In the second case, the time when the second stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation is the same as the time when the second operation acceptance display means starts displaying the first display,"
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, the player feels that the time to start operating the first stop operation means is earlier than that of the second stop operation means.

Also,
"The timing at which the first operation reception display means starts displaying the first display is the same as the time when the second operation reception display means starts displaying the first display,"
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

With this gaming machine, the player feels that the operation of the first stop operation means begins earlier than the second stop operation means.

Also,
"When a power outage occurs after the second case, the second stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation earlier than the second operation acceptance display means starts displaying the first display.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, the operating means that can be operated faster than the first display differs before and after the power is restored, adding variety to the game.

In the above description,
"A plurality of reels (e.g., two or more of the left reel 110, the center reel 111, and the right reel 112, or all of these reels) and
stop operation means (e.g., a left stop button 137, a center stop button 138, a right stop button 139) that are provided in one-to-one correspondence with each of the reels constituting the plurality of reels and that stop the corresponding reel that is spinning when operated in a stoppable state;
notification means (e.g., a left stop button LED 137a, a middle stop button LED 138a, a right stop button LED 139a) that are provided in one-to-one correspondence with each of the reels constituting the plurality of reels and that can execute notification (e.g., notification by a second light emission mode (a blue light emission mode)) that the corresponding rotating reel is in the stoppable state;
a reel control means (e.g., a main control unit 300) configured to be able to execute, with respect to rotation control executed for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, an acceleration control for transitioning from a stopped state to a constant speed state (e.g., the acceleration control shown in FIG. 212), a constant speed control for maintaining the constant speed state (e.g., the first constant speed control or the second constant speed control shown in FIG. 212, or a combination of the first constant speed control and the second constant speed control), and a brake control for transitioning from the constant speed state to the stopped state (e.g., the brake control shown in FIG. 212);
Equipped with
The reels constituting the plurality of reels cannot be stopped even if the stop operation means is operated when the acceleration control is being executed (for example, the stop button validity information is set only in the second constant speed control process shown in FIG. 222 );
The reel control means is a means capable of executing the brake control after transitioning to the stoppable state (for example, a state in which the index sensor detects the light-shielding piece of the target reel (step S310i shown in FIG. 222)),
Among the plurality of reels, a certain reel (e.g., the left reel 110 or the center reel 111) for which the notification is started by the notification means may transition from an unstoppable state to the stoppable state (e.g., at timing (d) or (e) shown in FIG. 238) before the notification is started (e.g., at timing (f) shown in FIG. 238),
When the brake control of the certain reel is started (timing (h1) shown in FIG. 238) before the notification for the certain reel (hereinafter referred to as "certain notification") is executed, the certain notification is not executed at the time when the notification for a reel other than the certain reel [for example, the right reel 112] is executed (timing (f) to (h3) shown in FIG. 238).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He explained:

In addition to the second common effect, this gaming machine does not issue the notification about the reel that corresponds to the stop operation means that was operated early on, so as to avoid misleading the player.

In addition, the brake control of a certain reel [e.g., the left reel 110 or the middle reel 111] is started before the notification [e.g., the notification by the second light emission mode (blue light emission mode) of the left stop button LED 137a or the middle stop button LED 138a] is executed, and the notification is not executed until the constant speed control of the certain reel is started [e.g., the timing of (f') in FIG. 238].

In other words, the brake control of the certain reel is started before the notification means issues a notification that the certain reel that has transitioned to the stoppable state is in the stoppable state [for example, at the timing of (h1) shown in FIG. 238], and the notification is not executed until the constant speed control of the certain reel is started [for example, at the timing of (f') in FIG. 238].

Note that if the brake control of the certain reel is started before the notification means executes the notification that the certain reel that has transitioned to the stoppable state is in the stoppable state, the certain reel is in the stoppable state. The notification is not executed until after the constant speed control of all of the plurality of reels including the reel is started. Alternatively, if the brake control of the certain reel is started before the notification means executes the notification that the certain reel that has transitioned to the stoppable state is in the stoppable state, the certain reel is in the stoppable state. The notification will not be executed unless the stop positions of all of the plurality of reels including the reel are brought into a controllable state. Alternatively, if the brake control of the certain reel is started before the notification means executes the notification that the certain reel that has transitioned to the stoppable state is in the stoppable state, the certain reel is in the stoppable state. The notification is not executed unless all of the plurality of reels including the reel that is in the unstoppable state transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state.

In addition, if the brake control of a certain reel that has transitioned to the stoppable state is started before the notification means issues a notification that the certain reel is in the stoppable state, the notification will not be issued until the brake control of all reels other than the certain reel among the multiple reels is completed.

Also,
"The above-mentioned unstoppable state means a state in which the reel's stopping position cannot be controlled,
The stoppable state is a state in which the stopping position of the reel can be controlled in the constant speed state (for example, when a light-shielding piece is detected, it is determined that the reel has made one rotation, the rotational position information of the reel is reset to zero, and the stopping position of the reel can be calculated).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
“One reel constituting the plurality of reels is a first reel [for example, left reel 110],
The notification means includes a first notification means [for example, the left stop button LED 137a],
The first notification means is a means capable of executing a first notification indicating that the first reel is in the stoppable state [for example, notification by a second light emission mode (blue light emission mode)]. ,
In a certain game in the fourth case [for example, the case shown in FIG. 238] [for example, a game in which the reels start rotating from the timing (a) shown in FIG. 238], the first reel is before the first notification is started by the first notification means, transitioning from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state [for example, the timing of (d) shown in FIG. 238];
In the certain game, the brake control of the first reel is started before the first notification is started by the first notification means [for example, in (d) shown in FIG. timing] and the first notification by the first notification means is not executed in the certain game,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
"One of the reels constituting the plurality of reels is a second reel [e.g., the right reel 112],
The notification means includes a second notification means (e.g., a right stop button LED 139a),
the second notification means is means capable of executing a second notification (for example, a notification by a second light-emitting mode (a blue light-emitting mode)) indicating that the second reel is in the stoppable state,
In the fourth case, the second notification may be started by the second notification means and the second reel may transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state (for example, at the timing of (f) shown in FIG. 238 ).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"The second reel is the reel that has transitioned to a state in which the stop position of the reel can be controlled at the latest timing among the plurality of reels [for example, the timing of (f) shown in FIG. 238].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"At the timing when the first notification is started by the first notification means [for example, the timing (f) shown in FIG. 238], the second notification by the second notification means is also started.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
"After the fourth case, if a power interruption and restoration (e.g., power interruption and restoration shown in FIG. 232) occurs while the brake control of the second reel (e.g., the right reel 112) has not been started, the second reel may transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the second notification is started by the second notification means (e.g., the timing of FIG. 232(e')).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"The first reel has multiple types of designs,
A second reel with multiple types of designs;
a first reel rotation drive means for rotating the first reel;
a second reel rotation drive means for rotating the second reel;
a first stop operation means that accepts a stop operation for stopping the rotating first reel;
a second stop operation means that receives a stop operation for stopping the rotating second reel;
a first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
a first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
Regarding the rotation control performed on each of the plurality of reels including the first reel and the second reel, acceleration control to shift to a constant speed state, constant speed control to maintain the constant speed state, and stop a reel control means configured to be able to execute stop control for transitioning to the state;
a stop operation acceptance determination means for determining whether or not the stop operation can be accepted in any one of the plurality of stop operation means including the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means;
Stop operation control means for controlling any one of the plurality of stop operation means based on the result of the determination by the stop operation acceptance determination means;
a first operation reception display means capable of displaying a first display indicating that the first stop operation means is ready for operation;
a first operation reception display means capable of displaying the first display indicating that the second stop operation means is ready for operation;
A game machine comprising:
In the second case, the time when the first stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation is earlier than the time when the first operation acceptance display means starts displaying the first display;
In the second case, if the first stop operation means is operated before the first operation acceptance display means starts displaying the first display, the game in the second case the first display by the first operation reception display means is not displayed;
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

This gaming machine will not mislead players.

Also,
"In the second case, the start time of the acceptance of the stop operation by the second stop operation means is the same as the start time of the display of the first display by the second operation acceptance display means.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, the player feels that the operation of the first stop operation means begins earlier than the second stop operation means.

Also,
"The display start time of the first display by the first operation reception display means is the same as the display start time of the first display by the second operation reception display means.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

According to this game machine, the player feels that the time to start operating the first stop operation means is earlier than that of the second stop operation means.

Also,
"If the power is restored after a power outage after the second case, the time when the second stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation is indicated in the first display by the second operation reception display means. It may be earlier than the starting time.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the operating means that can be operated earlier than the first display are different before and after the power is restored after a power outage, thereby making it possible to add variety to the game.

In the above description,
"A plurality of reels (e.g., two or more of the left reel 110, the center reel 111, and the right reel 112, or all of these reels) and
stop operation means (e.g., a left stop button 137, a center stop button 138, a right stop button 139) that are provided in one-to-one correspondence with each of the reels constituting the plurality of reels and that stop the corresponding reel that is spinning when operated in a stoppable state;
notification means (e.g., a left stop button LED 137a, a middle stop button LED 138a, a right stop button LED 139a) that are provided in one-to-one correspondence with each of the reels constituting the plurality of reels and that can execute notification (e.g., notification by a second light emission mode (a blue light emission mode)) that the corresponding rotating reel is in the stoppable state;
a reel control means (e.g., a main control unit 300) configured to be able to execute, with respect to rotation control executed for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, an acceleration control for transitioning from a stopped state to a constant speed state (e.g., the acceleration control shown in FIG. 212), a constant speed control for maintaining the constant speed state (e.g., the first constant speed control or the second constant speed control shown in FIG. 212, or a combination of the first constant speed control and the second constant speed control), and a brake control for transitioning from the constant speed state to the stopped state (e.g., the brake control shown in FIG. 212);
Equipped with
The reels constituting the plurality of reels cannot be stopped even if the stop operation means is operated when the acceleration control is being executed (for example, the stop button validity information is set only in the second constant speed control process shown in FIG. 222 );
The reel control means is a means capable of executing the brake control after transitioning to the stoppable state (for example, a state in which the index sensor detects the light-shielding piece of the target reel (step S310i shown in FIG. 222)),
Among the plurality of reels, a certain reel (e.g., the left reel 110 or the center reel 111) for which the notification is started by the notification means may transition from an unstoppable state to the stoppable state (e.g., at timing (d) or (e) shown in FIG. 238) before the notification is started (e.g., at timing (f) shown in FIG. 238),
Before the notification [e.g., notification by the second light-emitting mode (blue light-emitting mode)] for a reel [e.g., the right reel 112] among the plurality of reels is started [e.g., the timing of (f) shown in FIG. 238 ], the other reel may be in the unstoppable state, and while the notification [e.g., notification by the second light-emitting mode (blue light-emitting mode)] is being executed [e.g., during the period started at the timing of (f) shown in FIG. 238 ], the other reel is in the stoppable state.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He explained:

That is, notification that a reel other than the certain reel among the plurality of reels [for example, the right reel 112] is in the stoppable state [for example, by the second light emitting mode (blue light emitting mode)] Before [notification] is started by the notification means [for example, the right stop button LED 139a] [for example, the timing (f) shown in FIG. 238], the other reel may be in the unstoppable state, While the notification that the reel is in the stoppable state [for example, notification by the second light emitting mode (blue light emitting mode)] is executed by the notification means [for example, the right stop button LED 139a] [for example, the 238], the other reel is in the stoppable state.

In addition, before the notification means starts to notify that the other reel is in the stoppable state, the other reel may always be in the non-stoppable state.

This gaming machine achieves the second common effect described above, but also allows beginners to wait for the notification before operating the stop operation means, allowing them to play calmly and with the notification, they can play with peace of mind.

Also,
"The above-mentioned unstoppable state means a state in which the reel's stopping position cannot be controlled,
The stoppable state is a state in which the stopping position of the reel can be controlled in the constant speed state (for example, when a light-shielding piece is detected, it is determined that the reel has made one rotation, the rotational position information of the reel is reset to zero, and the stopping position of the reel can be calculated).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"One of the reels constituting the plurality of reels is a first reel [e.g., the left reel 110],
One of the reels is a second reel [e.g., a center reel 111],
The notification means includes a first notification means (e.g., a left stop button LED 137a) and a second notification means (e.g., a middle stop button LED 137b),
the first notification means is means capable of executing a first notification (for example, a notification by a second light emission mode (a blue light emission mode)) indicating that the first reel is in the stoppable state,
the second notification means is means capable of executing a second notification (for example, a notification by a second light-emitting mode (a blue light-emitting mode)) indicating that the second reel is in the stoppable state,
In a fourth case, the first reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the first notification is started by the first notification means,
In the fourth case, before the second notification is started, the second reel is in the non-stop state, and after the second notification is started, the second reel is in the stoppable state.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
“In the fourth case, the second notification may be started by the second notification means and the second reel may shift from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state [for example, as shown in FIG. 238 (f) timing],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
"The second reel is the reel that has transitioned to a state in which the stop position of the reel can be controlled at the latest timing among the plurality of reels [for example, the timing of (f) shown in FIG. 238].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"At the timing when the first notification is started by the first notification means [for example, the timing (f) shown in FIG. 238], the second notification by the second notification means is also started.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
"After the fourth case, if a power interruption and restoration (for example, the power interruption and restoration shown in FIG. 232) occurs while the brake control of the second reel (for example, the right reel 112) has not been started, the second reel may transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the second notification is started by the second notification means (for example, the timing of FIG. 232(e')).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
“A first reel rotation drive means for rotating the first reel;
a second reel rotation drive means for rotating the second reel;
a first stop operation means that accepts a stop operation for stopping the rotating first reel;
a second stop operation means that receives a stop operation for stopping the rotating second reel;
a first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
a first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
Regarding the rotation control performed on each of the plurality of reels including the first reel and the second reel, acceleration control to shift to a constant speed state, constant speed control to maintain the constant speed state, and stop a reel control means configured to be able to execute stop control for transitioning to the state;
a stop operation acceptance determination means for determining whether or not the stop operation can be accepted in any one of the plurality of stop operation means including the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means;
Stop operation control means for controlling any one of the plurality of stop operation means based on the result of the determination by the stop operation acceptance determination means;
a first operation reception display means capable of displaying a first display indicating that the first stop operation means is ready for operation;
a first operation reception display means capable of displaying the first display indicating that the second stop operation means is ready for operation;
A game machine comprising:
In the second case, the time when the first stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation is earlier than the time when the first operation acceptance display means starts displaying the first display;
If an operation is performed on the second stop operation means during the third period in the second case, the operation on the second stop operation means becomes invalid;
When the second stop operation means is operated during the fourth period after the third period in the second case, the operation on the second stop operation means becomes effective;
The third period is a period in which the first display is not displayed by the second operation reception display means,
The fourth period is a period during which the first display is displayed by the second operation reception display means,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, the display of the second operation reception display means indicates a period in which only the first stop operation means of the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means is accepted, and a period in which both are accepted. It may be possible to suggest.

Also,
"In the second case, the time when the second stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation is the same as the time when the second operation acceptance display means starts displaying the first display,"
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

With this gaming machine, the player feels that the operation of the first stop operation means begins earlier than the second stop operation means.

Also,
"The display start time of the first display by the first operation reception display means is the same as the display start time of the first display by the second operation reception display means.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, the player feels that the operation of the first stop operation means begins earlier than the second stop operation means.

Also,
"When a power outage occurs after the second case, the second stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation earlier than the second operation acceptance display means starts displaying the first display.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, the operating means that can be operated faster than the first display differs before and after the power is restored, adding variety to the game.

In the above description,
``Multiple reels and
A stop operation means is provided in a one-to-one correspondence for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, and is operated in a stopable state to stop the rotating corresponding reel [for example, a left stop button 137, middle stop button 138, right stop button 139],
It is provided in a one-to-one correspondence for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, and provides notification that the rotating corresponding reel is in the stoppable state [for example, by a second light emitting mode (blue light emitting mode)] notification means [for example, left stop button LED 137a, middle stop button LED 138a, right stop button LED 139a],
Regarding the rotation control executed for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, acceleration control to transition from a stopped state to a constant speed state [for example, acceleration control shown in FIG. 212], constant speed to maintain the constant speed state control [for example, the first constant speed control or the second constant speed control shown in FIG. 212, or a combination of the first constant speed control and the second constant speed control], and brake control for transitioning from the constant speed state to the stopped state A reel control means [for example, the main control unit 300] configured to be able to execute [for example, the brake control shown in FIG. 212];
An internal winning combination determining unit that determines an internal winning combination [for example, the main control unit 300 that executes the winning combination internal lottery process shown in FIG. 214],
A production means [for example, production image display device 157 (liquid crystal display device)] capable of executing a suggestion production that suggests the determined internal winning combination [for example, a small role suggestion production shown in FIG. 237(A)]; Prepare,
Even if the stop operation means is operated, the reels constituting the plurality of reels cannot be stopped if the acceleration control is being executed [for example, the second constant speed control shown in FIG. Stop button enable information is set only during processing],
The reel control means is a means capable of executing the brake control after transitioning to the stoppable state [for example, the state in which the index sensor detects the light shielding piece of the target reel (step S310i shown in FIG. 222)],
Among the plurality of reels, for a certain reel [for example, the left reel 110 or the middle reel 111] on which the notification is started by the notification means, the notification is started [for example, in (f) shown in FIG. 236]. The unstoppable state may transition to the stoppable state before [for example, timing (d) or timing (e) shown in FIG. 236],
The presentation means may perform the suggestion presentation [for example, the small role suggestion presentation shown in (a1) in FIG. 237(A)] before the certain reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state. When starting execution, there is a method [for example, the timing of (a) shown in FIG. 236].
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

According to this game machine, the second common effect described above is more effectively achieved. That is, by the above-mentioned suggestion effect, it is possible to grasp the discard game, and in the case of a discard game, it is possible to quickly finish the discard game by performing a stop operation at a quick timing. In addition, by the above-mentioned suggestion effect, it is possible to grasp the game of collecting small winning combinations, and in the game of collecting small winning combinations, it becomes possible to operate the stop operation means with care so as not to make an operation error.

The presentation means may be a means for starting the execution of the suggestive presentation at the same time that the acceleration control of the certain reel is started, or may be a means for starting the execution of the suggestive presentation when the certain reel starts to rotate.

The presentation means may also be a means for always starting the execution of the suggestion presentation before the certain reel transitions from the non-stoppable state to the stoppable state.

Also,
"The above-mentioned unstoppable state means a state in which the reel's stopping position cannot be controlled,
The stoppable state is a state in which the stopping position of the reel can be controlled in the constant speed state (for example, when a light-shielding piece is detected, it is determined that the reel has made one rotation, the rotational position information of the reel is reset to zero, and the stopping position of the reel can be calculated).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"One of the reels constituting the plurality of reels is a first reel [e.g., the left reel 110],
The notification means is a means including a first notification means (e.g., a left stop button LED 137a),
the first notification means is means capable of executing a first notification (for example, a notification by a second light emission mode (a blue light emission mode)) indicating that the first reel is in the stoppable state,
In a fifth case (for example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 236), the first reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the first notification is started by the first notification means (for example, at the timing of (d) shown in FIG. 236),
The effect means is a means for starting the execution of the suggestion effect before the first reel transitions from the non-stoppable state to the stoppable state in the fifth case (for example, at the timing (a) shown in FIG. 236).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"One of the reels constituting the plurality of reels is a second reel [e.g., the right reel 112],
The notification means includes a second notification means (e.g., a right stop button LED 139a),
the second notification means is means capable of executing a second notification (for example, a notification by a second light-emitting mode (a blue light-emitting mode)) indicating that the second reel is in the stoppable state,
In the fifth case, the second notification may be started by the second notification means and the second reel may transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state (for example, at the timing of (f) shown in FIG. 236 ).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
“The second reel is a reel whose reel stop position has been brought into a controllable state at the latest timing among the plurality of reels [for example, the timing (f) shown in FIG. 236];
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
"At the timing when the first notification is started by the first notification means [for example, the timing (f) shown in FIG. 236], the second notification by the second notification means is also started.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“After the fifth case, a power failure recovery [for example, power failure recovery shown in FIG. 232] occurs while the brake control of the second reel [for example, right reel 112] has not been started. In this case, the second reel may transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the second notification is started by the second notification means [for example, Timing of FIG. 232(e')],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
"The first reel has multiple designs,
A second reel having a plurality of different patterns;
a first reel rotation drive means for rotating the first reel;
A second reel rotation drive means for rotating the second reel;
a first stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the first reel that is rotating;
a second stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the second reel that is rotating;
a first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying a display position of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
a first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying a display position of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
a reel control means configured to execute, with respect to rotation control executed on each of a plurality of reels including the first reel and the second reel, an acceleration control for transitioning to a constant speed state, a constant speed control for maintaining the constant speed state, and a stop control for transitioning to a stopped state;
a stop operation acceptance determination means for determining whether or not the stop operation can be accepted by any one of a plurality of stop operation means including the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means;
a stop operation control means for controlling any one of the plurality of stop operation means based on a result of the determination by the stop operation reception determination means;
a first operation acceptance display means capable of displaying a first indication indicating that the first stop operation means is capable of accepting an operation;
a first operation acceptance display means capable of displaying the first indication indicating that the second stop operation means is capable of accepting an operation;
A gaming machine equipped with
In a second case, a start time of acceptance of the stop operation by the first stop operation means is earlier than a start time of display of the first display by the first operation acceptance display means,
An internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination;
A presentation means capable of executing a suggestion presentation suggesting the determined internal winning combination;
Equipped with
The performance means may execute the suggestion performance in the second case,
In the second case, the execution start time of the suggestion effect by the effecting means is earlier than the start time of the acceptance of the stop operation by the first stop operation means.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

This gaming machine allows you to quickly complete the discard game while preventing erroneous operation in the small win recovery game.

Also,
"In the second case, the time when the second stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation is the same as the time when the second operation acceptance display means starts displaying the first display,"
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

With this gaming machine, the player feels that the operation of the first stop operation means begins earlier than the second stop operation means.

Also,
"The timing at which the first operation reception display means starts displaying the first display is the same as the time when the second operation reception display means starts displaying the first display,"
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

With this gaming machine, the player feels that the operation of the first stop operation means begins earlier than the second stop operation means.

Also,
"If the power is restored after a power outage after the second case, the time when the second stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation is indicated in the first display by the second operation reception display means. It may be earlier than the starting time.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

With this gaming machine, the operating means that can be operated faster than the first display differs before and after the power is restored, adding variety to the game.

In the above description,
"A plurality of reels (e.g., two or more of the left reel 110, the center reel 111, and the right reel 112, or all of these reels) and
stop operation means (e.g., a left stop button 137, a center stop button 138, a right stop button 139) that are provided in one-to-one correspondence with each of the reels constituting the plurality of reels and that stop the corresponding reel that is spinning when operated in a stoppable state;
notification means (e.g., a left stop button LED 137a, a middle stop button LED 138a, a right stop button LED 139a) that are provided in one-to-one correspondence with each of the reels constituting the plurality of reels and that can execute notification (e.g., notification by a second light emission mode (a blue light emission mode)) that the corresponding rotating reel is in the stoppable state;
a reel control means (e.g., a main control unit 300) configured to be able to execute, with respect to rotation control executed for each of the reels constituting the plurality of reels, an acceleration control for transitioning from a stopped state to a constant speed state (e.g., the acceleration control shown in FIG. 212), a constant speed control for maintaining the constant speed state (e.g., the first constant speed control or the second constant speed control shown in FIG. 212, or a combination of the first constant speed control and the second constant speed control), and a brake control for transitioning from the constant speed state to the stopped state (e.g., the brake control shown in FIG. 212);
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, the main control unit 300 which executes the winning combination internal lottery process shown in FIG. 214 ) for determining an internal winning combination;
A presentation means (e.g., a presentation image display device 157 (liquid crystal display device)) capable of executing an instruction presentation (e.g., a navigation presentation shown in FIG. 237(B)) capable of stopping the plurality of reels in a stopping mode corresponding to the determined internal winning combination;
Equipped with
The reels constituting the plurality of reels cannot be stopped even if the stop operation means is operated when the acceleration control is being executed (for example, the stop button validity information is set only in the second constant speed control process shown in FIG. 222 );
The reel control means is a means capable of executing the brake control after transitioning to the stoppable state (for example, a state in which the index sensor detects the light-shielding piece of the target reel (step S310i shown in FIG. 222)),
Among the plurality of reels, a certain reel (e.g., the left reel 110 or the center reel 111) for which the notification is started by the notification means may transition from an unstoppable state to the stoppable state (e.g., at timing (d) or (e) shown in FIG. 236) before the notification is started (e.g., at timing (f) shown in FIG. 236),
The performance means is a means for starting the execution of a performance including an operation instruction of the stop operation means corresponding to the certain reel among the stop operation means [for example, a navigation performance shown in (a2) in FIG. 237(B)] as the execution of the instruction performance before the certain reel transitions from the non-stoppable state to the stoppable state [for example, the timing of (a) shown in FIG. 236].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He explained:

According to this game machine, there are other effects in addition to the second common effect mentioned above. That is, not only can a quick stop operation be performed while following the instruction performance, but even if a certain stop operation means is operated by mistake, the reel corresponding to that certain stop operation means will be in the unstoppable state. In this case, the player does not have to lose his chance to win a prize.

Note that, before the certain reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state, the effect means performs a command corresponding to the certain reel of the stop operation means in order to execute the instruction effect. It may also be a means for always starting execution of a performance including an operation instruction for the stop operation means.

Also,
``The order in which each reel constituting the plurality of reels moves from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state [for example, in the example shown in FIG. 236, the order is left reel → middle reel → right reel]; The order of operating the stop operation means provided for each reel constituting the plurality of reels as instructed by the instruction performance [for example, in the navigation performance shown in FIG. 237(B), the sequence is right reel → middle reel → left reel order] may be different from
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

It is also possible that the order in which each of the reels constituting the plurality of reels transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state coincides with the order in which the stop operation means provided for each of the reels constituting the plurality of reels is operated as instructed by the instruction performance.

Also,
“The unstoppable state is a state in which the stop position of the reel cannot be controlled,
The stoppable state is a state in which the stop position of the reel can be controlled in the constant speed state [for example, when a light shielding piece is detected, it is determined that the reel has made one rotation, and the reel rotation position information is set to zero. It is possible to reset the reel and calculate the stop position of the reel.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
"One of the reels constituting the plurality of reels is a first reel [e.g., the left reel 110],
The notification means is a means including a first notification means (e.g., a left stop button LED 137a),
the first notification means is means capable of executing a first notification (for example, a notification by a second light emission mode (a blue light emission mode)) indicating that the first reel is in the stoppable state,
In a fifth case (for example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 236), the first reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the first notification is started by the first notification means (for example, at the timing of (d) shown in FIG. 236),
The presentation means is a means for starting, in the fifth case, the execution of a presentation including an operation instruction of the stop operation means corresponding to the certain reel among the stop operation means [for example, the navigation presentation shown in (a2) in FIG. 237(B)] as the execution of the instruction presentation, before the first reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state [for example, the timing of (a) shown in FIG. 236].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"One of the reels constituting the plurality of reels is a second reel [e.g., the right reel 112],
The notification means includes a second notification means (e.g., a right stop button LED 139a),
the second notification means is means capable of executing a second notification (for example, a notification by a second light-emitting mode (a blue light-emitting mode)) indicating that the second reel is in the stoppable state,
In the fifth case, the second notification may be started by the second notification means and the second reel may transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state (for example, at the timing of (f) shown in FIG. 236 ).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"The second reel is the reel that has transitioned to a state in which the stop position of the reel can be controlled at the latest timing among the plurality of reels [for example, the timing of (f) shown in FIG. 236].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"At the timing when the first notification is started by the first notification means [for example, the timing (f) shown in FIG. 236], the second notification by the second notification means is also started.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
"After the fifth case, if a power interruption and restoration (e.g., the power interruption and restoration shown in FIG. 232) occurs while the brake control of the second reel (e.g., the right reel 112) has not been started, the second reel may transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the second notification is started by the second notification means (e.g., the timing of FIG. 232(e')).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"The first reel has multiple designs,
A second reel having a plurality of different patterns;
a first reel rotation drive means for rotating the first reel;
A second reel rotation drive means for rotating the second reel;
a first stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the first reel that is rotating;
a second stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the second reel that is rotating;
a first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying a display position of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
a first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying a display position of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
a reel control means configured to execute, with respect to rotation control executed on each of a plurality of reels including the first reel and the second reel, an acceleration control for transitioning to a constant speed state, a constant speed control for maintaining the constant speed state, and a stop control for transitioning to a stopped state;
a stop operation acceptance determination means for determining whether or not the stop operation can be accepted by any one of a plurality of stop operation means including the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means;
a stop operation control means for controlling any one of the plurality of stop operation means based on a result of the determination by the stop operation reception determination means;
a first operation acceptance display means capable of displaying a first indication indicating that the first stop operation means is capable of accepting an operation;
a first operation acceptance display means capable of displaying the first indication indicating that the second stop operation means is capable of accepting an operation;
A gaming machine equipped with
In a second case, a start time of acceptance of the stop operation by the first stop operation means is earlier than a start time of display of the first display by the first operation acceptance display means,
An internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination;
a presentation means for executing a presentation for stopping the reels in a stop pattern corresponding to the determined internal winning combination;
Equipped with
The performance means may execute the instruction performance in the second case,
The instruction performance in the second case may include an instruction to operate the first stop operation means.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

This machine allows you to complete the navigation game quickly.

Also,
"In the second case, the time when the second stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation is the same as the time when the second operation acceptance display means starts displaying the first display,"
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

With this gaming machine, the player feels that the operation of the first stop operation means begins earlier than the second stop operation means.

Also,
"The timing at which the first operation reception display means starts displaying the first display is the same as the time when the second operation reception display means starts displaying the first display,"
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, the player feels that the time to start operating the first stop operation means is earlier than that of the second stop operation means.

Also,
"When a power outage occurs after the second case, the second stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation earlier than the second operation acceptance display means starts displaying the first display.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

According to this gaming machine, the operating means that can be operated earlier than the first display are different before and after the power is restored after a power outage, thereby making it possible to add variety to the game.

In the above description,
"A plurality of reels (e.g., two or more of the left reel 110, the center reel 111, and the right reel 112, or all of these reels) and
stop operation means (e.g., a left stop button 137, a center stop button 138, a right stop button 139) that are provided in one-to-one correspondence with each of the reels constituting the plurality of reels and that stop the corresponding reel that is spinning when operated in a stoppable state;
notification means (e.g., a left stop button LED 137a, a middle stop button LED 138a, a right stop button LED 139a) that are provided in one-to-one correspondence with each of the reels constituting the plurality of reels and that can execute notification (e.g., notification by a second light emission mode (a blue light emission mode)) that the corresponding rotating reel is in the stoppable state;
a reel control means (e.g., a main control unit 300) configured to be able to execute, with respect to rotation control executed for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, an acceleration control for transitioning from a stopped state to a constant speed state (e.g., the acceleration control shown in FIG. 212), a constant speed control for maintaining the constant speed state (e.g., the first constant speed control or the second constant speed control shown in FIG. 212, or a combination of the first constant speed control and the second constant speed control), and a brake control for transitioning from the constant speed state to the stopped state (e.g., the brake control shown in FIG. 212);
Equipped with
The reels constituting the plurality of reels cannot be stopped even if the stop operation means is operated when the acceleration control is being executed (for example, the stop button validity information is set only in the second constant speed control process shown in FIG. 222 );
The reel control means is a means capable of executing the brake control after transitioning to the stoppable state (for example, a state in which the index sensor detects the light-shielding piece of the target reel (step S310i shown in FIG. 222)),
Among the plurality of reels, a certain reel (e.g., the left reel 110 or the center reel 111) for which the notification is started by the notification means may transition from an unstoppable state to the stoppable state (e.g., at timing (d) or (e) shown in FIG. 240) before the notification is started (e.g., at timing (f) shown in FIG. 240),
The reel control means is a means capable of executing a reel effect (for example, a reel action (first reel effect) or a simulated game (second reel effect)),
The reel control means is a means capable of executing random delay control for randomly delaying the start of rotation of each of the reels constituting the plurality of reels after the execution of the reel effect (for example, executed between timing (i) and timing (f') shown in FIG. 240 or FIG. 241 );
Among the reels that have been subjected to the random delay control and started to rotate, a reel other than the certain reel [for example, the right reel 112] may transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the notification for the other reel is started [for example, the timing of (f') shown in FIG. 240 or FIG. 241].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He explained:

In other words, the random delay control is performed on each of the reels constituting the plurality of reels on which the reel effect is executed, and among the plurality of reels that have started to rotate, a reel other than the certain reel on which the notification is started by the notification means [for example, the right reel 112] may transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the notification is started [for example, at the timing of (f') shown in FIG. 240 or FIG. 241].

According to this game machine, even if the game machine is equipped with random delay control, the second common effect described above can be achieved, and furthermore, the reel situation changes with the random delay control in between, It can add variety to the game.

The reel effect may be such that the spinning reels appear to stop.

Also,
“The reel performance is a performance of a pseudo-game [for example, the pseudo-game shown in FIG. 240] that appears to have stopped in response to the operation of the stop operation means,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“The unstoppable state is a state in which the stop position of the reel cannot be controlled,
The stoppable state is a state in which the stop position of the reel can be controlled in the constant speed state [for example, when a light shielding piece is detected, it is determined that the reel has made one rotation, and the reel rotation position information is set to zero. This means that the reel stop position can be calculated by resetting the reel.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
"One of the reels constituting the plurality of reels is a first reel [e.g., the left reel 110],
One of the reels constituting the plurality of reels is a second reel [e.g., the right reel 112],
The notification means includes a first notification means (e.g., the left stop button LED 137a) and a second notification means,
the first notification means is means capable of executing a first notification (for example, a notification by a second light emission mode (a blue light emission mode)) indicating that the first reel is in the stoppable state,
the second notification means is means capable of executing a second notification (for example, a notification by a second light-emitting mode (a blue light-emitting mode)) indicating that the second reel is in the stoppable state,
In a sixth case (e.g., the case of the example shown in FIG. 240 or FIG. 241), the first reel (e.g., the left reel 110) transitions from the non-stoppable state to the stoppable state (e.g., the timing of (d) shown in FIG. 240 or FIG. 241) before the first notification is started by the first notification means, and then the reel effect (e.g., a pseudo effect or a reel action) is executed,
In the sixth case, the random delay control is performed following the reel presentation [for example, between timing (i) and timing (f') shown in FIG. 240 or FIG. 241], and the second reel [for example, the right reel 112] that has started to rotate transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the second notification begins [for example, at timing (f') shown in FIG. 240 or FIG. 241],
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
“After the random delay control in the sixth case is performed, the first notification is started by the first notification means and the first reel changes from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state. [For example, the timing (d') shown in FIG. 240 or 241]
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Note that the first reel, which has started rotating after the random delay control in the sixth case, is brought out of the unstoppable state at the same time as the second notification is started by the second notification means. There may be a transition to the stoppable state.

Also,
"The first reel is a reel whose reel stop position is brought into a controllable state at the latest timing among the plurality of reels [for example, the timing (d') shown in FIG. 240 or FIG. 241]. is,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
``At the timing when the first notification is started by the first notification means [for example, the timing (f) shown in FIG. 240, or the timing (d') shown in FIG. 240 or 241], the The second notification by the second notification means is also started;
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“After the sixth case, a power failure recovery [for example, power failure recovery shown in FIG. 232] occurs while the brake control of the second reel [for example, the right reel 112] has not started. In this case, the second reel may transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the second notification is started by the second notification means [e.g. Timing of FIG. 232(e')],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
"The first reel has multiple designs,
A second reel having a plurality of different patterns;
a first reel rotation drive means for rotating the first reel;
A second reel rotation drive means for rotating the second reel;
a first stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the first reel that is rotating;
a second stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the second reel that is rotating;
a first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying a display position of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
a first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying a display position of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
a reel control means configured to execute, with respect to rotation control executed on each of a plurality of reels including the first reel and the second reel, an acceleration control for transitioning to a constant speed state, a constant speed control for maintaining the constant speed state, and a stop control for transitioning to a stopped state;
a stop operation acceptance determination means for determining whether or not the stop operation can be accepted by any one of a plurality of stop operation means including the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means;
a stop operation control means for controlling any one of the plurality of stop operation means based on a result of the determination by the stop operation reception determination means;
a first operation acceptance display means capable of displaying a first indication indicating that the first stop operation means is capable of accepting an operation;
a first operation acceptance display means capable of displaying the first indication indicating that the second stop operation means is capable of accepting an operation;
A gaming machine equipped with
In a second case, a start time of acceptance of the stop operation by the first stop operation means is earlier than a start time of display of the first display by the first operation acceptance display means,
the reel control means is means capable of executing random delay control for randomly delaying the start of rotation of each of the plurality of reels,
When the random delay control is executed after the third game in which the second case occurs, in a fourth game following the third game, a timing at which the second stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation may be earlier than a timing at which the second operation acceptance display means starts displaying the first display.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, the start times of acceptance of each stop operation means for the third game and the fourth game can be made different, adding variety to the game.

Also,
"In the second case, the start time of the acceptance of the stop operation by the second stop operation means is the same as the start time of the display of the first display by the second operation acceptance display means.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

According to this game machine, the player feels that the time to start operating the first stop operation means is earlier than that of the second stop operation means.

Also,
"The timing at which the first operation reception display means starts displaying the first display is the same as the time when the second operation reception display means starts displaying the first display,"
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

With this gaming machine, the player feels that the operation of the first stop operation means begins earlier than the second stop operation means.

Also,
"If the power is restored after a power outage after the second case, the time when the second stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation is indicated in the first display by the second operation reception display means. It may be earlier than the starting time.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the operating means that can be operated earlier than the first display are different before and after the power is restored after a power outage, thereby making it possible to add variety to the game.

In the above description,
“A plurality of reels [for example, two or more reels of the left reel 110, the middle reel 111, and the right reel 112, or all of these reels],
A stop operation means is provided in a one-to-one correspondence for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, and is operated in a stopable state to stop the rotating corresponding reel [for example, a left stop button 137, middle stop button 138, right stop button 139],
Regarding the rotation control executed for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, acceleration control to transition from a stopped state to a constant speed state [for example, acceleration control shown in FIG. 212], constant speed to maintain the constant speed state control [for example, the first constant speed control or the second constant speed control shown in FIG. 212, or a combination of the first constant speed control and the second constant speed control], and brake control for transitioning from the constant speed state to the stopped state A reel control means [for example, the main control unit 300] configured to be able to execute [for example, the brake control shown in FIG. 212];
Equipped with
Even if the stop operation means is operated, the reels constituting the plurality of reels cannot be stopped if the acceleration control is being executed [for example, the second constant speed control shown in FIG. Stop button enable information is set only during processing],
The reel control means is a means capable of executing the brake control after transitioning to the stoppable state [for example, the state in which the index sensor detects the light shielding piece of the target reel (step S310i shown in FIG. 222)],
For each reel constituting the plurality of reels [for example, step S208c in the reel rotation control process shown in FIG. 218 is executed for each reel], it is possible to transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state [for example, 243 and 244, the left stop button 137 transitions to the receivable state at the timing of (d), the middle stop button 138 transitions to the receptive state at the timing of (e), and the right stop at the timing of (f) Button 139 Shift to ready state],
In the first period [for example, the period indicated by the arrow in FIG. 244], only some reels among the plurality of reels [for example, only the left reel 110] are stopped, whereas during the second period [for example, (o) in FIG. 244], when the simultaneous stopping operation is performed [for example, the timing (h) shown in FIG. 244], all of the plurality of reels may be stopped.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, while responding to quick operations such as simultaneous pressing, some reels may not stop, making it possible for players who are enthusiastic about the game to calm down.

In addition, during the second period, when the simultaneous stopping operation is performed, all of the multiple reels may be stopped without fail (the same applies below).

Further, the second period may be a period after the first period (the same applies below).

Also,
"The above-mentioned unstoppable state means a state in which the reel's stopping position cannot be controlled,
The stoppable state is a state in which the stopping position of the reel can be controlled in the constant speed state (for example, when a light-shielding piece is detected, it is determined that the reel has made one rotation, the rotational position information of the reel is reset to zero, and the stopping position of the reel can be calculated).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"One of the reels constituting the plurality of reels is a first reel [e.g., the left reel 110],
One of the reels is a second reel [e.g., a center reel 111],
In the second period, when the simultaneous stop operation is performed, at least a portion of the period during which the brake control is performed on the first reel may overlap with at least a portion of the period during which the brake control is performed on the second reel.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

In addition, during the second period, when the simultaneous stop operation is performed, at least a portion of the period during which the brake control is performed on the first reel and at least a portion of the period during which the brake control is performed on the second reel may necessarily overlap (the same applies below).

The stop operation means may be a means including a first stop operation means [e.g., left stop button 137] and a second stop operation means [e.g., center stop button 138], the first stop operation means being a means for stopping the first reel [e.g., left reel 110] when the first reel is operated in a stoppable state, and the second stop operation means being a means for stopping the second reel [e.g., center reel 111] when the second reel is operated in a stoppable state (the same applies below).

Also,
“In the seventh case [for example, the case shown in FIG. 243], the first reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the second reel [for example, Timing of FIG. 243(d)],
The first period [for example, the period indicated by the arrow in (e) in FIG. 243] is a part of the period in the seventh case,
In the first period, when the simultaneous stop operation is performed, only the first reel [for example, the left reel 110] of the first reel and the second reel is stopped;
Also in the eighth case [for example, the case shown in FIG. 244], the first reel shifts from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the second reel [for example, Timing of FIG. 244(d)],
The second period [for example, the period indicated by the arrow (o) in FIG. 244] is a part of the period in the eighth case,
In the second period, when the simultaneous stop operation is performed, both the first reel [for example, left reel 110] and the second reel [for example, middle reel 111] are stopped.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
"When a power interruption and restoration (for example, a power interruption and restoration as shown in FIG. 232) occurs while the brake control of the first reel (for example, the left reel 110) has not been started and the brake control of the second reel (for example, the center reel 111) has not been started, the second reel may transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the first reel (for example, the timing of FIG. 232(e'))
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"The first reel has multiple types of designs,
A second reel with multiple types of designs;
a first reel rotation drive means for rotating the first reel;
a second reel rotation drive means for rotating the second reel;
a first stop operation means that accepts a stop operation for stopping the rotating first reel;
a second stop operation means that receives a stop operation for stopping the rotating second reel;
a first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
a second symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the second reel;
Regarding the rotation control performed on each of the plurality of reels including the first reel and the second reel, acceleration control to shift to a constant speed state, constant speed control to maintain the constant speed state, and stop a reel control means configured to be able to execute stop control for transitioning to the state;
a stop operation acceptance determination means for determining whether or not the stop operation can be accepted in any one of the plurality of stop operation means including the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means;
Stop operation control means for controlling any one of the plurality of stop operation means based on the result of the determination by the stop operation acceptance determination means;
A game machine comprising:
The stop operation accepting means is configured to be able to accept simultaneous stop operations on the plurality of stop operation means,
In a third case, the first stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation earlier than the second stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation;
During the fifth period in the third case, when the operation on the first stop operation means and the simultaneous stop operation on the second stop operation means are performed, the operation on the second stop operation means is performed. becomes invalid and
In the sixth period after the fifth period in the third case, when an operation on the first stop operation means and a simultaneous stop operation on the second stop operation means are performed, The operation of the second stop operation means is valid.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

This gaming machine allows players who are engrossed in playing to calm down by creating a situation where some machines do not stop even when the simultaneous stopping operation is performed.

Also,
“When the simultaneous stop operation is performed during the sixth period, at least part of the period during which the stop control is performed on the first reel and at least one period during which the stop control is performed on the second reel. The period of the parts overlaps,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
"When a power outage occurs after the third case in a state in which the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means are not operated, the second stop operation means may start accepting the stop operation earlier than the first stop operation means.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, the order in which operations are accepted differs before and after a power outage is restored, adding variety to the game.

In the above description,
"A plurality of reels (e.g., two or more of the left reel 110, the center reel 111, and the right reel 112, or all of these reels) and
stop operation means (e.g., a left stop button 137, a center stop button 138, a right stop button 139) that are provided in one-to-one correspondence with each of the reels constituting the plurality of reels and that stop the corresponding reel that is spinning when operated in a stoppable state;
a reel control means (e.g., a main control unit 300) configured to be able to execute, with respect to rotation control executed for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, an acceleration control for transitioning from a stopped state to a constant speed state (e.g., the acceleration control shown in FIG. 212), a constant speed control for maintaining the constant speed state (e.g., the first constant speed control or the second constant speed control shown in FIG. 212, or a combination of the first constant speed control and the second constant speed control), and a brake control for transitioning from the constant speed state to the stopped state (e.g., the brake control shown in FIG. 212);
Equipped with
The reels constituting the plurality of reels cannot be stopped even if the stop operation means is operated when the acceleration control is being executed (for example, the stop button validity information is set only in the second constant speed control process shown in FIG. 222 );
The reel control means is a means capable of executing the brake control after transitioning to the stoppable state (for example, a state in which the index sensor detects the light-shielding piece of the target reel (step S310i shown in FIG. 222)),
Each of the reels constituting the plurality of reels (for example, step S208c in the reel rotation control process shown in FIG. 218 is executed for each reel) can transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state (for example, transition to a state in which the left stop button 137 can be accepted at timing (d), transition to a state in which the middle stop button 138 can be accepted at timing (e), and transition to a state in which the right stop button 139 can be accepted at timing (f) as shown in FIGS. 243 and 245),
In a first period (e.g., the period indicated by the arrow (e) in FIG. 243), when a simultaneous stop operation of the stop operation means is performed with the aim of stopping the multiple reels simultaneously (e.g., at the timing of (h) in FIG. 243), only some of the multiple reels (e.g., only the left reel 110) will be stopped, whereas in a second period (e.g., the period indicated by the arrow (o) in FIG. 245), when the simultaneous stop operation is performed (e.g., at the timing of (h) in FIG. 245), all of the multiple reels may be stopped.
The reel control means is a means capable of executing a reel effect (for example, a simultaneous reel effect),
The reel control means is a means capable of executing random delay control for randomly delaying the start of rotation of each of the reels constituting the plurality of reels (for example, executed between timing (i) and timing (f') shown in FIG. 245 );
When a certain reel among the plurality of reels [e.g., the left reel 110] first transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state [e.g., the timing of (d) shown in FIG. 245], the reel presentation is executed [e.g., the timing of (h) shown in FIG. 245], and the plurality of reels start to rotate as a result of the random delay control being performed [e.g., between the timing of (i) and the timing of (f') shown in FIG. 245], a reel among the plurality of reels other than the certain reel [e.g., the right reel 112] may first transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state [e.g., the timing of (f') shown in FIG. 245],
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He explained:

This gaming machine also responds to the quick operation of pressing buttons simultaneously, and some reels may not stop, allowing players who are engrossed in the game to calm down. In addition, random delay control is inserted to change the state of the reels, adding excitement to the game.

The reel effect may be a simultaneous reel effect that makes it appear as if the multiple rotating reels have stopped simultaneously (for example, at timing (h) shown in FIG. 245).

Also,
"The above-mentioned unstoppable state means a state in which the reel's stopping position cannot be controlled,
The stoppable state is a state in which the stopping position of the reel can be controlled in the constant speed state (for example, when a light-shielding piece is detected, it is determined that the reel has made one rotation, the rotational position information of the reel is reset to zero, and the stopping position of the reel can be calculated).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"One of the reels constituting the plurality of reels is a first reel [e.g., the left reel 110],
One of the reels is a second reel [e.g., a center reel 111],
In the second period, when the simultaneous stop operation is performed, at least a portion of the period during which the brake control is performed on the first reel may overlap with at least a portion of the period during which the brake control is performed on the second reel.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
“In the seventh case [for example, the case shown in FIG. 243], the first reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the second reel [for example, Timing of FIG. 243(d)],
In the seventh case, when the simultaneous stopping operation is performed, only the first reel [for example, the left reel 110] of the first reel and the second reel is stopped [for example, in FIG. (h) timing shown in]
Also in the eighth case [for example, the case shown in FIG. 244], the first reel shifts from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the second reel [for example, Timing of FIG. 244(d)],
In the eighth case, when the simultaneous stop operation is performed, both the first reel [for example, left reel 110] and the second reel [for example, middle reel 111] are stopped [for example, in FIG. (h) timing shown in]
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
``The power failure occurs when the brake control of the first reel [for example, the left reel 110] is not started and the brake control of the second reel [for example, the middle reel 111] is not started either. In this case, the second reel may transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the first reel [for example, the timing shown in FIG. 232(e')],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
"The first reel has multiple designs,
A second reel having a plurality of different patterns;
a first reel rotation drive means for rotating the first reel;
A second reel rotation drive means for rotating the second reel;
a first stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the first reel that is rotating;
a second stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the second reel that is rotating;
a first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying a display position of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
a second symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying a display position of the plurality of types of symbols on the second reel;
a reel control means configured to be capable of executing, with respect to rotation control executed on each of a plurality of reels including the first reel and the second reel, an acceleration control for transitioning to a constant speed state, a constant speed control for maintaining the constant speed state, and a stop control for transitioning to a stopped state;
a stop operation acceptance determination means for determining whether or not the stop operation can be accepted by any one of a plurality of stop operation means including the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means;
a stop operation control means for controlling any one of the plurality of stop operation means based on a result of the determination by the stop operation reception determination means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The stop operation receiving means is configured to be able to receive simultaneous stop operations by the plurality of stop operation means,
In a third case, the first stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation earlier than the second stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation,
In the third case, if an operation to the first stop operation means and a simultaneous stop operation to the second stop operation means are performed during the fifth period, the operation to the second stop operation means is invalidated,
In the third case, when an operation to the first stop operation means and a simultaneous stop operation to the second stop operation means are performed during a sixth period after the fifth period, the operation to the second stop operation means becomes valid,
the reel control means is means capable of executing random delay control for randomly delaying the start of rotation of each of the plurality of reels,
When the random delay control is executed after the fifth game in which the third case occurs, in a sixth game following the fifth game, the second stop operation means may start to receive the stop operation earlier than the first stop operation means.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

According to this game machine, the acceptance start times of the respective stop operation means for the fifth game and the sixth game are made different to give variety to the games.

Also,
"When the simultaneous stop operation is performed during the sixth period, at least a part of the period during which the stop control is performed on the first reel and at least a part of the period during which the stop control is performed on the second reel overlap with each other.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"When a power outage occurs after the third case in a state in which the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means are not operated, the start time of the acceptance of the stop operation in the second stop operation means may be earlier than the start time of the acceptance of the stop operation in the first stop operation means.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

According to this gaming machine, the order in which operations are accepted differs before and after the power is restored after a power outage, thereby adding variety to the game.

The identification prefixes described above, such as "first...", "second...", "third...", etc., may be replaced as appropriate. For example, the "seventh case" may be changed to the "first case".

Figure 246 is a timing chart in which notification timing by the notification means etc. has been added to the timing chart shown in Figure 239.

In the timing chart shown in FIG. 246, the slide push operations performed on the three stop buttons 137-139 in order are also accepted. In this timing chart shown in FIG. 246, the first period is shown as the period from when the start lever 135 is turned on (from when each of the three reels 110-112 starts spinning) until the stop button which constitutes the second stop operation is operated (timing (h')). Strictly speaking, the first period is the period until the second stop operation is accepted. Also, in this timing chart, when the start lever 135 is turned on, the pseudo game does not start, and the real game has started.

The notification means is shown at the bottom of the timing chart in FIG. 246. This notification means corresponds to, for example, the effect image display device 157 or the speakers 272 and 277. When the start lever 135 is turned on, the notification means starts the first notification. The first notification may be a notification based on a small role suggestion effect shown in FIG. 237(A), or a notification that foretells a shift to a certain gaming state (for example, AT state). Alternatively, it may be a notification based on the push order navigation effect (operation instruction notification) shown in FIG. 237(B), or a notification such as "Aim for 7 by pressing in order" (for example, "Aim for 7 by pressing in order") (rotation suggestion notification). The first notification may be continuously executed over a period until all three reels 110 to 112 are in a stopped state, or may be executed at a certain timing within the period. The stopped state here refers to a fully stopped state. In each example of FIGS. 246 to 260, as the first notification, a notification (operation instruction notification) based on the push order navigation effect is executed, and the player operates each of the stop buttons 137 to 139 according to the operation instruction notification. It may be possible to execute a combination suggestion notification, or both an operation instruction notification and a combination suggestion notification may be performed.

When all three reels 110 to 112 are in a stopped state, the second notification is started. The second notification may be a result notification. For example, it may be a notification of a stopped small role, a notification of the number of acquired game values (game media) (a notification of getting ○○ pieces), or a game state to which it has been decided to move after this. It may be a notification (bonus transfer notification or AT transfer notification), or it may be a notification of information updated due to the completion of a game (number of credits, number of games, remaining AT count, etc.). This second notification may be performed continuously over a period until the main game ends, or may be performed at a certain timing within the period.

FIG. 247 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where retraction control is performed as a result of sequentially pressing slide push operations on three stop buttons 137 to 139, as in the case of the timing chart shown in FIG. 246. It is. In the example shown in FIG. 247, the sequential push stop operation is performed in accordance with the operation instruction notification (first notification). Note that this example does not apply even if the forward press stop operation is performed without following the operation instruction notification, or if the forward press stop operation is performed at the player's discretion without the operation instruction notification. It's the same.

The following explanation is given in comparison with the timing chart shown in Figure 246.

When a slide push operation is performed, the player is not consciously performing the stopping operation while pressing the buttons, so no control to assist the player, such as reel retraction control, is performed. However, in this embodiment, reel retraction control is performed. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, there are cases where the player wants to aim for a number that is one or several frames off the stopped number of the left reel 110 on the center reel 111, or a number that is one or several frames off the stopped number of the center reel 111 on the right reel 112, and in these cases, reel retraction control is performed to assist the player.

In the first stop operation (timing (h)) of the left reel 110, retraction control is not performed, and brake control is immediately performed in response to the stop operation, and the left reel 110 is stopped. Hereinafter, the act of immediately executing brake control in response to a stop operation and stopping the reel without performing pull-in control may be referred to as a stop.

Next, a stop operation is performed on the center reel 111 (timing (h')). This stop operation corresponds to the second stop operation, and the first period in the timing chart shown in FIG. 246 and the first period in the timing chart shown in FIG. 247 are the same period length. In the second stop operation in FIG. 247, retraction control is performed. Retraction control is performed within a range of 4 frames. In this example, retraction of 4 frames is performed, and while retraction is being performed, brake control of the center reel 111 is not started and the stop of the center reel 111 is delayed.

Following the center reel 11, the right reel 112 is stopped (timing (h'')). This stopping operation of the right reel 112 corresponds to the third stopping operation (final stopping operation) and is the stopping operation before the center reel 111 stops. In the third stopping operation, the right reel 112 stops with a perfect stop. As a result, even if the stopping operation of the center reel 111 is performed at an earlier timing (timing (h')), the right reel 112 stops before the center reel 111 stops.

Eventually, brake control is executed for the middle reel 111 that has slipped by four frames due to the pull-in control, and the middle reel 111 stops later than the right reel 112 (timing (β)). At this timing (β), all three reels 110 to 112 come to a halt, and the second notification starts. The content of the second notification is the same as the content of the second notification in FIG. 246. That is, in the example of FIG. 247, the order of stopping the reels is left, right, and middle, but the contents of the second notification (for example, notification of watermelon as the winning combination, getting 9 pieces as the number of winnings, etc.) are as follows. This is the same as the left, middle, and right stopping order in FIG. 246. In other words, the example in FIG. 246 and the example in FIG. 247 differ in the order in which the reels stop, but the gaming value awarded to the player is the same. However, the notification start timing of the second notification is different. That is, the notification start timing of the second notification is the timing when all three reels 110 to 112 are in the stopped state, and in FIG. However, in FIG. 247, due to the retraction control being performed on the middle reel 111, the timing (β) is later than the timing (h'').

In this example, the center reel 111 is controlled to retract for 4 frames, and the right reel 112 is stopped exactly, but even if the right reel 112 is controlled to retract for 3 frames or less, the right reel 112 may stop before the center reel 111. Also, if the center reel 111 is controlled to retract for 1 to 3 frames, the right reel 112 may stop before the center reel 111 even if the right reel 112 is controlled to retract for fewer frames than the center reel 111 or if the right reel 112 is stopped exactly.

Furthermore, in this example, the right reel 112 is in a stopped state while the middle reel 111 is being pulled in, but the middle reel 111 and the right reel 112 may be in a stopped state while the left reel 110 is being pulled in. . In addition, the middle reel 111 and the left reel 110 may be stopped while the right reel 112 is being pulled in by a reverse push operation, or the left reel 110 may be stopped while the middle reel 111 is being pulled in by a reverse push operation. Sometimes it happens.

Furthermore, when the push order navigation notifies the player of the operation order of middle, right, left, the player may operate in the order of middle, right, left according to the notification, and the right reel 112 and left reel 110 may come to a stopped state during the reel-in control of the middle reel 111. In other words, even if the reel stop order is performed according to the push order navigation, and the reel stop order is right, left, middle, which is different from the order of the push order navigation, the game value (e.g., game media equal to the number of coins paid out when the push order bell is won) that is awarded when the stop operation is performed according to the push order navigation is awarded. On the other hand, even if the reel stop order is performed ignoring the push order navigation, the reel stop order may be middle, right, left, which is the same order as the push order navigation, but in this case, no prize is won (e.g., the bells are not lined up), and the above-mentioned game value is not awarded.

Also, in this example, the stop order is reversed to the stop operation between the second and third stop reels, but if the stop order is reversed to the stop operation between the first and second stop reels. In some cases, the order of stopping is reversed between the first and third reels.

Next, a game machine equipped with an automatic reel stop function will be described. The reel automatic stop function is to operate the start lever 135 to start the reel rotation, and then stop the reel from rotating when a predetermined second period (for example, 40 seconds) has elapsed after shifting to the second constant speed control. This is a function where the reels automatically stop. For example, if none of the three stop buttons 137 to 139 are operated, the left reel 110 will first come to a halt after the second period has elapsed, and then a predetermined period (for example, 0.2 The middle reel 111 and the right reel 112 are stopped in this order every time seconds (seconds) elapse. If only the right stop button 139 among the three stop buttons 137 to 139 is not operated before the second period has elapsed, the right reel 112 will automatically stop when the second period has elapsed. become a state. A game machine equipped with an automatic stop function does not perform pseudo games. However, even if the game machine is equipped with an automatic stop function, it may be possible to perform pseudo games.

Note that while one of the stop buttons is being pressed and held (continuously operated), the reels corresponding to the other stop buttons will not be stopped even if the other stop buttons are operated. Even if multiple stop buttons are operated simultaneously, only the reel corresponding to the stop button whose operation was detected first will be stopped, and the remaining reels will continue to spin. Furthermore, even if a stop button is operated while any of the operation means of the start lever 135, the settlement button 134, or the coin insertion buttons 130 to 132 is being operated, the reel corresponding to that stop button will not be stopped. The second period may pass not because the stop button is not operated, but because the reel corresponding to that stop button is not stopped even when it is operated in this way.

In addition, the main control unit 300 counts during the second period, but during this counting, the reels may step out (so-called step-out) (for example, the rotating reels are intentionally stopped by hand). , if an abnormality occurs such as a power outage while the reel is rotating, the above second The period may be counted again, or the count may be continued from the count value at the time when the abnormality occurred.

Figure 248 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where a reverse push slide push operation is performed before the light-shielding piece of the left reel 110 is detected. In the example of Figure 248, the reverse push stop operation is performed in accordance with the operation instruction notification (first notification). Note that this example is the same even if the reverse push stop operation is performed without following the operation instruction notification, or if the reverse push stop operation is performed at the player's discretion without an operation instruction notification.

In this example, the light-shielding piece of the center reel 111 is detected first (timing (e)), and then the light-shielding piece of the right reel 112 is detected (timing (f)). Then, before the light-shielding piece of the left reel 110 is detected, a reverse slide push operation is performed. That is, the right stop button 139 is operated at timing (h''), the center stop button 138 is operated at timing (h'), and finally the left stop button 137 is operated at timing (h1). The valid operations in this reverse slide push operation are the first operation of the right stop button 139 and the next operation of the center stop button 138, and the operation of the left stop button 137 of the left reel 110 where no light-shielding piece is detected is invalid (not accepted). Both the right reel 112 and the center reel 111 are stopped with a perfect stop. Note that the first period in the timing chart shown in FIG. 246 and the first period in the timing chart shown in FIG. 248 are the same period length.

After the middle reel 111 has stopped, the light shielding piece of the left reel 110 is detected at the timing (d), and only the left stop button LED 137a among the three stop button LEDs 137a to 139a becomes the second light emitting mode, and the left stop button 137 is turned on. Transition to a state where operations can be accepted. The player who should have operated up to the left stop button 137 operates the left stop button 137 again ((h2 ) timing). The left reel 110 stops at a beat stop in response to this second operation.

In the example shown in Figure 248, explained above, the order in which the stop buttons are operated matches the order in which the reels stop.

However, in FIG. 248, the gray line indicates that the pull-in control for four frames is performed on the right reel 112, and the stop of the right reel 112 is delayed. In this case, the right stop button 139 was operated before the middle stop button 138, but the middle reel 111 was stopped before the right reel 112, and the order of operation of the stop buttons and the reel The stopping order of the two does not match.

Figure 249 is a timing chart showing an example in which only the right reel 112 of the three reels 110 to 112 automatically stops. In this example of Figure 249, the operation to stop the push-forward reels is performed in accordance with the operation instruction notification (first notification). Note that this example is the same even if the operation to stop the push-forward reels is performed without following the operation instruction notification, or if the operation to stop the push-forward reels is performed at the player's discretion without receiving an operation instruction notification.

Figure 249 shows a predetermined second period (e.g., 40 seconds). As described above, the start lever 135 is operated to start the reel rotation, and when this second period has elapsed since the transition to the second constant speed control, the reel automatically stops rotating.

In the example shown in FIG. 249, a slide push operation is performed by pressing the left stop button 137 and the middle stop button 138 in order before the second period has elapsed. As for the right stop button 139, either no operation is performed (e.g., the slide push operation is stopped), or the second period has elapsed before the right stop button 139 is operated, and the operation is not accepted (e.g., the right stop button 139 is also operated by the slide push operation, but is not accepted).

When the center stop button 138 is operated at the timing of (h'), as in the example shown in FIG. 248, the center reel 111 is retracted by four frames, the brake control of the center reel 111 is not started, and the stop of the center reel 111 is delayed. After the operation of the center stop button 111 is finished, the above-mentioned predetermined second period elapses while the finger is sliding to the right stop button 112 (timing of (α)). As a result, the right reel 112 is braked and stopped before the right stop button 112 is operated. In addition, the right stop button 112 becomes unacceptable, and the right stop button LED 139a returns to the first light-emitting state. Eventually, the brake control of the center reel 111, which has been slid by four frames by the retraction control, is executed, and the center reel 111 stops later than the right reel 112 (timing of (β)). At this timing of (β), all three reels 110 to 112 are stopped, and the second notification begins. The content of the second notification in FIG. 249 is the same as the content of the second notification in FIG. 246, and although the reel stopping order is different between the example of FIG. 246 and the example of FIG. 249, the game value given to the player is the same. That is, in the example of FIG. 249, the reel stopping order is left, right, and center, but the content of the second notification (for example, the notification of the watermelon which is the winning combination, the number of coins obtained being 9, etc.) is the same as in the case of the left, center, and right stopping order in FIG. 246. However, the notification start timing of the second notification is different. In FIG. 246, the timing is (h'') because the reel-in control was not performed, but in FIG. 249, the reel-in control was performed on the center reel 111, so the timing is (β) which is later than the timing (α) at which the right reel 112 automatically stopped.

In the example shown in FIG. 249, the left stop button 137 and the middle stop button 138 are operated, but even if only the left stop button 137 is operated, or if neither the left stop button 137 nor the middle stop button 138 is operated, the spinning reels will automatically stop after the second period has elapsed. The order of automatic transition to a stopped state is given priority to reels located further to the left. However, in this embodiment, retraction control is permitted even when the reels are automatically stopped, and retraction control may be executed.

Here, the number of steps (number of pulses) required to rotate the reel once (360 degrees) is 504 steps, and since 21 frames of symbols are arranged on one reel, the number of steps for one frame is 504/21 = 24 steps. Also, one retention time for holding one rotation control data is one interrupt time (e.g., 1.49 ms), and when the reel is in a constant speed state (constant speed 2 state), the time to move one frame is 24 steps x 1.49 ms = 35.76 ms. As described above, since the center reel 111 and the right reel 112 are stopped in that order every time a predetermined period (e.g., 0.2 seconds) has elapsed, it is designed so that the stopping order of the reels is not reversed even if a retraction control of up to 4 frames is performed during automatic stop control. However, the above-mentioned predetermined time may be shortened or one interruption time may be lengthened so that the stopping order of the reels is reversed by the retraction control during automatic stop control. Because the reels stop automatically, no operation by the player is required, and the unique reel action can increase the player's interest in the game. Furthermore, the pull-in control achieves a small win, and even if the reels stop in the wrong order, the result is advantageous to the player, so the player will not feel distrustful.

Next, we will explain some examples of the illumination patterns of the stop button LEDs, such as the left stop button LED 137a, the middle stop button LED 138b, and the right stop button LED 139a, and the order in which the reels stop.

As described above, for example, if all reels 110-112 are not stopped, all reels 110-112 have transitioned to the constant speed 2 state, and a light-blocking piece has been detected, the light emission mode of the three stop button LEDs 137a-139a changes in unison from the first light emission mode to the second light emission mode. Also, if some reels are stopped and the remaining reels have transitioned to the constant speed 2 state and a light-blocking piece has been detected, only the stop button LEDs of the remaining reels (the reels that are spinning) change to the second light emission mode.

Figure 250 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where retraction control is performed as a result of a slide push operation for sequential push being performed before the detection of the light-blocking piece on the right reel 112 is delayed and the three stop button LEDs 137a-139a change to the second light-emitting state. In the example of Figure 250, the operation to stop the sequential push is also performed in accordance with the operation instruction notification (first notification). Note that this example is the same even if the operation to stop the sequential push is performed without following the operation instruction notification, or if the operation to stop the sequential push is performed at the player's discretion without receiving an operation instruction notification.

The following will focus on the differences from the example shown in Figure 248.

When the start lever 135 is operated at the timing of (a) and each of the reels 110 to 112 starts rotating, all of the stop button LEDs 137a to 139a are lit in the first light emission mode.

At the timing of (c), each reel 110 to 112 shifts to the constant speed 2 state.

At the timing of (d), the light shielding piece of the left reel 110 is detected and the left stop button 137 shifts to a state ready for operation, and at the timing of (e), the light shielding piece of the middle reel 111 is detected and the middle stop button 138 is activated. Transition to a state where operations can be accepted. Then, before the light-shielding piece of the right reel 112 is detected, a sequential slide push operation is started. At timing (h), the left stop button 137 is operated. The left reel 110 is controlled to pull in four frames, and the brake control of the left reel 110 is not started, causing a delay in stopping the left reel 110. At the timing (h'), the middle stop button 138 is operated continuously, and the middle reel 111 is stopped at a beat stop. At the end of the sequential slide push operation, the right stop button 139 is operated (timing (h'')). At this timing (h''), the light shielding piece of the right reel 112 is not detected, the operation of the right stop button 139 is not accepted, and the right reel 112 continues to rotate. Eventually, the left reel 110, which was under retraction control, stops. Thereafter, at timing (f'), the light shielding piece of the right reel 112 is detected, and of the three stop button LEDs 137a to 139a, only the right stop button LED 139a becomes the second light emitting mode, and the right stop button 139 is in a state ready for operation. to move to.

Figure 251 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where detection of the light-blocking piece of the center reel 111 is delayed, and a sequential slide push operation is performed before the three stop button LEDs 137a to 139a change to the second light-emitting state, resulting in retraction control being performed.

The following will focus on the differences from the example shown in Figure 250.

At the timing of (d), the light shielding piece of the left reel 110 is detected and the left stop button 137 shifts to a state ready for operation, and at the timing of (f), the light shielding piece of the right reel 112 is detected and the right stop button 139 is activated. Transition to a state where operations can be accepted. Then, before the light-shielding piece of the middle reel 111 is detected, a sequential slide push operation is started. At timing (h), the left stop button 137 is operated. The left reel 110 is controlled to pull in four frames, and the brake control of the left reel 110 is not started, causing a delay in stopping the left reel 110. The middle stop button 138 is continuously operated at timing (h'). At this timing (h'), the light shielding piece of the middle reel 111 is not detected, the operation of the middle stop button 138 is not accepted, and the middle reel 111 continues to rotate. At the end of the sequential push slide push operation, the right stop button 139 is operated (timing (h'')), and the right reel 112 is stopped with a beat stop. Eventually, the left reel 110, which was under retraction control, stops. After that, at the timing (e'), the light shielding piece of the middle reel 111 is detected, and among the three stop button LEDs 137a to 139a, only the middle stop button LED 138a becomes the second light emitting mode, and the middle stop button 138 is in the state ready for operation. to move to.

FIG. 252 shows a case where retraction control is performed as a result of a sequential slide push operation being performed before the detection of the light shielding piece of the left reel 110 is delayed and the three stop button LEDs 137a to 139a change to the second light emitting mode. 3 is a timing chart illustrating an example.

Hereinafter, the differences from the example shown in FIG. 250 will be mainly explained.

In this example, the light-shielding piece of the right reel 112 is detected first (timing (f)), the right stop button 139 shifts to the operation ready state, and the light-shielding piece of the middle reel 111 is detected next (( (timing e)), the middle stop button 138 transitions to an operation-ready state. Then, before the light shielding piece of the left reel 110 is detected, the forward push slide push operation is started. At the timing (h), the left stop button 137 is operated, but at this timing (h), the light shielding piece of the left reel 110 is not detected, the operation of the left stop button 137 is not accepted, and the left reel 110 continues to rotate. The middle stop button 138 is continuously operated at timing (h'). The pull-in control for the middle reel 111 is performed for four frames, and the brake control of the middle reel 111 is not started, so that the stopping of the middle reel 111 is delayed. At the end of the sequential push slide push operation, the right stop button 139 is operated (timing (h'')), and the right reel 112 is stopped with a beat stop. That is, after the right reel 112 starts rotating, before the middle stop button LED 138a and the right stop button LED 139a change to the second light emitting mode, the middle stop button 138 is activated before the right stop button 139 is operated. Even if it is operated, the middle reel 111 shifts to the stopped state before shifting to the stopped state.

Eventually, the middle reel 111, which was undergoing retraction control, comes to a stop (timing (β)). After that, at timing (d'), the light-blocking piece on the left reel 110 is detected, and of the three stop button LEDs 137a-139a, only the left stop button LED 137a enters the second light-emitting state, and the left top button 137 transitions to a state in which it can accept operation. In FIG. 252, the period from when the reels 110-112 start to rotate until the stop button LED changes to the second light-emitting state is shown as the fourth period. The right reel 112 and middle reel 111 come to a stop within this fourth period.

Next, in the gaming machine equipped with the reel automatic stop function described using FIG. We will explain about game machines that are not equipped with the automatic stop function. In this game machine, after the start lever 135 is operated and the reels 110 to 112 start rotating, the rotation stops even after a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, a predetermined time has elapsed after shifting to the second constant speed control). If there is a reel for which the button has not been operated, the effect image display device 157 and the speakers 272, 277 issue a notification that the reel is rotating and prompts the user to stop the reel. If the player leaves his/her seat, a clerk at the game parlor operates the stop button.

Figure 253 is a timing chart showing the sequential slide push operations performed in a pseudo game and in the actual game that is started following the pseudo game.

In the pseudo game, each reel 110 to 112 starts rotating by operating the start lever 135 (timing in (a)), and then starts constant speed control after acceleration control (timing in (b)). The constant speed control is divided into a first constant speed control and a second constant speed control. After shifting to the second constant speed control, the light shielding piece of the left reel 110 is detected at the timing (d), and the left stop button 13 is detected.
7 shifts to an operation-ready state, and at timing (e), the light-shielding piece of the middle reel 111 is detected, and the middle stop button 138 shifts to an operation-ready state. In this example, the light-shielding piece of the right reel 112 is finally detected (timing (f)), the right stop button 139 transitions to the operation ready state, and the three stop button LEDs 137a to 139a all emit the second light. Change in form.

Also in the pseudo game, operation instruction notifications (notifications such as "left, middle, right") and role suggestion notifications (notifications such as "Aim for 7") are executed as first notifications. In this example, after this, according to the operation instruction notification (first notification), the slide push operation is performed in order, and the operation timing of each stop button 137 to 139 ((h), (h'), (h ''), the corresponding reel starts brake control, and the built-in stop button LED returns to the first light emitting mode. In the pseudo game, stop control is not executed, but instead, vibration control is executed to slightly vibrate the reels. Vibration control causes the reel to vibrate slightly rather than completely stop, but it can be made to appear stopped, creating a pseudo-stop state. This pseudo-stop state is also a type of stop state. In addition, in the pseudo stop, the vibration width may be increased in order to make the difference from the real stop (determined stop) in the main game more clear.

Note that the period from the timing (a) when the start lever 135 is turned on to the timing (h') when the middle reel 111 is stopped is the first period, which is the first period in the timing chart shown in FIG. The period and the first period in the timing chart shown in FIG. 253 have the same period length.

When all three reels 110-112 are stopped (pseudo stopped), a second notification is initiated. For example, if "7-7-7" is pseudo stopped in response to the first notification, the second notification may be a result notification such as "Big bonus obtained." If seven symbols are lined up in the pseudo game, a transition to an AT state may occur when the actual game begins, in which case the second notification may be a notification such as "Enter AT state."

Eventually, the pseudo game ends, and the real game starts from the timing (i). This game may be automatically started when a predetermined time elapses without operating the start lever 135, or may be started by operating the start lever 135. However, even when the main game is started, the reels do not start rotating immediately; random delay control is performed as explained using FIG. 240, and each reel starts rotating at a different timing. In the example, the left reel 110 starts rotating the slowest, and the left reel 110 switches from acceleration control to first constant speed control at the timing (B). Then, all three reels 110 to 112 switch from the first constant speed control to the second constant speed control at the timing (C). After shifting to the second constant speed control in this game, the light shielding piece of the left reel 110 is detected at the timing (D), the left stop button 137 shifts to the state in which operation can be accepted, and at the timing (E), the light shielding piece of the left reel 110 is detected. The light-shielding piece of the reel 111 is detected, and the middle stop button 138 shifts to an operation ready state. Finally, the light-shielding piece of the right reel 112 is detected (timing (F)), the right stop button 139 transitions to an operation ready state, and the three stop button LEDs 137a to 139a all change to the second light emitting mode. .

In this game as well, sequential slide push operations are performed, and at the operation timing of each stop button 137 to 139 (timing of (H), (H'), (H'')), the corresponding reel is brake controlled. The stop button is stopped and the built-in stop button LED returns to the first light emitting mode.

When the game starts (timing (i)), the notification means switches from the second notification to the first notification, and when all three reels 110 to 112 are stopped, the second notification begins.

Figure 254 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where retraction control is performed as a result of performing a forward slide push operation in a pseudo game. In the example of Figure 254, an operation instruction notification (first notification) is executed in a pseudo game, and the forward push operation is performed in accordance with the operation instruction notification. Note that this example is the same even if the forward push operation is performed without following the operation instruction notification, or if the forward push operation is performed at the player's discretion without an operation instruction notification.

The following will focus on the differences from the timing chart shown in Figure 253.

When performing a forward slide push operation, the left stop button 137 is operated first (timing (h)), and the left reel 110 is instantly braked in response to the operation of the left stop button 137, and is brought to a pseudo-stop by vibration control.

Next, the middle stop button 138 is operated (timing (h')), the middle reel 111 is pulled in for four frames, the brake control of the middle reel 111 is not started, and a pseudo stop of the middle reel 111 is performed. I'll be late.

Finally, the right stop button 139 is operated (timing (h'')). The operation timing of this right stop button 139 is the timing before the middle reel 111 stops. The right reel 112 is immediately subjected to brake control in response to the operation of the right stop button 139, and is brought to a pseudo stop by vibration control.

Eventually, brake control is executed for the middle reel 111 that has slipped by four frames due to the pull-in control, and the middle reel 111 comes to a pseudo-stop later than the right reel 112 (timing (β)). At this timing (β), all three reels 110 to 112 enter a pseudo-stopped state (stopped state), and the second notification is started. The content of the second notification is the same as the content of the second notification in FIG. 253. That is, in the example of FIG. 254, the order of pseudo-stopping of the reels is left, right, and middle, but the content of the second notification (for example, result notification such as "big bonus obtained") is the left, middle, and so on in FIG. , is the same as for the pseudo-stop order on the right. In other words, in the example of FIG. 253 and the example of FIG. 254, although the order of pseudo-stopping of the reels is different, the gaming value given to the player is the same. However, the notification start timing of the second notification is different. That is, the notification start timing of the second notification is the timing when all three reels 110 to 112 are in the stopped state (pseudo-stopped state), and in FIG. 253, since the pull-in control was not performed (h ''), but in FIG. 254, the timing (β) is later than the timing (h'') because the pull-in control has been performed for the middle reel 111.

In this example, retraction control for 4 frames was performed on the center reel 111, and retraction control was not performed on the right reel 112. However, even if retraction control of 3 frames or less is performed on the right reel 112, the right reel 112 may come to a pseudo-stop before the center reel 111. Also, when retraction control for 1 to 3 frames is performed on the center reel 111, the right reel 112 may come to a pseudo-stop before the center reel 111 if retraction control for fewer frames than the center reel 111 is performed on the right reel 112, or if retraction control is not performed on the right reel 112.

Further, in this example, the right reel 112 pseudo-stops during the retraction control of the middle reel 111, but the middle reel 111 and the right reel 112 may pseudo-stop during the retraction control of the left reel 110. In addition, the middle reel 111 and the left reel 110 may pseudo-stop while the right reel 112 is being pulled in by a reverse push operation, or the left reel 110 may be pseudo-stop while the middle reel 111 is being pulled in by a reverse push operation. There is also. Furthermore, push order navigation may also be executed in pseudo-games, and when the push order navigation notifies the order of operations of middle, right, and left, the operations are performed in the order of middle, right, and left according to the notification. During the retraction control of the middle reel 111, the right reel 112 and the left reel 110 may come to a pseudo stop.

In addition, in this example, the order of pseudo stops between the second and third stop reels is the reverse of the stop operation, but the order of pseudo stops between the first and second stop reels may be the reverse of the stop operation, and the order of pseudo stops between the first and third stop reels may be the reverse of the stop operation.

Furthermore, in place of the slide push operation, multiple stop buttons may be pressed simultaneously. Even if they are pressed simultaneously, there is usually a difference in detection timing. For example, even if the left stop button 137 and right stop button 139 are pressed simultaneously, the operation of one stop button will be detected first, and the operation of the other stop button will be detected first. The reel corresponding to the other stop button continues to rotate without pseudo-stopping. Note that the same applies when another stop button is operated while a certain stop button is being operated (long-pressed state). However, the operation of the other stop button or the operation of another stop button may be detected, and the corresponding reel may be pseudo-stopped. The above explanation is not limited to the pseudo game, but also applies to the main game.

Furthermore, although the explanation using FIG. 254 was an explanation of pull-in control within the maximum number of draw-in pieces, in a pseudo game, it is also possible to perform a reel action that looks like pull-in control that exceeds the maximum draw-in number of pieces. . For example, 20 frames may be drawn in, or even if the stop button is operated, the reels may continue to rotate for one round or more and then come to a pseudo stop (the same applies to the following description).

Furthermore, in the pseudo game, the reel action may be such that the maximum number of retracted frames is different for each reel, or the number of retracted frames for each reel may be set to a predetermined number (the same applies in the following explanations). Also, in the actual game, the upper limit number of retracted frames may be different for each reel within the maximum number of retracted frames (within the range of 1 to 4 frames), or the number of retracted frames for each reel may be set to a predetermined number (the same applies in the following explanations).

As described above, a gaming machine capable of executing a pseudo game does not have an automatic reel stop function for the actual game, but has an automatic pseudo stop function that automatically pseudo-stops the reel in the pseudo game to ensure a transition to the actual game. The automatic reel stop function is a function that automatically executes reel stop control when a predetermined second period (e.g., 40 seconds) has elapsed since transitioning to the second constant speed control, whereas the automatic pseudo reel stop function is a function that automatically executes reel vibration control when a predetermined third period has elapsed since transitioning to the second constant speed control. The third period may be the same length as the second period, or may be a period shorter than the second period. Alternatively, it may be a period longer than the second period. Since the pseudo-stopped state is also a type of stopped state, the automatic reel stop function and the automatic pseudo reel stop function are the same in that they are functions that automatically transition the reel to a stopped state.

Figure 255 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where a reverse push slide push operation is performed in a pseudo game before the light-shielding piece of the left reel 110 is detected. In the example of Figure 255, an operation instruction notification (first notification) is also executed in the pseudo game, and the reverse push stop operation is performed in accordance with the operation instruction notification. Note that this example is the same even if the reverse push operation is performed without following the operation instruction notification, or if the reverse push operation is performed at the player's discretion without an operation instruction notification.

In this example, in the pseudo game, the light blocking piece of the center reel 111 is detected first (timing (e)), then the light blocking piece of the right reel 112 is detected (timing (f)). Then, before the light blocking piece of the left reel 110 is detected, a reverse slide push operation is performed. That is, the right stop button 139 is operated at timing (h''), the center stop button 138 is operated at timing (h'), and finally the left stop button 137 is operated at timing (h1). The valid operations in this reverse slide push operation are the first operation of the right stop button 139 and the next operation of the center stop button 138, and the operation of the left stop button 137 of the left reel 110, where no light blocking piece has been detected, is invalid (not accepted). Both the right reel 112 and the center reel 111 are immediately brake controlled in response to the stop operation, and come to a pseudo stop. Note that the first period in the timing chart shown in FIG. 253 and the first period in the timing chart shown in FIG. 255 have the same period length.

After the middle reel 111 has stopped, the light shielding piece of the left reel 110 is detected at the timing (d), and only the left stop button LED 137a among the three stop button LEDs 137a to 139a becomes the second light emitting mode, and the left stop button 137 is turned on. Transition to a state where operations can be accepted. The player who should have operated up to the left stop button 137 operates the left stop button 137 again ((h2 ) timing). In response to this second operation, the left reel 110 is immediately subjected to brake control and brought to a pseudo stop.

In the example shown in FIG. 255 described above, the order in which the stop buttons are operated and the order in which the reels are stopped match.

However, in FIG. 255, the gray line indicates that the pull-in control for four frames is performed on the right reel 112, and the stopping of the right reel 112 is delayed. In this case, the right stop button 139 was operated before the middle stop button 138, but the middle reel 111 pseudo-stopped before the right reel 112, and the order of operation of the stop buttons and the reels are different. The order of pseudo-stopping does not match.

FIG. 256 is a timing chart showing an example in which only the right reel 112 among the three reels 110 to 112 automatically pseudo-stops.

Figure 256 shows a predetermined third period (e.g., 25 seconds). As described above, when the start lever 135 is operated to start the reel rotation and the second constant speed control is entered, the reel automatically comes to a pseudo-stop after the third period has elapsed.

In the example shown in FIG. 256, before the third period has elapsed, a slide push operation is performed on the left stop button 137 and the middle stop button 138 by pressing them in order in accordance with the operation instruction notification. For the right stop button 139, either no operation is performed (for example, the slide push operation is stopped), or the third period has elapsed before the right stop button 139 is operated, and the operation is not accepted (for example, the right stop button 139 is also operated through the slide push operation, but is not accepted). Note that this example is the same even if the push operation is performed in order without following the operation instruction notification, or if the push operation is performed at the player's discretion without being notified of the operation instruction notification.

When the middle stop button 138 is operated at the timing (h'), as in the example shown in FIG. 254, the middle reel 111 is pulled in for four frames, and the brake control of the middle reel 111 is not started. The pseudo-stop of the middle reel 111 is delayed. After the operation of the middle stop button 111 is finished, the third predetermined period elapses while the finger is being slid onto the right stop button 112 (timing (α)). As a result, before the right stop button 112 is operated, the right reel 112 is brake-controlled and pseudo-stopped. In addition, the right stop button 112 becomes disabled and the right stop button LED 139a returns to the first light emitting mode. Eventually, brake control is executed for the middle reel 111 that has slipped by four frames due to the pull-in control, and the middle reel 111 comes to a pseudo stop later than the right reel 112 (timing (β)). At this timing (β), all three reels 110 to 112 come to a stop state (pseudo stop state), and the second notification starts. The content of the second notification in FIG. 256 is the same as the content of the second notification in FIG. 253, and although the order of the pseudo stop of the reels is different between the example in FIG. The gaming value given to each player is the same. That is, in the example of FIG. 256, the order of stopping the reels is left, right, and middle, but the content of the second notification (for example, "Big bonus acquisition") is the pseudo-stopping order of left, middle, and right in FIG. 253. The same is true for the order of However, the notification start timing of the second notification is different. In FIG. 253, the timing is (h'') because the pull-in control was not performed, but in FIG. 256, the pull-in control was performed on the middle reel 111, and the automatic pseudo-stop was performed on the right reel 112. The timing (β) is later than the timing (α).

In the example shown in FIG. 256, the left stop button 137 and the middle stop button 138 are operated, but there are cases where only the left stop button 137 is operated, or when neither the left stop button 137 nor the middle stop button 138 is operated. In this case, when the third period elapses, the rotating reels automatically come to a pseudo-stop. The order of automatic pseudo-stops is that the reels located on the left side have higher priority. However, in this embodiment, retraction control is allowed even when automatic pseudo-stopping of the reels is performed, and retraction control may be executed.

As with the automatic stop described above, the next reel is pseudo-stopped every time a specified period (e.g., 0.2 seconds) has elapsed, so the system is designed so that the order in which the reels pseudo-stop is performed is not reversed even if retraction control is performed for up to four frames during automatic pseudo-stop control. However, the specified period may be shortened or the interruption time may be lengthened, so that the order in which the reels pseudo-stop due to retraction control is reversed during automatic pseudo-stop control.

Also, instead of controlling the reels that are spinning at the end of the third period from the left at intervals of a predetermined period (for example, 0.2 seconds) in the same manner as when the stop button is operated, The reel control may be the same as when all stop buttons corresponding to the reels being rotated are operated at the same time. In this case, a specific pseudo-stop mode may be performed using the retraction control, or a pseudo-stop may be performed at a random point without performing the retraction control. Furthermore, if the rotating reel is not under constant speed control at the end of the third period (for example, if it has stepped out), it may be brought to a pseudo stop after passing through acceleration control → constant speed control, or Even if speed control is not applied, brake control may be executed to immediately bring the vehicle to a pseudo stop.

Next, we will explain some examples of the illumination patterns of the stop button LEDs, such as the left stop button LED 137a, the middle stop button LED 138b, and the right stop button LED 139a, and the order in which the reels stop.

In the pseudo game, as in the main game, when the conditions are met, the light emission mode of the stop button LEDs 137a to 139a changes from the first light emission mode to the second light emission mode.

FIG. 257 shows that in a pseudo game, the detection of the light-shielding piece of the right reel 112 is delayed, and as a result of performing the sequential push slide push operation before the three stop button LEDs 137a to 139a change to the second light emitting mode, retraction control is performed. 3 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where In the example of FIG. 257 as well, operation instruction notification (first notification) is executed in the pseudo game, and sequential push operations are performed in accordance with the operation instruction notification. Note that this example applies even if the forward push operation is performed without following the operation instruction notification, or if the forward push operation is performed at the player's discretion without the operation instruction notification being performed. be.

The following will focus on the differences from the example shown in Figure 254.

When the start lever 135 is operated at the timing of (a) and each of the reels 110 to 112 starts rotating, all of the stop button LEDs 137a to 139a are lit in the first light emission mode.

At the timing of (c), each reel 110 to 112 shifts to the constant speed 2 state.

At the timing of (d), the light-shielding piece of the left reel 110 is detected and the left stop button 137 transitions to an operation-receiving state, and at the timing of (e), the light-shielding piece of the center reel 111 is detected and the center stop button 138 transitions to an operation-receiving state. Then, the forward slide push operation is started before the light-shielding piece of the right reel 112 is detected. At the timing of (h), the left stop button 137 is operated, the left reel 110 is pulled in by four frames, the brake control of the left reel 110 is not started, and the pseudo stop of the left reel 110 is delayed. Then, at the timing of (h'), the center stop button 138 is operated, and the brake control is immediately executed on the center reel 111 in response to the operation of the center stop button 138, and the center reel 111 is pseudo-stopped by vibration control. At the end of the forward slide push operation, the right stop button 139 is operated (timing of (h''1)). At this timing (h''1), the light-blocking piece on the right reel 112 has not been detected, so operation of the right stop button 139 is not accepted and the right reel 112 continues to spin. Eventually, the left reel 110, which was being controlled to retract, stops. After that, at timing (f'), the light-blocking piece on the right reel 112 is detected and, of the three stop button LEDs 137a-139a, only the right stop button LED 139a enters the second light-emitting state and the right stop button 139 transitions to a state where it can accept operation.

The player operates the right stop button 139 again at timing (h''2) because the right reel 112 continues to rotate and the right stop button LED 139a is lit in the second light emission mode. In response to this second operation, the right reel 112 is immediately subjected to brake control and brought to a pseudo stop by vibration control. When the right reel 112 comes to a pseudo stop, the second notification is started, and then the main game is started from the timing (i).

Figure 258 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where detection of the light-shielding piece of the center reel 111 is delayed in a pseudo game, and a sequential slide push operation is performed before the three stop button LEDs 137a to 139a change to the second light emission mode, resulting in retraction control being performed.

The following will mainly explain the differences from the example shown in FIG. 257.

At the timing of (d), the light shielding piece of the left reel 110 is detected and the left stop button 137 shifts to a state ready for operation, and at the timing of (f), the light shielding piece of the right reel 112 is detected and the right stop button 139 is activated. Transition to a state where operations can be accepted. Then, before the light-shielding piece of the middle reel 111 is detected, a sequential slide push operation is started. At timing (h), the left stop button 137 is operated, the left reel 110 is controlled to pull in four frames, the brake control of the left reel 110 is not started, and the pseudo-stop of the left reel 110 is delayed. The middle stop button 138 is continuously operated at timing (h'1). At this timing (h'1), the light shielding piece of the middle reel 111 is not detected, the operation of the middle stop button 138 is not accepted, and the middle reel 111 continues to rotate. At the end of the sequential push slide push operation, the right stop button 139 is operated (timing (h'')), and the right reel 112 is immediately brake controlled in response to the operation of the right stop button 139, and vibration control is performed. A pseudo-stop occurs. Eventually, the left reel 110, which was under retraction control, stops. After that, at the timing (e'), the light shielding piece of the middle reel 111 is detected, and among the three stop button LEDs 137a to 139a, only the middle stop button LED 138a becomes the second light emitting mode, and the middle stop button 138 is in the state ready for operation. to move to.

Because the middle reel 111 continues to spin and the middle stop button LED 138a is lit in the second light emission mode, the player operates the middle stop button 138 again at timing (h'2). In response to this second operation, brake control is immediately performed on the middle reel 111, and the middle reel 111 comes to a pseudo-stop through vibration control. As the middle reel 111 comes to a pseudo-stop, a second notification is initiated, and then the main game begins at timing (i).

FIG. 259 shows that in a pseudo game, the detection of the light-shielding piece of the left reel 110 is delayed, and as a result of performing the sequential slide push operation before the three stop button LEDs 137a to 139a change to the second light emitting mode, retraction control is performed. 3 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where

The following will focus on the differences from the example shown in Figure 257.

In this example, the light-shielding piece on the right reel 112 is detected first (timing (f)), the right stop button 139 transitions to an operation-receiving state, the light-shielding piece on the center reel 111 is detected next (timing (e)), and the center stop button 138 transitions to an operation-receiving state. Then, the forward slide push operation is started before the light-shielding piece on the left reel 110 is detected. At timing (h1), the left stop button 137 is operated, but at this timing (h1), the light-shielding piece on the left reel 110 has not been detected, so the operation of the left stop button 137 is not accepted and the left reel 110 continues to rotate. Then, at timing (h'), the center stop button 138 is operated. The center reel 111 is controlled to retract by four frames, the brake control of the center reel 111 is not started, and the pseudo stop of the center reel 111 is delayed. At the end of the forward slide push operation, the right stop button 139 is operated (at timing (h'')). In response to the operation of the right stop button 139, brake control is immediately performed on the right reel 112, and the right reel 112 comes to a pseudo-stop by vibration control. In other words, after starting to spin, the right reel 112 comes to a pseudo-stop before the center reel 111 comes to a pseudo-stop, even if the center stop button 138 is operated before the right stop button 139 is operated, before the center stop button LED 138a and the right stop button LED 139a change to the second light emission mode.

Eventually, the center reel 111, which has been subjected to retraction control, comes to a pseudo-stop (timing (β)). After that, at timing (d'), the light-blocking piece on the left reel 110 is detected, and of the three stop button LEDs 137a-139a, only the left stop button LED 137a enters the second light-emitting state, and the left top button 137 transitions to a state in which it can accept operation. In Figure 259, just like Figure 252, the period from when the reels 110-112 start to rotate until the stop button LED changes to the second light-emitting state is shown as the fourth period. The right reel 112 and center reel 111 come to a stop within this fourth period.

Because the left reel 110 continues to spin and the left stop button LED 137a is lit in the second light emission mode, the player operates the left stop button 138 again at timing (h2). In response to this second operation, brake control is immediately performed on the left reel 110, and the left reel 110 comes to a pseudo stop through vibration control. As the left reel 110 comes to a pseudo stop, a second notification is initiated, and then the main game begins at timing (i).

FIG. 260 is a timing chart showing an example in which the left stop button 137 and middle stop button 138 are simultaneously pressed just before the third predetermined period elapses in a pseudo game.

In this example, when the stop buttons are pressed simultaneously, the operation of the stop button detected second or later is also treated as valid. That is, at the timing of (h), the left stop button 137 and the center stop button 138 are pressed simultaneously, and the operation of the left stop button 137 is detected first. As a result, the left reel 110 is immediately braked and pseudo-stopped by vibration control. Next, the operation of the center stop button 138 is detected, but the center reel 111 is retracted by four frames, and the brake control of the center reel 111 is not started, and the pseudo-stop of the center reel 111 is delayed. Note that even if the operation of the center stop button 138 is detected first and then the operation of the left stop button 137 is detected, the center reel 111 is retracted and the left reel 110 is pseudo-stopped immediately. Alternatively, the left reel 110 may be retracted and the center reel 111 may be pseudo-stopped immediately, or both the left reel 110 and the center reel 111 may be retracted.

Immediately after the simultaneous pressing is performed, a predetermined third period has elapsed (timing (α)), and the right stop button 139 is no longer operated. However, the automatic pseudo-stop function works for the right reel 112, and the reel automatically pseudo-stops. In the end, even if the right reel 112 automatically pseudo-stops, the middle reel 111 is in the middle of retraction control, and the pseudo-stop of the middle reel 111 comes at the latest timing (timing (β)). In this example, even if the simultaneous press operation is performed before the automatic pseudo stop, the reel that will enter the pseudo stop state before the automatic pseudo stop (the left reel 110 that pseudo stops at the timing of (h)) and the reel that will pseudo stop before the automatic pseudo stop After that, there is a reel that comes to a pseudo-stop state (the middle reel 111 that pseudo-stops at the timing (β)).

In the examples shown in Figures 253 to 260, games in which pseudo games are executed (pseudo games + main games) are shown, and in each of the pseudo games, the order in which the stop buttons are operated does not match the order in which the pseudo reels stop, but there are also cases in which the order in which the stop buttons are operated does not match the order in which the reels stop in the main games executed following the pseudo games, or only in the main games.

Further, although a game machine capable of executing a pseudo game is not equipped with an automatic reel stop function in the main game, it may be installed. In this case, if the stop operation is performed just before the second period elapses in the main game that is executed following the pseudo game, the reels that were stopped immediately before the elapsed time will be slower than the reels that automatically stop. Sometimes it may stop.

According to the above description,
“A plurality of rotatable reels [for example, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112],
a first stop button [e.g., middle stop button 138] operated by the player;
a second stop button [e.g., right stop button 139] operated by the player;
Equipped with
The plurality of reels are in a first state that can be shifted from a rotating state to a stopped state [for example, a real stop (determined stop) state in a real game or a pseudo stop state in a pseudo game] by operating the first stop button. 1 reel [for example, middle reel 111],
The plurality of reels are in a second state that can be shifted from a rotating state to a stopped state [for example, a real stop (determined stop) state in a real game or a pseudo stop state in a pseudo game] by operating the second stop button. It also includes the second reel [for example, the right reel 112],
After the second reel starts rotating, if the second stop button is operated before the first stop button is operated [for example, the timing shown in FIG. 248 (h'') , the timing of FIG. 255 (h'')], the first reel enters the stopped state [for example, the timing of FIG. 248 (h'), the timing of FIG. 255 (h')]. [For example, the timing in FIG. 248 (h''), the timing in FIG. 255 (h'')],
After the second reel starts rotating, if the first stop button is operated before the second stop button is operated [for example, the timing shown in FIG. 247(h'), 249 (h'), the timing of FIG. 254 (h'), the timing of FIG. 256 (h')], the first reel shifts to the stopped state [for example, ), the timing of FIG. 249(β), the timing of FIG. 254(β), the timing of FIG. 256(β)] [For example, the timing of FIG. 247(h'' ) timing, FIG. 249 (α) timing, FIG. 254 (h'') timing, FIG. 256 (α) timing],
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

With this gaming machine, a reel (the second reel) different from the reel corresponding to the stop operation (the first reel) moves to a stopped state first, which can give the player a sense of discomfort and increase the player's interest in the game.

The stopped state may be a state in which the reels appear to have stopped (a pseudo-stop state in a pseudo game), or the main game is started by a pseudo start from a pseudo game, and the reels are stopped in the main game. It may be in a stopped state (a pseudo-stop may be referred to as a real stop or a definite stop) (the same applies below).

According to the above description,
"A plurality of rotatable reels (e.g., a left reel 110, a center reel 111, and a right reel 112) and
Stop operation means (e.g., stop buttons 137 to 139) are provided in a one-to-one relationship with each of the reels, and each of the stop operation means is operated by a player;
An operation instruction means (e.g., a performance image display device 157, a speaker 272, 277) capable of executing an operation instruction notification (e.g., a first notification (notification by push order navigation performance)) that indicates the operation order of the stop operation means;
Equipped with
The stop operation means includes a first stop button [e.g., a middle stop button 138] and a second stop button [e.g., a right stop button 139],
the plurality of reels include a first reel (e.g., a center reel 111) that can be shifted from a spinning state to a stopped state (e.g., a real stop (fixed stop) state in a real game or a pseudo stop state in a pseudo game) by operating the first stop button;
The plurality of reels also includes a second reel (e.g., the right reel 112) that can be shifted from a spinning state to a stopped state (e.g., a real stop (fixed stop) state in a real game or a pseudo stop state in a pseudo game) by operating the second stop button,
When the second stop button is operated before the first stop button is operated in accordance with the operation instruction notification after starting rotation [e.g., the timing of FIG. 248(h''), the timing of FIG. 255(h'')], the second reel may transition to a stopped state before the first reel transitions to a stopped state [e.g., the timing of FIG. 248(h'), the timing of FIG. 255(h')] [e.g., the timing of FIG. 248(h''), the timing of FIG. 255(h'')],
Even if the first stop button is operated before the second stop button is operated in accordance with the operation instruction notification after starting rotation [e.g., the timing of FIG. 247(h'), the timing of FIG. 249(h'), the timing of FIG. 254(h'), the timing of FIG. 256(h')], the second reel may transition to a stopped state before the first reel transitions to a stopped state [e.g., the timing of FIG. 247(β), the timing of FIG. 249(β), the timing of FIG. 254(β), the timing of FIG. 256(β)] [e.g., the timing of FIG. 247(h''), the timing of FIG. 249(α), the timing of FIG. 254(h''), the timing of FIG. 256(α)],
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He explained:

With this gaming machine, even if a player performs a stop operation in accordance with the operation instruction notification, a reel (the second reel) different from the reel corresponding to the stop operation (the first reel) may stop first, giving the player a sense of discomfort and increasing the player's interest in the game.

According to the above description,
“A plurality of rotatable reels [for example, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112],
a first stop button [e.g., middle stop button 138] operated by the player;
a second stop button [e.g., right stop button 139] operated by the player;
Equipped with
The plurality of reels are in a first state that can be shifted from a rotating state to a stopped state [for example, a real stop (determined stop) state in a real game or a pseudo stop state in a pseudo game] by operating the first stop button. 1 reel [for example, middle reel 111],
The plurality of reels are in a second state that can be shifted from a rotating state to a stopped state [for example, a real stop (determined stop) state in a real game or a pseudo stop state in a pseudo game] by operating the second stop button. It also includes the second reel [for example, the right reel 112],
In a certain game, when the first stop button is operated before the second stop button is operated, the second reel is moved before the first reel shifts to a stopped state. transitions to a stopped state (hereinafter referred to as the "first case") [for example, the timing of FIG. 247 (h''), the timing of FIG. 249 (α), the timing of FIG. 254 (h''), The timing shown in FIG. 256 (α)], or the case where the first reel shifts to the stopped state before the second reel shifts to the stopped state (hereinafter referred to as the "second case") [ For example, there is also the timing shown in FIG. 246 (h'), the timing shown in FIG. 253 (h'),
The gaming value given to the player in the first case [for example, the number of gaming media paid out] and the gaming value given to the player in the second case [for example, the number of gaming media paid out] are are the same,
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

According to this gaming machine, in addition to the second case in which the reel corresponding to the stop operation (the first reel) shifts to the stopped state before a different reel (the second reel), the reel corresponding to the stop operation There is also a first case in which a reel (the second reel) different from the reel (the first reel) enters the stopped state first, and in the first case, it may give the player a sense of discomfort. , the interest in playing games may improve. On the other hand, whether in the first case or the second case, the game value awarded to the player remains the same, so the player will not be disadvantaged.

Note that the gaming value is, for example, the profit given to the player. The same gaming value may mean that the amount of gaming media awarded to the player is the same, or a game that maintains an advantageous gaming state (for example, AT state) that is given to the player. The number of additional games may be the same.

Also,
"Equipped with operation instruction means capable of executing operation instruction notification for instructing the order of operation of the first stop button and the second stop button,
When the first stop button and the second stop button are operated according to the first operation order instructed by the operation instruction means, the order in which the first reel and the second reel are stopped is as follows: It may be the same as the first operation order, or it may be different from the first operation order,
Even if the first stop button and the second stop button are operated in a second operation order different from the first operation order instructed by the operation instruction means, the first reel and the order of stopping the second reel may be the same as the order of operation of the first reel,
In a game where the first operation order is instructed by the operation instruction means, a first game value is awarded when the first stop button and the second stop button are operated in accordance with the first operation order. is,
In a game where the first operation order is instructed by the instruction means, as a result of operating the first stop button and the second stop button in the second operation order, the first reel and the second stop button are Even if the second reel stop order is the same as the first operation order, the first gaming value will not be awarded.
A game machine characterized by: ”
It may be.

According to the above description,
“A plurality of rotatable reels [for example, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112],
a first stop button [e.g., middle stop button 138] operated by the player;
a second stop button [e.g., right stop button 139] operated by the player;
A game result notification means [for example, effect image display device 157] that can execute game result notification [for example, stop small role notification, etc.];
Equipped with
The plurality of reels are in a first state that can be shifted from a rotating state to a stopped state [for example, a real stop (determined stop) state in a real game or a pseudo stop state in a pseudo game] by operating the first stop button. 1 reel [for example, middle reel 111],
The plurality of reels are in a second state that can be shifted from a rotating state to a stopped state [for example, a real stop (determined stop) state in a real game or a pseudo stop state in a pseudo game] by operating the second stop button. It also includes the second reel [for example, the right reel 112],
In a certain game, when the first stop button is operated before the second stop button is operated, the second reel is moved before the first reel shifts to a stopped state. transitions to a stopped state (hereinafter referred to as the "first case") [for example, the timing of FIG. 247 (h''), the timing of FIG. 249 (α), the timing of FIG. 254 (h''), The timing shown in FIG. 256 (α)], or the case where the first reel shifts to the stopped state before the second reel shifts to the stopped state (hereinafter referred to as the "second case") [ For example, there is also the timing shown in FIG. 246 (h'), the timing shown in FIG. 253 (h'),
The timing at which the game result notification means starts executing the result notification is later in the first case than in the second case [for example, the timing at which the game result notification means starts execution of the result notification is delayed by the amount of delay in the timing when the stop state is reached by the pull-in control. ] There are cases where
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

According to this gaming machine, in addition to the second case in which the reel corresponding to the stop operation (the first reel) transitions to a stopped state before the different reel (the second reel), there is also the first case in which the different reel (the second reel) transitions to a stopped state before the reel corresponding to the stop operation (the first reel), and in the first case, it is possible to give the player a sense of incongruity, which may increase the player's interest in the game. Also, since the timing of starting the execution of the result notification is later in the game in which the first case occurs than in the game in which the second case occurs, it is easier for the player to understand that the first case has occurred, which may give the player a sense of incongruity and further increase the player's interest in the game.

The result notification may be a stop small role notification, a notification of the number of acquired gaming values (gaming media), or a notification of an advantageous gaming state to which it has been decided to proceed. It may be a bonus transfer notification or an AT transfer notification), or it may be a notification of information updated due to the completion of a game (number of credits, number of games, remaining AT count, etc.).

For example, when the second stop operation is performed by the first stop button and then the third stop operation is performed by the second stop button, if the first reel is controlled to retract by four frames and the second reel is controlled to retract by one frame, the first reel will be stopped before the second reel is stopped (the second case). On the other hand, in the same manner, even if the second stop operation is performed by the first stop button and then the third stop operation is performed by the second stop button, if the first reel is controlled to retract by four frames and the second reel is not controlled to retract, the second reel will be stopped before the first reel is stopped (the first case). The timing of starting the execution of the result notification may be later in the game in the first case than in the game in the second case, but it varies depending on the operation interval of the first stop button and the second stop button. In other words, even in the second case, if the operation interval is large (if the third stop operation using the second stop button is performed after a certain time has elapsed), the timing at which the result notification begins will be later in the game in the second case than in the game in the first case.

Also,
"Even if the first reel is in a stoppable state [for example, a state in which the index sensor detects the light-shielding piece of the middle reel (step S310i shown in FIG. 222)] and the first stop button is operated and then the second stop button is operated [for example, the timing of FIG. 247(h''), the timing of FIG. 254(h'')], the second reel may transition to a stopped state before the first reel transitions to a stopped state [for example, the timing of FIG. 247(h'), the timing of FIG. 254(β)], [for example, the timing of FIG. 247(h''), the timing of FIG. 254(h'')],
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, the reel corresponding to the later operation (the second reel) stops first, making it easier for the player to recognize that the order in which they were operated differs from the order in which they stopped, giving the player a greater sense of incongruity and potentially increasing the player's interest in the game.

If the first stop button is operated before detecting a detection piece (e.g., a light-blocking piece) on the first reel, then operating the second stop button thereafter will cause the second reel to transition to a stopped state before the first reel transitions to a stopped state.

Also,
"The second reel may transition to a stopped state before the first reel transitions to a stopped state [for example, the timing of FIG. 249(β) or FIG. 256(β)] even if the second stop button is not operated after the first stop button is operated [for example, the timing of FIG. 249(h') or FIG. 256(h')] [for example, the timing of FIG. 249(α) or FIG. 256(α)],
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, the unoperated reel that is different from the reel that corresponds to the operation stops first, which can give the player a more strange feeling and increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition,
"A control means capable of executing retraction control of the first reel,
the second reel is in a spinning state, and if the second stop button is not operated before a predetermined period (e.g., a second period (40 seconds) or a third period (25 seconds)) has elapsed, the second reel automatically transitions from the spinning state to a stopped state upon the elapse of the predetermined period;
When the first stop button is operated immediately before the lapse of the predetermined period to perform retraction control of the first reel by a certain number of frames equal to or greater than one, the second reel, which automatically transitions from a spinning state to a stopped state as the predetermined period passes, may transition to a stopped state before the first reel [for example, the timing of FIG. 249(α) or FIG. 256(α)],
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
may be also possible.

In this case, the second stop button is not operated.

In addition, on gaming machines where automatic reel stopping is performed in the main game, a pseudo game in which a pseudo stop that makes it look like the reels have stopped is not started. However, a pseudo game may be started. In addition, on gaming machines where a pseudo game can be performed, automatic reel stopping can be performed in the pseudo game, but automatic reel stopping is not performed in the main game. However, automatic reel stopping may also be performed in the main game.

Also,
`` Equipped with a notification means capable of notifying that the reel is in a stoppable state,
The plurality of reels are capable of transitioning from an unstoppable state to a stoppable state [for example, a state in which a light shielding piece of the reel is detected when the rotating reel is in a constant speed state] for each reel,
The notifying means is a first notifying means [for example, a middle stop button] capable of giving a first notice that the first reel in a rotating state is in a stoppable state [for example, lighting in a second light emitting mode]. LED138a],
The notifying means is a second notifying means [for example, a right stop button] capable of giving a second notification that the second reel in a rotating state is in a stoppable state [for example, lighting in a second light emitting mode]. LED139a].
The first notification means does not execute the first notification unless all of the plurality of reels transition to the stoppable state,
The second notification means does not execute the second notification unless all of the plurality of reels transition to the stoppable state,
After the second reel starts rotating, the second stop button is pressed before the first stop button is operated before the first notification and the second notification are executed. is operated, the first reel may shift to the stopped state before shifting to the stopped state [for example, the timing of FIG. 248 (h''), the timing of FIG. 255 (h'') ) timing],
After the second reel starts rotating, the first stop button is pressed before the second stop button is operated before the first notification and the second notification are executed. Even when the first reel is operated, the first reel may shift to the stopped state before shifting to the stopped state [for example, the timing of FIG. 252 (h''), the timing of FIG. 259 ( h'') timing],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the reels that are different from the reels that correspond to the operation received before the notification from the notification means stop first, thereby giving the player a more sense of discomfort and improving the interest of the game. There are cases where

Note that after the first reel starts rotating, the second reel is activated before the first stop button is operated before the first notification and the second notification are executed. Even when the stop button is operated, the second reel may shift to the stopped state before it shifts to the stopped state [for example, the timing shown in FIG. 248(α), Timing of FIG. 255(α)].

Also,
``If the second stop button is operated within the period from when the reels start rotating until when the notification means starts executing the notification [for example, the fourth period shown in FIG. 249] The first stop button may be operated first, and the second reel may shift to the stopped state within the period before the first reel shifts to the stopped state [for example, as shown in FIG. '') timing, Figure 259 (h'') timing],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

With this gaming machine, a different reel stops before the notification from the notification means, which can give the player a more strange feeling and increase the player's interest in the game.

Also,
"After the second reel transitions to a stopped state within the period, the first reel may also transition to a stopped state within the period [for example, the timing of FIG. 252 (β) or the timing of FIG. 259 (β)],
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

According to this gaming machine, a reel different from the reel corresponding to the operation received before the notification from the notification means stops first, and then the reel corresponding to the operation stops, causing a feeling of discomfort to the player. This may improve the interest of the game.

Also,
"The gaming machine is capable of executing a game in which a pseudo game is played,
The pseudo game is a reel effect in which a pseudo stop is executed to make it look like the reel has stopped before the actual game in which the reel stops.
In a game in which a pseudo game is executed [for example, a pseudo game or a main game], if the second stop button is operated before the first stop button is operated after starting rotation [for example, at the timing of FIG. 255(h'')], the second reel may transition to a stopped state before the first reel transitions to a stopped state [for example, at the timing of FIG. 255(h')] [for example, at the timing of FIG. 255(h'')],
In a game in which a pseudo game is executed [for example, a pseudo game or a main game], even if the first stop button is operated before the second stop button is operated after starting rotation of the second reel, the second reel may transition to a stopped state [for example, the timing of FIG. 256 (β)] before the first reel transitions to a stopped state [for example, the timing of FIG. 256 (α)],
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

According to this game machine, even in a game in which a pseudo game is executed, it is possible to give the player a more sense of discomfort, and the interest in the game may be improved.

In addition,
"The second reel starts rotating in the period before the main game starts (the so-called pseudo game period) in the game in which the pseudo game is executed, and then the first stop button is pressed. If the second stop button is operated before the second stop button is operated, the first reel may shift to a pseudo-stop stop state before shifting to a pseudo-stop stop state. can be,
Even if the first stop button is operated after the second reel starts rotating during the period and before the second stop button is operated, the second reel The reel may shift to a pseudo-stopped state before it shifts to a pseudo-stopped state,
A game machine characterized by: ”
It may be.

or,
"The second reel starts rotating during the period of the main game in the game in which the pseudo game is executed (the period after the pseudo stop ends), and then the first stop button is operated. If the second stop button is operated before the first reel moves to the fixed stop stop state, the first reel may shift to the fixed stop stop state,
Even if the first stop button is operated after the second reel starts rotating during the period and before the second stop button is operated, the second reel The reel may shift to a fixed stop state before it shifts to a fixed stop state,
A game machine characterized by: ”
It may be.

The functions and effects described in the above embodiments are merely a list of the most suitable functions and effects, and the functions and effects of the present invention are not limited to those described in the embodiments. do not have.

Note that even if a constituent element is included only in the description of an embodiment, example, modification, various examples, appendices, etc. described above, that constituent element may be applied to other embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, appendices, etc. In other words, unless there is a factor preventing the application, even if a constituent element included only in the description of an embodiment, example, modification, various examples, appendices, etc. is applied to other embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, appendices, etc., it will still be valid as a single cohesive technical idea.

<Regarding the locking mechanism of the front door 102 of the slot machine 100>
Next, an example of a lock mechanism for the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to Figures 261 to 264. In the following description, the same reference numerals will be used to designate components already described in other embodiments (e.g., Figures 17 to 32), and the description will be omitted. In addition, for components that are inconsistent between the following description and the previous embodiment, the words and reference numerals of this example will take precedence.

FIG. 261 is a side view showing the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 in a closed state. The slot machine 100 is internally provided with a locking mechanism 1401 that locks the front door 102 in a closed state to the main body 101, and this locking mechanism 1401 is shown in dotted lines in FIG. 261. This locking mechanism 1401 includes a lock main body 1401A provided on the front door 102 side and a locked shaft 1401B provided on the main body 101 side. When the front door 102 is closed, the locking part 1402 (described later) of the lock body 1401A is fixed to the locked shaft 1401B, and the front door 102 in the closed state is locked to the body 101 as shown in FIG. Ru. Note that the lock body 1401A moves on a circular orbit in response to the opening and closing of the front door 102, but when the lock body 1401A and the locked shaft 1401B are close to each other, this movement is a movement along the front and back direction of the slot machine 100. It can be considered as Therefore, in the following explanation, it is assumed that the moving direction of the lock body 1401A is the front-rear direction of the slot machine 100 unless otherwise specified. Note that hereinafter, the state in which the locking portion 1402 of the lock body 1401A is locked on the locked shaft 1401B is referred to as a locked state, and the state in which the locking portion 1402 of the lock body 1401A is not locked on the locked shaft 1401B is referred to as a locked state. is called the unlocked state.

262(a) is a diagram showing the lock body 1401A from the side of the slot machine 100 when the lock mechanism 1401 is in the unlocked state, and FIG. 262(b) is a diagram showing the lock body 1401A in FIG. 262(a). FIG. 262(c) is a view showing the lock body 1401A when the lock mechanism 1401 is in the locked state from the side side of the slot machine 100. Furthermore, FIGS. 263(a) to 263(d) are diagrams showing the operation of the lock body 1401A and the locked shaft 1401B.

The lock body 1401A has a locking portion 1402 and a housing portion 1404. The accommodating part 1404 has a space for accommodating the locking part 1402, and an opening through which a part of the locking part 1402 can be exposed is formed on the back side. FIG. 262(a) shows a state in which a portion of the locking portion 1402 accommodated in the accommodation portion 1404 is exposed from the back side of the accommodation portion 1404. This locking portion 1402 has a recessed portion 1402DP formed therein, and is rotatable around a rotating shaft 1403. Further, the locking portion 1402 is biased by a spring member (not shown) in the direction of protruding from the opening of the housing portion 1404 toward the back side (clockwise in FIG. 262(a)). In the unlocked state (FIGS. 262(a) and 262(b)), a portion of the locking portion 1402 protrudes from the back side of the accommodating portion 1404 and comes into contact with the lower end 1404BB of the opening of the accommodating portion 1404, It will come to a halt at that position.

The receiving section 1404 has an entrance path 1404ER formed along the movement direction (front-rear direction), and the front door 102 moves to receive the locked shaft 1401B along the entrance path 1404ER (Fig. 263 (a) to (d)). In the entrance path 1404ER, a part of the surface of the locking section 1402 (hereinafter, the receiving surface 1402RS) is located toward the opening of the entrance path 1404ER, and the receiving surface 1402RS is pushed by the locked shaft 1401B that enters along the entrance path 1404ER, and the locking section 1402 rotates in a direction to be received in the receiving section 1404 (counterclockwise in Fig. 262 (a)). Then, when the front door 102 moves to a position where it is in a closed state, the locking section 1402 is fixed by a latch mechanism (not shown) (Fig. 262 (c), Fig. 263 (d)). At this time, the locking portion 1402 is locked to the locked shaft 1401B. More specifically, the rotation changes the orientation of the locking portion 1402, making the locked shaft 1401B unable to move in the front-rear direction inside the recess 1402DP, and the front door 102 is locked. Note that by inserting a door key into the door key hole 140 and rotating it, the locking portion 1402 is released from the latch mechanism, and the front door 102 can be opened.

The main body 101 is also provided with a door sensor 1406 for detecting the closed state of the front door 102. This door sensor 1406 is pressed by the lock main body 1401A when the front door 102 is closed, and when the front door 102 is completely closed (Fig. 263 (d)), a signal is output indicating that the front door 102 is closed. Note that the member that presses the door sensor 1406 does not have to be the lock main body 1401A, but may be another part of the front door 102. Alternatively, the door sensor 1406 may be provided on the front door 102, and the main body 101 may press the door sensor 1406.

When performing maintenance on the slot machine 100, it is necessary to open the front door 102. However, if the front door 102 closes naturally and enters the locked state while the user is not paying attention, the front door 102 will have to be opened again, resulting in a decrease in the efficiency of maintenance work. If a stopper is used to prevent the front door 102 from being locked, the number of tools on hand will increase, making the work complicated. To solve this problem, the locking mechanism 1401 of this embodiment is designed to maintain the unlocked state by using a setting key used for maintenance work. This specific configuration will be explained below.

FIG. 264(a) is a side view showing the setting key SK inserted into the lock body 1401A, and FIG. 264(b) is a side view showing the setting key SK in FIG. 264(a) with a solid line. FIG. 264(c) is a view of the lock body 1401A of FIG. 264(a) viewed from the back side. In the lock main body 1401A of this embodiment, a slit 1401SL into which a setting key SK can be inserted is formed between the accommodating part 1404 and the locking part 1402 (see FIG. 262(b)). FIGS. 264(a) to 264(c) show a state in which the setting key SK is inserted into this slit 1401SL. Note that the inserted setting key SK is configured to be supported by the lower end 1404BB of the opening of the housing part 1404 and the rotating shaft 1403 so as not to fall into the interior of the housing part 1404.

In FIG. 262(b), there are two gaps between the storage portion 1404 and the locking portion 1402, but there is only one gap (slit 1401SL) through which the setting key SK can be inserted, and the other gap is configured such that the setting key SK cannot be inserted.

In this embodiment, the width of the slit 1401SL into which the setting key can be inserted is slightly larger than the thickness of the setting key SK, and the setting key SK is not clamped within the slit 1401SL. However, the width of the slit 1401SL may be narrower so that when the setting key SK is inserted, the slit 1401SL is pushed open, and the reaction force clamps the setting key SK. In this case, it is possible to prevent the setting key SK from falling out of the lock body 1401A and being lost.

When the setting key SK is inserted as shown in FIG. 264(a), even if the front door 102 is moved, the locked shaft 1401B contacts the setting key SK as shown in FIG. 264(d), The locking shaft 1401B becomes unable to enter along the entry path 1404ER. In this state, the front door 102 is not in the locked state and can be maintained in the unlocked state.

Here, the position where the locked shaft 1401B contacts the setting key SK (diagonally lower left in FIG. 264(d), the right side of the locking part 1402 in FIG. 264(c)) and the position where it contacts the receiving surface 1402RS (In Fig. 263(b), it is directly on the side (left), in Fig. 264(c), it is on the left side of the view setting key SK).By making the position different from the one on the right (right side (left) in Fig. 263(b), and on the left side of the view setting key SK in Fig. 264(c)), the same position of the locked shaft 1401B does not wear out and increases durability. be able to. Note that the above-mentioned difference in position may be different in the front-rear direction of the slot machine 100, or may be different in the up-down direction, and is not limited to the configuration of this embodiment.

Note that in a state where the setting key SK is inserted as shown in FIG. 264(a), a signal indicating the closed state is not output (the closed state is not detected). This configuration may be such that the door sensor 1406 does not come into contact with the lock body 1401A (the detection piece does not move) so that the closed state is not detected, or the door sensor 1406 contacts the lock body 1401A but does not detect the closed state. The detection piece may not move to the detection position.

In addition, in FIG. 264(a), a part of the setting key SK is in a state protruding from the accommodating part 1404, but the configuration is not limited to this, and it may be accommodated in the accommodating part 1404. Note that by having a portion of the setting key SK protrude from the housing portion 1404, the setting key SK can be easily taken out at the end of the work.

When the door key is operated in the state shown in FIG. 264(a), the locking portion 1402 is in the unlocked state and therefore maintains its current position, and the setting key SK also maintains its current position (the state shown in FIG. 264(a)). Therefore, even if an operator forgets that the setting key SK is inserted and operates the door key, it is possible to prevent the setting key SK from falling or being lost. Note that, in order to maintain the state shown in FIG. 264(a) when the door key is operated, the door key may be operated clockwise or counterclockwise. In addition, although the present embodiment has been described as a case in which the position or position of the locking portion 1402 does not change, the setting key SK may be configured to maintain its inserted state even if its position or position changes.

Further, in this embodiment, it is possible to visually confirm whether the locking portion 1402 is in a locked state or an unlocked state in the state shown in FIG. 264(d). Note that in this embodiment, the unlocked state can be determined by visually recognizing the locking part 1402 that protrudes to the outside of the housing part 1404; however, for example, if the locking part 1402 is visually recognized in the locked state. Even if this is possible, the configuration is such that it is possible to visually confirm whether the locking portion 1402 is in a locked state or an unlocked state. That is, it is sufficient that the locking portion 1402 is visible in either the locked state or the unlocked state. Further, when the setting key SK is visually recognized in the state shown in FIG. 264(d), it can also be confirmed that the setting key SK is in the unlocked state. Furthermore, there are no particular limitations on the position or direction of viewing, and it may be possible to check from the boundary between the front door 102 and the main body 101 (the side of the slot machine 100), or from above the slot machine 100. It may be. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 264(d), the reel unit and the main control board may be visible from a position where they can be seen.

In this embodiment, the configuration using the setting key SK has been described, but it may also be configured to use, for example, a game medal or a 500 yen coin. Figure 264 (e) shows an example of a game medal MD inserted into the lock body 1401A. The metal piece for maintaining the unlocked state is not limited to the above, but by using one that is used during maintenance work, the trouble of preparing a separate stopper can be eliminated.

In the above embodiment, the lock body 1401A is provided on the front door 102 side, and the engaged shaft 1401B is provided on the main body 101 side. However, the engaged shaft 1401B may be provided on the front door 102 side, and the lock body 1401A may be provided on the main body 101 side. In addition, although the present embodiment describes a configuration in which one lock mechanism 1401 is provided, a configuration in which multiple such lock mechanisms are provided may also be used. In this case, there may be a lock mechanism located near the front and a lock mechanism located near the rear along the front-to-rear direction of the slot machine 100.

[Technical Concepts Corresponding to the Embodiments of the Lock Mechanism of the Front Door 102 of the Slot Machine 100]
Below, the technical ideas described in the description of Figures 261 to 264 will be described with reference to the corresponding configurations.

In the above explanation,
A door body (e.g., a front door 102),
A main body (e.g., main body 101);
a door lock mechanism (e.g., lock mechanism 1401) that goes from an unlocked state to a locked state when a locking portion (e.g., locking portion 1402) and a locked portion (e.g., locked shaft 1401B) are locked;
A gaming machine equipped with
The door lock mechanism has a receiving portion (e.g., receiving portion 1404) capable of receiving the locking portion,
It is possible to put the device into a predetermined state (e.g., FIG. 264(a)) in which a metal piece (e.g., a setting key SK) is inserted into a slit-shaped space (e.g., slit 1401SL) formed by the locking portion in the unlocked state and the inner wall of the housing portion,
In the predetermined state, even if an attempt is made to close the door body, the certain metal piece contacts the locked portion before the locking portion contacts the locked portion, and the door body is maintained in an open state (for example, FIG. 264(d)).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine makes it easier to keep the door open, improving the ease with which store staff can clean, maintain, and inspect the machine. It also prevents deterioration of the locking parts over time.

Further, the game machine described above,
In the predetermined state, the certain metal piece protrudes more than the locking part with respect to the locked part (for example, FIG. 264(a));
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this gaming machine, the door body can be kept open without the locking part coming into contact with the locked part.

Further, the game machine described above,
In the predetermined state, a portion of the certain metal piece protrudes from the accommodation portion (for example, FIG. 264(a));
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

This machine makes it easy to remove certain metal pieces after work is completed.

Further, the game machine described above,
The slit-shaped space has a lower end of its opening (for example, a lower end 1404BB in FIG. 262(b)) formed by the accommodating part,
The locking portion is rotatable around a shaft portion (for example, a rotating shaft 1403),
In the predetermined state, the certain metal piece is supported by the lower end of the opening and the shaft portion (for example, FIG. 4(a));
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this game machine, it is possible to prevent a certain metal piece from entering the depths of the accommodating part.

Further, the game machine described above,
When the certain metal piece is inserted into the slit-like space, the slit-like space is expanded by the thickness of the certain metal piece and becomes the predetermined state (for example, when the setting key SK is inserted When the slit 1401SL is pushed and expanded, the setting key SK may be held by the reaction force."
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

This gaming machine has a metal piece that is clamped to prevent it from falling or getting lost during operation.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The certain metal piece is a setting key, a game medal, or a 500 yen coin.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A door body (e.g., a front door 102),
A main body (e.g., main body 101);
a door lock mechanism (e.g., lock mechanism 1401) that goes from an unlocked state to a locked state when a locking portion (e.g., locking portion 1402) and a locked portion (e.g., locked shaft 1401B) are locked;
A door sensor (e.g., door sensor 1406) that detects the open/closed state of the door body;
A gaming machine equipped with
The door lock mechanism has a receiving portion (e.g., receiving portion 1404) capable of receiving the locking portion,
It is possible to put the device into a predetermined state (e.g., FIG. 264(a)) in which a metal piece (e.g., a setting key SK) is inserted into a slit-shaped space (e.g., slit 1401SL) formed by the locking portion in the unlocked state and the inner wall of the housing portion,
In the predetermined state, even if the door body is to be closed, the certain metal piece contacts the locked portion before the locking portion contacts the locked portion, and the door body is maintained in an open state (for example, FIG. 264(d)).
In the predetermined state, the door sensor does not detect a closed state of the door body.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this game machine, the door body can be easily maintained in an open state, and the work efficiency of cleaning, maintenance, and inspection by store staff can be improved. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent deterioration of the locking portion and the door sensor over time.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
In the predetermined state, the certain metal piece protrudes more toward the engaged portion than the engaging portion (for example, FIG. 264(a)).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this game machine, the open state of the door body can be maintained without bringing the locking part and the locked part into contact.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
In the predetermined state, a part of the metal piece protrudes from the housing portion (for example, FIG. 264(a)).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This machine makes it easy to remove certain metal pieces after work is completed.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The slit-shaped space has an opening whose lower end (for example, a lower end 1404BB in FIG. 262(b)) is formed by the storage portion,
The locking portion is rotatable around a shaft portion (e.g., a rotation shaft 1403),
In the predetermined state, the certain metal piece is supported by the lower end of the opening and the shaft portion (for example, FIG. 04(a)).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This machine can prevent metal pieces from getting stuck deep inside the housing.

Further, the game machine described above,
The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2,
When the certain metal piece is inserted into the slit-like space, the slit-like space is expanded by the thickness of the certain metal piece and becomes the predetermined state (for example, when the setting key SK is inserted When the slit 1401SL is pushed and expanded, the setting key SK may be held by the reaction force."
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

This gaming machine has a metal piece that is clamped to prevent it from falling or getting lost during operation.

Further, the game machine described above,
The certain metal piece is a setting key, a game medal, or a 500 yen coin,
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A door body (for example, front door 102),
a main body (for example, main body 101);
A door locking mechanism (for example, a locking mechanism 1401) that changes from an unlocked state to a locked state when a locking part (for example, a locking part 1402) and a locked part (for example, a locked shaft 1401B) are locked; ,
A game machine comprising:
The door lock mechanism has a housing part (for example, housing part 1404) that can house the locking part,
A predetermined state in which a certain metal piece (for example, setting key SK) is inserted into a slit-shaped space (for example, slit 1401SL) formed by the locking part in the unlocked state and the inner wall of the accommodating part ( For example, it is possible to set it as FIG. 264(a)),
In the predetermined state, even if an attempt is made to close the door body, the certain metal piece comes into contact with the locked part before the locking part and the locked state is not achieved, so that the door body is not in the open state. is maintained (e.g., FIG. 264(d)),
The part of the locked part that the locking part contacts is different from the part of the locked part that the certain metal piece contacts (for example, FIG. 264(d));
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, the door body can be easily maintained in an open state, and the work efficiency of cleaning, maintenance, and inspection by store staff can be improved. Moreover, aging deterioration of the locking portion and the locked portion can be prevented.

Further, the game machine described above,
In the predetermined state, the certain metal piece protrudes more than the locking portion with respect to the locked portion (for example, FIG. 264(a));
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this gaming machine, the door body can be kept open without the locking part coming into contact with the locked part.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
In the predetermined state, a part of the metal piece protrudes from the housing portion (for example, FIG. 264(a)).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this game machine, it is easy to take out a certain piece of metal after finishing the work.

Further, the game machine described above,
The slit-shaped space has a lower end of its opening (for example, a lower end 1404BB in FIG. 262(b)) formed by the accommodating part,
The locking portion is rotatable around a shaft portion (for example, a rotating shaft 1403),
In the predetermined state, the certain metal piece is supported by the lower end of the opening and the shaft portion (for example, FIG. 4(a));
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

This machine can prevent metal pieces from getting stuck deep inside the housing.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When the certain metal piece is inserted into the slit-shaped space, the thickness of the certain metal piece causes the slit-shaped space to expand and reach the predetermined state (for example, see the description that "when the setting key SK is inserted, the slit 1401SL is expanded, and the setting key SK may be clamped by the reaction force").
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this game machine, by holding a certain metal piece, it is possible to prevent it from falling or being lost during work.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The certain metal piece is a setting key, a game medal, or a 500 yen coin.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A door body (e.g., a front door 102),
A main body (e.g., main body 101);
a door lock mechanism (e.g., lock mechanism 1401) that goes from an unlocked state to a locked state when a locking portion (e.g., locking portion 1402) and a locked portion (e.g., locked shaft 1401B) are locked;
A gaming machine equipped with
The door lock mechanism has a receiving portion (e.g., receiving portion 1404) capable of receiving the locking portion,
The door lock mechanism can be changed from a locked state to an unlocked state by releasing the engagement between the engaging portion and the engaged portion by operating a door key,
It is possible to put the device into a predetermined state (e.g., FIG. 264(a)) in which a metal piece (e.g., a setting key SK) is inserted into a slit-shaped space (e.g., slit 1401SL) formed by the locking portion in the unlocked state and the inner wall of the housing portion,
In the predetermined state, even if the door body is to be closed, the certain metal piece contacts the locked portion before the locking portion contacts the locked portion, and the door body is maintained in an open state (for example, FIG. 264(d)).
In the predetermined state, the predetermined state is maintained even if the door key is operated (for example, the state of FIG. 264(a) is maintained even if the door key is operated),
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this game machine, the door body can be easily maintained in an open state, and the work efficiency of cleaning, maintenance, and inspection by store staff can be improved. Moreover, deterioration of the locking portion over time can also be prevented. Furthermore, even if the operator forgets that he is inserting a certain metal piece and operates the door key, it is possible to prevent the metal piece from falling or being lost.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
In the predetermined state, the certain metal piece protrudes more toward the engaged portion than the engaging portion (for example, FIG. 264(a)).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the door body can be kept open without the locking part coming into contact with the locked part.

Further, the game machine described above,
In the predetermined state, a part of the certain metal piece protrudes from the accommodation portion (for example, FIG. 264(a));
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

This machine makes it easy to remove certain metal pieces after work is completed.

Further, the game machine described above,
The slit-shaped space has a lower end of its opening (for example, a lower end 1404BB in FIG. 262(b)) formed by the accommodating part,
The locking portion is rotatable around a shaft portion (for example, a rotating shaft 1403),
In the predetermined state, the certain metal piece is supported by the lower end of the opening and the shaft portion (for example, FIG. 4(a));
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this game machine, it is possible to prevent a certain metal piece from entering the depths of the accommodating part.

Further, the game machine described above,
When the certain metal piece is inserted into the slit-like space, the slit-like space is expanded by the thickness of the certain metal piece and becomes the predetermined state (for example, when the setting key SK is inserted When the slit 1401SL is pushed and expanded, the setting key SK may be held by the reaction force."
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

This gaming machine has a metal piece that is clamped to prevent it from falling or getting lost during operation.

Further, the game machine described above,
The certain metal piece is a setting key, a game medal, or a 500 yen coin,
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A door body (e.g., a front door 102),
A main body (e.g., main body 101);
a door lock mechanism (e.g., lock mechanism 1401) that goes from an unlocked state to a locked state when a locking portion (e.g., locking portion 1402) and a locked portion (e.g., locked shaft 1401B) are locked;
A gaming machine equipped with
The door lock mechanism has a receiving portion (e.g., receiving portion 1404) capable of receiving the locking portion,
It is possible to put the device into a predetermined state (e.g., FIG. 264(a)) in which a metal piece (e.g., a setting key SK) is inserted into a slit-shaped space (e.g., slit 1401SL) formed by the locking portion in the unlocked state and the inner wall of the housing portion,
In the predetermined state, even if the door body is to be closed, the certain metal piece contacts the locked portion before the locking portion contacts the locked portion, and the door body is maintained in an open state (for example, FIG. 264(d)).
In the predetermined state, it is possible to visually confirm from the outside that the locking portion is in the unlocked state.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine makes it easier to keep the door open, improving the ease with which store staff can clean, maintain, and inspect the machine. It also prevents deterioration of the locking parts over time. Furthermore, workers can determine the state of the door lock mechanism from the state of the locking parts.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
In the predetermined state, the certain metal piece protrudes more toward the engaged portion than the engaging portion (for example, FIG. 264(a)).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the door body can be kept open without the locking part coming into contact with the locked part.

Further, the game machine described above,
In the predetermined state, a part of the certain metal piece protrudes from the accommodation portion (for example, FIG. 264(a));
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this game machine, it is easy to take out a certain piece of metal after finishing the work.

Further, the game machine described above,
The slit-shaped space has a lower end of its opening (for example, a lower end 1404BB in FIG. 262(b)) formed by the accommodating part,
The locking portion is rotatable around a shaft portion (for example, a rotating shaft 1403),
In the predetermined state, the certain metal piece is supported by the lower end of the opening and the shaft portion (for example, FIG. 4(a));
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

This machine can prevent metal pieces from getting stuck deep inside the housing.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When the certain metal piece is inserted into the slit-shaped space, the thickness of the certain metal piece causes the slit-shaped space to expand and reach the predetermined state (for example, see the description that "when the setting key SK is inserted, the slit 1401SL is expanded, and the setting key SK may be clamped by the reaction force").
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this game machine, by holding a certain metal piece, it is possible to prevent it from falling or being lost during work.

Further, the game machine described above,
The certain metal piece is a setting key, a game medal, or a 500 yen coin,
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

<About the board of the slot machine 100 and the attached sticker>
Next, an example of the board of the slot machine 100 will be explained using FIGS. 265 to 268. In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the configurations already described in other embodiments (for example, FIGS. 17 to 32), and the description thereof will be omitted. Furthermore, for configurations that are inconsistent between the following description and the previous embodiment, the words and symbols in this example shall take precedence.

Various stickers are affixed to the board of the slot machine 100, including a sticker certifying that the machine has passed an inspection. In addition, there are cases where an already affixed sticker is peeled off and a new sticker is affixed. If such stickers are allowed to be placed in the wrong position or at an inclined angle, fraud may be easily committed. Furthermore, there is a risk that the pattern on the substrate may be damaged when the sticker is once removed. A configuration for dealing with these problems will be described below.

FIGS. 265(a) to 265(d) and FIGS. 266(a) to 266(b) are diagrams showing an example of the positional relationship between the wiring pattern on the board and the sticker affixed to the board.

First, in the example of FIG. 265(a), two board-mounted components CM1 and CM2 are connected by two wires L1 and L2. A sticker ST is affixed to the space SA partitioned by the two wires L1 and L2. Note that the board-mounted components CM1 and CM2, including this example, are not limited and may be, for example, an IC, a resistor, a capacitor, a FET, a diode, an LED, a switch, a connector, etc. Also, including this example, the wires L1 and L2 may be a signal line, a power line, a ground line, etc. Also, in this example, the sticker ST has a two-dimensional code attached, but the content displayed on the sticker is not limited.

In the above example, the wiring pattern serves as a guide for the top, bottom, left and right sides of the sticker ST. Using this guide makes it easier to determine the placement of the sticker ST, and using the space SA without a pattern makes it less likely that the pattern on the board will be damaged. In other words, this improves maintainability when removing and re-attaching the sticker during maintenance or inspection.

In the example of FIG. 265(b), two board-mounted components CM1 and CM2 are connected by two wirings L1 and L2 as in FIG. 265(a); It is shown that a seal ST is affixed to a space SA divided by . In this example, the wiring pattern serves as a guide for the upper and lower sides of the seal ST. Note that this example differs from FIG. 265(a) in that the wiring pattern does not serve as a guide for the left and right sides of the seal ST, but in this example as well, this guide and space SA can be used as in FIG. 265(a). This can improve maintainability when peeling off and reapplying stickers for maintenance or inspection.

In the example of FIG. 265(c), two board-mounted components CM1 and CM2 are connected by a wiring L1, but this differs from FIG. 265(a) in that there is only one wiring L1. It is also shown that a sticker ST is attached to a space SA partitioned by one wiring L1. In this example, the wiring pattern serves as a guide for the upper, lower, left, and right sides of the seal ST. By using this guide, it becomes easy to grasp the affixing position of the sticker ST, and by using the space SA without a pattern, it is possible to prevent the pattern on the substrate from being damaged. That is, it is possible to improve maintainability when peeling off and reapplying the seal for maintenance or inspection.

In the example of Figure 265(d), two board-mounted components CM1 and CM2 are connected by a single wiring L1, as in Figure 265(c), and a sticker ST is affixed to a space SA defined by the single wiring L1. In this example, the wiring pattern serves as a guide for the top, bottom, and right sides of the sticker ST. Note that this example differs from Figure 265(c) in that the wiring pattern does not serve as a guide for the left side of the sticker ST, but in this example, as in Figure 265(c), by utilizing this guide and space SA, it is possible to improve maintainability when removing and re-affixing the sticker during maintenance or inspection.

In the example of FIG. 266(a), two board-mounted components CM1 and CM2 are connected by one wiring L1 as in FIG. 265(c), and are separated by one wiring L1. It is shown that a sticker ST is attached to the space SA. In this example, the wiring pattern serves as a guide for the upper side and left and right sides of the seal ST. Note that this example differs from FIG. 265(c) in that the wiring pattern does not serve as a guide for the lower side of the sticker ST, but this guide and space SA can be used in this example as well as in FIG. 265(c). This can improve maintainability when peeling off and reapplying stickers for maintenance or inspection.

In the example of FIG. 266(b), two board-mounted components CM1 and CM2 are connected by one wiring L1 as in FIG. 265(c), and are separated by one wiring L1. It is shown that a sticker ST is attached to the space SA. In this example, the wiring pattern serves as a guide for the upper and left sides of the seal ST. Note that this example differs from FIG. 265(c) in that the wiring pattern does not serve as a guide for the right side and bottom side of the seal ST, but in this example as well, this guide and the space SA By using this, it is possible to improve maintainability when peeling off and reapplying stickers for maintenance or inspection.

In the above example, ease of maintenance can be improved by providing the wiring pattern with straight line portions that serve as guides for at least two of the upper, lower, left, and right sides of the seal. In both FIGS. 265(a) to 265(d) and FIGS. 266(a) to 266(b), the first straight line and the second straight line in the wiring pattern are connected to the third straight line and the fourth straight line of the seal ST. It is shown that the lines are approximately parallel to each other. In particular, in the case of a sticker with a two-dimensional code attached as in this embodiment, the presence of a pattern for detecting the position of the two-dimensional code can enhance the guiding effect.

In addition, in the above example, the seal ST is affixed to a space SA that does not have a wiring pattern, but if at least a portion of the seal ST is affixed to an area that does not have a wiring pattern, the wiring pattern can be prevented from being damaged by peeling the seal ST from this area.

In addition, in the configuration in which the wiring pattern is used as a guide, a configuration may also be provided in which silk printing is separately provided to indicate the position where the sticker is attached. FIG. 267(a) shows an example in which the configuration shown in FIG. 265(c) is provided with silk printing SP indicating the attachment positions of the four corners of the sticker. Further, FIG. 267(b) shows an example in which the configuration of FIG. 265(c) is applied with silk printing SP indicating the attachment positions of the two upper right and lower left corners of the sticker.

In addition, the slot machine 100 is provided with various boards, and a configuration may be adopted in which the guide for the sticker differs depending on the board, for example, a board having a sticker attached using a wiring pattern as a guide and a board having a sticker attached using silk printing as a guide. In this configuration, the type of board can be distinguished by the difference in the sticker guide.

Further, from the viewpoint of fraud prevention, rules may be set regarding the orientation of the seal with respect to the direction of the substrate. In this configuration, fraud can sometimes be determined by the fact that the orientation of the sticker is against the rules. For example, with respect to the reference direction of the board (the depth direction for horizontally arranged boards, the upward direction for vertically arranged boards), the orientation of the seal with respect to this reference direction is The first substrate and the second substrate may be different. FIG. 268(a) shows an example in which a sticker ST1 (facing upward) attached to substrate A and a sticker ST2 (facing right) attached to substrate B are different from the reference direction.

Further, a similar configuration may be adopted for the substrate and the case covering the substrate. For example, with respect to the reference direction of the board (depth direction for boards arranged horizontally, upward direction for boards arranged vertically), the orientation of the seal with respect to this reference direction is and the case covering this board may be different. FIG. 268(b) shows an example in which a sticker ST1 (facing upward) affixed to the substrate A and a sticker ST3 (facing downward) affixed to the case of this substrate A are different from the reference direction.

[Technical Concepts Corresponding to the Embodiments of the Board of the Slot Machine 100 and the Affixed Stickers]
Below, the technical ideas described in the explanation of Figures 265 to 268 will be described with reference to the corresponding configurations.

In the above explanation,
a first substrate provided with wiring having at least a first straight line and a second straight line;
a substantially rectangular seal (for example, seal ST) having at least a third straight line and a fourth straight line in its outer shape;
A game machine comprising:
The seal is attached to the first substrate so that the third straight line is substantially parallel to the first straight line,
The seal is attached to the first substrate so that the fourth straight line is substantially parallel to the second straight line,
A game machine (for example, FIGS. 265(a) to 265(d) and FIGS. 266(a) to 266(b)) characterized by this has been described.

This gaming machine makes it easy to apply stickers using the wiring on the circuit board as a guide, which improves maintainability when removing and reapplying stickers during maintenance and inspection.

Further, the game machine described above,
The direction of the first straight line is perpendicular to the direction of the second straight line (for example, FIGS. 265(a) (c) to (d), FIGS. 266(a) to (b)),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

This gaming machine makes it easier to align the corners of the stickers.

Further, the game machine described above,
The direction of the first straight line is parallel to the direction of the second straight line (for example, FIGS. 265(a) to (d), FIG. 266(b)),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this game machine, it is possible to easily align the opposite sides of the seal.

Further, the game machine described above,
At least a portion of the seal is affixed to an area of the first board where there is no wiring (for example, space SA);
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

This gaming machine prevents the wiring from being damaged when removing the sticker.

Further, the game machine described above,
The sticker has a two-dimensional code displayed on it (for example, FIGS. 265(a) to (d), FIGS. 266(a) to (b)),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, the presence of the pattern for detecting the position of the two-dimensional code increases the effectiveness of the guide and improves maintainability.

Also, in the above explanation,
a first substrate provided with wiring having at least a first straight line and a second straight line;
a first seal having a substantially rectangular shape having at least a third straight line and a fourth straight line in its outer shape;
a second substrate having some printed indicia (e.g., a silk screen seal position guide);
A second seal; and
A gaming machine equipped with
the first seal is attached to the first substrate such that the third straight line is substantially parallel to the first straight line;
the first seal is attached to the first substrate such that the fourth straight line is substantially parallel to the second straight line;
The second seal is attached to the second substrate along the certain printed indication.
The present invention has described a gaming machine characterized by the above (for example, see the description that "a configuration in which the sticker guides are different depending on the board").

In this gaming machine, stickers can be easily affixed using the wiring on the board as a guide, improving maintainability when removing and re-affixing stickers during maintenance and inspection. In addition, the first board and the second board can be distinguished from each other by the difference in how the first and second stickers are affixed.

Further, the game machine described above,
The direction of the first straight line is perpendicular to the direction of the second straight line (for example, FIGS. 265(a) (c) to (d), FIGS. 266(a) to (b)),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

This gaming machine makes it easier to align the corners of the stickers.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The direction of the first straight line is parallel to the direction of the second straight line (e.g., FIGS. 265(a) to (d), FIG. 266(b));
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this game machine, it is possible to easily align the opposite sides of the seal.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
At least a portion of the first seal is attached to an area (e.g., a space SA) of the first substrate that does not have wiring.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine prevents the wiring from being damaged when removing the sticker.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first seal and the second seal have a two-dimensional code displayed thereon (for example, FIGS. 265(a)-(d), 266(a)-(b)),
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine has a two-dimensional code position detection pattern, which enhances the guide effect and improves maintainability.

Also, in the above explanation,
a first substrate provided with wiring having at least a first straight line and a second straight line;
a substantially rectangular first seal having at least a third straight line and a fourth straight line in its outer shape;
a second substrate;
a second seal,
A game machine comprising:
The first sticker is attached to the first substrate so that the third straight line is substantially parallel to the first straight line,
The first sticker is attached to the first substrate so that the fourth straight line is substantially parallel to the second straight line,
The second seal is affixed to the second substrate,
The orientation of the first seal with respect to the reference direction of the first substrate is different from the orientation of the second seal with respect to the reference direction of the second substrate,
The reference direction is the upward direction for a board installed vertically, and the depth direction of the game machine for a board installed horizontally;
A game machine characterized by this (for example, the configuration of FIG. 268(a) for the seal ST of FIGS. 265(a) to 265(d) and FIGS. 266(a) to 266(b)) has been described.

In this game machine, the sticker can be easily pasted using the circuit board wiring as a guide, so that it is possible to improve maintainability when peeling off the sticker and re pasting it for maintenance or inspection. Additionally, fraud can sometimes be identified by the orientation of the first and second stickers.

Further, the game machine described above,
The direction of the first straight line is perpendicular to the direction of the second straight line (for example, FIGS. 265(a) (c) to (d), FIGS. 266(a) to (b)),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this game machine, the corners of the stickers can be easily aligned.

Further, the game machine described above,
The direction of the first straight line is parallel to the direction of the second straight line (for example, FIGS. 265(a) to (d), FIG. 266(b)),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this game machine, it is possible to easily align the opposite sides of the seal.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
At least a portion of the first seal is attached to an area (e.g., a space SA) of the first substrate that does not have wiring.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this game machine, it is possible to prevent damage to the wiring when removing the sticker.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first seal and the second seal display a two-dimensional code (for example, FIGS. 265(a) to (d), FIGS. 266(a) to (b)),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, the presence of the pattern for detecting the position of the two-dimensional code increases the effectiveness of the guide and improves maintainability.

Further, the game machine described above,
a first board case that houses the first board and has a third seal (for example, seal ST3) affixed;
a second board case that houses the second board and has a fourth sticker attached;
The orientation of the first seal with respect to the reference direction of the first substrate is different from the orientation of the third seal with respect to the reference direction of the first substrate,
The orientation of the second seal with respect to the reference direction of the second substrate is different from the orientation of the fourth seal with respect to the reference direction of the second substrate,
A game machine (for example, FIG. 268(b)) characterized by this has been described.

In this game machine, fraud can sometimes be detected by the orientation of each sticker.

<About the power supply module>
Next, an example of a power supply module provided inside the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to Figs. 269 to 270. In the following description, the same reference numerals will be used for the configurations already described in other embodiments (e.g. Figs. 17 to 32), and the description will be omitted. In addition, for configurations that contradict the following description and the previous embodiment, the words and reference numerals of this example will take precedence.

FIG. 269 is a diagram illustrating an example of the power supply module PM. In this power supply module PM, a power supply board PW is attached to a board pedestal CA2, and a cover CA1 that covers this power supply board PW is attached to the board pedestal CA2 and fixed to the slot machine 100 with an unillustrated member. The cover CA1 includes a top surface TP, a bottom surface BT, a front surface FR, a rear surface BK, and a right surface RT, which form a space for accommodating the power supply board PW. Note that a plurality of vent holes AH are formed on each of these surfaces over almost the entire surface. The board pedestal CA2 is provided with corner members CR1 to CR4, and when the cover CA1 is attached to the board pedestal CA2, these corner members CR1 to CR4 press the cover CA1 from the outside.

FIG. 270(a) is a diagram of the lower surface BT viewed from below. This figure shows that the corner member CR1 of the board pedestal CA2 is on the front left side, and the corner member CR2 is on the rear left side. Further, FIG. 270(b) shows a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 270(a), and FIG. 270(c) shows a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 270(a). It is shown. In FIGS. 270(b) and 270(c), the corner member CR1 and the corner member CR2 are located further below the lower surface BT, so that there is a space between the lower surface BT and the installation surface SP located below it. It is shown that a space is created. This space allows smooth ventilation through the vent AH. Furthermore, since ventilation becomes smooth, the degree of freedom regarding the shape and arrangement of the ventilation holes AH can be increased.

The thickness of the corner members CR1 and CR2 on the underside of the underside BT is smaller than the thickness of the setting key, and is configured so that the setting key cannot enter the space created on the underside of the underside BT. This allows for smooth intake and exhaust from the ventilation opening AH, and makes it difficult to tamper with the power supply module PM. Note that the thickness of the setting key is only one standard, and it is also possible to use the thickness of a gaming medal or a 500 yen coin as a standard, for example, and configure it so that a gaming medal or a 500 yen coin cannot enter the space created on the underside of the underside BT.

The top surface TP, front surface FR, and rear surface BK of the power module PM are configured with any two of the corner members CR1 to CR4 overlapping on the outside, similar to the bottom surface BT described in Figure 270 (a). This makes it difficult for the ventilation opening AH to become blocked even if other devices come close to these surfaces, allowing for smooth intake and exhaust.

[Technical idea corresponding to embodiment of power supply module]
The technical ideas described in the explanations of FIGS. 269 to 270 will be described below with reference to the corresponding configurations.

In the above explanation,
A game table including a power supply device (e.g., a power supply module PM) having a case formed by combining a first member (e.g., a cover CA1) and a second member (e.g., a base CA2),
The lower surface of the case is formed by a first surface (e.g., a lower surface BT) of the first member, and a second surface (e.g., corner members CR1, CR2) of the second member is overlapped on a part of the lower surface of the case on the outer periphery side.
A plurality of ventilation holes (e.g., ventilation hole AH) are formed on the first surface.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this game machine, it is possible to prevent the vent hole on the first surface from being blocked due to the second surface coming into contact with other parts, and it is possible to cool the power supply device.

Further, the game machine described above,
The second surface is made of a plate-like member that is thinner than a certain metal piece,
The certain metal piece is a setting key, a game medal, or a 500 yen coin,
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this game machine, it is possible to prevent a certain metal piece from entering the gap below the first surface.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
Any of the plurality of ventilation holes is located between the plurality of second surfaces on the lower surface of the case (for example, FIG. 270(a) and FIG. 270(c)).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this game machine, the degree of freedom in arranging the vents on the first surface can be increased.

Further, the game machine described above,
Any one of the top surface, front surface, and back surface of the case is a third surface (for example, top surface TP, front surface FR, and rear surface BK) of the first member, and a plurality of ventilation holes are formed, Furthermore, a fourth surface of the second member (for example, corner members CR1 to CR4) overlaps a part of the outer peripheral side,
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

This gaming machine can prevent the ventilation holes from being blocked on surfaces other than the bottom.

<About the board and board case of the slot machine 100>
Next, an example of the board and board case of the slot machine 100 will be described using FIG. 271. In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the configurations already described in other embodiments (for example, FIGS. 17 to 32), and the description thereof will be omitted. Furthermore, for configurations that are inconsistent between the following description and the previous embodiment, the words and symbols in this example shall take precedence.

FIG. 271(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the configuration of a board and a board case. FIG. 271(a) shows a board CB and a board case CA that covers the board CB. The board CB is provided with components such as capacitors and ICs that constitute a circuit on the board, and FIG. 271(a) shows circuit components CE1, CE2, and CE3 as examples of such components. The board case CA is made of a transparent material and has a shape whose height varies according to the height of the board CB (the height of the circuit components CE1, CE2, and CE3). . Note that the area NA of the board CB is an area containing only lands in which circuit components are not mounted (hereinafter, unmounted land area NA). In the board case CA, the area ID corresponding to this unmounted land area NA is an area to which text information regarding the board CB is attached (hereinafter referred to as text information area ID).

When a board case CA as shown in FIG. 271(a) is provided, the effectiveness of preventing tampering with the board CB can be improved, but once tampering has occurred, there is a problem in that the board CB becomes difficult to see, making it difficult to notice the tampering. The board case CA described above uses a transparent material, making such problems less likely to occur.

Here, the substrate case CA may be provided with a structure (e.g., a rivet) for engaging with the substrate CB, a structure (e.g., a rivet) for engaging a cover member to prevent access to the connector on the substrate CB after the cable is removed from the substrate CB to the substrate case CA, and a structure (e.g., a character display or a sticker) for displaying information about the substrate CB and information about the functions of the substrate case CA. When such structures are provided, the visibility of the substrate CB in that area may be reduced, and there is a risk of tampering. Here, if there is an unmounted land area NA on the substrate CB that is not likely to be the target of tampering, the above structure can be provided in the area corresponding to the unmounted land area NA to make it difficult to tamper. In FIG. 271(a), it is shown that the character information area ID corresponding to the unmounted land area NA is used in the structure for displaying information about the substrate CB. As an example of the character information area ID, characters may be printed, or characters that can be recognized may be formed by the unevenness of the substrate case CA. The text information area ID is a transparent area, although the visibility is reduced due to the presence of text, and the presence or absence of unauthorized components can be confirmed by visually checking the unmounted land area NA. If silk screen printing is applied to the unmounted land area NA, this printing can also be made visible to prevent unauthorized use.

Figure 271 (b) is a schematic diagram showing a configuration in which a crimp CL is provided in the non-mounted land area NA. Since no components are provided in the non-mounted land area NA, the height of the board case CA is not required. The character information area ID in Figure 271 (a) is not a configuration that requires a particular height, so it is the same height as the surrounding area. In contrast, the crimp CL in Figure 271 (b) requires a certain amount of height. However, since no components are provided in the non-mounted land area NA and there is a margin of height, the height of the board case CA can be suppressed and made compact. Figure 271 (b) shows that the height of the crimp CL is secured, while the height of the part where the crimp CL is provided is lower than the height of the part where the circuit component CE1 is provided. Note that the crimp CL is made of a transparent material, although its structure reduces its visibility, and the presence or absence of unauthorized components can be confirmed by visually checking the non-mounted land area NA. Note that if silk screen printing is applied to the non-mounted land area NA, this printing can also be made visible to prevent unauthorized use.

[Technical idea corresponding to embodiment of board and board case of slot machine 100]
The technical idea described in the explanation of FIG. 271 will be described below with reference to the corresponding configuration.

In the above explanation,
A first substrate (e.g., substrate CB);
A first substrate case (e.g., a substrate case CA) that accommodates the first substrate and has transparency;
A gaming machine equipped with
The first substrate has a non-component mounting land on which no component is mounted (e.g., a non-mounted land area NA),
The first board case has a first function in a first area covering the non-component-mounted land (e.g., a character information area ID, a crimp CL),
The first function is a function of displaying information about the first board or a function of enabling a predetermined operation in the first board case.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this game machine, the space above the component-unmounted land can be used for configuring the first function.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first board case has an area that is higher than the first area with respect to the first board (for example, in FIGS. 271(a) and 271(b), the area where the circuit component CE1 is provided is higher than the area corresponding to the unmounted land area NA),
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this game machine, the first board case can be made compact.

Further, the game machine described above,
the component-unmounted land can be visually recognized from the first area;
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, it is possible to check whether an unauthorized member is attached to an unmounted land.

Further, the game machine described above,
A silk-printed display corresponding to the component-unmounted land can be visually recognized from the first area;
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, it is possible to check whether an unauthorized member is attached to an unmounted land.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first function is a function of displaying information regarding the first board,
information regarding the first substrate is formed in the first area (for example, a text information area ID);
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this gaming machine, the space above the lands where no components are mounted can be used for displays.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first function is a function of displaying information regarding the first board,
A sticker containing information regarding the first substrate is affixed to the first area.
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, the space above the component-unmounted land can be used for sealing.
Further, the game machine described above,
The first function is a function that enables a predetermined operation (for example, a member locking operation) in the first board case,
A caulk (for example, a caulk CL) that enables the predetermined operation when released is provided in the first region;
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this gaming machine, the space above the lands where no components are mounted can be used for crimping.

<Caution notices for reels>
Next, an example of the operation during reel rotation will be described with reference to Figures 272 to 281. In the following description, the same reference numerals will be used for configurations already described in other embodiments (e.g., Figures 17 to 32), and the description will be omitted. In addition, for configurations that contradict the following description and the previous embodiment, the words and reference numerals of this example will take precedence.

[Example of normal game operation]
FIG. 272 is a diagram showing the flow of operations in a normal game. In this figure, it is assumed that the operations are performed in the order of bet operation, lever operation, left stop operation, middle stop operation, and right stop operation. Note that the front door 102 is in a closed state throughout the entire operation, and the corresponding door sensor is also in a state in which it has detected the closed state.

First, at the timing when a bet operation is performed, the number of bets required to start the game will be in a state. At this stage, before the start of the game by operating the lever (the reels are stopped), the effect image display device 157 (display means) normally displays the background, the speakers 272 and 277 normally output BGM, and various types of The lamp 420 is in a normal light emitting mode. Further, the lever monitor LED provided on the board of the main control unit 300 is in a first mode (lighting or extinguishing, a mode different from the second mode described below). This lever monitor LED is in the second mode when the start lever 135 is pressed down, and is provided to check the state of the start lever 135. Note that the lever monitor LED is not limited to the board of the main control section 300, but may be provided, for example, on a relay board between the lever and the main control section.

Next, when the start lever 135 is operated and changes from a non-pressed state to a pressed state, a signal of this change is received and the game begins (the reels start spinning). At this time, the effect image display device 157 starts a first display (for example, an operation instruction display (push order navigation, aim for XX), a small win suggestion display, a preview display, etc.), the speakers 272, 277 start outputting a first sound (effect corresponding to the first display), and the various lamps 420 go into a first light emission state (effect corresponding to the first display). In addition, the lever monitor LED goes into a second state (lit or unlit, a state different from the first state).

Subsequently, when a left stop operation is performed as a first stop operation, the corresponding reel comes to a stop state, and the speakers 272 and 277 output a first stop sound corresponding to the first stop operation. Note that the first display continues on the effect image display device 157, the first sound continues to be output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the various lamps 420 continue in the first light emission mode. . Further, the lever monitor LED is in the first mode.

Subsequently, when a middle stop operation is performed as a second stop operation, the corresponding reel comes to a stop state, and the speakers 272 and 277 output a second stop sound corresponding to the second stop operation. At this time, the first display continues on the effect image display device 157, the first sound continues to be output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the various lamps 420 continue in the first light emission mode. There is. Further, the lever monitor LED is in the first mode.

Finally, when the right stop operation is performed as the third stop operation, all the reels come to a stop state, and the speakers 272 and 277 output a third stop sound corresponding to the third stop operation. At this time, the effect image display device 157 displays the second display (stop result display (stop small role display, XX pieces obtained display, XX bonus display, updated display (number of credits, number of games, number of remaining ATs)) etc.) is being displayed, the speakers 272 and 277 are outputting a second sound (effect corresponding to the second display), and the various lamps 420 are in the second light emitting mode (corresponding to the second display). It is a performance that will be performed). Further, the lever monitor LED is the first aspect. Then, since the game has ended, the player enters a state in which the number of bets necessary to start the game has not been placed (non-bet state).

[Example of operation according to the passage of time from lever operation]
An example of the operation according to the time lapse from the lever operation will be described below with reference to Fig. 273. In Fig. 273, as in Fig. 272, the operations are assumed to be performed in the order of bet operation, lever operation, left stop operation, center stop operation, and right stop operation. Note that the front door 102 is in a closed state throughout all operations, and the corresponding door sensor is also in a state of detecting the closed state. Note that the explanation of the parts that overlap with the contents explained in Fig. 272 will be omitted.

First, the bet operation and the operation in response to the operation of the start lever 135 are the same as those shown in FIG. 272.

Next, suppose that time t1 (e.g., 1 minute) has passed since the start lever was operated without any stop operation. At this time, the first display continues on the performance image display device 157, but in addition to this display, messages such as "More than time t1 has passed", "Reel is spinning", and "Please stop the reels" (hereinafter, "attention display regarding the reels") are displayed. In addition, the various lamps 420 continue to emit the first light, but the output of the first sound from the speakers 272 and 277 stops. The monitor LED for the lever is in the first mode. In this state, suppose that time t2 (e.g., 5 minutes) has passed since the start lever was operated without any further stop operation. At this time, the message "More than time t1 has passed" on the performance image display device 157 changes to "More than time t2 has passed".

Subsequently, when a left stop operation is performed as the first stop operation, the corresponding reel comes to a stop state, but unlike the example in FIG. 272, the first stop sound corresponding to the first stop operation is emitted from the speakers 272 and 277. is not output. The effect image display device 157 continues to display the first message and the messages "Time t2 or more has passed", "Reels are rotating", and "Please stop the reels", and the various lamps 420 continue to display the first light emitting mode. are doing. Further, the lever monitor LED is in the first mode.

Next, when a middle stop operation is performed as a second stop operation, the corresponding reel comes to a stop, but unlike the example in FIG. 272, the second stop sound corresponding to the second stop operation is not output from the speakers 272, 277. Note that the first display and messages "Time t2 or more has elapsed", "Reel spinning", and "Please stop the reel" continue on the performance image display device 157, and the various lamps 420 continue to be in the first light emission mode. Also, the lever monitor LED is in the first mode.

Finally, when the right stop operation is performed as the third stop operation, the messages "Time t2 or more has elapsed", "Reels are spinning", and "Please stop the reels" are cleared, and the game returns to the same state as when the third stop operation in FIG. 272 is performed.

Note that in the above operation, an example has been described in which three types of messages are displayed as warning displays regarding the reels, but the configuration is not limited to the above, and at least one of these messages may be displayed. The warning display regarding the reel may be displayed so as to partially overlap the first display (for example, the operation navigation). Further, in the above operation, an example has been described in which the warning display regarding the reels is displayed until the third stop operation is performed, but it may be made to be hidden when any stop operation is performed.

In addition, in the above operation, an example was described in which the output of the first sound was stopped in conjunction with the warning display regarding the reels, but the volume of the first sound may also be reduced or silenced.

With the above configuration, the player can be made aware that the reels are still rotating.

[Example of operation when an abnormality occurs in the reel (1)]
An example of the operation when an abnormality occurs in the reels after the lever operation will be described below with reference to FIG. 274. In FIG. 274, it is assumed that the bet operation, the lever operation, and the left stop operation have been performed. Note that the front door 102 is in the closed state throughout all operations, and the corresponding door sensor is also in the state of detecting the closed state. Note that the explanation of the parts that overlap with the contents explained in FIG. 272 and FIG. 273 will be omitted.

First, the operation in response to the bet operation and the operation of the start lever 135 is the same as in Figures 272 and 273. Furthermore, the lamp provided inside each stop button changes from a first light indication (e.g., red light) to a second light indication (e.g., blue light). This first light indication indicates that the operation of the stop button is not accepted, and the second light indication indicates that the operation of the stop button is accepted.

Next, assume that a time t1 (e.g., one minute) has elapsed since the start lever was operated without a stop operation being performed. The operation at this time is the same as that shown in FIG. 273. Note that the lamps provided inside each stop button continue to display the second light.

Here, it is assumed that an abnormality occurs in the reel unit (here, the harness connected to the main control section 300 is disconnected). In this example, all the reels stop due to an abnormality, and the lamps provided inside each stop button change from the second light-emitting display to the first light-emitting display. At this time, the effect image display device 157 does not display a display corresponding to the abnormality of the reels, and the first display and the messages "Time t1 or more has elapsed", "Reels are rotating", and "Please stop the reels" continue. Is displayed. Further, the various lamps 420 continue to emit light in the first mode, and the lever monitor LED remains in the first mode.

When an abnormality occurs in the reel, the reel sensor cannot detect it properly, so the main control unit 300 determines that there is some kind of abnormality, and the operation of the stop button is not validly accepted. In Figure 274, it is shown that although the left stop operation is performed when an abnormality occurs in the reel, the corresponding action is not executed.

In addition, in the above operation, an example was explained in which the warning display regarding the reel continues when the harness connecting the main control unit 300 and the reel unit is disconnected. (or step-out) may occur, the same operation as in the case of disconnection may be performed.

[Example of operation when an abnormality occurs in the reel (2)]
An example of the operation when an abnormality occurs in the reels after the lever operation will be described below with reference to FIG. 275. In FIG. 275, it is assumed that the bet operation and the lever operation have been performed. Note that the front door 102 is in the closed state throughout all operations, and the corresponding door sensor is also in the state of detecting the closed state. Note that the explanation of the parts that overlap with the contents explained in FIG. 272 and FIG. 273 will be omitted.

First, the operation in response to the bet operation and the operation of the start lever 135 is the same as in Figures 272 and 273. Furthermore, the lamp provided inside each stop button changes from a first light indication (e.g., red light) to a second light indication (e.g., blue light). This first light indication indicates that the operation of the stop button is not accepted, and the second light indication indicates that the operation of the stop button is accepted.

Now, let us assume that an abnormality occurs in the reel unit (here, the harness connecting to the main control unit 300 is broken). When an abnormality occurs in the reel, the reel sensor cannot detect it normally, so the main control unit 300 determines that there is some kind of abnormality, and the operation of the stop button is not validly accepted. In this example, the abnormality causes all the reels to stop, and furthermore, the lamps provided inside each stop button are shown changing from the second light-emitting display to the first light-emitting display. At this time, the performance image display device 157 does not execute a display corresponding to the reel abnormality, and the first display continues to be displayed. In addition, the first sound continues to be output from the speakers 272, 277, and the various lamps 420 continue to be in the first light-emitting state. In addition, the lever monitor LED is in the first state.

Next, assume that a time t1 (for example, one minute) has passed since the start lever was operated. At this time, the first display continues on the performance image display device 157, but in addition to this display, messages such as "Time t1 or more has passed", "Reel spinning", and "Please stop the reels" (attention display regarding the reels) are displayed. Also, the various lamps 420 continue to be in the first light emission mode, but the output of the first sound from the speakers 272 and 277 stops. The lever monitor LED is in the first mode. Note that the lamps provided inside each stop button continue to be in the first light emission mode.

In the above operation, an example was described in which the reel-related warning display is executed even if the harness connecting the main control unit 300 and the reel unit is disconnected, but the same operation as in the case of a disconnection may also be performed if the harness comes loose or if there is an abnormality in the reel rotation (including loss of synchronism).

[Example of operation when an abnormality occurs in the stop button unit (1)]
An example of the operation when an abnormality occurs in the stop button unit after the lever is operated will be described below with reference to FIG. 276. In FIG. 276, it is assumed that operations including a bet operation, a lever operation, and a left stop operation have been performed. Note that the front door 102 is in a closed state throughout the entire operation, and the corresponding door sensor is also in a state in which it has detected the closed state. Note that descriptions of parts that overlap with those described in FIGS. 272 and 273 will be omitted.

First, the bet operation and the operation in response to the operation of the start lever 135 are the same as in FIGS. 272 and 273. Furthermore, the lamp provided inside each stop button changes from the first light emitting display (for example, red light emission) to the second light emission display (for example, blue light emission). The first light-emitting display indicates that the stop button cannot be operated, and the second light-emitting display indicates that the stop button can be operated.

Suppose that a time t1 (for example, 1 minute) has passed without a stop operation being performed since the start lever was subsequently operated. The operation at this time is similar to that in FIG. 273. Note that the lamp provided inside each stop button continues to display the second light emission.

Now, suppose that an abnormality occurs in the stop button unit (here, the harness connecting to the main control unit 300 is disconnected), and the operation of the stop button cannot be effectively accepted. In this example, it is shown that the abnormality causes the display by the lamps provided inside each stop button to not be displayed (not displayed, for example, turned off). At this time, the performance image display device 157 does not display the information corresponding to the abnormality in the stop button unit, and continues to display the first display and the messages "Time t1 or more has elapsed", "Reel spinning", and "Please stop the reels". In addition, the various lamps 420 continue to be in the first light emission mode, and the lever monitor LED is in the first mode.

Figure 276 shows that even though the left stop operation is performed when an abnormality occurs in the stop button unit, the corresponding action is not executed.

In the above operation, an example was described in which the reel-related warning display continues if the harness connecting the main control unit 300 and the stop button unit is disconnected, but the same operation may also be performed if the harness becomes unplugged.

[Example of operation when an abnormality occurs in the stop button unit (2)]
An example of the operation when an abnormality occurs in the stop button unit after the lever is operated will be described below with reference to FIG. 277. In FIG. 277, it is assumed that the bet operation and the lever operation have been performed. Note that the front door 102 is in a closed state throughout the entire operation, and the corresponding door sensor is also in a state in which it has detected the closed state. Note that descriptions of parts that overlap with those described in FIGS. 272 and 273 will be omitted.

First, the bet operation and the operation in response to the operation of the start lever 135 are the same as in FIGS. 272 and 273. Furthermore, the lamp provided inside each stop button changes from the first light emitting display (for example, red light emission) to the second light emission display (for example, blue light emission). The first light-emitting display indicates that the stop button cannot be operated, and the second light-emitting display indicates that the stop button can be operated.

Now, suppose that an abnormality occurs in the stop button unit (here, the harness connecting to the main control unit 300 is disconnected), and the operation of the stop button cannot be effectively accepted. In this example, it is shown that the abnormality causes the display by the lamps provided inside each stop button to not be displayed (not displayed, for example, turned off). At this time, the performance image display device 157 does not display a message corresponding to the abnormality in the stop button unit, and the first display continues to be displayed. In addition, the first sound continues to be output from the speakers 272, 277, and the various lamps 420 continue to be in the first light emission mode. In addition, the lever monitor LED is in the first mode.

Next, assume that a time t1 (for example, one minute) has passed since the start lever was operated. At this time, the first display continues on the performance image display device 157, but in addition to this display, messages such as "Time t1 or more has passed", "Reel spinning", and "Please stop the reels" (attention display regarding the reels) are displayed. Also, the various lamps 420 continue to be in the first light emission mode, but the output of the first sound from the speakers 272, 277 stops. The lever monitor LED is in the first mode. Note that the lamps provided inside each stop button continue to be in the non-display state.

In addition, in the above operation, an example has been described in which a warning display regarding the reel is executed even when the harness connecting the main control unit 300 and the stop button unit is disconnected. The same operation may be possible.

[Example of operation when executing reel production]
Hereinafter, an example of the operation when the reel effect is executed will be explained using FIG. 278. In FIG. 278, it is assumed that after a bet operation and a lever operation, a reel effect is executed, and further operations including a left stop operation, a middle stop operation, and a right stop operation are performed. Note that the front door 102 is in a closed state throughout the entire operation, and the corresponding door sensor is also in a state in which it has detected the closed state. Note that descriptions of parts that overlap with those described in FIGS. 272 and 273 will be omitted.

First, operations in response to bet operations are similar to those in FIGS. 272 and 273.

Next, when the start lever 135 is operated, the same operation as in Figures 272 and 273 occurs, and the reels start to spin. However, unlike Figures 272 and 273, the reel spinning at this time is due to a reel effect, not due to the start of the game.

After that, all the reels that were rotating come to a pseudo stop, and the reel performance ends. At this time, the first display continues on the effect image display device 157, the first audio continues to be output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the various lamps 420 continue in the first light emission mode. There is. Further, the lever monitor LED is in the first mode.

When the reel performance ends, the reels start to spin. Now, let us say that time t1 (for example, one minute) has passed since the end of this reel performance without any stopping operation. At this time, the performance image display device 157 continues to display the first display, but in addition to this display, messages such as "Time t1 or more has passed", "Reel spinning", and "Please stop the reels" (attention display regarding the reels) are displayed. Also, the various lamps 420 continue to emit the first light, but the output of the first sound from the speakers 272 and 277 stops. The monitor LED for the lever is in the first mode. Note that when time t2 (for example, five minutes) has passed since the end of the reel performance, the message "Time t1 or more has passed" on the performance image display device 157 changes to "Time t2 or more has passed" as in FIG. 273.

Subsequently, when a left stop operation is performed as a first stop operation and a middle stop operation is performed as a second stop operation, the corresponding reel comes to a stopped state as in FIG. 273. Then, the message calling attention to the reels continues to be displayed, and the states of the various lamps 420 and the lever monitor LED continue. Then, when the right stop operation is performed as the third stop operation, the warning display message regarding the reels is cleared, and the same state as when the third stop operation is performed in FIG. 272 occurs.

In FIG. 273, an example was explained in which a message calling attention to the reels is displayed based on the elapsed time from the lever operation (or the start of the game), but in FIG. 278, the message calling attention to the reels is The difference is that the display is based on the elapsed time since the end of the game (or the start of the game). As in the above example, if the reel performance ends at time t3 (for example, 15 seconds) after the lever is operated, the warning display message regarding the reels will be executed after the time t1+t3 after the lever is operated.

[Example of operation when a pseudo game is executed (1)]
An example of the operation when a pseudo game is executed will be described below with reference to FIG. 279. In FIG. 279, after a bet operation and a lever operation, a pseudo game is executed, and further operations up to a left stop operation, a center stop operation, and a right stop operation are performed. Note that the front door 102 is in a closed state throughout all operations, and the corresponding door sensor is also in a state of detecting the closed state. Note that explanations of parts that overlap with the contents explained in FIG. 272 and FIG. 273 will be omitted.

First, the operations performed in response to bet operations are the same as those shown in Figures 272 and 273.

Next, when the start lever 135 is operated, the same operation as in Figures 272 and 273 occurs, and the reels start to spin. However, unlike Figures 272 and 273, the rotation of the reels at this time is due to the start of a pseudo game, not the start of a game.

In a simulated game, the reels can be stopped by the player's stopping operation, but in this case, the player does not perform the stopping operation, and all the reels that were spinning come to a pseudo-stop as time t3 has passed, ending the simulated game. At this time, the first display continues on the performance image display device 157, the first sound continues to be output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the various lamps 420 continue to be in the first light emission mode. Also, the lever monitor LED is in the first mode.

When the pseudo game ends, the reels start to spin. Now, let us say that time t1 (for example, one minute) has passed since the end of this pseudo game without any stopping operation. At this time, the first display continues on the performance image display device 157, but in addition to this display, messages such as "Time t1 or more has passed", "Reel spinning", and "Please stop the reels" (attention display regarding the reels) are displayed. Also, the various lamps 420 continue to emit the first light, but the output of the first sound from the speakers 272 and 277 stops. The monitor LED for the lever is in the first mode. Note that when time t2 (for example, five minutes) has passed since the end of the pseudo game, the message "Time t1 or more has passed" on the performance image display device 157 changes to "Time t2 or more has passed" as in FIG. 273.

Subsequently, when a left stop operation is performed as a first stop operation and a middle stop operation is performed as a second stop operation, the corresponding reel comes to a stopped state as in FIG. 273. Then, the message calling attention to the reels continues to be displayed, and the states of the various lamps 420 and the lever monitor LED continue. Then, when the right stop operation is performed as the third stop operation, the warning display message regarding the reels is cleared, and the same state as when the third stop operation is performed in FIG. 272 occurs.

Figure 273 describes an example in which a warning message regarding the reels is displayed based on the time elapsed from the lever operation (or the start of play), but Figure 279 differs in that a warning message regarding the reels is displayed based on the time elapsed from the end of the simulated game (or the start of play). As in the above example, if the simulated game ends at time t3 (e.g., 15 seconds) from the lever operation, the warning message regarding the reels will be displayed at time t1 + t3 from the lever operation.

[Example of operation when performing a pseudo game (2)]
An example of the operation when a pseudo game is executed will be described below with reference to FIG. 280. In FIG. 280, it is assumed that after a bet operation and a lever operation, a pseudo game is executed, and further operations including a left stop operation, a middle stop operation, and a right stop operation are performed. Note that the front door 102 is in a closed state throughout the entire operation, and the corresponding door sensor is also in a state in which it has detected the closed state. Note that descriptions of parts that overlap with those described in FIGS. 272 and 273 will be omitted.

First, the operations performed in response to bet operations are the same as those shown in Figures 272 and 273.

Next, when the start lever 135 is operated, the same operation as in Figures 272 and 273 occurs, and the reels start to spin. However, unlike Figures 272 and 273, the rotation of the reels at this time is due to the start of a pseudo game, not the start of a game.

In a pseudo-game, when time t3 elapses, all the reels that were rotating pseudo-stop and the pseudo-game ends, but here, before this time t3 elapses (at the timing when time t4 has elapsed), the game starts. It is assumed that all the reels are pseudo-stopped by the player's stop operation and the pseudo-game ends. At this time, the first display continues on the effect image display device 157, the first sound continues to be output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the various lamps 420 continue in the first light emission mode. There is. Further, the lever monitor LED is in the first mode.

When the pseudo game ends, the reels start to spin. Now, let us say that time t1 (for example, one minute) has passed since the end of this pseudo game without any stopping operation. At this time, the first display continues on the performance image display device 157, but in addition to this display, messages such as "Time t1 or more has passed", "Reel spinning", and "Please stop the reels" (attention display regarding the reels) are displayed. Also, the various lamps 420 continue to emit the first light, but the output of the first sound from the speakers 272 and 277 stops. The monitor LED for the lever is in the first mode. Note that when time t2 (for example, five minutes) has passed since the end of the pseudo game, the message "Time t1 or more has passed" on the performance image display device 157 changes to "Time t2 or more has passed" as in FIG. 273.

Subsequently, when a left stop operation is performed as a first stop operation and a middle stop operation is performed as a second stop operation, the corresponding reel comes to a stopped state as in FIG. 273. Then, the message calling attention to the reels continues to be displayed, and the states of the various lamps 420 and the lever monitor LED continue. Then, when the right stop operation is performed as the third stop operation, the warning display message regarding the reels is cleared, and the same state as when the third stop operation is performed in FIG. 272 occurs.

In FIG. 273, an example was explained in which a message calling attention to the reels is displayed based on the elapsed time from the lever operation (or the start of the game), but in FIG. The difference is that the display is based on the elapsed time since the end of the game (or the start of the game). As in the above example, if the pseudo game ends at time t4 (for example, 5 seconds) after the lever is operated, the warning display message regarding the reels will be executed after the time t1+t4 after the lever is operated.

[Example of operation when power is restored during gameplay]
An example of the operation when a power outage occurs during a game will be described below with reference to FIG. 281. In FIG. 281, a power outage occurs after a bet operation and a lever operation, and then the power is restored. Note that the front door 102 is closed throughout all operations, and the corresponding door sensor also detects the closed state. Note that explanations of parts that overlap with those explained in FIG. 272 and FIG. 273 will be omitted.

First, the betting operation and the operation in response to the operation of the start lever 135 are the same as those shown in Figures 272 and 273.

Suppose that a power outage occurs when a time t5 (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed without a stop operation being performed after the start lever was subsequently operated. In the state immediately before the power cut, the first display continues on the effect image display device 157, the first light emission mode continues on the various lamps 420, and the first sound is output on the speakers 272 and 277. continues. The lever monitor LED is in the first aspect.

After the power is restored, each control unit of the slot machine 100 executes a recovery process to return to the state before the power failure. This recovery process is executed by each of the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500, but the recovery process of the main control unit 300 is completed first, and the reels start spinning again. In addition, until the recovery process of the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 is completed, the performance image display device 157 displays a display indicating that the recovery process is in progress, the speakers 272 and 277 output the sound when the power is turned on, and the various lamps 420 are in the light-emitting state when the power is turned on. The monitor LED for the lever is in the first state. Then, when the recovery process of the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 is completed after a time t6 (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the power was restored, the performance image display device 157 executes a demo display instead of the first display. In addition, the sound when the power is turned on that was output by the speakers 272 and 277 ends, and the various lamps 420 are turned off. In addition, because the performance image display device 157 executes a demo display, so-called operation navigation is not displayed. However, this operation navigation may be performed using the illumination state of the stop button, or may be displayed on a 7-segment display or the like.

In addition, with regard to the first display, the display according to the operation of the game progress, and the corresponding effects that would be executed if there was no power interruption, parts of these displays and effects may be executed sequentially in response to the operation of the game progress after power is restored. For example, when an operation navigation suggesting a certain operation condition is not displayed (a demo display is being executed), and an operation according to this operation condition is performed, part of the first display may be executed, or various lamps 420 may be operated without outputting a sound corresponding to a stop operation. Note that by executing the first display and the corresponding effects at the timing of the start of a new game, it is possible to return to the normal state from this game.

Suppose that a time t1 (for example, 1 minute) has elapsed since the start lever was operated and the stop operation was not performed, excluding the time due to power outage. At this time, the demonstration display continues on the effect image display device 157, but messages such as ``Time t1 or more has passed'', ``Reels are rotating'', and ``Please stop the reels'' appear to cover part of this display (related to the reels). warning display) will be displayed. Further, the speakers 272 and 277 continue to output no audio, and the various lamps 420 continue to be turned off. Note that the lever monitor LED is in the first mode. Assume that in this state, a time t2 (for example, 5 minutes, excluding the power cutoff time) has elapsed since the start lever was operated without any further stop operation being performed. At this time, the message "Time t1 or more has passed" on the effect image display device 157 is switched to "Time t2 or more has passed".

In addition, in the above example, the warning display regarding the reels is executed while the demo display is being displayed, but for example, if the timing when the above time t1 has elapsed is the period of the returning display, the display will be different from the demo display. Similarly, a warning display regarding the reels may be executed, or a warning display regarding the reels may be executed after the returning display is finished. In addition, if a warning display regarding the reel was being executed before the power outage, the warning display regarding the reel may be executed while the recovering display is displayed after the power is restored, or the reel-related display may be After the reels are finished, a warning display regarding the reels may be displayed. Further, even if the time due to the power outage exceeds the time t1, the time due to the power outage is excluded in the above example, but an RTC (real-time clock) may be installed to include the time due to the power outage.

In the above example, the passage of time t1 is determined based on the timing when the start lever is operated, but the passage of time t1 may be determined based on the timing when power is restored and the warning display regarding the reels may be executed. In this case, there may be a delay from the passage of time t1 due to the recovery process.

[Technical idea corresponding to the embodiment of the warning display regarding the reel]
Below, the technical ideas described in the explanation of Figures 272 to 281 will be described with reference to the corresponding configurations.

In the above explanation,
Notification means (for example, effect image display device 157),
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) that are rotationally driven;
a stop button (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) that accepts a stop operation to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels;
A game machine comprising:
The notification means is a means that can perform a predetermined notification regarding the rotating reel (for example, a warning display regarding the reel) when a predetermined time elapses while the reel is rotating (for example, as shown in FIG. 273 reference),
The predetermined notification may be executed even if the reel stops without the stop operation before the predetermined time elapses while the reel is rotating (for example, in FIG. 275 reference),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

When this gaming machine issues a specific notification while the reels are stopped, this is not normal behavior, so gaming facility staff may be able to detect an abnormality in the gaming machine through the player.

Further, the game machine described above,
During execution of the predetermined notification, even if the reels stop without the stop operation, the predetermined notification may continue to be performed (for example, see FIG. 274);
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, if a predetermined notification is executed while the reels are stopped, this is not a normal behavior, so the game store clerk may be able to detect an abnormality in the game machine through the player.

Further, the game machine described above,
The notification means is a means that does not perform notification corresponding to the stoppage of the reel when the predetermined notification is executed with the reel stopped without the stop operation (for example, as shown in FIG. 274, see Figure 275),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

This gaming machine may be able to make the player aware of abnormalities while drawing attention to specific alerts.

Further, the game machine described above,
The predetermined notification is a warning notification regarding the reel (for example, see FIG. 273);
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, it is possible to notify a player or a visiting store clerk that the reels are rotating excessively and to urge them to stop them.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The plurality of reels are capable of executing reel effects,
The notification means is a means that may not execute the predetermined notification while the reel performance is being executed (for example, see FIGS. 278 to 280 ).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this game machine, it is possible to prevent the reel performance from being disturbed by the predetermined notification.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The notification means is a means for executing the predetermined notification based on the fact that the predetermined time has elapsed after the execution of the reel performance and while the reel is spinning (for example, see FIGS. 278 to 280 ).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this game machine, it is possible to notify a player or a visiting store clerk that the reels are rotating excessively and to urge them to stop them.

Also, in the above explanation,
Notification means (e.g., a performance image display device 157);
A plurality of reels (e.g., reels 110 to 112) that are rotated;
A stop button (e.g., stop buttons 137 to 139) that accepts a stop operation to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels;
A gaming machine equipped with
The notification means is a means capable of executing a predetermined notification (e.g., a warning display regarding the reel) regarding the reel being rotated when a predetermined time has elapsed while the reel is being rotated (e.g., see FIG. 273 ),
There is a case where the predetermined notification is executed in a state where the stop operation is invalid (for example, see FIG. 277 ).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this type of gaming machine, if the stop operation is disabled and a specified notification is issued, the player is unable to respond, so gaming facility staff may be able to detect an abnormality in the gaming machine through the player.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The predetermined notification may be executed even if the reel stops without the stop operation before the predetermined time has elapsed while the reel is rotating (for example, see FIG. 275).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this game machine, if a predetermined notification is executed while the reels are stopped, this is not a normal behavior, so the game store clerk may be able to detect an abnormality in the game machine through the player.

Further, the game machine described above,
During execution of the predetermined notification, even if the reels stop without the stop operation, the predetermined notification may continue to be performed (for example, see FIG. 274);
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, if a predetermined notification is executed while the reels are stopped, this is not a normal behavior, so the game store clerk may be able to detect an abnormality in the game machine through the player.

Further, the game machine described above,
The notification means is a means that does not perform notification corresponding to the invalid state of the stop operation when the predetermined notification is executed when the stop operation is invalid (for example, as shown in FIG. 276, see Figure 277),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this game machine, it may be possible to make players aware of abnormalities while paying attention to predetermined notifications.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The predetermined notification is a reel-related attention notification (for example, see FIG. 273 ).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This machine can notify the player or a visiting store attendant that the reels are spinning too much and prompt them to stop them.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The plurality of reels are capable of executing reel effects,
The notification means is a means that may not execute the predetermined notification while the reel performance is being executed (for example, see FIGS. 278 to 280 ).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine can ensure that the reel performance is not interrupted by specified notifications.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The notification means is a means for executing the predetermined notification based on the fact that the predetermined time has elapsed after the execution of the reel performance and while the reel is spinning (for example, see FIGS. 278 to 280 ).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this game machine, it is possible to notify a player or a visiting store clerk that the reels are rotating excessively and to urge them to stop them.

Also, in the above explanation,
Notification means (for example, effect image display device 157),
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) that are rotationally driven;
a stop button (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) that accepts a stop operation to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels;
A game machine comprising:
The notification means is a means that can perform a predetermined notification regarding the rotating reel (for example, a warning display regarding the reel) when a predetermined time elapses while the reel is rotating (for example, as shown in FIG. 273 reference),
If the power is cut off before the predetermined time elapses while the plurality of reels are rotating, the predetermined notification is executed at a time different from the time when the predetermined time elapses after the power is restored. In some cases (for example, see Figure 281),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this gaming machine, a predetermined notification can be made after power is restored.

Further, the game machine described above,
Even if the reel stops without the stop operation, the predetermined notification may be executed before the predetermined time elapses while the reel is rotating (for example, in FIG. 275 reference),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, if a predetermined notification is executed while the reels are stopped, this is not a normal behavior, so the game store clerk may be able to detect an abnormality in the game machine through the player.

Further, the game machine described above,
During execution of the predetermined notification, even if the reels stop without the stop operation, the predetermined notification may continue to be performed (for example, see FIG. 274);
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

When this gaming machine issues a specific notification while the reels are stopped, this is not normal behavior, so gaming facility staff may be able to detect an abnormality in the gaming machine through the player.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The predetermined notification may be executed before the predetermined time has elapsed since the power was restored (for example, in FIG. 281, the time t1 is determined as the sum of the elapsed time t5 before the power failure and the elapsed time t6 after the power was restored, so that the warning display regarding the reel is displayed before the time t1 has elapsed after the power was restored).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The predetermined notification may be executed after the predetermined time has elapsed after the power is restored (for example, in the modified example of FIG. 281, regardless of the elapsed time t5 before the power is restored, At the end of t1, a warning display regarding the reels is displayed, and there is a further delay for the return process).
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The predetermined notification is a warning notification regarding the reel (for example, see FIG. 273);
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, it is possible to notify a player or a visiting store clerk that the reels are rotating excessively and to urge them to stop them.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The plurality of reels are capable of executing reel effects,
The notification means is a means that may not execute the predetermined notification while the reel performance is being executed (for example, see FIGS. 278 to 280).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this game machine, it is possible to prevent the reel performance from being disturbed by the predetermined notification.

Further, the game machine described above,
The notification means is a means for executing the predetermined notification based on the elapse of the predetermined time while the reels are rotating after the execution of the reel effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 278 to 278). 280),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, it is possible to notify a player or a visiting store clerk that the reels are rotating excessively and to urge them to stop them.

<About operations when an abnormality occurs in the connection between boards>
Next, an example of the operation when an abnormality occurs in the connection between the boards of the slot machine 100 will be described using FIGS. 282 and 283. In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the configurations already described in other embodiments (for example, FIGS. 17 to 32), and the description thereof will be omitted. Furthermore, for configurations that are inconsistent between the following description and the previous embodiment, the words and symbols in this example shall take precedence.

The above-mentioned FIG. 189 shows an example of boards arranged inside the slot machine 100 and the harnesses that connect them. For example, the main control board 300B on which the main control unit 300 is provided is connected to the relay board RB1 by the upstream harness HB1, and this relay board RB1 is further connected to the lever unit 135U (equipped with the start lever 135), the stop button unit 136U (equipped with the stop buttons 137-139), the bet button unit 132U (equipped with the bet buttons 130, 132, and the settlement button 134), the selector unit, and the door sensor by the downstream harnesses HA1-HA5.

The relay board RB1 is equipped with an IC for determining the status of each device connected by the downstream harnesses HA1 to HA5, and the status of each device determined by this IC is transmitted to the main control board 300B.

FIG. 282 is a diagram showing an example of the flow of operations when an abnormality occurs while no game is being played.

Fig. 282 shows a state in which no game is being executed (demonstration is being displayed), various harnesses are connected normally, each operating means is not operated, and the reels are in a stopped state. It is shown. Furthermore, a demonstration display is being executed on the effect image display device 157 (display means), normal BGM is being output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the various lamps 420 are in a normal light emitting mode. Further, the door sensor monitor LED provided on the board of the main control unit 300 is in a first mode (lighting or extinguishing, a mode different from the second mode described below). This door sensor monitor LED becomes a second mode when the door sensor detects an open state, and is provided to check the state of the front door 102. Note that the door sensor monitor LED is not limited to the board of the main control section 300, but may be provided, for example, on a relay board between the door sensor and the main control section.

Now, suppose that the downstream harness HA5 connecting the door sensor and the relay board RB1 is broken. FIG. 282 shows that the door sensor and the relay board RB1 are not connected (disconnected). The relay board RB1 cannot grasp the state of the door sensor due to the disconnection of the downstream harness HA5. In this case, in this embodiment, the same information as when the door sensor detects an open state is sent to the main control unit 300. In FIG. 282, the door sensor detects a closed state, but the performance image display device 157 (display means) is executing a door open error display, a door open error sound is output from the speakers 272 and 277, and various lamps 420 are in a door open error light emission mode. In addition, the door sensor monitor LED provided on the board of the main control unit 300 is in the second mode. In this configuration, even though the front door 102 is closed, an alarm is issued to indicate that the front door 102 is open, allowing the driver to know that some abnormality has occurred in the mechanism of the front door 102, and may allow the driver to notice an abnormality in the downstream harness HA5.

FIG. 283 is a diagram showing an example of the flow of operations when an abnormality occurs while no game is being played.

Similar to FIG. 282, FIG. 283 shows that the game is not being played (demonstration is being displayed).

Now, suppose that the upstream harness HB1 connecting the relay board RB1 and the main control board 300B is disconnected. Figure 283 shows that the relay board RB1 and the main control board 300B are not connected (disconnected). The relay board RB1 knows the status of each device connected by the downstream harnesses HA1 to HA5, but since the upstream harness HB1 is disconnected, it cannot transmit the status of each device to the main control board 300B. In this case, in this embodiment, no new information is transmitted from the relay board RB1, so no operation is performed and no error notification is executed. Figure 283 shows that no change occurs even if the relay board RB1 and the main control board 300B are not connected (disconnected). Note that Figure 283 shows an example during demo display, but if the upstream harness HB1 is disconnected during a period other than when the power is turned on (for example, in a betting state or during play (reels are spinning)), no operation is performed as described above.

Note that if the power is turned on while the upstream harness HB1 is disconnected, the main control unit 300 recognizes this disconnection state through the power-on processing and notifies the board connection error. In FIG. 283, when the power is turned off once and then turned on again with the upstream harness HB1 disconnected, a board connection error display is executed on the effect image display device 157 (display means), and the speakers 272, 277 It is shown that a board connection error sound is outputted from , and the various lamps 420 are in a board connection error light emitting mode.

In the above configuration, since various operations cannot be accepted due to the upstream harness HB1 being disconnected, it is possible to know that some kind of abnormality has occurred. Then, depending on whether a board connection error is reported when the power is turned on again, the location where the abnormality has occurred may be identified.

[Technical idea corresponding to the embodiment when an abnormality occurs in the connection between the boards]
The technical ideas described in the description of Figures 282 to 283 will be described below with reference to the corresponding configurations.

In the above explanation,
Notification means (for example, effect image display device 157),
door sensor and
A first board (for example, main control board 300B),
a second board (for example, relay board RB1);
A game machine comprising:
The first board is electrically connected to the second board by a first harness (for example, upstream harness HB1),
The second board is electrically connected to the door sensor by a second harness (for example, downstream harness HA5),
The notification means is a means capable of executing a predetermined notification (for example, a door opening error) when the detection state of the door sensor changes from a closed detection state to an open detection state,
The notification means is a means that can execute the predetermined notification even when the second harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state (for example, see FIG. 282);
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, a game store clerk may notice that there is an abnormality in the second harness.

Further, the game machine described above,
When the detection state of the door sensor is the closed detection state and the second harness changes from the connected state to the disconnected state, the predetermined notification is executed (for example, see FIG. 282);
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this type of gaming machine, the door is closed, which may allow the gaming store staff to notice that there is an abnormality in the second harness.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When the second harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state, the same signal as that when the detection state of the door sensor changes from the closed detection state to the open detection state is output from the second board to the first board (for example, see the description, "In this case, in this embodiment, the same information as that when the door sensor detects the open state is transmitted to the main control unit 300.").
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

At this gaming machine, an arcade attendant may be able to notice that there is an abnormality in the second harness.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
a monitor LED (e.g., a monitor LED for a door sensor) that becomes a predetermined state (e.g., the second state in FIG. 282 ) when the detection state of the door sensor changes from the closed detection state to the open detection state;
The monitor LED is an LED that is in the predetermined state when the second harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state (for example, see FIG. 282 ).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The notification means is a means for executing the predetermined notification regardless of the connection state of the first harness (for example, the connection state of the upstream harness HB1 is unrelated to the door error notification),
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this gaming machine, it may be possible to notice whether there is an abnormality in the first harness or the second harness.

Also, in the above explanation,
Notification means (for example, effect image display device 157),
door sensor and
A first board (for example, main control board 300B),
a second board (for example, relay board RB1);
A game machine comprising:
The first board is electrically connected to the second board by a first harness (for example, upstream harness HB1),
The second board is electrically connected to the door sensor by a second harness (for example, downstream harness HA5),
The notification means is a means capable of executing a predetermined notification (for example, a door opening error) when the detection state of the door sensor changes from a closed detection state to an open detection state,
The notification means is a means that can execute the predetermined notification even when the second harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state (for example, see FIG. 282),
The notification means is a means that can issue a notification different from the predetermined notification (for example, board connection error) when the first harness is in a disconnected state when the power is turned on (for example, see FIG. 283). ,
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, a game store clerk may notice that there is an abnormality in the second harness. Further, the game store clerk may notice that there is an abnormality in the first harness.

Further, the game machine described above,
When the detection state of the door sensor is the closed detection state and the second harness changes from the connected state to the disconnected state, the predetermined notification is executed (for example, see FIG. 282);
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, the game store clerk may notice that there is an abnormality in the second harness because the door is in a closed state.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When the second harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state, the same signal as that when the detection state of the door sensor changes from the closed detection state to the open detection state is output from the second board to the first board (for example, see the description, "In this case, in this embodiment, the same information as that when the door sensor detects the open state is transmitted to the main control unit 300.").
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

At this gaming machine, an arcade attendant may be able to notice that there is an abnormality in the second harness.

Further, the game machine described above,
A monitor LED (for example, a door sensor monitor LED) that assumes a predetermined mode (for example, the second mode in FIG. 282) when the detection state of the door sensor changes from the closed detection state to the open detection state. ,
The monitor LED is an LED that assumes the predetermined mode when the second harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state (for example, see FIG. 282);
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The notification means is a means for executing the predetermined notification regardless of the connection state of the first harness (for example, the connection state of the upstream harness HB1 is unrelated to the door error notification);
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, it may be noticed that there is an abnormality in either the first harness or the second harness.

<Configurations with unused screw holes>
Next, an example of the configuration of the board of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to Figures 284 and 285. In the following description, the same reference numerals will be used for the configurations already described in other embodiments (e.g., Figures 17 to 32), and the description will be omitted. In addition, for configurations that contradict the following description and the previous embodiment, the words and reference numerals of this example will take precedence.

FIG. 284 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a control board 500B corresponding to the second sub-control unit 500 of the slot machine 100. This control board 500B has a configuration in which a second board CB2 is provided over a part of the first board CB1. FIG. 285 is a diagram showing the first substrate CB1. In FIG. 285, the region where the second substrate CB2 overlaps is indicated by a dotted line.

The control board 500B is provided with components CM1 to CM14 that constitute the board. Of these, components CM1 to CM13 are provided on the first board CB1, and component CM14 is provided on the second board CB2. Note that component CM1 is a CPU, component CM13 is a VDP, components CM12 and CM14 are ROMs, components CM8 and CM11 are ICs, components CM2 and CM9 are resistors, components CM7 and CM10 are capacitors, and components CM3 to CM6 are LEDs. Of these, components CM5 to CM9 are provided at positions where they are no longer visible due to the second board CB2.

In addition to the above-mentioned components CM to CM13, the first board CB1 is provided with connectors CN1 and CN2, one of which, connector CN2, is used to connect to the second board CB2. The second board CB2 has screw holes SH1 to SH4 formed at its four corners, two of which are fixed to the first board CB1 with screws and spacers. Figure 284 shows that the second board CB2, which is connected to the first board CB1 with the connector CN2, is screwed in place at two screw holes SH1 and SH2. Note that a spacer is used to ensure a distance between the first board CB1 and the second board CB2.

Of the screw holes SH1 to SH4 formed in the second board CB2, two screw holes SH3 and SH4 are unused screw holes that are not used to fasten the first board CB1, and a part of the first board CB1 can be seen from these screw holes. In Figures 284 and 285, the range VA that can be seen from the screw hole SH3 is shown by a dotted line. For the components CM1, CM2, CM4 to CM6 in this range VA, it can be confirmed from the screw hole SH3 whether there is any tampering. In particular, it is possible to confirm the components CM5 and CM6 below the second board CB2, even though they are difficult to see due to the second board CB2. Note that this is not limited to components, and the markings on the board can also be confirmed in the same way.

In the slot machine 100, the board may be housed in a case to prevent fraud. Although these cases are made of materials that allow the inside to be seen (for example, transparent materials), it may be difficult to see the inside due to stickers or management information written on the case. For example, in FIGS. 284 and 285, if a sticker affixed to the case covers the area NA, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the state of the area NA. If an unused screw hole is intentionally provided as described above, an area that is difficult to see due to some reason can be seen from a different angle, and it is possible to check whether there is any fraud. In the example of FIG. 285, components CM1, CM2, and CM4 in area NA can be confirmed through screw holes SH3.

The first board CB1 also has unused screw holes SH5 and SH6. The presence of these unused screw holes makes it difficult to notice that the unused screw holes SH3 and SH4 on the second board CB2 are being used to verify components. In other words, it makes it difficult for a would-be tamperer to be wary of the unused screw holes SH3 and SH4 on the second board CB2.

[Technical idea corresponding to the embodiment when there is an unused screw hole]
The technical ideas described in the explanations of FIGS. 284 and 285 will be described below with reference to the corresponding configurations.

In the above explanation,
a first substrate (for example, first substrate CB1);
a second substrate (e.g., second substrate CB2) disposed at a position covering a portion of the first substrate;
A game machine comprising:
The second substrate has a plurality of screw holes (for example, screw holes SH1 to SH4),
The second substrate is fixed to the first substrate using a first screw hole (for example, screw holes SH1, SH2) among the plurality of screw holes,
A second screw hole (for example, screw hole SH3, SH4) among the plurality of screw holes is in an unused state;
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this gaming machine, the gaming store staff can check the components and displays of the first board located below the second board through the second screw hole.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
Among the components or indications arranged on the first board, a part of those located under the second board (e.g., components CM5 and CM6) is visible through the second screw hole.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the components and displays underneath the second board can be seen through the second screw hole.

Further, the game machine described above,
Among the parts or displays arranged on the first board, some of the parts (for example, parts CM1, CM2, CM4) that are not located under the second board are visually recognized through the second screw hole. It is possible,
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this gaming machine, it may be possible to check components or displays that are not under the second board through the second screw hole.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first substrate and the second substrate are arranged inside a transparent case,
The case has an area where the interior is visible and an area where the interior is not visible (for example, an area covered with a seal),
Among the parts or displays arranged on the first board, some of the parts or displays that are not located under the second board and are directly under the invisible area (for example, in the area NA) a certain component CM1, CM2, CM4) is visible from the visible area through the second screw hole;
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this gaming machine, areas that are not visible due to the case may be visible through the second screw hole.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
the first substrate has an unused screw hole at a position not covered by the second substrate;
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine makes it less likely that players will feel wary of the second screw hole.

The game machine according to the present invention can be applied to a game machine represented by a pinball game machine (pachinko machine), a reel game machine (slot machine), an enclosed game machine, or a medalless slot machine. can.

100 slot machine 110-112 reel 113 pattern display window 130-132 bet button 135 start lever 137-139 stop button 157 liquid crystal display device

Claims (1)

The door body and
The main body and
a door locking mechanism that changes from an unlocked state to a locked state when a locking part and a locked part are locked;
a door sensor that detects the open/closed state of the door body;
A game machine comprising:
The door lock mechanism has a housing section that can accommodate the locking section,
A certain metal piece may be inserted into a slit-shaped space formed by the locking portion in the unlocked state and the inner wall of the housing portion to a predetermined state,
In the predetermined state, even if an attempt is made to close the door body, the certain metal piece comes into contact with the locked part before the locking part and the locked state is not achieved, so that the door body is not in the open state. is maintained,
In the predetermined state, the door sensor does not detect a closed state of the door body,
The slit-shaped space that can be brought into the predetermined state is formed on one of the left and right surfaces of the locking portion,
The part of the locked part that the locking part contacts is different from the part of the locked part that the certain metal piece comes into contact with,
The certain metal piece is a setting key, a game medal, or a 500 yen coin,
A game machine characterized by:

Images